Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide

1985-2009 Nemetschek N.A., Incorporated. All Rights

Reserved.
Nemetschek N.A., Inc., hereafter referred to as NNA, and
its licensors retain all ownership rights to the MiniCAD
Vectorworks computer program and all other computer
programs as well as documentation offered by NNA. Use
of NNA software is governed by the license agreement
accompanying your original media. The source code for
such software is a confidential trade secret of NNA. You
may not attempt to decipher, decompile, develop or
otherwise reverse engineer NNA software. Information
necessary to achieve interoperability with this software
may be furnished upon request.

Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide

This manual, as well as the software described in it, is
furnished under license and may only be used or copied
in accordance with the terms of such license. The
information in this manual is furnished for informational
use only, is subject to change without notice, and should
not be construed as a commitment by NNA. NNA
assumes no responsibility or liability for any errors or
inaccuracies that may appear in this manual.
Except as permitted by such license, no part of this
publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system, or transmitted, in any form or by any means,
electronic, mechanical, recording, or otherwise, without
the express prior written permission of NNA.
Existing artwork or images that you may desire to scan or
copy may be protected under copyright law. The
unauthorized incorporation of such artwork into your
work may be a violation of the rights of the author or
illustrator. Please be sure to obtain any permission
required from such authors.
Vectorworks and MiniCAD are registered trademarks of
NNA. Renderworks, VectorScript, SmartCursor, and the
Design and Drafting Toolkit are trademarks of NNA.
The following are copyrights or trademarks of their
respective companies or organizations:
QuickDraw 3D, QuickTime, Quartz 2D, and Macintosh
are registered trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of the
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other
countries.

SpaceNavigator is a trademark of 3Dconnexion.

OpenEXR is a trademark of Lucasfilm, Ltd.
ACIS and SAT are registered trademarks of Spatial
Corporation.
Piranesi is a trademark of Informatix Software
International, Ltd.
The Forbo flooring textures are based on textures
supplied by Forbo Holding S.A.
All other brand or product names are trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective companies or
organizations.
The shader appendix contains content, copyright
1990-2001, and 2002-2009 by LightWork Design Limited.
All rights reserved. Reprinted with the permission of
LightWork Design Limited.
The RenderWorks Camera tool was developed by Julian
Carr, OzCAD, Sydney, Australia.
The Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide was written
and illustrated by Alexandra Duffy, Teresa Heaps, and
Susan Collins.
Special thanks to Wes Gardner and Eric Gilbey whose
drawings were used as the basis for a variety of
illustrations.
Special thanks to Riccardo Martire for his MasterWorks
contest file submission, which was used as the basis for a
variety of illustrations.
Evanston Green Townhomes file used as the basis for
illustrations 2008 Nathan Kipnis Architects, Inc.
HDRI background image in Chapter 22 is a copyright of
Paul Debevec.
For Defense Agencies: Restricted Rights Legend. Use,
reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set
forth in subparagraph (c)(1)(ii) of the Rights of Technical
Data and Computer Software clause at 252.227-7013.
For civilian agencies: Restricted Rights Legend. Use,
reproduction, or disclosure is subject to restrictions set
forth in subparagraphs (a) through (d) of the commercial
Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at 52.227-19.
Unpublished rights reserved under the copyright laws of
the United States. The contractor/manufacturer is
Nemetschek N.A., Incorporated, 7150 Riverwood Drive,
Columbia, MD, 21046, USA.

Adobe, Adobe PDF Library, Adobe AIR, and the Adobe

logo are trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated.

Registration and Updates

Parasolid is a registered trademark of Siemens Product

Lifecycle Management Software Inc.

The Vectorworks Fundamentals disks are warranted

subject to the conditions of the License Agreement for a

period of six (6) months from the date of purchase by the

end user. A completed Registration Card must be
returned to NNA to officially register your copy of
Vectorworks Fundamentals.
Only registered users are entitled to technical support,
the NNA newsletter, maintenance releases, and reduced
cost upgrades.
Defective master disks are replaced free of charge to the
end user for six (6) months after purchase. Thereafter,
master disks will be replaced for a nominal service fee set
by NNA.
NNA will make available from time to time upgrades to
the purchased program for nominal charges. Such
upgrades, along with the original master copy of the
program, shall be considered one program, subject in its
entirety to the License Agreement.

Vectorworks License Agreement

The license agreement binding the use of this software
can be found in the Vectorworks ReleaseNotes directory
or by clicking License in the About Vectorworks dialog
box.

Table of Contents
Preface ........................................................................................................................................................xi
Installing Vectorworks Products.............................................................................................................................. xi
Updating Vectorworks Products............................................................................................................................. xii
New Features.........................................................................................................................................................xiii
Learning Vectorworks ...........................................................................................................................................xxii
Technical Support ................................................................................................................................................ xxv

1 Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................1
Understanding Vectorworks.....................................................................................................................................1
Creating a New File .................................................................................................................................................4
Opening a File .........................................................................................................................................................4
Using Finder Quick Look (Macintosh OS X 10.5+ Only)..........................................................................................6
Migrating from Previous Versions ............................................................................................................................8
Closing a File ...........................................................................................................................................................8
Saving a File ............................................................................................................................................................8
Reverting to the Last Saved Version .....................................................................................................................10
Converting Previous Version Files.........................................................................................................................10
Exiting Vectorworks ...............................................................................................................................................15
Vectorworks Fundamentals Workspace ................................................................................................................15
The View Bar .........................................................................................................................................................18
Palettes and Tool Sets...........................................................................................................................................20
Palette Layout Options...........................................................................................................................................21
List Box Functionality .............................................................................................................................................24
Additional Key Functionality...................................................................................................................................25
Screen Tips............................................................................................................................................................26
Drawing Techniques ..............................................................................................................................................27
Moving Around.......................................................................................................................................................28
Selecting Objects ...................................................................................................................................................33

2 Getting Started ........................................................................................................................................47

Setting Vectorworks Preferences...........................................................................................................................47

ii

| Table of Contents
Setting Document Preferences ..............................................................................................................................58
Setting Up the Drawing ..........................................................................................................................................62
Setting Default Object Attributes............................................................................................................................75
Creating Templates................................................................................................................................................89
Printing...................................................................................................................................................................90
Using Drawing Tablets...........................................................................................................................................95

3 Drawing Structure ...................................................................................................................................97

Organizing the Drawing .........................................................................................................................................97
Managing Layers .................................................................................................................................................100
Managing Classes ...............................................................................................................................................112
Setting Class and Design Layer Options .............................................................................................................120
Managing Viewports ............................................................................................................................................120
Managing Saved Views .......................................................................................................................................121
Setting Visibilities .................................................................................................................................................125
Workgroup Referencing .......................................................................................................................................128

4 Drawing with Snapping and Constraints ............................................................................................139

Setting Snapping Parameters ..............................................................................................................................139
Drawing with Snapping ........................................................................................................................................152
SmartCursor Cues ...............................................................................................................................................159
Parametric Constraints ........................................................................................................................................162

5 Using Vectorworks Resources.............................................................................................................173

Libraries ...............................................................................................................................................................173
Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources......................................................................173
Using the Resource Browser ...............................................................................................................................175
Understanding Symbols.......................................................................................................................................187
Creating New Symbols ........................................................................................................................................189
Inserting Symbols ................................................................................................................................................193
Editing Symbols ...................................................................................................................................................198

Table of Contents |

iii

Record Formats ...................................................................................................................................................205

Global Symbol Commands ..................................................................................................................................212

6 Creating 2D Objects ..............................................................................................................................219

Planar Modes of 2D Objects ................................................................................................................................219
Using the 2D Data Bar .........................................................................................................................................220
Inserting Text .......................................................................................................................................................223
Modifying Text......................................................................................................................................................227
Inserting Callouts .................................................................................................................................................236
Creating Lines......................................................................................................................................................240
Creating Arcs .......................................................................................................................................................244
Creating Quarter Arcs ..........................................................................................................................................249
Creating Rectangles ............................................................................................................................................249
Creating Polylines ................................................................................................................................................253
Creating Circles ...................................................................................................................................................260
Creating Ovals .....................................................................................................................................................263
Creating 2D Polygons ..........................................................................................................................................264
Creating 2D Loci ..................................................................................................................................................271

7 Applying Object Attributes ...................................................................................................................273

The Attributes Palette ..........................................................................................................................................273
Hatch Attributes ...................................................................................................................................................281
Gradient Attributes ...............................................................................................................................................287
Image Attributes...................................................................................................................................................292
Editing Hatch, Gradient, and Image Fills .............................................................................................................295

8 Editing 2D Objects ................................................................................................................................301

Editing Object Information....................................................................................................................................301
Reshaping Objects...............................................................................................................................................306
Offsetting Objects ................................................................................................................................................312
Aligning and Distributing 2D Objects ...................................................................................................................315
Trimming and Clipping Objects............................................................................................................................316

iv

| Table of Contents
Resizing Objects ..................................................................................................................................................318
Shearing Objects .................................................................................................................................................320
Joining Objects ....................................................................................................................................................320
Splitting Objects and NURBS Surfaces ...............................................................................................................322
Creating Fillets and Chamfers .............................................................................................................................326
Editing Object Surfaces .......................................................................................................................................330
Engineering Properties ........................................................................................................................................333
Drafting Aids ........................................................................................................................................................334

9 Creating 3D Objects ..............................................................................................................................337

Using the 3D Data Bar .........................................................................................................................................337
Creating 3D Polygons ..........................................................................................................................................339
Creating Cylinders ...............................................................................................................................................341
Creating Spheres .................................................................................................................................................343
Creating Hemispheres .........................................................................................................................................344
Creating Cones ....................................................................................................................................................345
Creating NURBS Curves, Circles, and Arcs ........................................................................................................347
Creating 3D Loci ..................................................................................................................................................350
Extruding Objects.................................................................................................................................................351
Sweeping Objects ................................................................................................................................................355

10 Advanced 3D Modeling.......................................................................................................................357
3D Power Pack Fundamentals ............................................................................................................................357
NURBS Surfaces .................................................................................................................................................361
Extracting Geometry ............................................................................................................................................379
NURBS Surface-curve Interaction .......................................................................................................................381
Creating Helix-Spirals ..........................................................................................................................................391
Creating Contours................................................................................................................................................392
Solids Operations.................................................................................................................................................393
Converting to Generic Solids ...............................................................................................................................402

Table of Contents |

11 Editing 3D Objects ..............................................................................................................................403

Obtaining Volumetric Properties ..........................................................................................................................403
Reshaping 3D Objects .........................................................................................................................................403
Aligning and Distributing 3D Objects ...................................................................................................................406
Editing 3D Object Surfaces..................................................................................................................................407

12 Common Functions and Utilities .......................................................................................................411

Undoing and Redoing Actions .............................................................................................................................411
Moving Objects ....................................................................................................................................................411
Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects ................................................................................................................416
Removing Objects................................................................................................................................................418
Duplicating Objects ..............................................................................................................................................421
Smoothing Objects...............................................................................................................................................428
Combining and Connecting Objects ....................................................................................................................429
Composing and Decomposing Objects and Surfaces .........................................................................................434
Locking and Unlocking Objects............................................................................................................................435
Aligning Objects to Grid .......................................................................................................................................436
Rotating Objects ..................................................................................................................................................436
Mirroring Objects..................................................................................................................................................441
Converting Objects ..............................................................................................................................................443
Grouping Objects .................................................................................................................................................445
Object Editing Mode.............................................................................................................................................446
Compressing Images ...........................................................................................................................................447
Tracing Bitmaps ...................................................................................................................................................448

13 Viewing and Rendering.......................................................................................................................449

Using Standard Views..........................................................................................................................................449
Projection .............................................................................................................................................................451
Perspective ..........................................................................................................................................................452
Simulating Movement ..........................................................................................................................................452
Setting a 3D View ................................................................................................................................................459

vi

| Table of Contents
Setting a Camera View in Renderworks ..............................................................................................................460
Fit to Objects........................................................................................................................................................464
Fit to Page Area ...................................................................................................................................................465
Viewing History ....................................................................................................................................................466
Adding Light .........................................................................................................................................................466
Rendering with Vectorworks ................................................................................................................................477

14 Dimensioning and Annotating ...........................................................................................................485

Dimensioning .......................................................................................................................................................485
Marking 2D Object Centers..................................................................................................................................500
Angular Dimensioning..........................................................................................................................................501
Arc Length Dimensioning.....................................................................................................................................504
Converting Objects to Dimensions.......................................................................................................................505
Modifying Dimensions..........................................................................................................................................505
Measuring Distance .............................................................................................................................................510
Adding a Sheet Border.........................................................................................................................................511
Using Notation Objects ........................................................................................................................................520

15 Creating Building Elements ...............................................................................................................529

Creating Structural Shapes..................................................................................................................................529
Creating Floors ....................................................................................................................................................541
Creating Walls......................................................................................................................................................541
Editing Walls ........................................................................................................................................................557
Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall .......................................................................................................565
Creating Columns ................................................................................................................................................576
Creating Simple Stairs .........................................................................................................................................577
Creating Roof Faces ............................................................................................................................................578
Creating Roof Objects..........................................................................................................................................582
Editing Roof Objects ............................................................................................................................................584

Table of Contents |

vii

16 Importing and Exporting Files ...........................................................................................................597

Importing Files .....................................................................................................................................................597
Exporting Files .....................................................................................................................................................599
DXF and DWG File Formats ................................................................................................................................607
DXF/DWG File Export..........................................................................................................................................610
DXF/DWG File Import ..........................................................................................................................................621

17 Using Working Planes.........................................................................................................................635

Understanding the Working Plane .......................................................................................................................635
Setting the Working Plane Location.....................................................................................................................637
Manipulating the Working Plane ..........................................................................................................................639
The Working Planes Palette ................................................................................................................................642
Aligning Objects to the Working Plane.................................................................................................................644

18 Worksheets ..........................................................................................................................................647
Creating Worksheets ...........................................................................................................................................647
Using Worksheets................................................................................................................................................651
Entering Data in Spreadsheet Cells.....................................................................................................................665
Entering Data in Database Rows.........................................................................................................................670
Worksheet Functions ...........................................................................................................................................674
Importing Worksheets ..........................................................................................................................................681
Exporting Worksheets..........................................................................................................................................682
Worksheets as Graphic Objects ..........................................................................................................................683

19 Using Scripts .......................................................................................................................................685

Creating Custom Selection Scripts ......................................................................................................................685
Creating Custom Tool/Attribute Scripts................................................................................................................686
Creating VectorScripts .........................................................................................................................................688
Running VectorScripts .........................................................................................................................................688
Managing VectorScripts.......................................................................................................................................689
Managing Script Palettes .....................................................................................................................................691

viii

| Table of Contents

20 Presenting Vectorworks Drawings ....................................................................................................693

Animating Drawings with QuickTime ...................................................................................................................693
Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports ...............................................................................................702
Cutting Sections...................................................................................................................................................722
Layer Linking........................................................................................................................................................723

21 Creating and Mapping Textures.........................................................................................................729

Renderworks Commands and Tools....................................................................................................................729
Textures and Shaders..........................................................................................................................................730
Creating Textures ................................................................................................................................................731
Editing Textures and Shaders..............................................................................................................................745
Creating Image Prop Objects...............................................................................................................................749
Adding 3D Plants .................................................................................................................................................751
Creating Layer Backgrounds ...............................................................................................................................752
Applying and Mapping Textures ..........................................................................................................................758
Applying Textures to Symbols, Walls, and Roofs ................................................................................................773
Applying Renderworks Backgrounds ...................................................................................................................778

22 Rendering with Renderworks.............................................................................................................781

Advanced Renderworks Lighting .........................................................................................................................781
Renderworks Features for OpenGL.....................................................................................................................788
Preparing to Render.............................................................................................................................................789
Rendering the Entire Drawing..............................................................................................................................789
Rendering a Selected Area..................................................................................................................................807
Batch Rendering ..................................................................................................................................................809
Managing Lights and Cameras ............................................................................................................................811
Exporting a Rendered Drawing............................................................................................................................814

A Using the Workspace Editor ................................................................................................................821

Creating or Editing a Workspace .........................................................................................................................821
Updating Custom Workspaces and Plug-in Objects ............................................................................................830

Table of Contents |

ix

B Standards and Resources....................................................................................................................833

Vectorworks and Renderworks Libraries .............................................................................................................833
Vectorworks Circle/Arc Conventions....................................................................................................................835
Survey Bearings...................................................................................................................................................835
Architectural Scale ...............................................................................................................................................835
Correlated Color Temperature .............................................................................................................................836

C Renderworks Shader Definitions ........................................................................................................839

Shader Types.......................................................................................................................................................839
Shader Properties ................................................................................................................................................843
Frequently Asked Questions about Radiosity ......................................................................................................851

IX Index......................................................................................................................................................855

| Table of Contents

Preface
Welcome to Vectorworks Fundamentalsa CAD program that includes all the 2D and 3D tools and technology you
need in one easy-to-use, cost-effective package. In addition to precision drafting, it provides powerful tools for 3D
modeling that can be used to create, present, and even manufacture designs. Built-in database and worksheet
capabilities help track costs and materials. A host of import and export formats makes it easy to share files.
Vectorworks Fundamentals also includes extensive symbol libraries, default drawing resources, and a built-in
scripting environment that can be used to automate routine tasks.

Installing Vectorworks Products

The Vectorworks installation program lists the installation system requirements, any known installation issues, and
any information that did not make it into the documentation. To ensure a smooth installation, confirm that system
requirements are met and take note of any issues or incompatibilities prior to installing Vectorworks.
The installation program can install Vectorworks Designer, Renderworks, Architect, Landmark, Spotlight, Machine
Design, and Fundamentals in any combination. The program determines which products to install based on the serial
number.
Your software license allows for one copy to be made for backup purposes. Vectorworks should be backed up on a
regular basis. These backups are invaluable in restoring user-customized settings that may be otherwise lost by either
a computer failure or reinstallation of Vectorworks.

Adding and Removing Serial Numbers

During installation you are typically required to enter the serial number, which is provided with the Vectorworks
software. If you are not prompted to enter the serial number during installation, you must enter it the first time the
application is accessed.
To add serial number(s):
1. Open the Vectorworks application.
The Serial Numbers dialog box opens the first time the application is accessed. Thereafter, it is accessed by
clicking Serial Numbers from the Session tab of Vectorworks preferences.

2. Click Add.
The Add New Serial Number dialog box opens.
3. Enter the serial number exactly as it appears on the label. The serial number is case sensitive. The letters o and i
are not used in serial numbers; enter zero or one instead.
4. Click Add.

xii

| Preface
The list of Enabled Products in the Serial Numbers dialog box displays all products enabled by this serial
number. For security, serial numbers that begin with the letter A are partially hidden wherever they display in
Vectorworks.

5. Repeat steps 2 to 4 to enter additional serial numbers for additional licenses, as necessary.
6. When all serial numbers have been entered, click Done.
To remove serial number(s):
1. Click Serial Numbers from the Session tab of Vectorworks preferences.
The Serial Numbers dialog box opens.
2. Select a serial number to remove, and then click Remove.
3. When all desired serial numbers have been removed, click Done.

Viewing the Vectorworks License Agreement

The Vectorworks license agreement can be viewed at any time.
To view the license agreement:
1. On Windows, select Help > About Vectorworks, or on Macintosh select Vectorworks > About Vectorworks.
2. Click License to display the license agreement text.
3. Click OK twice to return to the Vectorworks application.

Network Protection
When running multiple copies of Vectorworks across the network, serial numbers are checked when the program is
launched, and also periodically throughout the session.
If the same serial number is found to be in use, the All Serial Numbers In Use dialog box opens. From this dialog box,
clicking User Information displays the User Name, if given, and the IP address of the other location. Clicking Edit
Numbers allows a new serial number to be entered and an existing one to be deleted. Once the situation is resolved,
click Retry Numbers to regain access to Vectorworks. If the serial number is still in use after three attempts,
Vectorworks automatically shuts down.

Updating Vectorworks Products

Vectorworks software updates are called Service Packs, and are considered maintenance releases. There are several
ways to obtain Vectorworks software updates:
Click Check for Updates from Help > About Vectorworks. Alternatively, select Help > Check for Updates
(Windows) or Vectorworks > Check for Updates (Macintosh).
A dialog box opens to indicate whether the software is up to date, or if an update is available. If an update is
available, click More Info to open a web browser to display and download available updates. If it is inconvenient
to update Vectorworks at this time, click Cancel.
Select to Automatically check for updates on a weekly or monthly basis from the Session tab of Vectorworks
preferences (see Session Preferences on page 50).
Updates are available for download at www.vectorworks.net/downloads

New Features |

xiii

New Features
This release includes many new features and significant enhancements to Vectorworks Fundamentals, Renderworks,
and the Fundamentals workspace, as described in the following sections.

New Vectorworks Fundamentals Features

The following table contains a list of new and improved features for this release, and indicates the section where the
functionality is documented.

Feature

Purpose

Location

Context-sensitive help

The Vectorworks help system has been

updated to reflect version 2010 functionality

Not applicable

Adobe AIR for online help

Vectorworks 2010 includes a completely new

help system which runs within Adobe AIR,
a browser-independent application. Along
with a new interface and improved search
functionality, the help system offers the
ability to save favorite links and RSS feeds, as
well as add comments.

The new help system is

documented in the Welcome
book of online help

Macintosh multiprocessing

All of the Parasolid-based functionality in

Vectorworks 2010 now takes advantage of
multiprocessing on the Macintosh

Not applicable

New Fundamentals workspace

The Standard workspace has been renamed

Fundamentals, to more accurately represent
the installed product with which it is
associated

Various locations

Name change for Constraints

palette

The Constraints palette has been renamed to

the Snapping palette. Any associated
snapping tools with a constraint name have
also been renamed.

Various locations

xiv

| Preface

Feature

Purpose

Location

Improvements to the Units

dialog box

Several improvements make the settings for

dimensions clearer:

Units on page 64

The Dimension Objects (Primary) tab was

removed, and the Dimension object
precision and Dimension rounding base
settings were moved to the general display
tab (now called General Display and
Dimensions).
The precision and rounding base values for
dimensions can now be linked to the
general display precision and rounding
base values.
If the Units setting is changed from one
metric unit to a different metric unit, the
precision values are automatically scaled
by the same ratio, to maintain the same
inherent precision the document had
before.
New display options for
fractional dimension text

The Units dialog box now has three options

for the display of all fractional dimensions

Selecting a Unit System on

page 64

Set origin improvements

To prevent the drawing origin from being

moved inadvertently, an alert now displays
when the Set Origin button is dragged into
the drawing area. The drag origin feature can
now be disabled, as well.

Set Origin on page 69

Dash style improvements

Up to 128 dash styles are now supported

(ten default styles are provided); each style
has a name, to make it easier to distinguish
similar styles.

Setting the Default Dash Styles

and Display Order on page 85,
Line Style Attributes on
page 276, and Arc Length
Dimensioning on page 504

Dash styles can now be edited from the

Line Style list on the Attributes palette, and
the list order can be modified as needed.
The new Convert Line to Dimension
command replaces the dimension line style
that was previously available on the Line
Style list.
Better default print resolution
for Quartz imaging on
Macintosh

When Quartz imaging is enabled on

Macintosh, the Application print resolution
on the Print dialog box now always defaults
to a minimum value of 300 DPI. Previously,
the default could be unexpectedly defaulted
to 72 DPI, which could cause undesirable
results.

Printing a File on page 92

New Features |

xv

Feature

Purpose

Location

Update viewports prior to

printing or export

Out-of-date viewports can be automatically

updated before printing or image export

Printing a File on page 92,

and Exporting an Image File
on page 602

Reset plug-in objects prior to

printing

Certain plug-in objects, such as data stamps,

which require refreshing before printing can
be automatically updated before printing or
export

Printing a File on page 92,

and Exporting an Image File
on page 602

Ignore priority of references

when updating

Previously, when the same resource existed in

multiple referenced files, the target file would
be updated according to the reference priority
in the References tab of the Organization
dialog box. This could cause the resource to
be updated from a different file than the one
it was originally referenced from. A new
option on the Reference Settings dialog box
controls whether referenced resources are
always updated from the original file, or
updated according to the reference priority.

Setting the Referencing

Options on page 129

Resource reference renaming

and breaking

Previously, when a referenced resource could

not be found during a reference update, the
only option was to break the reference. Now,
a dialog box automatically provides three
options for each missing item: break the
reference, replace the resource with a
different resource from the master file, or
delete the resource from the target file
altogether.

Updating References on
page 133

In-place editing of referenced

resources

Referenced resources, including symbol

definitions, can be edited within the target
file; changes are automatically exported to the
source file. The source file no longer has to be
open to edit source references.

Referencing Resources on
page 134

3D snapping and working

plane improvements

Interactive object creation and manipulation

is now possible with comprehensive 3D
snapping and an improved and more
accessible working plane interface

Drawing with Snapping and

Constraints on page 139 and
Using Working Planes on
page 635

Resource Browser thumbnail

label improvement

In the Resource Browsers Thumbnail view

mode, each resource now can display up to
five lines in its label, to make it easier to
distinguish between resources that share
similar names

Viewing Resources on
page 176

xvi

| Preface

Feature

Purpose

Location

Find resources within the

current document

The find feature in the Resource Browser now

can search for resources within the current
file, as well as in other files; in addition, the
Find Resources on Disk command was
renamed Find Resource

Finding Resources on
page 183

Prevent wall insertion for

symbols and plug-in objects

When created, symbols and plug-in objects

can now be set to never insert into walls;
previously, wall insertion could only be
controlled by turning the Wall Insertion mode
on and off for the active tool

Creating New Symbols on

page 189

Planar graphics

2D objects can now be associated with the

screen plane (as before) or with the layer
plane. As planar objects, they exist in 3D
space and maintain a geometric relationship
to the model.

Planar Modes of 2D Objects

on page 219, and various
locations

New Data bar menu options

that control the shortcut for
exiting the group editing mode

For certain types of objects, the Edit

command opens a special Edit window with a
colored border. New options on the Data bar
menu control whether the Edit window will
be exited when the Escape key is pressed
twice. Previously, pressing the Escape key
twice always exited the edit mode.

Data Bar Menu on page 221

New Data bar menu options

that control the position of the
floating Data bar

New options on the Data bar menu allow the

floating Data bar to display either above or
below the SmartCursor cues. Previously, the
floating Data bar always displayed below the
cursor, where it could be hidden by the users
hand during drafting with a tablet.

Data Bar Menu on page 221

Callout tool improvements

The Callout tool includes two new bubble

styles, and the leader radius can be set for arc
leader styles; a leader style of None can be
selected

Inserting Callouts on
page 236

Create arc by circumference

A new mode of the Arc tool creates arcs by

specifying the arc and, optionally, chord
length

Creating Arcs on page 244

Create rectangle by center/

corner

A new mode of the Rectangle tool creates

rectangles by specifying the rectangle center
and one corner

Creating a Rectangle by Center

and Corner on page 250

Create rectangle by side/

opposite corner

A new mode of the Rectangle tool creates

rectangles by specifying the center of one side
and an opposite corner

Creating a Rectangle by Side

Center and Opposite Corner
on page 250

Create circle by point/center

A new mode of the Circle tool creates circles

by points on its circumference and center

Creating Circles on page 260

New Features |

xvii

Feature

Purpose

Location

Create circle by tangent/center

A new mode of the Circle tool creates circles

based on a tangent line and a center

Creating Circles on page 260

Attribute mapping of
associative hatches

Associative hatches (which are applied to

objects through the Attributes palette) can
now be moved, rotated, and scaled with the
Attribute Mapping tool

Editing Hatch Fills on

page 295

2D Reshape tool marquee

modes

The 2D Reshape tool has three new marquee

modes available for selecting object vertices
for operations such as reshaping, moving,
and nudging

Reshaping Objects on
page 306

2D Reshape tool marquee

selection improvements

The 2D Reshape tool allows marquee

selection of objects within another object,
without selecting the boundary object

Reshaping Objects on
page 306

Selection support for object

modification tools

Additional objects can be selected for

modification after activating the Offset,
Move by Points, Rotate, and Mirror tools

Offsetting Objects on
page 312, Moving Objects by
Clicking on page 413,
Rotating Objects on page 436,
Mirroring Objects on
page 441, Moving Symbols in
Walls with the Move by Points
Tool on page 570

New option for the Chamfer

tool

The Chamfer by length option creates a

chamfer line of a specified length

Chamfer Tool on page 327

Select all edges for Chamfer

Edge and Fillet Edge tools

A new option automatically selects all edges

of the solid for the chamfer or fillet operation

Modifying Edges by
Chamfering on page 393 and
Reshaping Edges by Fillet on
page 395

Improved Reference Point

mode of the Move By Point
tool

The Reference Point mode can now work two

ways: the first click can either indicate the
object to be moved or the reference point from
which the object will be offset

Moving Objects with the

Reference Point Mode on
page 415, and Moving
Symbols in Walls with the
Reference Point Mode on
page 572

xviii | Preface
Feature

Purpose

Location

The Purge Unused Objects

command was renamed to
Purge and multiple
improvements were made

Drawing objects that are outside of the

page boundaries can now be purged.

Purging Items from a File on

page 419

Unused dash styles can now be purged.

Previously, a symbol resource that was
inserted as a plug-in object (a red
symbol) or as a group (a blue symbol)
was always removed by the purge function
along with regular unused symbol
resources (black symbols). These special
red and blue symbol resources now must
be specifically selected for purging.
Previously, special record formats that
stored plug-in object defaults could not be
purged. These special record formats can
now be specifically selected for purging.
A new preview option allows the
confirmation of selected items to be
purged.
The purge command can now be undone.

New mode for the Connect/

Combine tool connects
multiple objects

The Multiple Object Connect mode

designates the first selected object as a
boundary, and then trims or extends multiple
consecutively selected objects to join the
boundary

Combining and Connecting

Objects on page 429

Terminology changes related to

unified 3D environment

The term ground plane has been replaced

with the term active layer plane, and the
Set Layer Lighting Options command has
been renamed to the Set Lighting Options
command.

Various locations, and Setting

Lighting Options on page 466

Access to custom dimension

standards from the Object Info
palette and Tool bar

In addition to the document preferences, the

Custom Dimensions dialog box can now be
accessed from the Tool bar when any one of
the dimensioning tools in the Dims/Notes tool
set is selected, or from the Object Info palette
when an existing dimension object is selected

Using Custom Dimension

Standards on page 485

DCM integration

All of the parametric constraints now use the

D-Cubed 2D Dimensional Constraint
Manager (DCM), which is much more reliable
than the previous library. In addition,
associative dimensions (except for angular
dimensions) now have two-way editing;
when an associative dimension is moved or
resized, the associated object updates
automatically.

Associative Dimensioning on
page 490

New Features |

xix

Feature

Purpose

Location

Chain dimension text collision

control

A new preference on the Chain Dimension

Preferences dialog box enables collision
control, which automatically spaces text
blocks so that they do not overlap

Unconstrained Linear
Dimensioning on page 491,
and Constrained Linear
Dimensioning on page 494

Default dimension standard on

Tool bar

The default dimension standard for a

document can now be set from the Tool bar
for the following dimension tools:
Constrained Linear Dimension,
Unconstrained Linear Dimension, Angular
Dimension, Arc Length Dimension, Radial
Dimension, and Center Mark

Unconstrained Linear
Dimensioning on page 491,
Constrained Linear
Dimensioning on page 494,
Radial Dimensioning on
page 498, Marking 2D Object
Centers on page 500, Angular
Dimensioning on page 501

Arc Length Dimension tool

This new tool dimensions any portion of an

arc along its circumference

Arc Length Dimensioning on

page 504

Interactive dimension editing

The length of linear dimension objects can be

directly entered in the drawing area, either by
selecting the dimension text with the Text
tool, or by double-clicking the dimension
with the 2D Selection tool

Editing Dimensions with the

Mouse on page 506

Improved drag support for

dimension text

Dimension text can now be dragged to a new

location without moving the dimension line.
The text for an angular dimension can only be
moved along the curve of the dimension
itself; the text for other dimensions can be
moved in any direction.

Editing Dimensions with the

Mouse on page 506

Simultaneous editing of single

and chain dimensions in the
Object Info palette

When both single and chain dimensions are

selected, the Object Info palette now displays
all of the controls that are available for a chain
dimension

Editing Dimension Properties

on page 508

New segment position control

for editing the length of linear
dimensions

When a linear dimension is edited in either

the Object Info palette or the Properties dialog
box, a new control next to the Length field
specifies which segment of the dimension
(either endpoint, or the center point) will
remain fixed when the dimension is resized

Editing Dimension Properties

on page 508

Add Radius field to radial and

diametrical dimensions in the
Object Info palette

The length of radial and diametrical

dimensions can now be edited

Editing Dimension Properties

on page 508

Add section properties to

structural shapes

The Object Info palette now displays

calculated values for area, moment of inertia,
section modulus, and radius of gyration
about the centroidal X-X and Y-Y axes for all
structural shapes (for angles, the least radius
of gyration about the principal Z-Z axis is also
calculated and displayed)

Creating Structural Shapes

on page 529

xx

| Preface

Feature

Purpose

Location

New object properties

specification for structural
shapes

The object properties dialog box allows a

number of default values to be set prior to
creation of structural shapes; this includes
series and size for all objects, and also
includes drawing a center line, free height
lines, and placing a locus at the centroid of
applicable objects

Creating Structural Shapes

on page 529

Wall and component join

improvements

Wall improvements include the ability to

create wall joins such as Y-joins and
component joins with round walls, and to join
walls end to end. A component can be
designated as a core component, and when
walls are joined, components join
automatically also. Wall caps can use
component line attributes.

Joining Walls on page 561,

Automatically Joining Walls
on page 549, and Creating
Wall Components on page 550

Improved wall hole editing

mode

When editing wall hole components, it is now

easier to distinguish the edited symbol
geometry and the wall hole geometry from
the other objects in the drawing

Adding a 3D Wall Hole

Component to a Symbol
Definition on page 574

DXF/DWG import support for

128 dash styles

Imported dash styles are now named

according to the line types in the DXF/DWG
file. Also, existing Vectorworks dash styles
are no longer deleted to make room for
imported dash styles. If the total number of
existing and imported dash styles exceeds
128, the objects for which no dash style could
be created are imported with solid lines.

Not applicable

DXF/DWG improved table

import

Tables can now be properly imported to

Vectorworks as lines and text with their
proper attributes, including line style, color,
and text size

Not applicable

Improved DXF/DWG import of

AutoCAD scaled blocks

Scaled blocks are now imported as symbols,

instead of being imported as groups. If a
block is used with multiple scales, a different
symbol will be created for each scale.

Information Lost in
Translation on page 608

DXF/DWG batch export of

saved views

Saved views can now be exported

DXF/DWG Export Options

on page 614

DXF/DWG option to export

groups as anonymous blocks

A new option exports groups as anonymous

blocks; previously, groups were always
exported as named blocks

DXF/DWG Export Options

on page 614

Simplified DXF/DWG export of

sheet layers as 2D graphics

A new option exports sheet layer viewports

as 2D (flat) graphics in model space, each
sheet to a separate file; previously, sheet layer
viewports were always exported as paper
space layouts

DXF/DWG Export Options

on page 614

New Features |
Feature

Purpose

Location

Improved DWG/DXF import

support of referenced files

For DXF/DWG master files that have external

references (xrefs), new import options allow
more control over how the xrefs are handled.
The xrefs can be bound into the same
Vectorworks file as the master file, they can be
ignored, or they can be imported as separate
referenced Vectorworks files (either as design
layer viewports or as layer links).

Importing DXF/DWG Files

on page 623

User defined 2D or 3D view of

ADT objects for DXF/DWG
Import

New options control whether AEC objects

created with Autodesk Architectural Desktop
(such as walls, doors, and windows) are
imported in 2D or 3D view, regardless of the
view saved in the DXF/DWG file.

Importing DXF/DWG Files

on page 623

DXF/DWG import saved

settings

Custom import options can now be saved as a

set and recalled when needed

DXF/DWG Custom Import

Options on page 626

Create custom dimension

standards on DXF/DWG import

Dimension styles in the DXF/DWG file are

now imported as custom dimension
standards, which are applied to the imported
dimensions automatically

Objects Tab on page 631

Viewport edit crop

enhancement

When editing cropped viewports, a new

option displays the area outside of a viewport
crop either in wireframe or in gray

Cropping Sheet Layer

Viewports on page 714

OpenMP multithreading

Files that contain certain types of images,

transparencies, and textures are now drawn
much faster

Not applicable

Updated Architect sampler and

office equipment libraries

Object geometry has been updated for generic

architectural content and office equipment
and a larger variety of content is available

Vectorworks and
Renderworks Libraries on
page 833

xxi

New Renderworks Features

The following table contains a list of new and improved features for this release, and indicates the section where the
functionality is documented.

Feature

Purpose

Location

HDRI backgrounds, image fills,

and textures from LightWork
Design

New interior, exterior, and studio

backgrounds in both high and low
resolution formats are available, as well as
material images for image-based textures
and image fills

Vectorworks Fundamentals
and Renderworks Default
Resources on page 173

Improved wall hole textures

3D wall hole component geometry can

now be assigned a left and right texture
part, for improved display of wall hole
textures

Applying Renderworks
Textures to Wall Hole
Components on page 575

xxii

| Preface

Feature

Purpose

Location

3D plants

A new tool easily places high-quality

models of various plants from VBvisual.
The realistic plants do not require
excessive rendering time or file space.

Adding 3D Plants on
page 751

2D texture mapping
improvement

The Attribute Mapping tool now uses

snapping when editing texture mapping in
2D space. The mapping parameters can be
easily reset with a new button.

Direct Texture Mapping on

page 765

3D texture mapping
improvements

Enhanced 3D functionality of the

Attribute Mapping tool has eliminated the
Edit Mapping dialog box. Texture
mapping in 3D is much more intuitive.

Direct Texture Mapping on

page 765

Decal textures

Decals are masked, image-based textures

that can be layered over an existing base
texture. This is useful for creating labeling,
signage, and layered texture effects.

Creating Decal Textures on

page 767

New functionality related to

unified 3D environment
(Design Series required)

A new command, Set Renderworks

Background, has been added to specify
the Renderworks background resource to
apply to the current layer

Applying Renderworks
Backgrounds on page 778

Blur reflectivity shaders

Simple glass and mirror reflectivity

shaders have a new option to blur the
reflection; set the blur quality in the
Custom Renderworks Options or Custom
Radiosity Options dialog boxes

Reflectivity Shader Properties

on page 847 and Custom
Renderworks Options on
page 791

Learning Vectorworks
There are a number of ways to learn how to use Vectorworks, including both online help and PDFs, training CDs, and
both online and classroom training.

Users Guides
This guide is the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide. It is a comprehensive reference for all Vectorworks
users describing the core tools, commands, and features in the Vectorworks Fundamentals product. The guide
also describes the presentation capabilities of Renderworks, for users who purchased Renderworks.
The Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide describes the features in the Vectorworks Architect, Landmark,
Spotlight, Machine Design, and Designer products. It is designed for users who have purchased one or more
Design Series products.
The following table describes the conventions used in the guides. All instructions in the guides are based on
click-click drawing.

Convention

Meaning

(Macintosh)

Macintosh-specific instruction

Learning Vectorworks |

xxiii

Convention

Meaning

(Windows)

Windows-specific instruction

bold text

Indicates a specific button, command, class, or explicitly named item

blue indented text

Indicates a note, tip, or warning

click

Click the mouse button and release. The left button is always implied in Windows.

double-click

Click two times quickly on the mouse button and release

right-click

Click with the right mouse button and release; on the Macintosh, hold down the Ctrl key and
click the mouse

Key and mouse

combination, as in
Shift-click

Hold down the command key(s) and click; in this example, hold down the Shift key and click

Key combination,
as in Alt+Shift+D

Hold down the command key(s) and press the specified letter or number key; in this
example, hold down both the Alt and Shift keys, and press the D key

click-click

Click the mouse button once and release. Move the cursor to the desired location and click
again. This is the default drawing preference for Vectorworks at installation.

click-drag

Click once with the mouse button and do not release. Drag (move) the cursor to a desired
location and then release.

select

Click on an object with the mouse, or click-drag over an object with marquee selection, to
highlight it. The object is highlighted, and/or handles display on the object to indicate that
it is currently active. This term also refers to executing menu commands.

Context menu

A menu command accessed by a Ctrl-click (Macintosh) or right-click (Windows)

Vectorworks Help System

The help system allows quick access to comprehensive reference information about Vectorworks. Program commands,
tools, and dialog boxes are linked to the appropriate help topic, providing instant information.
The help system also offers links to related topics, allows full text searches, and contains an index and table of contents
to topics across all products.
The Vectorworks help system includes the following volumes:

Welcome: Instructions for using the help system within Vectorworks

Vectorworks Fundamentals: Context-sensitive online version of the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide
Vectorworks Design Series: Context-sensitive online version of the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide
VectorScript Language Guide: Description of the VectorScript language, which can be used to automate routine
tasks
Additional Documentation: Provides links to complete user guide PDFs, the VectorScript Language Guide, and
other helpful links
To access the Help system, select Help > Vectorworks Help from within Vectorworks. In the help system Table of
Contents, open the Welcome book for complete instructions on how to use the system.

Corporate Social Responsibility Statement

Nemetschek North America is taking on an ever-increasing role in embracing environmentally friendly practices to
reduce our carbon footprint. We realize that preserving the environment is affecting our customers more and more

xxiv | Preface
each day and will be joining you in your preservation efforts. As one important step in this process, weve increased
our use of papers certified by the Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) and material with recycled content, in order to
support responsible forest management, minimize habitat destruction, reduce air and water pollution, and maintain
forestry practices that respect human rights and social standards. We have also increased our usage of vegetable-based
inks and wind power in our professionally printed materials. While some of our materials require printing, we have
chosen to explore options that utilize electronic delivery where it is appropriate. This has impacted several of our
communication pieces that you may be accustomed to seeing in printed form.
Packaging Materials One of our largest changes was in how we produce the packaging to ship Vectorworks. We
continue to make a conscious effort to reduce our carbon footprint by specifying FSC-certified papers and
support responsibly managed forests and labor practices in foresting locations. Additionally, much of our
packaging contains some percentage of post-consumer waste. Finishes are water based, and therefore,
everything we produce is recyclable.
Manuals Previously, we printed the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide and Vectorworks Design Series
Users Guide, totaling more than 1600 pages in length. This required a larger shipping box and a large volume of
paper. We now provide our users guides solely online, in two formats for your convenience. Each guide is
provided as a PDF, and is available in the help system table of contents under the Additional Documentation
section. We also provide a comprehensive, searchable on-line help system which can be accessed from the Help
menu in Vectorworks, or by pressing the appropriate function key for context-sensitive help. This change has
allowed us to save a significant number of trees and provides our users with quick access to help in the manner
that suits them best.
Product brochures In the past, we have printed our product brochures and mailed them to clients who were
considering using Vectorworks. The product brochures are now provided as downloadable PDFs on the
vectorworks.net web site, and as PDFs within several of our multi-media pieces.
Additional Marketing Collateral Many of our collateral pieces have been converted to a multi-media CD or
DVD. We currently offer the Vectorworks 2010 Getting Started Guide which includes a printed (approximately
70 page) booklet and accompanying DVD providing exercises and movie files to teach the basic skills in
Vectorworks 2010 Fundamentals, Architect, Landmark, and Spotlight. It also contains electronic versions of the
Whats New brochure for Vectorworks 2010 products and Your Guide to Whats New for version 2010 and the
previous three versions.
Overall, Nemetschek estimates at a minimum we have decreased our carbon footprint and environmental impact by
the statistics below. In some cases we will still need to print materials for distribution. However, our commitment to
printing responsibly will continue and we hope that you will consider using some of these practices in your own
business as our environment is the legacy we will all leave our children.

Benefits of Socially Responsible Improvements for version 2010*

Wood use

251 tons

Net energy

2,033 million BTUs not expended

Greenhouse gases

399,985 pounds CO2 not released

Wastewater

1,510,882 gallons not produced

Solid waste

129,792 pounds not created

*Impact estimates based on research by the Environmental Defense Fund

For more information on our ongoing environmentally friendly efforts, visit www.vectorworks.net/green

Technical Support |

xxv

Training
Visit www.vectorworks.net for details about the following training options:

Training CDs
Guided online training
Onsite training
Classroom training

Other Resources
Visit www.vectorworks.net for details about the following additional resources:
Documentation updates
Independent local user groups
LISTSERV user lists

Technical Support
Technical support is available for registered Vectorworks users in several ways. International users should contact
their local reseller for details concerning technical support (see www.vectorworks.net for reseller information).
United States users can contact Technical Support using the following methods:

Call 410.290.5114
Send an e-mail to [email protected]
Visit the community board at techboard.vectorworks.net
Visit the technical support knowledge base at kbase.vectorworks.net

When you contact Technical Support, provide a brief description of the problem that includes specific details about
what actions were taken prior to the problems occurrence. The more information you can give your support specialist,
the easier it will be to solve your problem quickly.
When you contact Technical Support by phone, please have access to your computer and be ready to tell the specialist:

Vectorworks serial number

Vectorworks version number
Operating system
Type of computer being used
Amount of RAM installed in the computer
List of any recent changes to the computers setup (such as new fonts, software, or hardware)

Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting a problem prior to calling Technical Support will also aid in a speedy resolution. Basic
troubleshooting tips include:

Test to see if the problem occurs in a new, blank file

Test to see if the problem occurs system wide (especially print and font problems)
Copy and paste part of the document to a new file to see if the problem persists
Run the computer in Safe Mode (Windows) to see if there is a system conflict
Check the community message board to see if the problem has already been reported or resolved
(techboard.vectorworks.net)

xxvi | Preface

Introduction
Understanding Vectorworks

This section describes the core concepts behind Vectorworks functionality; each concept is described briefly in this
overview. The actual implementation of these concepts are described thoroughly in their relevant sections. Where
possible, the relevant sections are referenced.

Intuitive Design and Drafting Package

Vectorworks is an essential graphic design tool for anyone who wishes to use CAD software immediately. The
program emphasizes rapid, accurate drawing and easy object selection. This ease of use minimizes the learning curve,
so that ideas can be quickly converted into drawings.

Parasolid Modeling Kernel

The Parasolid modeling kernel (a Siemens PLM product) was integrated into Vectorworks starting with version 2009.
This kernel provides the geometric foundation for sophisticated 2D and 3D operations. The Parasolid kernel provides
robustness, consistency, and high performance in modeling as well as drafting operations.

Hybrid Environment
In most CAD programs, it is possible to create either a 2D or a 3D drawing. Vectorworks allows you to do both, with
hybrid objects that display in a 2D or 3D representation of a drawing. In this hybrid environment, symbols display as
2D symbols in a 2D view, and as a fully formed 3D object in 3D view. The program automatically displays the correct
symbol according to the view. Vectorworks Fundamentals provides symbol libraries that contain a number of
pre-configured hybrid symbols; alternatively, create your own hybrid objects.
A good example of a hybrid object is a door. It displays as an abstract solid in a 2D view and as a fully formed door in
a 3D view.

2D View

3D View

The advantage of working with hybrid objects is that 3D models can automatically be created from 2D drawings, or
vice versa. For more information on the hybrid environment and symbols, see Understanding Symbols on page 187.

| Chapter 1: Introduction

SmartCursor
Datum

Intersection

Design with precision using the SmartCursor. By providing a series of cues (including text displayed at the cursors
current location) that update with every move of the mouse, the drawing options are clear. Use the SmartCursor to
create snaps to specific points relative to other objects or to temporarily set a new origin (datum). Draw exact
perpendicular lines, angles, and more. The SmartCursor is described in detail in Drawing with Snapping and
Constraints on page 139.

Image Preview
An image preview is used for a variety of functions, including drawing objects, placing objects, and the SmartCursor.
The image preview is the image displayed as the object is drawn, after a tool has been selected or an operation
invoked, but before the object is physically placed in the drawing. The image preview may exactly resemble the object
to be placed or may be a representation of that object, such as its bounding box. During the drawing process, the image
preview contains a feedback segment, which gathers information for display in the Data bar. Vectorworks also uses
this segment to properly invoke SmartCursor cues.

Layers, Classes, and Views

Layers and classes provide the framework for Vectorworks drawings. Viewports and views display and present
drawings. These features work together to provide flexible organizational and viewing capabilities.
Vectorworks design layers (where drawings are created) can have height. If a wall is eight feet high, the design layer
can be as well. This allows for a true 3D representation of a model. Show and hide design layers as needed, to display
certain aspects of a design. Objects placed together in design layers are related in space. Design layers help automate
some aspects of wall creation as well as provide other advantages. Each Vectorworks design layer can have a different
scale. Special sheet layers are used for creating viewports; these are multiple linked views of a drawing, complete
with annotation, and ready for the presentation of a final design to a client. In Vectorworks Design Series, viewports
also can be created on design layers, which can show one or more design layers from its own file, or from an external
file.
Classes associate objects across layers. Classes are used to classify objects and can have specific display attributes, such
as color. Classes are used to speed the drawing process, since attributes can be specified at object creation, and to
control the visibility of these related groups. Each object can only be assigned one class, but each object can be
composed of other nested objects, which can each be assigned a different class.
A particular view of the drawing, such as one which shows only certain layers and classes, can be saved. Take a
snapshot of a combination of layers and classes and then print the view. Layers, classes, and views are described in
detail in Drawing Structure on page 97.

Understanding Vectorworks |

Viewports
When a design is complete, it typically needs to be presented to a client with views from several different directions,
complete with details, annotations, dimensions, and title blocks. To accomplish this in Vectorworks, create viewport
objects, which can show other design layers in this file, or even design layers in other files.
Viewports can display entire as well as cropped views of a drawing, with specified layer and class visibility settings,
projection, render mode, and orientation parameters. If the drawing changes, the viewports can be easily updated to
reflect the changes.
In both Vectorworks Fundamentals and the Vectorworks Design Series, you can create one or more viewports on a
sheet layer, and each viewport can show one or more design layers from the current file. Additionally, the Vectorworks
Design Series allows you to create one or more viewports on a design layer, and the design layers shown can be either
from the current file, or referenced from another file.
Viewports are described in Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports on page 702 in this guide, and in
Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports on page 710 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

Planes and 3D Space

Every Vectorworks layer has an associated layer plane. This active layer plane is permanently placed and can be used
as a constant reference point for drawing in 3D space. A second plane can be placed at a specific angle or rotation to
create a 3D object relative to that plane. This modifiable plane is called a working plane. Working planes are described
in detail in Using Working Planes on page 635.

VectorScript
Vectorworks has a comprehensive script capability called VectorScript. Use existing scripts or create your own.
Customize Vectorworks working environment with scripts, or create customized plug-in tools, commands, and
objects that fit your needs. The VectorScript scripting language can be very useful and saves time and effort by creating
reusable functions for drawings. Scripts can also be used to customize Vectorworks. See Using Scripts on page 685
for details on customizing Vectorworks.
See the VectorScript Language Guide for an introduction to the VectorScript language. The VectorScript Language
Guide is available as part of the help system, and also as a PDF file in the help system. In addition, the VectorScript
Function Reference is a comprehensive command reference available online. It is located in VWHelp/VectorScript
Reference/VSFunctionReference.html

Worksheets
Vectorworks provides comprehensive worksheet and database functionality. Object attributes and records can be
listed in a worksheet, and spreadsheet calculations can be performed on this data. For example, list all the rooms in a

| Chapter 1: Introduction

drawing, and automatically calculate the number of bedrooms. Create a worksheet listing the items required to
furnish the rooms and the cost. Worksheets are described in Creating Worksheets on page 647.

Creating a New File

To create a new file:
1. Select File > New.
The Create Document dialog box opens.
2. Select the type of document to create and click OK to open the new file.

Document Type

Description

Create blank document

Opens a new drawing file with the default Vectorworks settings (attributes, scale,
units, etc.)

Use document template

Opens a new drawing with settings that were saved in a template file; select the
template to use (see Creating Templates on page 89 to learn more about templates)

Vectorworks searches your user folder, your workgroup folders, and the Vectorworks system folder for template
files. If no templates are found anywhere on the system, the Create Document dialog box does not open. Instead,
a blank new document is created automatically.

Opening a File
There are three ways to open a file that already exists. Up to eight Vectorworks files can be open at once.
To open a file that already exists:
1. Select File > Open.
The Open dialog box opens.
2. Select the name of the file or template to open.
3. Click Open.
Vectorworks opens the last saved version of the selected drawing file.
To open a file that was recently used:
Select File > Open Recent and select a name from the list of the last ten files that were opened or saved.
The file is opened; if the file is already open, it is moved to the front of the screen to become the current file.
To open a file from the operating system:
Double-click a file directly in Windows Explorer or Macintosh Finder.

Opening a File |

If multiple versions of Vectorworks are installed, and Vectorworks is not yet open, the version that opens when
you double-click a file depends on the operating system.
On Windows, the version of Vectorworks that was installed most recently opens.
On Macintosh OS X, Vectorworks 2010 opens when you double-click a version 2010 file. When you
double-click an older version file, the older version of Vectorworks opens.
Vectorworks 2010 can only open files that were created in MiniCAD 7 or in Vectorworks versions 8 and above. Files
that were created in versions earlier than MiniCAD 7 must be converted to at least version 7, with a version of
Vectorworks earlier than version 12. If an earlier version of Vectorworks is not available, contact NNA Sales Support
for assistance.
When a user attempts to open a file that another user already has open, an alert displays the name of the user who has
the file open and where it is open; additional information about the file can be displayed, including its path, when it
was opened, and how long it has been open.

Mapping Missing Fonts

When you open a Vectorworks file that contains fonts that are not available on your system, the Font Mapping dialog
box opens. Map fonts from the original file to a font available on your system, or open the document quickly by
automatically mapping fonts to the default replacement font.

Parameter

Description

Replace

Auto-populates when an original font is selected

With

Lists the default font and all available system fonts (the default font is the system font
for the computer on which Vectorworks is installed)

Original Font

Lists the unavailable font used in the file

Replacement Font

Lists the font that will be used to replace the original font

New Mappings

Lists fonts that have not previously been mapped

All Mappings

Lists all fonts regardless of whether they have been previously mapped

To map missing fonts:

1. Populate the list of original fonts by selecting New Mappings or All Mappings.

| Chapter 1: Introduction
2. If the default replacement font is acceptable for replacing all original fonts, click OK to open the document.
Otherwise, proceed to Step 3.
Font mappings can be changed at any time by clicking Edit Font Mappings from the Display tab of Vectorworks
preferences.
3. Select an original font to map.
The Replace field displays the selected original font, and the With field lists the default and all available fonts.
Select the desired replacement font, and then select the next original font to map. Repeat the process until all
desired original fonts have been mapped.
4. Click OK when all desired original fonts have been mapped.
Mapped fonts are stored as a Vectorworks preference. If Vectorworks preferences are deleted, the Font Mapping
dialog box re-displays for a file that may have previously had the fonts mapped.

Using Finder Quick Look (Macintosh OS X 10.5+ Only)

Vectorworks Quick Look plug-in provides an image preview of the file and a thumbnail icon preview to more easily
locate files.

Vectorworks File Preview

When a file is saved, an image of the current view of the file is also saved in the file. This image is then supplied to the
operating system with Vectorworks Quick Look plug-in.
A preview is not available for files saved with auto-save or batch convert.
The preview image can be viewed in a number of ways:
Select one or more documents within the Finder, and then press the Space Bar
Select a document and then press the Quick Look button within the Finder
Select a document in the column view; the preview column contains the preview image
Display the preview image in the preview section for Get Info

Using Finder Quick Look (Macintosh OS X 10.5+ Only) |

Vectorworks File Thumbnail

Vectorworks documents can use either the document thumbnail icon or the standard Vectorworks icon. The default
setting for Show icon preview is off (the standard Vectorworks icon displays), and can be changed by the View >
Show View Options (or the Cmd + J keyboard shortcut) from the Finder menu.
When Show icon preview is enabled, the default behavior applies only to the current folder, and to the current folder
view (with or without details, for example). Click all folders in Finder Preferences to see the thumbnails for all folders.
Change the setting for each individual View (list view or column view, for example) to see Quick Look thumbnails in
all folder views.

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Migrating from Previous Versions

The Update Plug-in Objects command converts a variety of legacy objects to the current application format. This
command works across all file layers, and as applicable, on objects that are freestanding, inserted in walls, in a placed
symbol, or in a symbol definition. All applicable parameter values, and any attached records are also transferred
during the conversion.
Saving a copy of the file prior to running the command is recommended, as the command cannot be undone.
To update plug-in objects:
1. Open a file containing legacy objects.
2. Select Tools > Utilities > Update Plug-in Objects.
The Update Plug-in Objects dialog box opens.

3. Select the type(s) of objects to convert to the new format, and then click OK.
All older version objects of the selected type(s) are converted into the new format.

Closing a File
To close the current file:
1. Select File > Close or click the close box on the drawing window.
2. If the file changed since it was last saved, click Save (Macintosh) or Yes (Windows) to save and close the file.
Click Dont Save (Macintosh) or No (Windows) to close the file without a save.
To close all open files (Windows only):
1. Select Window > Close All.
2. If the files changed since they were last saved, click Yes to save and close the files. Click No to close the files
without a save.

Saving a File
The Save command saves the open file, which replaces the earlier version of the file. When you save a file for the first
time, specify the file name and location. The Save command is disabled if no changes have been made to the file since
it was first opened or created.

Saving a File |

On Windows, the files require a .vwx or .mcd extension to be recognized by Vectorworks. If you do not enter an
extension, Vectorworks adds the .vwx extension automatically.
To save the current file:
1. Select File > Save.
If the file has not been saved before, the Save Vectorworks Drawing dialog box opens.
2. Enter a name for the file in the Name field, and then select the destination for the file.
3. Click Save.
Vectorworks saves the file. The time required may depend on the file size.

Save As
To save the current file with a different name:
1. Select File > Save As.
The Save Vectorworks Drawing dialog box opens.
2. Enter a new Name for the file, and then select the destination for the file.
3. Click Save.
Vectorworks saves a new copy of the file. The time required may depend on the file size.

Save a Copy As
To save a copy of the current file and continue to edit the current file:
1. Select File > Save A Copy As.
The Save dialog box opens.
2. Enter a new Name for the file, and then select the destination for the file.
3. Click Save.
Vectorworks saves a new copy of the file and keeps the original file open for further edits. The time required may
depend on the file size.

Automatically Saving Files

The autosave feature automatically saves the current file after either a specified number of minutes or a specified
number of operations, as defined in the Autosave tab of the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box. See Autosave
Preferences on page 53 for more information.
If the Confirm before save preference is selected, a confirmation dialog box displays before the autosave is performed.
The information that displays in this dialog box depends on the settings selected in Vectorworks preferences.

10

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Parameter

Description

Yes

Saves the file; if the document has not been saved, the Save dialog box opens to name the file first

No

Cancels the save operation and resets the autosave counters

Settings

Opens the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box to edit the autosave parameters; select Dont autosave
this document for the remainder of the session (or Dont backup this document for the remainder
of the session) to disable the autosave feature for the active document for the remainder of the session

When the save is complete, the message Autosave complete displays in the lower right corner of the window; the
message clears when you click the mouse.

Reverting to the Last Saved Version

The Revert to Saved command replaces the active drawing with the most recently saved version. This deletes all
changes made since the last save, which can remove several undesirable changes in one step.
To revert to the last saved version:
1. Select File > Revert to Saved.
This action cannot be undone. Confirm that changes should not be saved.
2. Click OK.
Vectorworks closes the active drawing and opens the last saved version of the file.

Converting Previous Version Files

Vectorworks must translate files created in previous versions of Vectorworks into the current format. Vectorworks
cannot convert MiniCAD 6 or earlier files, however. Vectorworks automatically applies PNG compression to images
contained in converted files.
To convert an entire folder of files at once, use the Batch Convert command as described in Converting Previous
Version Files as a Batch on page 11.
To convert one file at a time, open and save the file in the current version of Vectorworks as described in
Converting a Single Previous Version File on page 14.
You may need to correct the visibility of crop objects and annotation objects in sheet layer viewports (see Sheet Layer
Viewport Parameters on page 706).
For files earlier than Vectorworks 2009, the geometry of the drawing objects is automatically converted using the new
Parasolid kernel. The conversion may fail for some solids for a variety of reasons: for example, if an object has
self-intersecting profiles inside an extrude or sweep, or if an objects surfaces do not pass the Parasolid checks. If this

Converting Previous Version Files |

11

happens, Vectorworks converts all of the other objects and alerts you that some objects were not converted. A
wireframe representation of the failed solid is included in the file; you may be able to edit these objects and regenerate
the solids.
As of Vectorworks 2010, all dash styles are named; custom dash styles are automatically named Dash Style-X,
(where X is the next available number). To rename or change the display order of the available dash styles, see Setting
the Default Dash Styles and Display Order on page 85.

Converting Previous Version Files as a Batch

During a batch conversion, Vectorworks scans all files in the source folder (and in sub-folders, optionally), and
converts previous version files to the current format. Non-Vectorworks files and Vectorworks files that are too old to
convert are skipped and recorded in the log file.
There are two options for Vectorworks files during batch conversions:
By default, Vectorworks moves the previous version files to an archive folder and places the converted versions
of those files in the source folder.
Alternatively, Vectorworks makes no changes to the source folder. Instead, the converted files (and copies of any
current version Vectorworks files) are placed in a specified folder.
To convert a batch of files:
1. Place all files to be converted in one folder, or in sub-folders within the source folder.
2. In Vectorworks, select File > Batch Convert.
The Batch Convert dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Source Folder

Click Choose to open either the Choose Source Folder dialog box (Macintosh) or the
Browse for Folder dialog box (Windows); select the folder that contains the files you
want to convert, and then click Choose (Macintosh) or OK (Windows) to return to
the Batch Convert dialog box

12

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Parameter

Description

Destination Folder

To place the converted files into a different folder, click Choose to open either the
Choose Destination Folder dialog box (Macintosh) or the Browse for Folder dialog
box (Windows). Select the folder, and then click Choose (Macintosh) or OK
(Windows) to return to the Batch Convert dialog box. Then deselect Convert in
place.

Include subfolders

Converts the files within the sub-folders of the source folder

Convert in place

Moves the original Vectorworks files to an archive folder, and places the newly
converted files in the original source file locations. The archive folder is created
within the source folder and is named Old Version Vectorworks Files.
Deselect this option to place the converted files in the destination folder and make no
changes to the source folder.

Convert layer links into

viewports
(Design Series required)

Creates viewports on design layers that reference one or more layers within the same
file. Select this option to convert any layer links in the older version files into
viewports. See Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports on page 710 in
the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

Convert referenced layers

into referenced viewports
(Design Series required)

Creates viewports on design layers that reference one or more layers in an external
file. Select this option to convert any referenced layers in the older version files into
viewports. See Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports on page 710 in
the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

Convert absolute references

into relative references
(Design Series required)

Converts workgroup references with absolute file paths to relative file paths, if a
relative file path is allowed. A relative file path is not allowed if the file is on a
different volume from the referenced file.

3. Click OK to convert the files.

Each file is briefly opened and re-saved into the appropriate folder. Sub-folder names and hierarchies are
recreated, if they are included in the conversion process. If Convert in place is selected, the original files are
moved to the archive folder, in the original sub-folder structure.
4. Once the conversion is complete, the Batch Conversion Results dialog box displays a summary.

Parameter

Description

Total files in source folder

The total number of files contained in the specified source folder

Converting Previous Version Files |

Parameter

Description

Total files successfully converted

The total number of files successfully converted by the Batch Convert

command

Total current version files copied

The total number of files that were already in the current version of
Vectorworks; if Convert in place is selected, the files are left in place in the
original folder; if Convert in place is not selected, the files are copied to the
destination folder

Total files not converted

The total number of files that were not converted

13

Not a Vectorworks file

The number of files that were not converted because they were not
Vectorworks files

Unsupported Vectorworks file

version

The number of files that were not converted because they were MiniCAD 6 or
an earlier version, which is not supported by the Batch Convert command

Unknown reasons

The number of files that were not converted, for which Vectorworks could not
detect a reason

One or more files had solid

conversion errors

This message indicates that one or more of the successfully converted files
contained a solid that could not be properly generated by the Parasolid
kernel. Check the log file to see which files had solid conversion failures. You
may be able to edit the converted geometry and regenerate the solids. (See
Parasolid Modeling Kernel on page 1 for more information.)

5. Click Details to view a log file with information about each file processed during the conversion.

14

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Converting a Single Previous Version File

When you open an older file, Vectorworks automatically converts the file and assigns it an appropriate name. By
default, Vectorworks renames the converted file and keeps the original file intact. Change the default setting to rename
the original file and use the original file name for the converted file instead. In this case, if the original file is
write-protected, Vectorworks cannot rename it; save the converted file and give it an appropriate name.
To convert a single file:
1. In the current version of Vectorworks, open a file that was created with a previous version of Vectorworks.
A conversion alert box opens, showing which file will be renamed, along with the new name. The action
described in the dialog box depends on the current setting for converting file names.

2. To change the way this file will be converted, click Settings.

The Vectorworks dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Keep the original file name with

the

Select which file will have the original file name: the original file or the new
file

Convert layer links into viewports

(Design Series required)

Creates viewports on design layers that reference one or more layers within
the same file. Select this option to convert any layer links in the older file into
viewports. See Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports on
page 710 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

Convert referenced layers into

referenced viewports
(Design Series required)

Creates viewports on design layers that reference one or more layers in an

external file. Select this option to convert any referenced layers in the older
version file into viewports. See Presenting Drawings with Design Layer
Viewports on page 710 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

Convert absolute references into

relative references
(Design Series required)

Converts workgroup references with absolute file paths to relative file paths,
if a relative file path is allowed. A relative file path is not allowed if the file is
on a different volume from the referenced file.

3. Specify the conversion settings and click OK to save the change; future file conversions will use this setting.

Exiting Vectorworks |

15

4. In the conversion alert box, click OK to continue with the conversion.

5. If the file contains a solid that could not be properly generated by the Parasolid kernel, an alert displays.

You may be able to edit the converted geometry and regenerate the solid. (See Converting Previous Version
Files on page 10 for more information.)

Exiting Vectorworks
To close Vectorworks along with any open files:
1. From the File menu (Windows) or Vectorworks menu (Macintosh), select Quit.
2. If there are any unsaved files, click Save (Macintosh) or Yes (Windows) to save the changes and exit. Click Dont
Save (Macintosh) or No (Windows) to exit without a save.

Vectorworks Fundamentals Workspace

When Vectorworks Fundamentals is started, the main window opens with a new, blank file; the Fundamentals
workspace is selected, and contains menus, palettes, and tool sets in a default layout. During a work session, palettes
may be opened, closed, and moved around as necessary. When the application is closed, the last workspace settings
are preserved and restored for the next session.
Custom workspaces can be created, as described in Creating or Editing a Workspace on page 821. To switch to
another workspace, select Tools > Workspaces, and then select the workspace from the list of those available.

16

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Vectorworks version

File name

Tool bar

View bar

View bar
menu

Object Info palette - the Render

tab displays if Renderworks is
installed, or if the Design Series
uses sketch rendering

Menu bar
Basic
palette

Data bar
menu

Rulers

Attributes
palette

Vertical
scroll bar
Resource
Browser

Snapping
palette

Floating
Data bar

Tool Sets
palette
Message bar
menu
Message bar

Horizontal scroll bar

Windows Screen

Print area border

Vectorworks Fundamentals Workspace |

17

Macintosh Screen

Windows, palettes, tool sets, and dialog boxes that contain a sizing handle in their bottom right corner can be resized;
click-drag the sizing handle to the desired location.
The following table describes some of the workspace features common to all Vectorworks products.

Component

Description

Menu bar

Contains pull-down menus that access the Vectorworks commands

Title bar

All windows, palettes, tool sets, and dialog boxes have a title bar; click and drag any title bar
to move the item to the desired location. See Palette Layout Options on page 21.

Data bar

Depending on the tool and on the action being performed, the Data bar displays information
such as coordinate data, length, and angle. Use the Data bar menu to set the Data bar either to
float with the cursor, or to be stationary on the Tool bar. See Using the 2D Data Bar on
page 220 and Using the 3D Data Bar on page 337 for more information.

18

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Component

Description

Tool bar

Displays the various modes of the active tool; click a mode to select it. The bar also displays
mode information and accesses the tool preferences, if any. The Tool bar is divided into
sections grouped by mode function. To move easily through the mode sections from the
keyboard, press the U, I, O, P, [ (left bracket), and ] (right bracket) keys. Each key corresponds
to a consecutive Tool bar section (see the Mode Modifier shortcuts in Modifying Snapping
and Mode Shortcuts on page 829).

View bar

Contains buttons and pulldown menus that control the view in various ways (see The View
Bar on page 18)

Message bar

Displays tool explanations, undo messages, minor alerts, and a progress bar (when
applicable). To also display cursor location fields on the Message bar, click the triangle at the
far right of the bar; select the option to display all positional fields, only cursor-based location
fields, or no cursor location fields.

Drawing area

This is the open portion in the middle of the Vectorworks application window where
drawings are created; it includes both the print area and the space that surrounds it

Print area

Within the drawing area, a gray border defines the print area, if shown. Only the objects that
are included within the print area are printed. The print area is divided into pages; each page
equals a physical sheet of paper to be printed. A print margin is built in for each page (see
The Print Area on page 90).

Rulers

Based on the current measurement system, rulers make it easier to precisely create and place
objects within the drawing. The rulers can be hidden with an option in the Vectorworks
preferences (see Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 47).

Grids

Based on the current measurement system, two grid systems make it easier to precisely create
and place objects within the file. To hide the reference grid, deselect Show Grid Lines (see
Snap and Reference Grids on page 67).

Fundamentals and Design Series Workspaces

When one or more Design Series product is installed, additional default workspaces are available in addition to the
Fundamentals workspace.
The Fundamentals workspace commands and tools also appear in Design Series workspaces, and in some cases their
functionality is extended in the Design Series, and their location in the workspace may be different. If described in the
Fundamentals portion of the documentation, this functionality includes a statement about which Design Series
product is required, and, where applicable, a cross-reference link refers to additional Design Series information.
Examples include: straight and round walls, windows, doors, columns, sheet borders, callouts, objects from polyline,
and roof object creation.
See Creating Architectural Drawings on page 63 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide for a list of
commands which appear in different locations in Vectorworks Fundamentals and Vectorworks Architect or
Landmark.

The View Bar

The View bar is located along the top of the application window. It provides quick access to various options that affect
the drawing view. Some View bar items have equivalent menu commands.

The View Bar |

Shortcut to either the Design

Layers tab or the Sheet Layers
tab of the Organization dialog box

Next View

Previous
View

Active Class/
Classes list

Shortcut to the Classes

tab of the Organization
dialog box

Active Layer/
Layers list

Shortcut to the
Layer Scale
dialog box

Fit to Objects

Current View/
Standard
Views list

Current Render Mode/

Render Modes list/
Available render
options

Zoom In/Out
Current Zoom

Saved Views
menu

Active Planes list

Fit to Page Area

Current Layer Scale

(display only)

19

Rotated View
options (Design
Series required)

Unified View
(Design Series
required
View bar menu

Component

Description

Previous View

Displays the previous view that was created by a pan, zoom, or scroll in the drawing area;
Vectorworks keeps track of up to 50 views

Next View

Displays the next view; Vectorworks keeps track of up to 50 views

Classes tab shortcut

Opens the Classes tab of the Organization dialog box

Active Class/Classes
list

Displays the active class, and activates a class that is selected from the list; an icon to the
left of each name indicates the current visibility setting of the class (see Setting
Visibilities on page 125 for more information). A triangle next to the class name indicates
that the class has sub-groups that can be selected individually (for example, a wall class
with exterior and interior sub-groups).

Design Layers tab/

Sheet Layers tab
shortcut

Depending on whether a Design Layer or a Sheet Layer is active, opens either the Design
Layers tab or the Sheet Layers tab of the Organization dialog box

Active Layer/Layers
list

Displays the active layer, and activates a design layer or sheet layer that is selected from
the list. The area to the left of each name indicates the view and visibility of the layer.
Depending on the view, any of the following icons can display for design layers; sheet
layers are always in Top/Plan view:

Top/Plan view

Any standard view

other than Top/Plan

Plan Rotation active

(Design Series required)

The visibility of the layer is indicated as follows:

Black icon the layer is visible
Gray icon the layer is grayed
No icon the layer is invisible
Active Planes list

Displays the active plane. Depending on the current tool, view, and presence of named
working planes, also activates a plane that is selected from the list.

20

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Component

Description

Saved Views menu

Activates a saved view that is selected from the list. Select Edit View to open the Saved
Views tab of the Organization dialog box, or select Save View to open the Save View
dialog box; see Creating or Editing Saved Views Using the Saved Views Menu on
page 124.

Layer Scale shortcut

Opens the Layer Scale dialog box; the scale of the active design layer displays to the right.
See Changing the Scale of the Drawing or the Active Design Layer on page 63.

Fit to Page Area

Displays the whole drawing (all pages) in the drawing window; see Fit to Page Area on
page 465

Fit to Objects

Zooms in or out so that all of the objects in a drawing are visible. If an object or objects are
currently selected, the zoom is relative to those object(s); see Fit to Objects on page 464.

Zoom In/Out

Click to double the magnification of the drawing; to reduce the magnification of the
drawing by one-half, use Alt-click (Windows) or Option-click (Macintosh). The zoom
centers on any objects that are selected; if nothing is selected, the zoom centers on the last
empty spot that was clicked. See Zooming from the View Bar on page 30.

Current Zoom

Zooms in or out by the zoom factor that is selected or entered; this option is available
when the Zoom - Long option is selected on the View bar menu

Current View/
Standard Views list

Displays the current view, and activates a standard view (such as Top/Plan) that is
selected from the list; see Using Standard Views on page 449. If the view is not standard
(for example, if the Flyover tool was used), Custom View displays.

Rotated View (Design

Series required)

Rotates the plan view by the angle specified; see Rotating the Plan on page 707 in the
Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide

Unified View

Toggles Unified View mode; see Unified Layer View on page 747 in the Vectorworks
Design Series Users Guide

Current Render Mode

Options

If the current render mode has options, displays the appropriate options dialog box; this
option is available when the Render Mode - Long option is selected on the View bar menu

Current Render Mode/

Render Modes list

Displays the current render mode, and activates a render mode selected from the list;
select Options for Other Render Modes to access the options for a particular mode. See
Rendering with Vectorworks on page 477 and Renderworks Rendering Modes on
page 789.

View bar menu

Selects the options to display on the View bar

Palettes and Tool Sets

The Fundamentals workspace contains various palettes for creating and editing objects. Basic and Tool Sets are tool
palettes, which have special functionality, as described in Tool Palette Features on page 23. If a keyboard shortcut is
currently assigned to a menu command or tool, the shortcut displays when the mouse hovers over the command or
tool; to set up or modify keyboard shortcuts, see Modifying Menus and Commands on page 823.
Depending on the initial settings, some palettes may be hidden when Vectorworks Fundamentals is launched.

Palette / Tool Set

Purpose

Snapping

Contains SmartCursor snapping controls that can be toggled on or off

Palette Layout Options |

21

Palette / Tool Set

Purpose

Attributes

Contains a selection of colors, fills, pens, and other object attributes

Object Info

Lists context-sensitive object information for viewing and editing

Working Planes

Contains controls for adding and modifying working planes

Resource Browser

Accesses Vectorworks gradient fills, hatch patterns, image fills, record formats, scripts and
script palettes, symbols and symbol folders, worksheets, textures, and backgrounds

Visualization
(Renderworks
required)

Accesses all lights and cameras in the file

Basic

Contains a single set of basic 2D and 3D object creation and editing tools; the palette can be
customized through the Workspace Editor

Tool Sets

In the Fundamentals workspace, the palette includes the following tool sets, whose tools are
grouped by similar functionality; the palette and its tool sets can be customized through the
Workspace Editor

3D Modeling

Contains tools for creating and editing 3D objects, including solids and NURBS

Visualization

Contains tools for changing the drawing view in different ways, including the Walkthrough
and Light tools

Dims / Notes

Contains tools for adding dimension and label objects

Walls

Contains basic wall creation tools

Detailing

Contains tools for adding architectural detail objects, such as tubing

Script Palettes

Contains palettes with VectorScript resources

Palette Layout Options

The default palette layout in Vectorworks Fundamentals can be customized. Select the palettes to display or hide with
the Window > Palettes menu. Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the drawing area, and
select Palettes from the document context menu.
Click on the title bar of any displayed palette and drag it to the desired location. Most palettes can be resized by the
standard Windows or Macintosh resize method. Palette size, position, and visibility are saved upon exiting
Vectorworks Fundamentals.
Palette positions and a variety of settings can be user specified, as described in Modifying Palette Positions and
Settings on page 830. Save palette positions and settings by selecting Window > Palettes > Save Palette Positions. To
revert the palette position and settings back to the settings established when the custom workspace was created (in the
User Data and Preferences folder), click Reset Saved Settings from the Session tab of Vectorworks preferences (see
Session Preferences on page 50).

Specifying Macintosh Palette Margins

On the Macintosh, the palettes can be placed in a margin on either side of the drawing area. When the palette margins
are in use, the drawing area cannot expand past a fixed size, which allows the palettes to remain out of the way. The
palette margin area can be turned on and off in the Vectorworks preferences as described in Setting Vectorworks
Preferences on page 47.

22

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Minimizing Palettes
To increase the available drawing area, palettes can be minimized while not in use, and then maximized when needed.
On Macintosh, click the palettes yellow title bar button or double-click the palettes title bar to minimize the palette.
Repeat the process to maximize the palette.
On Windows, click the palettes pin icon in the title bar to toggle between minimized (horizontal pin icon) and
maximized (vertical pin icon) display. Move the cursor over a minimized title bar to temporarily maximize the palette;
move the cursor off the palette to minimize it again.

Minimized palette

Maximized palette

Docking Windows Palettes

In Windows, most palettes can be docked to any of the four drawing window edges, or snapped to other docked
palettes. The Object Info, Resource Browser, Attributes palette, and Working Planes palettes can only be docked to the
left and right window edges.
The ability to dock palettes is enabled by default in the Session tab of the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box. Deselect
this option to disable docking. See Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 47 for more information.
To dock or undock a palette by double-clicking:
1. Double-click a palettes title bar.
If the palette was undocked, double-clicking docks it in its previous location. If the palette was docked,
double-clicking undocks it and moves it to its previous location in the drawing area.
2. To toggle the docked/undocked status, double-click the palettes title bar again, as necessary.
To dock a palette by dragging it:
1. Drag the title bar of the desired palette toward the edge of the window.
The palettes view switches to a gray outline. When the palette is in range of a window edge, the outline changes
shape to represent the new docked shape.
2. Move the palettes outline to the edge of the docking location and release. Currently docked palettes adjust their
location along the edge to accommodate the new palette.
To prevent a palette from docking, hold down the Ctrl key while dragging the palette near an edge.
To undock a palette by dragging it:
1. Drag the title bar of the desired palette away from the edge.
The palettes view switches to a gray outline. When the palette is out of window edge range, the outline changes
shape to represent the new undocked shape.

Palette Layout Options |

23

2. Drag the palette to the desired location within the drawing area.

Tool Palette Features

Both the standard tool palettes (Basic and Tool Sets) and any custom tool palettes have special features that other
palettes do not. Tool palettes and their tool sets can be created and customized using the Workspace Editor (see
Creating or Editing a Workspace on page 821).

Pop-out Tools
On tool palettes, an arrow on the right side of a tool icon or label indicates additional, related pop-out tools. Click and
hold down the mouse button to open the menu of pop-out tools.

Utility Menus
Each tool palette has a button at the bottom that opens a utility menu, which controls the palette and tool display.

Menu / Command

Action

View Tools As
Icons

Display only an icon for each tool

Icons and Text

Display both an icon and a text label for each tool

Text

Display only a text label for each tool

Sort Tools By
Manual Placement

Display tools in the order appearing in the Workspace Editor

Ascending Alphabetical

Display tools in ascending alphabetical order according to text labels

24

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Menu / Command

Action

Descending Alphabetical
View Tool Sets As

Display tools in descending alphabetical order according to text labels

(These options are available only for tool palettes with multiple tool sets)

Icons

Display only an icon for each tool set in the palette

Icons and Text

Display both an icon and a text label for each tool set in the palette

Text

Display only a text label for each tool set in the palette

Sort Tool Sets By

(These options are available only for tool palettes with multiple tool sets)

Manual Placement

Display tool sets in the order appearing in the Workspace Editor

Ascending Alphabetical

Display tool sets in ascending alphabetical order according to text labels

Descending Alphabetical

Display tool sets in descending alphabetical order according to text labels

Place Tool Sets At

(These options are available only for tool palettes with multiple tool sets)

Top of Palette

Display tool set selection buttons at the top of the tool palette

Bottom of Palette

Display tool set selection buttons at the bottom of the tool palette

Customize

Opens the Workspace Editor Options dialog box (see Creating or Editing a
Workspace on page 821 for details)

Tool Set Selection Buttons and Tear-off Palettes

If a tool palette has multiple tool sets (as does the Tool Sets palette), selection buttons for each tool set display on the
palette. To display a tool sets tools, click the appropriate button. The button is highlighted to indicate which tool set is
active.
To see multiple tool sets at once, drag a tool sets selection button off the main palette. This creates a separate,
temporary palette for the tool set, with a perforated top edge. Like other palettes, these tear-off palettes can be
docked, resized, and minimized. To close a tear-off palette, click its close button. On Windows, a docked tear-off
palette does not have a perforated edge; instead, it has a special close button in the shape of a curved arrow.

Click the Visualization tool

set button to display its tools

Drag the Walls tool set button

off the Tool Sets palette to
create a Walls tear-off palette

List Box Functionality

Dialog boxes that contain long lists of information (such as the Organization dialog box) may have some or all of the
following functionality.

Additional Key Functionality |

25

Task

Action

Change the lists sort key

Click the heading of the column to sort by; an arrow appears on the right side of
the column heading to indicate that it is the sort key

Change a columns sort order

Click the column heading; the sort arrow in the heading indicates whether the
current sort is ascending or descending

Resize a column

Click the vertical line on the right side of a columns heading and drag it left or
right

Select a group of items

Click the first item, and then Shift-click the last item in the group

Select multiple items

individually

Click the first item, and then Command-click (Macintosh) or Ctrl-click (Windows)
each additional item

Select an item on the list

Type the first letter(s) of the desired items name

Edit an item on the list

Double-click the desired item

Open a context menu for an

item on the list

Ctrl-click (Macintosh) or right-click (Windows) the desired item

For lists with a Visibility

column, set the same visibility
for all items on the list

Option-click (Macintosh) or Alt-click (Windows) the desired setting

Click the heading of a column

without the sort arrow to sort
the list by that column

The arrow indicates the current sort

key and sort order; click the column
heading to reverse the sort order

Drag the vertical line on the right

side of a column heading to adjust
the column size

Option-click (Macintosh) or
Alt-click (Windows) one of
the Visibility columns to
set that visibility for all
items on the list

Type the first

letter of an items
name to select it

Additional Key Functionality

Several keys in Vectorworks have additional functionality beyond the standard conventions:

26

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Key

Usage

Esc

Cancels the current operation. When a dialog box is open, this is the equivalent of
pressing the Cancel button. In the Data bar or Object Info palette, cancels the entry in a
field and returns the focus to the drawing area. Cancels rendering. Clears smart points.
Deselects the working plane.

Return (Macintosh) /
Enter (Windows)

When a dialog box is open, this is the equivalent to pressing the Done or OK button. In
a field in the Data bar or Object Info palette, this accepts the information and returns the
focus to the drawing area.
In the Object Info palette, press Shift+Return (Macintosh) or Shift+Enter (Windows) to
save the entry and keep the focus in the same field, so that you can enter a different
value if necessary.

Tab

Moves the cursor from one field to the next in the Data bar, Object Info palette, and
dialog boxes

Delete (Macintosh) /
Backspace (Windows)

Removes the last segment of or cancels the creation of an object being drawn

Ctrl (Windows)

Prevents palettes from docking when they are moved near an edge

Space Bar

Engages the Pause/Boomerang mode. Holding down the Space Bar temporarily pauses
the current tool. A second tool can then be selected and used. Release the Space Bar to
return to the previous tool.

Command (Macintosh) /
Shift (Windows)

Briefly expands the currently selected screen tip

Screen Tips
Vectorworks screen tips are available throughout the program to identify items such as tool, mode, and snapping
names. To view a screen tip, hold the cursor briefly over the item in question.

Certain items have screen tips that can be collapsed (default) and expanded. When collapsed, only the name of the
item displays. When expanded, additional help information is displayed below the name. To expand screen tips, hold
the Command key (Macintosh) or Shift key (Windows) while the screen tip is visible.
On Windows, screen tips can also be collapsed or expanded by clicking on the disclosure arrow. When a screen tip is
expanded, it remains expanded until it is manually collapsed again. Screen tips for all other items are expanded until a
tip is collapsed again.

Drawing Techniques |

27

Disclosure arrow

Collapsed screen tip

Expanded screen tip

Drawing Techniques
In Vectorworks, objects are created using the mouse, the keyboard, or a mouse and keyboard combination.

Using the Mouse

The easiest way to draw in Vectorworks is to use the mouse. Select the appropriate tool button and create an object in
either the click-drag or the click-click mode, depending on the type of object.
In click-drag mode, click and continue to hold down the mouse button while you create an object; release the button
when the object is the desired size and shape.
1st click

Release

In click-click mode, click the mouse to mark the start point of an object, and then click again at each of the objects
corners or vertices.
1st click

2nd click

Vectorworks defaults to click-click mode, and all procedures in this guide are based on click-click drawing. This
preference can be changed in Vectorworks preferences.
Use the Data bar for accurate object placement and creation. See Using the 2D Data Bar on page 220 and
Using the 3D Data Bar on page 337.

Creating Objects with Object Properties

Some of Vectorworks creation tools can be used in conjunction with the Object Properties dialog box.

28

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Rectangle
Tool

To create objects with the Object Properties dialog box:

1. Double-click the desired tool (or press the tools shortcut key twice).
The tools Object Properties dialog box opens.
2. Enter the desired criteria.
3. Click OK to accept the settings and exit the dialog box.
If Position At Next Click is selected, click the mouse to select the objects location in the drawing.

Using Arithmetic Expressions

Arithmetic expressions can be entered into most of the edit fields in Vectorworks, including the Object Info palettes
Shape tab and the Data bar. For this reason, the dash (-) cannot be used as a separator between feet and inches.
Parentheses can be used to override the default operator precedence. For example:
1 + 2 * 3 = 7 (without parentheses)
(1 + 2) * 3 = 9 (with parentheses)
Values can be entered in any unit; Vectorworks converts it into the current unit. For example, if the current unit is
Inches and an entry of 4+3 cm is made into the Object Info palette X field, Vectorworks converts the units
automatically. The result, 5.1811, is displayed.

Moving Around
Vectorworks provides several ways to move around within a drawing file, which allows you to look at the whole
drawing or at select portions of it. These navigation tools work for both 2D and 3D drawings.

Panning
Use the Pan tool to move the drawing around the drawing window, changing the area of display.
To pan around the drawing:
1. Click the Pan tool from the Basic palette.

Moving Around |

29

2. Move the hand into the drawing window.

3. Click and hold down the mouse button, and drag the drawing around the screen.
The rulers move with the page.
4. When the drawing shows the desired area, release the mouse button.

Double-click the Pan tool to refresh the drawing view.

Panning with the Mouse Wheel

On a wheel-mouse, click and hold down the mouse wheel to pan at any time, regardless of which tool is currently
selected.
This feature will not work properly if the wheel button has been assigned a custom function in the mouse setup. For
example, if the wheel button is set to perform a delete when clicked, a wheel click in Vectorworks deletes rather than
pans. (The specific setting required for this feature depends on the type of mouse being used.)

Panning with the Arrow Keys

Use the arrow keys on the keyboard to pan at any time, regardless of which tool is currently selected. Specify the
arrow shortcut keys for panning in Vectorworks preferences (see Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 47). Press
the shortcut key combination once to move the drawing one half-screen in the direction of the arrow.

Moving the Page Print Boundary

The Move Page tool changes the position of the print boundary within the drawing area. Though the boundary
moves, the rulers, origin, and objects remain fixed. In 3D, the working plane does not move along with the boundary.
To move the page:
1. Click the Move Page tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click and drag the page outline to the desired location.
The original position of the page continues to display, helping to measure your movement.
3. Click to set the position of the page.

30

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Paste in Place works from user origin. If the page is moved, the image is placed in relation to the origin, not the new
page location.
Double-click the Move Page tool to set the page origin to be the same as the user origin.

Zooming
Zoom controls the visual scale of a drawing. It does not affect the physical size of objects as set by the layer scale in the
Organization dialog box. Like a magnifying glass, zoom controls how close or far away objects appear on the screen.
Zoom in to get a close-up view of a detail, and zoom out to get a broader view of the whole drawing.
Vectorworks includes zoom functionality through the mouse wheel, through buttons on the View bar, and through the
Zoom tool on the Basic palette.

Zooming with the Mouse Wheel

On a wheel-mouse, roll the mouse wheel forward to magnify the drawing (the Zoom tool on the Basic palette need not
be selected). Roll the mouse wheel backward to zoom out from the drawing.
The mouse wheel behavior is controlled by the Mouse wheel zooms setting in the Edit tab of the Vectorworks
Preferences dialog box. If the wheel is set to scroll by default, you must press the Ctrl (Windows) or Option
(Macintosh) key while you roll in order to zoom. See Edit Preferences on page 47 for details.
This feature will not work properly if standard scrolling is disabled in the mouse setup. For example, if the
mouses scrolling size is set to none, mouse zooming in Vectorworks is disabled. (The specific settings required
for this feature depend on the type of mouse being used.)

Zooming from the View Bar

From the View bar, click the Zoom button to double the magnification of the drawing (a single-click on this button
performs the same function as a double-click on the Zoom tool on the Basic palette). To reduce the magnification by
half, press the Alt key (Windows) or Option key (Macintosh) when you click the Zoom button. To zoom by a specific
amount, enter a zoom factor in the View bar, or select one from the pull-down list.
If an object or objects are currently selected, the zoom is centered on those object(s). To zoom on a specific area of the
drawing (with nothing selected), click in an open area and then click the Zoom button.

Zoom In/Out

Current Zoom

Moving Around |

31

Zooming with the Zoom Tool

The Zoom tool has two modes.
Marquee Zoom

Interactive Zoom

Mode

Description

Marquee Zoom

Magnifies the portion of the drawing that is within the marquee area; in click-drag mode,
simply click once (do not create a marquee box) to double the zoom factor
To zoom out, hold down the Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) key during the zoom.

Interactive Zoom

Interactively zooms the drawing area

With the Zoom tool selected, double-click anywhere in the drawing to automatically activate either the 2D or 3D
Selection tool. (If the drawing is in a 3D view, the 3D Selection tool is activated, otherwise, the 2D Selection tool
is activated.)
Double-click the Zoom tool on the Basic palette to double the magnification of the drawing. The Zoom In button
on the View bar performs the same action.

Marquee Zoom Mode

Select a portion of the drawing to magnify using marquee selection.
To marquee zoom:
1. Click the Zoom tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click the Marquee Zoom mode button.
3. Click and drag to create a marquee box around the portion of the drawing to magnify.
4. Click again to zoom in.
Vectorworks magnifies the selected section so that it fills the drawing window.

32

| Chapter 1: Introduction

To zoom out, hold down the Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) key while you draw a marquee box around a
portion of the drawing. Click again to zoom out. Vectorworks reduces the magnification to display additional portions
of the drawing around the selected section.

Interactive Zoom Mode

Choose an area of the drawing to magnify interactively.
To interactively zoom:
1. Click the Zoom tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click the Interactive Zoom mode button.
3. Click in the drawing and hold down the mouse button (Macintosh) or left mouse button (Windows) while you
move the mouse forward to zoom in on the drawing from the location of the click.
To zoom out, click in the drawing and hold down the mouse button (Macintosh) or left mouse button (Windows)
while you move the mouse backward to zoom out of the drawing from the location of the click.

Scrolling
Automatically Scrolling While Drawing
Vectorworks automatically scrolls the drawing area when an object is being drawn.
To use autoscroll:
1. Select any drawing tool.
2. Press and hold down the mouse button to begin drawing.
3. Drag the cursor on top of or past a scroll bar or ruler.
The drawing window scrolls in the direction of the cursor.
In click-click mode, if you do not hold down the mouse button while you draw, the autoscroll is halted if the
cursor passes a scroll bar or ruler; this allows interaction with the scroll bars, tool palettes, and tool sets.

Using the Scroll Bars

Use Vectorworks scroll bars to move the drawing around the screen. However, the scroll bars are best used for small
movements, because they require the screen to redraw more frequently. For large movements, the Pan tool is faster. To
display or hide the scroll bars, change the scroll bars setting in the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box.

Scrolling with the Mouse Wheel

On a wheel-mouse, press the Ctrl (Windows) or Cmd (Macintosh) key while you roll the wheel forward or backward
to scroll the window up or down. To scroll the window left or right, press the Shift key while you roll.

Selecting Objects |

33

The mouse wheel behavior is controlled by the Mouse wheel zooms setting in the Edit tab of the Vectorworks
Preferences dialog box. The wheel can be set to scroll by default, so that no additional key must be pressed while you
roll in order to scroll. See Edit Preferences on page 47 for details.
This feature will not work properly if standard scrolling is disabled in the mouse setup. For example, if the
mouses scrolling size is set to none, mouse scrolling in Vectorworks is disabled. (The specific settings required
for this feature depend on the type of mouse being used.)

Selecting Objects
Use the 2D Selection or 3D Selection tool on the Basic palette to select objects for the next command or edit operation.
The Shift key and the Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) key are modifiers for selection actions. Create rectangular,
lasso, or polygonal marquees around objects to select single or multiple objects. The following table describes the
various selection methods.

Method

Selection Action

Click

Standard selection method; selects a single object only

Option-click (Macintosh) or
Ctrl-click (Windows)

Creates a copy of the object and places it directly over the selected object

Shift-click

Selects multiple objects as each object is clicked; also can be used to deselect
one or more objects without affecting other selected objects

Option-drag (Macintosh) or
Ctrl-drag (Windows)

Places a copy of the object where the mouse button is released

Rectangle, lasso, polygon marquee

Selects all objects that are completely contained within the marquee

Shift-marquee

Reverses the selection status of objects inside a marquee; if objects inside the
marquee are selected, this method deselects those objects

Option-marquee (Macintosh) or
Alt-marquee (Windows)

Selects all objects that the marquee passes through, as well as those contained
within the marquee

Invert Selection command (on the

Edit menu)

Deselects everything that is currently selected, and selects all visible objects in
editable layers and classes that are not currently selected

To deselect all selected objects, click in an empty area of the drawing, or press the x key twice in rapid succession.

Selection and Pre-selection Indicators

When you move the cursor over the objects in a drawing, and when you select objects, highlighting and handles
provide information about the current state of the objects. These indicators can be customized as needed in the
Vectorworks preferences. See Interactive Preferences on page 54 for details.

Highlighting
Highlighting can indicate the following information about an object in a drawing.

Currently selected
Currently pre-selected because it is under the cursor (or within the selection marquee)
Locked
On an inactive layer

34

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Causing one of the displayed snap points

Can be acted upon by the currently active tool
In the Vectorworks preferences, there are several options to customize the highlighting.

The different types of highlighting can be enabled and disabled individually.

The highlighting for selected objects can be animated.
The timing of the highlighting for pre-selected objects can be adjusted.
The color, opacity, and size of each type of highlighting can be adjusted.

By default, all highlighting options are enabled, and selected objects display as shown in the following illustration.

The cursor is snapping to

the circles center; the circle
has gray dashed line
highlighting, in addition to
the orange selection
highlighting

Objects highlighted in orange

are on the active layer and
are not locked

Objects highlighted in gray

are locked

Objects highlighted in dark

orange are on an inactive layer

Sample highlighting with several types of objects selected

Handles
In addition to highlighting, square handles can display on selected objects. The appearance of the handles is
controlled by the Selection highlighting setting on the Interactive tab in the Vectorworks preferences. Also, the colors
of the handles can be customized.
If selection highlighting is enabled (the default setting):

Handles display on a selected object if the object can be edited with the active tool
Unlocked objects on the active layer have blue handles
Unlocked objects on an inactive layer have white handles
Locked objects have no handles (since they cannot be edited)
Handles can be used as reshape points

If selection highlighting is disabled:

Handles display on all selected objects

Unlocked objects on the active layer have blue handles
Locked objects on the active layer have gray handles
All objects on an inactive layer have white handles
Some of the handles can be used as reshape points, and some cannot, depending on the object, and on which tool
is active

Selecting Objects |
Selection highlighting enabled

The selected wall is highlighted

in orange; blue handles
indicate that the wall can be
reshaped with the active tool

With three walls selected, the

locked wall (bottom) is highlighted
in gray; there are no handles
because the objects cannot be
reshaped with the active tool

35

Selection highlighting disabled

With three walls selected, the locked

wall (bottom) has a gray handle on
the right side; the unlocked walls
have blue handles

Customizing Highlighting and Handles

To adjust the selection and pre-selection indicators:
1. Select Tools > Options > Vectorworks Preferences and click the Interactive tab. Set the parameters in the
Highlighting section of the tab as needed. See Interactive Preferences on page 54 for details.

2. Click Interactive Appearance Settings to customize the various types of highlighting or the handles. See
Configuring Interactive Display on page 70 for details about the Interactive Appearance Settings dialog box.

36

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Object
handle
elements

Adjust the
available
settings as
needed

Object
highlighting
elements

3. Click OK to save the settings and close the dialog box.

4. From the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box, click OK again to save the preferences.

2D Selection Tool
Use the 2D Selection tool to select objects, to move and resize objects, and to insert objects in or next to a wall.
An additional mode, Enable Connected Walls, becomes available when Vectorworks Architect is installed. See
Moving Connected Walls on page 69 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide for information.
For marquee selection press the Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) key while drawing the marquee to select all
objects that intersect the marquee.

Selecting Objects |
Single Object
Interactive Scaling

Wall
Insertion

37

Enable 2D Cursor
Lasso Selection

Disable Interactive
Scaling

Enable 2D Cursor
Polygonal Selection

Unrestricted Interactive
Scaling

Enable 2D Cursor
Rectangular Selection

Mode

Description

Disable Interactive Scaling

No reshape handles display for a selected object, so that it can be dragged from any
point without accidentally affecting its size

Single Object Interactive

Scaling

Allows resizing by dragging a reshape handle that displays on a single selected object
Drag the middle handle
to the right to reduce the
rectangles width

To rotate certain 2D objects (such as rectangles, rounded rectangles, ovals, bitmaps,

and PICT images), press the Option key (Macintosh) or Alt key (Windows) while
dragging a reshape handle

Drag the lower left handle

upward and to the right to
rotate the rectangle

Unrestricted Interactive
Scaling

Allows resizing of multiple objects by dragging a reshape handle that displays on one
of the selected object(s)
Drag the middle
handle to the right
to reduce the width
of both rectangles

Wall Insertion

Allows symbols and plug-in objects that are already on drawing to be placed into a
wall segment. When disabled, symbols can be moved next to or on a wall without
becoming part of the wall. See Wall Insertion Mode on page 197 for more
information.

38

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Mode

Description

Enable 2D Cursor
Rectangular Selection

Creates a marquee box around objects when selecting. Click to set the start point, drag
the mouse in the desired direction, and release to set the end point. All objects within
the marquee are selected.

Enable 2D Cursor Lasso

Selection

Creates a free-form marquee, allowing a more exact selection of irregular 2D shapes.

Click to set the start point, drag the mouse in the desired direction, and release to set
the end point. All objects within the marquee are selected.

Enable 2D Cursor
Polygonal Selection

Creates a marquee with an irregular polygonal shape. Click to set the start point, and
then continue clicking to define the shape. Double-click to finish the marquee. All
objects within the marquee are selected.

To select 2D objects:
1. Click the 2D Selection tool from the Basic palette.
2. Select the appropriate mode.
3. Select the desired object(s).

Selecting Objects |

39

3D Selection Tool
Use the 3D Selection tool to select, move, or resize 3D objects in orthogonal views. When the tool is active, two smaller
lines project from the X (green axis) and Y locations in the drawing area. These lines help to identify the Z location of
the tool in the drawing.
The reference for the view, whether working plane or active layer plane, may depend on the selection in the Working
Planes palette (see Working Plane View and Modes on page 644).
The first three modes of the 3D Selection tool are not active, but provide consistency between the 2D and 3D
selection tools when using the U, I, O, P shortcut keys. See the Mode Modifier shortcuts in Modifying Snapping
and Mode Shortcuts on page 829.
The first mode determines how symbols insert into walls. The last three modes allow the selection of 3D objects using
a marquee shape.
An additional mode, Enable Connected Walls, becomes available when Vectorworks Architect is installed. See
Moving Connected Walls on page 69 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide for information.
For marquee selection press the Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) key while drawing the marquee to select all
objects that intersect the marquee.
Rectangular Selection

Wall Insertion

Polygonal Selection

Lasso Selection

Mode

Description

Wall Insertion

Allows symbols that are already on drawing to be placed into a wall segment. When
disabled, symbols can be moved next to or on a wall without becoming part of the wall. See
Wall Insertion Mode on page 197 for more information.

Rectangular Selection

Creates a marquee box around objects when selecting. Click to set the start point, drag the
mouse in the desired direction, and release to set the end point. All objects within the
marquee are selected.

40

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Mode

Description

Lasso Selection

Creates a free-form marquee, allowing a more exact selection of irregular 3D shapes. Click
to set the start point, drag the mouse in the desired direction, and release to set the end
point. All objects within the marquee are selected.

Polygonal Selection

Creates a marquee with an irregular polygonal shape. Click to set the start point, and then
continue clicking to define the shape. Double-click to finish the marquee. All objects within
the marquee are selected.

To select 3D objects:
1. Click the 3D Selection tool from the Basic palette.
2. Select the view, if needed, and the appropriate selection mode.
3. Select the desired object(s).

Select All
The Select All command selects all visible objects in editable layers and classes. The active layer is always editable, but
other layers can be editable if they are visible and if the Layer Options are set to Show/Snap/Modify Others. For more
information about setting layer and class visibility and layer and class options, see Setting Visibilities on page 125
and Setting Class and Design Layer Options on page 120.
To select all objects in the drawing area:
Select Edit > Select All.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the drawing area, and select Select All from the
document context menu.
Vectorworks selects all visible objects that can be modified. Each of these selected objects is displayed with
highlighting. Locked objects are also selected so they can be unlocked for modification.

Selecting Objects |

41

Previous Selection
The Previous Selection command reselects the set of objects that were most recently selected. This is especially useful
if a large number of objects were accidentally deselected.
To reselect previously selected objects, select Edit > Previous Selection.

Context Menus
Click on an object, plug-in object, the drawing area, or a section of the Resource Browser with a right-click (Windows)
or Ctrl-click (Macintosh), to display a menu containing context-sensitive commands that pertain to the selected item or
items. If several similar items are selected, only the applicable context menu commands become available to all the
items in the selection.
This list is not exhaustive, as the capability is continuously being extended to additional Vectorworks commands
and tools.
Many different types of objects have the same global context commands available, such as Cut, Copy, and Paste.
These are listed once, under Object rather than listing them repeatedly for each type of object.

Item and Context Commands

Description

Document
Activate Class
Activate Layer

Activates the class or layer of the object nearest to the last mouse click. These
commands provide quick access to the class or layer of any object currently
displayed.

Force Select

Activates the class, layer, or both (as necessary), and selects the object nearest
to the last mouse click

Active Layer Scale

Accesses the Layer Scale dialog box; from there, change the scale of the
active design layer (or all design layers)

Document Preferences

Provides a shortcut to the command of the same name on the File >
Document Settings menu

Palettes

Provides a shortcut to palette display options on the Window > Palettes

menu

Layer Options

Provide shortcuts to the commands of the same names on the View menu

Class Options

Object
Activate Class
Activate Layer

Force Select

Activates the class or layer of the object clicked upon, even if the object could
not normally be selected due to a different layer scale, or the current class or
layer option settings. These commands provide quick access to the class or
layer of any object currently displayed.
Activates the objects class, layer, or both (as necessary) and selects the object,
even if the object could not normally be selected due to a different layer
scale, or the current class or layer option settings

Cut, Copy, Paste, Select All

Provide shortcuts to the commands of the same names on the Edit menu

Send, Rotate

Provide shortcuts to the commands of the same names on the Modify menu

42

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Item and Context Commands

Description

Lock, Unlock

Provide shortcuts to the commands of the same names on the Modify menu

Add Surface, Clip Surface,

Intersect Surface

When two or more closed 2D objects are selected, provides shortcuts to the
commands of the same name on the Modify menu

Edit

When a 2D object is selected in a 3D view, changes the view to Top/Plan for

2D object editing

Properties

Accesses the objects properties dialog box, which is similar to the Object
Info palette; it contains information specific to the selected object

Create Similar Object (Design

Series required)

Creates an object that matches an object that is already in the drawing. See
Creating Similar Objects on page 691 in the Vectorworks Design Series
Users Guide.

Plug-In Objects
Path Plug-In Object, Path Plug-in
Object with Profile

Includes Extrude along Path and for the Design Series, Chain Extrude and
Piping Run

Edit, Edit Path

Provides a shortcut to the Edit Group command on the Modify menu

Edit Profile

If permitted by the object type, allows you to switch from editing the path to
editing the profile. Similarly, if editing the profile, use the context menu to
switch to path editing.

Group
Edit

Provides a shortcut to the Edit Group command on the Modify menu

Ungroup

Provides a shortcut to the command of the same name on the Modify menu

Symbol
Edit

Provides a shortcut to the Edit Symbol command on the Modify menu

Replace

Similar to the Replace button on the Object Info palette, accesses the Choose
a Symbol dialog box for replacing the symbol instance with a different
symbol

Edit 2D Component, Edit 3D

Component, or Edit 3D Wall Hole
Component

Edits the 2D or 3D component, or the 3D wall hole component of the symbol

instance; if editing one of the components, the context menu allows you to
switch directly to editing the other component

Resource
Locate in Resource Browser

When executed from the drawing, on a resource (or object containing a

resource, such as a rectangle with a hatch), this context menu command
locates, navigates to, and selects that resource in the Resource Browser; see
Locating Specific Resources on page 184

Resource Browser

The resources context menu contains shortcuts for creating, applying, and
managing resources and also for manipulating how resources display in the
Resource Browser. Additional options display on the menu depending on
the specific item clicked upon (see Working with Resources on page 185).

Text
Format Text

Provides a shortcut to the command of the same name on the Text menu

Selecting Objects |
Item and Context Commands

Description

Check Spelling

Checks the spelling in the current text block

Edit

Places the text in text editing mode

43

Sheet Border
Show Grids

Toggles between showing and hiding grid text and lines in the sheet border
margin

Title Block

Opens the Import Title Block dialog box, for adding a title block to the sheet
border; see Adding a Title Block on page 517

Working Plane
Working plane commands

Provides shortcuts to the working plane commands available from the

Modify menu; see Working Plane Commands on page 641

Wall or Round Wall

Join

Activates the Wall Join tool for joining wall segments; see Joining Walls on
page 561. The tool defaults to the mode used previously with the tool

Remove Break

Activates the Remove Wall Breaks tool to clean up wall breaks or gaps; see
Removing Wall Breaks on page 561

Viewport
Edit Annotations, Edit Crop, Edit
Design Layer

Provide shortcuts to edit the viewports annotations, crop, or design layer,

bypassing the Edit Viewport dialog box (see Cropping Sheet Layer
Viewports on page 714). The context menu commands can also be accessed
when in an edit viewport mode (for example, to switch directly from editing
a crop to editing annotations)

Edit

Opens the Edit Viewport dialog box

Edit Design Layer

Activates the design layer of the right-clicked object (if the right-clicked
object does not belong to a design layer, the Edit Viewport dialog box opens)

Exit Viewport

Exits the viewport directly to the design layer when editing a design layer
from a sheet layer viewport. The Exit Viewport context menu is only
available if Navigate Back to Viewport is selected from the Edit Viewport
dialog box.

Update

Updates the viewport, similar to the Update button on the Object Info
palette

Light
Turn On/Off

Toggles the light on or off

Set Light to View, Set View to Light

For directional, spot, or custom (Renderworks required) lights, sets the

orientation of the light to that of the current view, or the orientation of the
view to that of the light

Edit (Design Series required)

For Spotlight lighting devices, edits the instrument properties

Edit Light
(Design Series required)

For Spotlight lighting devices, edits the light contained within the
instrument

44

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Item and Context Commands

Description

Worksheet on Drawing

Other worksheet context menu commands are described in Worksheet

Commands on page 656

Recalculate

Recalculates all formulas in the worksheet

Dimension
Format Text

Provides a shortcut to the command of the same name on the Text menu

Chain Dimension

For more information on editing chain dimensions, see Editing Chain

Dimensions on page 509

Add Dimension

Adds a dimension or witness line to the chain

Delete Segment/Witness Line

Deletes dimension or witness line

Edit Dimension

Edits the properties of an individual dimension

Format Text

Provides a shortcut to the command of the same name on the Text menu

Layer Link
(Design Series required)
Convert to Viewport

Converts the layer link to a design layer viewport

Edit Crop

Enters crop mode for a cropped layer link Cropping Layer Links on
page 725

Edit Design Layer

Returns to the design layer of the object in the layer link

Navigation Palette
(Design Series required)

The options that display on the context menu depend on the specific item
clicked upon; see Navigating Within Drawings on page 699 in the
Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide

Redline (Design Series required)

Pick Up Redline, Restore Redline

Toggles the redline status to picked up or restored

Site Model (Design Series required)

Edit Source Data

Accesses the source data in Edit Group mode (see Setting Site Model
Properties on page 212 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide)

Edit Site Border

Accesses an editing mode for creating a custom site border, cropping the
DTM (see Cropping a Site Model on page 213 in the Vectorworks Design
Series Users Guide)

Update

Updates the site model, similar to the Update button on the Object Info
palette

Plants (Design Series required)

Create Plant from Object

Creates a plant definition for the current plant symbol

Edit

Opens the Edit Plant dialog box, for editing the plant 2D/3D components,
definition, or path (for multiple plant placements)

Replace Plant

Replaces the plant symbol, similar to the Replace Plant button on the Object
Info palette

Selecting Objects |
Item and Context Commands

Description

Export Plant

Exports the selected plant to the specified location; see Exporting

Resources on page 29 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide

45

Double-clicking on an object performs the same function as selecting Edit from the context menu.
The context menus can be customized through the Workspace Editor; see Modifying Context Menus on page 825.

46

| Chapter 1: Introduction

Getting Started

This chapter describes how to get started with Vectorworks Fundamentals. It describes how to set up basic program
preferences, units, and default options. Printing and using tablets with Vectorworks are also described.

Setting Vectorworks Preferences

Vectorworks preferences are options that apply to every Vectorworks file you open, every time you run Vectorworks.
To change the Vectorworks preference settings:
1. Select Tools > Options > Vectorworks Preferences.
The Vectorworks Preferences dialog box opens. There are seven preferences tabs (Edit, Display, Session, 3D,
Autosave, Interactive, and User Folders).
2. Click one of the tabs to set the Vectorworks preferences for that tab.
3. Click OK to save the settings.

Edit Preferences
Click the Edit tab to set preferences that control various edit functions in Vectorworks.

Parameter

Description

Click drag drawing

Lets you draw objects with the click-drag method rather than the click-click method
(click-click is the default). Click once with the mouse button and do not release; drag the
cursor to a desired location and then release. See Using the Mouse on page 27.

Eight reshape handles

Shows eight handles (four corner and four center) on most objects; deselect the option to
display only four corner handles

48

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Offset duplications

When you use the Duplicate command, places the duplicate object so that it is offset from
the original object; deselect the option to place duplicates directly over the original

Auto join walls

When you use the Wall tool, automatically joins walls at corners and intersections; when
walls are separated, their ends automatically heal; when walls have core components,
components also automatically join (see Automatically Joining Walls on page 549)

Separate sheet views

Saves the view origin and zoom factor for each sheet layer; deselect the option to use the
same view for all design layers and sheet layers

Mouse wheel zooms

Sets the default behavior of the mouse wheel and the Mighty Mouse scroll ball. When
selected, the wheel zooms by default; when deselected, the wheel scrolls by default. See
Zooming with the Mouse Wheel on page 30 and Scrolling with the Mouse Wheel on
page 32 for details.

2D conversion res

Sets the number of segments that will be used to represent polylines and circles when you
draw and edit objects

Default compression

Specifies the default image compression to apply to images in a viewport cache and to
images created by the Render Bitmap tool (Renderworks required). PNG compression
provides the best image quality but produces larger files, while JPEG creates smaller files,
but with possible loss of detail. PNG is selected by default.

Arrow Keys

Select an arrow and modifier key combination as a shortcut for four common operations;
each key combination can be assigned to only one operation

Switch active layer/

class

Select the key combination that switches the active layer (up and down arrows) and the
active class (left and right arrows)

Pan drawing

Select the key combination that pans the drawing by half of the area currently in view

Nudge objects

Select the key combination that nudges objects by one pixel

Move objects

Select the key combination that moves objects, and select whether to move objects by the
snap grid distance or by the specified custom distance

Display Preferences
Click the Display tab to set the display preferences.

Setting Vectorworks Preferences |

49

Parameter

Description

Rulers

Shows the rulers

Scroll bars

Shows the scroll bars

Black background

Uses a black drawing background instead of the default white

Zoom line thickness

Lines in the drawing appear thicker when you zoom in; the screens redraw slower if
Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging is enabled

Adjust flipped text

Re-orients rotated and flipped text so that it is always readable

No fill behind text

Displays text without a fill pattern so that objects beneath the text are not obscured

Show parametric constraints

Displays parametric constraints

Show other objects while in

editing modes

When certain complex objects are edited, an Edit window with a colored border
displays in the drawing area.
When you edit solids, groups, symbols, or viewports in the Edit window, select this
option to make the other objects from the drawing visible and snappable during
editing; deselect the option to show only the object being edited. (See Object
Editing Mode on page 446 for more information.)
This option does not apply to other types of objects that are edited from the Edit
window, including extrudes, multiple extrudes, tapered extrudes, sweeps, meshes,
floors, and roof faces. For symbols, the option applies only when you edit a symbol
definition by clicking on a symbol instance in a design layer.

Gray other objects

Use VectorCaching for faster
drawing

If Show other objects while in editing modes is selected, select this option to gray
the objects in the drawing that are not being edited
Caches vector information for complex document entities, such as polylines and
hatches; while this makes screen redraws faster, it also can potentially increase
RAM requirements by up to 50 percent

50

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Center on objects after view

change

When the view is changed to one of the standard views (such as Top or Left
Isometric), automatically centers the view on the selected objects at the current
zoom level; if no objects are selected, the view is set to the center of all objects

Quartz imaging (Macintosh)

or GDI+ imaging (Windows)

Draws lines of equal thickness with round end caps; provides layer transparency,
better support for large-format printouts, and PDF export (see Exporting Files on
page 599)

Anti-aliasing

When Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging is enabled, blends the edges
of fills and lines for a smoother appearance

Display light objects

Controls the visibility of light objects; hide light objects to reduce screen clutter but
maintain light effects

Always

Light objects are always visible

Only in wireframe

Light objects are only visible in Wireframe mode; otherwise, they are hidden

Never

Light objects are hidden regardless of the render mode

Display 3D loci

Controls the visibility of 3D loci

Always

3D loci are always visible

Only in wireframe

3D loci are only visible in Wireframe mode; otherwise, they are hidden

Never

3D loci are hidden regardless of the render mode

Edit Font Mappings

Specifies the replacement fonts for fonts that are not available. Font mappings can
be changed or deleted. If mappings are deleted, the Font Mappings dialog box
appears so that unavailable fonts can be mapped.

Session Preferences
Click the Session tab to set general Vectorworks preferences.

Setting Vectorworks Preferences |

51

Parameter

Description

Use sound

Supplements the visual SmartCursor cues with audible cues; move the slider bar left
(to reduce) or right (to increase) the Vectorworks volume relative to the system
volume

Log time in program

Records in a log file the time spent in the program, as well as the time spent to open
and close documents; the date format depends on the language and regional settings
in the operating system. The log file is called VW User Log.txt, and it is created in the
User Data and Preferences Folder (which displays on the User Folders tab of
Vectorworks preferences).

Display minor alerts on

message bar

Displays minor warnings on the Message bar instead of in a dialog box

Stop VectorScript on
warnings

Halts the compile and execution of a VectorScript routine when a warning is

generated

Maximum number of
undos

Sets how many undo operations are kept in memory; the maximum number of undos
is 100

Issue undo warnings

Presents a dialog box when an action that cannot be undone is about to be performed

Undo view changes

Sets how Vectorworks handles view changes when you undo actions
Never - ignores all operations that are strictly view changes
Grouping All View Changes - treats all consecutive view changes as one single
undoable action
Grouping Similar View Changes - treats similar consecutive view changes as a
single undoable action
Individually - treats each individual view change as an undoable action

Enable palette docking

(Windows)

Lets you dock palettes; deselect the option to disable docks and to undock all active
palettes

Automatically append file

extensions (Macintosh)

Appends the appropriate file extension (.vwx, or .sta for template files) to a newly
created Vectorworks drawing on a Macintosh

Display default content

Enables pre-defined content (such as hatches and gradients) to display for selection
throughout the program

Create a new document

on startup

Creates a new, untitled file when Vectorworks is launched. The new file is based on
the Default.sta template file (if one exists); otherwise, it is blank.

Change active layer for

Similar Object Creation
(Design Series required)

When the Create Similar Object command is invoked, changes the active layer to be
that of the source object. Select this option to create the new object on the same layer
as the source object. See Creating Similar Objects on page 691 in the Vectorworks
Design Series Users Guide.

52

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Automatically check for

updates

Select how often Vectorworks should automatically check for available software
updates. When the specified update check interval has elapsed, an alert dialog box
displays if a new version of Vectorworks is available. If it is not convenient to update
Vectorworks at this time, click Cancel in the alert dialog box. The alert dialog box will
redisplay when the specified update check interval has elapsed. Otherwise, click
More Info in the alert dialog box to open a web browser to display and download
available updates. Vectorworks must be exited to successfully install the software
update.
If Vectorworks is unable to connect to the update server, it attempts to connect once a
day for seven days after the original failed attempt. If a connection to the update
server still cannot be established, a dialog box opens to suggest running a manual
update. If the Check for Updates command is run after the automatic update check
fails, the next automatic update check occurs the day after the manual check.

Error reporting

Optionally sends information about application crashes and other basic usage
statistics to Nemetschek North America, assisting with product development while
maintaining user privacy

Serial Numbers

Opens the Serial Numbers dialog box to add or remove serial numbers for all installed
Nemetschek North America products (see Adding and Removing Serial Numbers
on page xi)

Reset Saved Settings

Reverts to default settings instead of user-specified settings for tool modes, dialog box
positions, and dialog box values. For palette positions and settings, reverts to the
settings established when the custom workspace was created (in the User Data and
Preferences folder).
In the dialog box that opens, select whether to reset settings for always performing the
selected action in alert dialog boxes. Also select whether to reset settings for all tool
modes, dialog box positions, dialog box values, and palette positions and settings.
Click OK to return to the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box.

Palette margins
(Macintosh)

Sets whether the document window leaves a space for palettes when the window is
opened

3D Preferences
Click the 3D tab to set preferences for 3D edits.

Setting Vectorworks Preferences |

53

Parameter

Description

3D Rotation

Sets the detail level that displays while the 3D view is rotated. Select Detailed to display
objects completely, but to rotate slower. Select Responsive to rotate faster, but to display
objects with less detail during the rotation.

Retain Rendering
Model

Determines the degree to which Vectorworks retains the rendered model in memory
during 3D rotation. Select Never to force the model to always display in Wireframe
mode; select Always to force the model to remain rendered.

3D conversion res

Sets the segmentation resolution used to display curved 3D objects; affects extruded and
swept polylines, circles, and arcs

Autosave Preferences
Click the Autosave tab to set preferences for automatic file saves and backups.

54

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Autosave every

Enables the Autosave feature; also sets the number of minutes or operations between
autosaves

Confirm before save

Before each save, opens a dialog box so that you can choose either to save or to continue
to work without a save. The timer/counter resets regardless of which option is selected.
See Automatically Saving Files on page 9.

Overwrite original file

Writes over the original file with the latest changes during a save

Autosave a backup
copy to

Automatically saves a backup copy of the file either to a folder named VW Backup (in the
same folder as the original file) or to a custom location, such as a network drive (click
Choose to select a folder). The original file is not saved automatically; to save it, use one
of the save commands on the File menu.
Backup files have unique names that include the word Backup and a date and time
stamp appended to the original file name. Use backup file(s) to restore a project if
something happens to the original file.

Keep the ___ most

recent backups

If Autosave a backup copy to is selected, specifies the maximum number of backup files
to keep; the oldest backup file is replaced when a new backup is made

Interactive Preferences
Click the Interactive tab to set preferences for the display of the interactive drawing features in Vectorworks, such as
the cursor, selection boxes, and selection highlighting. See Drawing with Snapping and Constraints on page 139 for
more information about snapping. See Selection and Pre-selection Indicators on page 33 for more information about
highlighting.

Setting Vectorworks Preferences |

Parameter

55

Description

Cursor
Full screen cursor

Displays a crosshair cursor that extends to the edges of the drawing area

Show selection box

Displays a box beneath the cursor that indicates the active selection area; an object
beneath the box can be selected when the mouse is clicked

Show snap box

Displays a box around the cursor that indicates the area in which to find possible snap
points; when a snap point is beneath the box, it can be snapped to

Show acquisition hints

Show graphical hints near the cursor when smart points, edges, and vector locks can
be acquired (see Snapping Indicators on page 153)

Selection box size

Controls the size of the selection box, if Show selection box is selected; must be
smaller than the snap box

Snap box size

Controls the size of the snap box, if Show snap box is selected; must be larger than the
selection box

Highlighting
Selection highlighting

When enabled, objects that are selected are highlighted with the specified colors and
patterns, and square handles indicate points that can be used to reshape objects with
the tool that is currently active.
When this option is disabled, square handles indicate objects that are selected, and the
handles may or may not be reshape points.

56

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter
Animation

Description
If Selection highlighting is selected, specify how the selection highlights will be
animated when the cursor moves out of the drawing window or over a palette:
Off turns off all animation of highlights
On pulses the highlight continuously
Burst briefly highlights with 100% opacity

Cursor pre-selection
highlighting

Highlights any object that can be selected when the cursor is over the object

Highlighting timer

When a drawing object is beneath the cursor, specifies the number of seconds to delay
before pre-selection highlighting begins

Marquee pre-selection
highlighting

As a selection marquee is drawn over objects, highlights any object that will be
selected

Snapped object
highlighting

Highlights the geometry that generated the current snap

Tool highlighting

Highlights any object that can be modified or used by the current tool when the cursor
is over the object

Interactive Appearance
Settings

Opens a dialog box to change the appearance of the interactive elements in

Vectorworks, including general elements, object highlighting, SmartCursor elements,
and snap points; see Configuring Interactive Display on page 70

User Folders Preferences

Users can designate which folder will hold user data and preferences files. The subfolders within this folder mirror
several of the standard Vectorworks subfolders (Libraries, Plug-ins, Templates, and so on).
This duplication of folders in separate locations makes it easy for Vectorworks users to do the following:

Back up (or transfer to another computer) custom content and preferences

Work in an environment where user permissions are limited (such as a school lab)
Switch between users on the same computer
Update Vectorworks with no loss of custom files

When Vectorworks presents data in the interface, it includes content from the user folder as well as the content it ships
with. For example, select Modify > Hatch to edit a hatch; the Hatches dialog box shows all default hatches from your
Vectorworks and user folders.
A file in the user folder takes precedence if a file name is repeated in any of the folders. For example, if the
Hatches_Default.vwx file exists in both the user folder and the Vectorworks application folder, only the content from
the user folder shows in Vectorworks.
Click the User Folders tab to specify the user folder.

Setting Vectorworks Preferences |

57

Parameter

Description

User Data and

Preferences Folder

Specifies the folder that contains Vectorworks preferences, log files, workspaces, and any
personal content you create. This might be a folder on the local computer, or on a USB
drive or network drive; this allows you to run Vectorworks from any computer.

Choose

Click Choose to change the user data folder. Vectorworks must be restarted if you
change the location of the user data. See User Folders Preferences on page 56 for
details.

Explore (Windows)
or Reveal in Finder
(Macintosh)

To look at the contents of the current folder, click Explore (to open Windows Explorer) or
click Reveal in Finder (to open Macintosh Finder)

User Data and Preferences Folder

The User Data and Preferences folder contains the Vectorworks files that are created and used by you. Within this
folder, Vectorworks automatically creates subfolders for Libraries, Plant Database (Vectorworks Landmark required),
Plug-ins, Settings, Standards, Templates, VWHelp, and Workspaces.
Vectorworks automatically adds your customizations (such as workspace changes and Resource Browser favorites) to
the appropriate folders. To add content, place the file in the appropriate subfolder. For example, to add a custom
template, place the custom file in the Templates folder.
Vectorworks defaults the following locations for the user data folder, but they can be changed. Note that, by default,
Windows hides the application data folder; if you want to use the default location, adjust the folder options in
Microsoft Explorer to make hidden folders visible.

58

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Windows XP:
C:\Documents and Settings\<Username>\Application Data\Nemetschek\Vectorworks\2010\
Windows Vista: C:\Users\<Username>\AppData\Roaming\Nemetschek\Vectorworks\2010
Macintosh:
/Users/<Username>/Library/Application Support/Vectorworks/2010/
To change the user data folder:
1. From the User Folders tab, click Choose.
2. A confirmation dialog box displays. Click Yes to continue with the folder change.
3. Select a folder from the dialog box that opens, and click OK (Windows) or Choose (Macintosh).
4. Another confirmation dialog box displays. Click Yes to copy the user data to the new location, or click No to use
the Vectorworks defaults.
5. If you copy the data to the new location, and the destination folder already contains a file with the same name as
a file in the source folder, Vectorworks displays a notice that files in the destination folder will be overridden.
Click Yes to continue.
6. If any unsaved files are currently open, you are prompted to save them. Click Yes to continue.
7. Vectorworks copies the files to the new location and then closes automatically.
8. Restart Vectorworks.

Workgroup and Project Folders

If Vectorworks Design Series is installed, a section for Workgroup and Project folders displays at the bottom of this tab.
See Workgroup Folders on page 30 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide for details about using
workgroup folders.

Resetting Vectorworks Preferences

Click the Reset button at the bottom of the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box to reset Vectorworks preferences to
their defaults; this also clears the ten most recently opened files list and the font mapping table. Serial number(s), user
name, and company name are left intact. This operation cannot be undone.

Setting Document Preferences

Document preferences apply only to the current drawing, and they remain in effect until they are changed. When you
create a template, the current document preferences are saved with the template (see Using Drawing Tablets on
page 95).
To change the preference settings in the document:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Document Preferences.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) in the drawing area, and select Document
Preferences from the document context menu.
The Document Preferences dialog box opens.
There are three preferences tabs (Display, Dimensions, and Resolution).
2. Click one of the tabs to set the document preferences for that tab.

Setting Document Preferences |

59

Display Preferences
Click the Display tab to set the display preferences.

Parameter

Description

Black and white only

Draws objects using only the colors black and white (black items display as black, and
all colorsincluding graydisplay as white); this choice overrides any other color
settings (including viewport settings) and is used mainly for printing on black and white
printers.
To create a grayscale effect for prints and PDFs when this feature is enabled, use
pattern fills instead of solid color fills. Set the pattern foreground color to black,
and set the background color to any other color. Patterns 4 through 9 in the pattern
fill selection box display as various shades of gray.
These six patterns
display as grays in
prints and PDFs

Hide wall components

when layer scale < = 1:

Select to hide wall components when the layer is set to, or is below, the scale ratio
specified (does not affect wall component display in viewports; see Advanced Sheet
Layer Viewport Properties on page 708 to show or hide components in viewports)

Save viewport cache

Indicates whether to save viewport caches and radiosity solutions in the file; saving the
cache may increase file size, but saves time when files that contain viewports and
viewports rendered with radiosity renderings (Renderworks required) are opened. If
deselected, any viewports will require updating when the file is opened, and any
viewport radiosity solutions will require regeneration, but file size is reduced. Note that
the viewport cache(s) are already compressed to PNG or JPEG format to save space (the
format depends on the selection in Vectorworks preferences; see Edit Preferences on
page 47 for more information).

60

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Use layer colors

When specific pen and fill colors have been set for a design layer, draws all objects on
that layer with the specified colors (see Setting the Design Layer Color on page 109)

Mesh smoothing with

crease angle

Smooths mesh objects rendered with OpenGL or Renderworks; enter a higher crease
angle value for a smoother surface (valid values are 0 to 180).

Use automatic drawing

coordination (Design
Series required)

Automatically coordinates and updates sheet numbers and drawing numbers among
sheet borders, drawing labels, and section markers

Dimension Preferences
Click the Dimensions tab to set the dimension preferences.

Parameter

Description

Associate dimensions

Associates dimensions with the applicable objects. When a dimension is associated with
an object, the dimension automatically updates when the object it is applied to is
modified. For more information about associative dimensioning, see Dimensioning on
page 485.

Auto associate

Select this option to automatically associate a dimension to the top-most object when
more than one object shares a dimension endpoint

Create dimensions in
dimension class

Assigns dimensions to the Dimension class as they are created (default setting). If
deselected, created dimensions are assigned to the active class.

Dimension Standard

Select the default Dimension Standard to use, or click Custom to add a custom
dimension standard (see Using Custom Dimension Standards on page 485).
Changing the dimension standard does not affect dimensions that have already been
placed on the drawing.

Dimension Slash

Sets the desired Thickness of the slash at each end of a dimension, in points, mils, or
millimeters

Setting Document Preferences |

61

Default dimension standards are presented in the following table.

Standard

Description

Text Placement

Marker Style

Text Rotation

Above
Dim. Line

Slash

Aligned

Within
Dim. Line

Arrow

Horiz.

Arch

Architectural Standards

ASME

American Society of Mechanical

Engineers

BSI

British Standards Institute

DIN

German Standards

ISO

International Standards Organization

JIS

Japanese Industrial Standards

SIA

Swiss Standards

ASME Dual
Side By Side

American Society of Mechanical

Engineers

ASME Dual
Stacked

American Society of Mechanical

Engineers

X
X

Resolution Preferences
Click the Resolution tab to set the resolution preferences.

Parameter

Description

Rotated Text Display

Sets how rotated text is displayed: Highest quality shows rotated text at the best
quality available, Normal quality shows rotated text slightly jagged, and Bounding
box shows only a bounding box representing the texts location

62

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Bitmap Display

Sets how bitmaps are displayed: Full resolution shows bitmaps at the best resolution
available, Reduced resolution shows bitmaps at a reduced detail, and Bounding box
shows only a bounding box representing the bitmaps location. Reducing the resolution
saves time when using the Pan tool or scroll bars.

PICT/PDF (Quartz Only)

Export (Macintosh) or
WMF Export (Windows)

Sets the resolution at which the model will render for export. On Macintosh, when
Quartz imaging is enabled, sets the PDF export resolution; when Quartz imaging is
not enabled, sets the PICT export resolution (see Display Preferences on page 48).

Printing

Sets the resolution at which the model will render for printing

Setting Up the Drawing

Before beginning a new drawing, determine drawing properties like scale, units, interactive displays, color palettes,
line thickness, and dimension standards. See Palette Layout Options on page 21 to set the preferred window options
prior to setting up the drawing.
The combination of layers, classes, and views can produce a variety of drawings generated from a single file (see
Drawing Structure on page 97). Proper file setup ensures maximum usability for multiple output.
The three required Vectorworks drawing settings are layer scale, units, and drawing size. Once these are established,
optional drawing settings can be found in document preferences, scripts, snap and reference grids, layers and classes,
and other defaults; although making these settings is not required, it is recommended.
Setting up the layers and classes while setting up the drawing is recommended. See Managing Layers on page 100
and Managing Classes on page 112 for more detailed information about creating layers and classes.
When using templates, many of these settings will have already been specified.

Design Layer Scale

Layer scale is the ratio of the actual size of an object to its size in a drawing. For example, for Vectorworks default
layer scale of 1:1, every inch in the drawing represents an inch in the real world. The layer scale allows the graphic
properties of the drawing or model to be represented properly, as though you were drawing at a particular scale on a
piece of paper.
The layer scale value allows proper representation of these attributes:

Line weight
Line style (length of dashes)
Marker (arrowhead) size
Text size
Hatch scaling

Set the layer scale to be the same as the predominant output scale of the project, so that these attributes display as the
drawing will look at the intended format. When using viewports, these attributes often will not require any scaling.
Vectorworks can set one scale for all design layers in a drawing, or set a different scale for individual design layers.

Setting Up the Drawing |

63

Changing the Scale of the Drawing or the Active Design Layer

To change the scale of the active design layer or of the entire drawing:
1. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) in the drawing area to access the document context menu, and
then select Active Layer Scale. Alternatively, if the layer scale is displayed on the View bar, click the Layer Scale
button.
The Layer Scale dialog box opens.

2. Either select a scale, or enter a custom value in Paper Scale.

3. To simultaneously change the scale of all existing design layers in the entire drawing, select All Layers.
4. To scale text proportionally to the rest of the design layer, select Scale Text. Deselect Scale Text to keep the text at
its current size even if the scale changes.
5. Click OK to return to the drawing.

Changing the Scale of Selected Design Layers

To change the scale of one or more selected design layers:
1. Select Tools > Organization.
The Organization dialog box opens. Click on the Design Layers tab.
2. Select the layer(s) to change from the Design Layer list and click Edit (or double-click a single layer name).
The Edit Design Layers dialog box opens (see Setting Design Layer Properties on page 103).
3. Click Scale.
The Layer Scale dialog box opens.
4. Either select one of the scales, or enter a custom value in Paper Scale.
5. To scale text proportionally to the rest of the design layer, select Scale Text. Deselect Scale Text to keep the text at
its current size even if the scale changes.
6. Make sure that All Layers is not selected.

64

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

7. Click OK.

Normal Scale
The Normal Scale command automatically displays the drawing file at 100% of its real-world scale. For example, if a
drawing scale is set to 1:1, every inch on the monitor corresponds to an inch on paper. Normal scale is the scale at
which the drawing is printed.
To set the drawing to normal scale:
1. Select View > Zoom > Normal Scale.
Vectorworks changes the view so that the objects screen size and print size are the same.
2. If the drawing size is larger than the monitors dimensions, scroll or pan around the drawing to see all elements.

Units
Vectorworks provides a wide range of measurement systems to select from and also provides the flexibility to create a
customized measurement system. Vectorworks applies the selected measurement system globally throughout the
drawing, from the measurements that display on the rulers to those used in dimensions and worksheets.
The Units command opens the Units dialog box, which organizes units settings on two tabbed panes:
The General Display and Dimensions tab settings affect the units throughout the drawing and the rounding
settings for primary dimensions.
The Dual Dimensions tab contains many of the same parameters found on the General Display and Dimensions
tab, but its settings apply only to secondary dimensions. If dual dimensions are not being used, these settings
have no effect. For more information on dual dimensioning, see Dual Dimensioning on page 497.

Selecting a Unit System

To select or change the current measurement system:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Units.
The Units dialog box opens.
2. Specify the units display parameters, and then click OK.

Setting Up the Drawing |

Parameter

Description

Length
Units

Select the desired length measurement system from the list.

If this setting is changed from one metric unit to a different metric unit, the
Decimal precision and Dimension object precision values are automatically
scaled by the same ratio, to maintain the same inherent precision the document
had before. If the setting is changed from a non-metric unit to a metric unit, the
precision values are automatically set to new default values suitable for the
selected metric unit.

Custom

If the Custom unit is selected, click Custom to create a custom length measurement
system; see Creating a Custom Unit System on page 67

Show Unit Mark

Select to display the unit mark along with the unit value; if the Feet & Inches unit is
selected, Vectorworks automatically displays unit marks and therefore, Show Unit
Mark appears dimmed

Rounding Style

Rounding only affects how numbers are displayed; if the number 1.23456 is entered
with a rounding of .00, the value is recognized as 1.23456 but displays as 1.23

Fractional

Select for fractional rounding

Decimal

Select for decimal rounding

Exact as Fractions /
Non-Exact as Decimals

Select for a combination of fractional and decimal rounding

65

66

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Fractional Display for

Dimensions

If a fractional Rounding Style was selected, select a style for the fractions that appear
in dimensions:
Standard:
Diagonally stacked:
Vertically stacked:

Rounding Precision
Fraction precision

If a fractional or combination Rounding Style was selected, select the fractional

precision value, up to 1/64

Decimal precision

If a decimal or combination Rounding Style was selected, select up to ten digits of

decimal precision

Dimension object
precision

Select a precision value for dimension objects; to link the dimension value to the
fraction or decimal precision value, click the link button to the right of the precision
fields:

Decimal rounding base

Select whether decimal rounding is performed using multiples of tenths, quarters, or

halves; the option selected is reflected in the Decimal precision field

Dimension rounding
base

Select whether dimension rounding is performed using multiples of tenths, quarters,

or halves; to link the dimension value to the decimal base value, click the link button to
the right of the rounding base fields:

Decimal Options
Leading Zero

If one of the decimal rounding options is chosen, select to display a leading zero

Trailing Zeros

If one of the decimal rounding options is chosen, select to display trailing zero(s)

Area / Volume / Angle

Units

Select the area, volume, and angular measurement system from the list.
If this setting is changed from one metric unit to a different metric unit, the
Precision value is automatically scaled by the same ratio, to maintain the same
inherent precision the document had before. If the setting is changed from a
non-metric unit to a metric unit, the precision value is automatically set to a new
default value suitable for the selected metric unit.

Custom

If the Custom area or volume unit is selected, click Custom to create a custom area or
volume measurement system; see Creating a Custom Unit System on page 67

Precision

For area and volume measurement systems, select up to ten digits of decimal
precision. For angular measurement systems, select to display angular units in degrees
(there are 360 degrees in a circle, and the angle mark is ), radians (there are 2pi
radians in a circle, and the angle mark is r), or gradians (there are 400 gradians in a
circle, and the angle mark is g); also, select up to eight digits of angular precision or
specify degrees, minutes, and/or seconds.

Setting Up the Drawing |

67

Creating a Custom Unit System

To create a customized measurement system:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Units.
The Units dialog box opens.
2. Select Custom from the length, area, or volume Units list, or if editing an existing custom measurement system,
select the custom name from the Units list.
3. Click Custom.
The Custom Units:Length, Custom Units:Area, or Custom Units:Volume dialog box opens, depending on the
type of custom unit being created or edited. The available values in each field vary based on the custom unit
type.

Parameter

Description

Unit Name

Name given to the custom measurement systemfor example, Cubit

Unit Mark

Mark (abbreviation) used to represent a unit in the custom measurement systemfor

example, cbt

Smaller from Larger

Set the number of custom units that occur per selected unitfor example, There Are 2
Units Per Inch

Square Unit Mark

Set the number of selected units that occur per custom unitfor example, There Are 2
Inches Per Unit

4. Click OK to exit the Custom Units dialog box.

5. Enter the remaining criteria as described in Units on page 64.
6. Click OK.

Snap and Reference Grids

Vectorworks has two separate grid systems for precise drawing: the snap grid and the reference grid.

68

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Reference
Grid

Snap
Grid

The Snap Grid assists with drawing and placing objects precisely. The snap grid appears as small dots when zoomed
in, depending on the snap grid dimensions. The snap grid is used in combination with the Snap to Grid snapping
option on the Snapping palette. As the mouse moves across the screen, it automatically catches at each increment on
the snap grid. When you are placing or drawing an object, it snaps to the grid.
With shortcut keys, objects can be moved constrained to the snap grid. See Edit Preferences on page 47 for more
information.
The Reference Grid normally displays on the screen (depending on the zoom factor and grid dimensions), and can be
printed. The most useful way to set the reference grid is so that it is an extension of the set scale.
Depending on the drawing, the snap and reference grids can have identical or different dimensions. For example, if
you are designing kitchen cabinets with a tolerance of one-sixteenth of an inch, set the snap grid to 1/16. It would be
hard to draw on a screen that displayed 16 horizontal and vertical lines squeezed within every inch. For that reason,
you might want to mark off only whole inches on the screen by setting the reference grid to 1.
At file setup, establish the snap and reference grid settings based on the drawing scale. See Grid Snapping on
page 141. The color of the reference grid can be changed; see Configuring Interactive Display on page 70.

Guides
The Make Guide command enables the placement of guidelines which can be used to visually align objects in the
drawing. Vectorworks permits guides of any shape and size. In addition to providing visual clues, guides work with
Vectorworks SmartCursor to ensure precise alignment. Guide objects are locked into a class called Guides and are
colored light purple. Guides are printed unless the Hide Guides command is selected, or the Delete All Guides
command has permanently removed them.

To create a guide:
1. Create the object to become a guide.
2. Select the object.
3. Select Modify > Guides > Make Guide.
The object changes into a guide and is placed in a Guides class.

Setting Up the Drawing |

69

On the Guides command sub-menu, the following options can be selected.

Option

Description

Make Guides

The object becomes a guide

Select Guides

Selects all the guides in a drawing

Show Guides

Displays guides which were hidden

Hide Guides

Temporarily hides the guides in the drawing

Delete all Guides

Permanently removes all guides and the objects used to create them

You can snap objects to the guide(s) closest to it by using Snap to Object from the Snapping palette. The distance
at which the objects snap to the guides is determined by the Snap box size setting in the Vectorworks
preferences. See Interactive Preferences on page 54 for details on setting the snap radius setting.
To delete a single guide, highlight it and then select Modify > Unlock. The guide is now editable. Select Edit > Clear to
remove it from the drawing. A guide can also be unlocked in order to move it to a new location. Select Modify > Lock
to lock the guide into place once it is relocated.

Set Origin
Use the Set Origin command to change the placement of the origin in the drawing area. The origin is the point where
the X and Y axes meet (0,0). Its default placement is at the exact center of the drawing area.
All design layers have the same origin, but each sheet layer has its own origin, independent of the other layers.
To set the origin:
1. To set the origin for a specific sheet layer, select the sheet layer first.
Alternatively, edit the sheet layer properties from the Organization palette.
2. Make sure the drawing is in Top/Plan view.
3. Select Tools > Set Origin. The Set Origin dialog box opens.
Alternatively, double-click the Set Origin button (see Set Origin Button on page 70).

70

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Set Origin to Next Mouse Click

Changes the cursor to a bulls-eye cursor; click to set the origin to any point
within the drawing area

Set Origin to Drawing Center

Sets the origin to the internal drawing center; the drawing center is a fixed
internal point used to position all objects

Next Mouse Click Is

Sets the clicked point to specific coordinates. After selecting this option, enter
the X and Y coordinates of the point. The origin is set according to the values
entered when clicking a locus point or another reference point. This option is
most useful for drawings that have a distant reference point.

Disable dragging for the Set

Origin button

Disables the Set Origin button, to prevent the origin from being moved
inadvertently

4. Click OK.

Switching Between Two Origins

One reason to change the origin is to make it easier to work with the ruler bars. For example, the Swiss use a reference
point system for architectural measurements, where everything is in relation to a point in Europe. When a building is
located at a site, that site is referenced to be a certain distance and direction from this point. Using this system creates
large numbers on the ruler bars and in the Object Info palette. In the Set Origin dialog box, Vectorworks provides the
ability to switch between the local origin (the building site) and the distant origin (the reference point).
After setting the local origin and a distant center, it is easy to switch between them. The offset values entered for the
distant origin are saved with the file, so no information needs to be re-entered unless the origin is changed.

Set Origin Button

The Set Origin button is at the top left of the drawing window, at the junction of the two rulers. This button performs
the same function as the Set Origin to Next Mouse Click option described in Set Origin on page 69.

To use the Set Origin button:

1. Click the Set Origin button. When you move the cursor over the drawing area, you are prompted to confirm that
the origin should be moved.
If the Set Origin button has been disabled, a message displays in the Message bar. Select Tools > Set Origin or
double-click the Set Origin button to open the Set Origin dialog box and enable the button.
2. Move the cursor to the new location, and click to set the origin.

Configuring Interactive Display

When getting started, it is helpful to customize the appearance of interactive elements of Vectorworks, including
general elements, object highlighting, SmartCursor elements, and snap points.

Setting Up the Drawing |

71

To configure the appearance of interactive elements:

1. Select Tools > Options > Vectorworks Preferences. On the Interactive tab of the Vectorworks Preferences dialog
box, click Interactive Appearance Settings.
Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings. On the General tab of the SmartCursor Settings dialog box, click Interactive
Appearance Settings.
The Interactive Appearance Settings dialog box opens, showing a list of all elements that can be customized.
Click the column heading to sort by interface element, if desired.

Element

Description

General
Active Layer Plane

Sets the color and opacity of the active layer plane

grid

Example

72

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Element

Description

Editing Modes Border

Sets the color, opacity, and thickness of the colored

border when in an editing mode

Grid

Sets the color and opacity of the reference grid

Page Boundary

Sets the color and opacity of the page boundary

border

Reshape Handles - Active

Layer

Sets the color of the square handles that can be

dragged to reshape a selected object on the active
layer

Reshape Handles - Inactive

Layer

Sets the color of the square handles that can be

dragged to reshape a selected object on an inactive
layer

Working Plane

Sets the color of the working plane and opacity of

its fill and frame, as well as the opacity and
thickness of the working plane axes

Object Highlighting
Active Layer

Sets the pattern, forecolor, backcolor, opacity, and

size of the highlighting for an object that is selected
on the active layer

Inactive Layer

Sets the pattern, forecolor, backcolor, opacity, and

size of the highlighting for an object that is selected
on an inactive layer

Locked

Sets the pattern, forecolor, backcolor, opacity, and

size of the highlighting for an object that is locked

Pre-Selection - Active Layer

Sets the color, opacity, and size of the highlighting

for an object that is pre-selected on the active layer;
an object can be pre-selected by being either under
the cursors selection box, or inside a selection
marquee

Example

Setting Up the Drawing |

Element

Description

Pre-Selection - Inactive
Layer

Sets the color, opacity, and size of the highlighting

for an object that is pre-selected on the inactive
layer

Pre-Selection - Locked

Sets the color, opacity, and size of the highlighting

for an object that is locked

Snap Object

Sets the color, opacity, and size of the highlighting

for an object that is being snapped to; the
highlighting is always a dashed line

Tool Highlighting

Sets the color, opacity, and size of the highlighting

for an object that can be edited by the active tool

SmartCursor
Acquisition Hints

Sets the color, opacity, and size of the graphical

hints which display near the cursor to show when a
smart point, smart edge, or vector lock can be
acquired or released

Cue Background

Specifies the background color and opacity of

SmartCursor cues

Cue Text

Sets the color and size of SmartCursor text

Datum Indicator

Sets the color, opacity and size of the datum

indicator

Edges

Sets the color, opacity and size of smart edge lines

Points

Sets the color, opacity, and size of smart points

Example

73

74

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Element

Description

Selection Box

Sets the color, opacity, and size of the selection box

around the SmartCursor

Snap Box

Sets the color, opacity, and size of the snap box

around the SmartCursor

Vector Locks

Sets the color, opacity, and size of vector locks

Example

Snap Points
Available

Sets the color, opacity, and size of snap points

available near the cursor and within the snap box

Congestion Indicator

Sets the color, opacity, and size of the snap box

when there are too many available snap points
around the SmartCursor (using the snap loupe is
recommended in this situation; see Using the Snap
Loupe on page 158)

Current

Sets the color, opacity, and size of the current snap

indicator

Obtained

Sets the color, opacity, and size of the acquired snap

point

Special

Sets the color, opacity, and size of snap point hints

such as midpoint, center, along line, and tangent
snaps

Reset

Restores default Vectorworks parameter settings for

all interface elements

2. Select the element to change, and then set the parameters that display to the right of the element list as needed.
Different parameters display, depending on the element selected.

Setting Default Object Attributes |

Parameter

Description

Pattern / ForeColor / BackColor

To use a solid color, select the color from the ForeColor menu; then from the
Pattern menu, select the solid pattern for that color

75

To use a pattern, select the ForeColor and BackColor colors from the menus
(see Selecting a Color from a Color Palette on page 80); then select a Pattern
Color

Select the color from the menu (see Selecting a Color from a Color Palette on
page 80)

Opacity

Drag the slider right to increase or left to decrease the opacity of the interactive
element

Size

Drag the slider right to increase or left to decrease the width of the interactive
element

3. Click OK to save the settings, which apply to all Vectorworks drawings.

Setting Default Object Attributes

Settings in the Attributes palette control both default and individual object attributes. These attributes are
automatically applied to newly drawn objects unless a class attribute is assigned (see Setting Class Properties on
page 115 and The Attributes Palette on page 273 for more information).
Certain default attributes can be adjusted to accommodate office standards.
Markers (Line endpoint styles)
Line thickness

Color palette(s)
Patterns

Dash style

Colors, dash style, and patterns are saved in the current drawing or in a template. Markers and line thickness are
global settings and apply to all Vectorworks drawings.
Gradient and image fills are provided as default resources and can also be defined in the Resource Browser. See
Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173, Gradient Attributes on
page 287 and Image Attributes on page 292.

Setting Default Marker Types

The marker list specifies which markers are available for selection.
To set the default markers:
1. Select Tools > Options > Edit Marker List.
The Edit Marker List dialog box opens.

76

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Current
Marker Types

Lists the marker types that are available for selection when drawing; change the list order by
clicking and dragging in the # column

New

Creates a new marker type; see Creating or Editing Marker Types on page 76

Edit

Edits the currently selected marker type; see Creating or Editing Marker Types on page 76

Delete

Deletes the currently selected marker

2. Click OK to set the default list of available marker types.

Creating or Editing Marker Types

To create or edit marker types:
1. From the Edit Marker List dialog box, click New to create a new marker type, or click Edit to change the
currently selected marker type.
The Edit Marker dialog box opens.

Setting Default Object Attributes |

Parameter

Description

Preview

Displays a preview of the markers appearance

General Options

Specifies the markers shape and style

77

Root Type

Specifies the general shape of the marker

Fill

For closed root types, specifies the type of fill

Base

For triangular root types, specifies the shape of the base

Angle

For triangular and hexagonal root types, indicates the angle of the root

Length

Indicates the length of the marker, from base to tip

Width

Specifies the marker width, for marker types that have a width

Half Tick

For marker types except cone and lasso, displays half the marker on the indicated side

Tail

For markers which can be reversed, flips the marker direction to create a tail marker

Thickness Options

Specifies the marker pen thickness

78

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Use Line Thickness

Uses the same thickness as that of the associated line, adjusting automatically along
with any line thickness changes

Use Dimension Slash

Thickness

Uses the same thickness as the dimension slash, set on the Dimensions tab of the
document preferences (see Dimension Preferences on page 60)

Use Custom
Thickness

Specifies a custom marker thickness and unit (mils, points, or millimeters)

2. Click OK to create or edit the marker.

The new marker is listed at the top of the marker types list.

Setting Default Colors and Palettes

The Color Palette set provides colors for selection and specifies which colors are available in a Vectorworks file. Any
set of unlimited colors can be included; colors are organized in standard and/or custom color palettes.
In a new file, the active document color palette is the only palette displayed in the Color Palette set, and it contains
only the colors black and white. As colors are added to the file from color palettes as well as resources, the active
document color palette expands to display all the colors used in the file.
To display and manage the colors available for the file:
1. From the Attributes palette, click on one of the color boxes for Fill color or Pen color, when a Solid style is
selected. A similar interface is available from other areas in the application where colors are specified, although
the Color By Class option is only available when accessed from the Attributes palette.
The Color Palette set opens, displaying the colors in the active color palette.
Standard Color Picker
Pick Color
Color Palette Manager

Named color display area

Colors in selected active palette

(Grid view)

Active color palettes

Utility Menu
Color Palette set in a new file, showing the
default active color palettes

Color Palette set in a file with active

color palettes

Setting Default Object Attributes |

79

Parameter

Description

Color by Class

When using the Color Palette set to specify an objects color, causes the object to take
on the color attribute set by the objects class; see Applying Colors on page 273

Standard Color Picker

Opens the operating systems color picker for selecting individual colors; see
Selecting Standard Operating System Colors on page 80

Pick Color

Opens the Pick Color dialog box, for selecting a color from available color palettes; see
Selecting a Color from a Color Palette on page 80

Color Palette Manager

Opens the Color Palette Manager dialog box, for managing available color palettes
and activating additional palettes; see Managing Color Palettes on page 81

Named color display

area

Displays any color name information associated with the selected color.

Colors in active palette

Displays the selected active palettes available colors in either Grid or List view; these
colors are available for use in the file

Active palettes

Lists palettes which have been made active for the file with the Color Palette Manager;
click on a palette name to display its colors for use in Vectorworks

Utility Menu

Opens a utility menu to control the color palette sorting and display

This area also serves to find a named color in the active color palette. To easily find a
named color, begin typing; the letters display in the named color display area and the
closest color match is selected. Press the Tab key to cycle through the closest matches;
pause for several seconds to start the search over.

2. Either select a color from one of the files color palettes, or click off of the Color Palette set (in the drawing
window, for example) to close the color window and set the files available colors.

Utility Menu
The options selected from the color palette Utility Menu button at the bottom of the main Color Palette set indicate the
color sorting and display.
To set the display and sorting of colors and palettes:
1. From the Color Palette set, click the Utility Menu button to open the utility menu.

Menu/Command

Action

View Color Palette as

Select to view the colors in the Color Palette set as a grid of colored squares, or a list of
colors and associated names. (In either view, color names are always shown in the
display area above the colors as the mouse moves over the colors.)

80

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Menu/Command

Action

Sort Color Palette by

Specify the sorting method for the active color palette; select Color to sort by hue
(HSV values), Manual to sort according to the order set in the Color Palette Manager,
or Alphabetical to sort in ascending or descending order by color name

Place Color Palettes at

Select whether to display active color palettes at the top or bottom of the Color Palette
set

Shrink Grid to Fit

In Grid view, color lists of less than 16 rows can be displayed with a Color Palette set
option that shrinks to fit the available colors

2. Select a utility command to change the color palette display or sorting option.

Selecting Standard Operating System Colors

When specifying or creating color palettes is not necessary, the operating systems color picker adds individual colors
to the active document color palette.
To select a standard operating system color:
1. From the Color Palette set, click the Standard Color Picker button.
The Colors (Macintosh) or Color (Windows) dialog box opens.
2. Select a color from among the standard operating system colors, and click OK.
3. The color is added to the active document color palette, and becomes available for use in Vectorworks.

Selecting a Color from a Color Palette

If a file requires colors beyond those available for the standard system color picker, but you do not wish to add and
manage palettes in the Color Palette set, select a color from a specific color palette.
To add colors from a color palette:
1. From the Color Palette set, click the Pick Color button.
The Pick Color dialog box opens, listing the color palettes available. The Colors in Active Document palette is
always available. Other palettes in the list either ship with Vectorworks, or have been added with the Color
Palette Manager.

Setting Default Object Attributes |

81

Parameter

Description

Color Palette list

Lists the color palettes from which colors can be selected. Click on the header to sort
the palettes in ascending/descending alphabetical order. Select a palette to display its
colors on the right.

Color List

Lists the colors in the selected palette; click on the header to sort by color or by color
name. Select a color to add it to the Colors in the Active Document palette.

Color Grid

Displays the colors in the selected palette as a grid; select a color to add it to the Colors
in Active Document palette

Color Information

Displays the color information of the selected color, including Name; Red, Green, Blue
(RGB); Cyan, Magenta, Yellow, and Black (CMYK); and Hue, Saturation, and Value
(HSV). This information also displays on a tooltip when the cursor hovers over a color.

2. Select a color palette from the left, and then select the color from the list or grid of colors on the right.
3. Click OK to add the color to the active document palette, and make it available for use in Vectorworks.

Managing Color Palettes

The Color Palette Manager determines which color palettes are available in the main Color Palette set and the Pick
Color dialog box. With the Color Palette Manager, create or import custom color palettes, activate palettes for use in
Vectorworks, add and delete colors from custom color palettes, and purge unused colors.

82

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

To manage the files color palettes:

1. From the Color Palette set, click the Color Palette Manager button.
The Color Palette Manager dialog box opens. The palettes available here are located in the Color Palettes library
of the default resources; see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173.

Parameter

Description

Color palette list

Lists the files available color palettes. Click on a header to sort the palettes by active
status or color palette name. Click in the Active column of a selected palette to activate
the palette and add it to the available palettes in the main Color Palette set.

Color List

Lists the colors in the selected palette; click on the header to sort by color or by color
name

Color Grid

Displays the colors in the selected palette as a grid

New

Opens the New Palette dialog box, for creating a custom color palette or importing a
color palette file; see Creating or Editing Custom Color Palettes on page 83

Edit

Opens the Edit Palette dialog box, for editing the selected custom palette; see
Creating or Editing Custom Color Palettes on page 83

Duplicate

Copies the selected color palette and appends an incrementing number to the copy
name (change or rename the copied palette by clicking Edit)

Setting Default Object Attributes |

Parameter

Description

Delete

Deletes the currently selected color palette; only custom palettes can be deleted, but
not the Colors in Active Document or standard color palettes

Purge Unused

When the Colors in Active Document palette is selected, removes any colors that are
not in use in the file from the Colors in Active Document palette

83

Referenced colors remain in the active document color palette, even from an
object that has been removed. Purging allows accumulated colors to be trimmed.
2. When the list of color palettes and active color palettes is set, click OK.

Creating or Editing Custom Color Palettes

Custom color palettes can be created or edited from the Color Palette Manager.
Type the first few letters of a palette (or color, when the cursor is in the color list) to quickly select a color.
To create or edit a custom color palette:
1. Open the Color Palette Manager as described in Managing Color Palettes on page 81.
2. Click New to create a new palette, or Edit to make changes to the currently selected palette.
The New Palette or Edit Palette dialog box opens.

84

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Name

Specifies a name for a new color palette, or edits the name of a custom color palette

Color List

Lists the colors in the custom palette; click on the header to sort by number in the list,
color, or color name. To change the order of the colors, click in the # column and drag
the selected color up or down in the list. (Select Manual from the color palette utility
menu to sort the colors in the main Color Palette set in this order; see Utility Menu
on page 79)

Color Grid

Displays the colors in the custom palette as a grid

New

Opens the New Color dialog box, for adding a new color from the operating systems
color picker

Edit

Opens the Edit Color dialog box, for editing the selected color using the operating
systems color picker

Delete

Deletes the currently selected color(s) from the custom color palette

Get

Opens the Pick Color dialog box, for adding one or more colors selected from the
available color palettes (see Selecting a Color from a Color Palette on page 80)

Lighten

Incrementally lightens the selected color

Darken

Incrementally darkens the selected color

RGB Blend

Blends two selected colors according to their Red, Green, Blue (RGB) values, to create
the specified number of new colors (up to 1000)

HSV Blend

Blends two selected colors according to their Hue, Saturation, and Lightness (HSV)
values, to create the specified number of new colors (up to 1000)

Import

Imports all the colors from the Colors in Active Document palette of another current
version Vectorworks file

3. When the colors have been edited or added to the custom color palette, click OK.
The custom color palette is listed in the Color Palette Manager. By default, custom color palettes are saved in the
user folder (see User Folders Preferences on page 56).

Creating a Color Chart

This command creates a color chart in the active layer of the current file that reflects the colors in the color palette of
the document. It can be used as a print color guide.
To create a color chart:
1. Select Tools > Utilities > Create Color Chart.
2. Confirm that a color chart of the active layer in the current file should be generated.
If desired, select Show color palette index numbers to show the color index numbers in the chart.

Setting Default Object Attributes |

85

The index numbers are internal to the color palette and always remain in the same order.

Setting the Default Dash Styles and Display Order

The Dash Styles dialog box specifies which dash styles are available and controls the order in which they display for
selection in various dialog boxes. For each file, up to 118 customized styles can be added to the ten default styles, for a
total of 128 styles.
To set the files default dash styles and display order:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Dash Styles. The Dash Style dialog box opens.
Alternatively, from the Attributes palette, click the Line Style setting to open the Line Style list. From the list,
select Edit Dash Styles.

86

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Indicates the dash style display order in the various dialog boxes where the styles
display.
To change the dash style order: If the list is not currently sorted by the # column, click
the # column heading to select it. Then click the # column of the style(s) to be moved,
and drag it up or down the list. A horizontal line indicates where the style(s) will be
inserted in the current order.

Name

Displays the name of the dash style

Dash Style

Displays a graphical representation of the dash style

New

Opens the Edit Dash Style dialog box, to create a new dash style based on the currently
selected style. Up to 118 customized styles can be added to the ten default styles, for a
total of 128 styles. Once at the 128 style limit, this button is disabled.

Edit

Opens the Edit Dash Style dialog box, to edit the currently selected dash style

Delete

Deletes the currently selected dash style; if the deleted dash style has been applied to
objects, the Map Dash Style dialog box opens to select the replacement dash style

2. To create a new dash style, click New; to edit the currently selected style, click Edit.
The Edit Dash Style dialog box opens. To set the dash style, either drag the levers of the highlighted section on
the graph, or highlight the desired section with the arrow buttons and specify Line Length and Gap Length
values.

Parameter

Description

Name

Enter a unique name for the dash style

Setting Default Object Attributes |

87

Parameter

Description

Dash graph

Levers indicate the distance (in page inches or page millimeters) between dash sections;
a section consists of a line and a gap. Drag a new lever from the right edge of the dash
graph to add a dash section, or drag a lever to the right to delete a section. Up to ten
levers can define a dash style.
Define the section visually by dragging the levers of the highlighted section until the
line and gap are at the desired distance. The distance between the first two highlighted
levers indicates the line length, and the distance between the last two highlighted levers
indicates the gap length.

<< or >>

Selects a highlighted section for editing; alternatively, click on the section to highlight

Line Length

Specifies the length of the line, in page units, for the highlighted dash section

Gap Length

Specifies the length of the gap, in page units, for the highlighted dash section

Scale with line thickness

Maintains the proportion between the dash style and the line thickness

The 2D line dash pattern is automatically adjusted to prevent spaces at either end of the line.

3. Click OK to return to the Dash Styles dialog box.

4. Click OK to set the default dash styles and display order for the file.
When you export a file to a version prior to Vectorworks 2010, the list of dash styles is truncated to the number
supported by the target version. When the truncated list is created, unused dash styles will be removed before those
that are in use. Dash style names are lost during the export.

Setting the Default Line Thickness

To set the default line thickness:
1. Select Tools > Options > Line Thickness.
The Preferred Line Thickness dialog box opens. Select the preferred line thickness criteria.

88

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Parameter

Description

Units

Select the Units to be used for the thickness of the edited line

New

Enter the new thickness value to replace the current thickness value listed to its left

2. Click OK to set the default list of available line thicknesses.

Setting Default Patterns

To set the files default patterns:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Patterns.
The Edit Patterns dialog box opens. Enter the desired pattern criteria.

Creating Templates |

Parameter

Description

Pattern

Select one of the 36 patterns to edit from the Pattern list, and then click in the left pattern box to
add/delete pixels; the edits change the overall pattern in the right box

Revert

Restores the pattern to its original settings

89

2. Click OK to set the default list of available patterns.

Creating Templates
Save a drawing file as a template to use it as a foundation for new files. Templates save layers, classes, title blocks,
sheet borders, resources, and the current settings for attributes and units. (See Creating a New File on page 4 for
details about using a template.)
When a template is opened, Vectorworks automatically opens a copy of the file. When the new drawing is saved the
first time, Vectorworks prompts for a new file name. This makes it impossible to accidentally replace the master
template with the new drawing file.
To create a template:
1. Start with a new, empty file.
2. Set up the file with all of the desired elements.
3. Select File > Save As Template.
4. Enter the name of the template (.sta) file and place it in an appropriate Templates folder. (See User Folders
Preferences on page 56 for details about how to specify the folder for your user data.)
To save the template for personal use, place it in the Templates subfolder in your user data folder (which is
the default).
If Vectorworks Design Series is installed, you can share the template with other users in a workgroup. To do
so, place it in the Templates subfolder of a workgroup folder on a network drive; other users can then specify
that workgroup folder in their Vectorworks preferences.
The .sta extension is required for Windows. It is recommended for use on the Macintosh if the file will be shared
with Windows users.

90

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

5. Click Save.
Vectorworks launches with a blank drawing file, in 1:1 scale. To launch Vectorworks with a file containing different
settings, name the template file Default.sta and save it in the Templates subfolder in your user data folder.

Printing
The Print Area
Within the drawing area is a colored border which defines the print area. Anything within the print area is printed and
anything outside of the print area is not printed.

Print area

Drawing area

Vectorworks uses the settings from both the Page Setup and Printer Setup dialog boxes to determine the number of
sheets of paper (pages) required to print the entire drawing on the selected printer.
This allows the same drawing to be printed or plotted to numerous sources without readjusting the drawing. By
entering the dimensions of a D size sheet of technical paper in the Printable Area of the Page Setup dialog box, and
selecting Letter paper size in the Printer Setup dialog box, Vectorworks determines that the drawing needs to be
tiled across 12 sheets of 8-1/2 x 11 paper to a standard laser printer. The number of 8-1/2 x 11 pages required for
printing horizontally and vertically are automatically updated in the Page Setup dialog box. When sending this same
drawing to a plotter, change the settings in the Page Setup dialog box for a plotter, and Vectorworks converts the pages
required accordingly.
The color of the print area border can be changed; see Configuring Interactive Display on page 70.
The page setup (including the printable area) is specified individually for each sheet layer (see Setting Sheet
Layer Properties on page 111).

Page Setup
The Page Setup dialog box settings determine the number of sheets of paper (pages) required to print the entire
drawing on the selected printer. It is also used to specify whether to display the gray drawing boundary box
representing the print area for design layers, and whether to display page breaks in the drawing file.
To change the page setup settings:
1. Select File > Page Setup.
The Page Setup dialog box opens.

Printing |

Parameter

Description

Pages
Horizontal

Specify the number of pages in the horizontal direction

Vertical

Specify the number of pages in the vertical direction

Show page boundary

Select to display a gray border around the perimeter of the print area for design layers;
alternatively, press Alt+B to toggle selection in this field.
Sheet layers always display the page boundary.

Show page breaks

Indicates how the drawing is divided over each printable page; for design layers, the
page boundary must be displayed in order to see the page breaks

Printable Area
Choose size
unavailable in
printer setup

If the desired paper size is not available in the Printer Setup dialog box (see Printer
Setup on page 91), select this option, and then select the desired paper Size from the
list; this is useful when sending files to a print bureau that has different paper sizes
available than your printer

Size/Width/Height

To manually specify the paper size, select the appropriate drawing units (inch or
millimeter) and enter the paper Width and Height

Printer Setup

Accesses the Printer Setup dialog box for specifying the printer, paper size, drawing
scale, and orientation; see Printer Setup on page 91

2. Specify the page setup options, and click OK.

Printer Setup
The Printer Setup dialog box settings determine the printer, paper size, scale, and orientation of the drawing.
To change the printer setup settings:
1. Select File > Page Setup.
The Page Setup dialog box opens.

91

92

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

2. Click Printer Setup.

The Printer Setup dialog box opens, configured to the selected printer.

3. Scaling resizes the entire drawing by a specified percentage. To access the Scaling field in the Macintosh Printer
Setup dialog box, select Vectorworks from the Settings list.
Selecting a printer in Printer Setup (Macintosh) only changes the drawings settings; to change the printer used for the
drawing, access the Macintosh System Preferences.

Printing a File
Vectorworks can print or plot to any device that is selected in the Print & Fax System Preferences (Macintosh) or
Printer and Faxes Control Panel item (Windows). The actual parameters of the printed or plotted file are determined
by the printer setup settings.
All visible objects, classes, and layers within the print area of the Vectorworks file are printed.
To print a file:
1. Select File > Print. On the Macintosh, specify the printer setup parameters and then click OK.
The Print dialog box opens; the options that display depend on which printer or plotter is selected.
To display additional print options on the Macintosh, select Vectorworks from the drop-down box that displays
the default option, Copies & Pages.

Printing |

Windows Print dialog box with GDI+ Imaging enabled

93

Macintosh Print dialog box with Quartz Imaging enabled

2. Specify the print options, such as which pages to print and how many copies to make. The following
Vectorworks print settings are available:

Platform

Setting

Description

Macintosh

Application Print
Resolution (DPI)

Sets a resolution for the application output. Either select a

recommended DPI value for this printer type (from the
drop-down list), or manually enter a value. When Quartz
imaging is enabled, this always defaults to a minimum of 300
DPI, for optimum printing results.

Macintosh - QuickDraw
imaging only

Print PostScript
only

If you have a PostScript printer, you can select this option to send
only PostScript commands to the printer; this can speed the print
process

Windows and Macintosh

Gray level for

grayed layers and
classes

Adjusts the level of gray when printing with grayed layers and
or/classes

94

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Platform

Setting

Description

Windows and Macintosh

Enable special
processing for
transparent color
bitmaps

When GDI+ imaging is disabled in the Vectorworks display

preferences on Windows, or Quartz is disabled on the Macintosh,
some printers (including PostScript printers) cannot support
transparent color for raster images, which can affect bitmaps and
picture objects that have the fill style set to None. Select this
option to use a more detailed (and slower) imaging process to
print transparency properly.

Macintosh - QuickDraw
imaging only

Disable driver text

rotation

Translates rotated text into a bitmap image, to prevent problems

with printer drivers that cannot interpret rotated text

Windows and Macintosh

Print current view

only (Macintosh)
or Current View
(Windows)

Prints the view currently displayed in the file window; this view
is scaled larger or smaller to fit the selected page size

Windows, Macintosh QuickDraw imaging

only

Rasterize print
output

Prints the drawing as a raster bitmap. Select this option when the
printer memory is insufficient, or when image problems occur
(for example, to print design layer transfer modes on OS X or on
PostScript printers).

Windows and Macintosh

Print patterns at
on-screen
resolution

Prints fill patterns at approximately the same size as they appear

on the screen at a 100% zoom. (When QuickDraw imaging is
enabled on Macintosh, this option has an effect only if the
Rasterize print output option is also selected.)
Deselect this option to use the unscaled printer resolution (which
is usually much lower); on non-PostScript printers, this prints
faster.

Windows and Macintosh

Update visible out

of date viewports
prior to printing

Automatically updates any visible, out-of-date viewports before

printing

Windows and Macintosh

Reset all plug-in

objects that require
a reset prior to
printing

Automatically resets plug-in objects that require an update (such

as data stamps) before printing

3. If the Rasterize print output option is selected, specify the edge of the image onscreen that is the first edge to
come out of the printer.
The first edge to come out of the printer depends on the printer driver, the page orientation, and the rotation
options that are supported by the driver. It cannot be predicted by Vectorworks. If the wrong page edge is
selected, some portions of the drawing may fail to print if the printer runs out of memory.
The Rasterize Print Output method can be significantly slower than other print methods.
4. Click Print (Macintosh) or OK (Windows) to print.

Using Drawing Tablets |

95

Using Drawing Tablets

Vectorworks can be used with drawing, or digitizing tablets, providing an additional way to create drawings. The
program is compatible with Apple Desktop Bus (ADB) digitizing tablets as well as digitizing tablets that support the
WinTab standard.
A common use for a tablet involves tracing an existing hard copy of a drawing. Place the drawing on the tablet and
trace along the lines to digitize the drawing. Because tablets usually have finer resolution than a mouse, there is better
control for creating objects. Further, if the tablet uses a stylus for input, use of the tablet might feel more natural,
similar to holding a pen or pencil versus using a mouse.
Using a digitizing tablet with Vectorworks requires the driver software that comes with the tablet. Select Tools >
Tablet; Vectorworks searches for this driver. Once found, Vectorworks determines the size and resolution of your
tablet. (If Vectorworks cannot find the driver, a dialog box opens.)
Once the driver is found, a gray box displays around the drawing area. This box outlines the boundary of the drawing
tablet; the movement of the tablets transducer is constrained to this boundary box. In order to access menus and
palettes that are outside of this boundary, either toggle out of Tablet mode or keep the mouse connected and use it to
select these items.
The tablet boundary depends on the size of the tablet as well as the current layer scale and zoom factor. A tablet with a
4" x 3" usable area with an imperial layer scale of 1" : 100' would be constrained to a drawing area 400' x 300' in
Vectorworks. Naturally, adjusting the zoom factor will reduce the apparent physical size of the constrained area in
relation to the screen, but the internally represented dimensions remain constant.
The Tablet command synchronizes the tablet with the scale and units settings for the drawing. For example, if you
have the Scale set to 1:1 and the Units set to Feet and Inches, then 1 inch on the tablet equals 1 inch in the drawing area
on the screen. Further, if you have the Units set to Meters and the Scale set to 1:100, then 1 inch on the tablet equals 2
meters in the drawing area.
Due to differing tablet resolutions and sizes, these values might be different than what is obtained for the same
settings. Experiment with the settings to achieve the desired results. For example, for one inch on the tablet to
equal 2 meters in the drawing area, you might have to set the Scale to 1:50 versus 1:100.
To use a drawing tablet:
1. Select Tools > Tablet.
Vectorworks displays the tablet as a large gray border in the drawing area. This border may not be visible,
depending on the zoom and scroll.
2. Follow the directions that came with the tablet for using it to trace or draw objects.
While in Tablet mode in Windows, using button 1 to click on a tool or menu outside of the drawing area has no
effect. Use button 2 to toggle out of Tablet mode before selecting the tool or menu.
Vectorworks assigns certain functions to the buttons on the tablet cursor and supports cursors with up to four
buttons. Vectorworks also provides the option of pressing the keyboards F2, F3, and F4 keys for buttons 2, 3, and
4, respectively. This is particularly useful for drawing tablets that have fewer than four buttons. Vectorworks has
an automatic scrolling feature which, when activated in Tablet mode, scrolls the screen image when moving the
cursor past the displayed edge of the drawing. These functions are described in the following table.

Button No.

Function

Same function as a (left) mouse click

Toggles the Tablet mode on and off

96

| Chapter 2: Getting Started

Button No.

Function

Re-centers the display to the current position of the pointer; no effect when Tablet mode is disabled

Toggles automatic scrolling on and off

Aligning a Tablet
When using a tablet, Vectorworks provides options for aligning it with the drawing area. Align the center of the
drawing with the tablets center, align the 2D locus point with the center of the tablet, or align the 2D locus point with
the position on the tablet of the next tablet cursor click. By default, Vectorworks aligns the center of the tablet with the
center of the drawing area.
To align the 2D locus with the center of a tablet:
1. Set a locus point.
See Creating 2D Loci on page 271 for details on setting loci. Keep the locus point selected.
2. Select Tools > Tablet.
If already in Tablet mode, deselect and select it again to align the tablet.
The Tablet to Screen Mapping dialog box opens.
3. Click Align Tablet Center to Selected Locus.
The Align Next Tablet Click to Selected Locus option allows you to trace multiple objects from different sources
and have them display in the drawing at the correct coordinates. For example, if two buildings need to maintain
a set distance from each other, set a locus point, align the tablet to that locus, and create the first building. When
that building is completed, set a second locus where the second building is supposed to be, realign the tablet, and
create the second building. The boundary for the tablet is moved and the relationship between the objects is
maintained.
4. Click OK.
The center of the tablet is now aligned with the selected locus point. The tablets boundary box moves to indicate
the center of the drawing tablet in relation to the drawing area.
This action only affects the center of the drawing tablet. The drawing areas origin is unaffected.

Drawing Structure

Vectorworks offers several features to help organize and display a drawing: design layers, sheet layers, classes,
viewports, and views. Create a structured system with these features to make it considerably easier to select, view, and
print drawing elements.
For efficiency and consistency, create master libraries of layers, classes, and resources that can be shared by multiple
users via workgroup referencing.
This section describes these organizational aids and how to use them effectively.

Organizing the Drawing

When you begin a drawing project, first develop a layer and class structure, along with a system for assigning items to
the appropriate layers and classes. A Vectorworks layer is basically a container that holds items. Layers are
comparable to the sheets of vellum that are used for hand-drafting; each item belongs to a layer in the same way that
a hand-drafted item belongs to its vellum sheet. A class, however, is an attribute of an object. Classes span the layers
and allow you to control the attributes and visibility of objects across multiple layers. To output specific elements of a
drawing quickly and easily, simply select the appropriate layers and classes for display.
Vectorworks also provides ways to save the current drawing display with histories and saved views, and to present
final drawings with viewports. Views and histories provide a slice-of-time look at the drawing. Histories record
views of the drawing in a stack similar to the way Internet browsers do, while saved views store one or more aspects
of the current display, such as the view, zoom, and layer and class visibility settings. Viewports are used to display
final views of a drawing for client presentation.
Create and manage these structural elements using the Organization dialog box. This dialog box has specialized
functions to sort and select its list items; see List Box Functionality on page 24.
To use the Organization dialog box:
1. Select Tools > Organization. Alternatively, click the Classes or Layers button on the View bar, or select Edit View
from the Saved Views menu on the View bar.
The Organization dialog box opens.

98

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

2. Select the appropriate tab for the Vectorworks element to be created or edited: Classes, Design Layers, Sheet
Layers, Viewports, Saved Views, or References.
3. From the top of the dialog box, select either Details or Visibilities view.
Generally, the Details view shows the current settings for each element, and enables editing of layer and class
visibilities in the drawing area; the Visibilities view enables editing of layer and class visibilities in viewports and
in saved views.
4. Buttons at the bottom of each tab provide creation and management functions. Alternatively, right-click
(Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a list item to display a context menu, which has most of the same
functions as the tab buttons.

Button

Function

Classes tab
New

Click New to open the Class Options (Macintosh) or New Class (Windows) dialog box. See
Creating Classes on page 113.

Edit

Select a class and click Edit to edit it in the Edit Class(es) dialog box. See Setting Class
Properties on page 115.

Duplicate

Select a class and click Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the duplicate is the same as
the original class, with a number added (as in cabinets-2); if the original name ends in a
number, the next available sequential number is used.

Delete

Select a class and click Delete to open the Delete Class(es) dialog box. Specify what to do with
the objects currently assigned to the class(es) being deleted (delete them, or reassign them to
another selected class). Click OK to return to the Organization dialog box. Vectorworks moves
all objects in the deleted class(es) to the appropriate class, or deletes them, as specified.
Note that the Dimension and None classes cannot be deleted. These are default classes in every
drawing.

Preview

Displays a preview of the current settings in the drawing area

Design Layers tab

New

Click New to open the New Design Layer dialog box. See Creating Layers on page 101.

Edit

Select a layer and click Edit to edit it in the Edit Design Layers dialog box. See Setting Design
Layer Properties on page 103.

Duplicate

Select a design layer and click Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the duplicate is the
same as the original layer, with a number added (as in floorplan-2); if the original name ends
in a number, the next available sequential number is used.

Delete

Select a design layer and click Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm the deletion. When
a design layer is removed from the drawing, all objects in that layer are also removed.
Note that at least one design layer must remain in the drawing.

Preview

Displays a preview of the current settings in the drawing area

Update
Reference

(Layer import referencing method only) This option is available if a design layer has been
imported into this file with workgroup referencing (the name of the referenced layer displays
in italics). To update this file with layer information from the master file, right-click (Windows)
or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the layer, and select Update Reference from the context menu. See
Workgroup Referencing on page 128.

(on the context

menu only)

Organizing the Drawing |

Button
Page Setup

99

Function
Opens the Page Setup dialog box. See Page Setup on page 90.

Sheet Layers tab

New

Click New to open the New Sheet Layer dialog box. See Creating Layers on page 101.

Edit

Select a sheet layer and click Edit to edit it in the Edit Sheet Layers dialog box. See Setting
Sheet Layer Properties on page 111.

Duplicate

Select a sheet layer and click Duplicate to create a copy of it. The Sheet Title of the duplicate is
the same as the original layer. The Sheet Number of the duplicate is the same as the original
layer, with a number added (as in details-2); if the original Sheet Number ends in a number,
the next available sequential number is used.

Delete

Select a sheet layer and click Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm the deletion

Preview

Displays a preview of the current settings in the drawing area

Viewports tab
New

Select New to open the Create Viewport dialog box. For sheet layer viewports, see Creating a
Sheet Layer Viewport from a Design Layer on page 702 in this guide. For design layer
viewports (Vectorworks Design Series required), see Creating a Referenced Design Layer
Viewport on page 714 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

Edit

Select a viewport and then select Edit to edit it in the Properties dialog box. For sheet layer
viewports, see Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports on page 706 in this guide. For design
layer viewports (Vectorworks Design Series required), see Properties of Design Layer
Viewports on page 718 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

Duplicate

Select a viewport and click Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the duplicate is the
same as the original viewport, with a number added (as in details-2); if the original name ends
in a number, the next available sequential number is used.
The Drawing Title of the duplicate is the same as the original viewport. If the original
viewport has a drawing label, the Drawing Number of the label in the duplicate viewport is
the next available sequential number.
Vectorworks places the duplicate viewport directly on top of the original, in the original sheet
layer.

Delete

Select a viewport and click Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm the deletion

Preview

Displays a preview of the current settings in the drawing area

Saved Views tab

New

Click New to open the Save View dialog box. See Creating Saved Views on page 121.

Edit

Select a saved view and click Edit to edit it in the Edit Saved View dialog box. See Editing
Saved Views on page 123.

Duplicate

Select a saved view and click Duplicate to create a copy of it. The name of the duplicate is the
same as the original view, with a number added (as in deckview-2); if the original name ends
in a number, the next available sequential number is used.

Delete

Select a saved view and click Delete; when prompted, click Yes to confirm the deletion

100

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Button

Function

References tab
New

Click New to open the Open File dialog box. For layer import references, see Adding and
Editing Layer Import References on page 130 in this guide. For design layer viewport
references (Vectorworks Design Series required), see Creating a Referenced Design Layer
Viewport on page 714 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

Edit

Select a referenced file and click Edit to open the Edit Reference dialog box. For layer import
references, see Adding and Editing Layer Import References on page 130 in this guide. For
design layer viewport references (Vectorworks Design Series required), see Creating a
Referenced Design Layer Viewport on page 714 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users
Guide.

Delete

Select a referenced file and click Delete. In the Delete Reference dialog box, specify what to do
with the items in the file that are currently referenced. See Deleting References on page 137.

Update

Select a referenced file and click Update to update this file with information from the master
file. See Updating References on page 133.

Settings

Click Settings to open the Reference Settings dialog box. See Setting the Referencing
Options on page 129.

Importing Drawing Structure from Standards or Other Files

Specific aspects of the drawing structure (classes, sheet layers, and design layers) can be imported from one or more
existing files. The files from which you import can be the standard files provided with Vectorworks, or other
Vectorworks files that you have created.
The standard files (.sta files) are located in the Standards folder (in [Vectorworks]/Libraries/Defaults). Layer standards
use only approved layer names for a particular industry. Class standards use approved name and class settings for a
particular industry. Custom layers or classes can be created in a blank file and saved as an .sta file in the Standards
folder. Once they are placed in the Standards folder, these new layers or classes become part of the Standards list and
are available when new layers or classes are created.
If one of your work files becomes corrupted, a possible recovery method is to import the data into a new file. Create a
new file and then import classes, sheet layers, and design layers (and optionally, design layer objects) from the original
file as needed.
To import drawing structure, use the Organization dialog box to create a new class, sheet layer, or design layer. Instead
of creating a new item, however, select the import option. Select the file from which to import, and then select the
specific classes or layers from that file to import. For a design layer, select whether to import the objects on the design
layer, as well as the layer itself.
See Creating Layers on page 101 and Creating Classes on page 113 for details.

Managing Layers
Create layers in a Vectorworks drawing to provide immediate flexibility. Stack the design layers in any order, or
temporarily hide some of them. Reorder the layers, which moves all of the objects contained within each layer to
another location without actually modifying the objects or their alignment with each other.

Managing Layers |

Layer 3

Layer 2

Layer 2

Layer 1

Layer 1

Layer 3

101

Layer order rearranged

If you hand-draw a floor plan on two design layers, one vellum sheet with a master 2D drafting plan and another with
an addition to the plan, it would be easy to look at the floor plan with or without the addition. In Vectorworks, the
vellum is electronic, so far more can be done with it. A distance can be set between design layers rather than having
them lie flat on top of each other. Additionally, with Vectorworks modeling capabilities, these layers can be used to
create 3D objects. For example, if the first floor, second floor, basement, and roof of a house are each placed in their
own design layer, not only can the 2D drafting plan be printed for any one of those layers, but the design layers can be
linked together, creating a model of a fully formed 3D house. Use viewports to display several views of the finished
design, either on design layers (Design Series required) or on sheet layers, which are special presentation layers. The
original design layers remain unchanged.
Layers have many other uses, as well. Move elements between design layers, or change the scale of a layer, instantly
making a detail of an area of the drawing without re-drawing anything. Create design layers with objects that should
always display, or layers that contain objects for display only at particular times. Control the visibility of the design
layers to limit the need for creating new objects.
Layer 3

Layer 3
Layer 2

Layer 1

Layer 1
Layer 2 visibility set to Invisible

Use design layers to draw and model projects. Use sheet layers to create a presentation version of the finalized
drawing; this can include viewports, title blocks, notes, and other annotations (see Presenting Drawings with Sheet
Layer Viewports on page 702).
On the layers list in the View bar, sheet layers are listed first, and then design layers. A separator divides the two types
of layers in the list.
Sheet layers display with a wide gray border representing the print margin area, as opposed to design layers, which
have a thin gray border (when the page boundary is displayed). This makes it easier to distinguish the layer types at a
glance.

Creating Layers
When a new drawing is created, it automatically contains an empty design layer entitled Design Layer-1. Add
design layers to the drawing as needed to organize it. Add sheet layers as needed for presentation. Create new design
layers and sheet layers, or import them (and optionally, the objects they contain) from other current version

102

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Vectorworks files or from standard files. In Vectorworks Design Series, create a design layer viewport to reference
design layers in other files without importing them.
To create a new layer:
1. Select Tools > Organization. Alternatively, click the Layers button on the View bar.
The Organization dialog box opens.
2. Select the Design Layers or Sheet Layers tab and click New.
The New Design Layer or New Sheet Layer dialog box opens. Create a new layer, or import a layer and its
properties from standard or existing Vectorworks files.

Parameter

Description

Create a New Design Layer

or Create New Sheet Layer

Creates a new design or sheet layer.

For a design layer, also enter a descriptive Name.
For a sheet layer, enter a unique Sheet Number, or use the default (as in Sht-2). The
Sheet Number can be displayed in drawing labels, section markers, and title
blocks on sheet layers. Also enter a descriptive Sheet Title, which can be displayed
in title blocks.

Managing Layers |

103

Parameter

Description

Import Design Layers

or Import Sheet Layer

Imports layers and their attributes from standard files or from existing files. Files
located in the Standards folder, as well as existing files selected previously, are
displayed in the list. Select a file; the available layers are listed beneath the file name.
If a layer name in the current file matches a layer in the import file, that layer is not on
the list as an import option.
Select the desired layer(s). To select multiple layers from the import list, hold down
the Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Macintosh) key while you click.
For more information about standards, see Importing Drawing Structure from
Standards or Other Files on page 100.

Choose

Click Choose to select a file for layer import. Files must be in the current version.

Import Layer Objects

(design layer only)

In addition to importing the design layer structure and attributes, imports the
contents of the layers; if a file has become corrupted, this is a possible way of
recovering its data. If there is a naming conflict with pre-existing symbols or
pre-existing layers in the current document, rename the symbols or layers.

Creation Options
Saved View Visibility
(design layer only)

Sets the visibility of the new design layer in saved views (when saved views exist in
the drawing)

Viewport Visibility
(design layer only)

Sets the visibility of the new design layer in viewports (when viewports exist in the
drawing)

Edit Properties After

Creation

Immediately after creation, opens the Edit Design Layers or Edit Sheet Layers dialog
box to set the properties of the new layer(s); see Setting Design Layer Properties on
page 103 or Setting Sheet Layer Properties on page 111

3. Click OK to create the new design or sheet layer(s).

The layers display in the layer list in the Organization dialog box, and also in the layers list on the View bar.

Setting Design Layer Properties

Once created, the design layers display on the Design Layers tab of the Organization dialog box, where various
properties can be set and edited.
To edit design layers:
1. Select Tools > Organization. Alternatively, click the Layers button on the View bar.
The Organization dialog box opens.
2. Select the Design Layers tab.
A list of the current layers in the drawing displays in their stacking order. Depending on which view option is
selected at the top of the dialog box, either details or visibilities of the design layers display. Stacking order,
drawing area visibility, and active layer can be changed in Details view. The visibility of layers in viewports and
in saved views can be changed in Visibilities view.
Layers that are imported from another file for workgroup referencing display in italics.

104

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Displays when the

Vectorworks preference for
Quartz imaging (Macintosh)
or GDI+ imaging (Windows)
is enabled

3. To change other layer properties, select one or more layers and click Edit to open the Edit Design Layers dialog
box.

Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging

Vectorworks preference enabled

Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging

Vectorworks preference disabled

Parameter

Description

Name

If one layer was selected, displays the layers name, which can be edited if necessary

Scale

Sets the scale for the selected layer(s); see Setting the Design Layer Scale on
page 105

Stacking Order

Changes the stacking order of the layer(s); see Changing the Design Layer Stacking
Order on page 106

Z, Delta Z

Specifies the base elevation height and the default height of walls for the selected
layer(s); see Setting the Design Layer Z and Delta Z Values on page 106

Managing Layers |

105

Parameter

Description

Opacity / Transfer Mode

Opacity and Transfer Mode control how the selected layer(s) and other visible layers
display; see Setting the Design Layer Opacity on page 107 or Setting the Design
Layer Transfer Mode on page 107

Renderworks Background

When Renderworks is installed, select the Renderworks background to use for the
selected layer(s) from either the default resources or the current files resources; see
Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173 and
Creating Layer Backgrounds on page 752

Colors

Specifies the default layer color for the selected layer(s); see Setting the Design Layer
Color on page 109

Saved Views

Specifies the visibility settings for the selected layer(s) in each saved view; see
Setting Visibilities on page 125

Viewports

Specifies the visibility settings for the selected layer(s) in each viewport; see Setting
Visibilities on page 125

Setting the Design Layer Scale

To set the design layer(s) scale:
1. From the Organization dialog box, select the Design Layers tab. Select one or several layers, and then click Edit.
The Edit Design Layers dialog box opens.
2. Click Scale.
The Layer Scale dialog box opens.

Alternatively, to access the Layer Scale dialog box for the active layer, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click
(Macintosh) in the drawing area, and select Active Layer Scale from the document context menu. Or, if the layer
scale is displayed on the View bar, click the Layer Scale button.
3. Select the desired scale.
Select All Layers for the new scale to apply it to all layers in the drawing. Select Scale Text to scale the text along
with the layer.
4. Click OK to close the Layer Scale dialog box.

106

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Changing the Design Layer Stacking Order

Design layers are viewed and printed in stacking order, the top-to-bottom order in the Layers Setup dialog box.
Initially, layers are stacked in the order in which they are created, but their order can be changed at any time.
To change the stacking order of design layers:
1. From the Organization dialog box, select the Design Layers tab in Details view to see the current stacking order.
The # column to the right of the layer name indicates the layers current position in the stack, with 1 being the top
layer.
2. Use one of the following methods for changing the design layer stacking order:
If the list is not currently sorted by stacking order, click the # column heading to change it. Then click the #
column of the layer(s) to be moved, and drag it up or down the list (the # column must be the current sorting
column). A horizontal line indicates where the layer(s) will be inserted in the current order.
Select the layer(s) to move, and then click Edit (or double-click a layer row) to open the Edit Design Layers
dialog box. In the Stacking Order field, enter the number for the new stacking order position of the layer(s).
Click OK to accept the changes.
3. The Design Layers tab displays the new stacking order. Click OK to close the Organization dialog box and save
the changes.

Click layer 2 (Framing model) and drag it down to the third position on the list

Setting the Design Layer Z and Delta Z Values

The Z value of a layer represents its height above base elevation. The delta Z value represents the default height of
walls created on that layer. For example, the second story of a building might be 12 feet above street level; its Z value is
12 feet. If the walls are to be drawn 10 feet high for that story, its delta Z value is 10 feet.
When a new layer is added to a drawing, its Z values are automatically entered based on the previous layers Z
and delta Z values.
To set the Z and delta Z values of the layer:
1. From the Organization dialog box, select the Design Layers tab. Select one or several layers, and then click Edit.
The Edit Design Layers dialog box opens.
2. Enter the base elevation value for the layer in the Z field.
In a 3D view, the layer displays at the specified elevation above or below the active layer plane.

Managing Layers |

107

3. Enter the default height of walls created on the selected layer in the Delta Z field.
4. Click OK to close the Edit Design Layers dialog box, and then click OK again to close the Organization dialog
box.

Setting the Design Layer Opacity

With the Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging Vectorworks preference enabled (it is enabled by default),
design layers have a setting that controls the transparency of layer objects that overlap visible objects in another layer.
An Opacity value of 100% means that nothing beneath the active layer is visible. Decrease the Opacity value to
increase the transparency of the objects on the layer. (See Display Preferences on page 48 for information about
setting this preference.)
To set the opacity for a design layer:
1. From the Organization dialog box, select the Design Layers tab. Select one or several layers, and then click Edit.
The Edit Design Layers dialog box opens.
2. Drag the Opacity slider to the left to increase the transparency, or enter an opacity percentage (0-100) in the box
to the right of the slider.
3. Click OK to close the Edit Design Layers dialog box, and then click OK again to close the Organization dialog
box.
Individual objects can also have an opacity percentage applied. See Opacity Attributes on page 276.

Setting the Design Layer Transfer Mode

When the Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging Vectorworks preference is disabled, design layers have a
setting that controls the display of layer objects that overlap visible objects in another layer.
To set the transfer mode for a design layer:
1. From the Organization dialog box, select the Design Layers tab. Select one or several layers, and then click Edit.
The Edit Design Layers dialog box opens.
2. Select the desired Transfer Mode from the list. Click OK to close the Edit Design Layers dialog box, and then
click OK again to close the Organization dialog box.

Mode

Description

Paint

Makes objects in the new layer solid, obscuring objects in layers stacked below it (this is the
default setting)

Overlay

Makes it so objects in the new layer do not obscure stacked layers

108

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Mode

Description

Invert

Makes a reversed, or photo-negative image display when an object in the new layer overlaps an
object in another layer

Erase

Makes objects in the new layer display all foreground patterns as white and all background
patterns as transparent

Not Paint

Makes objects in the new layer solid and inverts any areas that overlap objects in stacked layers

Not Overlay

Makes objects in the new layer transparent and inverts layer colors

Not Invert

Makes objects in the new layer transparent and converts any black pixels from overlapping areas
to white and white pixels to transparent

Not Erase

Makes objects in the new layer transparent and converts any white pixels from overlapping
areas to black and black pixels to transparent

Most printer devices do not support all of these modes, especially PostScript printers and vector devices such as
pen plotters. The Rasterize print output option may produce the best results for certain transfer modes.
Macintosh OS X does not support layer transfer modes when printing, but they are available for on-screen
viewing. On the Windows platform, the use of color in transfer modes may produce color blending.

Managing Layers |

109

Setting the Design Layer Color

The fill and pen color of objects that are drawn on or moved to a design layer can be controlled by the color settings of
the design layer. The Use layer colors setting in the Document Preferences dialog box must be turned on (see Display
Preferences on page 48).
These settings are overridden by the Black and white only option in the Document Preferences dialog box, even
with the Use layer colors option selected.
To control the color of objects by their design layers:
1. From the Organization dialog box, select the Design Layers tab. Select one or several layers, and then click Edit.
The Edit Design Layers dialog box opens.
2. Click Colors.
The Color Defaults for Layer dialog box opens.

3. For both the fill and pen, set the Foreground and Background colors by clicking the appropriate list and
selecting a color from the main Color Menu dialog box. A preview example is shown at the bottom of the dialog
box.
The fill background color controls the appearance of objects with a solid fill.
4. Click OK.
When the Use layer colors preference is selected, all objects on the layer are drawn with the specified colors.
Viewports have separate control of layer color (see Advanced Sheet Layer Viewport Properties on page 708).

Setting the Active Design Layer

To be able to add, remove, or edit objects on a design layer, either the layer must be active or the layer options must be
set to allow modifications to other layers (see Setting Class and Design Layer Options on page 120). There are
several ways to change the active design layer.
If there are a small number of design layers, switch between layers with the Switch active layer/class shortcut
key combination specified in Vectorworks preferences (see Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 47). This
selects a layer by moving up or down through the layer list one layer at a time. If the drawing has a large number
of layers, use one of the following options.

110

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Setting the Active Design Layer in the Organization Dialog Box

To set the active design layer:
1. From the Organization dialog box, select the Design Layers tab in Details view.
The active layer is indicated by a check mark to the left of the Design Layer Name. The name of the layer also is
highlighted in bold text.
2. To make a different layer active, click the column to the left of its name.
3. Click OK.
The dialog box closes and the active layer displays.

Setting the Active Design Layer in the View Bar

To set the active design layer:
1. Click the Active Layer on the View bar to display a list of all of the sheet layers (top section) and design layers
(bottom section) in the drawing.
On Macintosh, the active layer is indicated by a check mark; on Windows, the layer name is highlighted in bold
text.
2. Click the design layer to be activated.
The layers list closes and the active layer displays.

Setting the Active Design Layer in the Document Context Menu

If multiple design layers are set to be visible, and the layer options are set to show those other layers, the drawing area
may display objects that are on non-active layers. Use the Activate Layer command to make the layer of one of these
objects active.
The Force Select command on the document context menu also changes the active class and layer (if necessary),
and selects the clicked object.
To set the active design layer:
1. In the drawing area, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) a visible object on a non-active design layer.
2. From the document context menu, select Activate Layer.
The objects layer becomes active.

Managing Layers |

Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click

(Macintosh) on the sink from a gray,
non-active layer to open the document
context menu

111

The Activate Layer command

activates the sinks layer, and the
objects that are not in that layer
become grayed

Setting Sheet Layer Properties

Once created, the sheet layers display on the Sheet Layers tab of the Organization dialog box, where various layer
properties can be set and edited.
Sheet layers are always at a 1:1 scale, Active Only, and set to Top/Plan view.
To edit sheet layers:
1. Select Tools > Organization. Alternatively, click the Layers button on the View bar.
The Organization dialog box opens.
2. Select the Sheet Layers tab and the Details view.
The Sheet Layers tab opens, with a list of the current layers in the drawing. Only the active layer can be changed
in Details view. Visibilities view does not apply to sheet layers.
3. To change layer properties, select one or more layers and click Edit to open the Edit Sheet Layers dialog box.

112

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Parameter

Description

Sheet Number

Displays the number of the selected sheet layer; this number must be unique in the document. If
this value is changed and Use Automatic Drawing Coordination is enabled in document
preferences (Design Series required), any annotation objects (sheet borders, drawing labels, or
section markers) that show this number are updated automatically.

Sheet Title

Displays the descriptive title of the selected sheet layer. If Use Automatic Drawing Coordination
is enabled in document preferences (Design Series required), any sheet borders that show this
number are updated automatically.

DPI

Specifies the printing resolution (Dots Per Inch) for printing the raster rendered viewports in the
selected layer (does not affect vector geometry or bitmaps that are inside that viewport)

Origin

Specifies the X and Y coordinates of the sheet layer origin; each sheet layer has its own origin

Page Setup

Opens the Page Setup dialog box for entry of sheet layer printing parameters; this saves time later,
when different sheet layers can be automatically sent to different printers with different print area
settings (see Page Setup on page 90)

Managing Classes
In addition to design layers, classes are a powerful way to organize the elements in a drawing project according to
category. This allows the objects to be viewed, changed, and tracked as a group. Because classes work across design
layers, they allow the grouping of similar objects in a drawing that for practical reasons need to exist on separate
layers. Classes also allow the same file to be used for all stages of a project and for various purposes. For example, the
classes shown for a license application could be different from those shown for the building contractor.
Vectorworks classes are similar in function toand are exported asAutoCAD layers. If a drawing will be
exported to AutoCAD, use classes to make it easy to turn on or off selected portions of the drawing. For example,
if a consultant using AutoCAD will be doing the duct layout for a building, a furniture class allows him or her to
turn off the furniture layer, instead of deleting furniture objects.
Setting up the classes at the beginning of a project is recommended, so that objects can be assigned to appropriate
classes as they are created.
Every new drawing in Vectorworks automatically has two classes: Dimension and None. Any dimensions created are
assigned, by default, to the Dimension class (this is a preference setting that can be changed; see Dimension
Preferences on page 60). Group objects are assigned to the active class. All other objects and symbols are assigned to
the None class, which is the default active class. These two classes can be renamed but not deleted.
If the drawing was created from a template, other classes may have been provided. Vectorworks also allows additional
classes to be created. The new classes can be duplicated, edited, or deleted. The visibility of the classes can also be
changed.
For example, for a drawing of a house with four separate plan layers (first floor, second floor, basement, and roof),
assign all bathroom fixtures to a class called Fixtures. Make the Fixtures class invisible to print the floor plans
without fixtures, and then make them visible to print the bathroom fixtures for each story of the house.

Managing Classes |

Fixtures class invisible

113

Fixtures class visible

Vectorworks provides flexible options when working with classes. In addition, class information can be linked to
worksheets. Using the house example in the previous paragraph, not only can the plumbing fixtures plan for the
house be printed, but a running inventory of the cost for all plumbing fixtures can be kept (see Using Worksheets on
page 651).

Creating Classes
Consider class names at creation. If there are a large number of classes, organize them by naming each class with a
compound name consisting of up to three parts, separated by a dash. Each name part represents a different level in the
class structure. For example, a drawing of a building might have a class structure that includes main groups for
architecture, plumbing, and electrical objects. Within the architecture group, there might be door, floor, and wall
groups. Those groups in turn have sub-groupsfor example, the wall sub-group might have interior and exterior
designations. A class is named according to its position in the class structure, as in Arch-Wall-Ext, Elec-Lite-Ceiling, or
Plum-Equip-New.
In the classes list on the View bar, each main group is a menu option, with sub-menus for the sub-groups. In the
following example, the Arch option has a Wall sub-menu, with Ext and Int options. This type of organization makes it
easy to assign classes as objects are created.

Classes can be created as new, or imported from other current version Vectorworks files or standard files.
To create a new class:
1. Select Tools > Organization. Alternatively, click the Classes button on the View bar.
The Organization dialog box opens.
2. Select the Classes tab and click New.
The New Class dialog box opens. Create a new class, or import a class and its properties from standard or
existing Vectorworks files.

114

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Class Type

Action

Create New Class

Creates a class based on current Attributes palette settings; enter a class Name

Import Classes

Imports classes and their attributes from standard files or existing files. Files located in
the Standards folder, as well as existing files selected previously, are displayed in the
list. Select a file; the available classes are listed beneath the file name. If a class name in
the current file matches a class in the import file, that class is not included on the list as
an import option.
Select the desired class(es). To select multiple classes from the import list, hold the Ctrl
(Windows) or Command (Macintosh) key while you click.
For more information about standards, see Importing Drawing Structure from
Standards or Other Files on page 100.

Choose

Click Choose to select a file for class import. Files must be in the current version.

Creation Options
Saved View Visibility

Sets the visibility of the new class in saved views (when saved views exist in the
drawing)

Viewport Visibility

Sets the visibility of the new class in viewports (when viewports exist in the drawing)

Edit Properties After

Creation

Immediately after creation, opens the Edit Class(es) dialog box to set the properties of
the new class(es) (see Setting Class Properties on page 115)

3. Click OK to create the new class(es).

The classes display in the classes list in the Organization dialog box, and in the classes list on the View bar.

Managing Classes |

115

Setting Class Properties

Once created, the classes display on the Classes tab of the Organization dialog box, where various properties can be set
and edited.
To edit classes:
1. Select Tools > Organization. Alternatively, click the Classes button on the View bar.
The Organization dialog box opens.
2. Select the Classes tab.
A list of the current classes in the drawing displays. Depending on which view option is selected at the top of the
dialog box, either details or visibilities of the classes display. The visibility of classes in the drawing area and the
active class can be changed in Details view. The visibility of classes in viewports and in saved views can be
changed in Visibilities view (see Setting Visibilities on page 125).

3. To change other class properties, select one or more classes and click Edit to open the Edit Class(es) dialog box.
4. If desired, enter a new name for the class in the Class Name field. Then, set the graphic attributes of the class. See
Setting Class Attributes on page 118 for more information about graphic attributes.

116

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Displays when the

Vectorworks preference for
Quartz imaging (Macintosh)
or GDI+ imaging (Windows)
is enabled

Renderworks texture options

Parameter

Description

Use at Creation

Applies the attributes displayed in this dialog box when creating an object
assigned to this class. If Use at Creation is not selected, these attributes can be
applied to the object later by assigning the Class Style from the Attributes palette.
See Setting Class Attributes on page 118 for more information.

Fill
Style

Select one of the following fill styles from the list

None

No fill is applied to the objects in this class

Solid

Applies a solid fill to the objects in this class; click the color box to select the
desired color from the main Color Menu dialog box

Pattern

Applies a patterned fill and color to objects in this class. Click the pattern box to
select the desired pattern, and then select the foreground color and background
color from the color boxes next to the pattern.

Hatch

Applies a hatch to objects in this class. Select the desired hatch from either the
default resources or the current files resources (see Vectorworks Fundamentals
and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173). Select Hatch from the list to
create a new hatch to apply to the class.

Managing Classes |
Parameter

117

Description

Gradient

Applies a gradient to objects in this class; click the gradient preview to select a
gradient resource from either the default resources or the current files resources
(see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on
page 173)

Image

Applies an image to objects in this class; click the image preview to select an
image from either the default resources or the current files resources (see
Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173)

Pen
Style

Select None, Solid, Pattern, or Dash from the list

Color

Click the color box to select a pen foreground color

Line Style/Line Thickness

Select the line style and thickness for the class; to use a custom thickness, select
Set Thickness from the line thickness list to access the Set Thickness dialog box.
The names and display order of the available dash styles can be changed; see
Setting the Default Dash Styles and Display Order on page 85.

Markers

Select the marker style for each end of lines, dimensions, arcs, polylines, 2D
polygons, or freehand lines in this class. Choose the marker style from the list of
available markers. To use a custom marker style, select Custom and specify the
marker settings, or select Edit Marker List from the marker style list to set the
available marker types (see Setting Default Marker Types on page 75).

Opacity

When the Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging Vectorworks

preference is enabled, specifies the class transparency; drag the slider to the left to
increase the transparency, or enter an opacity percentage in the box to the right of
the slider

Walls, Roofs, and Other tabs

If Renderworks is installed, click these tabs to set the texture properties for wall,
roof, and other objects assigned to the class. See Applying Textures to Symbols,
Walls, and Roofs on page 773 for more information.

Saved Views

If there are saved views in the drawing, opens the Saved View Visibilities dialog
box. Set the visibility for the new class(es) in the saved views (Visible, Invisible,
Gray, or Dont Save). See Setting Visibilities on page 125.

Viewports

If there are viewports in the drawing, opens the Viewport Visibilities dialog box.
Set the visibility for the new class(es) in the viewports (Visible, Invisible, Gray, or
Dont Save). See Setting Visibilities on page 125.

5. Click OK to return to the Organization dialog box. If objects in an edited class already exist in the drawing, and
the class is set to Use at Creation, when prompted, specify how to apply the changes to the existing objects.
6. Click OK from the Organization dialog box to save the changes.
If multiple classes are simultaneously selected for editing, and some are set to apply attributes while others are not,
Use at Creation appears dimmed, indicating an unknown setting. Additionally, if some or all of the attribute values
are different for the selected classes, the editing fields for those values indicate that the value is unknown. When the
OK button is clicked, the currently defined settings shown are applied to all of the selected classes. Any information
with an unknown setting is not applied.

118

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Setting Class Attributes

There are two types of attributes available for each object: class attributes and object attributes. Class attributes
represent the graphic attributes information assigned by the class. Object attributes are assigned directly from the
Attributes palette. The attributes that an object uses when it is created are controlled by Use at Creation in the Edit
Class(es) dialog box.
When Use at Creation is selected for a class, objects created in that class or subsequently assigned to that class use the
class attributes. The Attributes palette displays an arrow to indicate that the attributes have been set by class. If objects
in that class already existed before Use at Creation was selected, you are prompted to decide how to apply the
attributes to the existing objects.
Class attributes can be overridden by selecting the object(s) and applying the attributes directly from the Attributes
palette. Later, class attributes can be selected again from the Attributes palette by selecting Class Style from the
attribute list. If Use at Creation was not selected for a class, selecting Class Style for an attribute applies the class
setting to the object(s) at that time.
Object Attribute
Class Attribute

Class attributes are represented by a curved arrow

For more information, see The Attributes Palette on page 273.

Setting the Active Class

To be able to remove or edit objects in a particular class, either the class must be active or the class options must be set
to allow modifications to other classes (see Setting Class and Design Layer Options on page 120). There are several
ways to change the active class.
If there are a small number of classes, switch between classes with the Switch active layer/class shortcut key
combination specified in the Vectorworks preferences (see Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 47). This
selects a class by moving up or down through the class list one layer at a time. If the drawing has a large number
of classes, use one of the following options.

Setting the Active Class in the Organization Dialog Box

To set the active class:
1. From the Organization dialog box, select the Classes tab in Details view.
The active class is indicated by a check mark to the left of the Class Name. The name of the class also is
highlighted in bold text.
2. To make a different class active, click the column to the left of its name.
3. Click OK.
The dialog box closes and the active class displays.

Managing Classes |

119

Setting the Active Class in the View Bar

To set the active class:
1. Click the Active Class on the View bar to display a list of all of the drawings classes.
On Macintosh, the active class is indicated by a check mark; on Windows, the class name is highlighted in bold
text.
2. Click the class to be activated.
The classes list closes and the active class displays.

Setting the Active Class in the Document Context Menu

If multiple classes are set to be visible, and the class options are set to show those other classes, the drawing area may
display objects that are in non-active classes. Use the Activate Class command to make the class of one of these objects
active.
The Force Select command on the document context menu also changes the active class and the active layer (if
necessary), and selects the clicked object.
To set the active class:
1. In the drawing area, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) a visible object in a non-active class.
2. From the document context menu, select Activate Class.
The objects class becomes active.

Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click

(Macintosh) on a cabinet in a gray, non-active
class to open the document context menu

The Activate Class command activates

the cabinets class, and the objects that
are not in that class become grayed

Copying and Pasting Classed Objects

Objects in a class can be copied and pasted from one drawing to another, even if the destination drawing does not
contain the same class as the original drawing. Vectorworks automatically creates a new class in the destination
drawing and transfers all of the class information from the source drawing. If the destination drawing already has a

120

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

class with the same name as the source drawing, only the object information is pasted. All of the class information for
the destination drawings class remains unchanged.
When you paste objects that could become invisible due to class visibility settings, specify whether the invisible classes
should be made visible so that the pasted objects can be seen.

Setting Class and Design Layer Options

The Class Options and Layer Options commands control how all the classes or design layers in a drawing display. For
example, a drawing project can be set to display only the active class, temporarily hiding all objects assigned to other
classes.
To change the options for displaying, snapping to, and editing objects in the current class or design layer:
1. Select View > Class Options (or Layer Options) and then the option.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) in the drawing area and select Class Options or
Layer Options from the document context menu.

Parameter

Description

Active Only

Displays only objects in the active class/layer; only the active class/layer prints

Gray Others

Displays the active class/layer normally and all other classes/layers appear dimmed (except for
those set to invisible); even though visible, objects in dimmed classes/layers cannot be edited

Gray/Snap Others

Displays the active class/layer normally and all other classes/layers appear dimmed (except for
those set to invisible); objects in any normally displayed or gray class/layer can be snapped to.
Only objects in the active class/layer can be edited.

Show Others

All classes/layers display normally, except for those set to invisible or grayed; even though
visible, objects in classes/layers other than the active class/layer are not editable and cannot be
snapped to

Show/Snap Others

All classes/layers display normally, except for those set to invisible or grayed; objects in any
normally displayed or gray class/layer can be snapped to. Only objects in the active class/layer
can be edited.

Show/Snap/
Modify Others

All classes/layers display normally, except for those set to invisible or grayed. Objects in any
normally displayed or gray class/layer can be snapped to; only objects in normally displayed
classes/layers can be edited. (An object on another layer can only be edited if its layer scale and
view are the same as those of the active layer.) Locked objects display with gray highlighting.

2. The current class or design layer display changes accordingly.

Managing Viewports
A sheet layer viewport or design layer viewport (Design Series required) shows a specific portion of one or more
design layers. The original location of the viewport layers can be either within this file or another file. The view
parameters in the viewport can be different from those of the original layers. For example, the scale, layer and class
visibility, or render mode might be changed to create a certain effect. A sheet layer viewport does not always
automatically change when the underlying drawing does. To see the drawing changes that were made after a sheet
layer viewport was created, update the viewport. One or more viewports can be placed on a sheet layer or design
layer, to show various parts of the drawing project in different ways.

Managing Saved Views |

121

Once created, viewports display in the Organization dialog box, where they can be edited, duplicated, or deleted. For
detailed information about how to create, edit, annotate, and update viewports, see Presenting Drawings with Sheet
Layer Viewports on page 702 in this guide, and Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports on page 710 in
the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

Managing Saved Views

A saved view is like a camera that is set up to show a drawing from a certain orientation, with a specific set of viewing
parameters, including which class and design layer are active, the visibilities of the classes and the design layers, the
current zoom and pan, the page location, and the plan rotation (Design Series required).

Zoomed in view

Zoomed out view

Views are also used to create Move Along Path animations (see Creating Move Along Path Animations on page 696
for more information).
Saved views can be created, edited, duplicated, and deleted from the Organization dialog box as described in the
following sections.

Creating Saved Views

To save the current drawing area view:
1. Select View > Save View.
The Save View dialog box opens.
2. Specify the view options, the active layer and class, and the visibilities of layers and classes.

122

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Parameter

Description

View Name

Specify the view name

Save View Orientation

Saves the general view parameters of the active layer, including plan rotation (Design
Series required), projection, 3D orientation, and page origin settings

Save Zoom and Pan

Saves the zoom and pan settings of the active layer

Save Page Location

Saves the design layer page location with the view; if deselected, the current page location
setting is used when the view is displayed. The page location of sheet layers cannot be
saved.

Save Unified View

(Vectorworks Design
Series required)

Saves the unified view status with the view; if deselected, the current unified view setting
is used when the view is displayed

Save Layer Visibility

Specifies the layer visibility options to save; if deselected, the current layer visibility
settings are used when the view is displayed

Layer Options

Select the design layer display options (see Setting Class and Design Layer Options on
page 120)

Active Layer

Select the active layer; if a sheet layer is selected, the Layers button is disabled

Layers

Opens the Layer Visibilities dialog box; specify the design layer visibilities for the saved
view (see Setting Visibilities on page 125)

Save Class Visibility

Specifies the class visibility options to save; if deselected, the current class visibility
settings are used when the view is displayed

Class Options

Select the class display options (see Setting Class and Design Layer Options on
page 120)

Active Class

Select the active class from the list of classes

Classes

Opens the Class Visibilities dialog box; specify the class visibilities for the saved view (see
Setting Visibilities on page 125)

Managing Saved Views |

123

3. Click OK to save the view with the specified settings. The saved view is then available from the Saved Views
menu and from the Organization dialog box.

Editing Saved Views

Set the active class and layer, the class and design layer options, and the class and design layer visibilities when you
create the saved view (in the Save View dialog box). Those initial settings can be changed later from the Organization
dialog box.
To edit a saved view:
1. Select Tools > Organization.
The Organization dialog box opens.
2. Select the Saved Views tab in Visibilities view.
The visibilities of classes and design layers for the selected saved view display.

3. Select a view to edit from the Saved View Name list.

4. If Save Class Visibility was selected in the Save View dialog box, Class Options and Active Class are enabled in
the Organization dialog box. If Save Layer Visibility was selected in the Save View dialog box, Layer Options
and Active Layer are enabled in the Organization dialog box. Change the Active Layer and the Active Class as
necessary. Change the Class Options and Layer Options as described in Setting Class and Design Layer
Options on page 120.
5. Change the visibilities of classes and design layers as necessary. See Setting Visibilities on page 125.
6. To change other saved view properties, click Edit.
The Edit Saved View dialog box opens.

124

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

The settings are the same as when the view is created (see Creating Saved Views on page 121). Classes and
layers that were added after a view was created are listed as visible in the visibility settings.
If the layer or class visibility was saved when the view was created, Restore Layer Visibility and Restore Class
Visibility are enabled. Click Restore Layer Visibility to restore the layer visibilities, the layer options, and the
active layer that were set when the view was saved. Click Restore Class Visibility to restore the class visibilities,
the class options, and the active class that were set when the view was saved.
Saved views are saved as VectorScript macros. If necessary, click Edit Script to edit the script.
7. Click OK to save the changes. Click OK again to close the Organization dialog box.
Another way to edit a saved view is through the Saved Views palette. Select Window > Script Palettes > Saved Views.
Press the Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) key and double-click the view name to edit. Double-click the view
script name to switch the current drawing area to the saved view.

Creating or Editing Saved Views Using the Saved Views Menu

The View bar has shortcuts to save a view, to edit a saved view, or to switch the current drawing area view to a
previously saved view.
Views can also be accessed through the Saved Views palette. Select Window > Script Palettes > Saved Views.
Double-click the view name to switch to that view.
To use the Saved Views menu:
1. Click the Saved Views menu on the View bar.
Click to open the
Saved Views menu
List of saved views

2. Select the desired item from the menu.

Setting Visibilities |
Menu Item

Description

Save View

Opens the Save View dialog box (see Creating Saved Views on page 121)

Edit View

Opens the Saved Views tab of the Organization dialog box (see Editing Saved Views
on page 123)

List of saved views

Select a saved view from the list to switch to that view

125

Setting Visibilities
The active class and design layer are always visible; each inactive class and design layer can be set to be visible,
invisible, or gray. The visibilities of inactive classes and design layers are controlled in a very similar way, and they
both can be set independently for the drawing area, saved views, and viewports.
Class and design layer visibility in the drawing area and in saved views are also affected by the Class Options and
Layer Options settings. See Setting Class and Design Layer Options on page 120 for details. The Visibility tool can
make quick changes to layer and class visibilities (Design Series required).
For maximum usability, visibilities can be set from multiple places, but the method of setting visibilities is the same.
The level of gray for grayed layers and classes can be adjusted for printing; see Printing a File on page 92.

To change the setting for a single class or design layer, click in one of its visibility columns. To change the settings for
multiple items, click a visibility column as follows:
Press the Ctrl key (Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) and click selected class or layer rows
Press the Shift key and click the first and last rows of a group of classes or layers
Press the Alt key (Windows) or Option key (Macintosh) and click any row to change all classes or layers

126

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Parameter

Description

Visible column

Class/design layer is visible; objects in this class/layer display when another class/layer is
active

Invisible column

Class/design layer is invisible; objects in this class/layer display only when the class/layer is
active

Gray column

Class/design layer is gray; objects in this class/layer are dimmed when another class/layer is
active

Dont Save column

For saved views, a fourth column displays to the right of the other columns. When selected,
class/design layer visibility is not saved for the saved view; the current class/layer visibility is
used when the view is displayed.

Setting Class and Design Layer Visibility for the Drawing Area
Use the Organization dialog box to set the visibilities of classes and design layers in the drawing area.
To set the visibility in the drawing area:
1. From the Organization dialog box, select the Classes or Design Layers tab in Details view.
2. Change the Visibility settings as desired. (See Setting Visibilities on page 125.)

3. To see the changes before saving them, click Preview.

4. Click OK to save the changes.

Setting Class and Design Layer Visibility for Viewports and Saved Views
The visibilities of classes and design layers can be set during creation or editing of classes, design layers, viewports, or
saved views. Those settings can also be changed in the Organization dialog box.

Setting Visibilities |

127

Create or Edit

Sets

Classes

Class visibility; see Creating Classes on page 113 and Setting Class Properties on
page 115

Design Layers

Design layer visibility; see Creating Layers on page 101 and Setting Design Layer
Properties on page 103

Viewports

Design layer or class visibility; see Creating a Sheet Layer Viewport from a Design Layer
on page 702

Saved Views

Design layer or class visibility; see Creating Saved Views on page 121 and Editing Saved
Views on page 123

To set the class and design layer visibility for viewports and saved views:
1. From the Organization dialog box, select a tab in Visibilities view.

Organization Dialog Box Tab

Sets Visibility of

Classes

Sets visibility of a class in viewports and saved views

Design Layer

Sets visibility of a design layer in viewports and saved views

Viewports

Sets visibility of classes and design layers in a viewport

Saved Views

Sets visibility of classes and design layers in a saved view

2. On the appropriate tab, select one or more class, design layer, viewport, or saved view names and change the
Visibility settings for classes and design layers as described in Setting Visibilities on page 125.
3. On the Saved Views tab, change the active design layer and class, and the design layer and class options as
described in Editing Saved Views on page 123.
4. To see the changes before saving them, click Preview (not available on the Saved Views tab).
5. Click OK to save the changes.

128

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Workgroup Referencing
Vectorworks Referencing Capability
A workgroup is several people who work together on a project. Group members may work on the same file or on
different files for the same project. Additionally, it is often necessary to create standard elements and reuse them in
different files. It can be difficult to share these standards with other members of a workgroup and to keep up with
changes to them.
Referencing is the ability to link the current (target) file to a master file that contains the standards. Layers, classes, and
resources (such as hatches, worksheets, or symbols) in other Vectorworks files can be referenced. In the Vectorworks
Design Series, image files and PDF files can also be referenced. When a referenced item in a master file changes, the
changes are reflected in the target file. Updates to target files can be performed automatically or only when manually
requested.
Vectorworks can reference specific layers with all of the classes and resources used in those layers, as well as any
resources from a master file. Workgroup-referenced design layers can be displayed in viewports.
Referenced items are indicated in the Resource Browser and in the Organization dialog box by italicized names.
Referenced items in the target file are locked; they can be unlocked and edited, but the changes will be temporary.
Each time a target files references are updated, referenced items are over-written to reflect the master file. Therefore,
any permanent change to a referenced item must be made in the master file.
There are two ways to reference design layers with Vectorworks:
In Vectorworks Fundamentals, design layers are imported into the target file when they are referenced. For
backward compatibility, Vectorworks Design Series supports this method; see Setting the Referencing Options
on page 129.
In Vectorworks Design Series, the recommended method is to create a design layer viewport and then reference
the desired design layers from the master file. See Creating a Referenced Design Layer Viewport on page 714
in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide for details about this type of reference.
Keep the following concepts in mind for both referencing methods.
Drawing information is shared and updated on a layer-by-layer basis.
For layer import referencing, referenced layers should be treated as read-only layers.
This might not be obvious, since it appears that referenced layers can be edited. Moreover, it is possible to add
information to referenced layers in the target document. However, any changes to referenced information and
any information added to referenced layers are removed the next time the referenced layer is updated.
Referenced layer names cannot be changed.
Resources (symbol names) in layers that are referenced from the master file take precedence over resources in the
target file.
If there is a naming conflict with pre-existing symbols or pre-existing layers in the current file, rename the
symbols or layers.
Sheet layer viewports cannot directly reference layers in external master files. If you are using layer import
referencing, create a reference to the master file, and select the external layers to import into the target file; then
make the imported layers visible in a sheet layer viewport. If you are using design layer viewport referencing
(Design Series required), create a design layer viewport from the master file and make the desired layers visible;
then make the design layer that contains the viewport visible in a sheet layer viewport.

Workgroup Referencing |

129

Workgroup Referencing Strategies

Communication within the workgroup is essential when workgroup referencing is in use. Discuss a strategy for how
to name, maintain, and update master files. Keep each other informed of major changesespecially the deletion of a
master file or resources, which can affect multiple files.
If either the file name or the location of a referenced file is changed, the reference is broken. Items referenced from that
file cannot be updated until the broken reference is corrected.

Setting the Referencing Options

The reference settings control how manual and automatic updates to references are performed in the current file. In
addition, Vectorworks Design Series users have the option to change the layer referencing method for this file from
design layer viewport referencing (the default for the Design Series) to layer import referencing.
To set the referencing options:
1. Select Tools > Organization.
The Organization dialog box opens.
2. Select the References tab and click Settings.
The Reference Settings dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Check for out of date

references every ___

Automatically checks referenced files for changes after this time interval; if any
references are out of date, an alert dialog box displays to allow the target file to be
updated

Use reference priority when

updating resources

If the same resource exists in multiple referenced master files, deselect this option to
update each referenced item from the original source, regardless of the priority
order of the referenced files. This is recommended because, if you change the
priority order, or if you update an individual reference (instead of all references),
you could change the source file of a resource inadvertently.
Select this option to update resources in the target file according to the priority
order set in the References tab of the Organization dialog box (see Prioritizing
Referenced Files on page 132). An alert message prompts you to confirm that you
want to use priority updating for references.

130

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Parameter

Description

When manually updating

Specifies what happens when the Update button on the References tab of the
Organization dialog box is clicked: the button either updates only the selected
references that are out-of-date, or it updates all of the selected references in the
target file

Use this method to reference

Vectorworks files
(Design Series required)

Specifies which method to use to reference design layers in other Vectorworks

documents. By default, Design Series uses design layer viewports, as described in
Creating a Referenced Design Layer Viewport on page 714 in the Vectorworks
Design Series Users Guide. Select Layer import to use the referencing method
described in Adding and Editing Layer Import References on page 130 in this
guide.

3. Click OK to return to the Organization dialog box.

Adding and Editing Layer Import References

In the Vectorworks Design Series, you must first select the Layer import referencing option for the current file, as
described in Setting the Referencing Options on page 129. (See Creating a Referenced Design Layer
Viewport on page 714 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide for information about the design layer
viewport referencing option.)
To add or edit references to design layers in other Vectorworks files:
1. In the active target file, select Tools > Organization.
The Organization dialog box opens.
2. Select the References tab.
Referenced files are listed in priority order, along with their current status, whether they are set to update
automatically when the target file is opened, and whether they are set to save copies of the referenced items with
the file.

Workgroup Referencing |

131

Parameter

Description

New

Opens the Open File dialog box to select a new reference file

Edit

Opens the Edit Reference dialog box to change the parameters of a selected reference file

Delete

Opens the Delete Reference dialog box to delete a file from the list of referenced files, and
to choose whether to keep the referenced layers and resources in the target file; see
Deleting References on page 137

Update

Manually updates the referenced items from the selected file(s)

Settings

Opens the Reference Settings dialog box to set options for updates of referenced items;
see Setting the Referencing Options on page 129

3. To edit a current reference file, select the file and click Edit.
The Edit Reference dialog box opens. Proceed to step 5.
4. To add a new reference file, click New.
The Open File dialog box opens. Select the desired file, and then click Open to open the appropriate dialog box:
Vectorworks file: New Reference dialog box
Image file: Image Import Options dialog box (Design Series required)
PDF file: Import PDF dialog box (Design Series required)
Referenced Vectorworks files must be the same version as the target file.
5. From the New Reference or Edit Reference dialog box, specify the parameters for the workgroup reference.

132

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Parameter

Description

Source File

Displays the path and file name of the referenced master file; if the Edit option
was selected, click Browse to edit the file location

Save reference location as

Maintains either an absolute or relative file path reference from the current file
to the referenced file. Use the absolute path when the location of the referenced
file with respect to the current file is not going to change. Use the relative path
when the files might be moved to another computer or platform; as long as the
relative path between the files remains the same, the reference can be found.
Both files must be saved on the save volume to select this option.
The Source File path displays either an absolute or relative path, depending on
the selection.

Layers Available

Specify the design layers to be referenced; selected layers are indicated with a
check mark. Sheet layers cannot be referenced. This step is optional; a layer does
not have to be selected to reference its resources. Resources in the entire
referenced file are available through the Reference command in the Resource
Browser.

Options

Select the update options

Save referenced cache to disk

Saves a copy of the referenced data with the target file. When this option is
deselected, a copy of the referenced data is not saved, which means that the
target file size is smaller; the referenced data is refreshed when the target file is
opened.

Automatically update out of

date reference during file
open

Updates the reference each time the target file is opened; when deselected, the
reference is updated only when Update is clicked from the References tab of the
Organization dialog box

Update class definitions

Updates class definitions along with the referenced objects that use those
classes

Ignore source user origin

Ignores the user origin in the master file; referenced objects will not change
location in the target file if the user origin changes in the master file

Create layer link(s) on layer

Creates a layer link for each newly referenced layer on the specified design
layer; select the design layer from the list or select New Layer to specify a new
design layer, set to the same scale as the first selected layer to reference

Workgroup referenced layers can be used in a sheet layer viewport. Because sheet layer viewports cannot
directly reference design layers in other files, reference the layers and then create a sheet layer viewport that
shows the referenced layers.
6. Click OK to return to the Organization dialog box.
The selected layers are added to the target file, along with any new layers and layer links.

Prioritizing Referenced Files

During a reference update, Vectorworks can search the referenced files in the order in which they are listed on the
References tab, and then update the target file with the first instance of each referenced resource that is found.

Workgroup Referencing |

133

If the same resource exists in multiple referenced master files, it is recommended that you disable this feature.
Otherwise, if you change the priority order, or if you update an individual reference, you could change the
source file of a resource inadvertently. To prevent this from happening, deselect the option to Use reference
priority when updating resources in the Reference Settings dialog box (see Setting the Referencing Options on
page 129).
To set the priority of referenced files:
1. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box.
2. From the References tab, click Settings to open the Reference Settings dialog box, and ensure that the option to
Use reference priority when updating resources is selected.
3. From the References tab, click the number in its # column to select the master reference file(s) to be moved; drag
the item up or down the list to the new priority position. The first file listed on the References tab has the highest
priority.

Updating References
Referenced design layers and resources are either updated automatically when the target file is opened, or they are
updated manually upon command. These preferences are set in either the New Reference or the Edit Reference dialog
box. If the file is set to update automatically, manual updates can still be performed at any time.
Before an update, correct any broken references as described in Correcting Broken References on page 134.
To update references manually:
1. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box.
2. From the References tab, select the master file(s) that contain the referenced items to be updated.
To update all references in the target file, select all of the files.
3. Click Update to update the referenced items in the target file from the selected files.
If priority updating is disabled (recommended), referenced items are always updated from the original file.
If priority updating is enabled, referenced items are updated according to the priority order on the
References tab.
For more information about priority updating, see Setting the Referencing Options on page 129, and
Prioritizing Referenced Files on page 132.
4. If a referenced item is missing, the Referenced Resource not Found dialog box opens.

134

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Parameter

Description

Break the reference

Breaks the reference with the master file, leaving the resource in the target file

Delete the resource

Deletes all occurrences of the resource in the target file (from both the drawing and the
Resource Browser)

Replace resource with

To replace the missing resource with another item from the master file, select this
option, and then select the replacement item from the list of available resources

5. Click OK To All to perform the same action for all missing resources. To select an action for each missing
resource individually, click OK; the dialog box redisplays for each missing item.

Correcting Broken References

If a reference has a status of Broken link in the References tab, Vectorworks cannot locate the master file. Items
referenced from that file cannot be updated until the broken reference is corrected.
To correct broken references:
1. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box.
2. From the References tab, select one or more master files that have broken references, and click Update.
3. An alert prompts you to locate the master file. If you selected multiple references, select Look for subsequent
broken references in all of the folders manually located to have Vectorworks search the same location for all of
them.
If a file is set to update automatically when it is opened, and one of its references is broken, this alert displays
when you open the file.
4. Click Yes to open the Open Current-Version Drawing dialog box.
5. Locate the master file and click Open.
On the References tab, the status of the broken reference changes from Broken link to Up to date or Out of date. If
you selected the option to look for subsequent references in the same location, those references are corrected also.
6. Click OK to save the new name and/or location for the references.

Referencing Resources
The resources of files listed in the References tab of the Organization dialog box, as well as the resources in any
Vectorworks file of the same version number, can be referenced through the Resource Browser.
To reference the resources of a master file:
1. To display the resources of the master file in the Resource Browser, either make the master file a favorite or
browse the master file (see Accessing Existing Resources on page 180).
2. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the desired resource, and select Reference from the context
menu.
The Reference Symbol(s) dialog box opens.

Workgroup Referencing |

Parameter

Description

Preserve folder hierarchy

Maintains the same folder structure the referenced symbol had in its source file

Select destination folder

Adds the referenced symbol to the selected folder

135

Folder list

Displays the target files symbol folders; the selected folder becomes the destination for
the referenced symbol

New Folder

Creates a new folder within the selected folder; specify the folder name and click OK to
create the symbol folder

3. Click OK.
The New Reference dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Source File

Displays the path and file name of the referenced resource file

136

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

Parameter

Description

Save reference location

as

Maintains either an absolute or relative file path reference from the current file to the
referenced resources file. Use the absolute path when the location of the referenced file
with respect to the current file is not going to change. Use the relative path when the
files might be moved to another computer or platform; as long as the relative path
between the files remains the same, the reference can be found. Both files must be saved
on the save volume to select this option.
The Source File path displays either an absolute or relative path, depending on the
selection.

Save referenced cache to

disk

Saves a copy of the referenced resource with the target file. When this option is
deselected, a copy of the referenced resource is not saved, which means that the target
file size is smaller; the referenced resource is refreshed when the target file is opened.

Automatically update
out of date reference
during file open

Updates the reference each time the target file is opened; when deselected, the reference
is updated only when Update is clicked from the References tab of the Organization
dialog box

Update class definitions

Updates class definitions along with the referenced resources that use those classes

4. Click OK to add the resource to the target file. Referenced resources display with italicized names in the
Resource Browser.
The following rules apply to referenced resources.

Situation

Description

Editing a referenced
resource

A referenced resource can be edited within the target file, provided the source file is not
opened by another user, and the reference is not broken or the resource out-of-date.
Changes to the referenced resource are automatically exported to the source file; while in
edit mode, the source file is locked.
The following resources can be edited within the referenced file: gradients, hatches,
record formats, symbol definitions, plant symbols (Vectorworks Landmark required),
sketch styles and wall styles (Design Series required), Renderworks backgrounds and
textures (Renderworks required).

Resource name conflict

If there is a name conflict between a referenced object and another object during an
update, an alert allows the other object to be renamed. (If the other object is also a
referenced object, it cannot be renamed and the update fails.)

Change user origin of

master file

If the user origin of a master file is changed, the location of the referenced resources do
not change, if Ignore source user origin is selected in the Edit Reference dialog box

Change master file

classes

Changes to the class of a referenced resource are only reflected in the target file after an
update if Update class definitions is selected in the New Reference dialog box

Resource deleted in
master file

If a referenced resource is deleted in a master file and the resource does not exist in any
other master file included in an update, when the reference to the master file is updated,
an alert displays. Click OK to confirm that the resource is an orphan, or click OK to
All to hide all alerts about orphaned resources during the current update. Orphaned
resources are no longer referenced.

Workgroup Referencing |

137

To break a reference, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the desired resource, and select Break
Reference from the context menu. The resource remains in the target file, but it is no longer referenced to the
master file.

Deleting References
You can stop referencing a file, and choose whether to keep the referenced layers and resources in the target file.
To delete a reference to a file:
1. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box.
2. Select the file to stop referencing, and then click Delete.
The Delete Reference dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Reference to

Displays the master file name and path

Referenced Layers

Select an option for layers that are currently referenced in the target file from the
master file

Keep in current document

Keeps the layers in the target file, but removes the reference

Delete

Removes referenced layers from the target file, including layer links and any
objects on the layer

Referenced Resources

Select an option for resources that are currently referenced in the target file from
the master file

Keep in current document

Keeps the resources in the target file, but removes the reference

Delete if unused

Deletes unused referenced resources; keeps resources that have been placed in
the file, but removes the reference

3. Click OK.

Opening Referenced Files

Vectorworks provides easy access to the master files that a target file references.

138

| Chapter 3: Drawing Structure

To open a referenced file:

1. Access the Window menu. The bottom portion of the menu provides a submenu for each Vectorworks file that is
currently open.
2. From the submenu for the target file, select Referenced Files to display the Vectorworks files that the target file
references. Though PDF and image files can be referenced (in Design Series), they do not appear on the menu.
3. Select a referenced file to open it.

List of referenced
Vectorworks files

Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

SmartCursor snapping allows you to draw with precision in both 2D and 3D. Used in conjunction with drawing tools,
the SmartCursor uses snap indicators, hints, extension lines, text (SmartCursor cues), and sounds, and then precisely
snaps the cursor based on the snapping categories enabled in the Snapping palette.
Parametric constraints ensure that a drawing maintains its original precision. Constraints preserve geometric
relationships between an object and world space, between two objects, or within an object.

Setting Snapping Parameters

The Snapping palette manages SmartCursor snapping; the on-screen feedback which displays while drawing is based
on the snapping categories enabled in the Snapping palette. Different drawing tasks may require a variety of snapping
combinations. A snapping category is enabled by clicking the desired tool from the Snapping palette. Each tool toggles
to turn the snapping category on or off.
Snapping categories can be used individually or combined for precise drawing and snapping. For example, snap to
object points and snap to the grid to find points which are both on an object and on a grid line. Snapping can also be
combined with Data bar input to find a specific snap point along a defined location in the drawing area.
Snapping is available for both 2D and 3D tools; however, Snap to Tangent only applies to 2D tools, and Snap to
Working Plane only applies to 3D tools.
The snapping parameters of most of the snapping tools are set in the SmartCursor Settings dialog box. Most of these
settings are considered application settings, and apply to any file opened in Vectorworks. Certain settings are
considered document settings and are saved with the file; these include grid dimensions, alternate angle extension
lines, datum and smart edge offset, and distance snap settings.
Some of the snapping tools do not have additional parameters, and are simply toggled on or off.
To set up and activate snapping categories:
1. If the Snapping palette is not open, select Window > Palettes > Snapping.
The Snapping palette opens. The last tool on the palette is different depending on whether a 2D or 3D tool is
currently active.

2D Snapping
palette

3D Snapping
palette

2. Double-click a snapping tool to open the SmartCursor Settings dialog box with specific snapping parameters for
that tool. Some of the tools do not have any additional parameters.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box can also be opened by selecting Tools > SmartCursor Settings. Each tab of
the dialog box is described in the following sections.
3. Enter the desired criteria, and then click OK to set.
The criteria are described in the following sections.
4. Click a snapping tool to activate it.

140

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

Snapping palette shortcut keys can be set in the Workspace Editor; see Modifying Snapping and Mode
Shortcuts on page 829.
Different combinations of constraints and snapping parameters are required for different drawing tasks. Select
the Tools > Custom Tool/Attribute command to easily create a VectorScript with the current SmartCursor
settings and active tools on the Snapping palette. Execute the script by double-clicking on it from the Resource
Browser to quickly change snapping parameters and settings. See Creating Custom Tool/Attribute Scripts on
page 686 for more information.

General Snapping
The parameters on the General tab specify global SmartCursor functionality.
To set general snapping parameters:
1. Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings, or double-click a Snapping palette tool that has additional parameters.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box opens. Click the General tab.

Parameter

Description

Show SmartCursor Cues

Displays SmartCursor cues while drawing. The cues displayed depend on the
combination enabled in the Snapping palette, as well as the current cursor
position. SmartCursor cues are listed in SmartCursor Cues on page 159.

Show Snap Points

Displays temporary graphical hints to indicate that a snap point is available;

see Snapping Indicators on page 153 for more information. Deselect to hide
snap points.

Zoom Line Thicknesses in Snap

Loupe

When using the snap loupe (see Using the Snap Loupe on page 158), sets
the line thicknesses relative to the zoom level so that objects display normally
in the loupe view

Interactive Appearance Settings

Opens a dialog box to change the appearance of the interactive elements in

Vectorworks, including general elements, object highlighting, SmartCursor
elements, and snap points; see Configuring Interactive Display on page 70

Reset

Restores default Vectorworks parameter settings for all tabs

Setting Snapping Parameters |

141

2. Click OK.

Grid Snapping
The snap and reference grids assist with precise drawing on both design and sheet layers, as described in Snap and
Reference Grids on page 67.
When snap to grid is on, the SmartCursor snaps to set points on the snap grid. For example, if the grid is set to 1, as
the mouse moves over the grid, it automatically catches every inch. When creating a line, the lines first and last
point will (if no other snapping is active) lie on the snap grid. Snap to grid is the only type of snapping that does not
provide any sort of visual cues. If snap to grid is on, the mouse is always on the grid, unless other snaps are also
selected which override snap to grid.

Reference grid

Snap grid

When snap to grid is on, the working plane displays with dots. The dots do not display for working planes when
snap to grid is off. See Appearance of the Planes on page 636.
To set grid snapping:
1. Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings, or double-click the Snap to Grid tool in the Snapping palette.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box opens. From the Grid tab, specify the snap and reference grid settings.

Parameter

Description

Snap Grid

The grid that aligns (snaps) objects during drawing and editing, when Snap to Grid is
active

142

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

Parameter

Description

Symmetrical

Select to constrain the Y setting to be the same as the X setting, resulting in a

symmetrical grid

X and Y

Sets the grid dimensions in the X and Y directions; the Y setting appears dimmed if
Symmetrical is selected

Reference Grid

The visible grid used for visually aligning objects during drawing and editing

Symmetrical

Select to constrain the Y setting to be the same as the X setting, resulting in a

symmetrical grid

X and Y

Sets the grid dimensions in the X and Y direction; the Y setting appears dimmed if
Symmetrical is selected

Grid Options

Sets how the reference grid behaves on screen and when printing

Show Grids

Displays the reference grid when possible (even with this option selected, the
reference grid may not display depending on the zoom factor); also displays the
active layer plane grid in 3D views

Print Grid

Prints the reference grid on both design layers and sheet layers

3D Grid Axes
Show 3D Z Axis

Shows the Z axis for working planes

Z axis

Show 3D Axis Labels

Shows labels for each axis in the active layer plane and working plane

2. Click OK.
3. To activate snapping to the snap grid, click the Snap to Grid tool from the Snapping palette.

Object Snapping
When snap to object is on, the SmartCursor finds specific parts of an object, such as corners, endpoints, midpoints, or
centers of 2D objects and arc edges, as well as meshes, extrudes, sweeps, spheres, 3D polygons, 3D planar faces, and
walls, floors, roofs, roof faces, and columns. Cues display near the cursor to identify the location.
To set object snapping:
1. Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings, or double-click the Snap to Object tool in the Snapping palette.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box opens. From the Object tab, specify the object snap settings.

Setting Snapping Parameters |

Parameter

Description

End Point

Finds the endpoint of arcs, and the end of an objects edge

Endpoint

Mid Point of Edge

Endpoint

Finds the middle of the edge of an object

Midpoint
Midpoint

Center Point

Locates the center of 2D objects and arc edges, as well as meshes, extrudes, sweeps,
spheres, 3D polygons, 3D planar faces, and walls, floors, roofs, roof faces, and
columns

Center

2D Object Snapping

Center

3D Object Snapping

143

144

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

Parameter

Description

Quadrant Points

Finds the top, left, right, and bottom of circles, ovals, rectangles, and rounded
rectangles
Top Center

Insertion Point

Locates the object origin of loci, lights, objects, symbols, text, and for dimensions, one
of the referenced points

Insertion Point

Vertex

Locates the corner point on polyline, polyline Bzier, and polyline cubic segments; for
3D, finds the vertex of a solid or the control point of a NURBS curve

Point
Point

Nearest Point on Edge

For 2D, finds the closest point on an objects edge, and for 3D, finds any non-specific
point along a solid edge or NURBS curve. It may be more convenient to use smart
edge snapping instead; see Smart Edge Snapping on page 148.
Object

2. Click OK to set the object snapping options.

3. To activate object snapping, click the Snap to Object tool from the Snapping palette.

Angle Snapping
Two points define an angle; Snap to Angle only applies to the second point of a two-point feedback segment, such as
when drawing a line or polygon. When snapping to angles, the SmartCursor finds the angles specified, and by default,
the SmartCursor also finds angles relative to the horizontal and vertical axes. Snap to Angle can also detect a plan

Setting Snapping Parameters |

145

rotation angle (Design Series required); items created along that angle when in a rotated plan view, appear horizontal
when in a non-rotated, world coordinate view.
To set angle snapping:
1. Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings, or double-click the Snap to Angle tool in the Snapping palette.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box opens. From the Angle tab, specify the angle snap settings.

Parameter

Description

Angles
Angles from
Axes

Snaps to the specified angles with respect to the horizontal or vertical axes. For example, if
45 is specified, the angles found include 45, 135 (90+45), 225(180+45), and so on. Specify
the angles to detect, separated by a semi-colon; 45 and 30 are suggested by default. Up to
eight angles can be set.

45
45

Plan Rotation
(Design Series
required)

Finds the angle of plan rotation; this snap is useful when drawing in a rotated top/plan
view, and requiring objects to be horizontal when the plan is no longer rotated

Alternate
Coordinate System

Specifies an additional rotated coordinate system that provides angle snaps and alignments
along its axes

Enter Angle

Sets an angle other than the angles entered in Angles from Axes. Enter an alternate angle.

146

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

Parameter

Description

Extension Lines

Draws an extension line from a smart point to the alternate angle and 90 to the alternate
angle
Align Alt / Align Alt 90

Holding the Shift key while drawing forces the SmartCursor to select the nearest snap angle.
2. Click OK to set the angle snapping options.
3. To activate angle snapping, click the Snap to Angle tool from the Snapping palette.

Smart Points Snapping

When smart points snapping is on, you can temporarily remember a point where the cursor paused for a set length of
time, or where a special shortcut key was pressed. Once a smart point has been defined, you can align to it
horizontally, vertically, or at a specific angle using extension lines and SmartCursor cues.
To set a smart point, pause the cursor over an object point for the set number of seconds, or press the T key. A small
box displays when the smart point has been set.
A special smart point, called a datum, can be set to temporarily create a new origin for snapping and measuring
purposes. The datum does not need to be set over an object, but can be placed anywhere. When a datum is set, all
measurements along the X and Y axis are taken from that point, rather than the drawings origin, until the datum is
moved or deactivated.
To set a datum point, pause the cursor for the set number of seconds, or press the G key. The datum displays as a small
circle around the chosen point.
The SmartCursor remembers up to three smart points, and then the oldest points are replaced. A smart point or datum
can be released by pausing the cursor or pressing the shortcut key over the point again.
Press the Esc key to clear all smart points.
A current snap is needed to acquire smart points, so enabling Snap to Object, at a minimum, is recommended.
To set smart point snapping:
1. Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings, or double-click the Smart Points tool in the Snapping palette.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box opens. From the Smart Point tab, specify the smart point snap settings.

Setting Snapping Parameters |

147

Parameter

Description

Horizontal/Vertical Extensions

Displays an extension line when the cursor aligns horizontally, vertically, or in

the X, Y, or Z direction with a smart point or datum

Align V
Align Y

Extension Lines

Creates an extension line from a smart point when drawing at a snap angle and
the SmartCursor is aligned perpendicular to the smart point

15 / Align

Acquire Smart Point

Sets a smart point at the cursor location when the cursor pauses for the
indicated number of seconds. Alternatively, press the T key to set or release a
smart point at the cursor location, even if the Acquire Smart Point option is
disabled.

148

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

Parameter

Description

Set Datum

Sets a floating datum to define a temporary data origin by pausing the cursor
for the indicated number of seconds (normally, set this time interval to be
longer than the smart point acquisition time). Alternatively, press the G key to
set or release a datum at the cursor location, even if the Set Datum option is
disabled.
Datum

Datum Offset

Sets an offset from the temporary datum origin that is indicated by an

additional marker along the extension line; enter the offset value
Datum
Datum

2. Click OK to set the smart point options.

3. To activate smart point snapping, click the Smart Points tool from the Snapping palette.
The appearance of the smart points can be changed; see Configuring Interactive Display on page 70. The
shortcut key assigned to smart points and the datum can be customized; see Modifying Snapping and Mode
Shortcuts on page 829.

Smart Edge Snapping

When smart edge snapping is on, the SmartCursor finds points on, or at a certain distance away from, a specified edge.
The edges of linear 2D geometry, arc and polyline curve segments, and 3D segments and curves, can be acquired as
smart edges. Once a smart edge has been defined, you can align to it horizontally, vertically, or at a specific angle using
extension lines and SmartCursor cues. A smart edge also provides snapping to a point on an edge without having to
activate Nearest Point on Edge object snapping.
To set a smart edge, slowly move the cursor over a 2D object edge for the set number of seconds, or press the T key
while over an edge. Dotted extension lines indicate that the smart edge has been set.
Up to two smart edges can be set, and then the oldest edges are replaced. A smart edge can be released by moving the
cursor slowly over the edge or pressing the T key over the edge again.
To set smart edge snapping:
1. Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings, or double-click the Smart Edge tool in the Snapping palette.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box opens. From the Smart Edge tab, specify the smart edge snap settings.

Setting Snapping Parameters |

149

Parameter

Description

Acquire Edge

Sets a smart edge at the cursor location when the cursor moves over an object edge for
the indicated number of seconds. Alternatively, press the T key to set or release a smart
edge at the cursor location, even if the Acquire Edge option is disabled.

Surface

Snap to Bisector

Finds points along the bisector that intersects two smart edges
Bisector

Snap to Offset

Bisector

Sets an offset from either end of a smart edge extension line that is indicated by
additional markers along the extension line; enter the offset value
Offset
Offset / Align V

150

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

Parameter

Description

Snap to Extension Lines

Generates extension lines from smart points perpendicular and parallel to the smart
edge
Align X
Align Edge 90

2. Click OK to set the smart edge options.

3. To activate smart edge snapping, click the Smart Edge tool from the Snapping palette.
The appearance of the smart edge can be changed; see Configuring Interactive Display on page 70. The
shortcut key assigned to the smart edge can be customized; see Modifying Snapping and Mode Shortcuts on
page 829.

Distance Snapping
When snap to distance snapping is on, the SmartCursor finds points at a selected distance along a straight or curved
line, polygon edges, wall edges, and other linear objects.

Along Line

Along Line

To set the snap distance:

1. Select Tools > SmartCursor Settings, or double-click the Snap to Distance tool in the Snapping palette.
The SmartCursor Settings dialog box opens. From the Distance tab, specify the distance snap settings.

Setting Snapping Parameters |

151

2. Set the distance using a fraction, percentage, or a dimensional distance. Select Multiple Divisions to repeat snap
points along a line. For example, the SmartCursor can snap every quarter inch, or every 1/8 of the length of the
line.
The SmartCursor measures from each endpoint to the center of the line. If a line is 10 units long and the distance
is set to 6 units, the distance will not be found at all, since it is longer than half a line. Similarly, any fraction
greater than 1/2 the length of the object or less than 0 cannot be used.
3. Click OK to set the Snap to Distance options.
4. To activate Distance snapping, click the Snap to Distance tool from the Snapping palette.

Snap to Intersection
When snap to intersection snapping is on, the SmartCursor finds the intersection between two objects or between the
parts of an object.
Object/Object

To activate snapping to intersection:

Click the Snap to Intersection tool from the Snapping palette. No parameters are required.

Snap to Tangent (2D Only)

The Snap to Tangent option uses the SmartCursor to locate tangents on circular arc geometry when drawing.
Tangents cannot be found on quarter arcs.

152

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

To activate tangent snapping:

Click the Snap to Tangent tool from the Snapping palette. No parameters are required.

Tangent

Tangent

While drawing, as the

feedback segment
approaches a tangent, the
special snap points
indicator shows that a
tangent snap is available

Move the cursor to the

tangent snap, and click to
create a line that is
tangent to the circle

Alternatively, begin drawing a

line from the arc geometry,
and the feedback segment
remains tangent to the circle.
Click to create a tangent line.

Use tangent snapping to

find the tangent when
drawing arcs or polylines
in Tangent Arc mode

Hold down the Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) key to switch the tangent to the opposite side of the object.

Snap to Working Plane (3D Only)

When Snap to Working Plane snapping is on, the SmartCursor snaps/projects any point not on the working plane
down to its shadow point on the working plane.
To activate snapping to the working plane:
Click the Snap to Working Plane tool from the Snapping palette. No parameters are required.

Shadow point on
working plane

While moving along the top edge of the extrude

with working plane snapping on, the cursor
snaps to the working plane

Drawing with Snapping

A variety of settings and options combine to facilitate drawing with snapping. Several types of snap types and
snapping indicators assist with snapping. The snap loupe temporarily zooms into the drawing view near the cursor to
obtain a snap in a complex drawing.
Snapping is used with the feedback segment preview line that displays while drawing with most tools. For example,
when drawing a line, you may want it to be vertical, and also aligned with a point on your drawing. To do this, set a
smart point (with extension lines) on the point to align to. Angle snapping should be enabled (because it snaps to the

Drawing with Snapping |

153

vertical) along with smart point snapping. The feedback segment of the line snaps to the vertical and to the smart
point, and a second click finishes drawing the line as desired.
Smart point has
already been set

Feedback segment
(Line tool in use)

Vertical / Align V

Feedback segment
snaps to vertical
and to smart point
extension line

Several areas in Vectorworks control the various aspects of snapping.

Functionality

Location/Description

Enable/disable snapping tools

Snapping palette, Setting Snapping Parameters on page 139

Enable/disable individual snapping

parameters

SmartCursor Settings dialog box; Setting Snapping Parameters on

page 139

Change the appearance of snap

points and indicators

Interactive Appearance Settings dialog box; Configuring Interactive

Display on page 70

Enable/disable snap box, selection

box, and acquisition hints

Interactive tab of Vectorworks preferences; Interactive Preferences on

page 54

Change the appearance of the snap

box and selection box

Interactive tab of Vectorworks preferences; Interactive Preferences on

page 54

Save snap settings in a VectorScript

Custom Tool/Attribute command; Creating Custom Tool/Attribute Scripts

on page 686

Change snapping shortcut keys

Keys tab of the Workspace Editor; Modifying Snapping and Mode

Shortcuts on page 829

Snapping to objects in other layers

or in classes or layers set to gray

Class and layer option commands; Setting Class and Design Layer Options
on page 120

Snapping Indicators
There are several types of snap points. Use these in combination with the settings in the Snapping palette,
SmartCursor Settings dialog box, the Interactive Appearance Settings dialog box, and Interactive tab in Vectorworks
preferences to tailor snapping and snapping appearance to your drawing task. In addition to the snap points, other
interactive elements assist with snapping.
Available snap points
Available snap points display near the cursor, within the snap radius, to indicate that a snap point is near the
cursor.

154

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

Special snap points

Special snap points display in the general cursor area, to inform you that midpoint, center, along line, and/or
tangent snap points are nearby. The visible snap points depend on the snapping enabled in both the SmartCursor
Settings dialog box and the Snapping palette.

Special snap points

near the cursor

Current snap point

The current snap point shows that the SmartCursor is snapped.

The current snap point indicator is black in 2D. In 3D, the indicator displays with red, green, and blue colors,
which correspond to the red (X), green (Y), and blue (Z) axes. The orientation of the 3D indicator is relative to the
current working plane.

2D current point

3D current point

Obtained snap point

When drawing with a tool, such as the Line tool, the first click of the tool on a current snap becomes the obtained
snap point. The obtained snap point only displays for a brief moment, letting you know that the click was
snapped.

Smart point
When the Smart Point snapping is enabled, up to three smart points can be defined at one time; see Smart Points
Snapping on page 146. A smart point displays as a red rectangle by default. If extension lines are enabled, the
extension line for the smart point appears as a dashed line. A datum is a special type of smart point and counts as
one of the three smart points.

Drawing with Snapping |

Smart point

Smart point with extension line

Datum

155

Datum with extension line

Snap object highlighting

The object from which the snap points are generated is highlighted with a dashed line. This ensures that the
correct snap points are being obtained within a congested drawing.

SmartCursor selection box and snap box

Two areas around the cursor assist with drawing: the selection box and snap box.
Selection box
Snap box

The selection box shows the area where object geometry can be selected or recognized by a tool that selects or
clicks objects (such as the 2D Selection tool or the Eyedropper tool). The snap box indicates the area from which
the current snap will be obtained. The current snap is obtained from all the available snaps inside the snap box.
The size and visibility of the selection box and snap box can be adjusted, and these indicators enabled, from the
Interactive tab in Vectorworks preferences. See Interactive Preferences on page 54.
Acquisition hints
Acquisition hints display the potential snap points that can be acquired near the cursor. They indicate that a
smart point, smart edge, or vector lock can be acquired.

Acquisition Hint
Smart point

Smart edge

Vector lock

Appearance

156

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

The lock acquisition hint indicates

that by pressing the T key, a vector
lock can be placed at the current
cursor location

Enable the acquisition hints from the Interactive tab in Vectorworks preferences. See Interactive Preferences on
page 54.

Drawing with Snapping |

157

Alignment Indicators
Lightly colored axis and plane indicators provide subtle hints to help determine whether the cursor is aligned to
an axis (2D) or an axis and/or plane (3D). The color of the indicator matches the axis color (red for X, green for Y,
and blue for Z) to help you determine when the cursor is aligned to an axis or plane.

Green Y plane
alignment indicator
Green Y axis alignment
indicator
Green Y axis
alignment indicator

Creating Vector Locks

An extension line created from a smart point indicates a vector, or direction. This vector can be locked to facilitate
drawing and moving objects, because the SmartCursor stays locked to that vector and serves as a guide for snapping
along that vector.
To create a vector lock:
1. Select the tool for drawing, an object to move, or other operation that requires a vector lock.
It is helpful to display acquisition hints, which show when a vector lock can be set. This is a Vectorworks
interactive preference; see Interactive Preferences on page 54.
2. During the operation, the feedback segment indicates the vector direction and the acquisition hint at the cursor
indicates that a vector lock can be set. A vector lock can be set along a smart point extension line. As the cursor
moves along the extension line, the lock acquisition hint shows that a vector lock can be set.
3. Press the T key to create the vector lock in the direction of the extension line.
The vector lock displays. The appearance of vector locks can be set as described in Configuring Interactive
Display on page 70.

Press the T key

The selection needs to move up

in a vertical direction

4. The SmartCursor locks to the vector and the operation is snapped along the desired direction.

158

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

Vector locks can also be created

in 3D

The Data bar can create a vector lock along a specific direction. Enter values in the Data bar as described in Drawing
with the 2D Data Bar on page 220 or Drawing with the 3D Data Bar on page 338. A vector lock displays, and the
SmartCursor only snaps to points on the locked line.

Using the Snap Loupe

In a congested drawing, it can be difficult to obtain the desired snap point. The snap loupe temporarily zooms into a
drawing to obtain the snap. In this zoomed in view, the snap points near the mouse are easier to see.
The snap loupe is not intended to include navigation within the loupe window. It is a convenient way obtaining snap
points and quickly returning to the drawing.
To use the snap loupe:
1. Move the mouse to the area where snapping is desired, but difficult.

2. Press the Z key.

The snap loupe window opens, displaying the region near the cursor in a zoomed view. Within the loupe
window, move the cursor to locate the desired point. If the snap loupe window is not sufficiently magnified to
find a snap, press the Z key again.
The Zoom Line Thickness in Snap Loupe preference determines how the drawing displays within the snap
loupe. See General Snapping on page 140 to change this setting.

SmartCursor Cues |

159

3. Click at the snap point. The snap loupe window closes automatically, returning to the drawing.
Press the Esc key to exit the snap loupe without clicking, or click outside of the loupe to close it.

SmartCursor Cues
The following table lists the individual cues that the SmartCursor uses along with a description of each. In many cases,
two cues are used together to indicate that two snaps have been activated. For example, the cue Align H/Angle means
that the point located is both aligned horizontally to the indicated smart point and also snapping to an angle.
Some cues display when a first point has already been found, and a second point is being sought. These two points
form a line called the feedback segment. This segment forms an angle and length which the SmartCursor uses for
some of its snaps.
For a line, the feedback segment is the same as the line being drawn. However, for other objects, the interactive image
does not lie on the feedback segment. The SmartCursor works on the feedback segment created from the first to the
second points (for polygons, from the previous point to the current point).

Cue

Description

Snap to Angle
Alt

Feedback segment is parallel to the alternative coordinate system angle

Alt 90

Feedback segment is perpendicular to the alternative coordinate system angle

Delta angle

Feedback segment is at the specified snap angle from the rotated grid

Horizontal

Feedback segment is horizontal

Parallel

Feedback segment is parallel to an object

Perpendicular

Feedback segment is perpendicular to an object

Plan Rotation
(Design Series required)

Feedback segment is aligned to the rotated plan angle

Symmetric

Feedback segment is sketching out a square or circle

160

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

Cue

Description

Vertical

Feedback segment is vertical

Feedback segment is aligned with the X axis

Feedback segment is aligned with the Y axis

Feedback segment is aligned with the Z axis, or point is aligned to a smart point in
the direction of the Z axis

Feedback segment is aligned with the X axis of the rotated grid

Feedback segment is aligned with the Y axis of the rotated grid

Feedback segment is aligned with the Z axis of the rotated grid, or point is aligned to
a smart point in the direction of the Z axis of the rotated grid

Smart Point
--------------

Extension line used for all smart point cues except Datum

Align

Feedback segment is perpendicular to a segment from the cursor to a smart point

Align H

Point is aligned horizontally with a smart point

Align V

Point is aligned vertically with a smart point

Align X

Point is aligned with the X coordinate of a smart point

Align Y

Point is aligned with the Y coordinate of a smart point

Align Z

Point is aligned with the Z coordinate of a smart point

Align X

Point is aligned with the X coordinate of a smart point, in the space of the rotated
grid

Align Y

Point is aligned with the Y coordinate of a smart point, in the space of the rotated
grid

Align Z

Point is aligned with the Z coordinate of a smart point, in the space of the rotated
grid

Align Edge

Point is aligned to smart edge

Align Edge 90

Point is aligned perpendicular to smart edge

Align Alt

Point is aligned to the user coordinate system

Align Alt 90

Point is aligned perpendicular to the user coordinate system

Datum

Point is the Datum

Circle around Datum

Working Plane

Point is on the grid plane

Snap to Distance
Along Line

2DPoint is at a specified distance along line

3DPoint is at a specified distance along line from the end point of a NURBS curve,
3D polygon, or edge of a solid object

SmartCursor Cues |
Cue

161

Description

Data bar
--------------

Extension line used to indicate X or Y value is locked

Angle

Feedback segment is constrained to an angle

Length

Feedback segment is of a fixed length set in Data bar

Snap to Object
Arc

Cursor is over the corner point of a polyline arc segment

Arc Center

Cursor is over the center point of an arc

Arc End

Cursor is over the end of an arc segment

Bzier

Cursor is over the corner point of a polyline Bzier segment

Bottom Center

Cursor is over the bottom center of rectangle or group

Bottom Left

Cursor is over the bottom left of the objects bounding box

Bottom Right

Cursor is over the bottom right of the objects bounding box

Center

2DCursor is over the center of the objects bounding box

3DCursor is over the geometric center of certain objects, NURBS curves, 3D
polygons, or the center of a circular NURBS curve

Center Left

Cursor is over the center left of the objects bounding box

Center Right

Cursor is over the center right of the objects bounding box

Corner

Cursor is over the corner point of a polyline segment

Endpoint

Cursor is over the end of an objects edge

Fit

Cursor is over the corner point of a polyline cubic segment

Insertion Point

Cursor is over the object origin for symbols, parametric objects, and text objects; for
dimensions, the cursor is over one of the referenced points

Light

Cursor is on a light

Locus

Cursor is on a locus

3D Locus

Cursor is on a 3D locus

Midpoint

Cursor is over the middle of an objects edge

Object

2DCursor is on an objects edge

3DCursor is on any non-specific point along a solid edge or NURBS curve;
displays at all corner points when the Nearest Point on Edge option is deselected for
object snapping

Point

2DCursor is on an object point

3DCursor is on one of the vertices of a solid, the control point of a NURBS curve,
the control point of a NURBS surface, or NURBS curve interpolation point

Top Center

Cursor is over the top center of the objects bounding box

Top Left

Cursor is over the top left of the objects bounding box

162

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

Cue

Description

Top Right

Cursor is over the top right of the objects bounding box

Smart Edge
Bisector

Point is on the bisector between two smart edges

Edge

Feedback segment is parallel to a smart edge, or cursor is on the edge between two
smart points

Edge 90

Feedback segment is perpendicular to a smart edge

Offset

Point is a preset distance from a smart edge

Surface

Point is on a smart edge, but not on the object itself

Snap to Tangent
Tangent

Feedback segment is tangent to an arc

Tangent/Tangent

Feedback segment is tangent to two arcs

Parametric Constraints
Parametric constraints maintain relationships between an object and world space, between two objects, or within the
object itself. There are two types of parametric constraints: dimensional and geometric. Dimensional constraints
maintain a measurable relationship by limiting the objects geometry to a particular value. Geometric constraints
maintain a physical relationship by limiting the allowed orientation of objects.

Dimensional constraint maintaining the

horizontal distance between two objects

Geometric constraint maintaining

tangency between a line and a circle

Parametric constraints can be placed on all 2D objects. They cannot be placed on 3D objects except for walls, symbols,
and plug-in objects that have 2D components. Multiple constraints can be applied to an object. Parametric constraints
can be placed across layers as long as both layers are in a Top/Plan standard view, are of the same scale, and Layer
Options are set to Show/Snap/Modify Others.
Constraints attached to a single object move along with the object even if the object is copied or cut and pasted. When
only one of a pair of constrained objects is duplicated or copied or cut and pasted, the constraint is removed.
When a parametric constraint is placed, green constraint indicators are drawn for the object(s) involved. To hide
indicators, deselect Show parametric constraints in the Display tab of the Vectorworks preferences. Alternatively,
select View > Show > Show or Hide Constraints; the command toggles between displaying or hiding constraints, as
appropriate.

Parametric Constraints |

163

Dimensional Constraints
Dimensional constraints maintain a measurable relationship. They resemble standard dimensions when placed.

Constrain Angle
Constrain the angular relationship between separate objects or line segments of a single object. If one object or segment
is rotated, the object or segment it is constrained to adjusts to maintain the angle.
To constrain the angle between objects or line segments of a single object:
1. Click the Constrain Angle tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on one of the two objects or line segments to be constrained.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the second object or line segment to be constrained.
A green angle constraint is drawn between the two objects or line segments.

1st click
Object
2nd click

Constrain Radius
Constrain the radius of a single arc or circle. If the arc or circle is accidentally resized, the constraint prevents the
operation, preserving the radius.
To constrain the radius of an arc or circle:
1. Click the Constrain Radius tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the arc or circle to be constrained.
A green radius constraint is drawn on the object.

Click on the
object

164

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

The Constrain Radius tool does not work on quarter arcs.

Constrain Horizontal Distance

Constrain the horizontal distance of an edge of an object, a line segment, or between two points. If an object resize is
attempted, the constraint prevents the operation, preserving the original horizontal distance. When the constraint is on
two different objects, if one object is modified, the object it is constrained to moves to remain at the same constrained
horizontal distance.
To constrain the horizontal distance of an edge of an object or a line segment:
1. Click the Constrain Horiz Distance tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the object to be constrained.
A green horizontal distance constraint is drawn on the object.

Click on the object

To constrain the horizontal distance between two points:

1. Click the Constrain Horiz Distance tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the first point to be constrained.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the second point to be constrained.
A green horizontal distance constraint is drawn between the two points.
1st click

2nd click

Constrain Vertical Distance

Constrain the vertical distance of an edge of an object, line segment, or between two points. If an object resize is
attempted, the constraint prevents the operation, preserving the original vertical distance. When the constraint is on
two different objects, if one object is modified, the object to which it is constrained moves to remain at the same
constrained vertical distance.

Parametric Constraints |

165

To constrain the vertical distance of an edge of an object or line segment:

1. Click the Constrain Vertical Distance tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the object to be constrained.
A green vertical distance constraint is drawn on the object.

Click on the object

To constrain the vertical distance between two points:

1. Click the Constrain Vertical Distance tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the first point to be constrained.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the second point to be constrained.
A green vertical distance constraint is drawn between the two points.

1st click

2nd click

Constrain Distance
Constrain the distance of an edge of an object, line segment, or between two points regardless of the angle. If an object
is accidentally resized, the constraint prevents the operation, preserving the original distance. When the constraint is
on two different objects, if one object is modified, the object to which it is constrained moves to remain at the same
constrained distance.

166

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

To constrain the distance of an edge of an object or line segment:

1. Click the Constrain Distance tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the object to be constrained.
A green horizontal distance constraint is drawn on the object.

Object

Click on the object

To constrain the distance between two points:

1. Click the Constrain Distance tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the first point to be constrained.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the second point to be constrained.
A green distance constraint is drawn between the two points.

1st click

Point

2nd click

Geometric Constraints
Geometric constraints preserve the geometric properties of objects.

Constrain Horizontal-Vertical
Constrain a linear object to remain horizontal or vertical. Once constrained, the object cannot be rotated to any other
position. The object can be resized in length, but it always remains horizontal or vertical.
To constrain an object to remain horizontal-vertical:

Parametric Constraints |

167

1. Click the Constrain Horiz-Vertical tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the linear object to be constrained.
A green horizontal-vertical constraint is drawn on the object.

Click on the object

If the object is diagonal when the constraint is placed, it rotates to become vertical or horizontal, depending on
which angle it is closest to.

Constrain Parallel
Constrain linear objects or line segments to be parallel to one another. If one object is rotated, the object constrained to
it rotates to remain parallel to the first object. Lines do not need to be parallel when placing the constraints; the first
line rotates to match the angle of the second line.
To constrain linear objects or line segments to be parallel:
1. Click the Constrain Parallel tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the line to constrain.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the line to be constrained.
Green parallel constraint indicators are drawn around the two lines.
1st click

Object
2nd click

Constrain Perpendicular
Constrain linear objects or line segments to be perpendicular to one another. If one line is rotated, the line it is
constrained to adjusts to remain perpendicular to the first line. Lines do not need to be perpendicular when placing
the constraints; the first line rotates to become perpendicular to the second line.

168

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

To constrain lines to be perpendicular:

1. Click the Constrain Perpendicular tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the line to constrain.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the line to be constrained.
A green perpendicular constraint is drawn, connecting the two lines.

1st click

2nd click

Constrain Colinear
Constrain the colinearity between two linear objects. If one line is moved, the line it is constrained to adjusts to remain
aligned. Lines do not need to be aligned when placing the constraints; the first line moves to become colinear to the
second line.
To constrain the colinearity between two lines:
1. Click the Constrain Colinear tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the line to constrain.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the line to be constrained.
Green colinear constraint indicators are drawn on the two lines.

2nd click

1st click

Parametric Constraints |

169

Constrain Coincident
Constrain two selected points to remain attached. If one object is moved, the object it is constrained to adjusts to
maintain the connection. The first point stretches to connect to the second point, if necessary.
To constrain the connection between two points:
1. Click the Constrain Coincident tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the point to constrain.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the point to be constrained.
A green coincident constraint is drawn where the two points touch.

1st click
2nd click

Constrain Concentric
Constrain circles and arcs concentrically. If a circle or arc is moved, the circle or arc it is constrained to moves so that
their centers remain aligned. Circles and arcs do not need to be concentric when placing the constraints; the first object
moves so that its center aligns to the second objects center.
To constrain two circles or arcs concentrically:
1. Click the Constrain Concentric tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the object to constrain.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the object to be constrained.
A green concentric constraint is drawn at the center of the two objects.

2nd click
1st click

170

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

Constrain Tangent
Constrain a circle, arc or line to be tangent to another circle or arc. If one object is moved, the other object it is
constrained to adjusts to maintain the tangency. Objects do not need to be tangent to one another when placing the
constraints; the first object moves to become tangent to the second.
To constrain a circle, arc or line to be tangent to a circle or arc:
1. Click the Constrain Tangent tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the circle or arc to constrain.
The cursor switches to the bulls-eye cursor.
3. Click on the circle, arc or line to be constrained.
A green tangent constraint is drawn at the tangent point of the two objects.

1st click

2nd click

Editing Parametric Constraints

When a constrained object is deleted, the parametric constraint attached to it is also removed. To remove the constraint
without removing the attached object, use the Edit Constraints command.
A situation may arise where the value of a dimensional constraint needs to be changed. A wall with a horizontal
distance constraint value of 2 6 may at a later point in the project need to be changed to 5 6. This type of edit is also
accomplished using the Edit Constraints command.
Individual constraints can be selected from a list of all constraints currently applied to a selected object. The selected
constraint turns red to indicate which one is about to be edited. Geometric constraints, where appropriate, along with
turning the constraint red, also show the connection between the two constrained objects for clarity.

Deleting Parametric Constraints

To delete a parametric constraint from an object:
1. Select the object with the constraint.
2. Select Modify > Edit Constraints.
The Edit Constraints dialog box opens.

Parametric Constraints |

3. Select the constraint to be removed from the Constraints list.

The selected constraint turns red.
4. Click Delete to remove the constraint.
To delete all the constraints attached to an object, click Delete All.
5. Click OK.

Changing a Dimensional Constraint Value

To change a dimensional constraint value:
1. Select the object with the constraint.
2. Select Modify > Edit Constraints.
The Edit Constraints dialog box opens.

171

172

| Chapter 4: Drawing with Snapping and Constraints

3. In the Dimensional Constraint Value field, enter the new dimension, and click OK.
The dimensional value is updated and the object or objects are adjusted.

Using Vectorworks Resources

Vectorworks provides a variety of resources to aid in drawing. It is also possible to create custom resources to your
specifications. These resources are easily accessible from the Resource Browser, which is the central repository for all
available Vectorworks resources.
Some of these resources are also available by default at the point of use to facilitate faster, easier drawing. Custom
resources can also be made available by default. This provides the flexibility to choose among default resources,
custom resources, or all available resources while drawing.

Libraries
Vectorworks is installed with hundreds of libraries, which can be accessed by adding them as a favorite through the
Resource Browser (see Accessing Existing Resources on page 180). Excluding standards and templates (which are
installed based on the drawing unit selected during installation), all Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks
libraries are universal, and are installed regardless of the drawing unit selected during installation. Libraries are
organized by professional discipline and subject, and include the following:

Hatches
Image Props (Renderworks required)
Objects-Building Services
Objects-Miscellaneous & Entourage
Textures (Renderworks required)

Image Fills
Objects-Building Architecture & Interior
Objects-Landscape & Site
Objects-Third Party Promotional

A subset of the resources available in libraries is also available by default at the point of use (see Vectorworks
Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173). The Vectorworks Design Series contains additional
libraries. For a list of libraries and the product(s) to which they belong, see Vectorworks and Renderworks Libraries
on page 833 in this guide, or Vectorworks Design Series Libraries on page 835 in the Vectorworks Design Series
Users Guide.

Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources

The more commonly used resources are available at the point of use while you draw; it is not necessary to first add
them to the current file through the Resource Browser.
The following table lists Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks default resources and the product to which
they belong.

Default Resource

Location

Vectorworks

Cabinet handles

Libraries\Defaults\Cabinet - Handles

Color palettes

Libraries\Defaults\Color Palettes

Dash styles

Libraries\Defaults\Attributes - Dash Styles

Gradients

Libraries\Defaults\Attributes - Gradients

Hatches

Libraries\Defaults\Attributes - Hatches

Image fills

Libraries\Defaults\Attributes - Image Fills

Renderworks backgrounds

Libraries\Defaults\Renderworks - Backgrounds

Renderworks

174

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Default Resource

Location

Vectorworks

Renderworks

Renderworks textures

Libraries\Defaults\Renderworks - Textures

Structural shapes

Libraries\Defaults\Structural Shapes

Title blocks (simple)

Libraries\Defaults\Sheet Border - Title Blocks

Wall hatches

Libraries\Defaults\Walls - Hatches

Wall textures

Libraries\Defaults\Walls - Textures

VBvisual 3D plants

Libraries\Defaults\VBvisual Plant

The ability to use default resources is a preference on the Session tab of the Vectorworks preferences, which can be
disabled if default resource use is not desired; see Session Preferences on page 50.
Default resources are available from a variety of dialog boxes that contain parameters that allow resource access. They
are also available from the Attributes and Object Info palettes. Once a default resource is selected for use, it is
automatically imported into the current file and displays in the Resource Browser. It can then be shared among other
drawing files.

Creating Custom Default Resources

To make a custom resource available as a default resource, use any of the following methods.
Import custom resources to a default resource file
Add a custom resource file to a default resource folder
Create a custom resource file and place an alias of (Macintosh) or shortcut to (Windows) that file in a default
resource folder
Files that contain custom resources can be placed in different folders, depending on who needs access to the resource.
The folder structure must be the same as that of the Vectorworks default resource libraries.
To create a default resource for yourself only, put the file in the appropriate subfolder within
[User]\Libraries\Defaults (where [User] is the user data folder specified in your Vectorworks preferences).
See User Folders Preferences on page 56 for more information about user folders.
If Vectorworks Design Series is installed, you can create a default resource that is project-specific, or that is
shared with a workgroup. To do so, put the file on the network in the appropriate subfolder within
[Workgroup]\Libraries\Defaults (where [Workgroup] is a workgroup folder specified in your Vectorworks
preferences). When coworkers set up this workgroup folder in their preferences, they also have access to the
default resource.
If a custom resource file contains multiple types of resources, Vectorworks only displays the resource type for the
folder that contains the custom file (or an alias or shortcut to the file). For example, if a file contains both wall hatches
and textures, and the file is in the Libraries\Defaults\Walls - Textures folder, only the wall textures are displayed.

Identifying Duplicate Resources

When a resource name has been duplicated in the current file, Vectorworks checks to see if any difference exists
between the two resources.
If the two resources are identical, only one is listed for selection

Using the Resource Browser |

175

If there are variations between the resources containing duplicate names, Vectorworks appends the originating
file name in parentheses to the default resource, and both resources display for selection

Organizing Resource Display

The custom and default resources are displayed below the resources in the current file; each list is in ascending
alphabetical order.
To display the custom or current files resources first in a selection list, implement a naming standard that places the
desired resources toward the top of the list alphabetically. To view only the current files resources in a selection list,
disable the Display default content Vectorworks preference.

Using the Resource Browser

The Resource Browser is the central repository for all Vectorworks resources.

File list
File folder list

Files menu
Home button
Resources menu
Up one level button

Resource type
Resource preview
Resource name

Resource display window

Resource tooltip

Active symbol button

Parameter

Description

File list

Lists all open and favorite files, and temporarily shows the name of a browsed file;
displays Active Document when Always Display Active Document has been
selected from the File list

File folder list

Lists the files symbol folders; select a symbol folder to display the folders resources
in the resource display window

Resource type

In Thumbnails mode, displays resources divided into categories by type; the types are
displayed in headings that can be shown and expanded, or collapsed and hidden (see
Hiding and Showing Resources on page 178). In List mode, click the column header
to sort the columns by resource name or by resource type.

Resource preview

Displays resources with a preview image, or lists the resources with a representational
icon (see Viewing Resources on page 176)

176

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Parameter

Description

Resource name

Shows the resource name; a name in italics indicates a referenced resource. Type the
first letter of a resource to quickly display resource names beginning with that letter.
The color (black, red, or blue) indicates the type of resource (see Symbol Types on
page 187).

Resource tooltip

Shows the full resource name as a tooltip when the mouse pointer hovers over a
resource; for referenced resources, the tooltip also shows the source file name

Active symbol button

Displays the currently active symbol in the resource display window

Files menu

Lists menu commands that are used to access resources; see Accessing Existing
Resources on page 180

Home button

Displays the resources of the currently active file

Resources menu

Lists menu commands that are used to work with resources; see Working with
Resources on page 185

Up one level button

Moves one level up the symbol folder hierarchy

Resource display window

Displays the resources from the file shown in the File list, and the symbol folder
shown in the File Folder list. Each resource type must be selected for display in the
Resource Browser (see Hiding and Showing Resources on page 178).

Opening the Resource Browser

To open the Resource Browser:
Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.

Resource Display
The resources displayed in the Resource Browser depend on several selections and settings:
the file selected from the File list,
the current, favorites or browsed file(s) selected from the Files menu (which determine what can be selected from
the File list),
the symbol folder selected in the File Folder list, and
the resource types selected for display.
Select a file from the File list, and, if necessary, a symbol folder, to view that files resources. Click Home to view the
resources of the currently active file. Select Always Display Active Document from the File list to always show the
resources of the currently active file in the resource display window.

Viewing Resources
Resources can be viewed in either Thumbnails (default) or List mode.

Using the Resource Browser |

177

Click the column

header to select how to
sort the resources; click
again to change the
sort order

Full color, 64x64

pixel image

Representational
resource icon

Thumbnails mode

List mode

In Thumbnails mode, resources are displayed in 64x64 pixel full color. Symbols, plug-in objects, gradient fills, image
fills, and hatch patterns are previewed with an actual image; other resources are previewed with a representational
icon. For symbols, the thumbnail view and render mode can be set from the Resource menu, and when editing
symbols, the thumbnail view can be set to match the editing view. Long resource names display on up to five lines,
and the number of characters displayed depends on the system font selected. In List mode, resources are displayed as
16x16 pixel representational icons.

Resource

Thumbnail Icon

List Icon

Gradient Fill (see Gradient Attributes on page 287)

Hatch Pattern (see Hatch Attributes on page 281)

Image Fill (see Image Attributes on page 292)

Record Format (see Record Formats on page 205)

Referenced Resource (see Workgroup Referencing on page 128)
Renderworks Background (Renderworks required; see Creating Layer
Backgrounds on page 752)
Renderworks Texture (Renderworks required; see Creating Textures on
page 731))
Renderworks Prop Texture (Renderworks required)

Sketch Style (Design Series required; see Sketch Rendering on page 674 in
the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide)

Resource name displays in italics

178

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Resource

Thumbnail Icon

List Icon

2D-only Symbols and Plug-in Objects (see Understanding Symbols on

page 187)
3D-only Symbols and Plug-in Objects (see Understanding Symbols on
page 187)
Hybrid Symbols and Plug-in Objects (see Understanding Symbols on
page 187)
Symbol Folder (see Managing Symbols on page 202)
VectorScript (see Using Scripts on page 685)

VectorScript Palette (see Using Scripts on page 685)

Wall Style (Vectorworks Architect required)
Worksheet (see Creating Worksheets on page 647)

To change the view mode:

1. In the Resource Browser, select View As from the Resources menu.
2. From the list, select Thumbnails or List.
Select Window > Palettes > Save Palette Positions to save selected views across Vectorworks sessions. To revert
to settings established when the custom workspace was created (in the User Data and Preferences folder), click
Reset Saved Settings from the Session tab of Vectorworks preferences (see Session Preferences on page 50).

Hiding and Showing Resources

When there are a large number of resource types, it may be useful to hide unused resource types from view.
To hide or show resource types:
1. Select Show Object Types from the Resources menu.
2. Select the resource type to hide or show. A currently visible resource type is indicated by a check mark next to its
name. (In List view, hidden resources are not shown in the resources display window.)

Using the Resource Browser |

179

In Thumbnails mode, click on the disclosure arrow next to the resource type name in the Resource Browser to hide or
display resources. Alternatively, double-click on the resource name bar to hide or display resources.
Select Window > Palettes > Save Palette Positions to save the current show/hide status across Vectorworks sessions.
To revert to settings established when the custom workspace was created (in the User Data and Preferences folder),
click Reset Saved Settings from the Session tab of Vectorworks preferences (see Session Preferences on page 50).

Creating New Resources

Most new resources are created through the Resource Browser. However, custom selection, tool/attribute, visibility
VectorScripts, and plug-ins are created through commands on the Tools menu, and symbols are created through
Modify > Create Symbol. Hatches can be created either through the Resource Browser or through Modify > Hatch.
To create a new resource:
1. In the Resource Browser, select New Resource from the Resources menu. The New Resource menu opens.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) in the Resource Browser to open the menu.

2. Select the resource type to create.

The resource-specific dialog box opens.
3. Follow the specific creation procedures for that resource.

180

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Once created, the resource displays in the Resource Browser.
Alternatively, double-click in an unused area of the resource display area to open the Create Resource dialog box.
The dialog box contains the same items as the New Resource menu.

Quick Resource Creation

When you right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) in an area of the Resource Browser that is associated with
an existing resource type, the context menu contains an additional option for quickly creating another resource of the
same type. For example, right-click or Ctrl-click in the Hatches section and the New Hatch in (document) option
displays.
In addition, immediately after a new resource is created, the Resources menu contains an additional option for quickly
creating another resource of the same type.
Click here to
display the
command from the
Resources menu
Ctrl-click here to
display the
context menu

Accessing Existing Resources

While new resources are automatically added to the Resource Browser upon creation, resources that exist in other files
must be imported or referenced into the current file through the Resource Browser palette. Default resources are
automatically imported into the current file at the point of use, and display in the Resource Browser; see Vectorworks
Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173.

Quick Resource Browsing

Resources in another file can be quickly browsed to locate resources and to determine whether that file should be
added as a favorite.
To view the resources available in another file that is not yet a favorite:
1. In the Resource Browser, select Browse a Document from the Files menu.
The standard Open dialog box opens.
2. Select the file to browse, and then click Open.
The resources in the selected file temporarily display in the Resource Browser. A resource from that file can be
imported into the current file, but the browsed file is not saved as a favorite.

Using the Resource Browser |

181

Using Resources from Other Files

The Files list displays all currently open files and favorites.
Active Document displays when Always Display Active Document has been selected from the Files menu; the
resources from the currently active file are always displayed.
To use a resource from an open file other than the active one, or from a favorite file:
1. In the Resource Browser, select the desired open file or favorite from the Files list.
The file name is displayed in the Files list, and its resources display in the resource display window.
2. Select the desired resource from the resource display window. Multiple resources can be selected and imported
at the same time.
To use the resource immediately, double-click it to activate it, or select Apply or Make Active, if applicable,
from the Resources menu. (Alternatively, drag the resource onto an object or to a location in the current file.)
If symbol folders are present in the drawing, specify the location of the imported resource.
To import the resource for future use, select Import from the Resources menu.
To reference the resource, select Reference from the Resources menu. If the source file is not currently
referenced by this file, specify the new reference information. (See Referencing Resources on page 134.)
The resource is added to the current files Resource Browser. (Default resources are automatically imported into the
current file at the point of use, and display in the Resource Browser; see Vectorworks Fundamentals and
Renderworks Default Resources on page 173.)
When you access symbols or VectorScripts within folders, the selected folder name is displayed in the Document
Folder list, and its contents are displayed in the resource display window. To return to the main resource window,
click on the Document Folder list, and then select Top Level. Alternatively, click the Up One Level button until the top
level is reached.

Using Favorites Files

For quick access, the Resource Browser can store links to Vectorworks files that contain resources that you use
frequently. You can then import resources from a Favorites file into any Vectorworks file and not have to search for the
file again. Remove the link when the file is of no further use. Favorite files are remembered for future sessions.
Use the Files menu in the Resource Browser to create, use, and manage your Favorites list. Alternatively, add files (or
aliases or shortcuts to the files) to the appropriate Favorites folder manually.

Making the Current File a Favorite

To make the current file a favorite:
In the Resource Browser, select Add Current to Favorites from the Files menu.
The file is added to the Files list under Favorites.
The file must be saved to be added as a favorite.

Making an Unopened File a Favorite

To make an unopened file a favorite:
1. In the Resource Browser, select Add New Favorite Files from the Files menu.
The standard Open dialog box opens.
2. Select the file to make a favorite, and then click Open.
The file is added to the Files list under Favorites.

182

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

The file must be saved in the same version of Vectorworks as the current file to be added as a favorite.

Multiple files can be selected and added as favorites at the same time; alternatively, press Ctrl+A (Windows) or
Command+A (Macintosh) to select all files at once.

Opening the Current Favorite

To open the current favorite:
1. In the Resource Browser, select the favorite file to open from the Files list.
2. Select Open Current Favorite from the Files menu.
The file opens.

Refreshing Favorites from Disk

To update the resources from all favorite files:
In the Resource Browser, select Refresh Favorites from Disk from the Files menu.
All current favorite files are reloaded into the Resource Browser, to reflect any changes that occurred since they
were loaded when this Vectorworks session began.

Revealing the Location of the Current Favorite

To reveal the location of a favorite file:
1. In the Resource Browser, select the favorite file to reveal from the Files list.
The file name is displayed as the current file in the Files list, and its resources display in the resource window.
2. Select Reveal Current Favorite from the Files menu.
Either Windows Explorer or Macintosh Finder opens to the folder that contains the file.

Removing Favorites
To remove a single favorite file:
1. In the Resource Browser, select the favorite file to delete from the Files list.
2. Select Remove Current Favorite from the Files menu.
The file is removed from the Favorites list.
To remove all favorite files:
1. In the Resource Browser, select Remove All Favorites from the Files menu.
A confirmation dialog box opens.
2. Click Yes to remove all favorites.
All favorite files are removed from the Favorites list.

Adding a Favorite Manually

To create a favorite manually (not through the Resource Browser):
1. Place the file that you want to appear on the Favorites list (or a shortcut or alias that points to the file) in one of
the following folders.

Using the Resource Browser |

183

Favorites Folder

Effect on Favorites Lists

[User]/Libraries/Favorites

The file appears only in your Favorites list ([User] is the user data folder
specified in your Vectorworks preferences). See User Folders Preferences on
page 56 for more information about user folders.

[Workgroup]/Libraries/Favorites
(Vectorworks Design Series
required)

The file appears in the Favorites list of any user who has the workgroup
folder set up in Vectorworks preferences

The file is added to the Files list under Favorites.

2. In the Resource Browser, select Refresh Favorites from Disk from the Files menu.
Only files that are in your user Favorites folder can be removed with the commands in the Resource Browser.
(See User Folders Preferences on page 56 for more information.) Files that were placed in a workgroup
Favorites folder must be removed manually.

Finding Resources
Three ways exist to quickly locate Vectorworks resources: by incremental search in the Resource Browser, by searching
a specific file path, or by locating a resource used in the drawing.

Incremental Search
To quickly access a resource, click in the resource display window and begin to type the resources name. The resource
display window scrolls to the first resource that has the letter(s) entered.

Finding a Resource
Use the Find Resource command to quickly locate a resource in a file created with the current version of Vectorworks,
and optionally to select that resource in the Resource Browser.
To locate and use a resource:
1. In the Resource Browser, select Find Resource from the Resources menu.
The Find Resource dialog box opens.

184

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Parameter

Description

Find resource names containing

Enter the full or partial resource name to find

Search Location
Current file

Select to search for the resource in the current file

Files on disk

Select to search for the resource in the displayed path. To search for the resource
in a different folder, click Choose; select the folder to search in, and then click
Open (Macintosh) or OK (Windows) to return to the Find Resource dialog box.

Include subfolders

Select whether to include subfolders in the search process

Options
Resource types

Select to search for all resource types or for one specific resource type

Match case

Select whether the search is case sensitive

Find whole words only

Select this option to search for occurrences that are whole words only, and not
part of a larger string of text

2. Enter the search criteria and click Find.

The Find Resource Results dialog box displays the resource name, type, and file location for all resources that
match the specified search criteria. Select the resource name and click Select (or double-click the resource name);
the file that contains the resource is opened (if necessary), and the resource is selected in the Resource Browser.
3. Once the resource is found, there are various ways to use it:
To use the resource immediately, double-click it to activate it, or select Apply or Make Active, if applicable,
from the Resources menu. (Alternatively, drag the resource onto an object or to a location in the current file.)
If symbol folders are present in the drawing, specify the location of the imported resource.
To import the resource for future use, select Import from the Resources menu.
To reference the resource, select Reference from the Resources menu. If the source file is not currently
referenced by this file, specify the new reference information. (See Referencing Resources on page 134.)
The resource is added to the current files Resource Browser. (Default resources are automatically imported into the
current file at the point of use, and display in the Resource Browser; see Vectorworks Fundamentals and
Renderworks Default Resources on page 173.)

Locating Specific Resources

Resources used in a drawing can be quickly located and selected in the Resource Browser with the Locate in Resource
Browser context menu command.
To locate a resource from the drawing:
1. Move the cursor over the resource (or object containing a resource, such as a rectangle with a hatch) to be located.
Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) and select Locate in Resource Browser from the context menu.
The command name dynamically updates to reflect the resource; if the cursor is over an image, or an object with
an image resource applied is selected, the command displays as Locate Image in Resource Browser. Textures
applied to object parts can also be located (Renderworks required). Most resource types can be quickly located by
this method, except for record formats, symbol folders, VectorScripts, and VectorScript palettes.
2. The Resource Browser automatically navigates to, and selects, the specific resource.

Using the Resource Browser |

185

Working with Resources

Available commands are determined by the resource selected.
To use a resource:
1. Select the resource to use in the Resource Browser.
2. Select the desired command from the Resources menu. Some operations, such as Edit, Delete, and Move, can
only be performed on the resources in the active file.
Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a resource to access a context menu. This menu lists the
appropriate commands from the Resources menu for the selected resource.

Command

Description

Shortcut Key Equivalent

Apply

Applies the resource to the selected object(s)

Double-click or Enter key

Attach

Attaches the record to the selected object(s). Opens the

Attach Record dialog box to attach a record to a plug-in
object or symbol.

Double-click (record format only)

Delete

Deletes the resource from the Resource Browser

Delete key

Duplicate

Duplicates the resource with a new name, if applicable

Not applicable

Edit

Opens the edit dialog box of the resource. If the

resource is a referenced symbol, opens the file
containing the symbol, and then opens the edit dialog
box for the symbol.

Ctrl + double-click (Windows)

Enter

Opens the folder to display its symbol resources or

VectorScripts

Double-click or Enter key

Export (Design
Series required)

See Exporting Resources on page 29 in the

Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide

Not applicable

Extract Image(s)

Opens the Browse for Folder (Windows) or Export

Image File (Macintosh) dialog box to save a .png file
extracted from the selected resource

Not applicable

Option + double-click (Macintosh)

To extract images from all image-based textures,

Renderworks backgrounds, and image resources
in the current document, execute this command
with no resources selected.
Make Active

Activates the 2D or 3D Symbol Insertion tool so that a

symbol or plug-in can be inserted

Double-click

Move

Opens the Move Symbol dialog box to place a symbol

or plug-in object resource in another folder

Not applicable

New [resource]

Allows quick creation of the resource type relevant to

the section of the Resource window in which the
context menu was invoked

Not applicable

Open

Opens the worksheet on screen for edits

Ctrl + double-click (Windows)

Option + double-click (Macintosh)

186

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Command

Description

Shortcut Key Equivalent

Rename

Opens the Assign Name dialog box to rename the

resource

Ctrl + double-click (Image fills only)

Import

Imports a resource into the current file

Not applicable

Reference

Creates a referenced resource (see Referencing

Resources on page 134)

Not applicable

Break Reference

Breaks the reference between a master file and the

target file; the resource remains in the target file but is
no longer referenced

Not applicable

Run

Runs the selected VectorScript. Text documents that

contain VectorScripts must be run using the Tools >
Scripts > Run VectorScript command.

Double-click or Enter key

Worksheet On
Drawing

Places the worksheet on the drawing for display and

printing

Double-click or Enter key

Set Thumbnail
View

Applies a view to the thumbnail preview of the

selected symbol(s), or to all symbols within folders and
sub-folders if a symbol folder is selected, or to all
symbols in the file if nothing is selected

Not applicable

Set Thumbnail
Render Mode

Applies a render mode to the thumbnail preview of the

selected symbol(s), or to all symbols within folders and
sub-folders if a symbol is selected, or to all symbols in
the file if nothing is selected

Not applicable

Image resources can be compressed to reduce the Vectorworks file size. See Compressing Images on page 447
for more information.

Creating Resource Libraries

Resources can be stored in dedicated files that can then be added to a files favorites (see Using Favorites Files on
page 181) or used as custom default resources (see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources
on page 173). These files become resource libraries that make it faster and easier to access a specific resource. These
libraries do not increase the size of the current file or consume significant amounts of memory.
Save like resources in the same library file to make it easier to search for them.
To create a resource library:
1. Select File > New.
2. Import or create the resources to contain in this file.
3. Select File > Save.
The Save Vectorworks Drawing dialog box opens.
4. Select the location for saving the file.
5. Enter a name for the file in the Name field.
6. Click Save.
The file is saved.

Understanding Symbols |

187

Understanding Symbols
Symbol Advantages
2D and 3D objects can be saved as 2D, 3D, or hybrid (2D and 3D combined) symbol definitions. Vectorworks also ships
with thousands of symbols. Symbol definitions save the object properties, such as size, color, and class, within the
symbol definition; these properties are retained each time the symbol is placed, and when a symbol is imported into a
different drawing.
Symbols provide several advantages:
Smaller file sizes: The symbol and its definition are stored only once in the drawing file. Placement information
(location coordinates, rotation) is all that is required for each symbol instance.
One-time editing: Changes to the symbol definition automatically update all the instances of the symbol in the
drawing.
Attached database information: The information associated with a symbol can be used to generate reports and
worksheets. Information attached to a symbol is specific to that instance, allowing each instance to be edited
individually.
Ease of import: With the Resource Browser, importing symbols from one file to another is fast and easy, and any
database information attached to the symbol is also imported.

Symbol Types
In Vectorworks, you can create 2D and 3D objects. Symbols, which are converted objects, can also consist of 2D, 3D, or
hybrid objects.
In addition, there are special symbol categories which indicate the symbols behavior at placement. These categories
are color-coded within the Resource Browser for identification. The category a symbol belongs to depends on the type
of object converted to a symbol and the options selected at symbol creation.
Symbols can be nested within other symbols.

Symbol Type

Symbol Category

2D

2D symbols are designed for drafting alone. While they display in a 3D drawing view, they do not
interact with the 3D environment. During a walkthrough or flyover, these items remain flat and do
not rotate with the rest of the drawing.

3D

3D symbols have a height (Z coordinate) as well as widths and lengths (X and Y coordinates). 3D
objects display flat in a 2D drawing view. However, they retain their 3D properties. Symbols
created from 3D objects that are not hybrid objects appear flat in 2D views, but show dimension in
3D views.

Hybrid

A hybrid symbol contains both a 2D object and a 3D component, and displays correctly according
to the view. For example, a hybrid door symbol displays as a swing arc in Top/Plan 2D view and
as a fully formed door in a 3D view. The advantage of working with hybrid symbols is that 3D
models can automatically be created from 2D drawings, or vice versa.

Black

This is the most common type of symbol, the static symbol. Its parameters are saved within the
symbol definition, and set at placement. Changes made to the symbol definition affect all instances
of the symbol.

188

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Symbol Type

Symbol Category

Blue

When placed, this type of symbol is converted to a group. Any changes made to the symbol
definition later have no effect on the group. At symbol creation, select Convert to Group in the
insertion options to specify a blue symbol (see Creating New Symbols on page 189).

Red

When placed, this type of symbol is converted to a plug-in object. It has a specific insertion
behavior (point, linear, rectangular, or path) and set parameters, and it can be modified, with many
variations of the same object in the file. At symbol creation, select Convert to Plug-in Object in the
insertion options to specify a red symbol (see Creating New Symbols on page 189). Changes to
a red symbol definition affect future instances, but not existing ones.

Plug-in Objects
Plug-in objects have all the power of standard symbols, with the added advantage of being customizable. Unlike
symbols, plug-in objects have the option of being placed onto the drawing and remaining modifiable. This is useful if
the drawing needs to contain many different variations of the same object.
Some tool sets and libraries in Vectorworks contain plug-in objects; for example, the Scale Bar tool, located in the
Dims/Notes tool set, inserts a plug-in object. In addition to the tool sets, pre-defined plug-in objects are available in the
Libraries folder (in sub-folders beginning with the word Object or Objects), and are accessed through the Resource
Browser.
When a plug-in object from a tool set is inserted, an object properties dialog box may open the first time the item is
placed in the drawing. The properties in this dialog box set the default values for the object during this session. Modify
the properties prior to inserting the object, or accept the default values and click OK. Object instances can be modified
through the Object Info palette after insertion.
Plug-in objects can be created manually through Tools > Scripts > VectorScript Plug-in Editor using VectorScript. See
VectorScript Plug-in Editor on page 110 in the VectorScript Language Guide. Plug-ins are described in detail in
Using VectorScript Plug-ins on page 85 in the VectorScript Language Guide. The VectorScript Language Guide is
available as part of the help system, and also as a PDF file in the help system.
In addition, a symbol can be saved as a red symbol that becomes a plug-in object upon insertion.
There are four different types of plug-in objects: point, linear, rectangular, and path. Each type is different in how it is
placed in the drawing and edited.
Linear and rectangular objects cannot be inserted directly into a wall. However, once placed in the drawing, they
can be dragged onto a wall to insert them.

Point Plug-in Objects

Point plug-in objects are placed by a single click in the drawing to specify the location, and then a second click to set
the rotation angle. This is the same way symbols are placed using the symbol insertion tool. A preview image of the
object is visible at the cursor location. Point plug-in objects cannot be edited (resized or rotated) with the cursor; they
are edited using the Object Info palette.

Linear Plug-in Objects

Linear plug-in objects are placed with two clicks. The first click sets the beginning point and the second sets the
endpoint of a line. The orientation of the object is determined by this line. The object can be resized or rotated by
clicking on a reshape handle at either end of the line. It can also be edited using the Object Info palette.

Rectangular Plug-in Objects

Rectangular plug-in objects are placed by a sequence of three clicks in the drawing. There are two different placement
modes which determine how these three clicks are interpreted.

Creating New Symbols |

189

Center-Line Placement
Plug-in object
specific preferences
Edge Placement

Center-Line Placement Mode: The first click specifies the origin of the object, the second click specifies the
length, and the third click defines half the width of the rectangular object. After the second click, the cursor
displays feedback symmetrically on both sides of the center-line of the rectangle.
Edge Placement Mode: The first click specifies one corner of the rectangular object, the second click determines
the length, and the third click specifies the entire width.
When a rectangular plug-in object is selected, there are eight selection handles visible. The object can be resized by
dragging these handles, or edited through the Object Info palette.

Path Plug-in Objects

Path plug-in objects are created with a sequence of several clicks that define the vertex points along a path. There are
two different types of path plug-in objects based on the type of path that is used. A 2D path plug-in object uses a
polyline path and a 3D path plug-in object uses a 3D NURBS curve for its path.
Path plug-in objects can be edited using the 2D Reshape tool or the 3D Reshape tool directly. They may also be edited
through Modify > Edit Group, or the Object Info palette.

Creating New Symbols

The Create Symbol command creates symbols from 2D and/or 3D objects, including text. Symbols can also be created
from other symbols, from plug-in objects, groups, and worksheets. At placement, the symbol can convert
automatically into a group or plug-in object. Viewports cannot be made into symbols.
For more information on symbol types and color categories, see Symbol Types on page 187.

Item

Convert to

Result

2D object

2D symbol

2D black symbol, for use in Top/Plan view

3D object

3D symbol

3D black symbol, for use in a 3D view

2D/3D Hybrid Object

Hybrid symbol

Hybrid black symbol, for use in 2D plans and 3D models

Symbol

Symbol

Saves any changes to the current symbol attributes as a new, black

symbol definition

Group

Creates a new blue symbol definition, to be inserted as a group

Plug-in object

Creates a new red symbol definition, to be inserted as a plug-in object

Group

Symbol

Creates a new black symbol definition, with multiple objects existing

within a symbol container

Plug-in object

Symbol

Creates a new black symbol definition. This allows all instances to

change by editing the plug-in object inside the symbol, even though the
actual symbol instance cannot be edited.

190

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Item

Worksheet

Convert to

Result

Plug-in object

Creates a new red symbol definition, to be inserted as a plug-in object.

This allows an editable plug-in object to be placed in a drawing with
saved parameters. For example, a door plug-in object, when saved with
a width of 4 and inserted as a plug-in object, is inserted with a width of
4 rather than with the default width.

Group

Creates a new blue symbol definition, to be inserted as a group. For

example, a worksheet can be saved as a preformatted report by saving it
as a blue symbol definition.

To create a new symbol:

1. Select the object(s) to convert into a symbol.
To create a hybrid symbol, select both the 2D and 3D objects. In Top/Plan view, align the objects first (symbol
alignment can be adjusted after creation with the Edit Symbol command). The symbol preview that displays in
the Resource Browser is generated in the symbol view at creation or editing.
If a hybrid symbol will be inserted into a wall, you can optionally specify the 3D wall hole component in addition
to the 2D and 3D components; see Adding a 3D Wall Hole Component to a Symbol Definition on page 574.
For 2D symbols inserted in walls, two loci can be specified as wall break locations. In Top/Plan view, place two
loci at opposing locations with the object to convert, and select them all before converting. When the symbol is
inserted into the wall, the wall breaks at the loci locations instead of the symbol bounding box.
2. Select Modify > Create Symbol.
The Create Symbol dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Name

Provide a name for the new symbol. Do not use single quotes in symbol names. Single
quotes in names are reserved for use in VectorScript.

Leave Instance in Place

When selected, replaces the current selection with a symbol instance; when deselected,
the object is removed from the drawing. In both cases, the new symbol definition is
added to the Resource Browser.

Convert Planar Objects

Converts planar 2D objects into screen plane objects inside the symbol definition; the 2D
portion of the symbol only displays in Top/Plan view and not when editing the 3D
component of the symbol

Creating New Symbols |

Parameter

Description

Insertion Point

The insertion point controls how the symbol is inserted. Select Plan Projection Center
(2D) or 3D Object Center (3D) to place the symbol by using its geometric center (as
determined by its bounding box) as the symbol insertion point.

191

If converting a plug-in object, select Plug-in Origin to set the center of the object as the
insertion point.
Select Next Mouse Click to set the insertion point manually, with the cursor, after
clicking OK.
Options

Displays additional symbol insertion and conversion options

3. Click Options to select additional symbol insertion options.

The Insertion Options dialog box opens. The Other Options available depend on the original object selected.

Parameter

Description

Insert in Walls

Select whether the symbol will be insertable in walls. When Wall Insertion mode is enabled,
objects that have the Insert in Walls option enabled will insert into walls (see Inserting
Symbols in 2D on page 193).

On Centerline/
On Edge

If Insert in Walls is selected, select how the symbol will be inserted. On Centerline snaps
the symbols insertion point to the center line of the wall. On Edge snaps the symbols
insertion point along either edge of the wall.

Wall Breaks

If Insert in Walls is selected, select how the wall will break around the symbol when it is
inserted into a wall

Other Options
Convert to
Group

Converts the symbol into a grouped object when inserted, disassociating it from the original
symbol definition. Converted grouped objects are identified in the Resource Browser with a
blue name.
Deselect to convert the symbol into a black, unmodifiable symbol; each instance is controlled
by the symbol definition.

192

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Parameter
Convert to
Plug-in Object

Description
Converts the symbol into a plug-in object when inserted, allowing the current parameters to
be pre-set when the plug-in object is inserted. Converted plug-in objects are identified in the
Resource Browser with a red name.
Deselect to convert the symbol into a black, unmodifiable symbol; each instance is controlled
by the symbol definition.

Assign To

Select the class the symbol will be assigned to upon insertion; the symbol can be assigned to
the active class or to a class selected from the Custom Class list

4. Click OK to exit the Insertion Options dialog box, and then click OK again to exit the Create Symbol dialog box.
5. If the Next Mouse Click insertion point option was selected, click to specify the desired symbol insertion point.
6. Specify the folder location for the new symbol in the next Create Symbol dialog box.
Click the folder to select it as the destination for the new symbol.

Parameter

Description

Folder list

Displays the files symbol folders; the selected folder becomes the destination for the new
symbol

New Folder

Creates a new folder within the selected folder; specify the folder name and click OK to
create the symbol folder

Dont show this dialog

Hides this dialog box if you only want to see it when a file already contains symbol folders

7. Click OK.
The new symbol is added to the Resource Browser.

Inserting Symbols |

193

Inserting Symbols
Symbols are resources available from the Resource Browser. To open the Resource Browser, select Windows >
Palettes > Resource Browser. Display the symbol to insert in the Resource Browser (see Accessing Existing
Resources on page 180).
The currently active symbol is inserted; the active symbols name displays at the bottom of the Resource Browser.
Clicking on the active symbol button automatically displays the currently active symbol in the resource display
window.
Symbols are inserted with different tools depending on the current view and projection. In 2D Top/Plan view, symbols
are inserted with the 2D Symbol Insertion tool, and in a 3D view, with the 3D Symbol Insertion tool. Symbols can be
inserted as individual objects or inserted to become part of a wall. Symbols can also be dragged from the Resource
Browser into the drawing. Before inserting a symbol, consider the current view and which insertion mode to use.

Active symbol
button
Active symbol name

Drag and Drop Symbol Insertion Method

To insert a symbol by dragging it from the Resource Browser:
1. Click the symbol in the Resource Browser and drag it to the desired location in the drawing. To insert the symbol
into a wall, the symbol must have the Insert in Walls option enabled (see Creating New Symbols on page 189).
The symbol cannot be rotated during insertion, since the 2D Symbol Insertion or 3D Symbol Insertion tool is
not automatically activated. When a symbol is dropped onto a wall, round wall, or roof, Vectorworks inserts the
symbol into the object using the default flip value and insertion point. (If this is not desirable, make the symbol
active so that it is inserted with the appropriate insertion tool.)
A symbol inserted by dragging and dropping is placed on the active layer plane by default. Press the Option key
(Macintosh) or the Alt key (Windows) while dragging and dropping to place the symbol on the working plane.
2. The symbol is inserted.
If necessary, edit the symbol rotation or flip in the Object Info palette.

Inserting Symbols in 2D
Use the 2D Symbol Insertion tool to place a symbol in the drawing when it is in 2D Top/Plan view. If the drawing is
not currently in Top/Plan view, selecting this tool automatically switches the view to Top/Plan and the projection to 2D
Plan. During insertion, a preview of the symbol is shown to aid in placement. Symbols can also be inserted by
dragging them from the Resource Browser.

194

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Each symbol has its own insertion point, a location on the symbol shown by crosshairs in the Edit Symbol window,
that controls how the symbol is placed into the drawing. The insertion point is specified during the symbols creation.
See Creating New Symbols on page 189 for more information.
Symbol Pick Up

Symbol Alignment Modes

Standard Insertion
Offset Insertion

Wall Insertion Mode

Mode

Description

Standard Insertion

Inserts the symbol based on its specified insertion point, or aligned according to one of
the symbol alignment modes

Offset Insertion

Inserts the symbol in a wall according to an offset reference point

Symbol Pick Up

Designates a symbol from the drawing as the active symbol

Wall Insertion

Toggles between inserting a symbol or plug-in object into a wall with wall breaks, and
inserting a symbol or plug-in object near or on a wall without breaking it.
To prevent all symbol and plug-in objects from inserting into walls, turn off Wall
Insertion mode. When Wall Insertion mode is enabled, objects that have the Insert in
Walls option enabled will insert into walls (see Creating New Symbols on page 189).

Symbol Alignment Modes

These alignment modes apply to Standard Insertion mode, and temporarily override
the insertion point. These modes change the alignment of the insertion point along the
X axis of the bounding box surrounding the symbol. Alternatively, keep the original
point as the insertion point.

Align Symbol Left

Moves the insertion point to the left edge of the symbols bounding box, along the
original X axis

Align Symbol Center

Moves the insertion point to the center of the symbols bounding box, along the
original X axis

Align Symbol Right

Moves the insertion point to the right edge of the symbols bounding box, along the
original X axis

Align Actual Insertion

Point

Uses the symbols originally specified insertion point

Standard Symbol Insertion Mode

To insert a symbol in 2D:
1. In Top/Plan view, select the desired symbol from the Resource Browser.
2. Select Make Active from the Resources menu. The 2D Symbol Insertion tool, on the Basic palette, becomes
active, and the drawing switches to Top/Plan view and 2D Plan projection.
In Top/Plan view, double-click the symbol in the Resource Browser to make the symbol active and select the 2D
Symbol Insertion tool.
3. Click Standard Insertion in the Tool bar.

Inserting Symbols |

195

To insert the symbol into a wall with breaks, enable Wall Insertion mode. The symbol also must have the Insert
in Walls option enabled (see Creating New Symbols on page 189).
4. Click the desired alignment mode (see Inserting Symbols in 2D on page 193).
5. Click to set the location of the symbol.
6. Click a second time, without moving the mouse, to position the symbol exactly as inserted. Alternatively, move
the cursor slightly away from the insertion point to rotate or flip the symbol about its insertion point.
For symbols placed inside walls, moving the mouse flips the symbol about one of two axes: up and down, or left
and right.
In click-drag mode, click and hold the mouse to insert the symbol and still be able to rotate it. A quick click
eliminates the ability to rotate or flip the symbol and locks the orientation of the symbol as it is placed.
7. Click to set the symbol.

Vertical
2nd click
1st click

Horizontal

The first click inserts the

symbol horizontally

Move the cursor up to rotate

the symbol vertically

Click again to set the

symbols position

To place another copy of the symbol in the drawing, move the cursor to another location and click. The selected
symbol and 2D Symbol Insertion tool remain active until another tool is selected.

Offset Symbol Insertion Mode

Use Offset Insertion mode to insert a symbol into a wall at a specific distance from a reference point. The offset
distance can be measured either to the symbols insertion point or to a clicked point on the symbol.
To insert a symbol into a wall in 2D with offset insertion:
1. In Top/Plan view, select the desired symbol from the Resource Browser. The symbol must have the Insert in
Walls option enabled (see Creating New Symbols on page 189).
2. Select Make Active from the Resources menu. The 2D Symbol Insertion tool, on the Basic palette, becomes
active.
Alternatively, in Top/Plan view, double-click the symbol in the Resource Browser to make the symbol active and
to select the 2D Symbol Insertion tool.
3. Click the Offset Insertion mode button.
4. Click the desired alignment mode.
5. Click to set the reference point from which the symbol is to be offset. The reference point does not have to be
within the wall.

196

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

The symbol preview displays when the cursor is over a wall.

6. Click to set the offset location of the symbol.

7. If the symbol is not oriented properly in the wall, move the cursor slightly away from the insertion point, and
then flip the symbol about its axis to the correct position.
In click-drag mode, click and hold the mouse to insert the symbol and still be able to flip it. A quick click
eliminates the ability to flip the symbol and locks the orientation of the symbol as it is placed.
8. Click to set the symbol.
The Enter Offset dialog box opens, displaying the distance between the clicked points. The fields available
depend on whether the wall is straight or round.

Enter Offset dialog box

for straight walls

Enter Offset dialog box

for round walls

Parameter

Description

Offset

For straight walls, specify the offset distance. For round walls, specify either the Distance or the
Angle between the reference point and the symbol. The distance is measured along the outer
arc of the round wall.

Offset Using

Select whether to offset the symbol using the insertion point or the next mouse click on another
point on the symbol

9. Click OK.
10. If the Insertion Point option was selected, the symbol is placed into the wall so that the insertion point is offset as
specified from the reference point.
If the Next Click option was selected, a witness line of the specified length or angle extends from the reference
point to the end point. Click on the symbol to indicate the appropriate offset point and to place the symbol into
the wall so that the clicked point is offset as specified from the reference point.

Symbol Pick Up Mode

In Top/Plan view, the Symbol Pick Up mode picks up any 2D or hybrid symbol already inserted into the drawing
and makes it the active symbol. This avoids having to locate and select the symbol in the Resource Browser.

Inserting Symbols |

197

To pick up and place a symbol:

1. Click the 2D Symbol Insertion tool from the Basic palette.
The view automatically switches to Top/Plan.
2. Click the Symbol Pick Up mode button.
3. Click a symbol in the drawing.
The symbol becomes the active symbol. Note that the symbol clicked on is not highlighted (selection handles do
not display).
Either the Standard Insertion mode or Offset Insertion mode is automatically enabled, depending on the last
mode used. Select a different insertion mode, if desired.
4. Insert the symbol according to the instructions for that mode (see Standard Symbol Insertion Mode on
page 194 or Offset Symbol Insertion Mode on page 195).
To switch to Symbol Pick Up mode quickly, press and hold the Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) key while the 2D
Symbol Insertion tool is active, and then click on the desired 2D or hybrid symbol. The selected symbol is now ready
to be inserted into the drawing.

Wall Insertion Mode

When enabled, the Wall Insertion mode allows a symbol or plug-in object to be inserted into a wall. In addition, the
symbol must have the Insert in Walls option enabled (see Creating New Symbols on page 189).
When Wall Insertion mode is disabled, a symbol or plug-in object is placed near or on top of a wall without being
inserted directly into it.
A symbol or plug-in object inserted into a wall is automatically made parallel to the walls center line, by rotating it to
match the walls angle. To remove a symbol from a wall, click and drag it out of the wall. Vectorworks automatically
seals the cut in the wall.
For more information on inserting and moving symbols into, out of, and within walls, see Inserting and Editing
Symbols Within a Wall on page 565.

Inserting Symbols in 3D
Use the 3D Symbol Insertion tool to place a symbol in the drawing when it is in one of the 3D views. If the drawing is
not currently in a 3D view, selecting this tool automatically switches the view to Top and the projection to Orthogonal.
During insertion, a preview of the symbol is shown to aid in placement. Symbols can also be inserted by dragging
them from the Resource Browser.
Each symbol has its own insertion point, a location on the symbol shown by crosshairs in the Edit Symbol window,
that controls how the symbol is placed into the drawing. The insertion point is specified during the symbols creation.
See Creating New Symbols on page 189 for more information.
Hybrid symbols can only be inserted on a working plane that is parallel to the active layer plane. When inserting
a hybrid symbol, if the working plane is not parallel to the active layer plane, the working plane is moved to, and
aligned with, the active layer plane.
To insert symbols in 3D:
1. In a 3D view, select the desired symbol from the Resource Browser.

198

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

2. Select Make Active from the Resources menu. The 3D Symbol Insertion tool, on the 3D Modeling palette,
becomes active.
In a 3D view, double-click the symbol in the Resource Browser to make the symbol active and select the 3D
Symbol Insertion tool.
3. Click to set the location of the symbol.
4. If the symbol is not oriented properly, move the cursor slightly away from the insertion point; then move the
cursor to rotate the symbol about its insertion point. In the Data bar, use the A (angle) and WP A (working plane
angle) fields to help position the symbol.
In click-drag mode, click and hold the mouse to insert the symbol and still be able to rotate it. A quick click
eliminates the ability to rotate or flip the symbol and locks the orientation of the symbol as it is placed.
5. Click to set the symbol.
To place another copy of the symbol in the drawing, move the cursor to another location and click. The selected
symbol and 3D Symbol Insertion tool remain active until another tool is selected.

1st click

2nd click

Editing Symbols
Once a symbol instance is placed in a drawing, its information can be displayed in the Object Info palette. Select a
symbol instance to display its properties. A symbols location can be adjusted, or its layer and class association can be
changed by selecting a new class or layer from the appropriate list. A symbol can be replaced with another symbol,
rotated in 2D or 3D space, and, for symbols located in walls, flipped, replaced, and repositioned.
Most of a black symbols physical attributes cannot be directly changed in the Object Info or Attributes palette. Instead,
the components of a symbol must be accessed and edited through the Edit Symbol window. Changes made to a
symbol definition affect all existing and future instances of that symbol, unless the symbol was inserted as a group
(blue) or plug-in object (red).

Rotating Existing Symbols

Rotate 2D symbols by entering a rotation angle in the Rot field of the Object Info palette. Rotate 3D symbols by
clicking the Rotate 3D button in the Object Info palette. This button accesses the Rotate Object in 3D dialog box for
specification of the rotation angle, center, and axis; see Rotate Tool on page 436.

Changing Symbols in Walls

Once a symbol has been placed in a wall, Vectorworks allows some special actions, each of which is performed within
the wall structure. Flip the symbol in the wall, reposition it, or completely replace it. See Inserting and Editing

Editing Symbols |

199

Symbols Within a Wall on page 565, and Replacing Existing Symbols on page 199 for more information. Symbols
can also be moved along or out of the wall, or into another wall. Hybrid or 3D symbols inserted in a wall can include
the wall hole geometry in the symbol definition; see Adding a 3D Wall Hole Component to a Symbol Definition on
page 574.

Replacing Existing Symbols

To exchange a symbol instances definition with another:
1. Select the existing symbol.
2. In the Object Info palette, click the Replace button.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a symbol, and select Replace from the context
menu.
The Choose a Symbol dialog box opens.

3. Select the desired new symbol.

Only the symbols that are currently part of the active Vectorworks drawing are listed.
4. Click OK.
The old symbol instance is replaced with the new symbol instance.
The new symbol uses the settings from the replaced symbol. Future occurrences of the new symbol are unaffected by
these settings.

Editing Symbol Definitions

Most of a black symbols physical attributes cannot be directly changed in the Object Info or Attributes palette. Instead,
the components of a symbol must be accessed and edited through the Edit Symbol window. Changes made to a

200

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

symbol definition affect all existing and future instances of that symbol, unless the symbol was inserted as a group
(blue) or plug-in object (red).
Editing a symbol from the drawing area allows you to edit the symbol definition from within that symbol instance.
Other objects in the drawing can be visible, grayed, or hidden depending on two settings in the Display tab of the
Vectorworks preferences: Show other objects while in editing modes and Gray other objects. (See Display
Preferences on page 48.) When other objects are visible, they are also snappable, which makes it is easier to edit the
symbol quickly and accurately.
Referenced symbols can be edited in the target file, changing the symbol definition in the source file. See Referencing
Resources on page 134.
Editing behavior and results depend on the symbol type (see Symbol Types on page 187).

Symbol Type

Edit Behavior/Result

Black

Edit from the Resource Browser or from the drawing. Changes to the symbol, whether made
to the definition or the instance, affect both existing and future symbol instances.

Blue

Edit from the Resource Browser. Changes to the definition affect future symbol instances only.
A blue symbol inserted on the drawing as a group cannot be edited from the drawing in the
Edit Symbol window (make edits directly from the Object Info or Attributes palette, and by
editing the group). Changes to a drawing instance affect that instance only.

Red

Edit from the Resource Browser. Changes to the definition affect future symbol instances only.
A red symbol inserted on the drawing as a plug-in object cannot be edited from the drawing
in the Edit Symbol window (make edits directly from the Object Info or Attributes palette).
Changes to a drawing instance affect that instance only.

To edit a symbol definition:

1. In the Resource Browser, select the symbol to edit, and select Edit from the Resources menu.
Alternatively, edit a black symbol instance from the drawing using one of the following methods:
Select the symbol and then select Modify > Edit Symbol.
Double-click the symbol.
Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the symbol, and select Edit from the context menu.
To edit the components of a hybrid symbol directly, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the
symbol, and select Edit 2D Component, Edit 3D Component, or Edit 3D Wall Hole Component from the
context menu.
2. Only one component of a hybrid symbol can be edited at one time. If the symbol is hybrid, the Edit Symbol
dialog box opens. Insertion options can be specified when the symbol is edited from the Resource Browser, and
additional double-click behavior for the dialog box can be specified when the symbol is edited from the drawing.
Select the component to edit.

Editing Symbols |

Edit Symbol dialog box accessed from Resource Browser

201

Edit Symbol dialog box accessed from drawing

Parameter

Description

2D/3D Component

Edits the 2D or 3D component of the symbol

3D Wall Hole
Component

Edits the 3D wall hole component of the symbol definition (see Adding a 3D Wall Hole
Component to a Symbol Definition on page 574)

Insertion Options

Edits the method of inserting the symbol into a wall (see Creating New Symbols on
page 189)

Double-click

Sets the future behavior when double-clicking on a symbol in a drawing. Select whether to
display the Edit Symbol dialog box, or directly edit the 2D or 3D component or insertion
options. Select Edits the Component based on current view to automatically edit the 2D
component if in Top/Plan view, or the 3D component if in one of the 3D views.

Use the edit view

Matches the Resource Browser thumbnail view to the selected editing view. For example, if a
hybrid symbols thumbnail preview is set to Top/Plan, and the 3D component of the symbol is
edited while in a Right Isometric view, the thumbnail view switches to Right Isometric to
match.

3. Click Edit.
If Insertion Options was selected, the Insertion Options dialog box opens. See Creating New Symbols on
page 189 for information on wall insertion options.
If one of the component options was selected, the Edit Symbol window opens, containing the symbol to be
edited. A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Exit
Symbol command becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Exit Symbol button is visible in the top
right corner of the drawing window.
To edit nested symbols, select Modify > Edit Symbol again.
4. When editing components, make the symbol edits in the Attributes or Object Info palette. To edit the symbol
insertion point, select all the components of the symbol, and relocate the components about the insertion point
crosshairs. The intersection of the crosshairs gives the feedback segment Locus when encountered.

Crosshairs

Insertion point

202

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

The other component of a hybrid symbol is not automatically adjusted to match changes made to the insertion
point. It must be edited separately. Switch easily to the other component from the context menu.

5. After editing, click the Exit Symbol button (or select Modify > Exit Symbol) to update all instances of the symbol
and return to the normal drawing mode.
If the edited symbol is nested in other symbols, the Exit Symbol button returns back to the symbol container.

Converting a Symbol Instance to a Group

Changes made to a black symbol definition affect all instances of that symbol in the drawing. The Convert to Group
command changes a selected symbol into a group of Vectorworks objects, allowing edits to be made to that object
without affecting the other instances of the symbol in the drawing. This command disassociates the symbol instance
from its definition. The edited symbol can then be turned into a new symbol if desired.
Before using this command to edit a symbol instance that has been inserted into a wall, first drag the symbol
outside of the wall. This avoids converting the wall as well.
To convert a symbol to a group:
1. In the drawing, select the symbol instance to edit.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to Group.
If a symbol contains multiple levels of grouped objects, other symbols, or plug-in objects, the Convert to Group
Options dialog box opens. Select the desired criteria for converting the symbol.

Parameter

Description

Dont convert sub-objects to groups

Excludes any sub-objects, such as nested symbols, from the

conversion process

Convert nested symbols and plug-in objects

Converts nested symbols and/or plug-in objects within the symbol to

individual objects within the group

Convert all sub-objects

Converts all objects within the symbol to individual objects within

the group

Use caution when converting hybrid symbols. If in 2D view, the 3D component of the symbol may be lost during
the conversion. Similarly, in a 3D view, the 2D portion of the symbol may be lost.
3. Click OK.
The symbol is converted into a group. To make changes to grouped items, select Modify > Edit Group or
Ungroup.
The object can be left as a grouped object or saved as a new symbol. Any changes to the original symbol
definition do not affect this instance.
Instead of repeatedly converting a symbol to a group, create a blue symbol which automatically converts to a
group upon insertion; see Creating New Symbols on page 189.

Managing Symbols
Creating a New Symbol Folder
Create symbol folders to organize symbols within the Resource Browser.

Editing Symbols |

203

To create a new symbol folder:

1. From the Resources menu, click New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
2. Select Symbol Folder.
The Assign Name dialog box opens.
3. Enter the name to assign to the new symbol folder.
4. Click OK.
The new folder is added to the Resource Browser.

Moving a Symbol into a Folder

Group symbols according to topic or placement by moving them into folders within the Resource Browser.
To move a symbol into a folder:
1. Select the symbol in the Resource Browser.
2. Select Move from the Resources menu.
The Move Symbol dialog box opens. Click the folder to select it as the destination for the new symbol.

Parameter

Description

Folder list

Displays the files symbol folders; the selected folder becomes the destination for the
symbol

New Folder

Creates a new folder within the selected folder; specify the folder name and click OK to
create the symbol folder

3. Click OK.
Vectorworks moves the symbol to the new folder.

204

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Importing a Symbol or Symbol Folder

To import a symbol or symbol folder from another Vectorworks file:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. Locate the file that contains the symbol or symbol folder to be imported.
For information using the Resource Browser to locate resources in other Vectorworks files, see Accessing
Existing Resources on page 180.
3. Select the symbol or symbol folder to be imported, and then select Import from the Resources menu.
(Alternatively, drag the symbol or symbol folder resource into the desired Vectorworks file.)
The Import Symbol(s) dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Preserve folder
hierarchy (symbol
folder import only)

Imports the symbol folder, and any sub-folders and symbols it contains, and maintains
the same folder structure it had in its source file

Select destination
folder

For symbol folders, imports the symbol folder, and any sub-folders and symbols it
contains, to the selected folder; for symbols, imports the symbol to the selected folder

Folder list

Displays the files symbol folders; the selected folder becomes the destination for the
symbol or symbol folder

New Folder

Creates a new folder within the selected folder; specify the folder name and click OK to
create the symbol folder

Dont show this dialog

when drag and drop
importing
4. Click OK.

Hides this dialog box if you dont want to see it when importing symbols or symbol
folders by dragging them into the drawing

Record Formats |

205

If the target file already contains a resource with the same name, the Resource Name Conflict dialog box opens
with three options: replace the resource, rename the resource, or do not import the resource.
5. Click OK.
The symbol folder and any symbols it contains are imported into the active Vectorworks file.

Record Formats
Record formats, which store a wide range of data (like price or part numbers), can be attached to any object or symbol.
Records attached to an object or symbol definition become a permanent part of it, remaining with the object or symbol
even when it is imported or cut and pasted into another drawing. Several record formats can be attached to a single
object or symbol, and record values can be individually changed for each object to which the record is attached.

Creating Record Formats

Creating record formats in a drawing file is an important step to creating meaningful database rows in worksheets (see
Entering Data in Database Rows on page 670).
To create a new record format:
1. In the Resource Browser, select New Resource from the Resources menu.
2. Select Record Format.
The Create Record Format dialog box opens.

3. Enter the Name of the Record Format.

4. Click New.
The Edit Field dialog box opens.

206

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Parameter

Description

Name

Enter a name for the field

Type

Select the type of field

Integer

Select to use whole numbers ranging from -32,768 to 32,767

Using Integer requires less memory than Number.

Boolean

Select to use a data value of either True or False

Text

Select to enter a string of characters (default option), such as a word or a sentence

Number

Select to use numbers outside the range of Integer, fractions or decimals, or to specify a
number format. Click Format to define the number format in the Number Format dialog
box; click OK to return to the Edit Field dialog box.

General

The default format

Decimal

Uses decimal numbers; enter a value for the number of decimal places, and if desired,
select to use commas as separators

Scientific

Uses scientific numbers; enter a value for the number of decimal places

Fractional

Uses fractional numbers; enter the rounding value for fractions

Dimension

Uses dimension numbers

Dimension Area

Uses dimension area format and displays the specified area units after the number

Dimension
Volume

Uses dimension volume format and displays the specified volume units after the number

Angle

Determines the accuracy of angles and measurement system applied; measurement

system is degrees, minutes, and seconds or decimal numbers up to eight decimal places

Date

Uses dates; select the desired date format from the list

Leader

When the Number Format dialog box is opened from a worksheet, enter the text to display
before the cell value

Trailer

When the Number Format dialog box is opened from a worksheet, enter the text to display
after the cell value

Default

Enter the data value in the Default text box, if desired

Record Formats |

207

5. Click OK to return to the Create Record Format dialog box.

6. For each additional field to add, repeat steps 4 through 6.
7. Click OK to return to the drawing area.
When an object is selected, the Data tab of the Object Info palette displays all records contained in the current
drawing.

Attaching Record Formats to Symbols and Objects

Once a record format has been created, it can be attached to any object or symbol in the same drawing file as the record
format. The Data tab of the Object Info palette indicates all record formats currently available to attach.
This section describes how to attach a record format to a selected symbol or object. For global symbol changes, use the
utility described in Attaching Records on page 213.
There are two methods for attaching record formats to symbols. The first method attaches a record format to a single
symbol instance or to an object in the drawing without affecting previous or future instances.
The second method attaches a record format to a symbol definition that applies to each symbol added to the drawing
afterwards. Existing instances remain unaffected.

Attaching Record Formats to a Single Symbol Instance or Object

To attach (or detach) record formats to a single symbol or object in the drawing using the Object Info palette:
1. Select the symbol.
2. Select Window > Palettes > Object Info.
The Object Info palette opens.

208

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

3. Select the Data tab.

The Object Info palette lists all record formats in the drawing.
4. In the check box next to the desired record format(s), click to attach or deselect to detach the record format.
If attaching a record format, an X displays in the box and the record is attached to that instance of the symbol or
object.
If detaching a record format, confirm the procedure.
To attach record formats to a symbol or object in the drawing using the Resource Browser:
1. Select the symbol(s) in the drawing.
2. From the Resource Browser, select the record format to be applied. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click
(Macintosh) and select Apply from the context menu. (Alternatively, double-click the record format resource to
apply it to the selection or drag the record format resource onto a symbol or object.)

Attaching Record Formats to a Symbol Definition

To attach record formats to a symbol definition from the Resource Browser:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. Select a symbol definition.
3. Select Edit from the Resources menu.
4. Select the symbol component to edit, and click Edit.
5. In the Edit Symbol window, deselect all by clicking in an empty area of the window.
6. In the Object Info palette, click on the Data tab.
When no items are selected, the Data tab displays *SYMBOL DEFAULTS* at the top.
7. Select the record to attach.
To attach multiple records to the same symbol definition, click on each of the records.
8. Click Exit Symbol at the top right of the Edit Symbol window.
The attached record(s) is included with the symbol each time the symbol is placed in the drawing or imported
into another drawing. Symbols already present in the drawing are unaffected. Change the record values of the
record format resource to set the default values for the symbol when placed in the drawing.

Record Formats |

209

Editing Record Formats

Record formats can be edited in a variety of ways, depending on the desired outcome.

Method

Result

Edit the record format resource, changing the field

list and/or default field values (see Editing
Default Record Formats on page 209)

Future objects or symbols with the record attached reflect the

changes; existing attached records are unaffected

Edit the field values of a record attached to a

selected object (see Viewing and Editing Object
Records on page 210)

Changes to field values affect the selected object only; the field
list cannot be changed. Existing and future objects with the
record attached use the default values.

Edit the record field values of a symbol definition

(see Editing Symbol Default Record Values on
page 211)

Changes to field values affect future instances of the symbol;

the field list cannot be changed. Existing symbols and other
symbols with the record attached are unaffected.

Alternatively, make global changes with the symbol utilities (see Changing One Record Format Field on page 214
and Changing All Record Format Fields on page 215).

Editing Default Record Formats

A record formats fields and default values can be edited from the Resource Browser.
To edit record format values:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. Select the record format.
3. Select Edit from the Resources menu.
The Edit Record Format dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Name

Displays the name of the current record format

Field list

Lists the fields of the current record format

New

Creates a new field (as described in Creating Record Formats on page 205)

210

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Parameter

Description

Edit

Edits the selected field

Remove

Deletes the selected field

4. Select the record format field to edit and click Edit to change the default value, or click New or Remove to add or
delete fields.
5. Click OK.
The edits do not affect existing values for attached records. Changes are applied to the default field values when
attached to symbols or objects, or for future symbols with the record attached.

Viewing and Editing Object Records

The Object Info palette Data tab is used to attach, view, and edit the record values for specific instances.
If selecting multiple objects with different records attached, the Data tab displays records that are attached to
objects with a grayed box, but does not indicate which records are attached to which objects.

Record list

Field list

Edit field box

The three list boxes on the Data tab can be resized by moving the bars between them.
To edit record field values for a selected object:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Object Info.
The Object Info palette opens.
2. Select the object.
Click the Data tab on the Object Info palette. The Object Info palette displays information about the record
format(s) attached to the selected object(s).

Parameter

Description

Record List

Displays all records contained in the drawing; records attached to the selected object are
indicated with an X in the check box to the left of the record name

Field List

Displays all the fields in the selected record; if a default value was assigned to the field, it
displays after the field name

Edit Field

Edits the field values for the selected record; all entered values override any default values for the
object

Record Formats |

211

3. Select the desired record in the Record list, and then the desired field in the Field list. In the Edit Field box, make
the change to the default value.
This information applies to the selected object only; other new and existing objects with that record attached will
still use the original (default) record format values. If a selected chair has a different part number from the
default value that was entered in the record format, enter the new part number for that chair only. If the part
number for all chairs has changed, edit the default record format instead.

Editing Symbol Default Record Values

The default values of a record attached to a symbol can be changed while editing a symbol definition (see Editing
Symbol Definitions on page 199). This does not change the record format resource; if other symbols or objects have
the record attached, they are unaffected. It does change the future default record values for that symbol.
To change the default field values of a symbols record format:
1. Select a symbol definition.
2. Select Edit from the Resources menu.
3. Select the symbol component to edit, and click Edit.
4. In the Edit Symbol window, deselect all by clicking in an empty area of the window.
5. In the Object Info palette, click on the Data tab.
When no items are selected, the Data tab displays *SYMBOL DEFAULTS* at the top.
6. Select the desired record in the Record list, and then the desired field in the Field list. In the Edit Field box, make
the change to the default value.
7. Click Exit Symbol at the top right of the drawing window to return to the drawing.
The default field values of the record format for that symbol definition have been changed.

Linking Text to Record Formats

The Link Text to Record command links the text within a symbol definition to a field of the attached record. This is
particularly useful for labeling symbols in a drawing with unique information, such as a part list number or price. To
use this command, symbols and record formats must already exist in the drawing file. The link is made within a
symbols definition.
To link text to records within a symbol definition:
1. Edit the 2D symbol definition as described in Editing Symbol Definitions on page 199.
2. In the Edit Symbol window with nothing selected, create a line or block of text.
Ensure the text is formatted with the desired font and style. The actual text is not important at this point. If
desired, create and assign a class to the text.
Text

3. Select the text and place it in the exact location where the record data value is to display.
4. With the text still selected, select Tools > Records > Link Text to Record.
The Choose Field dialog box opens.

212

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Records list

Field list

5. Select the record format from the Records list.

6. In the list of fields, select the field of the selected record to associate with the text.
7. Click OK.
Vectorworks adds the text object to the symbol definition, as well as all existing instances on the drawing. The
default value of the selected field replaces the dummy text.
8. Click Exit Symbol at the top right of the drawing window to return to the drawing.
Place the symbol on the drawing. The text linked to the record displays the field information. If necessary, to edit
the value for that particular instance, select the field where the text was assigned in the Object Info palette Data
tab. In the Edit Field box, enter the text to display in the symbol; the linked field information displays on the
attached symbol.

123-456789

Global Symbol Commands

The symbol commands manipulate record data attached to symbols in libraries and perform global data changes. Use
these commands to change the default record format values of the field(s) attached to multiple symbol definitions,
either after importing a file from a different source or during normal project changes.
The symbol utilities include the following commands:

Attach Record
Detach Record
Change One Field
Change All Fields
Change Symbol Attributes
List Symbols

Global Symbol Commands |

213

Attaching Records
This command attaches the selected record format to all of the symbol definitions in a specified symbol folder.
To attach a record:
1. Select Tools > Records > Attach Record.
The Attach Record dialog box opens.

2. From the Symbol Folder list, select the criteria for attaching a record.
Select None to attach the record to the symbol definition(s) at the root of the symbol library (symbol definitions
not in any folder). Select All to attach the record format to all of the symbol definition(s) in the files symbol
library. Selecting a symbol folder changes all of the symbol definitions only in that folder and any sub-folders.
3. From the Record Format list, select one of the record formats defined in the current file to be attached to the
selected symbol definition(s).
4. Click OK.
Confirm the operation and the number of symbol definitions affected.
Symbol instances already on the drawing are not affected.
5. Click OK.
To quickly verify that a record has been attached to the symbol library, create a report. See Creating Reports on
page 647.

Detaching Records
This command detaches the selected record format from all symbol definitions in a selected symbol folder.
To detach a record:
1. Select Tools > Records > Detach Record.
The Detach Record dialog box opens.

214

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

2. From the Symbol Folder list, select None, All, or a symbol folder, if any.
Select None to detach the record from the symbol definition(s) at the root of the symbol library (symbol
definitions not in any folder). Select All to detach the record format from all of the symbol definition(s) in the
files symbol library. Selecting a symbol folder changes all of the symbol definitions only in that folder and any
sub-folders.
3. From the Record Format list, select one of the record formats defined in the current file to detach from the
symbol library.
4. Click OK.
Confirm the operation and the number of symbol definitions affected.

Changing One Record Format Field

This command changes a specified field default value for a selected record format attached to symbol definitions.
Symbols already placed on drawing are unaffected.
To change one record format field:
1. Select Tools > Records > Change One Field.
The Change One Field dialog box opens.

2. From the Symbol Folder list, select None, All, or a symbol folder, if any.
Select None to change the record of the symbol definition(s) at the root of the symbol library (symbol definitions
not in any folder). Select All to change the record format of all of the symbol definition(s) in the files symbol
library. Selecting a symbol folder changes all of the symbol definitions only in that folder and any sub-folders.
3. From the Record Format list, select the record format.
The Field Name selections depend on the record format selected.
4. Select the Field Name to change.
5. Enter the New Value.
6. Click OK.
Confirm the operation and the number of symbol definitions affected.

Global Symbol Commands |

215

Changing All Record Format Fields

This command changes several or all default field values for a selected record format attached to symbol definitions.
Symbols already placed on drawing are unaffected.
To change several or all record format fields:
1. Select Tools > Records > Change All Fields.
The Change All Fields dialog box opens.

2. From the Symbol Folder list, select None, All, or a symbol folder, if any.
Select None to change the record of the symbol definition(s) at the root of the symbol library (symbol definitions
not in any folder). Select All to change the record format of all of the symbol definition(s) in the files symbol
library. Selecting a symbol folder changes all of the symbol definitions only in that folder and any sub-folders.
3. From the Record Format list, select the record format.
4. Click OK.
The Change Fields dialog box opens. The title bar displays the name of the record being edited.

5. Select the field name(s) to change and enter the new information.
All of the field names of the record format are listed. If the record file has more than 16 fields, click Next to
continue viewing the remaining fields in the record.
6. After making the desired changes, click OK.
Confirm the operation and the number of symbol definition(s) affected.

216

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Changing Symbol Attributes

This command assigns all of the objects within the selected symbol definitions to the specified class, and designates
the objects to use any or all of the class attributes.
To change symbol attributes:
1. Select Tools > Utilities > Change Symbol Attrs.
The Change Symbol Attributes dialog box opens.

2. From the Symbol Folder list, select None, All, or a symbol folder, if any.
Select None to change the symbol attributes at the root of the symbol library (symbol definitions not in any
folder). Select All to change the symbol attributes of all of the symbol definition(s) in the files symbol library.
Selecting a symbol folder changes all of the symbol definitions only in that folder and any sub-folders.
3. Select the Class to assign the symbol definition.
4. Select the class attributes to use, and indicate how to treat class attributes that are not used.
Either keep the objects existing attributes, or use the current defaults if a class attribute is not specified.
5. Click OK.
Confirm the operation and the number of symbol definition(s) affected.

Listing Symbols and Folders

This command creates a text file list all of the symbol definitions and symbol folders within the active drawing.
To list symbols and folders:
1. Select Tools > Utilities > List Symbols.
The List Symbol dialog box opens.

Global Symbol Commands |

2. Select either List Symbols and Folders or List Folders Only.

3. Click OK.
The Save File dialog box opens.
4. Enter a new file name or use the default name, and then click Save.
A text file is created listing the names of all the folders and, if chosen, symbols within the current file.

217

218

| Chapter 5: Using Vectorworks Resources

Creating 2D Objects

Planar Modes of 2D Objects

Vectorworks software provides robust 2D functionality with a variety of tools and commands for drafting in Top/Plan
view. As more and more designs move to 3D instead of, or in addition to, 2D, it becomes important to create 2D objects
while keeping in mind how they will display in 3D views.
Objects created in Top/Plan view are created as either screen plane objects or layer plane (planar) objects, depending
on the selected planes mode. The screen plane is coincident to the computer screen, and perpendicular to the
designers view direction. 2D objects drawn in the screen plane float in 3D views. Planar objects, however, exist in
3D space; a 2D planar object displays in association with its containing layer plane, maintaining its geometric
relationship to the 3D model when in 3D views. Currently, 2D planar objects appear in 3D with wireframe attributes
(and text appears as a box).

2D object in Top/Plan view

2D planar object in isometric view

2D screen plane object in isometric view

In general, creating 2D planar objects is the preferred method, so that the objects have a relationship with the 3D
model in views other than Top/Plan. If you are drafting only in Top/Plan and do not need to display 2D objects in 3D
views, draw the 2D objects in the screen plane. Objects created as crop objects for viewports are automatically placed
in the screen plane. In addition, when creating hybrid symbols, the 2D component of the symbol should be created in
the screen plane, so that it does not display when viewing the 3D component. 2D objects created in previous versions
of Vectorworks software become screen plane objects upon conversion.
The Planes list, located on the View bar, determines whether 2D objects are created as planar or screen plane objects.
To create planar objects, select Active Layer Plane from the View bar. To create screen plane objects, select Screen
Plane. The selected planar mode remains in effect until the next time it is changed.

The Planes list on the Shape tab of the Object Info palette switches the planar property of selected existing 2D objects.
A selected 2D object drawn in screen plane mode can be switched to planar, and vice versa.

220

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

Using the 2D Data Bar

Use the Data bar when you draw to lock certain values for an object, such as the length of a circle radius or the angle of
a wall. The fields that are available on the Data bar depend on the active tool and on the action being performed.
Floating 2D Data bar
(follows the cursor)
Horizontal location of the
cursor in the drawing window

Vertical location of the cursor

in the drawing window

Fixed 2D Data bar

(on the Tool bar)

The data displayed in the bar is gathered from the feedback segment of the object being created. The coordinates are
relative to a floating datum, if one exists; otherwise the coordinates are absolute. The more common Data bar fields are
described in the following table; other fields that can display are described where their use is relevant.

Parameter

Description

Delta X

The offset distance from the previous click or position along the X axis

Delta Y

The offset distance from the previous click or position along the Y axis

The length or distance from 0,0, or the radius of the object that is being drawn

The angle or rotation of the object that is being drawn

The X (horizontal) location of the cursor in the drawing window

The Y (vertical) location of the cursor in the drawing window

The location and behavior of the Data bar fields can be adjusted with the Data bar menu (see Data Bar Menu on
page 221 for details).

Drawing with the 2D Data Bar

To draw an object with the 2D Data bar:
1. Select a 2D drawing tool and click once to begin to draw the object.
2. Press the Tab key to activate the first field in the Data bar, or press Shift+Tab to activate the last field.
Alternatively, if the Data bar options are set so that instant activation is enabled, type the value for the first field
in the Data bar to activate it.
In click-drag mode, press and hold the mouse button when you press Tab or Shift+Tab.
3. Enter values in the appropriate field(s), using the keys as follows.

Key

Action

Enter (Windows) or
Return (Macintosh)

When the focus is in a Data bar field, sets the value that is currently displayed, and moves
the focus to the drawing area
When the focus is in the drawing area, completes the object (or completes the current
segment of the object, for path objects such as polygons, walls, and dimensions)

Using the 2D Data Bar |

221

Key

Action

Tab

When the focus is in a Data bar field, sets the entered value and moves to the next field (if
no value was entered, the field is not set)
When the focus is in the drawing area, moves the focus to the first field in the Data bar

Shift-Tab

When the focus is in a Data bar field, sets the entered value and moves to the previous
field (if no value was entered, the field is not set)
When the focus is in the drawing area, moves the focus to the last field in the Data bar

To clear an entry before it is set, press the Backspace key. The previous value in that field redisplays.
4. A vector lock (red dashed line) displays to represent the location of the values entered in the data bar.
See Creating Vector Locks on page 157 for more information.

5. To complete the object according to the values you entered, click the mouse button. For non-path objects, you can
also press Enter or Return to complete the object, if the focus is in the drawing area. For path objects, such as
polygons, walls, and dimensions, you may need to click to complete the object.

Data Bar Menu

The Data bar is controlled by a menu on the far right side of the Tool bar.

222

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

Data bar menu

Menu Command

Description

Location of the Data bar fields

Use floating data bar

The Data bar floats with the cursor in the drawing area

Use floating data bar only when tab

key is pressed

The Data bar floats with the cursor only when the Tab key is pressed;
otherwise the bar does not display

Do not use floating data bar - show

data bar fields on fixed data bar

The Data bar displays on the top left side of the window, at the top of
the Tool bar

Do not use floating data bar - show

data bar fields on tool bar

The Data bar displays on the right side of the Tool bar

Activation of the Data bar

Allow numeric keypad entry for
instant data bar activation

When the floating Data bar is displayed, enter numbers on the

keyboard or numeric keypad to activate the first field

Do not allow numeric keypad entry for

instant data bar activation

When the floating Data bar is displayed, enter numbers on the

keyboard only to activate the first field

Do not allow instant data bar

activation

When the floating Data bar is displayed, press the Tab key to activate
the first field

Field display on the Data bar

Show only primary fields on data bar

Show only the primary data fields (for example, L and A for circles)

Inserting Text |
Menu Command

223

Description

Show primary and secondary fields on

data bar

Show all fields except the cursor location fields (X and Y)

Show primary secondary, and cursor

location fields on data bar

Show all fields

Field cycling options

Auto cycle to non-displayed fields
when tabbing past last field

When some of the data fields are hidden, press the Tab key in the last
visible field to make the non-displayed fields become visible

Do not auto cycle to non-displayed

fields when tabbing past last field

When some of the data fields are hidden, press the Tab key in the last
visible field to return to the first field

Location of the floating Data bar

Show floating data bar below
SmartCursor cues

When the floating Data bar is enabled, displays the Data bar below the
SmartCursor cues (below the cursor)

Show floating data bar above

SmartCursor cues

When the floating Data bar is enabled, displays the Data bar above the
SmartCursor cues (above the cursor)

Display of the Exit Group button

Use large exit group button

When a group is being edited, show a large button with the label Exit
Group in the upper right corner of the drawing area

Use small exit group button

When a group is being edited, show a small button with an arrow icon
in the upper right corner of the drawing area

Exit group options

<Esc><Esc> exits group

When a group is being edited, pressing the Escape key twice exits the
editing window

<Esc><Esc> does not exit group

When a group is being edited, pressing the Escape key twice does not
exit the editing window

Inserting Text
Vectorworks allows both single lines and blocks of text to be created. Text can be moved, duplicated, duplicated in an
array, and rotated. Its bounding box can be resized to adjust a blocks height or length. Text is placed relative to the
alignment point, not the bounding box.
The Text tool has two modes.
Horizontal Text

Rotated Text

Mode

Description

Horizontal Text

Creates horizontal text lines and text boxes

Rotated Text

Creates text at an angle

224

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

Setting the Default Text Parameters

The initial (default) text parameters can be set. Once the default is set, all added textin the current drawing or any
otherhas the specified font, size, style, justification, and line-spacing settings until the settings are changed.
To set default text settings:
1. Ensure that no objects or text are selected in the drawing.
If needed, click the selection arrow on an empty portion of the drawing.
2. From the Text menu, select the text options to change. See Formatting Text on page 227 for descriptions of
available options.
Alternatively, the default text size can be changed from the Set Size command.
To specify the default text size:
1. Ensure that no objects or text are selected in the drawing.
If needed, click the selection arrow on an empty portion of the drawing.
2. Select Text > Size > Set Size.
The Set Text Size dialog box opens.

3. Select the desired unit of measure, enter the font Size, and then click OK.
If text or objects containing text are selected when changes are made in the Set Text Size dialog box, the size
changes are applied to the selected items.

Creating a Line of Text

Use the Text tool to create a single line of text, such as a page header, in the drawing file.
To type a single line of text:
1. Click the Text tool from the Basic palette, and select Horizontal Text from the Tool bar.
The text cursor indicates the alignment of the text to be placed.
2. Click to designate the text insertion point; a text entry box with a blinking cursor displays.
3. Enter the text.
To add another line of text to the drawing, move to a new location on the drawing, click and type the text.
When finished typing, deselect the Text tool by selecting another tool, such as the 2D Selection tool. An X
displays at the text insertion point. The X is only visible when the text is selected; it does not print.
Alignment Point

Inserting Text |

225

To activate the text editing mode, double-click on the text with the 2D or 3D Selection tool. Alternatively, right-click
(Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the text, and select Edit from the context menu.

Creating Text Blocks

Create a block of text when more than a line of text is necessary.
To create a block of text:
1. Click the Text tool from the Basic palette, and select Horizontal Text from the Tool bar.
The text cursor indicates the alignment of the text to be placed.
2. Click and drag to create a text box of the approximate size needed.
A text box displays, with a blinking cursor in the upper-left corner.
3. Enter the text.
Use hard returns to mark the end of a paragraph or section. Vectorworks automatically wraps text to the next line
when it reaches the edge of a text box.
To add another text block, move to a new location, create another text box, and type the text.
When the text block is done, deselect the Text tool by selecting another tool, such as the 2D Selection tool. An X
displays at the text alignment point, and a triangular margin marker displays along the right, left, or both
margins, depending upon justification. This clearly distinguishes between a line of text and a text block. These
marks are only visible when the text is selected; the marks do not print.
Alignment Point

Margin Marker

To activate the text editing mode, double-click on the text with the 2D or 3D Selection tool. Alternatively, right-click
(Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the text, and select Edit from the context menu.

Creating Rotated Text

The Rotated Text mode of the Text tool creates text at an angle.
To create rotated text:
1. Click the Text tool from the Basic palette, and select Rotated Text from the Tool bar.
2. Click and hold the mouse to indicate the start point of text rotation.
3. Drag to specify the text angle, and release the mouse to set.
When drawing in rotated plan view (Design Series required), set angle snapping to snap to the plan rotation
angle (see Angle Snapping on page 144) and display the Rotated Plan cue. If the text is created to the same
angle as the plan, when the plan is unrotated, the text will align with the world coordinate system.

226

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

4. Move the mouse to create a text box of the approximate size needed. Click to set.
5. A text box displays horizontally (regardless of the text angle), with a blinking cursor for text entry.
6. Enter the text.
Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) to mark the end of a paragraph or section. Vectorworks
automatically wraps text to the next line when it reaches the edge of a text box.
7. When the text has been entered, deselect the Text tool by selecting another tool, such as the 2D Selection tool.
The text is rotated to the specified angle. See Creating Text Blocks on page 225 for information on justification,
margins, and editing.
Release
mouse button

2nd click

1st click

To activate the text editing mode, double-click on the text with the 2D or 3D Selection tool. Alternatively, right-click
(Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the text, and select Edit from the context menu.

Adding Tabs to Text

Left-aligned tabs can be inserted into text during creation and editing.
To add tabs to text:
1. Click the Text tool from the Basic palette.
2. Enter or edit the desired text.
3. Press the Tab key to place tabs within the text.
4. Click on a tab stop and drag it to adjust the spacing. Tab spacing is repeated equally throughout the text. Tab
stops cannot be added or removed.
Click-drag a tab stop to
adjust spacing

Tab stops with ruler displayed

Tab stops without ruler displayed

Modifying Text |

227

Pasting Text
To move text between Vectorworks files, select Edit > Copy, and then Edit > Paste. Text is added exactly as copied,
including any Vectorworks-supported formatting. If a text block is first defined before pasting, the text pasted into the
block is wrapped to fit within the text block.
When pasting text from a program other than Vectorworks, click on the drawing using the Text tool first. If text is
pasted without first establishing an insertion point, each line of text is brought in as individual text blocks.
Embedded graphics are not supported and are removed when the text block is pasted into Vectorworks. In addition,
multi-aligned text is converted to the current default alignment.

Modifying Text
Formatting Text
Text attributes can be formatted through various Text menu commands, such as the Format Text command, or through
the Attributes and Object Info palettes. Formatting can be performed on entire blocks of text or just selected characters
and words.
To format text:
1. Select the entire text box (the box is highlighted), a section of the text (click the Text tool and highlight the desired
text by dragging over it in the text box), or a word (click the Text tool and double-click anywhere within the
word).
Press Esc, then press the x key twice in rapid succession to deselect text.
2. From the Text menu, select the text option to be changed (for example, font, size, or style). Alternatively, select
Text > Format Text to change any combination of font, size, style, spacing, and alignment in one dialog box.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the text, and select Format Text from the context
menu.

228

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

Parameter

Description

Font

Displays font of currently selected or last formatted item(s) and lists all available, installed fonts.
Select a font from the list, or type the first letter(s) of the desired font to highlight the closest match
in the list. This field is blank when multiple items with different fonts are selected. Changes are
applied to all selected items.

Size

Displays size and unit measurement (points, millimeters, or inches) of currently selected or last
formatted item(s). Select a standard text size, or enter your own. This field is blank when multiple
items with different size/unit measurement are selected. Changes are applied to all selected items.

Spacing

Displays line spacing of currently selected or last formatted item(s). If multiple items with different
spacing are selected in the drawing, Other is selected in the dialog box and text boxes are enabled
for user-specified spacing criteria. Changes are applied to all selected items.

Style

Displays text style of currently selected or last formatted item(s). If multiple items with different
styles are selected, all style fields are blank or deselected. Specify Plain or the desired Styled
options. Outline and Shadow options are available for Macintosh only. Changes are applied to all
selected items.

Alignment

Displays alignment of currently selected or last formatted item(s). If multiple items with different
alignments are selected, Alignment fields are blank. Specify horizontal and vertical alignment.
Changes are applied to all selected items.

Capitalization can only be changed through Text > Capitalization. Choose from lowercase, uppercase, or title case
options.
Apply color to any text by highlighting it and choosing a solid pen color from the Attributes palette (see The
Attributes Palette on page 273).

Modifying Text |

229

Additionally, the Object Info palette allows text objects to be moved along the X and/or Y axis. Select single or multiple
text objects (without selecting other types of objects), and change the values in the X and/or Y field.

Recent Font List

Vectorworks stores recently used fonts for quick access. When selecting Text > Font, the eight most recently used fonts
display at the top of the font list (with the most recent font listed first), followed by an alphabetical list of all available
fonts. In addition, when the Object Info palette contains a Font field, the top of the drop-down list is populated with
the eight most recently used fonts, followed by an alphabetical list of the available fonts. Fonts changes made within
the Format Text dialog box or Object Info palette also update the recent font list.

Creating Reversed Text

Create reversed text by adding a filled object and placing white text over it.

To create reversed text:

1. Select Tools > Options > Vectorworks Preferences.
In the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box that opens, select the Display tab, select No fill behind text, and then
click OK.
2. Create a rectangle that is slightly larger than the reversed text to be created.
3. Use the Attributes palette to change the rectangles fill to black or any other dark color.
4. Click the Text tool from the Basic palette.
5. Type the text.
6. Use the Attributes palette to change the pen color of the text to white (or another reverse color).
7. Drag the white text on top of the filled rectangle.
If necessary, change the stacking order so that the text is truly on top of the rectangle.
Reverse text can also be created by setting the fill color of a text block to black and the pen color to white. Add a space
before and after the text to extend the box.

Converting TrueType Text to Polylines

The TrueType to Polyline command converts text created with any TrueType font into polylines. After it is converted,
the text is no longer a font and can be edited just like any other polyline. This is useful when creating 3D text objects.
By their nature, TrueType fonts are defined by Bzier curves and arc points. Vectorworks uses these same definitions
when converting them.
The text conversion is not affected by the conversion resolution setting in the Vectorworks Preferences dialog
box. However, if the converted polyline is extruded, the 3D resolution setting in this same dialog box affect how
Vectorworks extrudes the polyline.

230

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

To convert TrueType text to polylines:

1. Select the text (lines or blocks) to convert.
2. Select Text > TrueType to Polyline.
The text is converted into a group of polylines.
3. To extrude the polylines, creating 3D text, select the group of polylines. Ungroup them by selecting Modify >
Ungroup.
4. Select all of the individual polylines and select Model > Extrude.
The Create Extrude dialog box opens.
5. Specify the extrusion length and click OK.

Creating Text Along a Path

Selected 3D text can be placed along a path and the text appearance can be adjusted after placement.
To create 3D text along a path:
1. Select the text and a path object. The path must be long enough for the text, or text along path conversion will not
occur.
2. Select Text > Text Along Path.
The Text Along Path dialog box opens. Specify the options for creating the text along the path.

Parameter

Description

Text Size

Specifies text size options

Preserve Height and

Width

Maintains the aspect ratio of the text, keeping width and height parameters the
same as they were in the original text

Scale Width Only

Changes the width of the text to fit the path, but does not change the height
accordingly (resulting in wider, shorter text, depending on the path)

Scale Height and Width

Changes the width of the text to fit the path, and then changes the text height to
match (resulting in wider, tall text, depending on the path)

Create Text As

Specifies the format for converting the text

Modifying Text |
Parameter

231

Description

Curves

Converts the text into a group of polylines (if the path is drawn on the active layer
plane) or NURBS curves (if the path has a Z height or a Rot about Path greater
than 0)

Surfaces

Converts the text into a group of NURBS surfaces

Extrusions

Converts the text into a group of extrude objects; specify the Height of the
extruded letters

3. Click OK. The selected text follows the path object, and the original path object is deleted.

The Text Along Path parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette. The parameters are identical to those in
the Text Along Path dialog box, with two additional parameters.

Parameter

Description

Above Path

Places the bounding box of the letters directly above the path; above depends on the
direction that the path was drawn. Deselect this option to place the letters below the
path. Depending on the path and letters, the appearance of the text may be improved by
switching it above or below the path.

Rot about Path

Indicates the angle of rotation about the path, using the path as a rotation axis

The path object can be edited by selecting Modify > Edit Group, and then selecting Path. The path object can be
edited with the 3D Reshape tool. The direction of the path object can be reversed by clicking Reverse Direction;
this affects the text placement above or below the path.

Checking Spelling
Check the spelling of either selected text or all the text in a file with the Check Spelling command. Available
dictionaries include:

Danish
Finnish
Norwegian
Swedish

Dutch
French
Portuguese (Brazilian)

English (American)
German
Portuguese (Iberian)

English (British)
Italian
Spanish

Dictionaries can be edited and added. See Adding and Editing Dictionaries on page 234.

232

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

Checking the Spelling

To check the spelling of a selected object, such as a text block:
1. Select the object.
2. Select Text > Check Spelling.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the text, and select Check Spelling from the
context menu.
3. If a spelling error is detected, the Selection Spelling Check dialog box opens so that corrections can be made.
To check the spelling of all objects in the file:
1. Do not select any objects.
2. Select Text > Check Spelling.
The Spelling Check Filter dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Text Blocks

Checks text contained in text blocks

Symbols

Checks text contained in symbol definitions

Records

Checks text contained in records

Worksheets

Checks text contained in worksheets

Viewports

Checks text annotations contained in viewports

3. Select the items to have spelling checked, and then click OK. If a spelling error is detected, the Document
Spelling Check dialog box opens so that corrections can be made.
If no spelling errors are detected, a message displays to indicate that the spelling check is complete.

Correcting Spelling Errors

If a spelling error is found, either the Selection Spelling Check (when checking a selection) or the Document Spelling
Check (when checking all text) dialog box opens. Both dialog boxes contain the same options.

Modifying Text |

233

Parameter

Description

Spelling error in

Identifies the location of the object containing the potential spelling error

Not in Dictionary

Lists the potentially misspelled word; if none of the suggested corrections in the
Suggestions list is an acceptable replacement, type the correction into the Not in
Dictionary field (or delete the word by leaving the field blank). Then click Change or
Change All to replace the error with the typed word. The word is replaced and the
spelling check resumes.

Suggestions

Suggests the closest matching word(s) from the dictionary

Change / Change All

Select one of the suggested words from the list of Suggestions to replace the misspelled
word and click Change. The misspelled word is replaced with the suggested word.
Alternatively, press Enter with the suggestion selected. To replace all occurrences of the
same error in the file, click Change All. The word is replaced and the spelling check
resumes.

Ignore / Ignore All

If the word is spelled correctly, but it is not present in the dictionary, click Ignore to
leave the word as is and continue the spelling check. Click Ignore All to ignore all
occurrences of the word in the file. The word is ignored and the spelling check resumes.

Learn

Click to add the word to the dictionary; this allows the spelling checker to recognize all
future occurrences of the word

Options

Click to customize the spelling check options; see Spelling Check Options on
page 234

Done

Click to discontinue the spelling check; all changes up to that point are saved, but can
be undone by selecting Edit > Undo

The spelling of layers, classes, symbol names, object names, script palette names, dimension text, locked objects
or records attached to locked objects is not checked.

234

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

Spelling Check Options

Click the Options button in the Spelling Check dialog box to customize the spelling check function. The Spelling
Check Options dialog box opens.

Specify the types of misspelled words for the spelling checker to find. If a check box is not selected, the spelling
checker ignores errors for that category of words. Examples include:
Capitalized words: Canada
Words with mixed case: VectorScript

Words in all caps: ANGLE

Words with numbers: Q4

Customize the spelling checker to reduce unnecessary spelling checks in your typical files. Click OK to return to the
Selection Spelling Check or Document Spelling Check dialog box.

Adding and Editing Dictionaries

The user dictionary, UserDictionary.txt, is a text file located in [Vectorworks]\Plug-ins\Dictionaries. It can be edited, if
desired. When manually editing a dictionary, type the word followed by a tab and the letter i to indicate that the
spelling checker should ignore the word.
Additional dictionaries, such as a foreign language dictionary, can be added by placing the dictionary file into the
[Vectorworks]\Plug-Ins\Dictionaries folder. The spelling checker automatically uses all the dictionaries with the .clx
extension in the folder to check the spelling. However, the addition of multiple dictionaries can slow down the
spelling check process.

Finding and Replacing Text

The Find-Replace Text command searches for and optionally replaces text strings within a Vectorworks file. It can
search for and replace text strings within text objects, record fields, and worksheet cells.
Use this command to find a text item, replace it, search for more occurrences, or replace all occurrences. All settings
are retained from one use to the next, including find and replace text strings.
To find-replace text:
1. Select Text > Find-Replace Text.
The Find or Replace Text dialog box opens.

Modifying Text |

Parameter

Description

Action

Locates and, if selected, replaces a given text string with a new text string

Find Next

Finds the next occurrence of the text string

Replace Next

Replaces the next occurrence of the text string

Replace All Selected

Replaces all selected occurrences of the text string

Replace All

Replaces all occurrences of the text string

Look in

Searches for occurrences in the specified parts of the document

Text Objects

Searches in all text objects

Record Fields

Searches in all record fields, including Callout objects

Worksheets

Searches in all worksheets; appears dimmed if Replace All Selected is chosen, since
there is no selection attribute for a worksheet

Find String

Enter text string to search for

Replace With

Enter replacement text string; dimmed if Find Next is selected

Options

Specifies the depth of the search

Active Layer Only

Searches in the active layer only

All Layers

Searches on all layers within the document, regardless of visibility

Visible Layers Only

Searches in all currently visible layers

Case-sensitive

Searches for text that exactly matches the criteria, including capitalization

2. Enter the desired search and, if using, replace criteria.

3. Click Find/Replace.

235

236

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

Inserting Callouts
The Callout tool places callout objects on a drawing. A callout object is a block of text attached to a leader line with an
optional bubble surrounding the text. Use callout objects to annotate items in a file.
In the Design Series, the Callout tool includes extended capabilities which allow it to be used for keynotes, and
in conjunction with an external notes database (see Notes Management on page 637 in the Vectorworks Design
Series Users Guide).
Arrow-to-Shoulder

3 Point

Shoulder-to-Arrow

2 Point

Callout Preferences

Mode

Description

Shoulder-to-Arrow

Click first where the callout text is to be placed, and then near the object to be annotated

Arrow-to Shoulder

Click first near the object to be annotated, and then where the callout text is to be placed

2 Point

Two clicks are required to place the callout object; in 2 Point mode, the length of the
shoulder is determined in the callout preferences or Object Info palette

3 Point

Three clicks are required to place the callout object; in 3 Point mode, the third click
determines the length of the shoulder

Preferences

Opens the Preferences dialog box

Creating a Callout Object

To create a callout object:
1. Click the Callout tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click the Preferences button on the Tool bar. Specify the callout object preferences, which apply to new callouts
created either in this file or all files. These parameters can be changed later for a selected callout object in the
Object Info palette. If a marker type is selected in the Preferences, the marker can be changed later from the
Attributes palette.
Database controls are not available in Vectorworks Fundamentals. In the Design Series, the Callout tool can be
used in conjunction with an external notes database (see Notes Management on page 637 in the Vectorworks
Design Series Users Guide).

Inserting Callouts |

Parameter

237

Description

Text Options
Max. Text Width

Indicates the maximum text width before text wraps; if the text string is shorter than
maximum width, the bubble sizes to fit the text

Vertical Position

Sets the vertical position of the text relative to the shoulder; select Auto to align the top
text line to the shoulder if the leader is on the left, or to align the bottom text line to the
shoulder if the leader is on the right

Horizontal Position

Sets the horizontal position of the text relative to the shoulder; select Auto to position
the text to the right if the leader is on the left, or to the left if the leader is on the right

Always Left-Justify
Text

Forces the text to be left-justified, even when the text is to the left of the leader

Bubble Options
Bubble Style

Select the type of bubble to draw around the text

None

Box

Round
Rect

Vertical Accent Bar

Bracket

Cloud

Hexagonal

ISO

238

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

Parameter

Description

RR Corner Radius

For Round Rect bubble styles, sets the corner radius

Text Margin

Sets the distance between the bubble and the text

Bubble Shadow

Select to draw the bubble with a drop shadow (does not apply to None, Bracket, or ISO
styles)

Leader Options
Shoulder Length

Sets the length of the line between the text and the start of the leader; can be changed
by moving a control point or in the Object Info palette. In 3 Point mode, this length is
set by the third mouse click.

Leader Type

Select Line, Arc, Bzier, or None; curved leader lines contain additional control points
for controlling the curve shape

Leader Radius

For arc leader types, specifies the arc radius

Use Marker

Select a marker style from the marker style list, or select Custom to create a custom
marker. Select Edit Marker List to open the Edit Marker List dialog box; see Setting
Default Marker Types on page 75.

Other Options
Apply Settings to
New Callouts in

Select whether these callout preferences should apply to new callouts in this file only
or globally, to all future files

3. Click OK to set the callout preferences.

4. Click the desired insertion modes from the Tool bar, and then click in the drawing to select the insertion point of
the callout object.
Depending on the mode, the first click defines the leader shoulder or the leader endpoint.
Leader shoulder
example

Leader
endpoint

5. Click again to determine either the leader endpoint or leader shoulder, depending on the mode.

2nd click defines the

leader endpoint

1st click defines the

leader shoulder

Shoulder-to-Arrow mode

1st click defines the

leader endpoint

2nd click defines the

leader shoulder

Arrow-to-Shoulder mode

Inserting Callouts |

239

6. If in 3 Point mode, click a third time to define the shoulder length.

The Notes Manager:Callout dialog box opens. Enter the callout object text; text wraps if longer than the specified
maximum text width. Press Enter to add a carriage return.

7. Click OK to create the callout object in the drawing.

New dishwasher

Editing a Callout Object

Editing Callout Text
To edit the text of an existing callout object:
1. Select the callout object to edit.
2. Either double-click on the callout object with the 2D Selection tool, or click Edit Note from the Object Info
palette.
The Enter the Text of the Note dialog box opens.
3. Enter the desired text changes.
4. Click OK.

240

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

The callout text attributes are editable by the Format Text command; line weight and marker style can be
modified through the Attributes palette.

Editing Callout Parameters

To edit the callout properties:
1. Select the callout object.
2. In the Object Info palette, change the parameters as desired. The parameters are described in Creating a Callout
Object on page 236. An additional parameter that is available in the Object Info palette is Leader Length, which
allows the length of the leader line to be specified precisely with numeric values rather than with the mouse.
Finally, the marker type can be changed from the Attributes palette.
3. On the drawing, a callout object contains control points which can be moved with the mouse to change the
callout text width, shoulder length, and endpoint position. A curved callout leader includes additional control
points for adjusting the leader curvature.
Adjusts shoulder length
Adjusts endpoint location

R-19 faced batt insulation

Adjusts text width

Adjusts leader length

Adjusts leader curvature

Re-scaling Callout Objects

Callout objects are specified and drawn in page scale; they draw to the same apparent size, regardless of the layer
scale. If the layer the callout object is on is re-scaled, or the callout object is cut and pasted between layers of different
scales, the callout object automatically re-scales.

Creating Lines
Creating Single Lines
Single lines created with the Line tool can be drawn constrained to certain angles or unconstrained.
Unconstrained

Constrained
90

Constrained
Unconstrained

45
90

To create single lines:

1. Click the Line tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click either the Constrained Line or the Unconstrained Line mode button.
Constrained lines are drawn at 30, 45, and 90 angles, and their complements are drawn in increments of 30,
and 45.

Creating Lines |

241

Unconstrained lines can be drawn at any angle.

Press and hold the Shift key while drawing a line in Unconstrained mode to snap the line to predetermined
angles.
3. Click at the lines start point.
4. Click at the lines end point.

Creating Double Lines

The Double Line tool creates a wide variety of constrained and unconstrained double lines. Set the width between the
double lines, the offset from the cursor, and whether to create components between the double lines.
Unconstrained

Center Control Line

Custom Control Line

Double Line
Preferences

Constrained

Top Control Line

Bottom Control Line

To create double lines:

1. Click the Double Line tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click either the Constrained Double Line or the Unconstrained Double Line mode button.
Constrained lines are drawn at 30, 45, and 90 angles, and their complements are drawn in increments of 30,
and 45.
Unconstrained lines can be drawn at any angle.
Press and hold the Shift key while drawing a line in Unconstrained mode to snap the line to predetermined
angles.
3. Click the desired Offset mode button to specify the offset method.

Offset Mode

Description

Top Control Line

Cursor creates the right line

Center Control Line

Lines are equidistant from the line drawn by the cursor

Bottom Control Line

Cursor creates the left line

Custom Control Line

Specify an offset value from the line drawn by the cursor

4. Click Double Line Preferences and set the preferences.

242

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

Parameter

Description

Separation

Distance between the double lines

Control Offset

For Custom Control line mode, enter the distance from the top/right line of the cursor

Create Lines

Creates parallel lines

Create Polygons

Creates a double-line polygon with closed ends

Create Lines and Polygons

Creates parallel lines with a polygon between them; the polygon has a line weight of
zero

Components

Click to define components between the double lines (see Applying Components
Between Double Lines on page 242)

5. Click OK to accept the changes.

6. Click at the double lines start point.
7. Click at the double lines end point.

Applying Components Between Double Lines

To apply a component between the double lines:
1. In the Double Line Preferences dialog box, click Components.
The Components dialog box opens.

Creating Lines |

243

Parameter

Description

Preview

Displays a preview of the components between the double lines, including the defined
components; the preview is drawn from left to right, so the top of the preview, by
default, indicates the left part of the double lines as they will be drawn. The arrow shows
the drawing direction.

Overall Thickness

The thickness of the double line with components is defined by the sum of the component
thicknesses

Components

Lists the components that form the structure of the double line, in order from left to right
as displayed in the preview. To change the order of a component, click and drag within the
# column.
The Core designation applies to walls, but not to double lines.

New

Click to define the components between the double lines; see Creating Wall
Components on page 550

Edit

Opens the Component Attributes dialog box to edit the selected components thickness
and attributes (you can also double-click on a component to open the Component
Attributes dialog box)

Delete

Deletes the selected component; the double line thickness is adjusted accordingly

2. When the components have been defined, click OK.

Creating a Break Line

The Break Line tool creates one of three types of break lines: straight, curved, or arc.

244

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

To draw a break line:

1. Click the Break Line tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click in the drawing to place the break line and move the mouse to indicate the line length. Click again to set the
end of the break line.
If this is the first break line placed in this session, the Break Line Object Properties dialog box opens. The settings
displayed apply to all break lines created during this session and can be edited in the Object Info palette after
placement.
3. Click OK.

4. The break line parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter

Description

Break Style

Selects the style of the break line (Straight, Curved, or Arc)

Break Width

Indicates the width of the break only

Break Height

Indicates the height of the break only

Break Radius

Sets the radius of the break only

Number of Breaks

Indicates whether a single or multiple break should be drawn

Creating Arcs
The Arc tool, which creates circular arcs of any angle, has seven modes. Create an arc by radius, three points, tangent,
two points and center, two points and radius, two end points and another point on the arc, or by arc length and
optionally, chord length.
Arc by 2 Points and Center
Arc by 3 Points

Arc by 2 Points and a Point on Arc

Arc by Arc Length and Chord Length

Arc by Radius

Arc Tangent to a Line

Arc by 2 Points and a Specified Radius

Either move the mouse to draw the arc or use the Data bar to enter an angle. Degrees start on the positive X axis (the
East direction), and increase going counter-clockwise. (East is 0 degrees; North is 90 degrees; and West is 180
degrees.) To draw a quarter-circle wall beginning at 0 degrees and ending at the 6 oclock position, enter -90 (minus 90)
degrees. Enter 270 to draw an arc three-quarters of a circle around.
To edit an arc, click the middle handle with the 2D Selection tool and drag to change the arc radius. Press the Option
key (Macintosh) or Alt key (Windows) to change the arcs size.

Creating Arcs |

245

Arc by Radius
To create an arc by radius:
1. Click the Arc tool from the Basic palette, and select Arc by Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of the arc.
3. Click the start point of the arc. Move the mouse until the desired arc orientation and size is previewed.
4. Click to set the end point of the arc.
3rd click

1st click

2nd click

Arc by 3 Points
To create an arc by three points:
1. Click the Arc tool from the Basic palette, and select Arc by 3 Points mode.
2. Click to set the start point of the arc.
3. Click to set the point for the arc to pass through. Move the mouse until the desired arc orientation and size is
previewed.
4. Click to set the end point of the arc.
1st click

2nd click

3rd click

Arc Tangent to a Line

To create an arc by tangent:
1. Click the Arc tool from the Basic palette, and select Arc Tangent to a Line mode.
2. Click to set the start point of the arc.
3. Click to define the line to which the arc will be tangent. Move the mouse until the desired arc orientation and size
is previewed.
4. Click to set the end point of the arc.

246

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

3rd click

2nd click

1st click

Existing line to which

arc will be tangent

Use tangent snapping to assist with drawing the arc tangent to geometry; see Snap to Tangent (2D Only) on
page 151.

Tangent

Arc by 2 Points and Center

To create an arc by 2 points and center:
1. Click the Arc tool from the Basic palette, and select Arc by 2 Points and Center mode.
2. Click to set the start point of the arc.
3. Click to set the end point of the arc.
As the cursor moves, the center of the arc is manipulated.
4. Click outside the arc to set the center.
1st click

2nd click
3rd click

Completed arc

Arc by 2 Points and a Specified Radius

To create an arc by 2 points and a specified radius:
1. Click the Arc tool from the Basic palette, and select Arc by 2 Points and a Specified Radius mode.
2. Click to set the start point of the arc.
3. Click to set the end point of the arc.
The Arc Radius dialog box opens.

Creating Arcs |

247

4. Enter the length of the radius.

5. Click OK.
The arc is created.

Arc by 2 Points and a Point on the Arc

To create an arc by two end points and another point on the arc:
1. Click the Arc tool from the Basic palette, and select Arc by 2 Points and Point on Arc mode.
2. Click to set the start point of the arc.
3. Click to set the end point of the arc.
4. Move the mouse until the desired arc shape and size is previewed, and then click to set the arc. To constrain the
angle of the line between the arc endpoints, press the Shift key when drawing the arc.

248

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

3rd click

1st click

2nd click

Without the Shift key, the angle of the line between the arc endpoints (1st and 2nd clicks) is unconstrained,
and the chord defining the arc height is an unconstrained line drawn from the second endpoint

3rd click

1st click

2nd click
When the Shift key is pressed, the angle of the line between the arc endpoints (1st and 2nd clicks)
is constrained, and the chord defining the arc height is perpendicular to the center of that line

Arc by Arc Length and Chord Length

To create an arc by arc length and chord length:
1. Click the Arc tool from the Basic palette, and select Arc by Arc Length and Chord Length mode.
2. Click to set the start point of the arc.
3. Click to set the end point of the arc.
The Arc Length dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Arc Length

The drawn arc length is displayed, and can be changed; this allows you to create
several arcs with the same chord length and varying arc lengths

Specify Chord Length

Select to manually specify the chord length, changing the arc endpoint

Chord Length

The chord length is the distance between the two end points of the arc; the arc length
must be greater than the chord length

Creating Quarter Arcs |

249

4. Click OK to create the arc.

1st click

2nd click

Completed arc

Creating Quarter Arcs

The Quarter Arc tool creates circular 90 arcs or 90 elliptical arc polyline objects.
Quarter arcs are listed as polylines in the Object Info palette.
To create quarter arcs:
1. Click the Quarter Arc tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click at the start point for the arc.
3. Click at the end point for the arc.
The ratio of the arcs height to its width displays in the Data bar (a quarter arc for a circle has a ratio of 1.000). Use
the Data bar to verify or modify an arcs angle, length, and location in a drawing.
2nd click
1st click

Creating Rectangles
Creating Rectangles
The Rectangle tool can be used to create a rectangular or rotated rectangular shape.
Four modes are available.
Center and Corner
Rectangle

Rectangle

Rotated Rectangle

Side Center and Opposite

Corner Rectangle

Creating a Rectangle
To create a rectangle:
1. Click the Rectangle tool from the Basic palette, and click Rectangle from the Tool bar.
2. Click at the rectangles start point. Move the mouse until the desired size is previewed.

250

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

3. Click at the rectangles end point.

2nd click

1st click

To create a square, press and hold the Shift key while drawing with the Rectangle tool.

Creating a Rectangle by Center and Corner

To create a rectangle by center and corner:
1. Click the Rectangle tool from the Basic palette, and click Center and Corner Rectangle from the Tool bar.
2. Click at the rectangles start point; this point becomes the center of the rectangle. Move the mouse until the
desired rectangle size is previewed.
3. Click to set a corner point on the rectangle.
2nd click
1st click

Creating a Rectangle by Side Center and Opposite Corner

To create a rectangle by side center and opposite corner:
1. Click the Rectangle tool from the Basic palette, and click Side Center and Opposite Corner Rectangle from the
Tool bar.
2. Click at the rectangles start point; this point becomes the center of one of the rectangles sides. Move the mouse
to an opposite corner until the desired rectangle size is previewed.
Press the Alt key (Windows) or Option key (Macintosh) to orient the rectangle vertically.
3. Click to set a corner point on the rectangle.
2nd click

1st click

Creating Rotated Rectangles

Rotated rectangles are rectangles that are rotated at a specified angle.
To create a rectangle by center and corner:
1. Click the Rectangle tool from the Basic palette, and click Rotated Rectangle from the Tool bar.

Creating Rectangles |

251

2. Click to set the start of the rectangle. Move the mouse to set the rotated rectangle angle.
3. Click to set the rectangle rotation angle. Move the mouse until the desired rotated rectangle size is previewed.
4. Click to create the rotated rectangle; the object position locator in the Object Info palette matches the rotation of
the rotated rectangle (if multiple rotated rectangles are selected, the object position locator matches the rotation
of one rectangle).

1st click
3rd click

2nd click
Object position locator

Creating Rounded Rectangles

Rounded rectangles can be created with symmetrical and/or proportional corners. Vectorworks default is set for
proportional corners. This creates rectangles with corners that always round to be one third of both the X and the Y
lengths. Symmetrical corners have the same X and Y measurements for the rounded corners. Rounded rectangles with
both symmetrical and proportional corners have the same horizontal and vertical arc lengths. Rounded rectangles can
also be created using exact X and Y measurements.
Two modes are available.
Rounded Rectangle by
Width and Height
Rounded Rectangle
by Box

Rounded Rectangle
Preferences

Mode

Description

Rounded Rectangle by Box

Defines the dimensions of the box containing the rounded rectangle

Rounded Rectangle by Width

and Height

Defines the height and width lengths to create the rounded rectangle, which can
be rotated if desired

252

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

Rounded Rectangle by Box

To create rounded rectangles by box:
1. Click the Rounded Rectangle tool from the Basic palette, and click Rounded Rectangle by Box from the Tool bar.
2. Click the Preferences button.
The Round Rect Preferences dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Corner Styles

Select to use either symmetrical and/or proportional corners

Symmetrical corners

Corner Diameters

Alternatively, type in the precise corner X and corner Y measurements

3. Click OK.
4. Click to set the start point.
5. Click to set the end point of the rectangle.
2nd click

1st click

Proportional corners

Creating Polylines |

253

Rounded Rectangle by Width and Height

To create rounded rectangles by width and height:
1. Click the Rounded Rectangle tool from the Basic palette, and click Rounded Rectangle by Width and Height
from the Tool bar.
2. Set the rounded rectangle preferences as described in Rounded Rectangle by Box on page 252.
3. Click to set the start point.
4. Click to define the rounded rectangle rotation angle and width.
5. Click to define the rounded rectangle height.
1st click

3rd click
2nd click

Creating Polylines
Polyline Tool
The Polyline tool creates open and closed polylinesobjects made of a series of connected arcs, curves, or lines.
While drawing a polyline, set the type of control point for each segment either by clicking on the desired mode while
drawing or by using the keyboard shortcuts (see Creating or Editing a Workspace on page 821) to select the desired
mode. A polyline can have different combinations of vertices.
The corners of the polyline can be smoothed with the Poly Smoothing commands (see Smoothing Objects on
page 428). Markers can be added with the Attributes palette (see Marker Attributes on page 277).
Bzier Vertex

Tangent Arc

Arc Point (Fillet)

Corner Vertex

Polyline Preferences
Cubic Vertex

Point on Arc

Mode

Description

Corner Vertex

Creates polyline segments with straight lines and angled vertices at the control points

Bzier Vertex

Creates polyline segments with curves pulled toward, but not touching the control points

Cubic Vertex

Creates polyline segments with curves that pass through the control points

254

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

Mode

Description

Tangent Arc

Creates polyline arc segments that are tangent to the previous segment (use tangent
snapping to assist with drawing the tangent polyline; see Snap to Tangent (2D Only) on
page 151)

Point on Arc

Creates polyline arc segments that are drawn by clicking three points: the start point, a point
the arc passes through, and the end point; useful for tracing existing arcs

Arc Point (Fillet)

Creates polyline segments with curves that look like a fillet placed at the control points; click
Polyline Preferences to set the radius of the fillet

To create a polyline:
1. Click the Polyline tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click to set the polylines start point. In Point on Arc mode, click again to set a point that the arc will pass
through.
3. Click to set the end of the segment and the beginning of the next.

While drawing a polyline, press

the U key to switch the mode
used to create the polyline

In Corner Vertex mode, press and hold instead of clicking to create a Bzier vertex instead of a Corner vertex.
4. Continue drawing segments in this manner until the polyline is complete.
5. Click the mouse at the start point to complete a closed polyline object (end point of the last segment is at the exact
start point of the first segment), or double-click the mouse to complete an open polyline object (end point of the
last segment is at a different location than the start point of the first segment).
The resulting polyline object, whether open or closed, is a filled object. If desired, remove the fill through the
Attributes palette to see objects behind the polyline.

Creating Polylines |

Closed polyline created using Corner Vertex

and Tangent Arc modes

255

Tracing of existing arcs created using

Point on Arc mode

A closed polyline, when extruded with the Model > Extrude command, accepts a fill or texture and displays as a
solid object. An open polyline, when extruded, does not render as a solid. To close a polyline before extruding it,
select the polyline. In the Object Info palette, step through the vertices by pressing the Next or Previous Vertex
button until Hide Next Edge changes to Show Next Edge. Press Show Next Edge to close the polyline.

Drawing Freehand Polylines

Use the Freehand tool to draw a freehand polyline in a manner similar to drawing with a pen. Once the object is
drawn, it can be reshaped (see Reshaping Objects with the Freehand Tool on page 256).
Freehand Edit

Freehand Preferences

Mode

Description

Freehand Edit

Reshapes the singularly selected polyline, polygon, rectangle, circle, or arc; for more
information, see Reshaping Objects with the Freehand Tool on page 256

Freehand Preferences

Sets the smoothing level when drawing a curve. Increasing the degree of smoothing
decreases the vertices, and therefore it is easier to reshape the curve. Decreasing the
degree of smoothing increases the vertices which produces a more accurate
representation of the curve. Select Off to draw the curve without using the smoothing
feature.

To draw a freehand polyline:

1. Click the Freehand tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click the Freehand Preferences mode button.
The Freehand Tool Preferences dialog box opens.

256

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

3. Select the smoothing level when drawing a curve.

4. Click OK.
5. Click in the drawing to set the polyline start point. Move the mouse to create the desired freehand polyline
shape.
6. Click again when the object is complete.
The number and placement of polyline vertices is determined by the object shape and specified degree of curve
smoothing. For example, an object consisting of a series of arcs and curves created with a low degree of curve
smoothing contains more vertices than a series of lines created with a high degree of curve smoothing.
Markers can be added with the Attributes palette (see Marker Attributes on page 277).
By default, the Freehand tool applies a fill of None. Change the fill type before sweeping a freehand polyline, if
rendering of the sweep volume is desired.

Reshaping Objects with the Freehand Tool

A polyline, polygon, rectangle, circle, or arc can be reshaped using the Freehand Edit mode of the Freehand tool. The
direction of the curve drawn determines the new object shape. An edited object is converted to a polyline after editing
is complete.
To reshape objects using the Freehand tool:
1. Select a valid 2D object.
2. Click the Freehand tool from the Basic palette.
3. Click Freehand Edit mode from the Tool bar.
4. Click to draw the new curve, editing the valid 2D object using the following curve direction guidelines:

Action
Change existing curve

Guidelines
New Curve Direction

Original Curve Direction

Appended Curve

Discarded Curve
Retained Curve

New Curve

Creating Polylines |
Action
Connect two points with
new curve

Guidelines
New Curve Direction

Original Curve Direction

Appended Curve

Discarded Curve

New Curve

Retained Curve

Create closure with new

curve

New Curve Direction

Original Curve Direction

Appended Curve

Discarded Curve

New Curve

Retained Curve

Add a new curve to an

existing curve

Extend existing curve

New Curve

Appended Curve

Original Curve

Retained Curve

New Curve Direction

Appended Curve

Original Curve Direction

Discarded Curve

New Curve

New Curve

Retained Curve

Retain partial curve

New Curve Direction

Appended Curve

Original Curve Direction

Discarded Curve
Retained Curve

New Curve

257

258

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

5. Click again to finish drawing the freehand polyline edit. The valid 2D object is edited and converted to a
polyline.

Creating Spirals
The Spiral tool draws an Archimedes spiral. The number of turns, distance per turn, start radius and thickness can be
specified, as well as the number of points used to define the curve. Use the alignment modes on the Tool bar to
temporarily override the insertion point. These modes change the alignment of the insertion point along the X axis of
the bounding box surrounding the spiral.
Wall Insertion Mode

Spiral Alignment Modes

Standard Insertion
Offset Insertion

Spiral Preferences

Spiral Alignment Mode

Description

Align Object Left

Moves the insertion point to the left edge of the spiralss bounding box, along the
original X axis

Align Object Center

Moves the insertion point to the center of the spirals bounding box, along the original
X axis

Align Object Right

Moves the insertion point to the right edge of the spirals bounding box, along the
original X axis

Align Object Origin

Leaves the insertion point at the actual or original position

For information on using the Offset Insertion and Wall Insertion modes, see Offset Symbol Insertion Mode on
page 195 and Wall Insertion Mode on page 197.
To draw a spiral:
1. Click the Spiral tool from the Basic palette.
2. Select the insertion type and alignment from the Tool bar.
3. Click to define the center of the spiral.
If this is the first time a spiral is placed in this session, the Spiral Properties dialog box opens. These parameters
apply to subsequently created spirals; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
4. Specify the spiral properties.

Creating Polylines |

259

Distance per turn

Thickness

Start radius

Parameter

Description

Distance per Turn

Enter the distance between the outer edges of each turn in the spiral

Number of Turns

Specify the number of turns which determine the total sweep angle of the spiral; one turn
equals 360 degrees

Start Radius

Enter the distance from the center to the beginning of the spiral

Increment (deg)

Specify the number of points used to define the curve; the higher the increment, the
fewer the number of points (for example, an increment of five degrees means 360/5=72
points per turn)

Thickness

Specify the thickness value of the area between the outer and inner edge of the turn

5. Click OK.
A spiral with the specified parameters is placed on the drawing.
To create a 3D spiral, see Creating Helix-Spirals on page 391.

260

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

Creating Circles
The Circle tool has six modes.
Circle by Diameter

Circle by Three Lines

Circle by Radius

Circle by Tangent and Center

Circle by Three Points

Circle by Point and Center

Mode

Description

Circle by Radius

Defines the circle by its radius

Circle by Diameter

Defines the circle by its diameter

Circle by Three Points

Defines the circle by its circumference

Circle from Three Lines

Defines the circle by making it tangent to two or three selected lines

Circle by Point and Center

Defines the circle by a point on its circumference and then its center

Circle by Tangent and Center

Defines the circle by defining a tangent to the circle and then its center

Circle by Radius
To create a circle by radius:
1. Select the Circle tool from the Basic palette, and select Circle by Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of the circle.
3. Move the mouse to the desired radius and click to set the radius of the circle.
2nd click
1st click

Circle by Diameter
To create a circle by diameter:
1. Click the Circle tool from the Basic palette, and select the Circle by Diameter mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the circle diameter.
3. Move the mouse to the desired diameter and click to set the diameter of the circle.

Creating Circles |

261

2nd click

1st click

Circle by Three Points

To create a circle by three points:
1. Click the Circle tool from the Basic palette, and select the Circle by Three Points mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the circle diameter.
3. Move the mouse and click to set the second point on the circle and click again to set the third point on the circle.
3rd click
2nd click

1st click

Circle from Three Lines

To create a circle tangent to three lines:
1. Click the Circle tool from the Basic palette, and select the Circle from Three Lines mode.
2. Click to select the three lines or linear segments to which the circle will be tangent. Each line is highlighted as it is
selected. The lines (or their extensions) must intersect in at least two places.
3. When the third line is selected, a preview of a tangent circle displays where the cursor is currently located.
Vectorworks can create circles tangent to two or three lines. In places where only two lines intersect, the size of
the circle is controlled by the cursor location. Move the cursor until the desired tangent circle displays, and then
click to set the circle.

262

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

1st click

2nd click

3rd click
A preview of the circle tangent to the
selected lines (or their extensions)
displays beneath the hand cursor

Move the cursor to preview other tangent circles

Click to place the tangent circle

Circle by Point and Center

To create a circle by point and center:
1. Click the Circle tool from the Basic palette, and select the Circle by Point and Center mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the circumference of the circle.
3. Move the mouse to the center of the circle and click to set the radius of the circle.

1st click

2nd
click

Circle by Tangent and Center

To create a circle by tangent and center:
1. Click the Circle tool from the Basic palette, and select the Circle by Tangent and Center mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the line tangent to the circle.
3. Click to set the second point on the line tangent to the circle, defining the tangent line.
4. Move the mouse to define the radius perpendicular to the tangent. Click to set the radius of the circle. It is not
necessary to click on the center point; click anywhere along an axis parallel to the tangent. This allows you to set
the radius based on other geometry, if desired.

Creating Ovals |
3rd click: defines
the radius
perpendicular to
the tangent
1st click

2nd click

Creating Ovals
The Oval tool has two modes.
Oval by Box

Oval by Width and Height

Mode

Description

Oval by Box

Defines the dimensions of the box containing the oval

Oval by Width and Height

Defines the height and width lengths to create the oval

Oval by Box
To create an oval by box:
1. Click the Oval tool from the Basic palette and select Oval by Box mode.
2. Click to set the first point of the box containing the oval and then click again to set.
To create a true circle, press the Shift key while creating the oval.
2nd click

1st click

Oval by Width and Height

To create an oval by width and height:
1. Click the Oval tool from the Basic palette and select Oval by Width and Height mode.
2. Click to set the first point of the oval height, and then move the mouse to define the height.
3. Move the mouse, and then click to define the oval width.

263

264

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

2nd click
3rd click

1st click

Creating 2D Polygons
Vectorworks provides several ways to create 2D polygons. Single-line polygons, double-line polygons, and regular
polygons can be created; a polygon always has square vertices. Polygons can be created automatically from existing
geometry, which is especially useful for illustrating the elements of a hidden-line rendered viewport.

2D Polygon Tool
The 2D Polygon tool creates open and closed polygons with single lines. Polygons can have as few as three vertices or
as many as 32,767 vertices. The 2D Polygon tool can also automatically create polygons by filling or outlining existing
geometry, to easily annotate a drawing graphically by outlining, filling, or texturing (with an image or gradient fill) the
new polygons.
Three modes are available.
Polygon from Inner
Boundary
Polygon from
Vertices

Polygon from Outer

Boundary

Mode

Description

Polygon from Vertices

Creates a polygon by clicking to set each vertex

Polygon from Inner

Boundary

Creates a polygon out of existing geometry by clicking within the boundary of a 2D

object

Polygon from Outer

Boundary

Creates a polygon out of the outer boundary of existing geometry by defining geometry
with a lasso marquee

Creating Single-line 2D Polygons

To create a single-line 2D polygon:
1. Click the 2D Polygon tool from the Basic palette, and select Polygon from Vertices from the Tool bar.
2. Click to set the polylines start point (first vertex).
3. Click at each vertex.
4. Double-click at the final vertex to end an open polygon, or click at the starting vertex (a point cue displays) to end
a closed polygon (the first and last vertex are automatically joined).

Creating 2D Polygons |
3rd
2nd

265

5th click
4th

1st click

6th click

Creating a Polygon from an Inner Boundary

The 2D Polygon tool can create a new polygon based on the inner boundary of existing geometry. Existing geometry
refers to visible 2D objects in the active layer or the viewport cache of a hidden-line rendered viewport in Edit
Annotation mode. The stacking order of 2D objects does not apply; objects that are overlapped by other objects can
still have their boundaries considered. If the object is a polyline (open or closed), a polygon with holes, or is curved, a
polyline is created instead of a polygon.
Polygons cannot be created from symbols. Convert the symbol to a group, and then ungroup.
To create a 2D polygon from the inner boundary of existing geometry:
1. Switch to 2D view by selecting View > Standard Views > Top/Plan.
2. Click the 2D Polygon tool from the Basic palette, and select Polygon from Inner Boundary from the Tool bar.
If desired, set the attributes in the Attributes palette (fill style, pen style, line and line endpoint style). The
attributes of the polygon can also be specified after creation.
3. Click on an object to create a polygon based on the inner boundary of the 2D object. Alternatively, press the
Option key (Macintosh) or the Alt key (Windows) while clicking to create a polygon based on the 2D object and
any other additional selected objects.

First polygon selected, and Alt/Option key pressed while clicking in second area

266

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

When creating a polygon from a selection with the Option/Alt key pressed, the attributes of the bottom selected object
are applied to the new polygon, and the original selected objects are combined to form the new polygon. This is
similar to the Add Surface command described in Add Surface on page 331.
To speed up the polygon fill for complex images, zoom in on the area first.

Creating a Polygon from an Outer Boundary

The 2D Polygon tool can create a polygon based on the outer boundary of existing geometry. Existing geometry refers
to visible 2D objects in the active layer or the viewport cache of a hidden-line rendered viewport in Edit Annotation
mode. The stacking order of 2D objects does not apply; objects that are overlapped by other objects can still have their
boundaries considered. If the object is a polyline (open or closed), a polygon with holes, or is curved, a polyline is
created instead of a polygon.
Polygons cannot be created from symbols. Convert the symbol to a group, and then ungroup.
To create a 2D polygon from the outer boundary of existing geometry:
1. Switch to 2D view by selecting View > Standard Views > Top/Plan.
2. Click the 2D Polygon tool from the Basic palette, and select Polygon from Outer Boundary from the Tool bar.
If desired, set the attributes in the Attributes palette (fill style, pen style, line and line endpoint style). The
attributes of the polygon can also be specified after creation.
3. Click in the drawing and drag to create the lasso marquee. A polygon is created based on the outer boundary of
any 2D objects completely enclosed within the marquee. Alternatively, press the Option key (Macintosh) or Alt
key (Windows) while creating the marquee, and the polygon is based on the outer boundary of any 2D objects
that are encountered by the marquee.

Alt/Option key pressed

Creating 2D Polygons |

267

Creating Boundary Polygons in a Hidden Line Rendered Viewport

The creation of polygons based on the inner and outer boundaries of existing geometry is very useful for graphically
annotating the elements of a sheet layer viewport that is rendered with hidden line rendering. (Sheet layer viewports
are described in Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports on page 702.)
To create a 2D polygon from the inner/outer boundary of existing geometry in a viewport:
1. Create a sheet layer viewport from a design layer as described in Creating a Sheet Layer Viewport from a
Design Layer on page 702.
2. For the Rendering mode of the viewport, select Hidden Line. Update the viewport rendering by clicking Update
from the Object Info palette.
3. Edit the viewport in annotation mode by selecting Modify > Edit Viewport.
The Edit Viewport dialog box opens. Select Annotations and Display Viewport Cache.

4. Click OK to enter viewport annotation mode.

5. Click the 2D Polygon tool from the Basic palette, and select Polygon from Inner Boundary or Polygon from
Outer Boundary from the Tool bar.
If desired, set the attributes in the Attributes palette to the desired fill settings (Fill Style, Pen Style, Line and Line
Endpoint Style). The attributes of the polygon can also be specified after creation.
Apply an image fill to the polygon to simulate a texture (see Image Attributes on page 292).
6. Because the viewport is rendered with hidden line and the viewport cache is used for annotations, any of the
objects in the drawing can be used as the basis for new polygons. If in Polygon from Inner Boundary mode, click
the paint bucket cursor on the desired drawing objects. If in Polygon from Outer Boundary mode, create a lasso
marquee to include the desired objects. A 2D polygon is created based on the inner or outer boundary of the
geometry.

268

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

The 2D Polygon tool works on 2D objects in the design layer. It does not apply to 2D objects or annotations that
have been added to the sheet layer.
7. Click Exit Viewport Annotation at the top right corner of the drawing window to return to the sheet layer.
An alert dialog box may ask if keeping the viewport cache is necessary. The viewport cache can be removed, if
desired, as it is no longer necessary for creating the polygons.

Double-Line Polygon Tool

Use the Double-Line Polygon tool to create a wide variety of open or closed polygons that have two parallel lines, a
double-lined polygon with a width, or two parallel lines with a polygon fill. Double-line polygons can have as many
as 32,767 vertices.
To create a double-line polygon:
1. Click the Double-Line Polygon tool from the Basic palette.
2. Select the offset method.
Top Control Line

Bottom Control Line

Center Control Line

Double-Line Polygon
Preferences

Custom Control Line

Mode

Description

Top Control Line

The cursor creates the right line

Center Control Line

Creates lines equidistant from the cursor

Bottom Control Line

The cursor creates the left line

Custom Control Line

Specify an offset value

3. Click the Double-Line Polygon Preferences button and enter the criteria.

Creating 2D Polygons |

269

Parameter

Description

Separation

Distance between the double lines

Control Offset

For the Custom Control Line mode, enter the distance from the top/right line
of the cursor

Options
Create Lines

Creates a series of lines

Create Polygons

Creates a double-line polygon

Create Lines and Polygons

Creates parallel lines with a polygon between them; the polygon has a line
weight of 0

Components

Click to define components between the double lines (see Applying

Components Between Double Lines on page 242)

4. Click OK.
5. Click to set the polygons start point (first vertex).
6. Click at each vertex.
7. Double-click to mark the polygons end point (final vertex).
3rd

1st click

4th

6th
5th
2nd

270

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

Regular (Equal-sided) Polygon

The Regular Polygon tool is used to create single-line closed polygons in which all sides of the polygon are the same
length. It has three modes; each mode creates regular polygons with as few as three sides or as many as 4,000 sides.
Circumscribed Polygon
Inscribed Polygon

Regular Polygon Preferences

Edge-Drawn Polygon

Mode

Description

Inscribed Polygon

Creates a polygon by drawing its radius

Circumscribed Polygon

Creates a polygon with a radius equidistant from the center of the polygon and
the mid-point of any of its sides

Edge-drawn Polygon

Creates a polygon by drawing one of its sides

Press and hold the Option (Macintosh) or Ctrl (Windows) key while drawing to toggle between circumscribed and
inscribed modes.
To create a regular polygon:
1. Click the Regular Polygon tool from the Basic palette.
2. Select the mode button to specify the method for creating the polygon.
3. Click the Regular Polygon Preferences mode button.
The Reg Polygon Settings dialog box opens.

4. Enter the Number of Sides for the polygon.

5. Click OK.
6. Click to set the start of the polygon.
7. Click to set the end point of the polygon.

Creating 2D Loci |

1st click

271

2nd click

Creating 2D Loci
A locus is a reference point that is used to draw and measure objects. Loci do not print. Loci can also be used as pivot
points or fixed points for rotating and aligning objects. For example, to snap the cursor to a 2D locus, select Snap to
loci in the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box.
The 2D Locus tool places a 2D locus in a drawing when it is in Top/Plan view. Because they are merely movable
reference points, loci cannot be reshaped or resized.
To place a 2D locus:
1. Click the 2D Locus tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click to place the locus.
3. Click to place additional loci if necessary.

272

| Chapter 6: Creating 2D Objects

Applying Object Attributes

The Attributes palette applies characteristics to 2D and 3D objects. Attributes include fill and pen styles, opacity,
images, gradients, hatches, line style and thickness, and markers.

The Attributes Palette

The Attributes palette applies attributes to 2D and 3D objects, and displays the current attributes applied to an object.
Select Window > Palettes > Attributes to open the Attributes palette.
Fill Style
Pen Style
Opacity
Line Style
Marker controls
Utility menu (Design Series required)

Hatches, images, and gradients, and fill and pen styles, such as color and opacity, can be applied to all Vectorworks
objects except text. The only text characteristics that can be changed with the Attributes palette are pen color and
opacity; however, the text box itself can accept fill attributes. All other text attributes are controlled by the Text menu
commands (see Formatting Text on page 227). Line styles and the presence and location of markers are also set in the
Attributes palette.
If using the same attribute settings for groups of objects, it is preferable to create a class for those objects and apply the
class attributes at creation. Class attributes can also be set for selected objects; see Setting Class Attributes on
page 118.
The Eyedropper tool can transfer attributes from one object to another.
In the Design Series, an additional utility menu sets default and global attributes. See Setting Global and Default
Attributes on page 23 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

Attribute Types
Most of the attribute types (fill, pen, opacity, line style, and marker) are specified directly from the Attributes palette.
Default attributes specify which options are available from the palette. See Setting Default Object Attributes on
page 75 for more information.
Hatch, gradient, and image fill attributes are resources, defined or selected from default resources (see Vectorworks
Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173). These fills are designed to function like the objects
to which they apply; if an object with a hatch, gradient, or image fill is rotated, the fill also rotates.

Applying Colors
The Color Palette set provides colors for selection and specifies which colors are available in a Vectorworks file. To
access the Color Palette set from the Attributes palette, click on one of the color boxes for Fill color or Pen color, when
a Solid style is selected.
A similar interface is available from other areas in the application where colors are specified, although the Color By
Class option is only available when accessed from the Attributes palette.

274

| Chapter 7: Applying Object Attributes

See Setting Default Colors and Palettes on page 78 for information on how to set up and activate color palettes.
Named color display area

Colors in selected active

palette (Grid view)

Active palettes

Select an active color palette, and then select the color to apply. To easily find a named color, begin typing; the letters
display in the named color display area and the closest color match is selected. Press the Tab key to cycle through the
closest matches; pause for several seconds to start the search over.
Select Color By Class to use the color attributes set by the objects class.
If Use at Creation is enabled for the objects class, the objects color is automatically set by the class.
If Use at Creation is disabled for the class, the object only takes on the class color when the Color By Class option
is selected.
See Setting Class Attributes on page 118.

Fill Attributes
Vectorworks objects can be filled with a solid color, fill pattern, hatch, gradient, or image. Alternatively, set the object
fill default to None to create transparent objects with no fill.

Fill Style

Description

None

No fill is applied

Solid

Applies a solid fill; click the color box to select the fill color. To set the color by class, select the Color
by Class option from the color palette. See Applying Colors on page 273.

Pattern

Applies a patterned fill style; click the pattern box to select the desired pattern, and then select the
foreground color and background color from the color boxes next to the pattern. To set the pattern
colors by class, select the Color by Class option from the color palette.

The Attributes Palette |

275

Fill Style

Description

Hatch

Applies a hatch. Select the desired hatch from either the default resources or the current files
resources (see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173). If
default content is not enabled, Vectorworks asks if a default hatch definition should be created.
Another option is to create a new hatch to apply to the object by selecting Hatch from the Attributes
palette list to create a new hatch to apply to the object (see Hatch Attributes on page 281).
If the selected object has a hatch fill that has been edited with the Attribute Mapping tool, the
hatch name is highlighted in blue and edited is appended to the name. See Editing Hatch
Fills on page 295.

Gradient

Applies a gradient. Select the desired gradient from either the default resources or the current files
resources (see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173). If
default content is not enabled, applies a gradient defined in the Resource Browser; click the Fill
Gradient Settings button to specify gradient settings (Gradient Attributes on page 287).

Image

Applies an image. Select the desired image from either the default resources or the current files
resources (see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173). If
default content is not enabled, applies an image defined in the Resource Browser; click the Image
Gradient Settings button to specify image settings (see Image Attributes on page 292).

Class Style

The object takes on the fill attribute set by the objects class.
If Use at Creation is enabled for the objects class, the objects fill style is automatically set by the
class.
If Use at Creation is disabled for the class, the object only takes on the class style when the Class
Style option is selected.
See Setting Class Attributes on page 118.

Pen Attributes
In Vectorworks, the pen setting for object outlines includes solid, dashed, or a pattern line of any thickness.

Pen Style

Description

None

No pen is applied

Solid

Applies a solid pen style; click the color box to select the pen color. To set the color by class, select the
Color by Class option from the color palette. See Applying Colors on page 273. Select the line
thickness for the pen from the Line Style list.

Pattern

Applies a patterned pen style; click the fill pattern box to select the desired pattern, and then select
the foreground color and background color from the color boxes next to the pattern. To set the
pattern colors by class, select the Color by Class option from the color palette.

Dash

Applies a dashed pen style; click the color box to select the pen color. To set the color by class, select
the Color by Class option from the color palette. Select the desired dash style and line thickness from
the Line Style list.

276

| Chapter 7: Applying Object Attributes

Pen Style

Description

Class Style

The object takes on the pen attribute set by the objects class.
If Use at Creation is enabled for the objects class, the objects pen style is automatically set by the
class.
If Use at Creation is disabled for the class, the object only takes on the class style when the Class
Style option is selected.
See Setting Class Attributes on page 118.

Opacity Attributes
In addition to the overall layer opacity settings described in Setting the Design Layer Opacity on page 107, an
opacity setting is available for individual objects in Top/Plan view. Opacity can be applied to any type of planar 2D
object, including 2D walls, text, worksheet backgrounds, and plug-in objects that include a 2D object.
If layer opacity is set in addition to object opacity, the results are additive; for example, a layer opacity of 50% and
an object opacity of 50% will display the object at 25% opacity. Similarly, the opacity settings of nested and
container objects are combined.
The Quartz (Macintosh) or GDI+ (Windows) imaging Vectorworks preference must be enabled to apply and display
the opacity attribute. See Display Preferences on page 48.
From the Attributes palette, click the Opacity button to open the Set Opacity dialog box.

Drag the Opacity slider to the left to increase the transparency, or enter an opacity percentage (0-100) in the box to the
right of the slider. Click Set Opacity to make the setting.
Select Use Class Opacity to use the opacity value set by the objects class.
If Use at Creation is enabled for the objects class, the objects opacity is automatically set by the class.
If Use at Creation is disabled for the class, the object only takes on the class style when the Use Class Opacity
option is selected.
See Setting Class Attributes on page 118. Class opacity can be overridden in viewports.
The opacity setting applies to 2D objects only. For a similar effect in 3D, a transparency shader can be applied with
Renderworks (see Creating Textures on page 731).

Line Style Attributes

Line style attributes include line thickness and dash style parameters, and apply to the pen style of an object. Apply
line thickness attributes to 2D and 3D objects; apply dash styles to 2D objects and walls in 2D views.
From the Attributes palette, select the line thickness and dash style from the Line Style list. When a dashed line style is
selected, the Pen attribute automatically changes to Dash.

The Attributes Palette |

277

To add, remove, edit, or change the display order of the available dash styles, select Edit Dash Styles from the Line
Style list. Alternatively, select File > Document Settings > Dash Styles. See Setting the Default Dash Styles and
Display Order on page 85.
To add, remove, or edit the available line thickness values, select Tools > Options > Line Thickness. See Setting the
Default Line Thickness on page 87 for more information. To temporarily adjust the current line thickness setting, click
Set Thickness from the Line Style list. The Set Thickness dialog box opens; select the Thickness Units, enter the
Thickness Value, and click OK.
Select Class Thickness to use the line style attributes set by the objects class (see Setting Class Attributes on
page 118).
If Use at Creation is enabled for the objects class, the objects line style is automatically set by the class.
If Use at Creation is disabled for the class, the object only takes on the class style when the Class Thickness
option is selected.
Click to temporarily set the
current line thickness

Click to apply a line

style according to
the objects class

Select a
line thickness

Click to edit the

available dash styles

Select a dash style

Marker Attributes
Markers can be applied to each end of open objects, including lines, dimensions, arcs, polylines, 2D polygons, and
freehand lines.
In the Attributes palette, the active marker type displays for toggled selection for the line start and the line end. When
the active marker is selected for the end of an object, the marker selection box is highlighted. Click the starting marker
button, ending marker button, or both buttons to specify the end(s) to receive the selected marker. Alternatively, click
the Marker Link Toggle button (it becomes highlighted when enabled) to apply the active start marker type to both
ends.
To switch to a different marker style, click Line Startpoint Style or Line Endpoint Style. Select the active marker style
from the list, or click Edit Marker List to create a new style. See Setting Default Marker Types on page 75 for more
information.
Select Class Style to use the marker attributes set by the objects class.
If Use at Creation is enabled for the objects class, the objects marker style is automatically set by the class.

278

| Chapter 7: Applying Object Attributes

If Use at Creation is disabled for the class, the object only takes on the class style when the Class Style option is
selected.
See Setting Class Attributes on page 118.

Select the marker

startpoint and endpoint
style for the object

A check mark indicates

the active marker style

Marker Link Toggle

Each marker type displays
its style, length, width,
angle, and thickness
settings

Applying Attributes
Attributes palette characteristics can be applied by default as objects are created, or applied to individual objects after
creation.
Attributes can also be applied by class settings. See Setting Class Attributes on page 118.
To set default attributes:
1. Ensure that no objects are selected.
2. Select Window > Palettes > Attributes.
The Attributes palette opens.
3. Select the desired attributes. Objects created after that point use those attributes by default.
The defaults can also be set with the Eyedropper tool (see Transferring Attributes on page 278).
To apply attributes to existing objects:
1. Select the object or objects.
2. Select Window > Palettes > Attributes.
The Attributes palette opens.
3. Set the desired attributes for the object(s) from the Attributes palette.
The objects attributes are updated.

Transferring Attributes
The Eyedropper tool transfers attributes from one object to another in a single step, including fill, pen, line, text, wall,
and other attributes. The Eyedropper tool has two modes.

The Attributes Palette |

Eyedropper Tool
Preferences

Apply Attributes

Pick Up Attributes

Mode

Description

Apply Attributes

Transfers selected attributes to another object

Pick Up Attributes

Selects an objects attributes

Press the Option (Macintosh) or Ctrl (Windows) key to switch between the Pick up and Apply modes.
To transfer object attributes:
1. Click the Eyedropper tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click Eyedropper Tool Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Eyedropper Preferences dialog box opens. Specify the attributes to be selected and applied by the
Eyedropper tool, and click OK.

279

280

| Chapter 7: Applying Object Attributes

Parameter

Description

All

Checked box: All attributes in the group are selected; click to deselect all attributes in
the group.
Empty box: No attributes in the group are selected; click to select all attributes in the
group for transfer.
Box displays
(Windows) or
(Macintosh): One or more attributes in the group
are not selected; click to select all attributes in the group for transfer.

Fill Attributes

Transfers fills, including foreground and background colors, styles (pattern, hatch,
gradient, or image fill), and textures

Pen Attributes

Transfers pen foreground and background colors and styles (pattern or dash)

Line Attributes

Transfers line weight (thickness), presence of markers, and marker attributes

Text Attributes

Transfers text attributes to another text object, dimension, or plug-in object, including
font, size, style, alignment and spacing
Alignment and spacing are transferred to text objects only

Wall Attributes

Transfers wall thickness and component settings for walls and round walls; components
define wall thickness, so components cannot be transferred without also transferring the
thickness parameter

Viewport Attributes

Transfers viewport attributes to another viewport, including class and layer visibility
settings and attribute overrides. Other Properties refers to the remaining viewport options
such as view, render mode, projection, and advanced properties. Viewport attributes can
be transferred between files; class, layer, and other resources specified in an attribute
override are resolved by the name of the class, layer, or resource, respectively.

Object Opacity

Transfers an objects opacity setting

Other Attributes
Record

Transfers the database record attributes

Plug-in Parameters

Transfers plug-in parameters between plug-in objects, including objects inserted in walls

Class

Selects the class for transfer (makes the target object the same class as the source object)

Pick Up Sets Defaults

Changes the default Attributes palette settings to match those of the source object; objects
created from then on use the attributes of the source object

Use Class Attributes

Transfers the by-class settings of the source object, provided the target object is in the
same class as the source object

3. Click Pick Up Attributes from the Tool bar.

The cursor changes to an eyedropper.
4. Click the object that is the source of the attributes.
5. Click Apply Attributes from the Tool bar.
The cursor changes from an eyedropper to a paint bucket.
6. Click the target object for the attributes.
The attributes are transferred to the object.

Hatch Attributes |

Click source object for

attributes

Click target object for

attributes

281

The attributes are

transferred

To transfer attributes between files, the target objects, classes, records, dash patterns, textures, and other
attributes must already be present in the target file. The eyedropper tool does not create objects or attributes.

Hatch Attributes
Hatches can be applied to 2D objects and walls in a 2D view. If default content is not enabled in Vectorworks
preferences, a default hatch is provided; see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on
page 173.
Two different types of hatches exist in Vectorworks: associative and non-associative. The appearance of both types of
hatches are determined by hatch pattern definitions. Associative hatches are similar in nature to fills and are one of the
selections under the Fill Style list on the Attributes palette. Non-associative hatches are a pattern of lines grouped into
a single object and placed with the Hatch command.

Associative Hatches
Associative hatches are applied to an object as a fill from the Attributes palette or Resource Browser. If the size of the
object changes, the hatch fills the new object dimensions. After the hatch is applied, use the Attribute Mapping tool to
move, rotate, or scale the hatch (see Editing Hatch Fills on page 295). Associative hatches can be specified as a
default class attribute (see Setting Class Properties on page 115).

Non-associative Hatches
Non-associative hatches are placed on objects or areas of the drawing with the Hatch command. They obtain most of
their attributes from hatch pattern definitions, but they do not use the color definitions for the lines that make up the
hatch. Non-associative hatches obtain the color definitions from the current default attributes. They do not use any
background definitions, and therefore have no background color. A non-associative hatch is similar to a screen that
displays over other objects; the spaces between the lines are empty, and display portions of any objects behind the
hatch.
Non-associative hatches are placed inside an area that is defined by selected objects or lines. The start point of the
hatch is set with the Hatch command. Unlike associative hatches, non-associative hatches can be moved to another
area or object. However, unless the new area is the same shape and size as the previous one, the pattern will not fit.
Non-associative hatches are groups that are not associated with an object. They do not rotate with the object or act like
a fill. They can be broken down into their individual elements with the Ungroup command. For a non-associative
hatch to become part of an object, it must be grouped with the object.

Defining Hatches
A hatch definition is required for both associative and non-associative hatches.
A hatch definition is a repetition of the elements in a series of lines in all directions from the beginning point. After
specifying where the hatch line begins (the Start Point), where it stops (the Dash Factor), where it begins to repeat (the

282

| Chapter 7: Applying Object Attributes

Repeat), and the distance separating the line from a neighboring line (the Offset), the pattern is repeated in all
directions.
A hatch can consist of several levels, or layers, of pattern definitions. Each level is edited individually to create the
overall hatch. (Hatch layers are named hatch levels in order to distinguish them from the layers in the drawing area.)
A new hatch can be created by editing an existing hatch; see Editing Hatch Definitions on page 287.
To create a new hatch pattern definition:
1. Open the Resource Browser by selecting Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
2. From the Resources menu, select New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
3. Select Hatch.
The Edit Hatch dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Name

Enter a name for the hatch; this name identifies the hatch in the Resource Browser and in the
Select Hatch dialog box (Modify > Hatch)

Active

Select the active hatch level from the list. A level can also be selected by clicking on one of its
pattern lines, or by using the keyboard right and left arrow keys. Levels are numbered in the
order of creation.

Cursor

Switches between the pointer and pan functions. The pointer adjusts the four control handles
in the hatch window. The pan moves the elements of the hatch around the preview window.

Zoom

Zooms in and out by a factor of two. The center of the view remains at its current coordinates.
The current zoom ratio is also displayed. The initial zoom setting when the dialog box opens
corresponds to the best setting for editing Level 1.

Hatch Attributes |

283

Parameter

Description

View

Select whether to view All Levels or only the Active Level; click Center to center the start point
of the active level

Units

Switches between Page and World settings for the hatch. Page is absolute in screen coordinates,
where one inch in the hatch equals one inch on the screen (at 100% zoom). World sets the hatch
to use the unit values for the layer where the hatch will be placed; for example, one inch in the
hatch equals one inch in the drawing area as defined by the rulers (this may not equal one inch
on the screen depending on the unit setting). When switching between Page and World, the
hatch settings are adjusted for all levels to preserve the hatch appearance.

Rotate

Select whether to rotate the hatch to match the orientation of any symbols or walls where it will
be placed

Snap Radius

Set the snap radius for snapping to the end points and mid points of pattern lines when
moving a line by dragging

Sketch Style

For the Design Series, specifies a hatch sketch style; see Applying Sketch Styles to Hatches on
page 680 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide

Background Fill

Select to use a background color and click the color box to select a color; background color
applies only to associative hatches

Start Point

Controls the location of the start of the first hatch line in relation to the hatch origin for the
active level. The default mode uses polar coordinates (L = distance, A = angle). Enter values or
move the Start Point handle in the preview window.

Repeat

Sets the distance, for the active level, between the beginning of a segment and the beginning of
the next colinear segment. Repeat directly relates to the Dash Factor, with the two determining
if the line is dashed or solid, as well as the length of the dashes and line segments. The default
mode uses polar coordinates (L = distance, A = angle). Enter values or move the Repeat handle
in the preview window.

Dash Factor

Represents, for the active level, the percentage of the distance between the Start Point and the
Repeat that is shown as a line. Set to 1 to create a solid line. Enter a value or move the Dash
Factor handle in the preview window.

Offset

Determines the distance and direction between lines for the active level. The values entered are
relative to the Start Point. The default mode uses polar coordinates (L = distance, A = angle).
Enter values or move the Offset handle in the preview window.

Pen Color

Sets the color for the active level hatch lines; click the color box to select a color. Click Unique
Colors to set a unique color for each level; click Same Color to apply the active level color
selection to all levels.

Pen Line Weight

Sets the hatch line weight for the current level. Click the line to select a weight from the list.
Create a custom weight by selecting Set Thickness. The Set Thickness dialog box opens. Enter
the Thickness Value and Thickness Units. Click Same Thickness to apply the active level line
thickness to all levels.

Add/Remove
Level

Click Add Level to create an offset duplicate of the active level. Alternatively, create a duplicate
level by clicking and dragging the Start Point handle with the Option (Macintosh) or Alt
(Windows) key. Click Remove Level to remove the active level.

284

| Chapter 7: Applying Object Attributes

Parameter

Description

Scale

Opens the Scale Hatch Definition dialog box. Enter a Scaling Factor to change the hatch
definitions for the active level (except for the Dash Factor value, which remains unchanged).
Select Apply to All Levels to change the scale factor for all levels.

Undo

The last five actions can be undone by clicking Undo

Redo

Click to redo the last action that was undone. Must be clicked directly after an action was
undone. Appears dimmed when there are no actions to undo.

Revert

Returns the hatch definition to its status at the time the Edit Hatch dialog box was opened

The Start Point, Repeat, Dash Factor, and Offset functions correspond to the four control handles in the preview
window. When a handle is moved, the corresponding functions values change to reflect the move. The Shift key
constrains the drag when using the control handles, affecting each of the four functions differently.
For the Start Point, Repeat, and Offset parameters, enter values according to either the polar coordinate system
or the Cartesian system. The text box labels for these four controls change to correspond to the selection of
Cartesian or polar.

Coordinate System

Description

Polar

Defines the hatch line segments by length and angle values entered in relation to the origin. In
polar mode, angles are represented as positive or negative values from 0 to 180. Values from
180 to 359 are automatically converted to negative. Vectorworks considers 0 to be at the 3
oclock position.

Cartesian

Cartesian coordinates are the same as those used in the drawing area, with positive and
negative X and Y axes

4. Click OK. The new hatch definition is saved under the specified name.

Example: Creating a Brick Hatch

The following Edit Hatch values demonstrate how to create a brick pattern. The hatch requires two levels. The bricks
will be 8x 3 and the first set of lines will be the vertical components of the bricks. This procedure creates a hatch that
scales appropriately when it is placed into a drawing.
All values are entered in World units and Cartesian mode.

Parameter

Level 1 Values

Level 2 Values

Start Point

X = 0, Y = 0

X = 0, Y = 0

Hatch Attributes |
Parameter

Level 1 Values

Level 2 Values

Repeat

X = 0, Y = 6

X = 2, Y = 0

Dash Factor

0.5

Offset

X = 4, Y = 3

X = 0, Y = 3

285

Applying Associative Hatches

To apply an associative hatch from the Attributes palette:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Attributes. The Attributes palette opens.
2. Select the object(s) which requires a hatch.
3. Select Hatch from the Attributes palettes Fill Style list.
4. Select the desired hatch from either the default resources or the current files resources; see Vectorworks
Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173.
The hatch is applied to the selected object(s).

Select the object, and then the desired

hatch from the Attributes palette

To apply an associative hatch resource from the Resource Browser:

1. Select the object(s).
2. From the Resource Browser, select the hatch to be applied. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) and
select Apply from the context menu. (Alternatively, double-click the hatch resource to apply it to the selection or
drag the hatch resource onto an object.)

Applying Non-Associative Hatches

To apply a non-associative hatch:
1. Select the object which requires a hatch.
2. Select Modify > Hatch.
The Hatches dialog box opens.

286

| Chapter 7: Applying Object Attributes

Parameter

Description

Hatches list

Lists the available hatches from the default resources, the current files resources, or from a
referenced file (referenced hatches display in italics)

Hatch preview

Displays a preview of the selected hatch at 100% zoom

New

Opens the Edit Hatch dialog box, for creating a new hatch (see Defining Hatches on page 281)

Edit

Opens the Edit Hatch dialog box, for editing or renaming an existing hatch

Duplicate

Creates a copy of the selected hatch (button is disabled if referenced hatches are present)

Delete

Deletes the selected hatch

3. Select the hatch to apply from the Hatches list.

A preview of the hatch is displayed.
4. Click OK to return to the drawing area.
The cursor changes to a paint bucket.
5. Position the paint bucket on the object where the hatch should begin. Click to specify the hatch origin. Drag to
specify the hatch orientation and click again.
The hatch fills the space from the paint buckets location to the boundary created by the object.
When a hatch is being applied to an object, the tip of the paint from the paint bucket marks the hatch origin. The
hatch start point within the object can be precisely specified.

Gradient Attributes |

Select the object

After selecting the hatch, click the cursor

at the desired insertion point. The hatch
can be rotated during insertion.

287

Click again to place the

hatch once it is oriented

Editing Hatch Definitions

Changes to a hatch definition affect all associative instances of that hatch in the drawing file. Non-associative hatches
are not affected.
To edit a hatch definition:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. Select the desired hatch. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh), and select Edit from the context menu.
Alternatively, select a drawing object, select Modify > Hatch, and click Edit for the selected hatch in the Hatches
dialog box.
The Edit Hatch dialog box opens.
3. Edit the hatch as described in Defining Hatches on page 281.
4. Click OK to return to the drawing area.
Any associative instance of the edited hatch in the drawing file changes according to the new definition.

Gradient Attributes
Gradients are created or imported into the current file through the Resource Browser (default resources are
automatically imported into the current file at the point of use, and display in the Resource Browser); see
Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173 and Accessing Existing Resources
on page 180.
Gradients can be applied to any type of 2D object that accepts a fill, including 2D walls, text boxes, worksheet
backgrounds, and plug-in objects that include a 2D object.

Creating Gradients
Gradients are defined and stored in the Resource Browser.

288

| Chapter 7: Applying Object Attributes

Gradient
segment

Midpoint

Gradient preview

Color spot
Color spot area

Vectorworks Term

Definition

Gradient

One color linearly blended to another color

Midpoint

Point between two colors where each color is of equal intensity; a midpoint is associated
with the color spot to its left

Color spot

Point where the selected color is at full intensity

Gradient segment

Two adjacent color spots

To create a gradient definition:

1. Open the Resource Browser by selecting Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
2. From the Resources menu, select New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
3. Select Gradient.
The Gradient Editor dialog box opens. Specify a name for the gradient resource, and select the segment starting
and ending colors. Gradients can consist of several segments and more than two colors. To create a gradient with
more than two colors, click in the color spot area. This adds a color spot and midpoint to the gradient.
Specify the location of a selected color spot or midpoint by dragging it into position, or entering its position in the
Position field.

Parameter

Description

Name

Specifies a name for the gradient resource; this name is displayed in the Resource Browser
and Attributes palette

Midpoint

Point between two colors where each color is of equal intensity

Gradient Preview

Displays the gradient in a preview bar

Gradient Attributes |

289

Parameter

Description

Color Spot

Specifies the starting or ending color of each gradient segment. To specify the color,
double-click on a color spot, or select a color spot and click Color. To add a new gradient
segment, click in an empty location in the color spot area. A new color spot and midpoint are
created. Drag a color spot to a new location in the color spot area; its associated color is
retained. Remove a color spot and its associated midpoint by selecting the color spot
dragging it from the color spot area.

Color

Specifies the color of the selected color spot; click to select the color

Position

Indicates the position (0.0 1.0) of the selected color spot or midpoint; the midpoint position
is relative to its location between two adjacent color spots

4. Click OK to save the gradient resource with the specified name.

Gradient definitions can be edited by accessing the Gradient Editor from the Resource Browser. Select a gradient and
select Edit from the Resources menu. See Working with Resources on page 185 for information on other Resource
Browser commands.
Gradients are saved in Vectorworks drawing files. If the file is not saved and the gradient is not a default resource, the
gradient is lost when Vectorworks is exited.

Applying Gradients
Gradient settings are specified through the Attributes palette and applied to a 2D object through the Resource Browser
or the Attributes palette. In addition, a gradient fill can be specified as a default class attribute (see Setting Class
Properties on page 115).
To apply a gradient resource from the Attributes palette and specify the gradient settings:
1. Select the object(s), and then select Gradient from the Attributes palette fill list. To change to a different gradient,
click on the gradient preview and select a different gradient from the list of default resources or the current files
resources (see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173).
Gradient
preview

Fill gradient
settings

2. Specify the settings for the current gradient by clicking the Fill Gradient Settings button next to the gradient
preview bar.
The Gradient Settings dialog box opens.

290

| Chapter 7: Applying Object Attributes

Gradient
selector

Parameter

Description

Gradient selector

Select a gradient resource from either the default resources or the current files resources

Repeat

Select to repeat the gradient segment(s) over the object; deselect to apply a single instance of
the gradient segment(s) to the object

No repeat

Repeat

Reverse

Select to draw the colors in reverse order from the order specified in the Gradient Editor dialog
box

Apply To

Select Each Object to apply the gradient to each selected object individually; choose Selection
to apply the gradient across the selected objects, spanning the objects.

Each Object

Selection

When applying a gradient across several selected objects, group the objects to retain the effect.

Gradient Attributes |
Parameter

Description

Type

Select the gradient type from the list

291

Linear

Applies the gradient to the selection with linear geometry

Radial

Applies the gradient to the selection with circular geometry

Rectangular

Applies the gradient to the selection with rectangular geometry

Angular

Applies the gradient to the selection in a counterclockwise direction from the specified starting
point

X/Y Offset

Indicates the gradient starting point coordinates relative to the center of the selection
bounding box (in the files current units)

Length

Specifies the length of a single gradient segment (in the files current units)

Angle

Specifies the angle of the gradient fill

3. If desired, click Preview to view the results of the gradient settings.

4. Click OK to apply the gradient settings.
To apply a gradient resource from the Resource Browser:
1. Select the object(s).
2. From the Resource Browser, select the gradient to be applied. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh),
and select Apply from the context menu. (Alternatively, double-click the gradient resource to apply it to the
selection or drag the gradient resource onto an object.)
The gradient settings can be edited from the Attributes palette.

292

| Chapter 7: Applying Object Attributes

Image Attributes
Image fills are created or imported into the current file through the Resource Browser (default resources are
automatically imported into the current file at the point of use, and display in the Resource Browser); see
Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173 and Accessing Existing Resources
on page 180.
Images can be applied to any type of 2D object that accepts a fill, including 2D walls, text boxes, worksheet
backgrounds, and plug-in objects that include a 2D object.

Creating Image Resources

Images are imported and stored in the Resource Browser.
To import an image for use as an image resource:
1. Open the Resource Browser by selecting Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
2. From the Resources menu, select New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
3. Select Image.
4. If a resource with an image is already present in the file, the Choose Image dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Import an Image File

Imports a new image; click OK and proceed to Step 5.

Reuse an Image from

Another Resource

Reuses a previously imported image; select the resource that contains the
image. Click OK and proceed to Step 6.

5. The Open dialog box is displayed. Select the image file to use as an image resource, and click Open.
6. If the image is in JPEG format, it is imported immediately. For images not in JPEG format, the Image Import
Options dialog box opens. Specify the imported image options.
The current image information is displayed at the top, along with the images uncompressed size. Two
compression methods are available; depending on the graphic, one of the methods may be more suitable. The
compression method which produces the smallest file size is selected by default. Select the desired balance
between compression and detail display. The resulting file size for each type of compression is displayed to help
with the selection.
If the selected option results in a file size larger than the uncompressed size, the image is imported
uncompressed.

Image Attributes |

Compression Method

Description

JPEG

Provides a high amount of compression, resulting in the smallest

Vectorworks file size. However, fine detail may be obscured. JPEG
compression is most suitable for photographic images.

PNG

Provides a moderate amount of compression, while preserving image

details; an image compressed as a PNG can also be imported as a 1-bit
monochrome image by selecting Import as Black and White

293

7. Click OK to import the image with the selected compression type. The image resource is saved, by default, with
the name of the original image file.
Image resources imported into the file that are not in JPEG format can be compressed by JPEG with the Compress
Images command. See Compressing Images on page 447.

Applying Image Resources

Image settings are specified through the Attributes palette and applied to a 2D object through the Resource Browser or
the Attributes palette. In addition, an image fill can be specified as a default class attribute (see Setting Class
Properties on page 115).
To apply an image resource from the Attributes palette and specify the image settings:
1. Select the object(s), and then select Image from the Attributes palette fill list. To change to a different image, click
on the image preview bar and select a different image from the list of default resources or the current files
resources (see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173).
Image
preview bar

Fill image
settings

2. Specify the settings for the current image by clicking the Fill Image Settings button next to the image preview
bar.
The Image Settings dialog box opens.

294

| Chapter 7: Applying Object Attributes

Image
selector

Parameter

Description

Image selector

Select an image resource from either the default resources or the current files
resources

Repeat

Select to repeat the image over the object; deselect to apply a single instance of the
image to the object

No repeat

Repeat

Mirror

Select to use a mirrored image of the image resource

Flip

Select to use a flipped image of the image resource

Maintain Aspect Ratio

Select to maintain the image aspect ratio when changing the Length values

Apply To

Select Each Object to apply the image to each selected object individually; choose
Selection to apply the image across the selected objects, spanning the objects

Each Object

Selection

When applying an image across several selected objects, group the objects to
maintain the image.
X/Y Offset

Indicates the image starting point coordinates relative to the center of the selection
bounding box (in the files current units)

Editing Hatch, Gradient, and Image Fills |

295

Parameter

Description

I/J Length

Specifies the distance in the I/J direction for a single instance of the image fill (in the
files current units)

Angle

Specifies the angle of the image fill

3. If desired, click Preview to view the results of the image settings.

4. Click OK to apply the image settings.
The X and Y axes are file-based, relative to the center of the selected object(s). The I and J axes are image-based.
Image

X/Y offset
coordinates
Center of
selected object

To apply an image resource from the Resource Browser:

1. Select the object(s).
2. From the Resource Browser, select the image to be applied. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh), and
select Apply from the context menu. (Alternatively, double-click the image resource to apply it to the selection or
drag the image resource onto an object.)
The image settings can be edited from the Attributes palette.

Editing Hatch, Gradient, and Image Fills

Use the Attribute Mapping tool to edit the size, position, and angle of an associative hatch, gradient, or image fill that
has been applied to an object.
When working in 3D in Renderworks, the Attribute Mapping tool maps textures directly in the drawing
window. See Direct Texture Mapping on page 765.

Editing Hatch Fills

To modify an objects associative hatch fill:
1. Click the Attribute Mapping tool from the Basic or Visualization tool set.
2. Click on an object containing an associative hatch fill. Only one object at a time can be edited.
3. An editing object with eight handles is placed over the hatch. The hatch origin is at the lower left corner of the
editing object, where the red and green lines meet.

296

| Chapter 7: Applying Object Attributes

Hatch origin

4. Use the editing object to set the hatch location, scale, and rotation angle. The hatch can also be nudged.

Action

Description

Edit the hatch

location

Click in the editing object (anywhere except on a selection handle) and drag it to the desired
location. Click to set.
To precisely locate the origin, click close to the lower left handle, and move the editing object as
needed.

Edit the hatch

scale

Click on one of the corner selection handles, and drag to set the editing object to a new scale (or
press the Tab key and enter a Scale value in the Data bar). Click to set.

Scale: 1.073

Editing Hatch, Gradient, and Image Fills |

297

Action

Description

Edit the hatch

rotation

Click on one of the middle selection handles, and drag to rotate the editing object to the desired
angle (or press the Tab key and enter a Rotation value in the Data bar); click to set the rotation.
By default, the editing object rotates about the handle opposite the handle that was clicked on.
To rotate about the hatch origin, press the Shift key while rotating.
To rotate about the center of the editing object, press the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command key
(Macintosh) while rotating.

Rotation:-30.0

5. In the Attributes palette, the name of the hatch is highlighted in blue, and edited is appended to the name.

Editing Gradient Fills

To modify an objects gradient fill:
1. Click the Attribute Mapping tool from the Basic or Visualization tool set.
2. Click on an object containing a gradient fill. Only one object at a time can be edited.
3. An editing object with two handles is placed over the gradient.

4. Use the editing object to set the gradient origin location, i-axis length, and rotation angle. Hold down the Shift
key to constrain the editing object line; the fill can also be nudged.

298

| Chapter 7: Applying Object Attributes

Action

Description

Edit the location of the fill

(gradient origin)

Click and drag the entire editing object, moving it to the desired location. Click to
set.

Edit the gradient i-axis

location

Click on a handle at the end of the editing object, and drag to set the editing object
to a new length. Click to set.

Edit the gradient rotation

Click on a handle at the end of the editing object, and move to create a fulcrum
line; click to set the rotation.

Editing Image Fills

To modify an objects image fill:
1. Click the Attribute Mapping tool from the Basic palette or the Visualization tool set.
2. Click on an object containing an image fill. Only one object at a time can be edited.
3. An editing object with eight handles is placed over the image.

Editing Hatch, Gradient, and Image Fills |

299

4. Use the editing object to set the image origin location, i-axis and j-axis lengths, and rotation angle. The fill can
also be nudged.

Action

Description

Edit the location of the fill

(image origin)

Click and drag the entire editing object, moving it to the desired location.

Edit the image i-axis and

j-axis location

Click on a corner handle (the resize cursor displays) and drag the handle to the
new size; holding the Shift key during this operation constrains the image
aspect ratio. Click to set.

300

| Chapter 7: Applying Object Attributes

Action

Description

Edit the image rotation

Click on a side handle (the rotate cursor displays) and drag the handle to the
new rotation angle (or press the Tab key and enter a Rotation value in the Data
bar). Click to set. Press the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command key (Macintosh)
while rotating to rotate about the image center.

Flip or mirror the image

Click and drag a corner of the editing object past another corner of the editing
object; click again to redraw the image within the new drawing area. Drag
horizontally to mirror the image; drag vertically to flip the image; drag
diagonally to both flip and mirror the image.

Click here and drag

lower left handle of
editing object past
lower right handle

Drag corner handle

outside the i/j
coordinate
quadrant and click
again to mirror the
image fill

Options in the Image Settings dialog box (accessed from the Attributes palette) also affect image attribute
mapping. When Maintain Aspect Ratio is selected, the image cannot be flipped or mirrored by dragging the
editing objects handles vertically or horizontally; only diagonal dragging is allowed. Use the Mirror or Flip
options in this dialog box to change the fill image orientation without moving or resizing the image.

Editing 2D Objects

Once a 2D object is created, it may require editing. Editing generally involves changing the size, shape, or number of
objects in a drawing, and also combining, trimming, and performing surface operations on multiple 2D objects.
2D objects can be edited from a 3D view. The 2D objects parameters can be changed from the Object Info palette, its
attributes can be changed from the Attributes palette, and surface operations (such as the Add Surface command) can
be performed while in a 3D view. For more intensive editing, such as reshaping or adding vertices, double-click on the
2D object (or select Edit from the context menu) to automatically return to Top/Plan view.

Editing Object Information

The Object Info palette provides information about the selected object(s) in a Vectorworks drawing. The information
displayed depends on the type of objects selected. In addition, the palette can be used to change the parameters.
Coordinates menu

The Object Info palette organizes data into three tabbed panes:

302

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

Tab

Description

Shape

Displays information about a selected objects geometry, class, and layer (see Shape Tab on
page 303)

Data

Lists any database records attached to a selected object (see Data Tab on page 305)

Render

When Renderworks is installed, this tab is added for the assigning and mapping of textures to 3D
objects (see Applying Textures to an Object on page 761). When sketch rendering with the
Design Series, the Sketch parameter is available on the Render tab, even if Renderworks is not
installed.

Coordinates
menu

Specifies options for the display of coordinates in rotated plan views (Design Series required).
See Rotating the Plan on page 707 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

Object Info palette drop-down list items can be selected by using the mouse or by typing the first letter(s) of the
desired item to highlight the closest match in the list (excluding class and layer lists).
Set the Object Info palette position, active pane upon opening, and Data pane separator position, as described in
Modifying Palette Positions and Settings on page 830. Save palette positions and settings by selecting Window >
Palettes > Save Palette Positions. To revert the palette position and settings back to the settings established when the
custom workspace was created (in the User Data and Preferences folder), click Reset Saved Settings from the Session
tab of Vectorworks preferences (see Session Preferences on page 50).

Activate Object Info Palette Command

The Activate Object Info Palette command allows you to quickly switch the focus from the drawing area to the first
editable field on the active pane of the Object Info palette. If the Object Info palette is not open, or is minimized
(unpinned), the Object Info palette is opened, and then the first editable field is highlighted.
To activate the Object Info palette, select Window > Palettes > Activate Object Info Palette, or
press Ctrl + (backquote) on Windows or Cmd + Option + (backquote) on the Macintosh.

Copying and Pasting Object Info Palette Data

Data contained in certain Object Info palette fields can be copied and pasted into the Vectorworks drawing or other
locations, such as your computers calculator.
To copy and paste Object Info palette data:
1. Select the object with data to copy.
2. Select Window > Palettes > Object Info.
The Object Info palette opens.
3. Click the tab containing the desired information. Move the mouse over the field containing the data for copying.
The cursor changes to an I bar in a field which permits copying.
4. Click-drag over the data to select it.
5. Select Edit > Copy.
6. Select Edit > Paste to paste the data into the desired location.

Editing Object Information |

303

Shape Tab
Object properties can be directly edited through the Object Info palette from the Shape tab. Objects can also be edited
with the tools on the Basic palette throughout this chapter.
The Shape tab always displays class and layer information. The detailed object information that is also displayed
depends on the type of object selected. Keep the following points in mind when changing object information through
the Shape tab:
To change individual objects in a group, first select the Modify > Edit Group or Ungroup command, and then
select the desired object(s).
In single vertex mode, only that vertex changes. However, in entire object mode, all the vertices are changed.
To view and edit object information for a single object:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Object Info.
The Object Info palette opens.
2. Click the Shape tab.
3. Select the desired object.
Editable information for that object is displayed.
4. Change the desired information, using the keys as follows:

Key

Function

Enter

Save the entry and return the focus to the drawing area

Tab

Save the entry and move the focus to the next editable field

Shift+Enter

Save the entry and keep the focus in the same field, so that you can enter a different value if
necessary

To view and edit object information for multiple objects:

1. Select Window > Palettes > Object Info.
The Object Info palette opens.
2. Click the Shape tab.
3. Select the desired objects.

304

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

Number of objects selected
Multiple Edit mode

Multiple objects selected

4. To edit each object in a selection separately, click the Multiple Edit mode button. This switches to Individual Edit
mode. Once in Individual Edit mode, use the Next arrow button to move forward through the selected objects
and the Previous arrow button to move backward through the selections. Each object highlights briefly as it is
selected. To be sure which object is currently selected, click the center circular button to highlight it again. If
either arrow appears dimmed, the end of the selected objects in that order has been reached.
Individual Edit mode
Currently selected
object type

Previous object
Highlights currently
selected object
Next object

Editing single object within multiple selection

Alternatively, select multiple objects of the same type, and then modify them at one time in Multiple Edit mode.
When several objects of the same type have been selected, the palette operates in batch editing mode. If the
parameter settings of the objects are different, the field displays as blank, or a check box displays with an
indeterminate state. Any parameter edits affect all the selected objects in multiple edit mode.
Some objects have more editable fields than others. If the Object Info palette is not fully extended when an object of
this type is selected, scroll options are provided. To scroll up and down, click the scroll arrows, any area of the scroll
bar, or click-drag the scroll box (Windows) or scroller (Macintosh).

Editing Object Information |

305

Windows

Macintosh

Scroll box
Scroller

Scroll bar
Scroll bar
Scroll arrow

Scroll arrow

Data Tab
The Data tab lists all records in the drawing, along with check boxes showing which records are attached. The Object
Info palette can be used to make changes to record settings.
To view and edit record information:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Object Info.
2. Click the Data tab.

Object name
Record list

Field list

Editing pane

3. Select the desired object in the drawing area.

The following information is displayed.

306

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

Parameter

Description

Object Name

Displays the name, if any, given to an object

Record List

Displays all the records that are active in the drawing; if any of these records are attached
to the selected object, the box to the left of the record name displays an X

Field List

Provides a list of all the record fields if a record is attached to the selected object; if any
field has a default value assigned, it displays after the field name

Editing Pane

Provides an area for entering record information

Resize the list boxes by selecting and dragging the bars between them.
If any records are attached to the selected object, the box to the left of the record name displays an X. If more than
one object is selected, only the records attached to all objects display an X.
See Record Formats on page 205 for more information on attaching, editing, and deleting record formats.

Reshaping Objects
The 2D Reshape tool reshapes an object after it has been created. Change the length of objects (including dimensions)
reshape single objects, or reshape multiple objects at once.
With this tool, reshape all polygons and polylines, including lines drawn with the Freehand tool (which are
considered polylines in Vectorworks). In addition, specify exact radius measurements for circular arc control points.
2D objects can be resized with the Single Object Interactive Scaling Mode of the 2D Selection tool; see 2D
Selection Tool on page 36. Certain objects (polylines, polygons, rectangles, rounded rectangles, circles, ovals,
and arcs) can also be reshaped with the Freehand tool. See Reshaping Objects with the Freehand Tool on
page 256.
The 2D Reshape tool has five different reshape modes. It also has four control point modes for changing the existing
vertex. In addition, the tool can operate in three marquee selection modes.
Change
Vertex

Move Polygon
Handles

Delete
Vertex

Add
Vertex

Hide or
Show
Edges

Corner
Point

Bzier
Control
Point

Cubic
Spline
Point

Enable
Rectangular
Marquee

Fillet
(Circular Arc)
Point

Enable Polygonal
Marquee

Enable
Lasso
Marquee

Fillet
Preferences

Mode

Description

Move Polygon Handles

Drag a vertex by clicking it, or drag a segment by clicking on the midpoint

Change Vertex

Changes an existing vertex into a corner, Bzier, cubic spline, or fillet (circular arc) point

Add Vertex

Adds a vertex as a corner, Bzier, cubic spline, or fillet (circular arc) point

Delete Vertex

Removes the selected vertex

Reshaping Objects |

307

Mode

Description

Hide or Show Edges

Clicking on the midpoint hides the polyline or polygon segment; clicking on a vertex
hides the segment that follows the vertex

Corner Point

In Change Vertex mode, changes the vertex to a corner; in Add Vertex mode, adds a
vertex

Bzier Control Point

In Change Vertex mode, changes the vertex to a Bzier vertex; in Add Vertex mode, adds
a Bzier vertex

Cubic Spline Point

In Change Vertex mode, changes the vertex to a cubic spline vertex; in Add Vertex mode,
adds a cubic spline vertex

Fillet (Circular Arc)

Point

In Change Vertex mode, changes the vertex to an arc; in Add Vertex mode, adds an arc
vertex. Click the Fillet Preferences mode button, enter a Fillet Radius in the Fillet
Settings dialog box, and click OK (for the largest possible fillet, set the Fillet Radius to
zero).

Enable Rectangular
Marquee

Creates a rectangular marquee box around several vertices. Click to set the start point,
drag the mouse in the desired direction, and release to set the end point. All vertices
within the marquee are selected for performing a subsequent reshape operation.

Enable Lasso Marquee

Creates a free-form marquee around several vertices, allowing a more exact selection of
vertices of irregular 2D shapes. Click to set the start point, drag the mouse in the desired
direction, and release to set the end point. All vertices within the marquee are selected
for performing a subsequent reshape operation.

Enable Polygonal
Marquee

Creates a marquee with an irregular polygonal shape around several vertices. Click to set
the start point, and then continue clicking to define the shape. Double-click to finish the
marquee. All vertices within the marquee are selected for performing a subsequent
reshape operation.

Click-drag in the drawing to begin drawing a marquee around vertices for reshaping; the currently active
marquee mode determines the marquee type that will be drawn. Regardless of what marquee mode is currently
active, you can alternatively press and hold the Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) key to draw a lasso
marquee or press and hold the Shift+Alt (Windows) or Shift+Option (Macintosh) key to draw a polygonal
marquee.
While using any marquee selection mode, if the vertices to be selected are surrounded by a filled object, first
select the object(s) using the 2D Selection tool. Press and hold the Shift key while drawing the marquee around
the vertices; the currently active marquee mode determines the marquee type that will be drawn. The desired
vertices are selected without the boundary object being selected.
Perform the desired reshape operation on the selected vertices.

Move Polygon Handles Mode

Select this mode to reshape a 2D polyline or polygon by moving one of its vertices.
To reshape a 2D polyline or polygon by moving a vertex:
1. Select the polyline or polygon to change.
2. Click the 2D Reshape tool from the Basic palette.

308

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

3. Click the Move Polygon Handles mode button.

4. Click the vertex to move and drag it to its new location. Click to set the new location.
Bzier

Click on the desired vertex; when the Resize cursor displays, drag it to the new location

Any object that cannot be reshaped with this tool continues to display standard bounding box handles only.

Change Vertex Mode

Select this mode to change an existing vertex to a different type of control point: corner, Bzier, cubic spline, or fillet
(circular arc) point.
To reshape a 2D polyline or polygon by changing a vertex:
1. Select the polyline or polygon to change.
2. Click the 2D Reshape tool from the Basic palette.
3. Click the Change Vertex mode button.
4. From the Tool bar, select the new type of control point for the vertex.
Change vertex does not work on a midpoint handle. Select only a vertex point.
5. Click to change the vertex.

Click on the vertex when the Change Vertex cursor displays

Reshaping Objects |

309

Add Vertex Mode

Select this mode button to add a vertex to the polygon/polyline. The vertex can be any of the following: corner, Bzier,
cubic spline, or fillet (circular arc) point.
To reshape a 2D polyline or polygon by adding a vertex:
1. Select the polyline or polygon to change.
2. Click the 2D Reshape tool from the Basic palette.
3. Click the Add Vertex button on the Tool bar.
4. From the Tool bar, select the type of control point for the new vertex.
5. Move the cursor to an existing vertex near the location where the new vertex is to be added. The cursor becomes
an arrow with two black diamonds when a vertex can be added.
Clicking on the handle at a center point along an edge adds a new vertex exactly at that center point.
6. Drag the cursor to the desired location for the new vertex.
7. Click at the new location.

With the Add Vertex cursor, click-drag to the new location

Delete Vertex Mode

An existing vertex on the polygon/polyline can be deleted.
To reshape a 2D polyline or polygon by deleting a vertex:
1. Select the polyline or polygon to change.
2. Click the 2D Reshape tool from the Basic palette.
3. Click the Delete Vertex mode button.
4. Click the existing vertex to delete it.

310

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

With the Delete Vertex cursor, click the vertex to remove it

Hide or Show Edges Mode

Select this mode button to hide, but not delete, a portion of the objects boundary.
To hide or show the edge of a 2D polyline or polygon:
1. Select the polyline or polygon to change.
2. Click the 2D Reshape tool from the Basic palette.
3. Click the Hide or Show Edges mode button.
4. Click a vertex near the edge to be hidden.

With the Hide/Show Edges cursor, click a vertex near an edge to show or hide the edge

Click again to show the hidden edge.

Performing Multiple Reshapes

Instead of individually reshaping the vertices of objects, one at a time, several vertices and even several objects can be
reshaped at one time. In addition, vertices and holes can be deleted from objects. Multiple reshaping can be performed
on lines, polylines, walls, dimensions, and polygons. Polygons include all regular and irregular polygons, as well as
objects drawn with the Freehand tool. For example, use this function to resize walls without moving any of the doors
or windows placed inside them, or affecting intersections with other walls.
This function must be executed in Top/Plan view. This function does not work on objects drawn with the Rectangle,
Oval, or Arc tools.

Reshaping Objects |

311

To resize objects with multiple reshape:

1. Select the objects to resize.
2. Click the 2D Reshape tool from the Basic palette, and select Move Polygon Handles from the Tool bar.
The cursor changes to a cross-hair.
3. Click and drag to create a rectangular marquee around multiple vertices of the objects to be resized or deleted.
To create a lasso marquee, press the Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows) key when creating the marquee. Press
the Command and Option (Macintosh) or Ctrl and Alt (Windows) keys for polygonal marquee selection mode.
4. Change the location of the vertices by either clicking and dragging with the mouse or by using the Move
command (see Editing Object Surfaces on page 330).
To use the mouse, click-drag on the vertices and move them to the desired location. A preview displays the
current and future location of the object vertices.

Create marquee to select multiple vertices, and then drag selected vertices to new location

Press the Delete key (Macintosh) or Delete or Backspace keys (Windows) to delete the vertices or holes.
Alternatively, enter an exact length in the Data bar. Press the Tab key while still pressing the mouse button until
the L field is highlighted, enter a value for the length, and release the mouse button.
The walls are resized with the wall intersections, doors, or other symbols maintained in place. The marquee
remains on the screen until another tool or command is selected.

Reshaping Polylines
Polylines can be reshaped in a manner that is similar to an Edit Group operation. The polyline itself is locked in this
process, but holes can be added to it, filleted, chamfered, offset, duplicated, extracted, and deleted from it.
To reshape a polyline:
1. Select the polyline to change.
2. Select Modify > Edit Polyline.
3. Select polyline holes and move, delete, or reshape them. Add new holes to the polyline, or move a hole out of the
polyline to extract it, creating individual polylines.
The original polyline is locked and cannot be edited.
4. Click Exit Polyline to return to the drawing.

312

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

Original polyline

In Edit Polyline mode, a

hole is added

The polyline has been edited

Offsetting Objects
The Offset tool either creates a duplicate object offset from the original, or offsets the selected object from its original
location. Use this tool to easily create parallel objects, such as lines and walls. Also use it to produce a larger or smaller
version of closed objects, such as ovals and connected walls. NURBS surfaces are offset by the offset distance along the
surface normal direction.
The Offset tool can be used with the following objects (see the Design Series Users Guide for information about the
Design Series objects).

Vectorworks Fundamentals Objects

Open 2D objects (arcs,
lines, polylines)
NURBS curves
Walls

Closed 2D objects (circles, ovals, rectangles, rounded

rectangles, polylines, polygons)
NURBS surfaces
Revision clouds

Vectorworks Design Series Objects

Hardscapes
Seating layouts
Stipples

Massing models
Site modifiers
Plants

Property lines
Spaces
Redlines

The Offset tool has four modes, which are also options in the Offset Tool Preferences dialog box.
Offset by Point

Offset Original Object

Offset Preferences

Offset by Distance

Duplicate and Offset

The 2D conversion res field, on the Edit tab of the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box, adjusts the degree of
smoothing. The higher the conversion resolution, the higher the degree of smoothing, which produces a more
accurate offset of objects. For more information on 2D conversion resolution, refer to Setting Vectorworks
Preferences on page 47.
To offset one or more objects:
1. Select the object(s) to be offset, if desired.

Offsetting Objects |

313

2. Click the Offset tool from the Basic palette.

3. Click Offset Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Offset Tool Preferences dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Method
Offset by Distance

Places the offset object at the specified Distance from the original location (same
as selecting the Tool bar button)

Offset by Point

Places the offset object at a distance specified by a mouse click (same as selecting
the Tool bar button)

Duplication
Duplicate and Offset

Creates a duplicate of the object at the offset location (same as selecting the Tool
bar button)

Offset Original Object

Moves the original object to the offset location (same as selecting the Tool bar
button)

Wall Offset
Offset from Center Line

Offsets walls from the center line of the walls original location

Offset from Nearest Edge

Offsets walls from the nearest edge of the walls original location

Smooth Corners

Rounds sharp corners in the offset object

4. Specify the desired preferences and click OK.

314

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

To select additional objects or to change the currently selected objects to offset (or duplicate and offset), press and
hold the Alt key (Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking or click-dragging the mouse around
them to marquee select them; the 2D Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the Alt or Cmd key is
being pressed.

5. Depending on the offset preferences, do one of the following:

Offset Method

Description

Offset by Distance
Click on Objects to Offset

Select the object to be offset; the object is highlighted. Click to specify the offset
location relative to the selected object, and to place the offset object. To continue
offsetting objects, click another object to highlight it, and then click again to
indicate the offset location.

Offset Selected Objects

Click in the drawing to specify the offset location relative to the originally selected
object, and to place the offset object. The offset object is now selected; to offset
from that object, click again to indicate the offset location.

Offset by Point
Click on Objects to Offset

Select the object to be offset; the object is highlighted. Move the mouse to adjust
the offset preview if necessary, and then click to place the offset object. To continue
offsetting objects, click another object to highlight it, and then click again to
indicate the offset location.

Offset Selected Objects

Click to set the offset point (move the mouse to adjust the offset preview if
necessary), and then click again to place the offset object. The offset object is now
selected; to offset from that object, click again to indicate the offset location.

Depending on the offset preferences, either a duplicate object or the original object is placed at the offset location.

Select the walls with the 2D Selection tool, and then select the Offset tool. Select Offset by Distance
mode, and set the offset Distance to 2. Click outside the walls to offset them 2 beyond the original location.

In Offset by Point mode, click the

object to be copied and offset; the
object is highlighted

Click the point where the offset is

to be placed; a preview displays

Click again to place the offset object

Aligning and Distributing 2D Objects |

315

Aligning and Distributing 2D Objects

The Align/Distribute command aligns and distributes multiple 2D objects. Alignment and distribution is based upon
the vertical and horizontal axes, relative to the screen.
To align/distribute objects:
1. Select the objects to be aligned/distributed.
2. Select Modify > Align > Align/Distribute. The Align/Distribute Objects dialog box opens.

Vertical Align/Distribute

Horizontal Align/Distribute

3. Select the object alignment/distribution criteria. 2D objects are only moved along the horizontal and vertical axes.

Parameter

Description

Align

Select to align items along the horizontal or vertical axis

Distribute

Select to distribute items along the horizontal or vertical axis

Horizontal
Left

Align/distribute by the left side of the selected objects

Center

Align/distribute by the centers of the selected objects

Right

Align/distribute by the right side of the selected objects

Spacing

Distribute the spacing equally between the left and right sides of adjacent objects

Vertical
Top

Align/distribute by the top of the selected objects

Center

Align/distribute by the centers of the selected objects

Bottom

Align/distribute by the bottom of the selected objects

Spacing

Distribute the spacing equally between tops and bottoms of adjacent objects

4. Click OK.
Vectorworks aligns/distributes the selected objects.

316

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

Loci and locked objects are special objects and behave differently when present during an alignment/distribution
operation.
If a locus point is one of the selected objects, all objects are aligned relative to that locus. If there are multiple loci in the
selection, then the loci are aligned/distributed like any other object.
Locked objects in a selection do not move. Other objects are aligned/distributed relative to the locked objects.

Trimming and Clipping Objects

Trim Command
Use the Trim command to trim lines or walls where they intersect with another object.
To trim objects:
1. Position the trimming object with over the object(s) to be trimmed.
2. Select the cutting object.
3. Select Modify > Trim.
4. Click on the object to be trimmed.
The trim command is executed and the pieces can be moved independently.

Trim Tool
The Trim tool trims a portion of the selected object. Objects that can be edited in this manner include lines, arcs,
rectangles, rounded rectangles, circles, ovals, polylines, and polygons.
To trim a portion of an object:
1. Position the trimming object over the object(s) to be trimmed.
2. Click the Trim tool from the Basic palette.
The standard arrow cursor changes into a hand.
3. Click the portion of the object to be trimmed.
That portion of the object is trimmed back to the closest intersection with another object.
To trim another portion of the same object, move the hand to that section and click.

Trimming and Clipping Objects |

317

Clip Tool
The Clip tool cuts out pieces from the 2D objects, such as lines, arcs, rectangles, rounded rectangles, circles, ovals,
polygons, and polylines. In addition, this tool can be used to split an object.
Removes Outside

Rectangular clipping object

Removes Inside

Circular clipping object

Splits at Boundaries

Polygonal clipping object

Mode

Description

Removes Inside

Cuts a hole in the object(s) according to the clipping object shape

Removes Outside

Trims everything away from the outside of the clipping object shape

Splits at Boundaries

Splits the object(s) and the clipping area into separate objects

Clipping object shape

Each mode can use one of the clipping shapes; select rectangular, polygonal, or circular

To clip objects:
1. Select the object or objects to cut.
2. Click the Clip tool from the Basic palette.
3. Select the clipping mode and the clipping object shape.
4. Click and drag to create a marquee box.
The object is clipped as defined by the clipping object shape.
1st click

2nd click

318

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

Resizing Objects
Fixed Point Resize Tool
The Fixed Point Resize tool resizes rectangles, rounded rectangles, polygons, circles, and ovals using a fixed point on
the drawing as the point of reference. It is best used to scale an object relative to a particular location in the drawing. To
rescale an object symmetrically or asymmetrically by a specific factor, use the Scale Objects command. See Scaling
Objects on page 318.
To resize an object:
1. Select the object or objects to change.
2. Click the Fixed Point Resize tool from the Basic palette.
3. Click on the point in the drawing to serve as the fulcrum.
To scale the resized object symmetrically, select a fulcrum point that is at the exact center of the object.
If the fixed point is not at the center of the object, the resized object changes proportions.
4. Click on an object edge and drag the object into its new size, shape, and/or location.

Click fulcrum point

Click and drag to resize

If the drag point is moved past the selected fulcrum, the object is reversed.
The starting point for dragging cannot be the same as the fulcrum point or exactly horizontal or vertical to it.

Scaling Objects
The Scale Objects command rescales the X and/or Y dimension of any selected solid, object, or group, or rescales the
selected items uniformly in the X,Y, and Z dimensions. The selected item is rescaled using its center point. The object
can be rescaled by indicating a segment on the drawing and entering a new distance for the segment. In addition, text
and/or all visible objects in the drawing can be scaled.
Spheres, hemispheres, and cones cannot be scaled asymmetrically. Symbols and layer links cannot be scaled.

Resizing Objects |

319

To scale objects:
1. Select the object(s) to scale.
2. Select Modify > Scale Objects.
The Scale Objects dialog box opens. Specify the scaling method and parameters.

Parameter

Description

Symmetric

Scales uniformly along X, Y, and Z axes

X, Y, Z Factor

Enter the scaling factor (for example, enter 2 to double or .5 to halve the scale)

Symmetric By Distance

Scales symmetrically using the ratio of the current and new distance values as a scale
factor

Current Distance

Enter the current distance to be scaled, or click the button to use a temporary tool to
indicate the distance on the drawing

New Distance

Enter the new value for the distance

Asymmetric
X / Y Scaling Factor

Scales along only the specified X and Y axes; when asymmetrically scaling a solid, the
current view must be aligned with the solids matrix for scaling to occur
Enter the scaling factor (for example, enter 2 to double or .5 to halve the scale)

320

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

Parameter

Description

Scale text

Scales selected text to the new scaling factor

Entire drawing

Scales all visible objects in the active layer

3. If specifying the scale factor with the Symmetric by Distance option, click the button to switch temporarily to the
drawing. Click to indicate the start of the segment, move the mouse, and click to indicate the end of the segment.
You are returned to the Scale Objects dialog box, and the Current Distance value has been specified. Enter the
New Distance for the segment.
4. Click OK.

Shearing Objects
The Shear tool simultaneously skews all of the vertices of a rectangle, rounded rectangle, polygon, circle, oval, or
polyline, using a fixed point on the drawing as a point of reference. It is like placing a thumbtack on one point of an
object, or the drawing, and reshaping every other object point except the one tacked down. The Shear tool can be used
to fake a 3D perspective.
To shear an object:
1. Select the object or objects to change.
2. Click the Shear tool from the Basic palette.
3. Click on the point in the drawing to tack down.
4. Click on the object and drag the resize cursor to shear the object. A preview object displays.
5. Click to set the shear position.

Click to tack down a point then drag the resize cursor to shear the object

Joining Objects
Join Command
The Join command can be used to join two single lines, two double lines, or two walls together. Joined lines intersect
but remain as individual objects.

Object

Specifications

Individual Lines

An individual line can be joined to another individual line

Joining Objects |

321

Object

Specifications

Double Lines

Double lines can be joined to another set of double lines or to a wall. Double lines drawn with
the Create Polygons option (set in Double Line preferences) cannot be joined. Only the line
elements of double lines drawn with the Create Lines and Polygons option can be joined.

Walls

A wall can be joined to another wall or to double lines created with the Create Lines option
(set in Double Line preferences). Walls will join to the line elements of double lines drawn
with the Create Lines and Polygons option.

Join
To join walls, single lines, or double lines:
1. Select the two non-parallel walls, lines, or double lines to join.
2. Select Modify > Join > Join.
The selected walls/lines are joined together with any excess trimmed away.

Join and Fillet

To join and fillet double lines:
1. Select the two sets of non-parallel double lines to join.
2. Select Modify > Join > Join and Fillet.
If a fillet measurement has already been specified for this drawing, Vectorworks automatically connects the two
double lines and creates a fillet using the default value.
If a fillet measurement has not been specified for this drawing, the Fillet Settings dialog box opens. Enter the
desired fillet radius and click OK. Vectorworks automatically connects the two double lines and creates a fillet
using the specified value.

322

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

Join (No Trim)

To join two overlapping walls or individual lines, without trimming away the excess:
1. Select the two non-parallel walls or lines to join.
2. Select Modify > Join > Join (no trim).
The selected walls/lines are joined without trimming any excess.

Splitting Objects and NURBS Surfaces

The Split tool splits the following objects (see the Design Series Users Guide for information about the Design Series
objects).
Note that splitting an object may change its type; for example, trimming a roof face creates a solid section, which can
no longer be edited as a roof face.

Vectorworks Fundamentals Objects

3D solid objects (extrudes, cones,
cylinders, spheres, hemispheres)
Revision clouds
NURBS curves
NURBS surfaces
Viewports

2D objects (ovals, circles, rectangles, rounded

rectangles, arcs, lines, polylines, polygons)
Pillars
Walls
Floors
Roof faces

Vectorworks Design Series Objects

Property lines
Massing models
Site modifiers

Redlines
Stipples
Spaces

Splitting Objects and NURBS Surfaces |

Seating layouts

323

Hardscapes

The following modes are available for the Split tool.

Line Trim

Point Split

Line Split

Mode

Description

Point Split

Cuts an object or NURBS surface at a specified point

Line Split

Splits an object or NURBS surface along a cutting line

Line Trim

Splits an object or NURBS surface along a cutting line, and then keeps a designated side

Surfaces generated by successive splitting can be joined together with the Compose command (see Composing
and Decomposing Objects and Surfaces on page 434).
This tool may not be able to manipulate certain types of surface geometry (see Surface Geometry Requirements
on page 360).

Point Split Mode

The Point Split mode cuts an object at a specified location.

Splitting Objects by Point

To split an object at a specific point:
1. Click the Split tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click the Point Split mode from the Tool bar.
3. Click on the object at the point to be split.
If multiple objects are within range of the specified point, the Select Split Candidate dialog box opens.

Highlight the object to split by using the Next and Prev buttons.
4. The object is split into two pieces.

324

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

The wall is split into two separate

pieces at the click location

Click

If the object is closed, as in a circle or rectangle, the object is converted so that its endpoints meet unjoined at the
split. Some objects are not truly closed, and instead break into two segments.

Splitting NURBS Surfaces by Point

To split a NURBS surface in point split mode:
1. Click the Split tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click the Point Split mode from the Tool bar.
3. In Wireframe view, click on the NURBS surface to split.
See Selecting the Edges and Faces of a Solid on page 357 for information on selecting surfaces.
Click to split the NURBS surface

The surface is split at that point

The smaller surface has

been moved for clarity

The surface is split by iso-parametric curves passing through the click point along U and V parametric directions.
If the split point is on an existing iso-parametric curve, the surface is split in both directions (U and V).

Clicking once on the iso-parametric curve (shown in light gray)

with the Split tool creates four split surfaces (in black)

Splitting Objects and NURBS Surfaces |

325

Line Split Mode

The Line Split mode splits 2D objects, NURBS curves/surfaces, solids, and viewports along a cutting line. After the
split, all the objects remain on the drawing.
To split only the selected object, press the Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) key while drawing the split line.
To split an object along a cutting line:
1. Click the Split tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click the Line Split mode from the Tool bar.
3. Draw a line through the object to split.
The object is split by the line.

One split surface has been

moved for clarity

Solids can also be split in Line Split mode. Two section solid objects will result.

One solid section has been moved for clarity

Line Trim Mode

The Line Trim mode splits 2D objects, NURBS curves/surfaces, solids, and viewports along a cutting line; it keeps a
specified side, and trims away the other side.
To trim only the selected object, press the Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) key while drawing the trim line.
To split and trim an object along a cutting line:
1. Click the Split tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click the Line Trim mode from the Tool bar.
3. Draw a line through the object to split.

326

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

4. An arrow points to the side to be kept. Click to indicate which side of the split line should be kept; the other side
is trimmed away.
The object is split by the line, and the indicated side remains.

Creating Fillets and Chamfers

Fillet Tool
The Fillet tool adds a highly specific fillet (arc) between two objects in the drawing, making each of the fillets end
points tangent to one of the objects. Apply fillets to lines, rectangles, polygons, polylines, circles, circular arcs, NURBS
curves, 3D polygons, and walls. With rectangles, polygons, or polylines, the tool places a fillet between adjacent sides
of the object. Holes in polylines can be filleted. In addition, this tool trims or splits objects at the fillets end points by
selecting various fillet modes.
A fillet cannot be placed between parallel or concentric objects. If split or trim fillets are placed between a mixture
of objects that can and cannot be split/trimmed, the fillet works only on the objects that can be split/trimmed, and
ignores the others.
To place a fillet:
1. Click the Fillet tool from the Basic palette.
2. Click the desired mode from the Tool bar.
Fillet and Split
Fillet

Fillet Preferences

Fillet and Trim

Creating Fillets and Chamfers |

327

Mode

Description

Fillet

Places a fillet without affecting the original object; the fillet and the object must be grouped to
form a single object

Fillet and Split

Places a fillet and splits the filleted object. If the fillet is between two objects, the fillet and the
objects must be grouped to make a single object. If filleting the corners of a polygon, the fillet
takes the place of the corner and becomes a part of the object.

Fillet and Trim

Places a fillet and trims the filleted object. If the fillet is between two objects, the fillet and the
objects must be grouped to make a single object. If filleting the corners of a polygon, the fillet
takes the place of the corner and becomes a part of the object.

3. Click the object where the fillet will begin.

4. Click the object where the fillet will end.
To apply the fillet to all adjacent sides of an object, double-click.
If this is the first time the Fillet tool is used, the Fillet Settings dialog box opens. Enter a fillet radius and click OK.
The fillet radius specified is used for all subsequent fillet operations. To change this radius, click Fillet
Preferences from the Tool bar, enter a new radius, and click OK.
If an object is too short, it extends to match the selected fillet radius.

Chamfer Tool
The Chamfer tool places a chamfer, or line, between two objects or adjacent sides of an object such as rectangles,
NURBS curves, polygons, 3D polygons, polylines, or line segments. However, a chamfer cannot be placed between
parallel lines or NURBS curves.
Chamfers can trim or split objects at the chamfer endpoints or extend them to meet at the chamfer endpoints by
selecting specific chamfer modes from the Tool bar.

328

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

To create a chamfer:

1. Click the Chamfer tool from the Basic palette.

2. Select the mode from the Tool bar.
Chamfer and Split
Chamfer Preferences

Chamfer
Chamfer and Trim

Mode

Description

Chamfer

Places a chamfer without affecting the original object; to create a single object, group the
chamfer and the chamfered object together

Chamfer and Split

Places a chamfer and splits the chamfered objects. This mode extends lines, if needed, for
the chamfer to connect. To create a single object, group the chamfer and the chamfered
object together. If the corner of a polygon is chamfered, the chamfer takes the place of the
corner.

Chamfer and Trim

Places a chamfer and trims the chamfered objects. If the corner of a polygon is chamfered,
the chamfer takes the place of the corner. This mode extends lines, if needed, for the
chamfer to connect.

3. Click the object where the chamfer will begin.

If this is the first time the Chamfer tool is used, the Chamfer Settings dialog box opens. Otherwise, click Chamfer
Preferences from the Tool bar to change chamfer settings.

Creating Fillets and Chamfers |

Parameter

Description

Entry Options

Select the method for specifying the chamfer size

First and Second Lines

Specify the chamfer size by entering the First Line and Second Line distances

First Line and Angle

Specify the chamfer size by entering the First Line distance and an Angle value

Chamfer Line Length

Specify the chamfer size by entering the Chamfer Line Length value

329

330

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

Select the entry option for creating the chamfer. Enter the appropriate values and click OK.
The specified chamfer settings are used for all subsequent chamfers. To change these settings, click the Chamfer
Settings button and enter new criteria.

4. Click the object where the chamfer will end.

The chamfer is drawn according to the mode selection.

Editing Object Surfaces

Vectorworks has four commands for editing object surfaces: Intersect Surface, Add Surface, Combine into Surface, and
Clip Surface. Use these commands with the following objects (see the Design Series Users Guide for information
about the Design Series objects).

Vectorworks Fundamentals Objects

2D primitive objects that can be filled and are not grouped (arcs, polygons,
polylines, ovals, circles, rectangles, rounded rectangles)
Revision clouds
Floors
Roof faces
Pillars

Vectorworks Design Series Objects

Ceiling grids
Massing models
Property lines
Site modifiers
Spaces
Parking Areas

Plants
Stipples
Redlines
Seating layouts
Hardscapes
Stages

If a combination of 2D and 2D/3D hybrid objects (such as floors or pillars) will be used in an operation, the view must
be set to Top/Plan.

Intersect Surface
The Intersect Surface command provides an easy way to create a new object that is the exact size and shape of the
overlapping area of two objects.
To intersect surfaces:
1. Select the two overlapping objects to use to create a third object.
The new objects properties are based on the object on the bottom of the stack of objects. If the bottom object is a
2D primitive (such as a rectangle or circle), the new object will have its attributes. If the bottom object is
something other than a 2D primitive (such as a floor or pillar), the new object will be the same type, with the
same properties. If necessary, use the Send command to stack the objects to produce the desired attributes or
object type.
2. Select Modify > Intersect Surface.

Editing Object Surfaces |

331

Vectorworks places the new object directly on top of the two original intersecting objects. To see the new object,
select it and drag it to the side.

Add Surface
The Add Surface command creates a single object from two or more objects, as long as all of the following are true:
The objects are not symbols.
The objects touch or overlap each other.
The objects are not locked or grouped.
Note that any open polygons will be converted to closed polygons.
To add surfaces:
1. Select the two or more objects to be combined.
The new objects properties are based on the object on the bottom of the stack of objects. If the bottom object is a
2D primitive (such as a rectangle or circle), the new object will have its attributes. If the bottom object is
something other than a 2D primitive (such as a floor or pillar), the new object will be the same type, with the
same properties. If necessary, use the Send command to stack the objects to produce the desired attributes or
object type.
2. Select Modify > Add Surface.

In Top/Plan view, select the pillar

(gray object on bottom) and the
rectangle (white object on top)

Select Add Surface to combine

the two surfaces into a single
pillar object

Combine into Surface

The Combine into Surface command creates a new object that is formed from a group of objects. The objects must
currently intersect and form a closed polygon or polyline shape. Depending on the types of objects selected and the
location of the mouse click, you can create several different polygons or polylines from the same selection of objects.
For example, with this set of three objects, the following polygon can be created:

332

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

Click here

To combine surfaces:
1. Select the two or more closed objects to use to create a new polygon or polyline.
2. Select Modify > Combine into Surface.
The cursor changes into a paint bucket.
3. Place the paint bucket inside the area to be combined and click.
Vectorworks creates a single polygon or polyline object from the selected objects. The new object uses the current
attributes.

Clip Surface
The Clip Surface command trims the bottom object in a selection so that any areas overlapped by the top object are cut
out of it. Multiple objects can be used as clipping objects in one operation. Symbols and grouped objects cannot be
clipped or be used as clipping objects.
If there is a stack of more than two overlapping objects, then each object under the clipping object (the top object in the
stack) will be clipped.
There are two important things to remember about this command:
If the object to be clipped is an open polygon, it is automatically converted to a closed polygon before it is
clipped.
Depending on the objects selected, the command may change the bottom objects type; for example, if a hole is
clipped into a rectangle, the clipped rectangle is automatically changed into a polyline.
To clip a surface:
1. Ensure that the object to clip is the bottom object.
If necessary, change the objects order with the Send command (see Changing Object Stacking Order on
page 418).
2. Select the objects to clip.
3. Select Modify > Clip Surface.
The bottom object is clipped; the clipping object can be deleted if it is no longer needed.

Engineering Properties |

In Top/Plan view, select the roof

face (gray object on bottom) and
the rectangle (white object on top)

333

Select Clip Surface, and then

move the rectangle clipping object
to reveal the modified roof face

Engineering Properties
The Engineering Properties command automatically calculates the engineering properties of a 2D object.
To determine the engineering properties of an object:
1. Select a single object, or select a single object and a locus point.
2. Select Model > Engineering Properties.
The Engineering Properties dialog box opens. The data that displays is selection-dependent.
For a single closed surface, the following displays:
Plane properties (area, perimeter, and absolute coordinates of the centroid of the object)
Moments of inertia, section modulus, and radii of gyration about the objects centroidal axes
For a single closed surface and a locus point, the moments of inertia and radii of gyration about the axes that pass
through the locus are also displayed, as well as the horizontal and vertical distances from the locus to the
centroid of the object.

334

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

3. Select the desired options and units.

Parameter

Description

Units

Update the displayed information to reflect the selected unit of measurement

Place locus at centroid

Select to add a locus at the centroid of the selected object after closing the
Engineering Properties dialog box

Place properties on
drawing

Select to place a list of the properties at the next mouse click after closing the
Engineering Properties dialog box

Write properties to a file

Select to send the properties to a text file; specify the file name and location after
closing the Engineering Properties dialog box

4. Click OK.

Drafting Aids
Arc into Segments
The Arc into Segments command converts a selected arc or circle into an equal number of segments, or divides the arc
or circle into segments of a given length. The segments can be drawn as lines or polygons; the original object remains
unchanged.
To convert a circle or arc into segments:
1. Select the arc or circle to be converted.
2. Select Modify > Drafting Aids > Arc into Segments. The Arc into Segments dialog box opens.

Drafting Aids |

Parameter

335

Description

Method
Number of Segments

Draws the specified number of equal segments along the arc

Segment Length

Draws segments of the specified length along the arc

Options
Draw Polygon

Draws the segments as polygons

Draw Lines

Draws the segments as lines

3. Click OK to create the segments.

Line into Segments

The Line into Segments command converts a selected line into the indicated number of equal length segments. The
original line can be converted, or an identical line placed on top of the original and converted.
To convert a line into segments:
1. Select the line to be converted.
2. Select Modify > Drafting Aids > Line into Segments.
The Line into Segments dialog box opens.

336

| Chapter 8: Editing 2D Objects

Parameter

Description

Place loci

Places loci at the segment divisions

Break Line Into Segments

Creates segments from the original line, converting it; deselect to place loci only

Leave Original Line

Intact

Retains the original line, and creates segments from a copy of the line

Number of Segments

Specifies the number of segments to create

3. Click OK to draw either a new segmented line or convert the selected one.

Creating 3D Objects

With the 3D Modeling tool set and various commands, draw objects in 3D, change 2D objects into 3D objects, or create
hybrid objects that display in both 2D and 3D. 3D objects can have height (Z coordinate) as well as width and length (X
and Y coordinates). This section presents methods of creating a variety of 3D objects. Unlike their 2D counterparts, 3D
objects must be rendered to display a fill.
A 3D tool can only be used in a 3D view. If the view is currently Top/Plan, it automatically changes to Top when a 3D
tool is selected.

Using the 3D Data Bar

Use the Data bar when you draw to lock certain values for an object, such as the length of a hemisphere radius or the
height of an extruded rectangle. The fields that are available on the Data bar depend on the active tool and on the
action being performed.
Floating 3D Data bar
(follows the cursor)
Offset of the cursor relative
to the working plane

Location of the cursor

relative to the working plane

Fixed 3D Data bar

(on the Tool bar)

The data displayed in the bar is gathered from the feedback segment of the object being created. The more common
Data bar fields are described in the following table; other fields that can display are described where their use is
relevant.

Parameter

Description

WP A

The angle or rotation of the object that is being drawn relative to the working plane X axis

The absolute location of X in working plane coordinates

The absolute location of Y in working plane coordinates

The absolute location of Z in working plane coordinates

The length or distance of the object that is being drawn

The Z (depth) of the object being drawn

Ctr X

The center of the object along the X axis

Ctr Y

The center of the object along the Y axis

Ctr Z

The center of the object along the Z axis

Delta X

The offset distance from the previous click or position of X in working plane space

Delta Y

The offset distance from the previous click or position of Y in working plane space

Delta Z

The offset distance from the previous click or position of Z in working plane space

Delta X

The offset distance from the previous click or position of X

Delta Y

The offset distance from the previous click or position of Y

338

| Chapter 9: Creating 3D Objects

Parameter

Description

Delta Z

The offset distance from the previous click or position of Z

Radius

The radius of the object being drawn

Height

The height of the object being drawn

The location and behavior of the Data bar fields can be adjusted with the Data bar menu (see Data Bar Menu on
page 221 for details).

Data bar menu

Drawing with the 3D Data Bar

To draw an object with the 3D Data bar:
1. Select a 3D drawing tool and click once to begin to draw the object.
2. Press the Tab key to activate the first field in the Data bar, or press Shift+Tab to activate the last field.
Alternatively, if the Data bar options are set so that keyboard or numeric keypad activation is enabled, type the
value for the first field in the Data bar to activate it.
In click-drag mode, press and hold the mouse button when you press Tab or Shift+Tab.
3. Enter values in the appropriate field(s), using the keys as follows.

Key

Action

Enter (Windows) or
Return (Macintosh)

When the focus is in a Data bar field, sets the value that is currently displayed, and moves
the focus to the drawing area
When the focus is in the drawing area, completes the object (or completes the current
segment of the object, for path objects such as polygons, walls, and dimensions)

Tab

When the focus is in a Data bar field, sets the entered value and moves to the next field (if
no value was entered, the field is not set)
When the focus is in the drawing area, moves the focus to the first field in the Data bar

Shift-Tab

When the focus is in a Data bar field, sets the entered value and moves to the previous
field (if no value was entered, the field is not set)
When the focus is in the drawing area, moves the focus to the last field in the Data bar

To clear an entry before it is set, press the Backspace key. The previous value in that field redisplays.
If the SmartCursor option is enabled in Vectorworks preferences, a dotted line displays to represent the location
of the values entered for the X, Y, and Z axes.
4. A vector lock (red dashed line) displays to represent the location of the values entered in the Data bar.
See Creating Vector Locks on page 157 for more information.

Creating 3D Polygons |

339

5. To complete the object according to the values you entered, click the mouse button. For non-path objects, you can
also press Enter or Return to complete the object, if the focus is in the drawing area. For path objects, such as
polygons, walls, and dimensions, you may need to click to complete the object.

Creating 3D Polygons
Extruded Rectangles
The Extruded Rectangle tool creates rectangles that have a height in any 3D layer and projection. Because they have a
location in 3D space, extruded rectangles can be manipulated like other 3D objects. They can be rotated, placed in
perspective, and translated in 3D space. Because Vectorworks considers these rectangles to be mesh objects (not true
extruded objects), their individual vertices can be edited later.
To create an extruded rectangle:
1. Click the Extruded Rectangle tool from the 3D Modeling tool set.
2. Click to set one of the rectangles corner points. The height of the extruded rectangle is set in one of two ways.

View

Action

2D view or 3D
elevation view

Enter the extruded rectangles height in the Set Extrusion Height dialog box that opens at
the first mouse click. Click OK.

3D isometric view

Move the mouse vertically and then click to set the height. For more information on the
different views, see Using Standard Views on page 449.

3. Click to set the end point of the extruded rectangle.

2nd click

1st click
3rd click

340

| Chapter 9: Creating 3D Objects

Extruded Polygons
The Extruded Polygon tool creates 3D polygons that have a height.
To create an extruded 3D polygon:
1. Click the Extruded Polygon tool from the 3D Modeling tool set.
2. Click to set the polygons start point (first vertex). The height of the extruded polygon is set in one of two ways.

View

Action

2D view or 3D
elevation view

Enter the extruded polygons height in the Set Extrusion Height dialog box that opens at
the first mouse click. Click OK.

3D isometric view

Move the mouse vertically and then click to set the height. For more information on the
different views, see Using Standard Views on page 449.

3. Click at each vertex.

4. Double-click at the final vertex to end an open polygon; click at the starting vertex (a point cue displays) to end a
closed polygon (the first and last vertex are automatically joined).

2nd

1st click

4th
3rd
5th click

6th click

3D Polygons
The 3D Polygon tool creates polygons that have a location in 3D space, but no height. While they are planar, they can
be rotated, placed in perspective, and translated in space like any other 3D object.
To create a planar 3D polygon:
1. Click the 3D Polygon tool from the 3D Modeling tool set.
2. Click to set the polygons start point (first vertex).
3. Click at each vertex.
4. Double-click at the final vertex to end an open polygon; click at the starting vertex (a point cue displays) to end a
closed polygon (the first and last vertex are automatically joined).
2nd

3rd

7th
1st click

8th click

6th

4th

5th
9th click

Creating Cylinders |

341

Creating Cylinders
The Cylinder tool has five modes for creating cylinders.
Circle by Diameter

Snap Height

Snap Top-Center

Circle by Radius

Circle by Three Points

Mode

Description

Circle by Radius

Defines the base of the cylinder by radius

Circle by Diameter

Defines the base of the cylinder by diameter

Circle by Three Points

Defines the base of the cylinder by circumference

Snap Height

Sets the new cylinder height to the same height as an existing 3D object (available in a 3D
isometric view only)

Snap Top-Center

Snaps the top-center of the new cylinder to a snap point on an existing 3D object (available
in a 3D isometric view only)

When in a non-isometric view, the height of the cylinder is set in the Set Extrusion Height dialog box. In an
isometric view, the cylinder height can be set by dragging with the mouse or entering the height in the Data bar.
For more information on the different views, see Using Standard Views on page 449.
The cylinder height and radius can be changed with the 3D Reshape tool (see Reshaping 3D Objects on page 403),
the radius can be modified in the Object Info palette, and the resolution can be adjusted through the 3D Conversion
Res setting (see Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 47).

Cylinder by Radius
To create a cylinder by radius:
1. Click the Cylinder tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Circle by Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of the cylinder base.
3. Drag the mouse to the desired radius and click to set the radius of the cylinder base. The radius can also be set in
the Data bar.
4. Move the mouse vertically and click to set the cylinder height.

Cylinder by Diameter
To create a cylinder by diameter:
1. Click the Cylinder tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Circle by Diameter mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the cylinder base diameter.

342

| Chapter 9: Creating 3D Objects

3. Drag the mouse to the desired diameter and click to set the diameter of the cylinder base.
4. Move the mouse vertically and click to set the cylinder height.

Cylinder by Three Points

To create a cylinder by three points:
1. Click the Cylinder tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Circle by Three Points mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the cylinder base diameter.
3. Drag the mouse and click to set the second point on the cylinder base, and click again to set the third point on the
cylinder base.
4. Move the mouse vertically and click to set the cylinder height.

Cylinder by Height
To create a cylinder with the same height as another 3D object:
1. Ensure that Snap to Object and Smart Points snapping is enabled (see Setting Snapping Parameters on
page 139).
2. In a 3D isometric view, click the Cylinder tool from the 3D Modeling tool set. Select the cylinder base drawing
mode, and then select Snap Height mode.
The drawing procedure depends on the mode type selected (circle by radius, diameter, or three points).
3. Click to set the center of the cylinder or to set the first point on the cylinder base diameter.
4. Drag the mouse to the desired base radius or diameter and click to set. Or, if creating a cylinder by three points,
drag the mouse and click to set the second point on the cylinder base, and click again to set the third point on the
cylinder base.
5. Using snapping, align the top of the cylinder with the top of another snap point on a 3D object that has the
desired height.
6. Click on the 3D objects smart point to set the cylinder height.
3rd click

2nd click
1st click

Creating Spheres |

343

Cylinder by Top-Center
To create and snap a cylinder by its top center to a snap point on another 3D object:
1. Ensure that Snap to Object and Smart Points snapping is enabled (see Setting Snapping Parameters on
page 139).
2. In a 3D isometric view, click the Cylinder tool from the 3D Modeling tool set. Select the cylinder base drawing
mode, and then select Snap Top-Center mode.
The drawing procedure depends on the mode type selected (circle by radius, diameter, or three points).
3. Click to set the center of the cylinder or to set the first point on the cylinder base diameter.
4. Drag the mouse to the desired base radius or diameter and click to set. Or, if creating a cylinder by three points,
drag the mouse and click to set the second point on the cylinder base, and click again to set the third point on the
cylinder base.
5. Using snapping, snap the top center of the cylinder to a snap point on another 3D object. A preview object
displays. Click to create the cylinder.
3rd click

2nd click

1st click

Creating Spheres
The Sphere tool creates spheres using one of the three modes.
Sphere By Diameter

Sphere By Radius

Sphere By Center and Radius

Mode

Description

Sphere by Radius

Defines the base of the sphere by radius

Sphere by Diameter

Defines the base of the sphere by diameter

Sphere by Center and Radius

Defines the base of the sphere by center (according to the height above the working
plane) and radius

The sphere radius can be changed with the 3D Reshape tool (see Reshaping 3D Objects on page 403), the radius can
be modified in the Object Info palette, and the resolution can be adjusted through the 3D Conversion Res setting (see
Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 47).

344

| Chapter 9: Creating 3D Objects

Sphere by Radius
To create a sphere by radius:
1. Click the Sphere tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Sphere by Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of sphere base.
3. Move the mouse to the desired radius and click to set the radius of the sphere base. The radius can also be set in
the Data bar.

Sphere by Diameter
To create a sphere by diameter:
1. Click the Sphere tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Sphere by Diameter mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the sphere base diameter.
3. Move the mouse to the desired diameter and click to set the diameter of the sphere base.

Sphere by Center and Radius

To create a sphere by center and radius:
1. Click the Sphere tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Sphere by Center and Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of the sphere base on the working plane.
3. Move the mouse vertically and click to set the height of the sphere above the working plane.
4. Move the mouse to the desired radius and click to set the radius of the sphere base. The radius can also be set in
the Data bar.
The center and height, relative to the working plane, of the sphere is automatically established if the first click is on a
snap point, for example a 3D locus or vertex on another 3D object.
When in a non-isometric view, the sphere is created centered on the working plane.

Creating Hemispheres
The Hemisphere tool creates hemispheres using one of three modes.
Hemisphere by Diameter

Hemisphere by Radius

Hemisphere by Up Radius

Mode

Description

Hemisphere by Radius

Defines the base of the hemisphere by radius

Hemisphere by Diameter

Defines the base of the hemisphere by diameter

Creating Cones |
Mode

Description

Hemisphere by Up Radius

Defines the base of the hemisphere by center and rotation

345

The hemisphere radius can be changed with the 3D Reshape tool (see Reshaping 3D Objects on page 403), the
radius can be modified in the Object Info palette, and the resolution can be adjusted through the 3D Conversion Res
setting (see Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 47).

Hemisphere by Radius
To create a hemisphere by radius:
1. Click the Hemisphere tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Hemisphere by Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of the hemisphere base.
3. Move the mouse to the desired radius and click to set the radius of the hemisphere base. The radius can also be
set in the Data bar.

Hemisphere by Diameter
To create a hemisphere by diameter:
1. Click the Hemisphere tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Hemisphere by Diameter mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the hemisphere base diameter.
3. Move the mouse to the desired diameter and click to set the diameter of the hemisphere base.

Hemisphere by Up Radius
To create a hemisphere by up radius:
1. Click the Hemisphere tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Hemisphere by Up Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of the hemisphere base.
3. Move the mouse and click to set the rotation and top of the hemisphere.

Creating Cones
The Cone tool creates cones using one of two modes.
Cone By Radius and Height

Cone By Radius and Tip

Mode

Description

Cone by Radius and Height

Defines the base of the cone by radius and tip of the cone by height

346

| Chapter 9: Creating 3D Objects

Mode

Description

Cone by Radius and Tip

Defines the base of the cone by radius and, if desired, snaps the tip of the cone to a
point

When in a non-isometric view, the height of the cone is set in the Set Extrusion Height dialog box. In an isometric
view, the cone height can be set by dragging with the mouse or entering the height in the Data bar. For more
information on the different views, see Using Standard Views on page 449.
The cone height can be changed with the 3D Reshape tool (see Reshaping 3D Objects on page 403), the radius can be
modified in the Object Info palette, and the resolution can be adjusted through the 3D Conversion Res setting (see
Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 47).

Cone by Radius and Height

To create a cone using radius and height:
1. In a 3D isometric view, click the Cone tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Cone by Radius and Height
mode.
2. Click to set the center of the cone base.
3. Move the mouse to the desired radius and click to set the radius of the cone base. The radius can also be set in the
Data bar.
4. Move the mouse vertically and click to set the cone height.
3rd click

1st click
2nd click

Cone by Radius and Tip

To create a cone using radius and tip:
1. Ensure that Snap to Object and Smart Points snapping is enabled (see Setting Snapping Parameters on
page 139).
2. In a 3D isometric view, click the Cone tool from the 3D Modeling tool set and select Cone by Radius and Tip
mode.
3. Click to set center of the cone.
4. Move the mouse to the desired radius and click to set the radius of the cone base. The radius can also be set in the
Data bar.

Creating NURBS Curves, Circles, and Arcs |

347

5. Using snapping, snap the top of the cone to a snap point on another 3D object. A preview object displays. Click to
create the cone.
3rd click
1st click
2nd click

Creating NURBS Curves, Circles, and Arcs

NURBS (Non Uniform Rational B-Splines) are used to create curves, circles, and arcs in 3D space. They can also be
used as defining objects for extrusions along a path. NURBS are created along the working plane.

NURBS Curves
NURBS curves can be created using one of two modes. Specify the NURBS curve degree prior to selecting a mode.
NURBS Curve by Interpolation Point

NURBS Curve by
Control Point

NURBS Curve
Degree Setting

Setting the NURBS Curve Degree

To specify the NURBS curve degree:
1. Click the NURBS Curve tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and click NURBS Curve Degree Setting from the
Tool bar.
2. The Curve Degree dialog box opens. Specify the curve degree for the NURBS Curve tool to use. Click OK.
Set the degree value to 1 to create a NURBS curve with linear segments (similar to a 3D polygon). A linear
NURBS curve can be used to measure an object from point to point in a 3D view.

NURBS Curve by Interpolation Point

To create a NURBS curve by interpolation point:
1. Click the NURBS Curve tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select NURBS Curve by Interpolation Point
mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the curve.
3. Click to set the point about which the curve passes through.
4. Double-click to set the end point of the curve.

348

| Chapter 9: Creating 3D Objects

Double-clicking ends the operation. To create a multi-curved NURBS curve, continue to click points.

NURBS Curve by Control Point

To create a NURBS curve by control point:
1. Click the NURBS Curve tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select NURBS Curve by Control Point mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the curve.
3. Click to set the point about which the curve pulls toward but does not touch.
4. Double-click to set the end point of the curve.
Double-clicking ends the operation. To create a multi-curved NURBS curve, continue to click points.

NURBS Circles
NURBS circles can be created using one of three modes.
NURBS Circle by Radius

NURBS Circle by Three Points

NURBS Circle by Diameter

NURBS Circle by Radius

To create a NURBS circle by radius:
1. Click the NURBS Circle tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select NURBS Circle by Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of the circle.
3. Click to set the end point of the radius that defines the circle.

NURBS Circle by Diameter

To create a NURBS circle by diameter:
1. Click the NURBS Circle tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select NURBS Circle by Diameter mode.
2. Click to set a point on the circle.
3. Click to set the end point of the diameter that defines the circle.

NURBS Circle by Three Points

To create a NURBS circle by three points:
1. Click the NURBS Circle from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select NURBS Circle by Three Points mode.
2. Click to set the first point on the circle.
3. Click to set the second point on the circle.

Creating NURBS Curves, Circles, and Arcs |

4. Click to set the third (and final) point on the circle.
The third point defines the radius of the circle.

NURBS Arcs
NURBS arcs can be created using one of four modes.
NURBS Arc by Radius

NURBS Arc by Three Points

NURBS Arc by Tangent

NURBS Arc by Two Points and Center

NURBS Arc by Radius

To create a NURBS arc by radius:
1. Click the NURBS Arc tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select NURBS Arc by Radius mode.
2. Click to set the center of the arc.
3. Click to fix the radius and set the starting point for the arc.
4. Click to set the end point of the arc.

NURBS Arc by Three Points

To create a NURBS arc by three points:
1. Click the NURBS Arc tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select NURBS Arc by Three Points mode.
2. Click to set the starting point of the arc.
3. Click to set end point of the radius that defines the arc.
4. Click to set the end point of the arc.

NURBS Arc by Tangent

To create a NURBS arc by tangent:
1. Click the NURBS Arc tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select NURBS Arc by Tangent mode.
2. Click to set the start point of the arc.
3. Click to set the tangent.
4. Click to set end point of arc.

349

350

| Chapter 9: Creating 3D Objects

NURBS Arc by Two Points and Center

To create a NURBS arc by two points and center:
1. Click the NURBS Arc tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select NURBS Arc by Two Points and Center
mode.
2. Click to set the start point of the arc.
3. Click to set end point of the arc.
4. Click to set the radius of the arc.

Converting to NURBS
The Convert to NURBS command converts 2D objects and 3D polygons into 3D NURBS curves, and converts the faces
of solids to NURBS surfaces. This is a quick way of creating NURBS surfaces from an extrusion, sweep, or other solids.
To convert to NURBS curves or surfaces:
1. Select the object or solid to convert to NURBS surfaces.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to NURBS.
The selection is converted to NURBS surface(s) or a 3D NURBS curve, as reflected in the Object Info palette.
If the solid consisted of several faces, the conversion results in a group of NURBS surfaces. Select Modify > Ungroup
to access the individual NURBS surfaces that make up the solid.

Creating 3D Loci
3D Locus Tool
The 3D Locus tool places a snappable 3D locus or reference point onto the drawing. Like 2D loci, they are reference
points. They can be moved, but they cannot be reshaped and they do not print.
To manually insert a 3D locus:
1. Click the 3D Locus tool from the 3D Modeling tool set.
2. Click to place the locus.
Vectorworks places the locus on the working plane if it is not snapped to an object.
3. Click to place each additional locus.
To insert a 3D locus by dialog box:
1. Double-click the 3D Locus tool from the 3D Modeling tool set.
The Create Object dialog box opens.

Extruding Objects |

351

2. Select the 3D locus Class and Layer. Enter the X, Y, and Z position where the 3D locus is to be located.
3. Click OK.
To place 3D loci more reliably, turn on Snap to Objects from the Snapping palette.

Extruding Objects
Single Extrude
The Extrude command changes 2D objects into 3D objects. The type of object and its attributes determines the type of
extrude that is produced. Lines are extruded as flat planes, while all other objects are extruded as wireframe 3D
objects. While more than one object can be extruded at a time, grouped objects must first be ungrouped in order to be
extruded. Objects that are locked must first be unlocked in order to be extruded.
Objects are extruded into the current viewing projection, so the extrusion direction is dependent on the current view.
They can be rotated afterwards if desired. See Rotate Tool on page 436 or Preset Rotation Angles on page 439. The
extruded object height can be edited interactively with the 3D Reshape tool; see Reshaping Extruded Objects and
Solid Primitives on page 403 for more information.
When extruding a selection of objects, Vectorworks turns the objects into a single 3D group of objects. To edit an
individual object, either ungroup the set or use the Edit Group command to access the individual objects.
To extrude an object:
1. Select the 2D object(s) to extrude.
2. Select Model > Extrude.
The Create Extrude dialog box opens.

3. Enter the Extrusion height and specify any change in size along the X and Y axes, and then click OK.

352

| Chapter 9: Creating 3D Objects

Multiple Extrude
A pyramid, sphere, or other 3D object can be created from a series of 2D objects using the Multiple Extrude command.
Using locus points can provide a point of reference with this command.
The process matches segments on each object to create the extrude. The segment order may be reversed for one
or more of the objects, producing unexpected results (such as a twisted extrusion). If this occurs, convert the
objects to open polygons prior to selecting the Multiple Extrude command.
To create a multiple extrude:
1. Select the 2D objects to extrude.
2. Select Model > Multiple Extrude.
The Create Extrude dialog box opens.
3. Enter the Extrusion height and specify the change in size along the X and Y axes.
4. Click OK.
Vectorworks extrudes the set of objects/locus points by connecting one to another in their stacking order, turning
the objects into a single 3D object.

Extrude Along Path

The Extrude Along Path command extrudes profile objects along a given path. Profile objects can be 2D objects, 3D
polygons, and NURBS curves. Profile objects cannot be non-planar, self-intersecting, or a mixture of 2D and 3D
profiles. If the path is not a NURBS curve, it is converted into a NURBS curve during this operation.
When using the Edit Group command on a 3D object created using the Extrude Along Path command, a dialog
box opens with the choice to either edit the original path or profile object.
To extrude along a path:
1. Select the object to be extruded, and the object to use as the path.

Extruding Objects |

353

2. Select Model > Extrude Along Path.

The Extrude Along Path dialog box opens. Specify the extrusion parameters.

Parameter

Description

Select a path object

Click the Next or Prev button to select the object that represents the path

Uniform Scale

Scales the object linearly along the designated path; enter a Scale Factor of 1 to perform no
scaling, or enter a positive scale factor other than 1 for uniform scaling

Exponential Scale

Scales the object exponentially along the designated path; enter a Shape Factor of 0 to
perform no scaling, or enter a shape factor other than 0 for exponential scaling

Lock Profile Pane

Locks the orientation of the profile plane to the global Z axis, constraining the extrusion to
be perpendicular to the XY plane

Scaling options are available when the path object is a single continuous curve without sharp corners or
discontinuities.
3. Click OK to extrude the object along the selected path.

354

| Chapter 9: Creating 3D Objects

No scaling
(scale factor 1)

Uniform scaling

Exponential scaling

4. The type of Scale, Shape/Scale Factor, and Lock Profile Plane status of an extrude along path object can be
edited in the Object Info palette.

Creating a Tapered Extrude

A tapered extrude can be created from 2D objects, 3D polygons, and NURBS curves, circles, and arcs. This command
easily creates wavy extrusions by entering a taper value of zero.
The command also extrudes 2D objects into 3D objects with a defined taper. Use it to convert a single object or several
objects at the same time. Once created, the height and taper can be edited in the Object Info palette.
The tapered extrude object height can be edited interactively with the 3D Reshape tool; see Reshaping Extruded
Objects and Solid Primitives on page 403 for more information.
To create a tapered extrude:
1. Select the object(s) to turn into a tapered extrude.
2. Select Model > Tapered Extrude.
The Tapered Angle and Extrude Height dialog box opens.

3. Enter the Height (Z) of the extrude and the Taper Angle. A positive taper degree shrinks the object as it extrudes,
while a negative taper degree widens the object.
Set a Taper Angle of 0 to create an extrusion with no taper.
4. Click OK to create the tapered extrude.

Sweeping Objects |

355

NURBS curve extruded with zero Taper Angle

If a tapered extrude fails, the object reverts to the last known good value.

Sweeping Objects
The Sweep command converts 2D objects into 3D cylindrical objects. Use it to convert a single object at a time, or to
convert several selected objects. While more than one object can be swept at a time, grouped objects must first be
ungrouped. Locked objects must first be unlocked in order to create a sweep.
A sweep has four basic elements: a centroid (locus), an arc angle, a segment angle, and a pitch. The locus acts as the
sweeps center of rotation. If a locus is not selected, Vectorworks automatically sweeps the object around its left edge or
point farthest on the left if more than one object is selected. A locus can be relocated or added after creation using the
Edit Group command. The other three elements (arc angle, segment angle, pitch) can be edited after the sweep has
been created through the Object Info palette.
If more than one object is selected when creating a sweep, the objects are automatically grouped. To edit an object
within the sweep, use the Edit Group command.
To create a sweep:
1. Select the 2D object(s) to sweep and, if created, the locus.
2. Select Model > Sweep.
The Create Sweep dialog box opens. Enter the sweep criteria and click OK.

Parameter

Description

Size
Height

Indicates the sweep height

Radius

Indicates the sweep radius

356

| Chapter 9: Creating 3D Objects

Parameter

Description

Angles
Start Angle

Specifies the angle to begin the sweep; normally start at 0

Arc Angle

Specifies the degree of the sweep. By default, objects are swept a full 360.

Segment Angle

Indicates the number of segments that make up the sweep. The default is 36 segments, each
one 10 from the next on the arc. The angle setting must be a positive number. A large number
of segments can slow down performance.

Pitch

Sets the degree to which the sweep spirals. A sweeps pitch is represented in the plus- or
minus-height per revolution. For example, if the pitch is 1, every revolution raises the object
a single inch. The default is 0.
Locus point selected

Create object

Place locus to act as sweep

centroid; select both
Object swept, rotated, and rendered

Advanced 3D Modeling

10

The 3D Power Pack technology is fully integrated with Vectorworks to provide significantly expanded NURBS (Non
Uniform Rational B-splines) functionality.
NURBS is a mathematical formulation that represents the geometry of curves, circles, arcs, and surfaces in 3D space.
The 3D Power Pack provides the following features and benefits:

Advanced solid modeling operations

Advanced surface modeling operations
Solid-surface interactions
Participation of surfaces in Boolean operations
Easy manipulation of surface geometry
Simple 3D user interface

3D Power Pack Fundamentals

3D Power Pack Cursors
Special cursors display during certain operations to help determine the current mouse function; they do not display
when an active selection is about to occur.

Cursor/Operation

Where Used

Edge Selection

Extract tools Point and Curve modes, Chamfer Edge tool, and the Fillet Edge tool

Face Selection

Extract tools Surface modes and Shell Solid tool, as well as the Chamfer Edge and Fillet
Edge tools with the Select Faces option turned on

Curve Selection

Loft Surface tool and Project tool

Surface Selection

Project tool

Selecting the Edges and Faces of a Solid

Several 3D Power Pack tools require the selection of edges or faces of a solid. The Extract tools Surface mode and the
Shell Solid tool require face selection. The Chamfer Edge and Fillet Edge tools can require both face and edge
selection, depending upon the option selected in the preferences dialog box.

358

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Selecting Edges
The cursor changes to an arrowhead when on or near an edge. If more than one edge is near the cursor, the nearest
edge is selected. Click the edge to select it.
The cursor also changes to an arrowhead when on or near an iso-parametric curve (which displays in a lighter shade
of pen color than the edge); however, an iso-parametric curve cannot be selected.

Action

Description

Select more than one edge

Press the Shift key and select the edges

Deselect a selected edge

Click on the edge again with the Shift key pressed

Deselect edges that have

been selected

Click on an empty area

Deselect the last selection

Press the Backspace (Windows) or Delete (Macintosh) key, or double-click on the

edge

Arrowhead cursor
(on or near edge)

Arrow cursor
(away from edge)

Multiple edges
selected

Highlighted
(selected) edge

Iso-parametric
curve

Selecting Faces
Face selection in Vectorworks is actually an edge-based selection. When the cursor is on or near an edge or near an
iso-parametric curve, you can select the face on either side of the edge depending on the cursor position.

Cursor pointing to the

left side of the edge

Face on the left side of

the edge is selected

3D Power Pack Fundamentals |

359

If the cursor is positioned over more than one face, or near an iso-parametric curve on a face, the Select Face dialog box
opens to specify which face to select.

Iso-parametric curve

Click Next or Prev until the desired face is selected. Click OK to select the face.
Multiple faces can be selected while pressing the Shift key, much like the edge selection described earlier. Deselecting
faces is also similar to deselecting edges.

Displaying Surface Normals

The surface normal of NURBS surfaces can be displayed in order to clarify the surface direction and facilitate the
creation of fillet surfaces (see Creating a Fillet Surface on page 371), and the sectioning of solids (see Sectioning
Solids on page 409).
To display the surface normal of a NURBS surface:
1. Select one or more NURBS surfaces.
2. In the Object Info palette, select Show Normal. The NURBS surface normal displays as a red arrow.

If desired, click Reverse Normal when a single NURBS surface is selected to reverse the direction of the surface
normal. The arrow changes direction accordingly to indicate the new direction.

Displaying Curve Direction

The direction of NURBS curves can be displayed to help perform 3D operations.
To display the direction of a NURBS curve:
1. Select one or more NURBS curves.
2. In the Object Info palette, select Show Direction. The NURBS curve direction displays as a red arrow.

360

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

If desired, click Reverse Direction when a single NURBS curve is selected to reverse the direction of the curve.
The arrow changes direction accordingly to indicate the new direction.

Editing a Fillet/Chamfer or Shell Object

A fillet, chamfer, or shell object follows certain editing conventions.
The set of edges or faces used to create the fillet/chamfer or shell cannot be changed once the operation is performed;
edges or faces cannot be deleted from or added to the existing set. To add or delete edges or faces, first ungroup the
object, and then perform the operation again.

Fillet operation performed

Ungroup to change
existing set of edges

Fillet operation performed

with new set of edges

The properties that can be changed from the Object Info palette include the thickness of a shell, direction of shelling
(inside/outside), the radius of a fillet or setback distance of a chamfer. In the case of variable radius fillets, the
percentage of length and radius value at each point can be edited. However, only the parameters of the topmost object
can be changed.
For example, if a shell is created, and then some of the shell edges are filleted, only the fillet parameters can be
changed directly from the Object Info palette. To change the shell thickness, the fillet object must first be ungrouped.
To change the original extrusion, both the fillet and the shell must be ungrouped. Once changes have been made,
reapply the shell and fillet.
The Modify > Edit Group command cannot be used for these objects.

Surface Geometry Requirements

Some surface geometry can contain degenerate patches, singularities, or self-intersections. These types of surfaces
could potentially be produced with the 3D Reshape tool, Loft Surface tool, or Create Surface from Curves command,
and can produce undesirable results in the finished model. Surface operations, such as trim and stitch surfaces, split,
and other operations, like creating contours and solid operations, may not be able to manipulate these types of
surfaces.
Decomposing such surfaces may help by separating the surfaces into NURBS surfaces without discontinuities.
See Decomposing Objects and Surfaces on page 435.

NURBS Surfaces |

361

NURBS Surfaces
Interpolated NURBS Surfaces
An interpolated surface is a NURBS surface that passes through a two-dimensional array of 3D interpolation points.
Regular NURBS surfaces are defined by their control points, which may not lie on the surface and can be difficult to
use for reshaping the surface (it is difficult to know how much the control point should be moved in order to reshape
the surface by a specific distance). Because interpolation points lie on the surface, it is much easier to modify these
points with the 3D Reshape tool or the Object Info palette, and have the surface pass through the points.
An interpolated surface can be created, or an existing untrimmed NURBS surface can be converted to an interpolated
surface, for easier reshaping.
When an interpolated surface is used in another operation, such as a Boolean operation or trimming, the surface
becomes a control point surface.

Creating an Interpolated Surface

A new interpolated NURBS surface can be created with the Create Interpolated Surface command.
To create an interpolated surface:
1. Select Model > 3D Power Pack > Create Interpolated Surface.
2. Click to define the start of the interpolation point row, and then click again to define the end of the row. Click a
third time to define the column of interpolation points.

The Create Interpolated Surface dialog box opens.

3. Specify the number of interpolation points and degree of flexibility to create for both the U and V direction.

362

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Parameter

Description

U Direction
Number of Points

Specifies the number of interpolation points (up to 1000) to create in the U direction;
this number must be greater than the U degree number

Degree

Indicates the flexibility of the surface in the U direction, from 1 to 28; a larger number
results in a more variable surface

V Direction
Number of Points

Specifies the number of interpolation points (up to 1000) to create in the V direction;
this number must be greater than the V degree number

Degree

Indicates the flexibility of the surface in the V direction, from 1 to 28; a larger number
results in a more variable surface

4. Click OK to create the interpolated surface. Select Show Vertices in the Object Info palette to display the
interpolation points. Use the 3D Reshape tool to reshape the interpolated NURBS surface.

Converting to an Interpolated Surface

An existing untrimmed NURBS surface can be converted to an interpolated NURBS surface for easier reshaping.
To convert an untrimmed NURBS surface to an interpolated surface:
1. Select an untrimmed NURBS surface.

NURBS Surfaces |

363

2. Select Model > 3D Power Pack > Create Interpolated Surface.

The Create Interpolated Surface dialog box opens, with a suggested number of interpolation points and degree
values for the conversion. These parameters can be changed (see Creating an Interpolated Surface on
page 361).

3. Click OK to create the interpolated surface. Select Show Vertices in the Object Info palette to display
interpolation points. Use the 3D Reshape tool to reshape the interpolated NURBS surface.

Creating a Loft Surface

The Loft Surface tool creates complex shapes from two or more NURBS curve cross sections with no rail, with a rail
and one or more cross sections, or with two rails and one cross section. A rail is a guide NURBS curve which
determines the resulting shape, in the one rail mode. In Birail Sweep mode, the rails do not need to intersect the cross
sections.
Three modes are available.
Loft With One Rail

Loft With No Rail

Birail Sweep

364

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Mode

Description

Loft With No Rail

Creates a loft surface using two or more NURBS curve cross sections

Loft With One Rail

Creates a loft surface using a NURBS curve rail and one or more NURBS curve cross sections

Birail Sweep

Creates a loft surface using two NURBS curve rails and one NURBS curve cross section

Similar to the Multiple Extrude command, the Loft Surface tool normally creates a 3D object (a generic solid) from a
series of other objects (in this case, NURBS curves). Unlike Multiple Extrude, the cross sections do not need to be
equally spaced, and the resulting profile can be manipulated to avoid self-intersection and to control twist.
This tool can potentially create surfaces which cannot be further manipulated in the 3D Power Pack. See Surface
Geometry Requirements on page 360.

Loft Surface Using No Rails

To create a loft surface from two or more NURBS curve cross sections:
1. Click the Loft Surface tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Loft With No Rail from the Tool bar.
2. Click on each cross section. The cursor changes into an arrowhead when over a valid cross section. The point
nearest to the click is selected.

The proposed curve alignment displays in red as each section is selected.

Cross sections are created using NURBS curves which do not need to be the same shape or planar. All NURBS
curves must be either closed or open objects, not a mixture of the two. 3D loci can be used in a loft, but must
display at the ends of the loft.
3. Once all curves are selected, press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) or click the check mark button on the
Tool bar.
The Loft Creation dialog box opens.

NURBS Surfaces |

365

4. Specify the desired loft creation settings.

Parameter

Description

Select Curve

Selects the previous or next cross section curve. Reverse changes the direction of
the curve to twist or untwist the loft surface.

Reverse

Click to reverse the curve direction

Select Alignment by Point

Selects the previous or next point on the selected cross-section curve. If the cross
section does not have any corners, this option is disabled.

Select Alignment by
Percentage

Selects points along a geometrically continuous cross section (such as a circle) by

a specified percentage, or by adjusting the slider

Ruled

Creates a linearly interpolated object

366

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Parameter

Description

Closed

Creates a loft surface that closes in on itself. Because the start point cannot be
selected as the end point of a loft, the Closed option automatically completes the
connection.

Cross section

Loft surface without

Closed option

Loft surface with

Closed option

Create Solid

Creates a solid loft surface with capped ends; deselect to create a group of NURBS
surfaces instead of a generic solid

Keep Curves

Retains the cross sections after the loft is created

Preview

Displays the proposed loft surfaces based on the current settings

5. Click OK to close the dialog box and create the loft surface(s).

Loft Surface Using One Rail

To create a loft surface using one NURBS curve rail:
1. Click the Loft Surface tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Loft With One Rail from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the rail, and then click on each cross section.

NURBS Surfaces |

367

Rail

3. Once all curves are selected, press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) or click the check mark button on the
Tool bar.
The Loft Creation dialog box opens.
4. Specify the desired loft creation settings (see Loft Surface Using No Rails on page 364).
5. Click OK to close the dialog box and create the loft surface(s).

The rail NURBS curve should intersect all cross-section curves if there is more than one curve.
When a single cross section is used, the curve is swept along the rail and the cross section does not need to
intersect the rail.

Loft Surface Using Two Rails

To create a loft surface using two NURBS curve rails:
1. Click the Loft Surface tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Birail Sweep from the Tool bar.

368

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

2. Click on each rail, and then click on the cross section. The cross-section profile curve does not need to intersect
the rail curves.
In this mode, only one cross section can be selected.

Rails

3. Once the profile curve is selected, press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) or click the check mark button
on the Tool bar.
The Loft Creation dialog box opens.
4. Specify the desired loft creation settings (see Loft Surface Using No Rails on page 364).
5. Click OK to close the dialog box and create the loft surface(s).

The loft surface is created differently depending on whether the profile curve is open or closed, and how the start/end
of the rails touch the profile curve. In certain instances, the click order (which rail is clicked first) and location (part of
the profile curve that is clicked) will produce a different loft surface.

NURBS Surfaces |
Status of Profile Curve and Rails

369

Effect of Rail Click Order/Profile Click Location

Open Profile Curve

Start/end of one of the rails touches the
start/end of the open profile

The rail click order and profile click location do not affect the loft
surface creation

Start/end of the rails do not touch the

start/end of the open profile, or do not
touch the open profile at all

Both the rail click order and the location where the profile is clicked
affect how the loft surface is created

Rails

Rails do not touch the open profile curve

Top rail clicked first, then bottom rail,

Top rail clicked first, then bottom rail,
and then the top of the profile curve and then the bottom of the profile curve
OR
OR
Bottom rail clicked first, then top rail,
Bottom rail clicked first, then top rail,
and then the bottom of the profile curve and then the top of the profile curve

Closed Profile Curve

Start/end of one of the rails touches the
closed profile curve

The click order and location do not affect the loft surface creation

Start/end of the rails do not touch the

closed profile at all

The click order affects how the loft surface is created

Rails

Rails do not touch the closed profile curve

Top rail clicked first, then bottom

rail, and then the profile curve

Bottom rail clicked first, then top

rail, and then the profile curve

Creating Surfaces from Curves

The Create Surface from Curves command creates a NURBS surface from a network of single closed curves (including
closed 2D objects) or two or more open NURBS curves. These NURBS curves can be planar or non-planar, but NURBS
in the U direction must intersect NURBS in the V direction at only one point.
This command can potentially create surfaces which cannot be further manipulated in the 3D Power Pack. See
Surface Geometry Requirements on page 360.
To create a NURBS surface from curves:
1. Draw two or more open NURBS curves to create an enclosed region.
2. Select the NURBS objects being used to create the NURBS surface.

370

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

3. Select Model > 3D Power Pack > Create Surface from Curves.
A NURBS surface is created with a red pen color.

Multiple open NURBS that form both boundary and interior curves can be used to create a NURBS surface, but
must have an equal number of intersections.
A NURBS surface is not created if there is more than one intersection created by the selected curves, creating multiple
enclosed regions. It is also not created if there is an intersection between selected curves in the same parametric
direction or if there are an unequal number of intersections.

Only one enclosed region allowed

Intersection between curves in the

same parametric direction

Unequal number of intersections

Creating a Drape Surface

Vectorworks can automatically create a rectangular, draped NURBS surface over an object, up to a specific Z plane
value. This is useful for creating surfaces that represent curtains or tablecloths.
To create a drape surface:
1. Select one or more objects to be draped.

2. Select Model > 3D Power Pack > Create Drape Surface.

The Create Drape Surface dialog box opens.

NURBS Surfaces |

Parameter

Description

Number of
Points

Specifies the number of control points on the drape surface; the greater the number of
points, the closer the drape surface is to the object

U Direction

Enter the number of points to create in the U direction; this number must be at least 3

V Direction

Enter the number of points to create in the V direction; this number must be at least 3

Plane Z Value

371

Specify the base level of the drape surface (how far down the bottom of the drape goes),
which must be less than the highest Z coordinate of the object

3. Click OK to create the drape surface.

Creating a Fillet Surface

The Create Fillet Surface command creates a surface between two selected surfaces, trimming the original surfaces by
default.
This command is useful for sheet metal design (for example, for car bodies) to provide a smooth transition between
two adjacent surfacesperhaps for aesthetic quality or because of a manufacturing requirement.
To create a fillet surface at the intersection of two selected NURBS surfaces:
1. Select two NURBS surfaces. The position of the fillet surface depends on the normal of the NURBS surfaces;
select Show Normal in the Object Info palette to display the surface normals (see Displaying Surface Normals
on page 359).

372

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

2. Select Model > 3D Power Pack > Create Fillet Surface.

The Fillet Surface Preferences dialog box opens. Enter the desired Fillet Radius, and then select the trim and
cross section type for the fillet.
The following trim type examples use a circular cross section type, and the cross section examples use an edge
tangency trim type. The original surfaces are trimmed.

Parameter

Description

Fillet Radius

Specifies the radius of the fillet surface

Trim Type

NURBS Surfaces |
Parameter

Description

Edge Tangency

Creates a blend between the minimal and maximal intersections on each end of the fillet

Minimal

Trims the fillet surface to the minimal intersecting areas on the face boundaries

Maximal

Trims the fillet surface to the maximal intersecting areas on the face boundaries

373

374

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Parameter
None

Description
Generates the entire fillet without trimming the fillet surface

Cross Section Type

Circular

Creates a fillet surface with a circular cross section

Linear

Creates a fillet surface with a linear cross section

NURBS Surfaces |
Parameter

Description

Tangent
Continuous
Blend

Creates a fillet surface with a tangent continuous G1 cross section

Curvature
Continuous
Blend

Creates a fillet surface with a curvature continuous G2 cross section

Trim Original
Surfaces

375

Creates a fillet surface and trims the original surfaces where they connect to the fillet surface

Trim Original Surfaces selected

Trim Original Surfaces deselected

3. Click OK.
A NURBS fillet surface is created between the two objects.
The position of the fillet surface depends on the surface normals. The fillet is created differently if the Reverse
Normal button is clicked for one or both of the surfaces in the Object Info palette.

376

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Fillet surface after reversing the

normal of the vertical surface

Creating Planar Caps

The Create Planar Caps command closes off the ends of open-ended solids by creating planar NURBS surfaces. These
surfaces can then be added to the rest of the surfaces with the Add Solids command.
To create planar caps:
1. Select the open-ended solid.

2. Select Model > 3D Power Pack > Create Planar Caps.

Planar NURBS surfaces are created to close off the ends of the solid.

Planar caps moved for clarity

3. Add the solid and the planar cap surfaces by selecting them all and choosing Model > Add Solids.

Creating a NURBS Surface by Revolving a Profile Along a Rail

Complex NURBS surfaces can be created by revolving a profile along a guide curve (rail). This is an alternate, and
sometimes easier, method of creating NURBS surfaces than using the Loft Surface tool, especially when creating
tent-like structures.
The Revolve with Rail command creates the NURBS surface by revolving a planar NURBS curve about an axis. The
revolution is guided by a rail curve on a plane perpendicular to the plane containing the profile curve and axis.

NURBS Surfaces |

377

profile

axis

rail

To create a NURBS surface with profile and rail:

1. Create the axis, rail and profile out of NURBS curves.
Conditions must meet the following requirements:

The axis must be a linear NURBS curve

The profile must be a planar NURBS curve
The profile cannot intersect the axis, though it can touch
The axis must lie on the same plane as the profile
The rail must be a planar NURBS curve that lies on a plane perpendicular to the plane containing the axis and
profile

2. Select Model > 3D Power Pack > Revolve with Rail. Select, in order, the axis, profile, and rail.

Click 3

Click 1

Click 2

3. The NURBS surfaces are automatically created.

378

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

The rail defines the extent of the revolution. An open rail curve generates surfaces until the rail ends.

NURBS Surface Properties

The properties of a NURBS surface are displayed in the Object Info palette, where they can also be edited. NURBS
surfaces can also be reshaped with the 3D Reshape tool; see Reshaping 3D Objects on page 403 for more
information.

Parameter

Description

Move

Select Entire Object to edit all the vertices of the surface, Vertex Only to edit
only the selected vertex, U Vertices to edit all of the vertices in a row in the U
direction, and V Vertices to edit all of the vertices in a row in the V direction

Edit U/V

Scrolls through the vertices of the selected NURBS surface in either the U
parametric direction or V parametric direction

X, Y, Z / X,Y,Z

Depending on the selection in the Move list, displays the position of the current
surface or vertex; edit the values to change the surface/vertex position

U Degree/ V Degree

A NURBS surface is defined mathematically by two parameters, U and V, which

increase or decrease along certain directions called the U and V parametric
directions. The two directions are perpendicular to each other.
Increasing the U or V Degree value adds vertices in that parametric direction; the
vertices can then be manipulated

Extracting Geometry |

379

Parameter

Description

V Degree

Degree in the V parametric direction; increasing this value adds vertices that can
then be manipulated

Weight

NURBS curves and surfaces are represented mathematically by weighted control

points. The weight value can be anywhere between .01 and 100. A weight above
1 pulls the curve or surface toward the control point; a weight below 1 has the
reverse effect.

Reverse Normal

Flips the surface normal direction

Untrim

Creates a NURBS surface, if the surface has been trimmed

NURBS Surface parameters

(display only)

Displays the NURBS surface parameters

Show Vertices

Select to display the surfaces vertices

Show Normal

Displays the surface normal as a red arrow for the selected NURBS surface

Extracting Geometry
The Extract tool can be used to extract geometry from the edge or surface of a NURBS surface or solid object, leaving
the original unmodified. The extracted geometry can then be used for snapping or for other surface operations.
Extract Curve

Extract Surface

Extract Preferences

Extract Point

Extract Iso-parametric Curve

Mode

Description

Extract Point

Extracts 3D loci from the edges of a NURBS surface or solid object. 3D loci are
placed at the start, end, and mid-points of the selected edges. For circular
edges, a 3D locus is created at the circle center as well.

Extract Curve

Extracts a NURBS curve from the edge of a solid object

Extract Iso-parametric Curve

Extracts an iso-parametric curve from the surface of a solid object

Extract Surface

Extracts a NURBS surface from the face of a solid

Extract Preferences

Provides options for extracting tangent entities, faces, or all entities; the
specific items extracted depends on which mode is selected. These options
have no effect in Extract Iso-parametric Curve mode.

To extract geometry from the edge or surface of a NURBS surface or solid object:
1. In the desired view, click the Extract tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select the desired mode from
the Tool bar.

380

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

2. If Extract Iso-parametric Curve mode was selected, skip to step 4. For all other modes, click Extract Preferences
from the Tool bar.
The Extract Preferences dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Select Tangent Entities

In Extract Point or Extract Curve mode, extracts loci or curves from

tangentially connected edges of the selected object; in Extract Surface mode,
extracts surfaces from tangentially connected faces of the selected object

Select Faces

In Extract Point or Extract Curve mode, extracts loci or curves from all edges of
the selected face(s)

Select All Entities

In Extract Point or Extract Curve mode, extracts loci or curves from all edges of
the selected object; in Extract Surface mode, extracts surfaces from all faces of
the selected object

3. Specify the desired preferences and click OK.

4. Select the edge(s) or surface(s) from which geometry will be extracted. To select multiple edges or surfaces, hold
the Shift key while selecting.
See Selecting the Edges and Faces of a Solid on page 357 for information on selecting surfaces.
5. Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) or click the check mark button on the Tool bar to extract the 3D
loci, curves, or surfaces.
The extracted entities display in red, because they are automatically placed in either the RedCurves or
RedSurfaces class.
To edit extracted groups, select Modify > Ungroup.

In Extract Iso-parametric Curve mode,

click the hemisphere surface to select curves

Extracted curves moved for clarity

NURBS Surface-curve Interaction |

In Extract Surface mode, with the Select Tangent

Entities preference selected, click an interior
surface to select all tangent interior surfaces

381

Extracted surfaces moved for clarity

NURBS Surface-curve Interaction

Analyzing NURBS Curves and Surfaces
The Analysis tool provides proximity, intersection, and curvature information for NURBS curves and surfaces.
Two modes are available.
Proximity

Interrogation

Mode

Description

Proximity

Determines the minimum distance between NURBS curves/surfaces and 3D loci, or the
intersection between NURBS curves/surfaces

Interrogation

Interactively determines the curvature of NURBS curves and surfaces and displays curvature
parameters

Determining NURBS Curve and Surface Proximity

In Proximity mode, the Analysis tool places a 3D locus at the minimum distance or intersection between two NURBS
curves, a NURBS curve and NURBS surface, and a 3D locus and NURBS curve or surface. The tool places a NURBS
curve at the intersection of two NURBS surfaces.
To analyze NURBS proximity or intersection:
1. Click the Analysis tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Proximity from the Tool bar.
2. Click on a NURBS curve, NURBS surface, or 3D locus, and then click on another NURBS curve or surface.

382

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

A red 3D locus is placed on each NURBS curve at the closest minimum distance or intersecting points between
the two items, or a NURBS curve is placed at the intersection of two NURBS surfaces.

NURBS curve

Locus points placed at each intersection

between a NURBS curve and NURBS surface

Locus points placed at the

minimum distance from a 3D
locus point to both a NURBS
curve and a NURBS surface

NURBS curve placed at the

intersection of two NURBS surfaces

Determining NURBS Curvature

The Analysis tool, in Interrogation mode, provides curvature parameters for NURBS curves and NURBS surfaces,
and interactively displays curvature circles.

Analyzing NURBS Curves

To determine the curvature of a NURBS curve:
1. Click the Analysis tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Interrogation from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the NURBS curve of interest and move the cursor along the curve to display the curvature circle at the
cursor position.

3. Click the curve to obtain curve properties at a specific location along the curve. The Curve Properties dialog box
opens, displaying curvature parameters for that location.

NURBS Surface-curve Interaction |

383

4. Select Locus at center of curvature and click OK to place a 3D locus and curvature circle, as well as a 3D locus at
the center of curvature of that location.

Analyzing NURBS Surfaces

To determine the curvature of a NURBS surface:
1. Click the Analysis tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Interrogation from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the NURBS surface of interest and move the cursor along the surface to display the curvature circles at
the cursor position.

3. To obtain surface properties at a specific location along the surface, click. The Surface Properties dialog box
opens, displaying curvature parameters for that location.

384

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

4. Select Loci at centers of curvature and click OK to place a 3D locus at the point on the surface where the
curvature parameters are being calculated, and a curvature circle with a 3D locus at the center of the curvature
circle for each curve at that location.

Rebuilding NURBS Curves and Surfaces

The number of vertices in one or more selected NURBS curves or untrimmed surfaces can be changed with the
Rebuild NURBS command. Reducing vertices simplifies the geometry, making it easier to manipulate, and increases
the speed and ease-of-use for other objects that are based upon it.
To rebuild NURBS a curve or surface:
1. Select the NURBS curve(s) or surface(s).
2. Select Model > 3D Power Pack > Rebuild NURBS.
The Rebuild NURBS dialog box opens. Enter the number of points to use; specifying fewer points simplifies the
NURBS curve or surface, but increases the difference between the original geometry and the rebuilt geometry.

NURBS Surface-curve Interaction |

Parameter

Description

Number of Points

Specifies the number of points to use; for a NURBS curve, enter the number of points,
which must be at least 3

U Direction

For a NURBS surface, enter the number of points to use along the U direction; this
number must be at least 3

V Direction

For a NURBS surface, enter the number of points to use along the V direction; this
number must be at least 3

Keep Original

Retains the original curve or surface, and adds a new, rebuilt curve or surface

Maximum Deviation

After clicking Preview, displays the maximum deviation between the original and
rebuilt surface or curve

Preview

Displays a red preview of the new, rebuilt curve or surface

385

3. Click OK to rebuild the NURBS curve(s) or surface(s).

Splitting or Trimming NURBS Surfaces

The Project tool projects a 2D object or NURBS curve onto a NURBS surface, and then splits the NURBS surface or
trims the NURBS surface according to the region selected. This allows nonlinear splitting or trimming of surfaces to
create different shapes or cut a hole in an object.

386

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Project
and Trim

Project and
Add Upward

Project and Add

Both Directions

Project
and Split

Project
and Add

Project and Add

Downward

Mode

Description

Project and Split

Splits a NURBS surface with a projection

Project and Trim

Trims a NURBS surface with a projection

Project and Add

Adds a projection to a NURBS surface

Project and Add Upward

In Project and Add mode, adds the projection in the profile plane
normal direction

Project and Add Downward

In Project and Add mode, adds the projection in the opposite direction
from the profile plane normal direction

Project and Add Both Directions

In Project and Add mode, adds the projection in both the profile plane
normal direction and the opposite direction

Project and Split

To split a NURBS surface with a projection:
1. In the desired view, draw a 2D object or NURBS curve on top of a NURBS surface.

If the object to be projected is an open NURBS curve or open 2D object, both end points must be outside the
NURBS surface.
2. Click the Project tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Project and Split from the Tool bar.
3. Click on the splitting object, and then click on the NURBS surface.

NURBS Surface-curve Interaction |

387

Objects ungrouped and

separated for clarity

The splitting object is projected onto the NURBS surface, resulting in a group of NURBS surfaces.

Project and Trim

To trim a NURBS surface with a projection:
1. In the desired view, draw a 2D object or NURBS curve on top of a NURBS surface.

If the object to be projected is an open NURBS curve or an open 2D object, both end points must be outside the
NURBS surface.
2. Click the Project tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Project and Trim from the Tool bar.
3. Click on the trimming object, and then click on the NURBS surface. The cursor changes into the pointing hand
cursor. Click on the side of the intersection to be trimmed away.

Select the project and

trimming object

Select the NURBS surface

Select the region to be

trimmed

The trimming object is projected onto the NURBS surface, and the region selected to be trimmed away is
removed from the NURBS surface at the point of intersection.

388

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Project and Add

To add a projection to a NURBS surface:
1. In the desired view, draw a 2D object or NURBS curve on top of a NURBS surface.

The 2D object or NURBS curve must be closed and planar.

2. Click the Project tool from the 3D Modeling tool set.
3. Select Project and Add from the Tool bar. Select the appropriate direction mode so that the projection direction
intersects the NURBS surface (Project and Add Upward, Project and Add Downward, or Project and Add Both
Directions).
The projection direction must intersect with the NURBS surface, or no projection is created.
4. Click on the object to add; the projection direction is indicated by a red arrow. Click on the NURBS surface.

The objects projection is added to the NURBS surface at the point of intersection, creating a generic solid.

NURBS Surface-curve Interaction |

389

Creating a Rib
The Project and Add mode of the Project tool can be used to create ribs.
To create a rib:
1. In the desired view, draw a 2D object or NURBS curve on top of a solid.

The 2D object or NURBS curve must be closed and planar.

2. Click the Project tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Project and Add from the Tool bar.
3. Select the appropriate projection direction mode.
4. Click on the object to add, and then click on the solid.

The rib profile is projected until it meets the next surface it encounters. The profile is trimmed at the extremities
automatically.

Extending NURBS Curves and Surfaces

NURBS curves and surfaces can be extended by a specified distance with the Extend NURBS command.

390

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Closed NURBS curves and trimmed NURBS surfaces cannot be extended. In addition, a NURBS surface cannot
be extended in the direction (U or V) that it is closed.

To extend a NURBS curve or surface:

1. Select the NURBS curve or surface to extend.
2. Select Model > 3D Power Pack > Extend NURBS.
The Extend NURBS dialog box opens. Select the end point (for NURBS curves) or edge (for NURBS surfaces) to
extend. On the drawing, the selected edge or end point is displayed in red. Select the type of extension to make
and specify the extension distance.

Parameter

Description

Select End Point/Edge

Click the arrows to select the end point or edge to extend. The selected end point or
edge is displayed in red on the drawing.

Linear Extension

Extends the edge or end point tangentially

Smooth Extension

Extends the edge or end point by continuing the current curvature

Distance

Specifies the extension distance

Preview

Click to see a preview of the extension in red

Linear Extension

Smooth Extension

Creating Helix-Spirals |

391

3. Click Preview to check the extension, and then click OK to extend the NURBS curve or surface.

Linear Extension

Smooth Extension

Creating Helix-Spirals
The Create Helix-Spiral command creates a helix-shaped or spiral-shaped 3D object from one or more path objects.
The paths can be 2D objects or NURBS curves.
To create a helix or spiral:
1. Select the object(s) to use as the path.
2. Select Model > 3D Power Pack > Create Helix-Spiral.
The Helix-Spiral Creation dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Use Turns

Select to create a helix/spiral by a specified number of turns along the path

Turns
Use Pitch
Pitch
Start Radius

Enter the total number of turns to be created along the path

Select to create a helix/spiral by pitch
Enter the pitch value (the distance between successive turns)
Enter the radius of the perpendicular starting circle

392

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Parameter

Description

End Radius

Enter the radius of the perpendicular ending circle. To create a helix, enter a value
matching the start radius. To create a spiral, enter a different value.

Start Angle

Enter the starting point of the twist on the starting circle

Reverse Direction

Select to change the rotation direction of the helix/spiral from clockwise to

counter-clockwise or vice-versa

Flatten

Select to flatten the helix/spiral into a 2D spiral. Use Pitch is not available with this
option.

3. Click OK.
A helix or spiral is created.

Helix object

Spiral object

A helix or spiral object can be used, without further conversion, as a path object for the Extrude Along Path
command.
Ungrouping a helix-spiral object results in a NURBS curve.

Creating Contours
Contours are intersections of a solid or surface with a plane passing through the line specified with the Create
Contours tool. This tool creates contours at specified intervals, which can then be used to create a loft surface in order
to re-create a solid shape.
To create contours:
1. Click the Create Contours tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Preferences on the Tool bar to
specify the contour interval.

Solids Operations |

393

To create a single contour, specify a Contour Increment of zero.

2. Click and drag to indicate the position of the intersecting plane.
The contours, a group of NURBS curves, are drawn in red.

Solids Operations
Modifying Edges
The Chamfer Edge and Fillet Edge tools remove the sharp corners of a solid by modifying the shape of its edges. The
Chamfer Edge tool modifies the surface with a linear cross section while the Fillet Edge tool modifies the surface with
a circular cross section.
Edges are usually modified during the detailed design phase of a project. This may reduce the heat and/or stress
concentration in manufacturing and can provide a more realistic or aesthetic appearance to a model.

Modifying Edges by Chamfering

To chamfer the edges of a solid:
1. Click the Chamfer Edge tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Preferences on the Tool bar to
specify chamfer edge preferences.
The Chamfer Edge Preferences dialog box opens.

394

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Parameter

Description

Setback

Specify the distance by which the faces are set back

Select Tangent Entities

Choose this option to select tangentially connected edges and faces for chamfering

Select Faces

Choose this option to select faces for chamfering

Select All Edges

Selects all the edges of the solid for the chamfer operation

2. Click OK to close the Chamfer Edge Preferences dialog box.

3. For tangent entity selections, select the tangentially connected edges and faces to be modified. For face selections,
select the faces to be modified. Hold the Shift key down to select several faces and edges.
When Select All Edges is enabled, clicking on one of the highlighted edges selects all the edges for chamfering.
See Selecting the Edges and Faces of a Solid on page 357 for information on selecting edges and faces.
4. Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) or click the check mark button on the Tool bar to perform the edge
modification.

Before chamfering

After chamfering

Results rendered

The Setback value for the chamfered edge can be edited through the Object Info palette.
Once the modification is complete, the edge set used to create the modification cannot be changed. The modified
edge can be ungrouped, and a new modification with different edges can be created.
If one modification has been created over another, the first modification cannot be edited in the Object Info
palette unless the last one is ungrouped (see Editing a Fillet/Chamfer or Shell Object on page 360).
A chamfer edge operation may fail due to:
complex surface geometry adjacent to an edge or corner involved in the modification;
an attempt to modify one edge in a sequence of tangential edges (select all the edges for a better chance of
success); or
an attempt to modify without selecting all the edges at a vertex.

Solids Operations |

395

Reshaping Edges by Fillet

To fillet the edges of a solid:
1. Click the Fillet Edge tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Preferences on the Tool bar to specify
fillet edge preferences.
The Fillet Edge Preferences dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Select Tangent Entities

Choose this option to select tangentially connected edges and faces for filleting

Constant Radius

Create a filleted surface based on a constant radius

Radius

Indicate the radius of the fillet edge

Select Faces

Choose this option to select faces for filleting

Select All Edges

Selects all the edges of the solid for the fillet operation

Variable Radius

Create a filleted surface based on a variable radius

Length (%)

Enter the length up to the point as a percentage of the total edge length (for example, 50)

Radius

Enter the radius value at the corresponding percentage of length value (for example, 1)

Set

Click to add a length/radius pair or modify the currently selected pair

Delete

Click to delete the selected length/radius value

Reverse

Reverses the order of the radius values; the radius values that were at the shortest
percentage length are switched to the longest percentage length, and vice versa

2. Click OK to close the Fillet Edge Preferences dialog box.

396

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

3. For tangent entity selections, select the tangentially connected edges and faces to be modified. For face selections,
select the faces to be modified. Hold the Shift key down to select several faces and edges.
When Select All Edges is enabled, clicking on one of the highlighted edges selects all the edges for filleting.
See Selecting the Edges and Faces of a Solid on page 357 for information on selecting edges and faces.
4. Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) or click the check mark button on the Tool bar to perform the edge
modification.

Before filleting

After filleting with a constant radius

Results rendered

Before filleting

After filleting with a variable radius

Results rendered

The Radius value for the filleted edge can be edited through the Object Info palette. For the fillet by variable radius,
press the Edit arrow buttons to highlight each point along the edge for editing.
Once the modification is complete, the edge set used to create the modification cannot be changed. The modified
edge can be ungrouped, and a new modification with different edges can be created.
If one modification has been created over another, the first modification cannot be edited in the Object Info
palette unless both are first ungrouped (see Editing a Fillet/Chamfer or Shell Object on page 360).
A fillet edge operation may fail due to:
complex surface geometry adjacent to an edge or corner involved in the modification;
a radius value that is too large;
an attempt to modify one edge in a sequence of tangential edges (select all the edges for a better chance of
success); or
an attempt to modify without selecting all the edges in a vertex.

Solids Operations |

397

Creating a Shell from Solids and NURBS Surfaces

The Shell Solid tool creates a hollow shell from a solid object or NURBS surface. The shell can be created outside or
inside the solid; for NURBS surfaces, it gives the object a thickness. Most injection-molded plastic parts have a shell.

Shell from a Solid Object

To create a shell solid from a solid object:
1. Click Shell Solid from the 3D Modeling tool set.
2. Click on the face of the solid object where the shell will be created.

The Shell Solid Preferences dialog box opens. Specify the shell settings.

Parameter

Description

Shell
Inside

Creates an interior shell

Outside

Creates an exterior shell

Thickness

Enter the thickness of the shell wall

Select Tangent Faces

Selects the tangentially connected chain of faces

Click Shell Solid Preferences on the Tool bar to edit the settings.
3. Click OK.
The selected face of the object is highlighted in red.

398

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

If the wrong face is highlighted, select the correct face before pressing Enter.

4. Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh), or click the check mark button on the Tool bar, to create the shell.

Shell from a NURBS Surface

To create a shell solid from a NURBS surface:
1. Click Shell Solid from the 3D Modeling tool set.
2. Click on the NURBS surface to thicken.

The Shell Solid Preferences dialog box opens.

3. Specify the desired shell settings as described in Shell from a Solid Object on page 397.
Click Shell Solid Preferences on the Tool bar to edit the settings.
4. Click OK.
The selected face of the object is highlighted in red.
5. Press Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh), or click the check mark button on the Tool bar, to create the shell.

Solids Operations |

399

Stitching and Trimming Surfaces

The Stitch and Trim Surfaces command creates a generic solid from several intersecting surfaces (including NURBS
surfaces or solids such as extrudes or sweeps).
This command may not be able to manipulate certain types of surface geometry. See Surface Geometry
Requirements on page 360.
To stitch and trim intersecting surfaces:
1. Select the intersecting surfaces.

The surfaces must enclose a volume.

2. Select Model > 3D Power Pack > Stitch and Trim Surfaces.
The surfaces enclosing the volume are stitched together and then trimmed, resulting in a generic solid.

Creating Protrusions and Cutouts

The Protrusion/Cutout tool interactively creates bosses (protrusions) or cutouts on solids by adding or subtracting
volume from a solid. The volume is created or subtracted by extruding a face in Extrude Face mode or extruding a
planar NURBS curve (or group of closed, non-intersecting NURBS curves) in Extrude Curve mode.
Five modes are available. The first three modes set the type of operation and the second two determine whether an
addition or subtraction of volume occurs.
Extrude Face

Extrude Curve

Move Face

Add

Subtract

400

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Mode

Description

Extrude Face

Selects the planar face of a solid to add to or subtract volume from the solid,
creating perpendicular faces

Move Face

Extends the planar face of a solid, adding or subtracting the face along with any
geometry present on the face

Extrude Curve

Selects a curve or group of curves to add to or subtract volume from a solid

Add

Creates a protrusion by adding volume to the solid

Subtract

Creates a cutout by subtracting volume from the solid

Face-based Addition or Subtraction

The Extrude Face mode creates perpendicular faces as volume is added or subtracted.
To add to or subtract from a solid in Extrude Face mode:
1. Click the Protrusion/Cutout tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Extrude Face from the Tool bar.
2. Select either Add or Subtract from the Tool bar to specify whether to add or subtract volume from the solid.
3. Click on the desired planar face. The Select Face dialog box opens to help select the correct face, as described in
Selecting the Edges and Faces of a Solid on page 357. When the correct face is selected, click OK.
4. A grab handle is displayed on the face. Click on the handle and drag to expand (Add mode) or decrease
(Subtract mode) the solid volume. The distance of the protrusion or cutout can also be specified by entering a
value in the Distance field on the Tool bar or floating data bar. The new solid is previewed on the drawing.

5. Press the Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) key or click the check mark button on the Tool bar to create the
protrusion or cutout solid.

Moving the Face of a Solid

The Move Face mode extends the face of a solid, extruding the surrounding or adjacent geometry as the face moves.
To move the face of a solid in Move Face mode:
1. Click the Protrusion/Cutout tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Move Face from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the desired planar face. The Select Face dialog box opens to help select the correct face, as described in
Selecting the Edges and Faces of a Solid on page 357. When the correct face is selected, click OK.

Solids Operations |

401

3. A grab handle is displayed on the face. Click on the handle and drag to extend the face and its geometry. The
distance can also be specified by entering a value in the Distance field on the Tool bar or floating data bar. The
new solid is previewed on the drawing.
4. Press the Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) key or click the check mark button on the Tool bar to create the
protrusion or cutout solid.

Curve-based Addition or Subtraction

To add or subtract from a solid in Extract Curve mode:
1. Click the Protrusion/Cutout tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Extract Curve from the Tool bar.
2. Select either Add or Subtract from the Tool bar to specify whether the solid will have volume added or
subtracted.
3. Select the NURBS curve or group of NURBS curves that will be used to create the protrusion or cutout, and then
select the solid.
4. A grab handle is displayed on the solid face. When an open NURBS curve is coplanar with the solid face and also
splits the face of the solid, a grab handle is displayed for each split section, and each handle can be moved
individually. Click on the handle and drag to expand (Add mode) or decrease (Subtract mode) the solid volume.
The distance of the protrusion or cutout can also be specified by entering a value in the Distance field on the Tool
bar or floating data bar. The new solid is previewed on the drawing.
In Subtract mode, the distance value can exceed the solid perimeter; the cutout operation is only performed on
the selected solid.

Single grab handle on solid face

402

| Chapter 10: Advanced 3D Modeling

Grab handle for each coplanar face

5. Press the Enter (Windows) or Return (Macintosh) key or click the check mark button on the Tool bar to create the
protrusion or cutout solid.

Converting to Generic Solids

Solid objects created using such commands as Add Solid, Subtract Solid, and tools such as Fillet/Chamfer Edge and
Shell Solid, contain a history composed of the original elements used to make the new object. This also includes any
editing performed with other solids operations. The Convert to Generic Solids command removes this history from
the solid objects, reducing the file size (though the object is no longer editable).
For example, use this command on a copy of the final drawing to reduce file size when sending a file to a print bureau.
To convert an object into a generic solid:
1. Select the solid object(s) to convert.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to Generic Solids.
3. A warning dialog box opens. Click OK to convert the object(s).
The object is converted.
If objects are selected that cannot be converted, a dialog box opens stating that these objects have been
deselected.

Editing 3D Objects

11

While 3D objects can often be edited using many of the same tools available for editing 2D objects, Vectorworks also
contains tools specifically tailored to 3D object editing.

Obtaining Volumetric Properties

The volumetric properties of a 3D object can be obtained with the Volumetric Properties command.
To obtain the volumetric properties of a 3D object:
1. Select the 3D object.
2. Select Model > Volumetric Properties.
The Volumetric Properties dialog box opens, displaying the surface area, volume, and center of mass of the
object.

Parameter

Description

Place locus at center of mass

Places a 3D locus at the center of mass of the object

Place properties on drawing

Places the volumetric properties as text on the drawing at a specified location

3. Click OK. If Place locus at center of mass was selected, the 3D locus is placed automatically on the object. If
Place properties on drawing was selected, click in the drawing file to specify the location of the text.

Reshaping 3D Objects
The 3D Reshape tool changes the height and radius of an extruded object, tapered extrude, or a 3D object that is not a
mesh object. In addition, use it to reshape walls (see Editing Walls on page 557), 3D polygons, and solid primitives
(such as cylinders, hemispheres, cones, and spheres), change the angle (rise/run) of roofs created with the Roof Face
command, and reshape roof objects created with the Create Roof command (see Reshaping Roof Objects on
page 588).

Reshaping Extruded Objects and Solid Primitives

The 3D Reshape tool changes the height, and when applicable, the radius of extrudes, cylinders, spheres,
hemispheres, and cones, and the height and angle of tapered extrudes.

404

| Chapter 11: Editing 3D Objects

To reshape an extrude, cylinder, sphere, hemisphere, cone, or tapered extrude:

1. Select the object to reshape.

2. Click the 3D Reshape tool from the 3D Modeling tool set.
A resize handle is added to both top and bottom of an extruded object. Multiple resize handles are added around
cylinder, sphere, hemisphere, and cone objects. For a tapered extrude object, one resize handle is added to its top
for changing its height, and one to the side for changing its taper angle.
Tapered extrudes with a taper angle of zero have an additional resize angle at the bottom.
3. Click and drag the resize handle to change the objects height, radius, or taper angle.
When the cursor is over a radius resize handle, the standard arrow cursor changes into a double-headed arrow. It
changes to an unfilled double-headed arrow over a height resize handle.
4. Click again when the object is at the desired height, radius, or angle.
Alternatively, press the Tab key and enter a numeric value for the height, radius, or angle in the Data bar.

With the 3D Reshape cursor, drag the resize

handle up (or down) to the desired extrude
height

Change the radius of a cylinder, sphere,

hemisphere, or cone by dragging the
resize handle to the desired radius

Change the angle of a tapered

extrude by dragging the side resize
handle to the desired angle

Reshaping NURBS Surfaces

The 3D Reshape tool, located on the 3D Modeling tool set, can be used to manipulate NURBS surface control points
and to reshape NURBS surfaces. For example, a dome or bell-curve effect can be created by manipulating the vertices.
This tool can potentially create surfaces which cannot be further manipulated in the 3D Power Pack. See Surface
Geometry Requirements on page 360.
To reshape a NURBS surface:
1. Select the NURBS surface to reshape.
2. Click the 3D Reshape tool from the 3D Modeling tool set.
Select the mode from the Tool bar.

Reshaping 3D Objects |
Move NURBS Surface
U Vertices

Working Plane
Constrain

Y Axis Constrain

Move NURBS Surface

Vertex

Z Axis Constrain

Move NURBS Surface

V Vertices

X Axis Constrain

Mode

Description

Move NURBS Surface Vertex

Changes the position of the selected vertex or vertices only

Move NURBS Surface U Vertices

Changes the position of all vertices in a row in the U direction

Move NURBS Surface V Vertices

Changes the position of all vertices in a row in the V direction

Working plane constrain

Moves the selected vertex or vertices on a working plane

X axis constrain

Moves the selected vertex or vertices along the X axis

Y axis constrain

Moves the selected vertex or vertices along the Y axis

Z axis constrain

Moves the selected vertex or vertices along the Z axis

To select one vertex or row of vertices, position the cursor over one of the NURBS surface vertices. When the
cursor is over a vertex, the standard arrow cursor changes to an unfilled, four-way arrow.

To select several vertices at one time, click with the Shift key pressed or click and drag to create a marquee
around the desired vertices.
If several vertices are selected, position the cursor over one of them.
3. Click-drag the mouse to move the vertex or vertices.
4. Release the mouse at the desired location.

405

406

| Chapter 11: Editing 3D Objects

Aligning and Distributing 3D Objects

3D objects can be aligned and/or distributed in relation to each other. 3D object alignment/distribution is based on
either the ground or working plane.
The Align/Distribute 3D command aligns and distributes multiple 3D objects. Alignment and distribution is based
upon the X, Y, and Z axes of the active layer plane or the X, Y, and Z axes of the working plane.
To align/distribute 3D objects:
1. Select the objects to be aligned/distributed.
2. Select Modify > Align > Align/Distribute 3D.
The 3D Object Align and Distribute dialog box opens.

3. Select the alignment/distribution criteria.

Parameter

Description

Alignment/
Distribution Axes

Select whether to align/distribute about the active layer plane or the working plane

Align/Distribute

Select Align and specify the coordinate value to use when aligning objects, or select
Distribute to distribute objects

Minimum

Align/distribute objects along the specified axis by the minimum coordinate value of
each object

Center

Align/distribute objects along the specified axis by the center coordinate value of each
object

Maximum

Align/distribute objects along the specified axis by the maximum coordinate value of
each object

Spacing

Distribute spacing between objects along the specified axis, ensuring that the space
between the objects is equal along the axis

4. Click OK.
Vectorworks aligns/distributes the selected 3D objects.
3D loci and locked objects are special objects and behave differently when present during an alignment/
distribution operation.

Editing 3D Object Surfaces |

407

If a 3D locus point is one of the selected objects, all objects are aligned relative to that locus. If there are multiple
loci in the selection, then the loci are aligned/distributed like any other object.
Locked objects in a selection do not move. Other objects are aligned/distributed relative to the locked objects.
Selected 2D objects are ignored by the Align/Distribute 3D command.

Editing 3D Object Surfaces

The 3D editing commands are similar to the 2D Add or Clip Surface commands, but in a 3D environment. In 3D, the
editing commands are: Intersect Solids, Add Solids, Subtract Solids, and Section Solids.
Intersect Solids creates a single model from the volume created where two or more 3D objects intersect. Add Solids
joins two or more 3D objects into a single model. Subtract Solids cuts (subtracts) a 3D object(s) from another 3D object,
creating a new model. Section Solids discards a portion of solids or NURBS surfaces, allowing the creation of planar
or stepped sections through a solid or surface.
These commands work with the following solid objects: extrudes, multiple extrudes, straight walls, sweeps, meshes,
solid primitives (cylinders, hemispheres, spheres, and cones), and objects created using the 3D Polygon, Extruded
Polygon, and Extruded Rectangle tool, provided the following applicable conditions are met.

Object

Criteria

Sweeps

Cannot contain lines, or be swept around a locus which is between the left and right
bounds of the swept 2D primitive; if not swept around a locus, should have a vertical
segment on the left edge

Helical Sweep

Must be swept around a locus outside the left and right bounds of the object

Multiple Extrude

Must have planar polygons

Meshes

Cannot have interpenetrating polygons; every edge of every polygon in the mesh must be
shared with one other polygon

Walls

Must not have symbols that extend above the top or below the bottom of the wall

2D objects must have a fill applied prior to being converted to 3D to be considered a solid object. If the converted
3D object did not have a fill applied prior to conversion, it can be added using the Enter Group command to
return to the original 2D object.

Adding Solids
The Add Solids command joins two or more 3D objects into a single model.
To add solids in 3D:
1. Select two or more 3D objects to combine.
2. Select Model > Add Solids.
Vectorworks creates a single solid model from the object.

408

| Chapter 11: Editing 3D Objects

Intersecting Solids
The Intersect Solids command creates a single model from the volume created where two or more 3D objects
intersect.
To intersect solids:
1. Select the two or more 3D objects to combine.
2. Select Model > Intersect Solids.
Vectorworks creates a single solid model from the objects; it is the size and shape of the overlapping volume of
the selected objects.

Subtracting Solids
The Subtract Solids command cuts (subtracts) one or more 3D objects from another 3D object, creating a new model.
The subtracting object should extend beyond the surface of the original object.
To subtract solids:
1. Select both the object(s) to subtract and the object to subtract from (the base object).
2. Select Model > Subtract Solids.
A dialog box opens.
3. Select the desired object to subtract.
Use the forward and back arrows to select the base object, which is shown with a thick outline.
4. Click OK.
Vectorworks creates a single solid model with the selected object subtracted.

Editing 3D Object Surfaces |

409

Sectioning Solids
The Section Solids command discards a portion of solids or NURBS surfaces, allowing the creation of planar or
stepped sections through a solid or surface. The sectioned surface can be marked by the sectioning surface color.
To section a solid:
1. Select the solid or surface to be sectioned, along with the sectioning surface. The sectioned surface selection
depends on the normal of the NURBS surfaces; select Show Normal in the Object Info palette to display the
surface normals (see Displaying Surface Normals on page 359).

2. Select Model > Section Solids. In the Select Object dialog box, specify which object is to be used as the sectioning
surface. By default, the most recently created object is highlighted, but a different object can be selected by
clicking the arrows.

The sectioning surface is

highlighted (select it with the
arrows in the dialog box)

The sectioning surface must be larger than the solid being sectioned.
3. When the desired sectioning surface is selected, click OK.
The solid is sectioned by the sectioning surface. The remaining object becomes a solid section.

410

| Chapter 11: Editing 3D Objects

The solid section parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter

Description

Width/Depth/Height (display only)

Displays the parameters of the solid section surface

Reverse Section Side

Switches the remaining side of the solid being sectioned

Use Section Color

Applies the color of the sectioning surface to the sectioned surface

Scaling Solids Asymmetrically

Solids can be scaled asymmetrically, through both the Scale Objects command (see Scaling Objects on page 318) and
the Object Info palette. The internal components of the solid do not change, and the solid can still be edited after the
scaling operation.
In the Object Info palette, enter a scale factor in the X Scale, Y Scale, or Z Scale field to scale the selected solid along the
specified axis.

X axis

Y axis

Select a solid object

Change the Object Info

palette settings to scale
the solid

A selected solid can also be scaled asymmetrically by selecting the Modify > Scale Objects command and entering an
Asymmetric scale factor. However, the current view must be aligned with the solids matrix for scaling to occur.

Convert to Mesh
The Convert to Mesh command converts any extrude, multiple extrude, sweep, or wireframe object into a mesh
object. Use the Object Info palette to edit the mesh object vertice(s). The command can also collect a number of separate
3D polygons into a single mesh object.
To convert to mesh:
1. Select the 3D object to convert.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to Mesh.
The object changes to a mesh object. To edit the mesh, select Modify > Edit Group and edit the 3D polygons that
make up the mesh.

Common Functions and Utilities

12

Vectorworks provides several tools to perform editing functions that are common to both 2D and 3D objects. Also
provided are utilities for converting objects, compressing images, and tracing bitmap images.

Undoing and Redoing Actions

Specify preferences to control how many actions can be undone and redone in Vectorworks.

Undoing Actions
One or more of the most recent actions can be undone. Specify the number of actions that can be undone on the
Session tab of Vectorworks preferences. See Session Preferences on page 50 for information on this tab. The
maximum number of actions that can be undone is 100. Select Issue undo warnings to open a warning dialog box
when attempting to undo an action that cannot be undone.
To undo recent changes:
Select Edit > Undo.
The most recent change is undone. Continue to select the Undo command to undo changes in the reverse order
in which they were performed.
The higher the maximum number of undos, the more memory may be required.

Redoing Actions
Actions that have been undone can then be redone. The number of actions that can be redone is determined by how
many undos were performed.
To redo actions that were undone:
Select Edit > Redo.
The most recent undo is reversed and the action is executed again. Continuing to select the Redo command will
redo changes in the reverse order that they were undone.

Moving Objects
Objects can be moved in several ways.
Use the Move command (2D objects) or Move 3D command (3D objects) to move an object an exact distance.
Use the Move by Points tool to move, duplicate, and distribute both 2D and 3D objects by clicking.
Use the selection tools to select and drag objects to a new location.
Nudge selected objects one pixel at a time, or by the snap grid (see Setting Vectorworks Preferences on page 47
and Nudging Symbols in Walls on page 569).

Moving 2D Objects
For information about moving symbols in walls, see Moving Symbols in Walls with the Move Command on
page 570.

412

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

To move a 2D object with the Move command:

1. Select the object(s) to move.
2. Select Modify > Move > Move.
The Move Selection dialog box opens. Move the objects according to Cartesian or Polar coordinates.

Parameter

Description

Cartesian

Specify the distance to move the object; for Cartesian coordinates, select Cartesian and enter
the X and Y Offset distances

Polar

Specify the distance to move the object; for Polar coordinates, select Polar and enter the
Distance and Angle

3. Click OK.
The object is moved according to the criteria specified.

Moving 3D Objects
To move a 3D object with the Move 3D command:
1. Select the object(s) to move.
2. Select Modify > Move > Move 3D.
The Move 3D Selection dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Cartesian

Select the X, Y, Z (Cartesian) coordinate system

Moving Objects |
Parameter
X, Y, Z Offset
Working Plane
X, Y, Z Offset

413

Description
For Cartesian coordinates, specify the distance to move the object
Select the X, Y, Z (working plane) coordinate system
For working plane coordinates, specify the distance to move the object

3. Click OK. The object is moved according to the criteria specified.

Moving Objects by Clicking

Both 2D and 3D objects can be moved, duplicated, and distributed along a specified distance by clicking with the
Move by Points tool. This tool also moves symbols within walls (see Moving Symbols in Walls with the Move by
Points Tool on page 570).
The Move by Points tool has three modes.
Distribute

Reference Point

Move

Preferences

Mode

Description

Move

Moves and duplicates selected objects according to the distance and direction specified by
two mouse clicks

Distribute

Moves and distributes duplicate objects between the points specified by two mouse clicks

Reference Point

Moves selected objects according to a clicked reference point and a specified offset distance
from that point; the Preferences settings are not applicable when this mode is selected

Moving Objects with the Move or Distribute Mode

To move, duplicate, and distribute selected objects:
1. Select the object(s) to move and/or duplicate.
2. Click the Move by Points tool from the Basic palette and click Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Move by Points Settings dialog box opens. Select the settings and click OK.

414

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

Parameter

Description

Number of Duplicates

Specifies the number of copies of the original object(s) to create (must be at least one)

Original Object
Retain

Keeps the original object(s); the Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) key also retains the
original while using the tool

Leave Selected

Keeps the original object(s) selected for further action

To select additional objects or to change the currently selected objects to move, duplicate, or distribute, press and
hold the Alt key (Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking or click-dragging the mouse around
them to marquee select them; the 2D Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the Alt or Cmd is
being pressed.
3. Select either the Move or Distribute mode, depending on the desired outcome.

Mode

Number of
Duplicates

Original Object
Retained

Result

Move or
Distribute

No

Moves the original object(s) to the location specified by clicking

Move or
Distribute

Yes

Creates one duplicate of the original object(s), placed at the location

indicated by clicking

Move

>1

No

Moves the original object(s), placing the original at the location

specified by the first click, and placing the duplicates the same distance
apart from each other along the vector created by the two click points

Move

>1

Yes

Creates duplicates of the original object(s), placing the first duplicate at

the location specified by the second click, and placing additional
duplicates the same distance apart from each other along the vector
created by the two click points

Distribute

>1

No

Moves the original object(s), placing the original at the location

specified by the first click, and distributing the duplicates between the
two click points, and along the vector created by the two points

Moving Objects |

415

Mode

Number of
Duplicates

Original Object
Retained

Result

Distribute

>1

Yes

Creates duplicates of the original object(s), distributing the duplicates

between the two click points, and along the vector created by the two
points

4. Click once (anywhere on the drawing) to indicate the vector start point, and click again to indicate the vector end
point. Duplicates are placed in the vector direction, at the distance specified by the click points, along the line
defined by the click points.
Move mode,
two duplicates,
retain original

1st click

Distribute mode,
two duplicates,
retain original

1st click

2nd click

2nd click

Moving Objects with the Reference Point Mode

Reference Point mode can work two ways; the first click can either indicate the object to be moved or the reference
point from which the object will be offset.
To move selected objects using a reference point:
1. Select the object(s) to move.
2. Click the Move by Points tool from the Basic palette.
To select additional objects or to change the currently selected objects to move, duplicate, or distribute, press and
hold the Alt key (Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking or click-dragging the mouse around
them to marquee select them; the 2D Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the Alt or Cmd is
being pressed.
3. Select the Reference Point mode from the Tool bar.
4. Click to indicate either the reference point, or a point on the selected object.
The Enter Offset dialog box opens.

416

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

5. The current Offset distance between the two click points displays. Enter the desired distance.
6. Select whether the first click made was the reference point or a point on the object to be moved.
7. Click OK. The selected object is moved as specified, along the line defined by the click points.
8. The setting for how the first click is interpreted remains set until it is changed.

Click the point from which to

offset the selected object,
click the object, and then
enter the offset distance

2nd click

1st click

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects

Cutting Objects
The Cut command removes an object from the drawing, temporarily storing the object in the clipboard.
To cut an object:
1. Select the 2D/3D object(s) to remove.
2. Select Edit > Cut.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the object, and select Cut from the object context
menu.
The object is moved from the drawing to the clipboard.

Copying Objects
The Copy command copies an object to the clipboard, where it is temporarily stored. The original object remains on
the drawing.

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Objects |

417

To copy an object:
1. Select the 2D/3D object(s) to copy.
2. Select Edit > Copy.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the object, and select Copy from the object
context menu.
Vectorworks places a copy of the object in the clipboard.

Pasting Objects
The Paste command places the clipboard object into the same drawing file, into another Vectorworks file, or into
another software programs file (if that program also has copy, cut, and paste commands). As long as Vectorworks
remains open while the object is in the clipboard, the object retains all its object information for pasting into
Vectorworks documents.
Some image quality can be lost when pasting into other programs.
To paste an object:
1. Open the file and layer where the object is to be added.
2. Select Edit > Paste.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the object, and select Paste from the object
context menu.
Vectorworks pastes the object centered on the location of the last mouse click, unless the last mouse click is
outside the current view. In that case, the object is pasted at the center of the drawing. When pasting a clipboard
object into a different Vectorworks file, Vectorworks automatically centers the object in the drawing area.
When a raster image is pasted into a Vectorworks file, it is automatically compressed to PNG format to reduce
the Vectorworks file size.

Paste as Picture
Like the Paste command, the Paste as Picture command places a copy of the clipboard contents in the active
Vectorworks drawing file. However, Vectorworks places the entire clipboard contents as a single object/picture.
Because the contents are now one item, individual objects (including symbols and text) can no longer be edited.
There are two advantages to using the Paste as Picture command. First, as a single item, the clipboard objects are more
quickly placed into the drawing file. In addition, the pasted objects retain any PostScript comments, as well as all other
embedded information.
To paste as a picture:
1. Open the file and layer where the object is to be added.
2. Select Edit > Paste as Picture.

Paste in Place
The Paste in Place command works exactly like the Paste command, except that the clipboard contents are pasted into
the active drawing at the same coordinates (relative to the layer origin) from which they were copied. When you paste
to a sheet layer, remember that each sheet layer has its own origin, which may be different from the origin of the layer
where the object was copied (see Set Origin on page 69 for details).

418

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

To paste in place:
1. Open the file and layer where the object is to be added.
2. Select Edit > Paste in Place.

Changing Object Stacking Order

As objects are drawn, Vectorworks keeps track of their stacking order within the design layer. The first object created is
at the back of the stack, and the most recent object created is at the front of the stack.
The send commands change the stacking order of objects within a layer. Objects can be sent forward to be in front of an
overlapping object or sent backward to be behind an overlapping object. Also, objects can be sent all the way to the
front or back of the stack in one step.
To change the stacking order of an object:
1. Select the object to restack.
2. Select Modify > Send. From the sub-menu, select the send method to use.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the object, and select Send from the object
context menu.

Method

Description

Send Forward

Sends the selected object toward the front of the stack, in front of the next object in the stack that
overlaps it; if no other object overlaps the selected object, the stacking order is not changed

Send Backward

Sends the selected object toward the back of the stack, behind the next object in the stack that
overlaps it; if no other object overlaps the selected object, the stacking order is not changed

Send to Front

Sends the selected object to the front of stack

Send to Back

Sends the selected object to the back of the stack

The objects stacking order is changed.

Removing Objects
Clearing Objects
The Clear command deletes any selected object or objects. It has the same effect as pressing the Delete key, meaning
that the object(s) are not stored on the clipboard. The only way to retrieve a cleared object is to select Undo. This
command provides an additional way of removing an object from the drawing without deleting the current contents
of the clipboard.

Removing Objects |

419

To clear an object from the drawing:

1. Select the object or objects to remove from the drawing.
2. Select Edit > Clear.

Purging Items from a File

The Purge command removes specified items from the drawing and reduces the file size. Unused layers, classes, and
resources, as well as objects outside of the page boundaries can be removed from the file.
To purge items from a file:
1. Select Tools > Purge.
The Purge dialog box opens. Each type of item that can be purged is listed, along with the number of items that
were found. Select the items to remove from the drawing file.

Element

Description

Unused Resources
Gradients

Deletes any unused gradient resources

Hatches

Deletes any unused hatch resource

Images

Deletes any unused image resources

Record Formats

Deletes any unused record format resources.

Also select Special Record Formats to delete unused record formats that
store plug-in object default values. An alert prompts you to confirm that the
default values should be deleted.

Renderworks Backgrounds
(Renderworks required)

Deletes any unused Renderworks background resources

Sketch Styles
(Design Series required)

Deletes any unused sketch style resources

420

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

Element
Symbols

Description
Deletes any unused symbol resources.
Also select Special Symbols to delete the resources for plug-in object
symbols and group symbols (those listed in red and blue in the Resource
Browser). This will not delete any associated plug-in or group objects that
have already been placed in the drawing. An alert prompts you to confirm
that the special symbol resources should be deleted.

Textures
(Renderworks required)

Deletes any unused texture resources

Wall Styles
(Vectorworks Architect or
Landmark required)

Deletes any unused wall style resources

All

Checked box: All attributes in the Unused Resources group are selected;
click to deselect all attributes in the group.
Empty box: No attributes in the Unused Resources group are selected;
click to select all attributes in the group.
Box displays
(Windows) or
(Macintosh): One or more attributes
in the Unused Resources group are not selected; click to select all
attributes in the group.
The Special Record Formats and Special Symbols options are not
automatically selected along with the other unused resources; they
must be selected individually.

Other Items
Empty Layers

Deletes any layers that do not contain any objects

Empty Symbol Folders

Deletes any unused symbol folders

Unused Classes

Deletes any unused classes

Unused Dash Styles

Deletes any unused dash styles

Objects Outside of Page

Boundaries for

Deletes any objects that are totally outside the page boundaries; if an object
is partially within the boundary, it will not be deleted. Objects can be deleted
from the active layer only, from all design layers, and from all sheet layers.

All

Checked box: All attributes in the Other Items group are selected; click to
deselect all attributes in the group.
Empty box: No attributes in the Other Items group are selected; click to
select all attributes in the group.
Box displays
(Windows) or
(Macintosh): One or more attributes
in the Other Items group are not selected; click to select all attributes in
the group.

Preview items that will be purged

2. Click OK.

Opens the Purge Preview dialog box after you click OK on the Purge dialog
box; if needed, items can be removed from the purge list

Duplicating Objects |

421

If Preview items that will be purged was selected, the Purge Preview dialog box opens. The Name and Type of
each item that will be purged displays. Red and blue names indicate symbols that are defined to be inserted as
plug-in objects and groups, respectively (see Symbol Types on page 187). For symbol definitions and empty
symbol folders, the Location column indicates which resource folder currently contains the item. For objects that
are outside of the page boundaries, the Location column indicates which sheet layer or design layer currently
contains the item.
To prevent an item from being purged, click the column to the left of the items name to remove the check mark.

3. Click OK to complete the purge.

4. If necessary, use the Undo command to undo the purge.

Duplicating Objects
Duplicating Single
The Duplicate command makes a copy of an object or group of objects and places it on the drawing. Depending on the
setting in Vectorworks preferences, the duplicated object or objects will either be offset or placed directly on top of the
original.
To duplicate any object:
1. Select the 2D/3D object(s) to copy.
2. Select Edit > Duplicate.
Vectorworks places a copy of the selected object(s) in the drawing according to the settings in the Vectorworks
preferences dialog box.
When objects with an offset are duplicated, the offset is maintained with the duplicate.

422

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

Duplicate Array
The Duplicate Array command controls how many copies of selected objects are made and how these copies are
arrayed, or placed, in the drawing. The drawing must be in Top/Plan view if 2D objects are being duplicated.
For information about placing symbols in walls in a duplicate array, see Inserting Symbols in a Duplicate Array on
page 567.
To create a duplicate array:
1. Select the 2D/3D object or objects to copy.
2. Select Edit > Duplicate Array.
The Duplicate Array dialog box opens. Select the desired duplication array Shape. The dialog box dynamically
displays the appropriate fields based on the selected linear, rectangular, or circular array shape.

Linear Array

Rectangular Array

Circular Array

Linear Array Parameter

Description

Number of Duplicates

Specify the number of copies of the original object to create

First Duplicates Position

Determined By

Specify the start point for the first copied object, by either specifying coordinates or
placing the object with the mouse

Duplicating Objects |
Linear Array Parameter

423

Description

Cartesian Offset

To use Cartesian coordinates, click this option and specify the distance of the center
of the copy from the center of the original object by entering X, Y, and Z
coordinates. If the view is something other than Top/Plan, and the field Values Are
With Respect to the is set to Working Plane, the labels on the coordinate fields are
X, Y, and Z instead of X, Y, and Z. Z (or Z) must be zero when only 2D objects are
being duplicated.

Polar Offset

This option is always enabled if 2D objects are selected; if 3D or hybrid objects are
selected, or if both 2D and 3D objects are selected, this option is enabled only in
Top/Plan view. To use polar coordinates, click this option and specify the distance
of the center of the copy from the center of the original object by entering r (radius),
theta (angle), and Z coordinates; Z must be zero when only 2D objects are being
duplicated.

Next Mouse Click and Z

(or Z)

This option is always enabled if 2D objects are selected; if 3D or hybrid objects are
selected, or if both 2D and 3D objects are selected, this option is enabled only in
Top/Plan view. To place the copy with the mouse, select Next Mouse Click. To
offset the first copy from the original objects plane, enter a Z (or Z) value; Z (or Z)
must be zero when only 2D objects are being duplicated.

Values Are With Respect to

the

This option is enabled for 3D objects if the view is something other than Top/Plan;
specify whether the array should be built relative to the active layer plane or
working plane

Resize Duplicates

Select Resize Duplicates to resize each successive copy with the specified X Scale,
Y Scale, and Z Scale values; to leave the copies at the same scale as the original
object, ensure that Resize Duplicates is deselected

Rotate Duplicates

Select Rotate Duplicates to rotate each successive copy at the specified Angle; to
leave the copies at the same rotation as the original object, ensure that Rotate
Duplicates is deselected

Original Object

To include the original object in the array, select Retain; otherwise, the original
object is deleted. To leave the original object selected after duplication, also click
Leave Selected.

424

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

Rectangular Array Parameter

Description

Number of Columns

Specify the number of copies of the original object to create in the arrays X direction
(active layer plane duplication) or X direction (working plane duplication)

Number of Rows

Specify the number of copies of the original object to create in the arrays Y direction
(active layer plane duplication) or Y direction (working plane duplication)

Number of Stacks

For 3D objects, specify the number of copies of the original object to create in the
arrays Z direction (active layer plane duplication) or Z direction (working plane
duplication)

Distance Between Columns

Specify the distance between each column in the array (measured from the copied
objects centers)

Distance Between Rows

Specify the distance between each row in the array (measured from the copied
objects centers)

Distance Between Stacks

For 3D objects, specify the distance between each stack in the array (measured from
the copied objects centers); this value must be zero when only 2D objects are being
duplicated

Values Are With Respect to

the

This option is enabled for 3D objects if the view is something other than Top/Plan;
specify whether the array should be built relative to the active layer plane or
working plane

Resize Duplicates

Select Resize Duplicates to resize each successive copy with the specified X Scale,
Y Scale, and Z Scale values; to leave the copies at the same scale as the original
object ensure that Resize Duplicates is deselected

Rotate Duplicates

Select Rotate Duplicates to rotate each successive copy at the specified Angle; to
leave the copies at the same rotation as the original object, ensure that Rotate
Duplicates is deselected

Duplicating Objects |

425

Rectangular Array Parameter

Description

Original Object

To include the original object in the array, select Retain; otherwise, the original
object is deleted. To leave the original object selected after duplication, also click
Leave Selected.

Circular Array Parameter

Description

Number of Duplicates

Specify the number of copies of the original object to create

Angle Between Duplicates

Specify the angle of separation between the centers of each object in the array

Z (or Z) Offset of Successive

Duplicates

To offset copies from the original objects plane, specify the distance between each
successive copy. If the view is something other than Top/Plan, and Values Are With
Respect to the is set to Working Plane, the label is Z instead of Z. Z and Z must be
zero when only 2D objects are being duplicated.

Circle Center Point

Specify the center point for the circular array, by either specifying coordinates or
placing the array with the mouse

X and Y (or X and Y)

To place the array using coordinates, enter the X and Y coordinates of its center
point. If the view is something other than Top/Plan, and Values Are With Respect
to the is set to Working Plane, the labels on the coordinate fields are X and Y
instead of X and Y.

Next Mouse Click

This option is always enabled if 2D objects are selected; if 3D or hybrid objects are
selected, or if both 2D and 3D objects are selected, this option is enabled only in
Top/Plan view. Select Next Mouse Click to place the array so that its center is at the
next clicked point.

Values Are With Respect to

the

This option is enabled for 3D objects if the view is something other than Top/Plan;
specify whether the array should be built relative to the active layer plane or
working pane

426

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

Circular Array Parameter

Description

Resize Duplicates

Select Resize Duplicates to resize each successive copy with the specified X Scale,
Y Scale, and Z Scale values; to leave the copies at the same scale as the original
object, ensure that Resize Duplicates is deselected

Rotate Duplicates

Select Rotate Duplicates to rotate each successive copy at either the Angle Between
Duplicates or the specified Custom Angle; to leave the copies at the same rotation
as the original object, ensure that Rotate Duplicates is deselected

Original Object

To include the original object in the array, select Retain; otherwise, the original
object is deleted. To leave the original object selected after duplication, also click
Leave Selected.

3. Click OK.
If the array location is already specified, Vectorworks automatically places the duplicate array.
If Next Mouse Click was selected, move the mouse where the copies are to be placed, and click. For circular and
rectangular arrays, click the mouse at the center of the array.

3D linear array with Z offset

and resized duplicates

3D circular array with Z offset

and rotated duplicates

Duplicating Objects Along a Path

The Duplicate Along Path command creates and places several copies of a 2D or 3D object or objects along an existing
2D or 3D path.
If a 2D object and 3D path are selected, the 2D object is projected onto the path.
To duplicate objects along a path:
1. Select the object or objects to duplicate, and select the path object.

Duplicating Objects |

Grouped 2D objects and polyline path

427

3D object (in 3D view) and NURBS curve

2. Select Edit > Duplicate Along Path.

The Duplicate Along Path dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Select a path object

Click Prev or Next to select the object that represents the path; the selected path object
is highlighted

Duplicate Placement

Specifies the duplicate object placement parameters

Number of Duplicates

Creates the specified Number of duplicate objects, equally spaced along the path

Fixed Distance

Duplicates objects at the fixed intervals specified in Distance

Start Offset

Specifies the distance from the end of the path to the first duplicated object; enter zero
to place the first object at the start of the path

Curve Length

Displays the length of the path object, for reference

428

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

Parameter

Description

Tangent to path

Rotates the duplicates so they are always tangent to the path

Tangent to Path
deselected

Preview

Tangent to Path
selected

Click to preview the effect of parameter changes before clicking OK

3. Click OK.
The duplicates are arrayed with their centers along the selected path object.

Smoothing Objects
The smoothing commands smooth all selected polygon and polyline vertices in one step. There are three smoothing
optionsBzier Spline, Cubic Spline, or Arc. The No Smoothing command changes smoothed vertices back into
unsmoothed corners.
To smooth an object:
1. Select the object(s) to smooth.
2. Select Modify > Poly Smoothing. From the sub-menu, select the smoothing method to use.

Option

Description

No Smoothing

Creates straight lines and angled vertices at the control points

Bzier Spline Smoothing

Creates curves pulled towards but not touching the control points

Cubic Spline Smoothing

Creates curves that pass through the control points

Arc Smoothing

Creates fillet-like curves at the control points. The arc radius is based on the
current fillet radius of the Fillet tool (see Fillet Tool on page 326). If no radius
is set, the largest radius that can fit between each vertex is used.

The object is smoothed.

Combining and Connecting Objects |

429

Smoothed using Arc Smoothing

Combining and Connecting Objects

Connect/Combine Tool
The Connect/Combine tool joins objects by their endpoints or at their intersections using one of four modes.
Dual Object Connect

Single Object Connect

Dual Object Combine

Multiple Object Connect

Mode

Description

Single Object Connect

Trims or extends the first selected object to join a second or boundary object

Dual Object Connect

Trims or extends to join two objects at their endpoints or intersections

Dual Object Combine

Trims or extends to join two objects into one object at their endpoints or
intersections

Multiple Object Connect

Designates the first selected object as a boundary, and then trims or extends
multiple consecutively selected objects to join the boundary

When connecting or combining a pair of NURBS, polylines, or open polygons by their endpoints, Vectorworks may
require additional information to complete the process. In this situation, the Connect/Combine Options dialog box
opens.

430

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

Option

Description

Mid-Point

Connects/combines the two objects by joining the two endpoints midway between them

Blend

Connects/combines the two objects by creating another object between them

Position Matching
(NURBS curves and
surfaces only)

Connects/combines two NURBS curves or surfaces by moving the first objects selected end
point to the selected end point of the boundary object (not available if the end points are
coincident)

Tangency Matching
(NURBS curves and
surfaces only)

Connects/combines two NURBS curves or surfaces by making the first objects selected end
point tangent to the selected end point of the boundary object

Curvature
Matching (NURBS
curves and surfaces
only)

Connects/combines two NURBS curves or surfaces by making the first objects selected end
point match the curvature of the selected end point of the boundary object

Combining and Connecting Objects |

431

Single Object Connect

The Single Object Connect mode trims or extends one or more selected objects to join a boundary object. Only open
objects, such as lines, arcs, open polygons, and NURBS curves and lines, can be connected. Closed objects, such as
circles, rectangles, and closed polygons cannot be connected; they are treated as boundary objects.

Connecting Single Objects

To connect a single object to a boundary object:
1. Click the Connect/Combine tool from the Basic palette, and select Single Object Connect from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the object to connect, and then click on the boundary object. The first object is resized to join the
boundary object.

Connecting Multiple Objects

To connect multiple selected objects to a boundary object:
1. Select the objects to be connected to a boundary object.
2. Click the Connect/Combine tool from the Basic palette, and select Single Object Connect from the Tool bar.
3. While pressing and holding Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh), click on one of the objects to connect, and
then click on the boundary object. The selected objects are resized to join the boundary object.
Alternatively, use Multiple Object Connect mode to connect multiple objects to a boundary object (see Multiple
Object Connect on page 434).

Connection Type

Example

2D object extended to boundary object

1st click
2nd click

2D object trimmed at boundary object

NURBS surface to NURBS surface

432

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

Connection Type

Example

Multiple selection connecting 2D

objects to boundary object

Dual Object Connect

The Dual Object Connect mode trims or extends two objects to connect them at their endpoints or intersections. Only
open objects, such as lines and polylines, can be connected. Closed objects, except for NURBS surfaces, cannot be
connected.
To connect two objects:
1. Click the Connect/Combine tool from the Basic palette, and select Dual Object Connect from the Tool bar.
2. Click the first, and then the second, object to connect.
The Connect/Combine Options dialog box opens. Select a method for resizing and connecting the two objects
(see Connect/Combine Tool on page 429).
The two objects are resized to connect to each other.

1st click
2nd click

NURBS surface being connected to NURBS surface

Connection Type
Mid-Point

Blend

Example

Combining and Connecting Objects |

Connection Type

433

Example

Position Matching

Tangency Matching

Curvature Matching

Dual Object Combine

The Dual Object Combine mode trims or extends to combine two objects into a single object at their endpoints or
intersections. Only open objects, such as lines and NURBS curves and surfaces, can be connected.
To combine two objects:
1. Click the Connect/Combine tool from the Basic palette, and select Dual Object Combine from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the first, and then the second, object to combine.
The two objects are trimmed or extended if necessary and combined into one object.
The line and the arc are combined
to form a single polyline object

1st click
2nd click

Tangent or curvature matching between two

NURBS surfaces creates a single surface

434

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

Multiple Object Connect

The Multiple Object Connect mode trims or extends multiple objects to join a selected boundary object. Only open
objects, such as lines, arcs, open polygons, and NURBS curves and lines, can be connected. Closed objects, such as
circles, rectangles, and closed polygons can only be used as boundary objects.
Alternatively, use the Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) key in Single Object Connect mode to connect
multiple objects to a boundary object (see Single Object Connect on page 431).
To connect multiple objects to a boundary object:
1. Click the Connect/Combine tool from the Basic palette, and select Multiple Object Connect from the Tool bar.
2. Click on the boundary object, which becomes highlighted in red.
3. Position the cursor over the first object to trim or extend to the boundary; it becomes highlighted in red. Click to
resize the object to join the boundary object.
4. Continue to click on objects to connect to the boundary. Each consecutively clicked object is connected, until you
click in an empty space to deselect the boundary object.

The first click selects the

boundary object

As each line is clicked, it is

connected to the boundary object

Composing and Decomposing Objects and Surfaces

Composing Objects and Surfaces
The Compose command can combine NURBS surfaces, 2D lines, arcs, open polygons, NURBS curves, NURBS arcs,
and open 3D polygons into a single object. The endpoints of each object must be touching to use this command.
Objects that are not touching are ignored.
Adjacent NURBS surfaces, which may have been split by the Split tool (see Splitting Objects and NURBS Surfaces
on page 322), can be composed into a single NURBS surface with this command.
To compose adjacent objects or NURBS surfaces:
1. Select the objects or NURBS surfaces to be composed.
2. Select Modify > Compose. The objects are combined to create a single object or NURBS surface.

Locking and Unlocking Objects |

435

If there are multiple objects touching at the same endpoint, the two objects closest in stacking order are
combined.

Decomposing Objects and Surfaces

The Decompose command can decompose NURBS surfaces, 2D polygons, 2D polylines, 3D NURBS curves created
with the Compose command, and open 3D polygons.
Occasionally, surface creation methods like the Create Surface from Curves command can create a surface with
internal discontinuities. Many of the 3D Power Pack tools and commands are not designed to work with these types of
surfaces. The Decompose command can separate the surface into NURBS surfaces without discontinuities.
To decompose a NURBS surface or object into individual segments:
1. Select the NURBS surface or object to be decomposed.
2. Select Modify > Decompose.
The NURBS surface is separated into individual surfaces, or the object is separated into individual segments.

Locking and Unlocking Objects

Locking Objects
Objects in a drawing can be protected with the Lock command so that they cannot be accidentally moved, deleted, or
edited. A locked object must be unlocked before any changes can be made to it.
To lock an object:
1. Select the object or objects to lock.
2. Select Modify > Lock
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the object, and select Lock from the object
context menu.
The Object Info palette indicates that the object is locked. Depending on the selection highlighting setting in
Vectorworks preferences, the handles and/or highlighting also change to indicate that the object is now locked
(see Selection and Pre-selection Indicators on page 33).

Unlocking Objects
Unlock an object or group of objects that was previously locked with the Unlock command. Unlocked objects can be
copied, moved, deleted, or edited.

436

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

To unlock objects:
1. Select the object or objects to be unlocked.
2. Select Modify > Unlock
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the object, and select Unlock from the object
context menu.
The Object Info palette no longer indicates that the object is locked. Depending on the selection highlighting
setting in Vectorworks preferences, the handles and/or highlighting also change to indicate that the object is now
unlocked (see Selection and Pre-selection Indicators on page 33).

Aligning Objects to Grid

The Align to Grid command aligns 2D and 3D objects to the snap grid, placing the upper-left corner of each object at
its closest grid point. The Align to Grid command can be used to realign objects to the snap grid when the grids
settings have changed. It also aligns objects to the grid if they were either created with Snap to Grid snapping turned
off or were moved off the grid after they were created.
To align an object to a grid:
1. Select the object or objects to align.
2. Select Modify > Align > Align to Grid.
Vectorworks aligns the object(s), placing the upper-left corner of each object at its closest grid point.

Rotating Objects
Vectorworks provides a variety of ways to rotate 2D and 3D objects. Use the Rotate tool to rotate an object directly
using the mouse. Use the various Rotate commands to rotate the object around the current location, by choosing a
preset rotation, or by entering custom rotation information in a dialog box.
Certain objects, such as rectangles, rounded rectangles, ovals, bitmaps, and PICT images, can be rotated with the
Interactive Scaling mode of the 2D Selection tool. Press the Alt key (Windows) or Option key (Macintosh) while
dragging a reshape handle.

Rotate Tool
The Rotate tool can rotate 2D and 3D objects in the drawing. Double-clicking the tool when a 2D object is selected
opens the Rotate Object dialog box as described in 2D Custom Rotation on page 439.
The Rotate tool has two modes available when a 2D object is selected (Rotate and Duplicate and Rotate), and it has five
modes available when a 3D object is selected.
Duplicate and Rotate

Alignment Rotation
Rotate in
Screen Plane

Rotate
Standard Rotation

Mode

Description

Rotate

Rotates the selected object

Rotating Objects |
Mode

Description

Duplicate and Rotate

Creates a duplicate object and rotates it

Standard Rotation

Rotates the object about a defined axis

Alignment Rotation

Rotates the object by aligning it with another object

Rotate in Screen Plane

In conjunction with the other options, rotates the object parallel to the computer
screen plane, rather than the working plane

437

Rotate in Screen Plane cannot be used with wall objects. Also, the option has no
effect when the drawing is in a view parallel to the screen plane, such as Top or
Front.

2D Standard Rotation
To rotate a 2D object:
1. Select the 2D object(s) to rotate.
2. Click the Rotate tool from the Basic palette.
To select additional objects or to change the currently selected objects to rotate, press and hold the Alt key
(Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking or click-dragging the mouse around them to marquee
select them; the 2D Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the Alt or Cmd is being pressed.
3. Click to create a fulcrum line (a temporary handle to rotate the object).
4. Click to end the fulcrum line.
5. Move the cursor to rotate the object.
A preview object displays.
6. Click to set the rotation.

3D Standard Rotation
To rotate a 3D object around a specified axis:
1. Select the 3D object to rotate.
2. Click the Rotate tool from the Basic palette.
To select additional objects or to change the currently selected objects to rotate, press and hold the Alt key
(Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking or click-dragging the mouse around them to marquee
select them; the 2D Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the Alt or Cmd is being pressed.
3. Select Rotate or Duplicate and Rotate from the Tool bar, depending on whether the original or a duplicate object
is to be rotated.
4. Select Standard Rotation from the Tool bar.
5. By default, the rotation plane is parallel to the working plane. If desired, select Rotate in Screen Plane from the
Tool bar to rotate in a plane parallel to the computer screen plane.
6. Click to create a fulcrum line (a temporary handle to rotate the object).
7. Click to end the fulcrum line.

438

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

8. Move the cursor to rotate the object to the desired new position.
9. Click to set the rotation.
The original object or its duplicate is rotated to the new position.

1st click
3rd click
2nd click
Rotating a chair using the Rotate and Standard Rotation options

3D Rotation by Alignment
To rotate a 3D object by aligning it with another object:
1. Select the 3D object to rotate.
2. Select the Rotate tool from the Basic palette.
To select additional objects or to change the currently selected objects to rotate, press and hold the Alt key
(Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking or click-dragging the mouse around them to marquee
select them; the 2D Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the Alt or Cmd is being pressed.
3. Select Rotate or Duplicate and Rotate from the Tool bar, depending on whether the original or a duplicate object
is to be rotated.
4. Select Alignment Rotation from the Tool bar.
5. By default, the rotation plane is parallel to the working plane. If desired, select Rotate in Screen Plane from the
Tool bar to rotate in a plane parallel to the computer screen plane.
6. Click to set the first point on the selected object.
7. Click to set the second point on the selected object.
This defines the edge of the object that will be rotated by alignment and creates a fulcrum line.
8. Click the desired point to align the object with.
The original object or its duplicate is rotated to the new position.

Rotating Objects |

439

3rd click
2nd click

1st click

Preset Rotation Angles

The rotate commands provide a number of ways to rotate 2D and 3D objects in a drawing without changing their base
location in the drawing. Select one of the preset rotation angles, or specify a custom rotation angle.
To rotate at a specified angle:
1. Select the object(s) to rotate.
2. Select Modify > Rotate, and then the pre-set rotation.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the object(s), and select Rotate from the object
context menu.

Parameter

Description

Rotate Left 90

Rotates the selected object counter-clockwise 90

Rotate Right 90

Rotates the selected object clockwise 90

Flip Horizontal

Flips the selected object about its center

Flip Vertical

Flips the selected object vertically about its center

2D Custom Rotation
The center of rotation for this command is limited to the center of the objects bounding box.
To rotate at custom angles in 2D:
1. Select the object or objects to rotate.
2. Select Modify > Rotate > Rotate.
The Rotate Object dialog box opens.

3. Enter the rotation angle.

440

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

The precision of the values that can be entered (degrees, minutes, and/or seconds) depends on the Units setting.

4. Click OK.

3D Custom Rotation
The precision of the rotation values that can be entered (degrees, minutes, and/or seconds) depends on the Units
setting.
To rotate at custom angles in 3D:
1. Select the 3D object or objects to rotate.
2. Select Modify > Rotate > Rotate 3D.
The Rotate Object in 3D dialog box opens. Specify the rotation parameters.

Parameter

Description

Rotation Angle

Enter the angle of rotation

Center of Rotation

Specify the desired center of rotation

Working Plane Center

Rotates using the center of the working plane

Object Center

Rotates about the center of the selected object

Next Mouse Click

Rotates around the next mouse click in the drawing window

Rotation Axis

Select whether the rotation axis will be based on the Active Layer Plane or
the Working Plane, and about which axis

3. Click OK.

Unrotating 3D Objects
The Unrotate 3D Objects command returns any 3D object that has its own coordinate system to its upright position.
Use the command to rotate symbols, extrudes, multiple extrudes, and sweeps so that they align with the world
coordinate system. This command helps re-orient the drawing after rotating an object.
To unrotate a 3D object:
1. Select the 3D object or objects to unrotate.
2. Select Modify > Unrotate 3D Objects.

Mirroring Objects |

441

Mirroring Objects
The Mirror tool can mirror 2D and 3D objects. Depending on which types of objects are selected, there are four modes.
Mirror

Mirror Across Working Plane

Duplicate and Mirror

Mirror in Screen Plane

Mode

Description

Mirror

Mirrors the selected object about an axis line. For 3D objects, the mirrored
object is on the same plane as the original object (parallel to the working
plane) unless Mirror in Screen Plane is selected.

Duplicate and Mirror

Creates a duplicate of the selected object and then mirrors the duplicate about
an axis line. For 3D objects, the mirrored object is on the same plane as the
original object (parallel to the working plane) unless Mirror in Screen Plane is
selected.

Mirror Across Working Plane

Mirrors the selected object to the other side of the working plane

(3D objects only)

Mirror in Screen Plane
(3D objects only)

Mirrors the selected object about an axis line, in the screen plane
Mirror in Screen Plane cannot be used with wall objects. Also, this
option has no effect when Mirror Across Working Plane is used, or
when the drawing is in a view parallel to the screen plane, such as Top or
Front.

Mirroring a 2D Object
To mirror a 2D object:
1. Select the object to mirror.
2. Click the Mirror tool from the Basic palette.
To select additional objects or to change the currently selected objects to mirror, press and hold the Alt key
(Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking or click-dragging the mouse around them to marquee
select them; the 2D Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the Alt or Cmd is being pressed.
3. Select Mirror or Duplicate and Mirror from the Tool bar, depending on whether the original object is to remain
in place.
4. Click and drag to create an axis line. Click to finish the line.
The object or its duplicate is mirrored on the opposite side of the axis line.

442

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

Mirror axis line

Mirror mode mirrors the object to the other side of the axis line

Mirror axis line

Duplicate and Mirror mode creates a mirror duplicate of the object

Mirroring a 3D Object Using an Axis Line

To mirror a 3D object using an axis line:
1. Select the 3D object to mirror.
2. Click the Mirror tool from the Basic palette.
To select additional objects or to change the currently selected objects to mirror, press and hold the Alt key
(Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking or click-dragging the mouse around them to marquee
select them; the 2D Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the Alt or Cmd is being pressed.
3. Select Mirror or Duplicate and Mirror from the Tool bar, depending on whether the original object is to remain
in place.
4. By default, the mirrored object is placed on the same plane as the original object (parallel to the working plane).
If desired, select Mirror in Screen Plane from the Tool bar to place the mirrored object in a plane parallel to the
computer screen plane.
5. Click and drag to create an axis line. Click to finish the line.
The object or its duplicate is mirrored to the opposite side of the axis line.

Mirroring a 3D Object Across the Working Plane

To mirror a 3D object across the working plane:
1. Select the 3D object to mirror.
2. Click the Mirror tool from the Basic palette.
To select additional objects or to change the currently selected objects to mirror, press and hold the Alt key
(Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking or click-dragging the mouse around them to marquee
select them; the 2D Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the Alt or Cmd is being pressed.

Converting Objects |

443

3. Select Mirror or Duplicate and Mirror from the Tool bar, depending on whether the original object is to remain
in place.
4. Select Mirror Across Working Plane mode.
The object or its duplicate is mirrored to the opposite side of the working plane. There is no need to create an axis
line.

Converting Objects
Vectorworks objects can be converted in several ways.

Convert to Lines
The Convert to Lines command changes a single object into the series of 2D lines needed to create it. For example, a
2D rectangle is converted into four lines. Both 2D and 3D objects can be converted into lines.
Circles and ovals can also be converted into numerous line segments. However, especially when converting circles, the
accuracy of the line segments depends on the 2D conversion res (resolution) setting chosen in the Vectorworks
Preferences dialog box.
To convert an object to lines:
1. Select the object to convert.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to Lines.
3. If the object can be rendered, select the wireframe, hidden line, or dashed hidden line rendering conversion
option.
4. Click OK.
The object is converted into lines and each segment can be manipulated.

Convert Copy to Lines

The Convert Copy to Lines command works like the Convert to Lines command except that it first makes a copy of
the object and then converts the copy into line segments. The original object remains intact.
To convert a copy of a 2D or 3D object to lines:
1. Select the object to convert.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert Copy to Lines.
3. If the object can be rendered, select the wireframe, hidden line, or dashed hidden line rendering conversion
option.
4. Click OK.
A copy of the object is converted into lines and each segment can be manipulated.

444

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

Convert to Polygons
The Convert to Polygons command changes any object with a surface into the 2D polygon or series of polygons
needed to create it.
Circles and ovals can also be converted. However, especially when converting circles, the accuracy of the polygons
depends on the 2D conversion res (resolution) setting chosen in the Vectorworks Preferences dialog box.
When most closed 3D geometry is converted to 2D polygons with the hidden line rendering option, back-facing
polygons are discarded.
To convert a 2D or 3D object to polygons:
1. Select the object to convert.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to Polygons.
3. If the object can be rendered, select either the wireframe or hidden line rendering conversion option.
4. Click OK.
The object is converted to a group of polygons. To select an individual polygon, first select Modify > Ungroup.

Convert Copy to Polygons

The Convert Copy to Polygons command works like the Convert to Polygons command, except that it first makes a
copy of the object and then converts the copy into 2D polygons. The original object remains intact.
To convert a copy of a 2D or 3D object to polygons:
1. Select the object to convert.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert Copy to Polygons.
3. If the object can be rendered, select either the wireframe or hidden line rendering conversion option.
4. Click OK.
A copy of the object is converted to a group of polygons. To select an individual polygon, first select Modify >
Ungroup.

Convert to 3D Polygons
The Convert to 3D Polys command converts any 2D line or surface object, including polylines, polygons, circles, ovals,
and rectangles, into a 3D polygon. Once converted, the new polygon contains a Z dimension, assigning it a place in 3D
space. It can be rotated and manipulated with 3D tools. The new polygon will not, however, have a thickness.
When converting two or more objects simultaneously, Vectorworks assigns the objects to a group when converting
them to polygons.
To convert a 2D object to 3D polygons:
1. Select the 2D object or objects to convert.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to 3D Polys.

Grouping Objects |

445

Grouping Objects
The Group command groups two or more individual objects (including text and symbols) together. The group of
objects is then treated as a single object. For example, grouped objects can be moved to a different layer in one move. In
addition, this command can group two or more groups of objects into a single group.

Individual objects

Grouped objects

To group objects:
1. Select the objects (or groups) to be grouped.
2. Select Modify > Group.
The objects are grouped into one object, and the group is placed in the active class.

Editing a Group
Use the Modify > Edit Group command to edit individual objects in a group without ungrouping them. This
command also edits a group of objects that is nested inside another group; each time the command is selected,
Vectorworks moves one level deeper into the group. See Object Editing Mode on page 446 for details.

Ungrouping
The Ungroup command ungroups objects or groups that were previously combined with the Group command.
Nested groups must be ungrouped one at a time.

Grouped objects

Ungrouped objects

To ungroup a group of objects:

1. Select the group to ungroup.
2. Select Modify > Ungroup.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the group, and select Ungroup from the object
context menu.
The objects are ungrouped, still retaining their individual attributes and information.
If a plug-in object is ungrouped, it loses its plug-in functionality. Confirm that high-level objects should be
ungrouped.

446

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

Returning to Top Level

Use the Top Level command when editing nested groups, to return to the main drawing area in a single step.
Select Modify > Top Level.
Vectorworks automatically exits all groups being edited and returns to the main drawing area.

Object Editing Mode

Various types of complex objects in Vectorworks are edited within a special editing mode in which you edit the
components that make up the object. When this editing mode is activated, an Edit window with a colored border
displays in the drawing area. Once the edits are complete, exit the object to return to the regular drawing mode.
Depending on the type of object being edited, the Edit window can show the edited object in context with the other
objects in the drawing.
The Edit window shows only the object being edited for the following types of objects: extrudes, multiple
extrudes, tapered extrudes, sweeps, meshes, floors, roof faces, and symbol definitions edited from the Resource
Browser or from a sheet layer.
The Edit window can show other objects from the drawing while the following types of objects are being edited:
groups, solids, viewports, and symbol definitions that are edited by clicking a symbol instance in a design layer.
To enable this feature, select the option to Show other objects while in editing modes in the Display tab of the
Vectorworks preferences (see Display Preferences on page 48). To show the other objects in a less obtrusive
way, also select the Gray other objects option.
To edit an object:
1. Select the object to edit.
2. From the Modify menu, select the Edit command for the object (for example, Edit Symbol or Edit Extrude).
Alternatively, double-click on the object, or right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the object, and
then select Edit from the context menu.
3. For certain objects, only one component of the object can be edited at a time. When one of these objects is
selected, one of the following dialog boxes opens to allow you to select which component to edit. Select a
component to edit and click OK.
Symbol: Edit Symbol dialog box
Viewport: Edit Viewport dialog box
Path or profile object: Choose Component dialog box
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the object, and select a command from the
context menu to edit the component directly. For example, to edit the path or profile of a plug-in object directly,
select Edit Path or Edit Profile from the context menu.
4. The Edit window displays the item to be edited. A colored border around the drawing window indicates the
editing mode is active. The Exit command becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Exit button is
visible in the top right corner of the drawing window.
5. Make the changes to the object.
If other objects in the drawing are displayed, the objects on other layers respect the layer options settings (for
showing and snapping to objects in other layers) and the layer visibility settings. Other objects on the same layer
as the edited object are snappable.

Compressing Images |

447

In addition, the view can be switched between regular and unified view mode as needed (Vectorworks Design
Series required). (See Setting Unified View Options on page 747 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide
for more information.)
6. Click the Exit button to return to the regular drawing mode. (If a nested object is being edited, the Exit button
exits back to the next level.)

Compressing Images
The bitmap images and image resources in a Vectorworks file can be compressed with the JPEG compression method,
to save file space. JPEG compression can significantly reduce bitmap image file size, but can result in the loss of fine
detail for some images.
The compression method and file size for a selected image display in the Object Info palette. Images that are already
compressed by the JPEG compression method remain unchanged.
A selected bitmap file displays Bitmap as the object type at the top of the Object Info palette. A bitmap file may
already have had PNG compression applied at import; the Compress Images command changes its compression
format to JPEG.

Compressing Selected Bitmap Images

To compress selected bitmap images:
1. Select the bitmaps to be compressed.
2. Select Tools > Compress Images.
The Compress Images dialog box opens.

3. Select Apply JPEG Compression to Selected Bitmap Objects. Click OK to compress the selected images.

Compressing All Bitmap Images and/or Image Resources

The JPEG compression method can be applied to all bitmap images in the file. For the best possible reduction in file
size, images that have been imported as resources (shown as image resources in the Resource Browser) can also be
compressed by the JPEG compression method.
To compress all bitmap images and/or image resources:
1. Select Tools > Compress Images.
The Compress Images dialog box opens.

448

| Chapter 12: Common Functions and Utilities

2. Select Apply JPEG Compression to All. Choose whether to apply the JPEG compression to all bitmap images in
the drawing, image resources, or both. Click OK to compress the images.

Tracing Bitmaps
The Trace Bitmap command traces bitmap objects and picture objects (images which have been imported with the
PICT as Picture command). It creates a group of vector lines from the image.
To trace a bitmap or picture object:
1. Select the image to trace.
2. Select Modify > Trace Bitmap.
3. Enter the desired criteria in the Trace Bitmap dialog box.

Parameter

Description

Maximum width in pixels

Specify the maximum number of pixels to be recognized as a single line;

pixel counts above the selected value are traced

Collinearity Sensitivity

Select a value to define the segment size and accuracy of the trace

4. Click OK.
The time it takes Vectorworks to trace the image can vary from seconds to hours. The tracing time required is
determined by the image size, as well as the line threshold and collinearity sensitivity settings selected.

Viewing and Rendering

13

Vectorworks has many tools and features that change the drawing view. For example, change the orientation from a
top view to a left isometric view, or interactively fly over or walk through a 3D model. Several rendering options
are also available. These show 3D models with additional realistic details, such as hidden lines, colors, and lighting.

Using Standard Views

The items under the View > Standard Views sub-menu change the representation and the orientation of the drawing
area. Vectorworks has 15 view options, which can be divided into four basic categories:

Category

Description

2D View

Select the Top/Plan command to view the drawing in 2D; use this for
elevations, annotations, title blocks, and other 2D illustrations

3D Elevations

Use the Top, Front, Right, Bottom, Back, and Left commands to view 3D
elevations

3D Representations Above the

Active Layer Plane

Use the Right Isometric, Left Isometric, Right Rear Isometric, and Left Rear
Isometric commands to view 3D representations above the active layer plane

3D Representations Below the

Active Layer Plane

Use the Lower Right Isometric, Lower Left Isometric, Lower Right Rear
Isometric, and Lower Left Rear Isometric commands to view 3D
representations below the active layer plane

450

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

Top/Plan

Front

Right Isometric

Lower Right Isometric

Top

Bottom

Right

Back

Left

Right Rear Isometric

Left Rear Isometric

Lower Right Rear Isometric

Lower Left Rear Isometric

Left Isometric

Lower Left Isometric

To change among the different views:

Select View > Standard Views, and then select a view.
The view changes and a check mark displays in front of the active view in the Current View/Standard Views list.
The reference for the view, whether working plane or active layer plane, may depend on the selection in the
Working Planes palette (see Working Plane View and Modes on page 644).
To switch views rapidly, use shortcuts on the numeric keypad.
These shortcut keys also work to change the view of a selected viewport on a sheet layer.

Keypad Number

View

Top/Plan

Left Isometric

Front

Right Isometric

Projection |
Keypad Number

View

Left

Top

Right

Left Rear Isometric

Rear

Right Rear Isometric

451

The View bar also provides quick access to the standard view commands. Click the Current View and select a
standard view from the list that displays. If the view is something other than a standard view, Custom View
displays as the current view.

Current View/Standard Views list

Projection
The projection commands alter the way Vectorworks displays the 3D geometry of the drawing on a 2D screen. In
addition to the standard 2D Plan projection, Vectorworks has six 3D projection modes.
To switch projection modes:
Select View > Projection, and then select a projection.

Projection Mode

Description

2D Plan

Matches the projection for a normal 2D drawing; use this view to draw 2D objects

Orthogonal

Displays an undistorted 3D projection of the drawingobjects display at their exact

size regardless of their distance from the active layer plane

Perspective

Adds distortion to the drawing so that objects that are farther away appear smaller
than objects that are closer, as if the drawing were projected on an imaginary
cropped plane, set at a certain distance. The Perspective mode closely approximates
how the 3D model will display in the real world.

Oblique Cavalier (30 or 45)

The Cavalier modes show an undistorted front view along with depth (also known
as full-depth axonometric projections). The lines along the Z axis (which show the
depth of an object) are represented in true length. This distorts the overall image of
the object and makes it appear deeper. These modes make precise measurements
possible, either from a printout of the drawing or from the screen image.

Oblique Cabinet (30 or 45)

The Oblique Cabinet modes (also known as half-depth axonometric projections) are
similar to Oblique Cavalier. However, the depth lines are shortened by 50%. This
distorts the actual length of these lines, but represents a more natural view of the
object. These modes can still be used to take measurements of vectors perpendicular
to the projection plan (along the Z axis) from a printed drawing, but the results
must be multiplied by two to obtain the actual dimension.

452

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

OpenGL and Renderworks do not support the Oblique projections. To render Oblique projections, use one of the
Polygon render modes, or use Hidden Line mode.

Perspective
The perspective commands change the amount of distortion used to display the drawing, which gives the impression
of 3D perspective. Select from normal, narrow, or wide perspectives, or create a custom perspective.

Perspective

Description

Set Perspective

Set a custom perspective numerically

Narrow Perspective

Similar to a telephoto lens

Normal Perspective

Similar to a portrait lens

Wide Perspective

Similar to a wide angle or fisheye lens

To select a perspective:
Select View > Perspective, and then select the perspective.
To set a custom perspective value, select Set Perspective. The Set Perspective dialog box opens. Type the custom
perspective value in the Perspective field, and then click OK. The lower the value, the wider the angle of
perspective.

Simulating Movement
Several tools simulate movement over and through the drawing.
When you use these tools, the model may display in wireframe mode even if a render mode is set. When the
movement stops, Vectorworks renders the new view of the model. Additionally, for a highly complex drawing,
Vectorworks temporarily removes some of the detail to speed up the movement. When the movement stops, the detail
returns.
These tools have certain Tool bar buttons that are true modes, and others that act as command buttons. When some of
these tools are in use, the Data bar provides display-only information to help orient the view.

Flyover
The Flyover tool simulates movement over and around a real-world model.
To control the movements of the Flyover tool, drag the mouse around a selected center of rotation. The Tool bar
buttons set the center of rotation.
Object Center
Interactive Origin

Active Layer Plane Origin

Working Plane Origin

Simulating Movement |

453

Mode

Description

Interactive Origin

Sets the center of rotation with a mouse click

Object Center

Sets the center of rotation to the center of the selected objects; if no objects are selected, sets
the center of rotation to the center of the visible objects

Active Layer Plane

Origin

Sets the center of rotation to the center of the active layer plane

Working Plane Origin

Sets the center of rotation to the origin of the current working plane

To fly over a drawing:

1. Click the Flyover tool from the Basic palette, or from the 3D Modeling or Visualization tool set.
2. Select the mode from the Tool bar.
3. In Interactive Origin mode, click to specify the center of rotation for the flyover movement.
4. The center of rotation is indicated by dashed axis lines.

To fly over the drawing, click on the drawing and drag in the direction of movement while you hold the mouse
button. To stop the movement, release the mouse button. Alternatively, use shortcuts on the keyboard to fly over
the drawing.

Mouse Movement

Shortcut Keys

Description

Move left or right

Turns left or right about the selected center of

rotation

Move up or down

Moves up or down about the selected center of

rotation

Move in toward center

Alt + move right (Win) or

Option + move right (Mac)

Moves the view toward the center of rotation

(in Perspective projection)

Move outward from center

Alt + move left (Win) or

Option + move left (Mac)

Moves the view outward from the center of

rotation (in perspective projection)

Move down toward active layer

plane

Alt + move up (Win) or

Option + move up (Mac)

Moves down toward the active layer plane (in

perspective or orthogonal projection)

Move up from active layer plane

Alt + move down (Win) or

Option + move down (Mac)

Moves up from the active layer plane (in

perspective or orthogonal projection)

454

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

Mouse Movement

Shortcut Keys

Description

Shift key

Constrains the rotation to the global Z axis, or

to the K axis of the active working plane (when
Working Plane Mode is enabled in the
Working Planes palette)

Ctrl key (Win) or Command

key (Mac)

Draws selected objects in full detail, and hides

deselected objects (so that the redraws are
faster)

Activating the Flyover Tool Temporarily

While another tool is active, press and hold the mouse wheel button and the Ctrl key (Windows) or Control key (Mac)
simultaneously to activate the Flyover tool. Orient the view as desired, and release the mouse. The previous tool
becomes active again automatically.
This feature will not work properly if the wheel button is assigned a custom function in the mouse setup. For example,
if the wheel button is set to perform a delete when clicked, a wheel click in Vectorworks deletes rather than activates
the flyover tool. (The specific setting required for this feature depends on the type of mouse being used.)

Walkthrough
The Walkthrough tool simulates movement through a 3D model.
The tool operates in perspective projection. To control the movements of the Walkthrough tool, move the mouse or
click one of the first four mode buttons. The buttons perform precise, incremental walkthrough movements in the
direction specified.
Click Reset to Front View mode to return to a front view of the model, on the same level as the active layer plane.
Lower Active Layer Plane

Viewer Looks Up

Raise Active Layer

Plane

Reset to Front View

Viewer Looks Down

To conduct a walkthrough of a model:

1. Click the Walkthrough tool from the Visualization tool set.
2. Click on the drawing and drag while you hold the mouse button to perform the walkthrough. Imagine the
drawing area divided into four quadrants. With the mouse button pressed, move forward, backward, left, and
right by dragging the mouse in these directions. The place where the four quadrants meet is the still area
move the mouse there to slow or stop the walkthrough movement. The farther away from the still area the mouse
moves, the faster the movement. To stop the movement, release the mouse button.
Alternatively, use shortcuts on the keyboard to walk through the drawing.

Mode

Mouse Movement/Key

Description

Move left or right

Turns left or right from the viewers location about the Z axis

Move up or down

Moves forward or backward in the world XY plane

Simulating Movement |
Mode

Mouse Movement/Key

Description

Raise Active Layer

Plane

Alt + move down (Win) or

Option + move down (Mac)

Raises the viewpoint height

Lower Active Layer

Plane

Alt + move up (Win) or

Option + move up (Mac)

Lowers the viewpoint height

Viewer Looks Down

Alt + move left (Win) or

Option + move left (Mac)

Lowers the viewpoint angle

Viewer Looks Up

Alt + move right (Win) or

Option + move right (Mac)

Raises the viewpoint angle

Reset to Front View

455

Sets the drawing to a front view of the model, on the same

level as the active layer plane
Ctrl key (Windows) or
Command key (Macintosh)

Draws selected objects in full detail, and hides deselected

objects (so that the redraws are faster)

When the Walkthrough tool is in use, the Data bar displays the following information to help orient the view.

Data Bar

Description

Yaw

Displays the angle (0 360 degrees) between the walking direction and the positive Y axis, to
describe the direction of movement in the active layer plane. A yaw of 90 degrees indicates
movement in the direction of the positive X axis. A yaw of 180 degrees indicates movement
in the direction of the negative Y axis.

Pitch

Displays the viewpoints viewing angle. A value of 0 degrees indicates that the viewer is
looking straight ahead; a value of 45 degrees indicates that the viewer is looking up at an
angle 45 degrees from horizontal.

Viewer X/Y/Z

Displays the position of the viewer relative to the active layer plane

Translate View
The Translate View tool provides another way to look at a 3D model in orthogonal or perspective projections.
To control the movements of the Translate View tool, move the mouse or click one of the mode buttons. The buttons
perform precise, incremental movements in the direction specified.
To translate a view:
1. Click the Translate View tool from the Visualization tool set.
2. Click on the drawing and drag while you hold the mouse button to translate the drawing from side to side or up
and down. To stop the movement, release the mouse button. Alternatively, click the mode buttons or use
shortcuts on the keyboard to translate the view.
Move Picture
Closer

Move Picture
Away

456

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

Mode

Mouse Movement/Key

Description

Move left or right

Moves along screen X axis

Move up or down

Moves along screen Y axis

Move Picture Closer

Alt (Win)/Option (Mac) +

move right or down

Moves the drawing closer (in perspective projection)

Move Picture Away

Alt (Win)/Option (Mac) +

move left or up

Moves the drawing farther away (in perspective projection)

Ctrl key (Windows) or

Command key (Macintosh)

Draws selected objects in full detail, and hides deselected

objects (so that the redraws are faster)

When the Translate View tool is in use, the Data bar displays the following information to help orient the view.

Data Bar

Description

Viewer X/Y/Z

Displays the position of the viewer relative to the active layer plane

L/R

Displays the movement to the left and right of an imaginary axis perpendicular to the screen

U/D

Displays the movement up and down from an imaginary axis perpendicular to the screens

I/O

Displays the movement in and out of the drawing along an imaginary axis perpendicular to
the screen

Rotating the 3D View

To rotate the 3D view, either use the Rotate View tool, or specify rotation values with the Rotate 3D View command.

Rotating with the Mouse

The Rotate View tool rotates the view clockwise or counter-clockwise in 3D.
To control the movements of the Rotate View tool, drag the mouse or click one of the mode buttons. The first three
Tool bar buttons set the center of rotation. The last two modes perform precise, incremental rotation movements in the
direction specified.
Rotate Around Active
Layer Plane Center

Rotate
Clockwise

Rotate Around
Object Center

Rotate
Counter-Clockwise
Rotate Around Working
Plane Center

To rotate the 3D view:

1. Click the Rotate View tool from the Visualization tool set.
2. Select the mode from the Tool bar.

Simulating Movement |

457

Mode

Description

Rotate Around Object Center

Uses the center of selected objects as the rotation center

Rotate Around Active Layer Plane Center

Uses the center of the active layer plane as the rotation center

Rotate Around Working Plane Center

Uses the origin of the current working plane as the rotation center

3. To rotate the view, click on the drawing and drag while holding the mouse button. Move the cursor to rotate the
view in the direction of the mouse movement. Release the mouse to stop the rotation. Alternatively, use the two
Tool bar buttons.

Mode

Mouse Movement/Key

Description

Move left or right

Rotates about the screen Y axis (or the screen Z axis if the mouse is
at the perimeter of the drawing)

Move up or down

Rotates about the screen Y axis (or the screen Z axis if the mouse is
at the perimeter of the drawing)

Rotate Clockwise

Each click rotates the view in a clockwise direction about the

selected center of rotation

Rotate
Counter-Clockwise

Each click rotates the view in a counter-clockwise direction about

the selected center of rotation
Ctrl key (Windows)
or Command key
(Macintosh)

Draws selected objects in full detail, and hides deselected objects (so
that the redraws are faster)

When the Rotate View tool is in use, the Data bar displays the following information to help orient the view.

Data Bar

Description

Azimuth

Displays the active layer plane angle (in degrees) between the positive X axis and the
direction from the selected center of rotation to the viewer

Elevation

Displays the angle (in degrees) between the selected center of rotation and the plane which
is parallel to the active layer plane and passes through the view origin

Roll

Displays (in degrees) the amount of rotation about the selected rotation center

Rotating Precisely
The Rotate 3D View command provides a precise way to rotate the 3D view. Enter rotation values directly, or rotate
the view in increments. A preview displays the rotation movements before the actual view is rotated.
To rotate the 3D view:
1. Select View > Rotate 3D View.
The Rotate 3D View dialog box opens.

458

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

Parameter

Description

Parameters are absolute

Starts the view rotation from a top (absolute) view

Parameters are relative

Starts the view rotation from the current view

Interactive Rotation
+, - X/Y/Z buttons

The plus and minus buttons for each axis rotate the view by the increment specified

Angle Increment

Specifies the rotation increment (in degrees) for the interactive rotation buttons

Rotation by Value
Rotation on X/Y/Z

Specifies the rotation value (in degrees, minutes, and seconds) for the X, Y, and/or Z axes

2. Specify the rotation criteria, and then click OK to rotate the 3D view as specified.

Using a SpaceNavigator Mouse

Vectorworks supports both the standard and personal editions of the 3Dconnexion SpaceNavigator mouse. The
SpaceNavigator driver must be installed; see www.3dconnexion.com/support/
SpaceNavigator movement affects the current view in Vectorworks; when cycling through movement modes with the
SpaceNavigators left button, the Vectorworks Message bar displays a notice.
The effects of the SpaceNavigator mouse on the Vectorworks view depend on the current view and projection, as well
as the selected mode.
For best results while navigating, render the drawing with OpenGL rendering.
Cycle through the SpaceNavigator modes for various types of navigation.

SpaceNavigator Mode

Description

Vectorworks View or
Projection

Using Walkthrough
Navigation

Moves forward, back, left, right, up, and down; looks left,
right, up, and down

Perspective

Setting a 3D View |
SpaceNavigator Mode

Description

Vectorworks View or
Projection

Using Unconstrained
Navigation

Moves forward, back, left, right, up, and down; looks left,
right, up, and down, and rolls left and right.

Perspective

459

This mode is the most flexible, but can be challenging to

control; decreasing axis sensitivity from the
SpaceNavigator control panel is recommended (press the
right Navigator button)
Using Flyover
Navigation

Functions like the Flyover tool, with spinning and tilting

motions. If objects are selected, the fixed point of rotation
is the objects center; otherwise, the fixed point of rotation
is the world origin

Perspective, Isometric

Using 2D Navigation

Allows pan and zoom

Top/Plan, Perspective,
Isometric

Setting a 3D View
The Set 3D View command sets a precise 3D view at a specified viewing angle, height, and perspective. Normally, the
command is executed from 2D Top/Plan view; however, the command can also set a 3D view from any of
Vectorworks 3D projection modes.
To set a 3D view:
1. Select View > Set 3D View.
2. Click and draw a line to indicate the view direction; the line starting point indicates the viewer position and the
line end point indicates the point the viewer is looking towards (look toward point).
The Set 3D View dialog box opens.

3. Specify the 3D view criteria.

Parameter

Description

Viewer Height

Specifies the height of the viewer at the start point of the drawn line

Look Toward Height

Specifies the height of the view destination at the end point of the drawn line

Perspective

Select the desired perspective, or use the current setting to keep the perspective
unchanged

4. Click OK. The 3D view is adjusted as specified.

460

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

Setting a Camera View in Renderworks

Renderworks contains a method of setting a camera view with the RenderWorks Camera tool. Specific attributes, such
as camera focal length, field of view, height, and aspect ratio can be set.
To insert a RenderWorks camera:
1. Select the RenderWorks Camera tool from the Visualization tool set (Renderworks required).
2. Click in the design layer to specify the camera location. Click again to indicate the camera look-to point.
If this is the first time a camera object has been inserted in this session, the RenderWorks Camera Object
Properties dialog box opens. Click OK.

3. Click Display Camera View in the Object Info palette, or simply double-click on the camera, to switch to the 3D
camera view. To return to Top/Plan view, click Top/Plan View in the Object Info palette.

4. The camera properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Setting a Camera View in Renderworks |

461

Parameter

Description

Camera Height

Sets the camera height; at placement, the camera is set to a default height of 1500 mm or
50. If a Z value is also specified for the camera object, the total camera height is the sum
of the Z height and the Camera Height.

Look To Height

Sets the height of the camera look-to point; at placement, the look-to height is set to a
default height of 1500 mm or 50. If a Z value is also specified for the camera object, the
total look-to height is the sum of the Z height and the Look To Height.

Top/Plan View

Switches to a Top/Plan view of the 2D camera

Display Camera View

Switches to display the 3D camera view (double-clicking on the camera in a 2D view also
switches to camera view)

Fine Tune Camera

View

Opens the Perspective View Controls dialog box, for making fine adjustments to the
camera view controls (see Adjusting the Camera View on page 462)

Projection

Select Perspective or Orthogonal projection for the camera view; Perspective creates an
adjustable clipping frame for the camera view, while Orthogonal is useful for an elevation
view (for example, a skewed elevation view of a building which is not in a standard view).
Available parameters depend on the selected projection.

Render Mode

Selects a render mode for the 3D camera view

Aspect Ratio

Sets the aspect ratio of the perspective clipping window; the clipping window can also be
set to the page size or to a custom aspect ratio

Custom Aspect

When a custom Aspect Ratio is selected, enter the custom ratio

For Film Size of

Specifies the camera film size, and determines the focal length of the camera (has no effect
on the camera view)

Focal Length is

Displays the camera focal length, based on film size

Field of View

Specifies the view angle; set to a default angle of 65 degrees. Use the control point to set
the view angle on the 2D camera with the mouse.

For DPI of

Calculates the pixel size when exporting the camera view (has no effect on the camera
view)

Pixel Size is

Displays the pixel size based on the DPI setting

Clip Frame Scale %

Scales the size of the clipping window frame

Left/Right Tilt Angle

Tilts the camera to the left or right, for more accurate perspective matching

Camera Name

Specifies a name for the camera, which can be displayed or hidden in 2D view; move the
camera name text control point to adjust the position of the name

462

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

Parameter

Description

Camera Display

Select a camera display mode; the camera name only displays in 2D

None: Hides the camera in 2D and 3D views, and hides the camera name
2D: Displays the camera in 2D view, but hides the camera name, and hides the camera
in a 3D view
3D: Displays the cameras perspective clipping window bounding box in 2D view,
displays the camera in 3D view, and hides the camera name
2D + 3D: Shows the camera in 2D and 3D views, but hides the camera name
2D + Name: Shows the camera and camera name in 2D view, but hides the camera in 3D
views
3D + Name: Shows the camera in 3D view, shows the camera name in 2D view, but
hides the camera in 2D view (displays a locus instead)
2D + 3D + Name: Shows the camera and camera name in 2D view, and shows the
camera in 3D views
The 3D camera view displays the bounding box of the camera view, the view line, and the
look-to end point. Displaying a camera in a 3D view allows it to be easily selected during
design development, and it can be hidden later for final presentation

Auto Update 3D View

When selected, automatically updates the 3D camera view with every parameter change;
for complex models, deselect when making several parameter changes, and then either
re-select Auto Update 3D View or click Display Camera View to update the camera view
with any parameter changes

Auto Center 3D View

Automatically centers the view when Display Camera View is clicked, or the camera is
double-clicked

Adjusting the Camera View

The camera view settings can be fine tuned in real-time, and the display attributes specified.
To adjust the camera view:
1. Click Fine Tune Camera View from the Object Info palette of a selected camera object.
The Perspective View Controls dialog box opens. Either use the sliders or enter values to adjust the camera
settings; changes are reflected automatically in the drawing. Changes are easier to see during adjustment when
in wireframe or OpenGL render mode.
For Camera Height, Look To Height, and Camera Distance, the slider range is proportional to the displayed
value. To expand the slider range, enter a larger value.

Setting a Camera View in Renderworks |

463

Parameter

Description

Camera Height

Moves the camera vertically

Camera Pan

Pans the camera, rotating it about its axis within a +/- 20 degree range, as if it were on a tripod

Camera Move
Left/Right

Rotates the camera about the look-to point, within a +/- 20 degree range

Camera Distance

Moves the camera towards or away from the look-to point

Look To Height

Sets the height of the look-to point, which effectively tilts the camera vertically

Focal Length
(zoom)

Acts like a zoom lens; sets the lens focal length, from 10 to 200 mm and changes the field of
view angle

Perspective

Increases or decreases the perspective effect, making the perspective lines vanish more or less
steeply about the look-to point; works most effectively when the look-to point is at the center
of the scene or object being viewed

Clip Frame
Aspect Ratio

Sets the aspect of the perspective clipping window; use in conjunction with the Clip Frame
Size to obtain the desired window size

Clip Frame Size

Sets the scale of the perspective clipping window; use in conjunction with the Clip Frame
Aspect Ratio to obtain the desired window size

Render Mode

Selects a render mode for the 3D camera view

2. A camera object can be copied to insert additional camera views. In addition, the 2D camera display attributes
can be set by fill and pen foreground and background colors in the Attributes palette. Control points adjust the
field of view angle, the look-to point, and the camera name location.

464

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

Apparent field of view

Field of view angle

control point

Look-to point
control point

Lens field of view

Camera 1

Camera name text

control point

Fill/Pen Color Attribute

Parameter

Fill foreground

Sets the field of view angle color when the camera height is higher than the look-to
height

Fill background

Sets the text color for the camera name

Pen foreground

Sets the color of the view line connecting the camera to the look-to point, as well as
the color of the 3D camera representation

Pen background

Sets the color of the angle of view lines

The divergence between the apparent field of view angle and the lens field of view angle increases as the
difference between the camera and look-to heights increases. When the camera and look-to heights are equal, the
lens field of view angle line (dashed gray line by default) is not visible.

Fit to Objects
The Fit to Objects command provides an easy way to zoom in and out of a drawing. There are two options: fit the
window around all the objects in the drawing, or fit the window around a particular object or set of objects.
To fit the drawing window around all visible objects in the drawing:
1. Ensure that the current layer contains the object(s) to view, and that no objects are selected.
2. Select View > Zoom > Fit to Objects. Alternatively, click the Fit to Objects button on the View bar.
Vectorworks zooms in or out so that all the objects in the drawing display in the drawing area.

Fit to Page Area |

465

To fit the view to a particular object or set of objects:

1. Ensure that the current layer contains the object(s) to view.
2. Select the object or objects to view.
3. Select View > Zoom > Fit to Objects. Alternatively, click the Fit to Objects button on the View bar.
Vectorworks zooms in to display only the selected object(s) in the drawing area.

Fit to Page Area

The Fit to Page Area command displays the entire print area in the drawing window. For a single page drawing, this
command displays the entire page. For a drawing with two or more pages, all of the pages display at one time.
To fit the print area in the window:
Select View > Zoom > Fit to Page Area. Alternatively, click the Fit to Page Area button on the View bar.
Vectorworks zooms in or out to display all pages in the print area.

466

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

Viewing History
Vectorworks automatically records a history of the last ten changes in drawing view, including projection, perspective
and zoom changes. Click the Previous View and Next View buttons on the View bar to move through the change
history stack.

Previous View

Next View

On a Windows system with a five-button mouse, buttons 4 and 5 on the mouse (which invoke the Back and Forward
commands in web browsers) invoke Previous View and Next View, respectively.

Adding Light
Once one or more light sources have been added to the drawing, it can be rendered to mimic the effect of light on the
drawing surfaces.
Default lighting is automatically added to a drawing for basic visibility of rendered objects. The default lighting is
fixed to the camera so that it always lights an object appropriately. However, rendering a complex scene usually
requires the addition of light sources; the addition of a visible light automatically hides the default lighting.
Light added to a Vectorworks drawing can be ambient or diffused. Ambient light affects all surfaces equally. Diffused
lighting affects surfaces differently depending on the angle of the light source and position of the surfaces.

Ambient Light and Sunlight

Setting Lighting Options
The Set Lighting Options command specifies the ambient light brightness and default color for the current layer, or,
when Unified View is selected, the view (Design Series Required). By default, the ambient light parameters are set to
On, with a Color of white, and a Brightness of 35%. When Renderworks is installed, this command also sets the white
balance for any light sources with a color temperature, and specifies environment background lighting parameters
when a Renderworks HDRI background resource has been added to the drawing (see Creating HDRI Backgrounds
on page 755).
The ambient light of a selected viewport can be edited by clicking Lighting Options from the Object Info palette (see
Sheet Layer Viewport Parameters on page 706).

Adding Light |

467

To set ambient light:

1. Switch to the layer where the desired ambient light settings are to be set.
2. Select View > Lighting > Set Lighting Options.
The Lighting Options (Renderworks required) or Set Ambient Light dialog box opens. Set the ambient light for
the layer. The white balance setting can be adjusted for light sources in the layer with a color temperature
specified (Renderworks required). For a chart of common color temperature ranges, see Correlated Color
Temperature on page 836.

Parameter

Description

Ambient Info
On/Off

Activates or deactivates the ambient light settings for the layer

Brightness

Specifies the ambient light brightness; enter a percentage or drag the slider bar

Color

Specifies a default color associated with the ambient light; click the color box to
select the color

Emitter White Balance

(Renderworks required)
Color Temperature

Select a color temperature that will be balanced to appear white. Lower

temperatures, which might otherwise have an orange cast, or higher
temperatures, which might otherwise appear with a blue tint, are adjusted to
appear white. Select Custom to specify a temperature to be white balanced.

Custom (K)

If a Custom Color Temperature is specified, enter the temperature in Kelvin

Environment Lighting (HDRI)

(Renderworks required)

When an HDRI layer background has been selected for the layer or viewport,
specifies how to control its lighting contribution to the rendering (see Creating
HDRI Backgrounds on page 755)

From Current Background

Uses the image environment background set for the layer as both a background
and a light source

468

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

Parameter

Description

From Selected Background

Lights the model with the colors from the HDRI background selected here

None

Uses the image environment background set for the layer or viewport as a
background only. The background does not contribute to lighting.

3. Click OK.

Adding Sunlight
Sunlight in Vectorworks is created by projecting parallel rays from a directional light.
To set the sun position:
1. Select View > Lighting > Set Sun Position.
The Set Sun Position dialog box opens. Enter the sun position information.

Parameter

Description

Site

Specifies the sites latitude and longitude

Time Zone Meridian

Specifies the sites time zone; one hour of difference is equal to 15 of longitude

Page North

Normally, the drawing is oriented to page north (true north, not magnetic north), and
no compensation is required; if the drawing was not created with this orientation,
specify an angular offset in degrees from page north

Date

Specifies the time of year

Time

Specifies the time of day

Daylight Savings
Results

Select if Daylight Saving time is in effect

Based on the settings made, displays the Azimuth (South at zero degrees, without Page
North rotation), Azimuth N. Relative (North at zero degrees, without Page North
rotation), Elevation (degrees above the horizon), and True Solar Time (takes into
account daylight savings time, site longitude and time zone, and the earths orbit and
tilt)

Adding Light |

469

2. Click OK and verify the results. If a directional light was selected before choosing the Set Sun Position
command, the command modifies the angles of light to the new azimuth and elevation. If no light was selected,
the tool inserts a new directional light at the specified sun position.
A shadow analysis can be performed for a site by inserting several light sources with identical parameters except
for time of day. Renderworks must be installed to conduct a shadow analysis.

Adding Light Sources

The Light tool places light sources in the drawing. Select the type of light and specify the light preferences from the
Tool bar.
Set Direction

Spot Light

Light Preferences

Directional Light
Point Light

Default Direction

When Renderworks is installed, additional parameters and light source types are available. These additions are
described in this section and in Advanced Renderworks Lighting on page 781.

Mode

Description

Directional Light

Projects light with parallel rays, like the sun

Point Light

Radiates light in all directions, like a bare light bulb

Spot Light

Projects light in a specific direction, aimed at a specific object, like a flashlight or

conventional spotlight

Default Direction

For directional lights, click to specify the light position

Set Direction

For directional lights, click to set the light direction, and then click to specify the light
position

Light Preferences

Sets the preferred light parameters

Adding a Light Source

Adding a visible light source to a drawing hides the default lighting scheme that is automatically present for basic
rendering purposes.
To add a light source:
1. Click the Light tool from the Visualization tool set.

470

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

From the Tool bar, select the type of light source to insert (directional light, point light, or spot light). If inserting
a directional light, select the light placement method (Default Direction or Set Direction).

2. Click the Light Preferences Tool bar button to specify the light source preferences for this session. Depending on
the light source selected, different parameters are available. In addition, certain parameters are only available
when Renderworks is installed.
The Light Preferences dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

On/Off

Shows or hides the light produced by the light source

Color

Specifies a color associated with the light source; click the color box to select the color.
This parameter is not available if Use Emitter is selected and a Color Temperature is
specified (Renderworks required).

Cast Shadows
(Renderworks required)

Select to create shadows

Brightness

Specifies the light source brightness; enter a percentage or drag the slider bar. A value
over 100% can be entered. This parameter is not available if Use Emitter is selected
(Renderworks required).

Use Emitter
(Renderworks required)

For accuracy, specifies the lights actual brightness and color temperature; leave
deselected to use the light as a simple light source

Get Brightness From

(Renderworks required)

Specifies the luminous quantity of a light

User Input
(Renderworks
required)

Specifies the brightness as an accurate number in Lux, Lumens, Footcandles, or

Candelas; the units vary depending on the light source

Distribution File
(Renderworks
required)

Does not apply to directional, point, or spot lights (see Advanced Renderworks
Lighting on page 781)

Adding Light |
Parameter

Description

Color Temperature
(Renderworks required)

Specifies the light color temperature in Kelvin. This refers to an ideal black body
emitter, glowing red hot or white hot. A lower temperature generates an orange
color; the hotter the temperature, the closer to white the color of the light is.

471

Specifying this parameter is optional. If not specified, the default temperature is 0,

meaning that the final emission color for the light is entirely controlled by the selection
in Color.
When the temperature is specified, Color cannot be changed. The final emission color is
set by the Color Temperature.
Color temperature settings can be white-balanced on a per-layer basis; see Setting
Lighting Options on page 466.
Directional, Spot, or
Point Light Specs

Click to set additional specifications for the light source

3. Click Directional Light Specs, Spot Light Specs, or Point Light Specs, for the selected light source type, to
specify additional parameters.

Parameter

Description

Directional Light
Direction

Specifies the lights direction by either specifying the light angle or vector

Angle

Sets the lights angle by azimuth and elevation. The azimuth angle is set based on an
angle of 0 degrees at the negative Y axis, and is positive in a counter-clockwise
direction; the elevation angle is the angle above (positive) or below (negative) the
horizon.

Vector

Indicates the direction of the light by specifying the coordinates of its X, Y, and Z delta
vectors

Point Light
Dist Falloff

Select the distance falloff function (rate of intensity change while moving along the
beam away from the light source)

472

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

Parameter

Description

Spot Lights
Spread/Beam diagram

Drag the handles on the diagram to set the spot light Spread and Beam angles, or enter
the values in the fields below the diagram

Spread Beam

Spread

Specifies the spread angle of the spot light (light cones maximum angle)

Beam

Specifies the beam angle of the spot light (cone of light that does not change intensity up
to the spread angle, after which the angle falloff determines its intensity)

Falloffs

Specify the distance and angle falloff function

Dist Falloff

Select the distance falloff function (rate of intensity change while moving along the
beam away from the light source)

Ang Falloff

Select the angle falloff function (specifies the rate of intensity change between the beam
and the spread)

4. Click OK to return to the Light Preferences dialog box. Click OK to return to the drawing.
5. Click to place a light object with the parameters specified in the Light Preferences dialog box.
If placing a directional light, click to specify the light position in Default Direction mode. In Set Direction mode,
click once to specify the light target or direction, and then click a second time to specify the light position.
2nd click

1st click

Set Direction mode of directional light placement depicted

If placing a spot light, click to place the light, and then drag to specify the light direction and target. The spot
light can be aimed at any object. Click again to set the spot light. The target Z height can be adjusted precisely
with the Look To Height parameter of the Object Info palette.
The spot light target handle and projection line only display when the spot light is selected. Use the 2D/3D
Selection tools to move the light. The target handle aims the spot light and can be adjusted with the 3D Selection
tool once the spot light has been created. Use the 3D Reshape tool to move the target handle constrained about
an axis selected in the Tool bar.

Adding Light |

473

1st click

2nd click

Light Source Properties

Light source parameters are displayed and can be modified in the Object Info palette. The parameters available
depend on the type of light source.
Some of the parameters are only available when Renderworks is installed; see Advanced Renderworks Lighting on
page 781 for information on the light types available in Renderworks.

Parameter

Description

Kind

Indicates the type of light source; change to a different type by selecting a different kind
from the displayed list
A custom, area, or line light requires Renderworks.

On/Off

Shows or hides the light produced by the light source. This setting can also be accessed
from the light context menu: right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the light,
and select Turn On or Turn Off.

Auto Update

Automatically renders the drawing when rendering-related parameters change

Update

When Auto Update is deselected, click to render the drawing when rendering-related
parameters change

Cast Shadows
(Renderworks required)

Select to create shadows

Lit Fog
(Renderworks required)

Creates a special volumetric lighting effect for the light source when used in combination
with the Lit Fog Renderworks background weather effect (see Creating Weather
Effects on page 756)

Use Emitter
(Renderworks required)

For accuracy, specifies the lights actual brightness and color temperature; leave
deselected to use the light as a simple light source. Required for a custom, area, or line
light.

Brightness

Specifies the light source brightness; enter a percentage or drag the slider bar. A value
over 100% can be entered. This parameter is not available for custom, area, and line
lights, or if Use Emitter is selected (Renderworks required).

474

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

Parameter

Description

Brightness From
(Renderworks required)

Specifies the location of the light intensity data for a custom, line, or area light (either
user input or distribution file); the distribution file can be specified by clicking Load
Distribution

Brightness Value
(Renderworks required)

Specifies the brightness as an accurate number

Brightness Unit
(Renderworks required)

Select Lux, Lumens, Footcandles, or Candelas for the unit of Brightness; the available
units depend on the light type

Dimmer
(Renderworks required)

Dims the light source brightness (intensity); enter a percentage or drag the slider bar.
Only the brightness of the light source is affected; the color temperature is not changed.

Light Rotation Angle

(Renderworks required)

Specifies the rotation angle of a custom light source around an axis connecting the light
location to the light target; this angle defines the plane for the intensity distribution
curve, and is displayed in red on the custom light object

Use Distribution File

(Renderworks required)

Specifies whether to use the attached emission profile data file for the area or line light
intensity information; distribution data is required for a custom light

Distribution File
(Renderworks required)

Displays the distribution file name when a valid distribution file has been selected, or
None if a valid distribution file has not been designated (click Load Distribution to
specify a file)

Load Distribution
(Renderworks required)

For a custom, area, or line light, loads light emission profile data from a standard file.
The brightness value is obtained using the integral of the raw emission data provided
with the file. The file must be a text file with industry standard intensity distribution data
in CIE, IESNA, CIBSE, or EULUMADAT format (.ies, .cib, .cie, and .ldt).

Color Temperature
(Renderworks required)

Specifies the light color temperature in Kelvin. This refers to an ideal black body emitter,
glowing red hot or white hot. A lower temperature generates an orange color; the
hotter the temperature, the closer to white the color of the light is (see Correlated Color
Temperature on page 836 for typical light source color temperature ranges).
Specifying this parameter is optional. If not specified, the default temperature is 0,
meaning that the final emission color for the light is entirely controlled by the selection in
Color.
When the temperature is specified, Color cannot be changed. The final emission color is
set by the Color Temperature.
Color temperature settings can be white-balanced on a per-layer basis; see Setting
Lighting Options on page 466.

Color

Specifies a color associated with the light source; click the color box to select the color.
This parameter is not available if Use Emitter is selected and a Color Temperature is
specified (Renderworks required).

Color Filtering
(Renderworks required)

For area lights, filters the color of the light emanating from the area light object by the
color or texture of its original geometry

Dist Fall

Indicates the distance falloff function for a point, spot, custom, area, or line light
(specifies the rate of intensity change while moving along the beam away from the light
source)

Adding Light |

475

Parameter

Description

Quality
(Renderworks required)

For area and line lights, specifies the sampling quality of the light; select From Render
Mode to use the setting specified in Sampling Quality in the rendering options

Render Geometry
(Renderworks required)

For area and line lights, renders the light object geometry

Show Direction
(Renderworks required)

For area lights, shows the light direction indicators

Flip Direction
(Renderworks required)

For area lights, flips the direction of the light being emitted

Ang Fall

Select the angle falloff function (rate of intensity change between the beam and the
spread)

Spread/Beam diagram

Drag the handles on the diagram to set the spot light Spread and Beam angles, or enter
the values in the fields below the diagram

Spread Beam

Spread

Specifies the spread angle of the spot light (light cones maximum angle)

Beam

Specifies the beam angle of the spot light (cone of light that does not change intensity up
to the spread angle, after which the angle falloff determines its intensity)

X/Y/Z or X/Y/Z

Specifies the location of the light source in relation to the active layer plane or working
plane

Look To Height

For spot lights, sets the Z height above the active layer plane of the spot light target
handle

Azimuth

Indicates the azimuth for a directional light (South at zero degrees); enter new values or
drag the slider bar to set

Elevation

Indicates the elevation (degrees above the horizon) for a directional light; enter new
values or drag the slider bar to set

Pan/Tilt

Click the top button to display the spot light or custom light beam pan and tilt angles;
enter new values or drag the slider bar to set

X/Y/Z

Click the bottom button to display the light beam direction in terms of its X, Y, and Z
components

476

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

Parameter

Description

Set Light to View

Sets the orientation of the directional, spot, or custom light to that of the current view.
This setting can also be accessed from the light context menu: right-click (Windows) or
Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the light, and select Set Light to View.

Set View to Light

Sets the orientation of the current view to that of the directional, spot, or custom light.
This setting can also be accessed from the light context menu: right-click (Windows) or
Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the light, and select Set View to Light.

A symbol that contains a light object can be copied to reproduce identical lights. Change the light intensity for
each symbol in the Object Info palette.
Once a light has been placed on the drawing, the 2D Selection or 3D Selection tool can be used to change its location,
and, depending on the light type, beam parameters.

Rendering with Vectorworks |

Light Type

Beam Parameter

Description

Point, Spot, Directional

Light location

Click on the light with the move cursor and drag it to its
new location

477

The spot light target handle is not locked to its target. The
target handle location may need re-adjusting after moving
the spot light.
Spot, Directional

Orientation and view

Select the light; in the Object Info palette, click Set Light to
View to set the light orientation to the current view
orientation, or click Set View to Light to set the
orientation of the view to that of the light

Directional

Azimuth and
elevation direction

Click on the azimuth or elevation control points to change

the directional light parameters. Move the handles with
the mouse, or enter the azimuth and elevation values in
the Data bar.
Elevation
control point

Light location
control point
Azimuth control point

Spot

Target direction

Click on the handle with the 3D Selection tool to change

the spot light target direction; drag to the new target and
click to set

Click

Directional

Beam direction

Click and drag with the hand cursor to change the beam
direction

Click

Rendering with Vectorworks

The render modes in Vectorworks translate the drawing in various ways to create an image with additional realistic
details. For example, a Hidden Line rendering is similar to the non-rendered (Wireframe) image, but it hides the
portion of the objects that would not normally be visible. An OpenGL rendering also has hidden lines, and colors and

478

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

shading; it also shows how the light sources interact with the object surfaces, and it can show any textures that were
applied.
The View bar displays the Render Modes for quick access to the rendering commands. The View bar options
display the Render Mode - Short (displaying a shortened version) or the Render Mode - Long (displaying the
current render mode options and the current render mode). The Current Render Mode Options button opens
the settings dialog box for the current render mode, if applicable.

Current Render Mode Options

Render Modes list

To select a render mode:

Select View > Rendering, and then select the desired render mode.
To cancel a render process before it is complete, press Esc.

Rendering Command

Description

Wireframe

Nothing is rendered

OpenGL

Creates a good-quality, detailed rendering, with colors, shading, and

textures (optional); see OpenGL on page 480 for details

Hidden Line

Hides the edge lines of objects that are behind other objects, which gives a
solid appearance

Rendering with Vectorworks |

Rendering Command

Description

Dashed Hidden Line

Edge lines of objects that are behind other objects display as dashed lines

Unshaded Polygon

Displays objects as solids, and displays attributes such as colors

Shaded Polygon

An Unshaded Polygon rendering with shading added

Shaded Polygon - No Lines

A Shaded Polygon rendering with no edge lines

Final Shaded Polygon

A Hidden Line rendering on top of a Shaded Polygon - No Lines

rendering; edges and curved surfaces are cleaner than those in a Shaded
Polygon rendering

479

480

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

OpenGL
Use the OpenGL render mode to create good-quality rendering previews that are fast and interactive. (For
final-quality output, use Renderworks; see Rendering with Renderworks on page 781.)
The OpenGL mode performs lighting calculations based on polygons; this means that drawings with more polygons
render more realistically. More advanced renderers, such as Renderworks, calculate the lighting effects for each pixel.
This method takes more time, but it produces higher-quality renderings.
Vectorworks has a default lighting scheme, so that a basic rendering does not require an added light source. However,
the addition of a light source is usually necessary for a more realistic rendering (see Adding Light Sources on
page 469). The addition of a light source automatically hides the default lighting scheme, so that the scene is not too
bright.
OpenGL renders up to eight lights in a drawing; additional lights have no effect.
To get the best performance from OpenGL, use a video card that supports hardware-accelerated OpenGL. There are
significant compatibility issues with some cards; see www.vectorworks.net for a list of video cards that are compatible
with Vectorworks.
Vectorworks 8 files that were rendered in QuickDraw 3D automatically render in OpenGL when they are converted to
versions later than Vectorworks 8.

OpenGL Render Options

Use the OpenGL options to control the level of detail in rendered images, which in turn affects the render speed (less
detail renders faster). These settings apply only to the current drawing; they remain in effect in the current drawing
until the settings are changed. The current OpenGL settings are saved when you create a template (see Using
Drawing Tablets on page 95).
For smoother rendering of mesh objects, enable mesh smoothing in the document preferences (see Display
Preferences on page 59)
To set the OpenGL options:
1. Select View > Rendering > OpenGL Options.
The OpenGL Render Settings dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Detail

Specifies the level of detail for renderings; a low setting renders faster

Rendering with Vectorworks |

481

Parameter

Description

Use Textures
(Renderworks required)

Renders object textures; this provides better detail, but it takes longer to render

Use Anti-Aliasing

Filters the rendering and reduces pixellated edges; this option is unavailable if the
graphics card does not support the feature

Draw Edges
(Renderworks required)

Renders objects with lines drawn around the edges, similar to the lines in the Hidden
Line render mode

Use Shadows
(Renderworks required)

Objects in the drawing cast shadows on other objects (but not on the active layer
plane). For best results with OpenGL shadows, switch to an orthographic view, and
limit the use of point lights (turn off shadows for point lights, at a minimum).

On Ground Only
(Renderworks required)

If Use Shadows is selected, select this option for drawing objects to cast shadows on
a plane at the lowest point in the drawing which is usually the active layer plane
but not on other objects

Softness
(Renderworks required)

If Use Shadows is selected, select the level of softness for the shadow edges (a low
setting uses less memory and renders faster)
Point lights tend to produce more jagged shadows the farther they are from the
objects in the drawing. For smoother edges, move the light closer to the model.

2. Select the OpenGL render options, and click OK to change the settings for the file.

Line Render Options

Use the line render options to control the style and shade of dashed lines for Dashed Hidden Line mode. Other options
set the number of facet lines for the Hidden Line, Dashed Hidden Line, and Final Shaded Polygon modes. These
settings apply only to the current drawing; they remain in effect in the current drawing until the settings are changed.
The current line render settings are saved when you create a template (see Using Drawing Tablets on page 95).
To set line rendering options:
1. Select View > Rendering > Line Render Options.
The Line Render Options dialog box opens.

482

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

Parameter

Description

Dash Style

Select the dash style for hidden lines when the Dashed Hidden Line mode is selected.
The names and display order of the available dash styles can be changed; see Setting the
Default Dash Styles and Display Order on page 85.

Dash Shade

Adjust the slider to select how hidden lines are shaded when the Dashed Hidden Line
mode is selected

Preview

Displays a preview of the selected parameters

Smoothing Angle

Sets the angle to reduce facet lines when the Hidden Line, Dashed Hidden Line, or Final
Shaded Polygon mode is selected; if the value is greater than zero, facet lines will be
removed between any two faces of an object that are within that angle of each other

A Dashed Hidden Line rendering

with the Smoothing Angle set to 0

Sketch Hidden Line

Results
(Design Series
required)

A Dashed Hidden Line rendering

with the Smoothing Angle set to 15

Specifies whether to apply sketch effects to lines when the Hidden Line, Dashed Hidden
Line, or Final Shaded Polygon mode is selected; see Sketch Rendering on page 674 in
the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide

Rendering with Vectorworks |

Parameter

Description

Document Default
Sketch Style
(Design Series
required)

Sets the default sketch style for lines when the Hidden Line, Dashed Hidden Line, or
Final Shaded Polygon mode is selected; see Setting the Default Sketch Style on
page 674 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide. Click Edit to open the Sketch
Style Editor dialog box for additional sketch style modification.

2. Select the line render options, and click OK to change the settings for the file.

483

484

| Chapter 13: Viewing and Rendering

Dimensioning and Annotating

14

Vectorworks provides automated tools for dimensioning, measuring distance, and annotating drawings.

Dimensioning
Use Vectorworks dimensioning tools to measure distances, angles, 2D and 3D object dimensions, and also add
dimensioning lines with the measurements to the drawing.
Vectorworks uses the default dimension standard set for the document when a new dimension is added. The default
standard can be set in the document preferences (see Dimension Preferences on page 60). In addition, when a
dimension tool is active, the default dimension standard can be set from the Tool bar. Select any of the built-in
dimension standards, or create a custom standard specifically for the drawing. If the default dimension standard for
the document is changed, any new dimension that is added will use the new standard; no existing dimensions are
affected.

Using Custom Dimension Standards

Custom dimension standards can be created in the current file or imported from another drawing file. There are three
ways to access the Custom Dimensions dialog box for managing custom dimensions.
Select File > Document Settings > Document Preferences. From the Document Preferences dialog box, click the
Dimensions tab, and then click Custom.
With any one of the dimension tools in the Dims/Notes tool set selected, open the Dim Std menu on the Tool bar
and select Custom Standards from the list.
With an existing dimension selected, open the Dim Std menu on the Object Info palette and select Custom
Standards from the list.
From the Custom Dimensions dialog box, several functions are available.

486

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

Function

Description

New

Opens the Assign Name dialog box, to create a new custom dimension standard; see Creating a
Custom Dimension Standard on page 486

Delete

Deletes the selected custom dimension standard and replaces it with the standard you specify; see
Deleting a Custom Dimension Standard on page 488

Edit

Opens the Custom Dimension dialog box, to edit the selected custom dimension standard; see
Editing a Custom Dimension Standard on page 488

Rename

Opens the Assign Name dialog box, to rename the selected custom dimension standard; see
Renaming a Custom Dimension Standard on page 488

Import

Opens a file and imports the custom dimension standard you specify; see Importing a Custom
Dimension Standard on page 489

Replace

Opens the Replace Dimension Standards dialog box, to specify which dimension standard to
replace, and which standard to replace it with; see Replacing a Dimension Standard on page 489

Creating a Custom Dimension Standard

To create a custom dimension standard:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Document Preferences. From the Document Preferences dialog box, click the
Dimensions tab, and then click Custom.
Alternatively, with any one of the dimension tools in the Dims/Notes tool set selected, open the Dim Std menu
on the Tool bar and select Custom Standards from the list. Or, with an existing dimension selected, open the Dim
Std menu on the Object Info palette and select Custom Standards from the list.
The Custom Dimensions dialog box opens.
2. Click New.
The Assign Name dialog box opens.
3. Enter a name for this dimension standard and click OK.
4. Select the new dimension from the Standards list and click Edit.
The Custom Dimension dialog box opens.

Dimensioning |

487

Parameter

Description

Dimension line distances

Specifies the dimension line distances for linear, radial, and ordinate dimensions

Note: Distances are in

Displays the drawing units currently in use for the file

Tolerance Size

Sets the size of the tolerance in relation to the dimension text

Witness Lines

Applies witness lines to dimensions; when deselected, witness lines are hidden

Fixed Witness Line Length

Allows the setting of a fixed length for witness lines

Dimensions Always Inside

Sets dimension values to always display between the witness lines

Linear Markers

Select the marker attributes for use with linear dimension markers (see Setting
Default Marker Types on page 75)

Other Markers

Select the marker attributes for use with other dimension markers (see Setting
Default Marker Types on page 75)

Text Rotation

Sets how text is handled when a dimension is rotated; text can be horizontal, aligned,
or horizontal/vertical

Align Vertical Text Left

When a dimension is placed vertically, keeps the text to the left of the dimension line

SIA Format Numbers

Sets all numbers to use the SIA format; not available when a dual layout is selected

Layout

Sets whether dimensions display as single values, dual - side by side, or dual - stacked

Dual view

If a dual layout is selected, specify whether both dimensions are shown, primary only,
or secondary only

5. Enter the desired values for the display of dimensions, and then click OK. Click OK again to close the Custom
Dimensions dialog box.

488

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

6. To set the new standard as the default for the document, select the new standard from the Dimension Standard
list, and then click OK.

Editing a Custom Dimension Standard

To edit a custom dimension standard:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Document Preferences. From the Document Preferences dialog box, click the
Dimensions tab, and then click Custom.
Alternatively, with any one of the dimension tools in the Dims/Notes tool set selected, open the Dim Std menu
on the Tool bar and select Custom Standards from the list. Or, with an existing dimension selected, open the Dim
Std menu on the Object Info palette and select Custom Standards from the list.
The Custom Dimensions dialog box opens.
2. Select the custom standard to edit, and click Edit.
The Custom Dimension dialog box opens.
3. Edit the settings as needed, and click OK.

Deleting a Custom Dimension Standard

To delete a custom dimension standard:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Document Preferences. From the Document Preferences dialog box, click the
Dimensions tab, and then click Custom.
Alternatively, with any one of the dimension tools in the Dims/Notes tool set selected, open the Dim Std menu
on the Tool bar and select Custom Standards from the list. Or, with an existing dimension selected, open the Dim
Std menu on the Object Info palette and select Custom Standards from the list.
The Custom Dimensions dialog box opens.
2. Select the custom standard to delete, and click Delete.
The Replace Dimension dialog box opens.

3. Select a new dimension standard to replace the standard being deleted, and then click OK.
Any existing dimensions that used the deleted standard are changed to the replacement standard.

Renaming a Custom Dimension Standard

To rename a custom dimension standard:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Document Preferences. From the Document Preferences dialog box, click the
Dimensions tab, and then click Custom.

Dimensioning |

489

Alternatively, with any one of the dimension tools in the Dims/Notes tool set selected, open the Dim Std menu
on the Tool bar and select Custom Standards from the list. Or, with an existing dimension selected, open the Dim
Std menu on the Object Info palette and select Custom Standards from the list.
The Custom Dimensions dialog box opens.
2. Select the custom standard to rename, and click Rename.
The Assign Name dialog box opens.
3. Enter a new name for this dimension standard and click OK.

Importing a Custom Dimension Standard

To import a custom dimension standard:
1. Select File > Document Settings > Document Preferences. From the Document Preferences dialog box, click the
Dimensions tab, and then click Custom.
Alternatively, with any one of the dimension tools in the Dims/Notes tool set selected, open the Dim Std menu
on the Tool bar and select Custom Standards from the list. Or, with an existing dimension selected, open the Dim
Std menu on the Object Info palette and select Custom Standards from the list.
The Custom Dimensions dialog box opens.
2. Click Import.
The standard Open dialog box displays.
3. Select the file from which the dimension standard will be imported and click Open.
The Select Item dialog box opens.

4. Select the dimension standard to import and click OK.

The imported dimension displays in the Custom Dimensions dialog box for the current drawing file.

Replacing a Dimension Standard

Replace any default or custom dimension standard with another dimension standard.

490

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

To replace a dimension standard:

1. Select File > Document Settings > Document Preferences. From the Document Preferences dialog box, click the
Dimensions tab, and then click Custom.
Alternatively, with any one of the dimension tools in the Dims/Notes tool set selected, open the Dim Std menu
on the Tool bar and select Custom Standards from the list. Or, with an existing dimension selected, open the Dim
Std menu on the Object Info palette and select Custom Standards from the list.
The Custom Dimensions dialog box opens.
2. Click Replace.
The Replace Dimension Standards dialog box opens.

3. Select the dimension standard to be replaced in the Replace list and select the standard to replace it with in the
with list. Click OK.
Any existing dimensions that used the previous standard are changed to the replacement standard.

Associative Dimensioning
In document preferences, the Associate dimensions option is selected by default. This automatically links dimensions
to objects, including walls and wall components. For linear dimensions to be associated, the dimension must be
applied between two vertex points.

Green constraint markers

show that the dimension is
associated with the object

The dimension is not

associated with the
object

A dimension is linked to its associated object with coincident constraints. This means that, when a linear, radial, or
diametrical dimension is associated with an object, if the dimension is resized or moved, the associated object is
resized or moved also, and vice versa. The association of any dimension with an object can be removed manually
through the Edit Constraints dialog box (Modify > Edit Constraints).
If an angular associative dimension is resized or moved, the association with the object is broken. To maintain the
association, move the dimensioned object instead.
Associative dimensions can exist across layers of the same scale. To apply an associative dimension across layers,
Layer Options must be set to Show/Snap/Modify Others and both layers must be in a Top/Plan standard view.

Dimensioning |

491

Associative dimensions can be created on viewports in annotation edit mode (see Creating Annotations for Sheet
Layer Viewports on page 715).
If an associative dimension is used across layers, the association is broken if the scale of one of the layers changes.
If a drawing has overlapping objects, it may be unclear which object should be associated with a dimension. When you
dimension objects that have a shared endpoint, the Auto associate document preference controls whether the
association is made automatically or manually. (See Dimension Preferences on page 60.)
To always automatically associate a dimension with the top-most object, enable the Auto associate option.
To manually select the object with which to associate the dimension, disable the Auto associate option; when you
dimension an object that shares an endpoint with another object, the Select Object dialog box opens.

The triangle is being

dimensioned, but the
triangle overlaps with the
purple rectangle and they
share an endpoint

Because Auto associate

is disabled, the Select
Object dialog box opens
to allow selection of the
appropriate object

Unconstrained Linear Dimensioning

The Unconstrained Linear Dimension tool can draw dimension lines at any angle. Along with measuring and
dimensioning an object, use this tool to calculate the distance between two or more points in the drawing area.
Unconstrained Chain

Unconstrained Baseline

Unconstrained Linear

Chain Dimension Preferences

Chain Dimension Preferences

Dimension Standards

Mode

Description

Unconstrained Linear

Creates a dimension line with a single measurement

Unconstrained Chain

Creates a continuous chain of dimension lines

Unconstrained Baseline

Creates a series of connected dimension lines, starting from an initial base point

492

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

Mode

Description

Chain Dimension
Preferences

For Unconstrained Chain mode, specifies whether dimensions are created as a single
unconstrained chain object, or as individual dimension objects; also enables collision
control, which automatically spaces text blocks so that they do not overlap

Dimension Standards

To change the dimension standard for new dimensions created in the document, select
a standard from the list; select Custom Standards to create or manage custom
dimensions (see Using Custom Dimension Standards on page 485)

The dimension text can be moved as needed. See Modifying Dimensions on page 505.

Unconstrained Linear Dimension

The Unconstrained Linear mode creates a dimension line with a single measurement.
To create a dimension line with a single measurement:
1. Click the Unconstrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Unconstrained Linear
mode.
2. Click to set the measurement start point.
3. Click to end the measurement.
4. Move the cursor away from the object.
This specifies how far the dimension line is offset from the measured object.
5. Click to place the dimension line.
2nd click
3rd click

1st click

Unconstrained Chain Dimension

Unconstrained Chain mode creates a series of connected dimension lines, with each line segment displaying its
specific measurements.
When dimensions are part of a chain object, they can all be moved at once, and their attributes and properties can be
changed as a group. The properties of dimensions in a chain object also can be edited individually. When dimensions
in the chain are modified, the other dimensions adjust automatically. See Modifying Dimensions on page 505 for
more information about editing chain objects.
To create a chain of connected dimension lines:
1. Click the Unconstrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Unconstrained Chain
mode.
2. Select Chain Dimension Preferences from the Tool bar.

Dimensioning |

493

3. Select whether to Use Chain Dimension Objects or to Use Individual Dimensions. Also select whether to use
collision control to automatically space text blocks so that they do not overlap. Click OK.
4. Click to set the measurement start point.
5. Click to end the measurement of the first segment.
6. Move the cursor away from the line and click to place the dimension line.
This specifies where to draw the dimension line and place the measurements.
7. Move the cursor to the end of the next segment and click to set its endpoint.
8. Continue setting segments.
9. Double-click to end the chain.
2nd click

3rd click

Double-click

1st click

Unconstrained Baseline Dimension

Unconstrained Baseline mode creates a series of connected dimension lines, with each line segment measuring the
distance from the initial starting point (the base point).
To create a series of baseline dimension lines:
1. Click the Unconstrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Unconstrained
Baseline mode.
2. Click to set the measurement start point.
3. Click to end the measurement of the first segment.
4. Move the cursor away from the line and click to place the dimension line.
This specifies where to draw the dimension line and place the measurements.
5. Move the cursor to the end of the next segment and click to set its endpoint.
6. Continue setting segments.
7. Double-click to end the baseline.

494

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

3rd click

2nd click

Double-click

1st click

Constrained Linear Dimensioning

The Constrained Linear Dimension tool draws dimension lines that are constrained horizontally or vertically. Along
with measuring and dimensioning an object, use this tool to calculate the horizontal or vertical distance between two
or more points in the drawing.
Constrained Chain

Ordinate

Chain Dimension Preferences

Constrained Linear

Constrained Baseline

Selected Objects

Dimension Standards

Mode

Description

Constrained Linear

Creates a constrained dimension line with a single measurement

Constrained Chain

Creates a continuous chain of constrained dimension lines

Constrained
Baseline

Creates a series of connected constrained dimension lines, starting from an initial base point

Ordinate

Creates a series of constrained ordinate dimensions, starting from an initial base point

Selected Objects

Creates a constrained dimension line for the greatest span of a selected object or group of
objects

Chain Dimension
Preferences

For Constrained Chain mode, specifies whether dimensions are created as a single chain
object, or as individual dimension objects; also enables collision control, which automatically
spaces text blocks so that they do not overlap

Dimension
Standards

To change the dimension standard for new dimensions created in the document, select a
standard from the list; select Custom Standards to create or manage custom dimensions (see
Using Custom Dimension Standards on page 485)

The dimension text can be moved as needed. See Modifying Dimensions on page 505.

Constrained Linear Dimension

The Constrained Linear mode creates a constrained dimension line with a single measurement.

Dimensioning |

495

To create a constrained dimension line with a single measurement:

1. Click the Constrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Constrained Linear
mode.
2. Click to set the measurement start point.
3. Click to set the end of the measurement.
4. Move the cursor away from the object.
This specifies how far the dimension line is offset from the measured object. The dimension preview snaps to a
horizontal or vertical orientation.
5. Click to place the dimension line.

2nd click

3rd click

1st click

Constrained Chain Dimension

The Constrained Chain mode creates a series of constrained, connected dimension lines, with each line segment
displaying its specific measurements.
When dimensions are part of a chain object, they can all be moved at once, and their attributes and properties can be
changed as a group. The properties of dimensions in a chain object also can be edited individually. When dimensions
in the chain are modified, the other dimensions adjust automatically. See Modifying Dimensions on page 505 for
more information about editing chain objects.
To create a chain of constrained connected dimension lines:
1. Click the Constrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Constrained Chain
mode.
2. Select Chain Dimension Preferences from the Tool bar.
3. Select whether to Use Chain Dimension Objects or to Use Individual Dimensions. Also select whether to use
collision control to automatically space text blocks so that they do not overlap. Click OK.
4. Click to set the measurement start point.
5. Click to set the end of the first measurement.
6. Move the cursor away from the object.
This specifies how far the dimension line is offset from the measured object. The dimension preview snaps to a
horizontal or vertical orientation.
7. Click to place the first dimension line.

496

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

8. Move the cursor to the end of the next segment and click to set its endpoint.
9. Continue setting segments.
10. Double-click to end the chain.

3rd click
2nd click
1st click
4th click

5th click

Double-click

Constrained chain dimension with collision control preference enabled

Constrained Baseline Dimension

Constrained Baseline modes create a series of constrained, connected dimension lines, with each line segment
measuring the distance from the initial starting point (the base point).
To create a series of constrained baseline dimension lines:
1. Click the Constrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Constrained Baseline
mode.
2. Click to set the measurement start point.
3. Click to set the end of the first measurement.
4. Move the cursor away from the object.
This specifies how far the dimension line is offset from the measured object. The dimension preview snaps to a
horizontal or vertical orientation.
5. Click to place the first dimension line.
6. Move the cursor to the end of the next segment and click to set its endpoint.
7. Continue setting segments.
8. Double-click to end the baseline.

Ordinate Dimensions
The Ordinate mode measures and dimensions a series of either horizontal or vertical distances from one fixed point.

Dimensioning |

497

To draw ordinate dimensions:

1. Click the Constrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Ordinate mode.
2. Click to set the measurement start point; the first segment is always considered the fixed point and is labeled 0.
3. Click to set the length of the first segment.
4. Move the cursor horizontally or vertically to the first location to be measured from the initial segment; click to set
the segment.
5. Continue creating segments.
6. Double-click to complete the dimension.
2nd click

1st click
Double-click
3rd click

Selected Object Dimensions

The Selected Objects mode measures and dimensions the horizontal or vertical span of any 2D or 3D object, or the
edge-to-edge span of several objects or a group of objects. In all cases, the tool measures the greatest span. Horizontal
Dimension lines can be drawn inside, above, or below an object or group of objects. Vertical dimension lines can be
drawn inside, to the right, or to the left of an object or group of objects.
1. Select the object or objects to dimension.
2. Click the Constrained Linear Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Selected Objects mode.
3. Click near the object or group of objects to be dimensioned.
4. Move the cursor in the desired direction where the dimension should be created. A preview dimension displays,
constrained in either the horizontal or vertical direction.
5. Click to set the position of the dimension line.
2nd click

1st click

Dual Dimensioning
Dual dimensioning displays two sets of values, such as inches and millimeters, within a single dimension. These
values have independent unit settings and attributes. Dual dimensions can be displayed side by side or stacked.

498

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

Side-by-side dual dimension

Stacked dual dimension

Control the units for each dimension through File > Document Settings > Units. The primary dimension uses the
Units set on the General Display and Dimensions tab of the Units dialog box (see Units on page 64). The settings on
the Dual Dimensions tab provide full control of the unit of measurement, unit marks, rounding, and formatting used
for the secondary dimension.
Once a dual dimension is placed on the drawing, adjust the individual attributes for both the primary and secondary
dimension from the Object Info palette. The Dual View and Prim/Sec attributes apply to dual dimensions (see
Modifying Dimensions on page 505).

Radial Dimensioning
The Radial Dimension tool measures and marks either radius or diameter dimensions for arcs and circles. This tool
does not work on ovals or objects with rounded corners.
The Radial Dimension tool can place the dimension lines and measurements either inside or outside of the circle/arc.
External Diametrical

Exterior Radial

Right-Hand Shoulder

Internal Diametrical

Interior Radial

Left-Hand Shoulder

Dimension Standards

Mode

Description

Internal Diametrical

Measures and dimensions the diameter of a circle or arc, placing the dimension inside
the object

External Diametrical

Measures and dimensions the diameter of a circle or arc, placing the dimension outside
the object

Interior Radial

Measures and dimensions the radius of a circle or arc, placing the dimension inside the
object

Exterior Radial

Measures and dimensions the radius of a circle or arc, placing the dimension outside
the object

Left-Hand Shoulder

Places an exterior measurement with the dimension text to the left of the dimension
leader shoulder

Right-Hand Shoulder

Places an exterior measurement with the dimension text to the right of the dimension
leader shoulder

Dimension Standards

To change the dimension standard for new dimensions created in the document, select
a standard from the list; select Custom Standards to create or manage custom
dimensions (see Using Custom Dimension Standards on page 485)

Dimensioning |

499

Diametrical Dimensioning Inside Circle/Arc

The Internal Diametrical Dimension mode measures and dimensions the diameter of a circle or arc, and places the
dimension inside the object.
To dimension the diameter of a circle or arc:
1. Click the Radial Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Internal Diametrical Dimension
mode.
2. Click on or within the arc or circle to dimension.
3. Move the cursor to preview the dimension line location.
4. Click to place the dimension.

Diametrical Dimensioning Outside Circle/Arc

The External Diametrical Dimension mode measures and dimensions the diameter of a circle or arc, and places the
dimension outside the object.
To dimension the diameter of a circle or arc:
1. Click the Radial Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select External Diametrical Dimension
mode.
2. Specify the side of the dimension line to place the measurement.
To place it to the right of the line, click Right-Hand Shoulder mode button. To place it to the left of the line, click
the Left-Hand Shoulder mode button.
3. Click on or within the arc or circle to dimension.
4. Move the cursor to preview the dimension line location.
5. Click to place the dimension.

Radial Dimensioning Inside Circle/Arc

The Interior Radial Dimension mode measures and dimensions the radius of a circle or arc, and places the dimension
inside the object.

500

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

To dimension the radius of a circle or arc:

1. Click the Radial Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Interior Radial Dimension mode.
2. Click on or within the arc or circle to dimension.
3. Move the cursor to preview the dimension line location.
4. Click to place the dimension.

Radial Dimensioning Outside Circle/Arc

The Exterior Radial Dimension mode measures and dimensions the radius of a circle or arc, and places the dimension
outside the object.
To dimension the radius of a circle or arc:
1. Click the Radial Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Exterior Radial Dimension mode.
2. Specify the side of the dimension line to place the measurement.
To place it to the right of the line, click the Right-Hand Shoulder mode button. To place it to the left of the line,
click the Left-Hand Shoulder mode button.
3. Click on or within the arc or circle to dimension.
4. Move the cursor to preview the dimension line location.
5. Click to place the dimension.

Marking 2D Object Centers

The Center Mark tool divides a circle, oval, rectangle, or rounded rectangle into quarters, marking the exact center of
the 2D object. In addition, it can place a center mark on any or all of the corners of a rounded rectangle.
When the Center Mark tool is active, you can change the dimension standard for new dimensions created in the
document from the Tool bar. To do so, select a standard from the Dim Std list, or select Custom Standards to create or
manage custom dimensions (see Using Custom Dimension Standards on page 485).

Angular Dimensioning |

501

Marking the Center of 2D Objects

To mark the center of a circle, oval, rectangle, or rounded rectangle:
1. Click the Center Mark tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click on the 2D object to mark.
The center is marked by the intersection of two lines.

Click anywhere
on the object

Marking the Center of a Rounded Rectangle Corner

To place a center mark in the corners of a rounded rectangle:
1. Click the Center Mark tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. While pressing Option (Macintosh) or Alt (Windows), move the cursor over the rounded rectangle corner to
mark.
3. Click to place the center mark.
The center is marked by the intersection of two lines.

Angular Dimensioning
The Angular Dimension tool measures and dimensions angles. Dimension the angle between two objects, between
two sides of a single object, between a single object and a reference line, or between two reference lines.
This tool works with all 2D objects with linear sides, including round and rotated rectangles, lines, polylines, and
polygons. It does not, however, work with circles, ovals, or arcs. In addition, it cannot dimension between parallel
lines.

502

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

Angular Dimension
from Two Objects

Dimension Standards

Angular Dimension from

Object and Reference Line

Angular Dimension from

Two Reference Lines

A grouped object must be ungrouped before angular dimensions can be obtained.

Mode

Description

Angular Dimension from Two Objects

Dimensions the angle between two object sides or faces

Angular Dimension from Object and Reference Line

Dimensions the angle between an object and a reference line

Angular Dimension from Two Reference Lines

Dimensions the angle between two reference lines

Dimension Standards

To change the dimension standard for new dimensions

created in the document, select a standard from the list;
select Custom Standards to create or manage custom
dimensions (see Using Custom Dimension Standards on
page 485)

Angle Between Two Object Sides or Faces

To dimension the angle between the sides or faces of two objects:
1. Click the Angular Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Angular Dimension from Two
Objects mode.
2. Click the side or face of the first object.
A preview line displays.
3. Click the side or face of the second object.
An angular dimension preview displays.
To select a different anglefor example, spanning the opposite directionmove the cursor until the preview
displays the desired angle.
4. Click a third time to define the radius of the dimension.
2nd click

1st click

3rd click

Angular Dimensioning |

503

Angle Between One Reference Line and an Object

To dimension an angle between one reference line and an object:
1. Click the Angular Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Angular Dimension from Object
and Reference Line mode.
2. Click to set the start of the reference line.
A reference line preview displays.
3. Click again to set the end of the reference line.
The cursor changes to a pointing hand.
4. Click on the side of the object (and, therefore, angle) to dimension.
An angular dimension preview displays.
To select a different anglefor example, spanning the opposite directionmove the cursor until the preview
displays the desired angle.
5. When the preview displays the desired angle, click again to draw the reference line and to define the angle of the
dimension.
1st click

3rd click

4th click
2nd click

Angle Between Two Reference Lines

To dimension an angle between two references lines:
1. Click the Angular Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Angular Dimension from Two
Reference Lines mode.
2. Click to set the start of the first reference line.
A reference preview line displays.
3. Click again to set the end of the first reference line.
4. A second reference line preview displays.
5. Click a third time to set the end of the second reference line.
An angular dimension preview displays.
To select a different anglefor example, spanning the opposite directionmove the cursor until the preview
displays the desired angle.
6. When the preview displays the desired angle, click again to define the angle of the dimension.

504

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

1st click

2nd click
4th click
3rd click

Arc Length Dimensioning

The Arc Length Dimension tool measures and dimensions the length of an arc anywhere along its circumference. The
dimension can be shown with its witness lines perpendicular to a chord on the arc, or perpendicular to a line tangent
to the arc. There are also modes to hide or show a graphic of an arc over the dimension measurement.
This tool works with arcs, polylines that include arc segments, and round walls.
Witness Lines
Perpendicular to Chord

Arc Indicator Visible

Witness Lines
Perpendicular to Tangent

Arc Indicator Invisible

Dimension Standards

Mode

Description

Witness Lines Perpendicular to Chord

Dimensions the arc with witness lines that would be perpendicular to a

chord drawn across the arc

Witness Lines Perpendicular to Tangent

Dimensions the arc with witness lines that would be perpendicular to a

line drawn tangent to the arc

Arc Indicator Visible

Displays an arc graphic over the dimension measurement

Arc Indicator Invisible

Uses a dimension measurement with no arc graphic

Dimension Standards

To change the dimension standard for new dimensions created in the

document, select a standard from the list; select Custom Standards to
create or manage custom dimensions (see Using Custom Dimension
Standards on page 485)

To create an arc length dimension:

1. Click the Arc Length Dimension tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Select the desired mode for the display of the witness lines and whether to use the arc indicator over the
dimension measurement.
3. Click to set the measurement start point.
4. Click to set the end of the measurement.
5. Move the cursor away from the object.

Converting Objects to Dimensions |

505

This specifies how far the dimension line is offset from the measured object.
6. Click to place the dimension line.

3rd click
1st click

2nd click

Converting Objects to Dimensions

To convert a line, double line, arc, or circle to a dimension:
1. Select the object to convert.
2. Select either Modify > Convert > Convert Line to Dimension, or Tools > Utilities > Convert Line to Dimension.
3. The object is converted to a dimension. Lines change to linear dimensions, arcs to angular dimensions, and
circles to radial dimensions.

Modifying Dimensions
Modify dimensions by manipulating them with the 2D Selection and 2D Reshape tools, or by adjusting dimension
parameters in the Object Info palette or Properties dialog box. For chain dimension objects, use commands on the
object context menu to add, delete, and edit individual dimensions within the chain.
To change adjoining dimensions into a single chain dimension object, select them, and then select Modify >
Compose. Similarly, to change a chain object into multiple dimensions, select the chain, and then select Modify >
Decompose.

506

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

Editing Dimensions with the Mouse

Action

Description

Change the length of a

dimension graphically

For linear dimensions, click on the endpoint of a witness line with the 2D
Selection tool and drag it parallel to the dimension line; in chain dimension
objects, the size of any adjoining dimension is adjusted automatically.
For angular, arc length, radial, or diametrical dimensions, click on the endpoint
of a witness line with the 2D Selection tool and drag it in the desired direction.
For associative dimensions, a change to the length of a linear, radial, or diametrical
dimension also changes the size of the associated object.

The dimension has a

constraint marker, so
it is associative

Enter the length of a

dimension on the drawing
(linear dimensions)

Click the right endpoint

of the dimension and
drag it to the left

The circles diameter is

reduced from the right; the
left endpoint remains fixed

Double-click anywhere on the dimension to enter a text editing mode. Enter the
desired length, and then use the segment position selector to specify which
segment will remain fixed when the dimension is resized.
Alternatively, select the Text tool, and then click the dimension text to enter
the text editing mode.
For associative dimensions, a change to the length of a linear dimension also
changes the size of the associated object.
Segment selector

The dimension has

constraint markers,
so it is associative

Double-click the dimension

to edit it; enter the new
length, and click the left
segment selector

The triangles top side is

expanded from the right;
the dimensions left
endpoint remains fixed

Modifying Dimensions |

507

Action

Description

Change the rotation of a

radial or diametrical
dimension

Click anywhere on the witness line with the 2D Selection tool and drag it in the
desired direction

Change the length of witness

lines (linear dimensions)

To change a single line, click on the witness line endpoint with the 2D Selection
tool and drag it toward or away from the dimension line.
To change all lines simultaneously, click on the dimension line with the 2D
Selection tool and drag it until the witness lines are the desired length.

Change the position of the

dimension text

Click on the text with the 2D Selection tool and drag it to the desired location. The
text for an angular dimension can only be moved along the curve of the dimension
itself; the text for other dimensions can be moved in any direction. For linear and
arc length dimensions, press and hold the Shift key while dragging the text to
maintain the same offset distance from the dimension line.

The dimension obscures

part of the drawing

Move a dimension

Click the dimension text and drag

it to the other side of the line

With the 2D Selection tool, click on a witness line (but not on an endpoint) or on
one of the two control points at each end of a dimension line, and drag the entire
dimension to a new location. For associative dimensions, this also moves the
associated object.

508

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

Action

Description

Modify several dimension

lines, end points, or witness
lines at once

With the 2D Reshape or 2D Selection tool, select the dimension(s) or control

point(s) to modify. Then, use the 2D Reshape tool to draw a marquee around the
control points to modify. The control points move when the marquee moves, while
control points outside of the marquee remain fixed.

Editing Dimension Properties

Edit the properties of one or more selected dimensions in the Object Info palette. Alternatively, right-click (Windows)
or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the dimension, and select Properties from the context menu.
To format the dimension text, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the dimension, and select
Format Text from the context menu.
For chain dimension objects, the edits are applied to all dimensions within the chain. To edit the properties of
individual dimensions within a chain, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the dimension, and
select Edit Dimension from the context menu instead.
Different parameters are available depending on what type of dimension is being edited.

Parameter

Description

Dim Std

Selects the dimension standard type; this selection determines which fields display in the
Object Info palette or Properties dialog box.

Witness

For linear dimensions, this sets whether the witness line displays on both ends of the
dimension line, only the start, only the end, or not at all. For chain dimension objects, this
sets whether all or none of the witness lines display.

Length

For linear and baseline dimensions, and for individual dimensions within a chain, this
sets the length of the dimension. For associative dimensions, this also changes the length
of the associated object.
Use the segment position selector to the left of the field label to specify which segment of
the dimension (either endpoint, or the center point) will remain fixed when the
dimension is resized. This fixed point is a global setting for all editing of linear and
baseline dimension lengths.

Radius

For radial and diametrical dimensions, this sets the length of the dimension (without
moving the center point of the dimension). For associative dimensions, this also changes
the radius of the associated object.

Offset

Sets the length of the witness lines

Text Off

Sets the dimension text offset from the dimension line

Text Rot

Sets the orientation of the dimension text to the dimension line

Auto Position Text

Automatically aligns the dimension text to the center of the dimension line; deselect to
allow manual control of the text location

Flip Text

Mirrors the dimension text to the opposite side of the dimension line. This parameter is
not available for chain dimension objects or individual dimensions within a chain.

Modifying Dimensions |

509

Parameter

Description

Arrows Inside

Sets whether arrows display inside witness lines or are flipped outside

Leader to Left

Switches the radial dimension leader from the right to the left side of the object

Dual View

Selects which dimensions to display, when a dual-dimension standard is selected. This

parameter is not available for chain dimension objects.

Prim/Sec

Toggles between settings for primary and secondary dimensions, when a dual-dimension
standard is selected. This parameter is not available for chain dimension objects.

Interior Arc

Sets the angular dimension inside the witness lines; deselect to move the dimension
outside of the witness lines at the opposite angle

Prec

Sets the dimension precision with up to eight digits of accuracy

Box Text

Places a box around the dimension text

Show Dim Value

Shows or hides the dimension text

Leader

Enter text to display before the dimension text

Trailer

Enter text to display after the dimension text

Tol

When a single-dimension standard is selected, sets whether a dimension displays a

single, double, limited, or no tolerance value

Top/Bottom/Display as
Typed

When a tolerance display is selected, sets the tolerance values and how they display

Editing Chain Dimensions

If a witness line within a chain dimension object is added, moved, or deleted, the dimension measurements in the
chain adjust automatically.

Action

Description

Add a dimension

Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) anywhere on the dimension object, and

select Add Dimension from the context menu. Click with the bulls-eye cursor to set the
endpoint of the new witness line. Alternatively, create a new individual dimension
within the lines of a dimension in an existing chain object, and Vectorworks adds the new
dimension to the chain automatically.

Delete a dimension

Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the dimension line of the dimension

to be deleted, and select Delete Dimension from the context menu.

Delete a witness line

Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the witness line to be deleted, and

select Delete Witness Line from the context menu.

Edit an individual
dimensions properties

Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the dimension to be edited, and select

Edit Dimension from the context menu. Edit parameters in the Object Properties dialog
box as desired and click OK (see Editing Dimension Properties on page 508). To apply
properties edits to all dimensions in the chain, use the Properties command or the Object
Info palette instead.

Format Text

Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the dimension to be edited, and select

Format Text from the context menu

510

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

Measuring Distance
Distance can be measured in Vectorworks without actually being recorded. This can be useful for placing objects or for
reference.

Measuring in Units
The Tape Measure tool measures the distance between two or more points in the drawing area, and temporarily
displays the length in the Data bar. The tool shows the measurement between one click and the next, and it also keeps
track of the cumulative length from the very first click.
Measurements display in the Data bar until the mouse is double-clicked. Note the measurements before the display
clears.
3D objects must be in orthogonal projection and front or side view to be measured with the Tape Measure tool.
To measure a distance:
1. Click the Tape Measure tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click where the first measurement is to start.
3. Move the cursor along the distance to measure.
The Data bar displays two measurements:

Data Bar

Measurement

Length (distance) from the previous point

TL

Total length (cumulative measure) from the starting point

4. To continue measuring in a different direction or area, click to set the next starting point.
The L measurement changes to zero.
5. Move the cursor to measure the next distance.
The Data bar reflects the length from the previous point and the total cumulative length.
Second click to start
the measurement of
the next edge

The measurement from

the second click to this
corner is 2-10

6. When the measurements are complete, note the total length.

7. Double-click to end the measurements.

First click to start

the measurement

Adding a Sheet Border |

511

Measuring in Degrees
The Protractor tool measures angles in the drawing, and temporarily displays the degrees measurement in the Data
bar. There are two modes for the tool.
Angle from Two Segments

Angle from Three Points

Mode

Description

Angle from Two Segments

Calculates the angle between two objects or object sides that are linearrectangles
(including rounded and rotated), lines, polylines, and polygons. This mode cannot,
however, measure circles, ovals, or arcs. In addition, it cannot measure between
parallel lines

Angle from Three Points

Measures an angle between three points in the drawing area

Angles Between Objects or Object Sides

To measure the angles between objects or object sides:
1. Click the Protractor tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Angle from Two Segments mode.
2. Move the selection arrow over the first side of the angle to measure.
3. Click to select the side, and then move the cursor to the other angle side.
The angle displays in the Data bar.
4. Note the angle, and then click to end the measurement.

Angles Between Three Points

To measure angles between three points:
1. Click the Protractor tool from the Dims/Notes tool set, and select Angle From Three Points mode.
2. Click to set the first point.
3. Click to set the second point.
4. Move the cursor to the third angle point.
The angle displays in the Data bar.
5. Note the angle, and then click to end the measurement.

Adding a Sheet Border

The Sheet Border tool places a pre-formatted border along the edges of the drawing area, set to the drawing size.
Standard size pages have a matching standard sheet border. A custom size border can easily be specified, and sheet
borders and title blocks can be customized to meet office requirements.

512

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

The Update Plug-in Objects command may need to be run on files that contain sheet borders (formerly known
as drawing borders) that were created in an earlier version of Vectorworks. This command converts the
drawing borders to the latest format; see Migrating from Previous Versions on page 8. Additional sheet border
capabilities are available in the Vectorworks Design Series. See Creating Sheet Borders on page 581 in the
Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
To place a sheet border:

1. Make the design or sheet layer active. Sheet borders are inserted in Top/Plan view on design layers.
2. Click the Sheet Border tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
3. Click Preferences from the Tool bar to set the default sheet border parameters.
The Sheet Border Preferences dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Sheet Size

Select a standard size and format for the sheet border, or select Fit to Page to set the sheet
border to the page dimensions (see Page Setup on page 90). Select Custom to use
custom sheet border dimensions, and specify the Width and Height dimensions.

Title Block

Opens the Import Title Block dialog box, for selecting a title block symbol to insert (see
Adding a Title Block on page 517), or select None for no title block

Lock to Page Center

Locks the sheet border center position to the page center; deselect to position the sheet
border manually. If the plan has been rotated (Design Series required), select Lock to
Page Center to position the sheet border correctly when in a non-rotated view.

Use As Title Block Only

When a title block has been selected, displays only the title block and hides all other
sheet border elements

4. Click once in the drawing to set the sheet border insertion point, and then click again to set the sheet border
orientation.
5. The sheet border is placed on the drawing.
The sheet border can be re-sized and re-scaled after placement, attributes can be changed, and title blocks and
revision histories can be added.

Adding a Sheet Border |

513

Sheet Border Properties

The sheet border properties can be edited in the Object Info palette.

Parameter

Description

Lock to Page Center

Locks the sheet border center position to the page center; deselect to position the
sheet border manually. If the plan has been rotated (Design Series required), select
Lock to Page Center to position the sheet border correctly when in a non-rotated
view.

Size

Select a standard size and format for the sheet border, or select Fit to Page to set the
sheet border to the page dimensions. Select Custom to use custom sheet border
dimensions, and click Border Settings to specify the dimensions.

Orientation

Select Portrait or Landscape orientation

Horizontal Dimension

Displays the sheet border horizontal dimensions

Vertical Dimension

Displays the sheet border vertical dimensions

Border Settings

Opens the Sheet Border Settings dialog box, for specifying further properties (see
Specifying Additional Sheet Border Settings on page 515)

Title Block

Opens the Import Title Block dialog box, to select a title block symbol to insert (see
Adding a Title Block on page 517). This dialog box can also be accessed from the
sheet border context menu; right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the
sheet border, and select Title Block.
To remove a title block, select the Defaults symbol folder, and then select None from
the Symbols list.

Current Title Block

When a title block has been inserted, displays the title block symbol name

Use As Title Block Only

When a title block has been selected, displays only the title block and hides all other
sheet border elements

Title Block Position

Specifies the title block location relative to the sheet border

514

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

Parameter

Description

Title Blk Scale Factor

If the title block is too large or small at normal scale (scale factor 1), scales the title
block size, including text. A value below 1 makes the title block smaller, while a value
above 1 makes the title block larger; text is automatically scaled along with the title
block geometry.

Title Blk Margin

Adds a horizontal, vertical, or block margin to the title block

Use Revision Block

(Design Series required)

Adds a revision history block to the sheet border

Show Revision Zone

(Design Series required)

Adds a revision zone column to the revision block, for specifying the location of the
revision

Use Tolerance Block

(Design Series required)

For ASME title blocks, adds a tolerance block area to the title block

Use Projection Block

(Design Series required)

For ASME title blocks, adds a projection block area to the title block; specify First
Angle or Third Angle in Projection

Show Grids

Displays grid text and lines in the sheet border margin. This setting can also be
accessed from the sheet border context menu: right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click
(Macintosh) on the sheet border, and select Show Grids.

Show Grid Lines

Displays grid lines on the drawing

Fold Marks

Select the fold mark measurements when adding fold marks to the sheet border. The
first measurement specifies the drawing fold width and the second measurement
indicates the margin fold width. Select Custom to specify custom fold mark distances.
Fold marks are designed for use with ISO drawings.

Margin Width

When custom fold marks are selected, enter the margin fold width

Folded Width

When custom fold marks are selected, enter the drawing fold width

Folded Height

When custom fold marks are selected, enter the drawing fold height

Hide Border

When the sheet border includes a title block, hides the sheet border and displays only
the title block (this allows a different sheet border to be used with that title block, if
desired)

Fill Border

Fills the area between the outer and inner border lines with a fill selected from the
Attributes palette

Add Parts List

(Machine Design required)

Adds a parts list to an ASME title block, when a parts list worksheet has been created

Adding a Sheet Border |

Parameter

Description

Edit Title Block

Opens the Edit Title Block dialog box, for specifying the title block information.
Depending on the selected title block, different fields and tabs are available.

515

In Vectorworks Design Series, ASME title blocks include a tolerance tab, for editing
the tolerance block information (see Editing a Tolerance Block on page 584 in the
Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide). US Arch title blocks include Project and
Sheet tabs; information is entered from the Issue Manager but can be edited manually
(see The Issue Manager on page 661 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users
Guide).

Edit Revision Data

(Design Series required)

Opens the Edit Revision Data dialog box, for specifying revision information and
format (see Editing Revision Block Data on page 583 in the Vectorworks Design
Series Users Guide)

Edit Issue Data

(Design Series required)

Opens the Edit Issue Data dialog box, for specifying issue data on US Arch title blocks
(see Editing Issue Data on page 585 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide)

Specifying Additional Sheet Border Settings

Additional sheet border settings are available from the Object Info palette.
To specify additional sheet border settings:
1. Select the sheet border.
2. In the Object Info palette, click Border Settings. Alternatively, double-click on the sheet border.
The Sheet Border Settings dialog box opens.

516

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

Parameter

Description

Drawing Size

Specifies the sheet border size

Vertical/Horizontal
Dimension

Specifies the sheet border vertical/horizontal dimensions; initially, these are based on
the Size selected in the Object Info palette, but the dimensions can be edited. This
parameter is not available when the Size is Fit to Page.

Dimensions Shown
Are

Applies the dimensions to either the outer or inner border dimensions

Margins

Specifies the sheet border margin widths

Zones/Grids
Vertical Zones

Specifies the number of vertical zones to include

Grid Text Order

Indicates whether vertical grid text starts at the top or bottom of the border

Horizontal Zones

Specifies the number of horizontal zones to include

Grid Number Order

Indicates whether horizontal grid numbers start at the left or right of the border

Grid Label Size

Specifies the text size for both grid text and numbers

Reset to Default Values

If the sheet border Size is set to Fit to Page or to Custom, select this button to restore
the default sheet border settings

Adding a Sheet Border |

517

3. Click OK to set the sheet border parameters.

Adding a Title Block

A title block containing drawing information can be added to the sheet border. Title blocks are saved as symbols with
text linked to a record.
A title block can be the only part of the sheet border that displays, by selecting Use As Title Block Only in the sheet
border preferences or the Object Info palette.
Additional title block capabilities are described in Creating Sheet Borders on page 581 in the Vectorworks
Design Series Users Guide.
To add a title block to the sheet border:
1. Select the sheet border.
2. In the Object Info palette, click Title Block.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the sheet border and select Title Block from the
context menu.
The Import Title Block dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Symbol Folders

Specifies the location of the sheet border symbols

Symbols

Provides a graphical list of available sheet border symbols

3. Select a title block symbol from the selected symbol folder. The Defaults folder contains the default title block
resources; see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173. The title blocks
listed under Top Level are title block symbols that exist in the current file.
To remove an existing title block, select None.
4. Click OK to add the selected title block symbol to the sheet border. The title block is scaled to match the current
layer scale if necessary.
When a sheet border with a title block is inserted into a drawing, the Sheet Border Components symbol folder is
automatically created and displays in the Resource Browser. Title block symbols added to the sheet border are
automatically placed in that folder.

518

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

Creating a Custom Title Block in Vectorworks Fundamentals

A custom title block, containing company-specific graphics, information, and data fields, can be created and then
inserted into a sheet border.
Three steps are required: create a title block symbol, create a custom record format, and link the record format fields to
the title block symbol text fields.
Creating a custom title block in the Design Series products requires additional steps, if the custom title block is to be
used with the Issue Manager. See Creating a Custom Title Block in the Design Series on page 801 in the Vectorworks
Design Series Users Guide.
To create a custom title block for use in Vectorworks Fundamentals:
1. In a new file with a scale of 1:1, create the elements of the title block, including lines, rectangles, graphics, and
text. Creating the title block at a scale of 1:1 ensures that it is inserted at the correct scale when it is placed on a
sheet layer or a design layer of any scale.

Do not use any 3D elements.

Company logos can be imported as bitmaps.
The title block geometry (pen color, line style, and line thickness) and text (font, style, and color) can either
inherit the sheet border attributes, or retain those attributes as created. The By Class setting in the
Attributes palette indicates that the attributes should be inherited from the sheet border. If an attribute is not
set to By Class, then its original setting is retained.

Description

Method

The attributes of the title block elements

are inherited from the sheet border

Specify By Class in the Attributes palette for these

elements. For text font and style attributes, set the Pen
Style by class to use the same font and style as the
sheet border. For text color, set the Pen Color to
Color By Class.

The title block elements retain the

attributes as created

Set the attributes of the geometry and text from the

Attributes palette when the title block is created. For
text font and style attributes, set the Pen Style to Solid
to use the text attributes set when the title block was
created. For text color, select the desired Pen Color.

Different settings can be combined so that some attributes are inherited from the sheet border, while others
remain as created. For example, if a line should use the same color as the sheet border, but have a dashed line
style with a thickness of 1 mm, when creating the line, set the lines Pen Color to Color By Class, its Line
Thickness to 1 mm, its Pen Style to dashed, and its Line Style to the desired dash style.
2. Select all the title block elements, and then select Modify > Create Symbol.

Adding a Sheet Border |

519

The insertion point of the symbol should be at lower right corner of the title block. See Creating New Symbols
on page 189.
3. Create a new record format as described in Creating Record Formats on page 205.
The field names of the record format are used as the titles for the associated editable fields in the Edit Title Block
dialog box.

To create a multi-line field, append a pound sign (#) to the field name, as in Drawing Title#.
Use a P_ prefix to indicate project fields (fields with the same value on all title blocks in the file). An S_ prefix
indicates sheet fields (fields with a different value on any title blocks). The prefixes cause the Edit Title Block
dialog box, accessed from the Object Info palette, to be separated into project and sheet tabs. Fields without a
prefix are placed on the General tab.
Use an SN_ prefix to indicate that a field should gets its value from the Sheet Number of its sheet layer. If Use
Automatic Drawing Coordination is enabled in document preferences (Design Series required), the SN_ prefix
also means that when this title block field is updated, the Sheet Number of the sheet layer and of annotation
objects on the layer are updated.
Use an _SD suffix to indicate that the field should get its value from the Sheet Title of its sheet layer. If Use
Automatic Drawing Coordination is enabled in document preferences (Design Series required), the _SD suffix
also means that when this title block field is updated, the Sheet Title of the sheet layer is updated. If the field
should also be multi-line, use an _SD# suffix.

520

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

To work with the Issue Manager (Design Series required), special considerations apply when the title block fields
are formatted. See Creating a Custom Title Block in the Design Series on page 801 in the Vectorworks Design
Series Users Guide.

4. Attach the custom record format to the title block symbol through the Resource Browser as described in
Attaching Record Formats to a Single Symbol Instance or Object on page 207.

5. Edit the title block symbol and attach the record fields to the associated symbol text; see Linking Text to Record
Formats on page 211 for more information.
6. To be available to the Sheet Border tool, either the file must be saved in the Libraries\Defaults\Sheet Border Title Blocks folder, or the custom symbol and its associated record format must be imported into the Custom
Title Blocks.vwx file, located in the same default resources folder.
Alternatively, import the title block symbol from another file.
7. To place the custom title block, click Title Block from the Object Info palette of a selected sheet border, and select
the custom title block symbol.

Using Notation Objects

The notation objects add information to a Vectorworks drawing with pre-formatted objects that maintain a constant
size regardless of the drawing scale.

Creating Revision Clouds

Use the Revision Cloud tool to identify a section of a drawing that has changed. Insert a revision cloud in an area of
the drawing, or around an entire portion of the drawing, if appropriate.

Using Notation Objects |

521

For the Design Series, revision clouds can also be created by first drawing a polyline and then selecting the Objects
from Polyline command (see Creating Objects from Polylines on page 689 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users
Guide).
Rectangle

Freehand
Polygon

Concave
Shape

Oval

Preferences

Regular
Polygon

Convex
Shape

To create a revision cloud:

1. Click the Revision Cloud tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
2. Click the Revision Cloud Properties Tool bar button to define the revision cloud properties. The properties can
also be set after placement, from the Object Info palette. Click OK.
3. Select the revision cloud mode and select to draw the cloud with either a convex or concave shape. The convex
shape draws billows outward from the preview image or from the specified vertices. The concave shape draws
billows inward from the preview image or from the specified vertices.

Mode

Description

Oval

Inserts the revision cloud around the perimeter of a preview oval. Click to set the start point,
move the cursor in the desired direction, and click to set the end point. Constrain the oval to
45 degrees to draw a circle.
1st click

2nd click

Rectangle

Convex Shape

Concave Shape

Inserts the revision cloud around the perimeter of the preview rectangle. Click to set the start
point, move the cursor in the desired direction, and click to set the end point. Constrain the
rectangle to 45 degrees to draw a square.
1st click

2nd click
Convex Shape

Concave Shape

522

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

Mode

Description

Regular Polygon

Inserts the revision cloud around the perimeter of the specified vertices. Click to set the start
point (first vertex), click at the desired location for each subsequent vertex, and either click at
the starting vertex to close the polygon or double-click at the final vertex to create an open
polygon. If the polygon is open, Vectorworks completes the cloud based on the outline.
2nd click

Start and
end click

3rd click
Convex Shape

Freehand Polygon

Concave Shape

Inserts the revision cloud around the perimeter of the specified vertices. Click to set the start
point and click-drag to draw the freehand polygon. If the polygon is open, Vectorworks
completes the cloud based on the outline.
Start and
end click

Convex Shape

Concave Shape

4. Click to draw the revision cloud according to the specified mode.

The revision cloud properties can be edited from the Object Info palette.

Parameter

Description

Billow Size

Select the relative billow size from extra small to extra large, or select Custom to specify a
billow size

Billow Radius

For a custom billow size, sets the billow size

Billow Variability

Select the variability (the variation between the smallest and largest billows)

Billow Height

Select the relative billow height (small, medium, or large)

Billow Type

Select a convex or concave billow type

Polyline Parameters

Edits the revision cloud polyline; see Reshaping Objects on page 306

The following illustration demonstrates the effects of varying the billow size and billow variability parameters.

Using Notation Objects |

523

Billow Height = Medium

Billow Variability

None

Low

Medium

High
Extra Small

Small

Medium

Large

Extra Large

Billow Size

Creating Drawing Labels

The Drawing Label tool is a point object that provides descriptive information for the drawing.
By default, a label object includes a title, the scale of the drawing, and an automatically assigned drawing number. The
number of the sheet that contains the drawing can also be included in the label.
Vectorworks defaults many of these values, depending on where the label was created: on a design layer, or in a
viewport annotation, for example.
To create a drawing label:
1. Ensure that the appropriate layer is active.
2. Click the Drawing Label tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
3. Click on the drawing at the desired location to place a drawing label object.
4. Click again to set the rotation.
If this is the first time the object is inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. These
parameters apply to subsequent placements of the object and can be changed in the Object Info palette. Click OK.

Parameter

Description

Rotation

Specifies the number of degrees to rotate the label (0.00 is horizontal)

524

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

Parameter

Description

Drawing Title

Specifies the title text that displays above the labels horizontal ruling line; defaults to
the file name (on a design layer), to nothing (on a sheet layer), or to the Drawing Title
(in a viewport), but it can be edited.
If Use Automatic Drawing Coordination is enabled in document preferences
(Design Series required), and the label is in a viewport, changing this field will
update the viewports drawing title, and vice versa.

Drawing Number

Identifies this drawing on the current sheet. This value displays in the top half of the
label bubble, unless Number Style is set to None. If the label is in a viewport or sheet
layer, Vectorworks automatically numbers items and updates this field; this number
must be unique on this layer. If the label is on a design layer, enter an identifier
manually.

Sheet Number

Identifies the sheet that contains the drawing. This value displays in the bottom half
of the label bubble, if Number Style is set to Drawing and Sheet. If the label is on a
sheet layer, this field defaults to the Sheet Number.
If Use Automatic Drawing Coordination is enabled in document preferences
(Design Series required), and the label is on a sheet layer, this field cannot be edited
and always contains the Sheet Number.

Number Style

Specifies which drawing identifier numbers (from the Drawing Number and Sheet
Number fields) display in the label

None
(Bubble Style=None)

Scale Display Style

Drawing only

Drawing and sheet

Specifies which scale information displays beneath the labels horizontal ruling line

None

Numbers only

Scale label

Custom

Custom Scale

If Scale Display Style is set to Custom, enter information to display in the scale area

Use Architectural Scale

Select this option to use the US Architect scale style (as in 1/4 = 1- 0); deselect the
option to use the Engineering style (as in 1:48)

Using Notation Objects |

525

Parameter

Description

Bubble Style

Select the style of the label bubble graphic, which can contain the Drawing Number
and Sheet Number that identify the drawing

None

Round rect

Circle

Rectangle

Draw Full-width Bubble

Select this option to extend the bubble graphic to the full length of the ruling line; not
available if Bubble Style is set to None

Title / Scale / Drawing# /

Sheet# Text Size

Select the font sizes for the various elements of the drawing label

Bubble Scale Factor

Specifies the labels bubble size; enter a larger value to increase the size (the number
must be greater than zero)

Line Length Mode

Sets the length of the drawing labels horizontal ruling line. A fixed length ruling line
is set by the Printed Length value. An auto-fit ruling line is set to the length of the
longest text bounding box, either above or below the ruling line. A control point
ruling line is set by the location of its control point; click the control point to select it
and click in the desired location in the drawing to adjust the ruling line length or to
flip the ruling line to the opposite side.

control point

Fixed

Control Point
Auto-Fit

Printed Length

For a drawing label using a fixed length ruling line, sets the length of the drawing
label on the printed page

Flip

Select this option to move the bubble (including the Drawing Number and Sheet
Number) to the right side of the label:

Default label

Flipped label

526

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

Parameter

Description

Rule Offset

Specifies the vertical offset between the labels bubble and horizontal ruling line on
the printed page (0 is centered); enter a negative number to move the line, title, and
scale below the center line of the bubble

Title Margin

Specifies the vertical distance between the labels horizontal ruling line and the text
above it. Enter a positive value to move the text further above the ruling line, or a
negative value to move the text closer to the ruling line.

Scale Margin

Specifies the vertical distance between the label line and the text below it. Enter a
positive value to move the text further above the ruling line, or a negative value to
move the text closer to the ruling line.

Creating Reference Markers

The Reference Marker tool displays the drawing number and sheet number of the referenced drawing. Select from a
variety of configurations.
To create a reference marker:
1. Ensure that the appropriate layer is active.
2. Click the Reference Marker tool from the Dims/Notes tool set.
3. Click on the drawing at the desired location to place a reference marker object.
4. Click again to set the rotation.
If this is the first time the object is inserted in this session, the Object Properties dialog box opens. These
parameters apply to subsequent placements of the object and can be changed in the Object Info palette. Click OK.

Using Notation Objects |

Parameter

Description

Rotation

Specifies the number of degrees to rotate the marker (0.00 is horizontal)

2D Scale Factor

Specifies the marker size; increase the scale value to obtain a larger marker

Type/Config

Select one of the types and configurations from the list

527

Elevation
Config 1

Config 2

Config 3

Config 1

Config 2

Config 3

Config 1

Config 2

Detail

Section

Config 3

Drawing Number

Specifies the drawing number of the item the marker references

Sheet Number

Specifies the sheet number of the item the marker references

Separator

For Config 1 configurations, specifies the separator between the Drawing Number
and Sheet Number information

Arrow Angle

For some configurations, specifies the angle of the marker arrow

Arrow Fill

Select a filled or unfilled arrow style from the list

528

| Chapter 14: Dimensioning and Annotating

15

Creating Building Elements

Vectorworks provides a variety of specialized tools and commands for creating building and structural elements such
as floors, walls, columns, and roofs.

Creating Structural Shapes

Eight commonly used structural steel shapes are available as 2D objects. 3D equivalents of these objects are also
available in the Vectorworks Design Series products. Since the 2D and 3D parameters are nearly identical, all
parameters are documented with the 2D objects for convenience. Two additional 2D/3D structural shapes are also
available in the Vectorworks Design Series products: bulb flat and Z-section, as well as four additional series (ANZ,
BSI, DIN, and JIS); for information, see Creating Design Series Structural Shapes on page 111 in the Vectorworks
Design Series Users Guide.
The Update Plug-in Objects command may need to be run on files containing structural shapes that were
created in an earlier version of Vectorworks. This command converts the structural shapes to the latest format;
see Migrating from Previous Versions on page 8.

Angle
Thickness
Toe R. (Side A)

Length of
Side A

Insertion
Point

Fillet
Radius

Toe R.
(Side B)

Length of Side B

To create an angle object:

1. Click the Angle tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the object
is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently created
objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the angle properties and click OK.

Parameter

Description

Series

Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes

Size

Select the angle size

530

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Parameter

Description

Place Locus at
Centroid

Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D angle

Length (Design
Series required)

Enter the length of the 3D angle

Custom Size

Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom angle size

Length of Side
A/B

Displays the length of angle sides A and B, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value

Thickness

Displays the thickness of the angle sides, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value

Toe R. (Side A/
B)

Displays the toe radius value for sides A and B, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of
a custom value

Fillet Radius

Displays the fillet radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Section Properties

Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch units for
imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of the units selected and
Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)

Area

Displays the angle area

About Axis X-X/

Y-Y
Moment of
Inertia

Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

Section
Modulus

Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

Radius of
Gyration

Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

About Axis Z-Z

Radius of
Gyration

Displays the least radius of gyration about the principal (Z-Z) axis

Tan (Alpha)

Displays the tangent of the angle of the principal axis from the vertical

Creating Structural Shapes |

531

Channel
Insertion
Point

Flange
Width
Flange Angle
Toe Radius

Depth

Fillet
Radius
Web
Thickness
Free
Height

Flange Thickness
Flange Width/2

To create a channel object:

1. Click the Channel tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the object
is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently created
objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the channel properties and click OK.

Parameter

Description

Series

Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes

Size

Select the channel size

Draw Free Height

Lines

Select whether to draw the 2D channel with free height lines

Place Locus at
Centroid

Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D channel

Length (Design
Series required)

Enter the length of the 3D channel

Custom Size

Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom channel size

Depth

Displays the depth between endpoints, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value

Flange Width

Displays the flange width, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Flange
Thickness

Displays the flange thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

532

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Parameter

Description

Flange Angle
(Deg.)

Displays the flange angle degrees, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom
value

Web Thickness

Displays the web thickness of the channel, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value

Toe Radius

Displays the toe radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Fillet Radius

Displays the fillet radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Section Properties

Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch units for
imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of the units selected and
Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)

Area

Displays the channel area

About Axis X-X/

Y-Y
Moment of
Inertia

Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

Section
Modulus

Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

Radius of
Gyration

Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

I-beam
Insertion
Point

Flange
Width

Toe Radius

Fillet
Radius

Depth

Web
Thickness

Free Height

Flange Angle

Flange Thickness
Flange Width/4

To create an I-beam object:

1. Click the I-Beam tool from the Detailing tool set.

Creating Structural Shapes |

533

2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the object
is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently created
objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the I-beam properties and click OK.

Parameter

Description

Series

Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes

Size

Select the I-beam size

Length (Design
Series required)

Enter the length of the 3D I-beam

Draw Center Line

Select whether to draw the 2D I-beam with center lines

Draw Free Height

Lines

Select whether to draw the 2D I-beam with free height lines

Place Locus at
Centroid

Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D I-beam

Custom Size

Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom I-beam size

Depth

Displays the depth between endpoints, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value

Flange Width

Displays the flange width, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Flange
Thickness

Displays the flange thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Flange Angle
(Deg.)

Displays the flange angle in degrees, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom
value

Fillet Radius

Displays the fillet radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Toe Radius

Displays the toe radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Section Properties

Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch units for
imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of the units selected and
Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)

Area

Displays the I-beam area

About Axis X-X/

Y-Y
Moment of
Inertia

Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

Section
Modulus

Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

Radius of
Gyration

Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

534

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Rectangular Tubing
Wall
Thickness

Height

Insertion
Point
Width
Inside
Fillet
Radius

To create a rectangular tubing object:

1. Click the Rectangular Tubing tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the object
is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently created
objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the rectangular properties and click OK.

Parameter

Description

Series

Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes

Size

Select the rectangular tubing size

Length (Design
Series required)

Enter the length of the 3D rectangular tubing

Draw Center Lines

Select whether to draw the 2D rectangular tubing with center lines

Place Locus at
Centroid

Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D rectangular tubing

Custom Size

Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom rectangular tubing size

Width

Displays the width of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom
value

Height

Displays the height of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom
value

Wall Thickness

Displays the wall thickness of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value

Inside Fillet
Radius

Displays the inside fillet radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom
value

Section Properties

Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch units for
imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of the units selected and
Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)

Creating Structural Shapes |

Parameter

Description

Area

Displays the rectangular tubing area

535

About Axis X-X/

Y-Y
Moment of
Inertia

Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

Section
Modulus

Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

Radius of
Gyration

Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

Round Tubing
Outside Diameter
Wall
Thickness

Insertion
Point

To create a round tubing object:

1. Click the Round Tubing tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the object
is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently created
objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the round tubing properties and click OK.

Parameter

Description

Series

Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes

Size

Select the round tubing size

Length (Design
Series required)

Enter the length of the 3D round tubing

Draw Center Lines

Select whether to draw the 2D round tubing with center lines

Place Locus at
Centroid

Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D round tubing

Custom Size

Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom round tubing size

536

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Parameter

Description

Outside
Diameter

Displays the outside diameter of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value

Wall Thickness

Displays the wall thickness of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value

Section Properties

Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch units for
imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of the units selected and
Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)

Area

Displays the round tubing area

About Axis X-X/

Y-Y
Moment of
Inertia

Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

Section
Modulus

Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

Radius of
Gyration

Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

Square Tubing
Width
Wall
Thickness
Insertion
Point
Width
Inside
Fillet R.

To create a square tubing object:

1. Click the Square Tubing tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the object
is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently created
objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the square tubing properties and click OK.

Parameter

Description

Series

Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes

Size

Select the square tubing size

Creating Structural Shapes |

Parameter

Description

Length (Design
Series Required)

Enter the length of the 3D square tubing

Place Locus at
Centroid

Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D square tubing

Draw Center Lines

Select whether to draw the 2D square tubing with center lines

Custom Size

Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom square tubing size

Width

Displays the width of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom
value

Wall Thickness

Displays the wall thickness of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value

Inside Fillet R.

Displays the inside fillet radius value of the tubing, or if Custom Size is selected, allows
entry of a custom value

537

Section Properties

Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch units for
imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of the units selected and
Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)

Area

Displays the square tubing area

About Axis X-X/

Y-Y
Moment of
Inertia

Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y) centroidal
axes

Section
Modulus

Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y) centroidal
axes

Radius of
Gyration

Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

538

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Tee
Flange Width
Insertion
Point

Depth/2

Flange
Width/4
Flange Thickness

Flange
Scope

Fillet
Radius

Flange
Radius

Web Thickness

Depth

Toe Radius

Web Slope

To create a tee object:

1. Click the Tee tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the object
is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently created
objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the tee properties and click OK.

Parameter

Description

Series

Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes

Size

Select the tee size

Length (Design
Series)

Enter the length of the 3D tee

Draw Center Line

Select whether to draw the 2D tee with center lines

Place Locus at
Centroid

Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D tee

Custom Size

Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom tee size

Depth

Displays the depth between endpoints, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value

Flange Width

Displays the flange width, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Web Thickness

Displays the web thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Creating Structural Shapes |

Parameter

539

Description

Flange
Thickness

Displays the flange thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Web Slope
(Deg.)

Displays the web slope in degrees, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom
value

Flange Slope
(deg.)

Displays the flange slope in degrees, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom
value

Toe Radius

Displays the toe radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Flange Radius

Displays the flange radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Fillet Radius

Displays the fillet radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Section Properties

Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch units for
imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of the units selected and
Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)

Area

Displays the tee area

About Axis X-X/

Y-Y
Moment of
Inertia

Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y) centroidal
axes

Section
Modulus

Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y) centroidal
axes

Radius of
Gyration

Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y)
centroidalaxes

Wide Flange
Flange Width (Top)
Insertion
Point
Flange Thickness
Fillet Radius

Depth

Free Height

Web Thickness

Flange Thickness
Flange Width (Bottom)

540

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

To create a wide flange object:

1. Click the Wide Flange tool from the Detailing tool set.
2. Click to place the object in the drawing, and click again to set the objects rotation. If this is the first time the object
is placed in the drawing, an object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to subsequently created
objects; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the wide flange properties and click OK.

Parameter

Description

Series

Select the desired series to display the appropriate nominal sizes

Size

Select the wide flange size

Length (Design
Series required)

Enter the length of the 3D wide flange

Draw Center Line

Select whether to draw the 2D wide flange with center lines

Draw Free Height

Lines

Select whether to draw the 2D wide flange with free height lines

Place Locus at
Centroid

Select whether to draw a locus at the centroid of the 2D wide flange

Custom Size

Select this option to enable fields for specifying a custom wide flange size

Depth

Displays the depth between endpoints, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a
custom value

Flange Width
(Top) / (Bottom)

Displays the top and bottom flange width of the wide flange, or if Custom Size is selected,
allows entry of a custom value

Web Thickness

Displays the web thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Flange
Thickness

Displays the flange thickness, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Fillet Radius

Displays the fillet radius value, or if Custom Size is selected, allows entry of a custom value

Section Properties

Section properties are automatically calculated and displayed based on inch units for
imperial shapes and millimeter units for metric shapes (regardless of the units selected and
Show Unit Mark setting in the Units dialog box)

Area

Displays the wide flange area

About Axis X-X/

Y-Y
Moment of
Inertia

Displays the moment of inertia about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y) centroidal
axes

Section
Modulus

Displays the section modulus about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y) centroidal
axes

Radius of
Gyration

Displays the radius of gyration about both the horizontal (X-X) and vertical (Y-Y) centroidal
axes

Creating Floors |

541

Creating Floors
The Floor command can be used to create not only floors, but also decks, patios, stages, platforms, and lofts. The
command converts any 2D drawing object into a hybrid (2D/3D) object of any shape and thickness. The source object
must be flat and must also be parallel to the active layer plane.
In the Design Series, the Floor command is located here: AEC > Floor (or Landmark > AEC > Floor).
To create a floor:
1. Select View > Standard Views > Top/Plan.
While this command can be used in a 3D projection mode, the precise X and Y placement is much harder to
determine.
2. Select the 2D or flat hybrid object(s) to turn into a floor.
3. Select Model > AEC > Floor.
The Create Floor dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Bottom Z

Specifies the distance above the active layer plane that the floor will begin (the Bottom Z
height). In most cases, use the default of 0, which starts the floor on the active layer plane.

Thickness

Sets the floor thickness

4. Click OK, and then change to a 3D projection mode to see the floor.

Creating Walls
Vectorworks provides the flexibility to draw both straight and round walls and to join those walls to other walls.
Vectorworks treats each wall section as a separate object. Either automatically join walls together when drawing them,
or join them after drawing by using one of the joining options. Other wall options include the ability to add
component lines and fills to walls, cap and trim them, and insert symbols (such as doors and windows) into them. You
can also add and delete peaks in a wall, if the elevation changes from one end of the wall to the other.
Additional wall capabilities are available in Vectorworks Architect, and are cross-referenced to the appropriate
section in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide where applicable.
Vectorworks provides four ways to position the wall in relation to the control line. These modes are activated by the
four buttons on the Tool bar.

542

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Right Control Line

Straight Walls

Left Control
Line
Center Control Line

Round Walls

Wall Preferences

Custom Control Line

Round Wall Arc

Creation Controls

Left Control
Line
Right Control Line

Wall Preferences

Mode

Description

Left Control Line

Walls are drawn along their left sides

Center Control Line

Walls are drawn from the center

Right Control Line

Walls are drawn along their right sides

Custom Control Line

Walls are drawn from an offset point specified in wall preferences; most effective
when drawing walls containing components

Wall Preferences

Sets the physical parameters of the wall; see Drawing Straight Walls on page 542

Arc Creation Controls

Select the arc creation method to use when drawing round walls; for more information
on arc creation modes, see Creating Arcs on page 244

See Wall Direction on page 549 for details on how the starting point and direction in which the wall is drawn
determines the walls interior and exterior sides.

Drawing Straight Walls

The Wall tool creates a hybrid wall object, simultaneously adding both a 2D and a 3D version of the wall to the
drawing. Walls can be drawn in Top/Plan or in a 3D view.
2D wall segment

3D walls

Create walls by drawing them with the mouse, or by using a mouse-Data bar combination (see Using the 2D Data
Bar on page 220 or Using the 3D Data Bar on page 337). The following directions assume that the walls are drawn
with the mouse.

Creating Walls |

543

To create straight walls:

1. Select the Wall tool from the Walls tool set.
2. Click the desired Offset mode button (see Creating Walls on page 541).
3. Click the Wall Preferences mode button.
The Wall Preferences dialog box opens. This dialog box can be accessed any time afterward to modify wall
settings. Walls can also be drawn first, and then the parameters can be set later from the Object Info palette.
Additional wall capabilities are available in Vectorworks Architect, and are cross-referenced to the appropriate
section in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide where applicable.

Parameter

Description

Wall Style (Vectorworks

Architect/Landmark
required)

In Vectorworks Fundamentals, all walls are un-styled.

Save Preferences as
Wall Style (Vectorworks
Architect/Landmark
required)

See Creating Walls in Architect and Landmark on page 63 in the Vectorworks Design
Series Users Guide

Preview

Displays a preview of the wall structure, including any defined components; the preview
wall is drawn from left to right, so the top of the preview, by default, indicates the left
part of the wall as it will be drawn (see Wall Direction on page 549). The arrow shows
the wall direction.

For information on wall styles, see Creating Walls in Architect and Landmark on
page 63 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

544

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Parameter

Description

Overall Thickness

Displays the thickness of the wall. If a wall contains no components, enter the wall
thickness.
The thickness of a wall with components is defined by the sum of the component
thicknesses. When components have been defined, this parameter becomes read-only.

Edit Wall Attributes

Opens the Wall Attributes dialog box, to specify the wall fill and pen settings

Components

Lists the components that form the structure of the wall, in order from left to right as
displayed in the preview. To change the order of a component, click and drag within the
# column.

Core

One of the wall components can optionally be designated as a core component by

clicking in the Core column. A check mark indicates that the component is the core
component. When the Auto join walls Vectorworks preference is enabled, components
also automatically join based on the core component specified for each wall. See
Automatically Joining Walls on page 549.

New

Click to define the components of the wall; see Creating Wall Components on page 550
for information on creating components

Edit

Opens the Component Attributes dialog box to edit the selected components thickness
and attributes (you can also double-click on a component to open the Component
Attributes dialog box)

Delete

Deletes the selected wall component; the wall thickness is adjusted accordingly

4. Click Edit Wall Attributes to specify the wall attributes.

The Wall Attributes dialog box opens. The wall attributes of an un-styled wall are initially set to the parameters
displayed in the Attributes palette. If they are changed here, the Attributes palette reflects the changed attributes
of the selected wall (after exiting the Wall Preferences dialog box).
Fill, pen, and opacity can be set by class rather than by the attributes in the Wall Attributes dialog box. If the wall
class is changed later, the wall changes to use the attributes of the new class. Wall attributes cannot be overridden
on a per-instance basis; if a wall style uses class attributes, all walls of that style must use class attributes.
However, walls of the same wall style can be placed in different classes.

Creating Walls |

Parameter

545

Description

Fill
Use Class
Attributes

Sets wall fill attributes by class rather than by the parameters in the Wall Attributes dialog
box

Style

Specify the wall fill attributes, or select None for no fill. Selected hatch, gradient, or image
fills, if not already present in the file, are imported and added to the Resource Browser
(default resources are automatically imported into the current file at the point of use and
display in the Resource Browser). See Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks
Default Resources on page 173 and Fill Attributes on page 274.

Pen
Use Class
Attributes

Sets pen attributes by class rather than by the parameters in the Wall Attributes dialog box

Style

Specify the wall pen attributes, or select None for no pen; see Pen Attributes on page 275

Line

When a pen style has been selected, specify the line thickness and style; see Line Style
Attributes on page 276

Opacity
Use Class Opacity

Sets wall opacity by class rather than by the parameters in the Wall Attributes dialog box

Opacity

Specifies the transparency of the wall; drag the slider to the left to increase the
transparency, or enter a percentage directly in the box to the right of the slider

Wall Caps
Use Wall Line
Attributes

Uses the attributes of the wall line for the wall caps

Use Component
Line Attributes

Uses the attributes of the components (left line) for the wall caps

546

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

5. Click OK to return to the Wall Preferences dialog box. If components are to be added to the wall, click New to
define each component (see Creating Wall Components on page 550). The Overall Thickness is then defined
by the thickness of the wall components.
6. Click the Insertion Options tab to set the wall insertion options.

Parameter

Description

Height
Set Height

Sets the default wall height value; walls are drawn with this height, which can be edited
later in the Object Info palette

Link Height to
Layer Delta Z

Sets the default wall height to the value specified for the design layers Delta Z value (see
Setting Design Layer Properties on page 103)
The association between wall height and the layers Delta Z value can be broken after
wall creation, by deselecting Link Wall Height to Layer +/- Z from the Object Info
palette.

Offset

Adds to or subtracts from the height of the design layers Delta Z value

Class

Specifies the default class for the walls

Caps

Select whether a wall segment is capped at the start point, the end point, both ends, or has
no caps at all

Control Offset

If using the Custom Control Line wall mode, enter the offset value for the control line (see
Creating Walls on page 541)

Vectorworks Architect is required to display the Data Fields tab. See Creating Walls in Architect and
Landmark on page 63 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

Creating Walls |

547

7. Click the Textures tab to set the wall textures (Renderworks required).
Select from the default resources or the current files resources (see Vectorworks Fundamentals and
Renderworks Default Resources on page 173). Alternatively, select Class Texture to use the texture defined by
the walls class. Any walls with that wall style use class textures for that part of the wall (unless overridden).
Class Texture can also be chosen for a selected wall in the Render tab of the Object Info palette.
Textures can also be set from the Render tab of the Object Info palette, where additional wall parts can be
textured. Textures applied from the Object Info palette override the textures set in the Textures tab. Textures from
the Textures tab override the class textures, when Use Textures at Wall Creation is selected. See Applying
Textures to an Object on page 761 in the Vectorworks Fundamentals Users Guide.

Parameter

Description

Use Textures at Wall

Creation

Applies the textures to the walls as they are drawn

Use Left Texture for

the Entire Wall

Applies the texture selected in Left to the center and right parts of the wall (see Wall
Direction on page 549 for information on wall sections)

Left

Specifies the texture for the left section of the wall

Center

Specifies the texture for the center and ends of the wall

Right

Specifies the texture for the right section of the wall

8. Click OK when the wall preferences have been set.

9. Click at the starting point of the first wall section.
10. Click to end the first wall section.
To continue creating walls, click at the end of each additional wall section.

548

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

11. Double-click to finish the wall if the start point and end point are not at the same location; otherwise, click at the
starting location (a SmartCursor cue displays) to finish the wall.
3rd

2nd

4th

5th

1st click
Walls drawn in Top/Plan view

4th

1st click

3rd

5th

2nd
Walls drawn in a 3D view

Drawing Round Walls

Round, hybrid walls can be created and joined to straight walls. The Round Wall tool is essentially a combination of
the Wall tool and Arc tool functions. It creates a round wall with the same features and elements as straight walls.
Walls can be drawn in Top/Plan or in a 3D view.

3D view

2D view

Round walls preferences include all of the same parameters as straight walls.
To create round walls:
1. Click the Round Wall tool from the Walls tool set.
2. Click the desired Offset mode button (see Creating Walls on page 541).

Creating Walls |

549

3. Click the Wall Preferences mode button (the preferences are described in Drawing Straight Walls on page 542).
4. Click OK when the round wall preferences have been set.
5. Click to set the center point of the wall arc.
6. Click the mouse to begin drawing the wall, or use the Data bar to enter an angle. For more information on arc
creation modes, see Creating Arcs on page 244.
7. Click to end the wall.
1st click

2nd click
3rd click

Wall Direction
The starting point and the direction in which the wall is drawn determine a walls sides. Think of walking along the
top of the wallthe wall side on your left could be the exterior of a building or the interior, depending on which
direction you travel. The left side and right side designations are used when textures are applied to the walls.
In Top/Plan view, arrows indicate the current wall direction

Right
(interior)

For walls drawn in a

clockwise direction, the
left side is the exterior

Left
(exterior)

Left
(interior)

Right
(exterior)

For walls drawn in a

counterclockwise direction,
the right side is the exterior

To reverse the wall direction, click Reverse Sides from the Object Info palette.

Automatically Joining Walls

The Vectorworks preferences item, Auto join walls, automatically joins walls at corners and intersections, and
automatically heals the mitered ends of walls when they are separated from one another. For T joins, the break in the
side of the wall is healed. Walls can be in either 2D or 3D view.

550

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Original walls

Walls separated and

ends auto-healed

Walls separated but

ends not auto-healed

When drawing walls with auto join on, connected

walls are highlighted to show which walls will join

When a core component has been set for walls with components, the components also automatically join. Core
components, as well as the other components, join uncapped if they have the same fill, and capped otherwise.
To set the Auto join walls preference:
1. Select Tools > Options > Vectorworks Preferences (see Edit Preferences on page 47).
2. On the Edit tab, select Auto join walls.
3. Click OK.

Creating Wall Components

Wall components define the sections that make up a wall. For example, to indicate that a wall is made up of studs,
inner drywall, outer sheathing, and then a siding material, define a component for each of these items to illustrate their
location.
The overall thickness of a wall is equal to the sum of its components. Component fill and line style are only displayed
in Top/Plan view (except for section viewports in the Design Series).
Use the Eyedropper tool to copy wall component settings from one wall to another (see Transferring Attributes on
page 278).
Additional wall capabilities are available in Vectorworks Architect.
Wall components can be defined prior to drawing the wall in Wall Preferences mode, or after drawing the wall, from
the Object Info palette.
Wall components can also be edited from Wall Preferences mode. Editing a component from wall preferences
does not affect existing walls.

Defining Components for New Walls

To define a wall component prior to drawing the wall:
1. Select the Wall tool or Round Wall tool from the Walls tool set, and then click Wall Preferences from the Tool
bar.
The Wall Preferences dialog box opens.
2. On the Wall Definition tab, click New.
The Component Attributes dialog box opens. Specify the component thickness, name, and parameters.

Creating Walls |

Parameter

551

Description

Definition
Thickness

Specifies the components thickness; the thickness of a wall is the sum of its components. A
component must have a thickness greater than 0.

Name

Provide a name for the component, which displays in the Components list in the Wall
Preferences dialog box

Class

Displays the component class; this setting can be changed in Vectorworks Architect (see
Creating Walls in Architect and Landmark on page 63 in the Vectorworks Design Series
Users Guide). Vectorworks Fundamentals can display classes set in Architect. <Wall Class>
indicates that the component assumes the same class setting as that of the wall.

Fill
Use Class
Attributes

Sets component fill attributes by class rather than by the parameters in the Component
Attributes dialog box. If the component class is changed later, the component changes to use
the attributes of the new class.

Style

Specify the wall fill attributes, or select None for no fill. Selected hatch, gradient, or image
fills, if not already present in the file, are imported and added to the Resource Browser
(default resources are automatically imported into the current file at the point of use and
display in the Resource Browser). See Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default
Resources on page 173 and Fill Attributes on page 274.

Left Pen/Right Pen

Class attributes can be used for the left and right pen parameters. Otherwise, select a style,
line thickness, and dash style for the left and right sides of the component; see Line Style
Attributes on page 276

3. Click OK to create the component and return to the Wall Preferences dialog box.
The walls Overall Thickness value changes to be determined by its components. As components are defined,
they display in the preview. Click and drag a component in the # column to change its order.

552

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

4. Click OK.

Defining Components for Existing Walls

To define or edit wall components for an existing wall:
1. Select the wall(s).
2. From the Object Info palette, click Components.
The Components dialog box opens.

Creating Walls |

553

Parameter

Description

Preview

Displays a preview of the wall structure, including the defined components; the preview wall
is drawn from left to right, so the top of the preview, by default, indicates the left part of the
wall as it will be drawn. The arrow shows the wall direction.

Overall Thickness

The thickness of a wall with components is defined by the sum of the component thicknesses

Components

Lists the components that form the structure of the wall, in order from left to right as
displayed in the preview. To change the order of a component, click and drag within the #
column.

Core

One of the wall components can optionally be designated as a core component by clicking in
the Core column. A check mark indicates that the component is the core component. When the
Auto join walls Vectorworks preference is enabled, components also automatically join based
on the core component specified for each wall. See Automatically Joining Walls on page 549.

New

Click to define the components of the wall as described previously in this section

Edit

Opens the Component Attributes dialog box to edit the selected components thickness and
attributes (you can also double-click on a component to open the Component Attributes
dialog box)

Delete

Deletes the selected wall component; the wall thickness is adjusted accordingly

3. Click New or Edit, and define or edit the components as described previously.
4. Click OK to return to the Components dialog box.
5. Click OK. The new component definition is applied to the selected wall(s).

Creating Walls from a Polygon

Another way of obtaining walls is to create them from a polygon.
To create walls from a polygon:
1. Draw or select the polygon to become the basis for the walls.
2. Select Modify > Create Walls from Polygon.
The Create Walls from Poly dialog box opens. Select the desired wall parameters.

554

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Parameter

Description

Wall position relative to

edge of poly

Specifies whether the wall position should be centered on the polygon, inside the
polygon, or outside the polygon

Use existing wall style

Specifies whether to create the walls using the existing wall style

Use existing wall thickness

Specifies whether to create the walls using the existing wall thickness or specify a
new Thickness value

Use existing wall height

Specifies whether to create the walls using the existing wall height or specify a new
Height value

Assign to class

Select the class into which the walls should be placed

Delete Source Poly

Deletes the source polygon after the walls are created

3. Click OK.
Vectorworks creates the wall(s) based on the original polygon and the specified parameters.

Creating Walls |

555

Creating Pillars
The Pillar command converts any closed 2D shaperectangle, circle, oval, or polygoninto a pillar. In addition, use it
on open 2D shapes, such as lines and polylines, to create a flat, screen-like object. These objects include such things as
movie screens, room dividers, and moving walls. Once created, a pillar can be joined to a wall. Create pillars in 2D
Top/Plan view.

3D view

2D view

To create a pillar:
1. Select View > Standard Views > Top/Plan.
2. Click on the 2D object to convert.
3. Select Model > AEC > Pillar.
The Pillar Preferences dialog box opens.

4. Enter a pillar height.

5. Click OK.
To view the new pillar, change to a 3D projection mode.

Joining Pillars and Walls

Walls and pillars can be joined together. Any number of walls can connect to the pillar as long as space exists on the
pillar.
The pillar needs to be joined to the end of a wall; it cannot be added to an existing wall intersection such as the corner
of L-joined or T-joined walls.

556

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

3D view

2D view

To join a pillar to a wall:

1. Click on the pillar.
2. Draw the walls.
If the Auto-join feature is enabled, then the walls automatically connect to the pillar.
If the Auto-join feature is disabled, then click the Wall Join tool from the Walls tool set and join the walls to the
pillar.

Creating a Polygon or Polyline from Walls

Vectorworks can create a polygon or polyline based on either the gross area or net area of walls. This is useful for
calculating the area of a room, for example, or for using color to differentiate among rooms.
To create a polygon or polyline based on the perimeter of the walls:
1. Select the walls to use for the polygon or polyline. Multiple walls can be selected to create several polygons or
polylines at the same time.

2. Select Modify > Create Polys from Walls.

The Create Polys from Walls dialog box opens.

Editing Walls |
Parameter

Description

Gross Area Polys

Creates a polygon or polyline from the exterior perimeter of the selected walls

Net Area (Room) Polys

Creates a polygon or polyline from the interior perimeter of the selected walls

557

3. Click OK.
Vectorworks automatically creates the polygon or polyline, leaving the original walls unchanged.

Polygons and polylines shaded and moved for clarity

Editing Walls
Wall parameters can be edited from the Object Info palette. Vertices can be added, deleted, or moved, and walls can be
reshaped. In addition, wall breaks can be removed, walls can be joined in a variety of conformations, and symbols can
be added to the walls.

Wall Properties
The properties of selected straight or round walls and their components can be edited in the Object Info palette.
Change the wall attributes from the Attributes palette.

Parameter

Description

Style

In Vectorworks Fundamentals, all walls are un-styled. Vectorworks Architect is required

to select other wall styles; see Creating Walls in Architect and Landmark on page 63 in
the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

+/- Z

Sets the default wall height value

Link Wall Height to

Layer +/- Z

Sets the default wall height to the value specified for the design layers Delta Z value (see
Setting Design Layer Properties on page 103)
Deselecting this option breaks the association between wall height and the layers
Delta Z value.

Offset

Adds to or subtracts from the height of the design layers Delta Z value

558

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Parameter

Description

Bot Z

Sets the location of the bottom of the wall above or below the layers Z value

Thick

Displays the overall thickness of the wall; the thickness of a wall without components is
determined by the wall attributes. The thickness of a wall with components is defined by
the sum of the component thicknesses.

Visible Thickness

Displays the wall thickness, while accounting for component visibility settings. Invisible
components on the interior and exterior of the wall cause the wall to appear thinner than
its actual length, for display purposes.

Caps

Select whether a wall segment is capped at the start point, the end point, both ends, or has
no caps at all

Attr

When the wall is capped, specifies whether the wall cap attributes comes from the wall
line attributes or the component line attributes

Components

Edits the wall components (see Creating Wall Components on page 550)

Reverse Sides

Reverses the direction of the wall sections (see Wall Direction on page 549)

Reshaping Walls
Use the 3D Reshape tool to edit the elevation of walls, add vertices to create peaks in a wall, and delete vertices that
have been added. Use the 2D Selection or 3D Selection tool to change the wall length. Symbols remain where placed
when a wall is reshaped.
Three modes are available when both the 3D Reshape tool and a wall is selected.
Add 3D Wall Peaks

Reshape 3D Walls

Delete 3D Wall Peaks

Mode

Description

Reshape 3D Walls

Adjusts the position of a selected wall vertex

Add 3D Wall Peaks

Adds a vertex to a wall for reshaping purposes

Delete 3D Wall Peaks

Deletes a wall vertex

Changing Wall Length

To change a walls length:
1. Select the wall to reshape.
2. In Top/Plan, click the 2D Selection tool, or in a 3D view, click the 3D Selection tool from the Basic palette.
3. Position the cursor over an end selection handle, and click.
In a 3D view, the handles are at the base of the wall.
4. Move the mouse to lengthen or shorten the wall.
5. Click when the wall is at the desired length.

Editing Walls |

559

With the 3D Selection tool, drag the handle at the base of the wall to lengthen
or shorten the wall (Front view depicted)

Changing Wall Elevation

To change the elevation of a wall:
1. Select the wall to reshape.
2. Click the 3D Reshape tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Reshape 3D Walls mode.
3. Position the cursor over one of the handles on the ends or top/bottom middle of the wall, and click.
When the cursor is over a reshape handle, the standard arrow cursor changes into a double-headed, unfilled
arrow.
4. Move the mouse to adjust the wall.
5. Click at the desired location.

With the 3D Reshape cursor, drag a top corner point to reshape the
top of the wall (Front view depicted)

In an isometric view, drag the handle in

the middle of the wall (top or bottom) to
change the height

Adding a Vertex to Walls

To add a vertex to a wall:
1. Select the wall that requires a peak (vertex).
2. Click the 3D Reshape tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Add 3D Wall Peaks mode.
3. Position the cursor over an end point on one of the corners or an existing vertex, and click.
When the cursor is over an end point, the standard arrow cursor changes into a single-headed, filled arrow with
shaded boxes on either side of the shaft.

560

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

4. Move the mouse to add a vertex to the top or bottom of the wall.
A vertex can be moved to any location along the same wall as long as the location does not pass another existing
vertex.
5. Click when the vertex is at the desired location.

With the Add Peak cursor, click-click an end point to add a peak
(Front view depicted)

The top of the wall is now flush with

the bottom of the roof

To reshape a curved wall to match a planar surface, use the Subtract Solids or Intersect Solids command with an
object that matches the plane of the roof.

Deleting a Wall Vertex

To delete a control point:
1. Select the wall with the peak (vertex) to be deleted.
2. Click the 3D Reshape tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Delete 3D Wall Peaks mode.
3. Position the cursor over the vertex to delete.
When the cursor is over a vertex, the standard arrow cursor changes into a single-headed, filled arrow with a
hollow diamond in the shaft.
4. Click on the vertex.
The vertex is removed and the wall is reshaped to the remaining vertices.

Wall with two unnecessary vertices

(Front view depicted)

With the Delete Peak cursor, click

a vertex to delete it

Wall with two vertices removed

Editing Walls |

561

Changing Round Wall Radius

To change the radius of a round wall:
1. Select the round wall to edit.
2. Click the 2D Selection tool from the Basic palette.
3. Position the cursor over the center control point, and click.
4. Move the mouse to change the radius, and click to set the end point.

Move the control point to

change the round wall radius

Flip the round wall arc by dragging toward, and through, the arc center.

Removing Wall Breaks

The Remove Wall Breaks tool cleans up any wall breaks or gaps that were created during editing. For example, when
creating a new wall that joins an existing wall, if the new wall is later deleted, a break in the remaining wall displays at
the joint. The Remove Wall Breaks tool can remove the break and any end caps.
To remove wall breaks:
1. Click the Remove Wall Breaks tool from the Walls tool set.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the wall and select Remove Break from the
context menu.
2. Click and drag to create a marquee box around the wall break or end cap to remove.
The wall break or end cap is automatically removed.
2nd click
1st click

Joining Walls
The Wall Join tool joins straight or curved wall segments, not already connected using the Auto join walls preference.
(See Automatically Joining Walls on page 549 for information on Auto join walls.) There are three modes for joining
walls and two end cap modes.

562

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

L Join

Uncapped Join

T Join

X Join

Capped Join

Mode

Description

T Join

Extends or shortens one wall segment until it intersects with a second wall segment; creates
Y joins by joining the first selected wall to two sections of an existing L join

L Join

Joins the closest ends of two walls to create a corner

X Join

Joins two wall segments at the point where they intersect

Uncapped Join

Applies an uncapped join to wall join operations

Capped Join

Applies a capped join to wall join operations

To temporarily activate this tool, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a wall, and select Join from
the context menu.

T Wall Joins
The T Join mode extends or shortens the first wall segment until it intersects with a second wall segment. As only the
first wall is extended, this mode will not create corner type joins. (For those, use the L wall join mode. See L Wall
Joins on page 563 for more information.)
To join walls with the T Join mode:
1. Click the Wall Join tool from the Walls tool set
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the wall and select Join from the context menu.
2. Click T Join from the Tool bar.
3. Select the wall segment to join.
4. Select the second wall segment to join.

To create a T join to an existing corner, join the wall segment to the perpendicular corner segment. This creates a
clean join between the walls.

Editing Walls |

563

A
C

A
B

In both cases, wall A and B are already corner joined; wall C is joined to wall A

Y Wall Joins
Y wall joins are not automatically created when using the Auto join walls preference. (See Setting Vectorworks
Preferences on page 47 for information on Auto join walls.) Instead, the T Join mode is used to create Y wall joins.
To create a Y wall join between three wall segments:
1. Click the Wall Join tool from the Walls tool set.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the wall and select Join from the context menu.
2. Click T Join from the Tool bar.
3. Select the wall segment to join.
4. Select one of the two wall segments to join.
The wall segments are joined.

L Wall Joins
The L Join mode joins the closest ends of two walls to create a corner, or joins two walls end to end. Both wall lengths
are extended or shortened, as necessary, until they meet cleanly.
To join walls with the L Join mode:
1. Click the Wall Join tool from the Walls tool set.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the wall and select Join from the context menu.
2. Click L Join from the Tool bar.

564

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

3. Select the first wall segment to join.

4. Select the second wall segment to join.
The wall lengths are resized, as necessary.

Joining walls end

to end

X Wall Joins
The X Join mode joins two wall segments at the point where they intersect.
To join walls with the X Join mode:
1. Click the Wall Join tool from the Walls tool set.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the wall and select Join from the context menu.
2. Click X Join from the Tool bar.
3. Select the first wall segment to join.
4. Select the second wall segment to join.
The first wall is split about the second wall to create the join.

The two wall segments must already intersect in order to use this mode, as neither segments length is altered.

Joining Walls with the Fillet Tool

The Fillet tool, located on the Basic palette, joins two wall segments by creating a round wall between them. See
Creating Fillets and Chamfers on page 326.

Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall |

565

Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall

Once the walls have been created, symbols and plug-in objects such as windows and doors can be added to them.
After they are in the wall, the symbols may be moved or duplicated. When a 3D wall hole component has been added
to a symbol, it can cut a hole of the desired shape in a wall.
For general information about symbols, see the following:
Creating New Symbols on page 189 describes how to set symbol insertion options.
Editing Symbols on page 198 describes how to change symbol properties.
Inserting Symbols on page 193 describes how to insert single symbols using the 2D Symbol Insertion tool, 3D
Symbol Insertion tool, and the drag and drop method.
In addition, various Vectorworks tools and commands have specialized behavior to insert, move, and edit symbols in
both straight and round walls. See the following:

Inserting Symbols with the Duplicate Symbol in Wall Tool on page 565
Inserting Symbols in a Duplicate Array on page 567
Dragging and Dropping Symbols into Walls on page 568
Moving Symbols in Walls with the 2D Selection Tool on page 569
Nudging Symbols in Walls on page 569
Moving Symbols in Walls with the Move Command on page 570
Moving Symbols in Walls with the Move by Points Tool on page 570
Editing Symbols in Walls on page 573
Adding a 3D Wall Hole Component to a Symbol Definition on page 574

Inserting Symbols with the Duplicate Symbol in Wall Tool

Use the Duplicate Symbol in Wall tool to easily place multiple copies of a symbol (or plug-in object) in a wall, such as
doors or windows in an office building or electrical outlets along a wall.
Symbols can also be duplicated within walls with the Duplicate Array command (see Inserting Symbols in a
Duplicate Array on page 567) and with the Move by Points tool (see Moving Symbols in Walls with the Move
by Points Tool on page 570).
The Duplicate Symbol in Wall tool has two modes.
Default Insertion

Flipped Insertion

Wall Preferences

566

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Mode

Description

Flipped Insertion

Flips the symbol during placement (for example, changes the direction that a door opens)

Default Insertion

Places the symbol using the orientation at creation

Wall Preferences

Specifies symbol placement information

To place duplicate symbols in a wall:

1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. Click the desired symbol from the list.
The symbol must have the Insert in Walls option enabled (see Creating New Symbols on page 189).
3. Select Make Active from the Resources menu.
Activate a symbol already placed in the drawing with the Symbol Pick Up mode of the 2D Symbol Insertion
tool (see Symbol Pick Up Mode on page 196).
4. Click the Duplicate Symbol in Wall tool from the Walls tool set.
5. Select the placement mode from the Tool bar.
This sets the symbol orientation. To place the symbol using the orientation in which is was created, click the
Default Insertion mode button. To flip the symbol when it is placed, click the Flipped Insertion mode button.
6. Click Wall Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Duplicate Symbol In Wall dialog box opens. Indicate how to place the symbols.

Parameter

Description

Start Offset

To set the first symbol position with the mouse, select Next Click; to set the first symbol position by
a specified distance from a wall end, select the button next to the text box and enter a distance from
the wall end

Spacing

To place successive symbols by mouse click, select Next Click; to place successive symbols a
specified distance apart, select the button next to the text box and enter a distance between symbols

Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall |

Parameter

Description

Copies

If selected, enter the specific number of symbol copies to insert into the wall

567

7. Click OK.
8. Click on the wall to indicate where the first symbol should be inserted. A preview of the symbols are shown
along the wall to aid in placement. If inserting the first symbol by an offset value, click anywhere on the wall and
the first symbol preview displays at the proper offset distance.
9. If spacing symbols by the next mouse click, move the mouse along the wall to set the spacing between symbols,
and click again to insert the duplicate symbols. If spacing symbols by a specified distance, click again to insert
the duplicate symbols. If a number of copies was specified, that number of symbols is automatically inserted.
Move the mouse to the opposite side of the wall to flip the symbol direction.

Inserting Symbols in a Duplicate Array

Use the Duplicate Array command to place multiple copies of a selected symbol into straight or round walls. The
drawing must be in Top/Plan view if 2D objects are being duplicated.
Symbols can also be duplicated within walls with the Duplicate Symbol in Wall tool (see Inserting Symbols
with the Duplicate Symbol in Wall Tool on page 565) and with the Move by Points tool (see Moving Symbols
in Walls with the Move by Points Tool on page 570).
To create a duplicate array of symbols in a wall:
1. Select the symbol in the wall that is to be duplicated. The duplicates will be placed along the wall following the
walls blue direction arrow.
2. Select Edit > Duplicate Array.
The Duplicate Array dialog box opens. The fields available depend on whether the wall that contains the selected
symbol is straight or round.

568

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Duplicate Array dialog box

for straight walls

Duplicate Array dialog box

for round walls

Parameter

Description

Direction

The preview window shows the direction the duplicate symbols will be placed in
the wall. To reverse the direction of the duplication, click the button to the left of the
window.

Number of Duplicates

Specify the number of copies of the original object to create

Offset Between Duplicates

Specify how far apart to place the duplicate symbols. For straight walls, enter the
distance from the center of each symbol to the center of the next symbol in the wall.
For round walls, specify either the distance or the angle between the duplicates.
Distance is measured along the outer arc of the round wall. Angle is the angle
between the center of each symbol to the center of the next symbol in the wall.

Z Offset Between Duplicates

Optionally, specify a difference in height on the wall between each symbol

3. Click OK, and the array of duplicate symbols is placed into the wall.

Dragging and Dropping Symbols into Walls

To insert a 2D, 3D, or hybrid symbol in a wall by dragging it from the Resource Browser:
1. Click the symbol in the Resource Browser and drag it to the desired location in the wall.
The symbol must have the Insert in Walls option enabled (see Creating New Symbols on page 189).

Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall |

569

The symbol cannot be rotated during insertion, since the 2D Symbol Insertion tool (or 3D Symbol Insertion
tool) is not automatically activated. When a symbol is dropped onto a wall or round wall, Vectorworks inserts the
symbol into the object using the default flip value. (If this is not desirable, make the symbol active so that it is
inserted with the appropriate insertion tool.)
2. If necessary, edit the symbol parameters in the Object Info palette.

Moving Symbols in Walls with the 2D Selection Tool

The 2D Selection tool moves symbols (or plug-in objects) within walls. Several symbols can be selected and moved at
once. When multiple symbols are selected, their common parameters can be changed in the Object Info palette.
Symbols within walls and symbols outside of walls cannot be selected at the same time.
To move one or more symbols within a wall:
1. Switch to Top/Plan view.
The 2D Selection tool can only move symbols in a wall in a 2D view.
2. Click the 2D Selection tool from the Basic palette.
Toggle Wall Insertion mode on or off, depending on the desired result.

Action

Description

Select one or more symbols inserted in a

wall, with Wall Insertion mode on

Inserted symbols can be dragged out of the wall (and into another wall if
desired).

Select one or more symbols not inserted

in a wall, with Wall Insertion mode on

Selected symbols can be inserted into a wall by dragging them over the
wall.

Select one or more symbols inserted in a

wall, with Wall Insertion mode off

The symbols are moved within the wall. When one of the objects in the
selection reaches the end of the wall, none of the objects can be moved
farther in that direction.

3. Select the symbol or symbols.

4. Position the cursor near the symbol to be moved. When the resize cursor displays, drag the symbol(s).
Click

Nudging Symbols in Walls

Objects within a single wall can be nudged a small distance with a keyboard shortcut defined in the Edit tab of the
Vectorworks Preferences (see Edit Preferences on page 47). To preserve the existing wall geometry, select the 2D
Reshape tool prior to the nudge operation.

570

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

To nudge one or more symbols in a wall:

1. Switch to Top/Plan view.
2. Select one or more symbols with the 2D Selection tool; if multiple symbols are selected, they must be in the same
wall.
3. Select the 2D Reshape tool, and draw a marquee around the symbols to be moved.
4. Use the keyboard shortcut for nudging objects to move the symbols as needed.

Moving Symbols in Walls with the Move Command

Symbols within a single wall can be moved with the Move command. The tool works in both 2D and 3D views.
To move one or more symbols in a wall:
1. Select the symbol(s) to move with either the 2D Selection or 3D Selection tool; if multiple symbols are selected,
they must be in the same wall.
2. Select Modify > Move > Move.
The Move Selection dialog box opens. The fields available depend on whether the wall that contains the selected
symbol(s) is straight or round.

Move Selection dialog box

for straight walls

Move Selection dialog box

for round walls

Parameter

Description

Direction

The preview window shows the direction the symbol(s) will be moved in the wall. To reverse
the direction of the move, click the button to the left of the window.

Offset

For straight walls, specify the distance along the wall to move the object(s). For round walls,
specify either the Distance or the Angle between the old and new locations. The distance is
measured along the outer arc of the round wall.

3. Click OK, and the symbols are moved as specified.

Moving Symbols in Walls with the Move by Points Tool

Symbols within a single wall can be moved, duplicated, and distributed along a specified distance with the Move by
Points tool. The tool works in both 2D and 3D views.

Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall |

571

Symbols can also be duplicated within walls with the Duplicate Symbol in Wall tool (see Inserting Symbols
with the Duplicate Symbol in Wall Tool on page 565) and with the Duplicate Array command (see Inserting
Symbols in a Duplicate Array on page 567).
The Move by Points tool has three modes.
Distribute

Reference Point

Move

Preferences

Mode

Description

Move

Moves and duplicates selected symbols according to the distance and direction specified by
two mouse clicks

Distribute

Moves and distributes duplicate symbols between the points specified by two mouse clicks

Reference Point

Moves selected symbols according to a clicked reference point and a specified offset distance
from that point; the Preferences settings are not applicable when this mode is selected

Moving Symbols in Walls with the Move or Distribute Mode

The Move and Distribute modes work the same way for symbols in walls as they do for other objects, except the vector
that is specified by clicking is assumed to be along the wall. (See Moving Objects with the Move or Distribute Mode
on page 413 for details.)
To move, duplicate, and distribute selected symbols in a wall:
1. Select the symbol(s) in a wall to move and/or duplicate; if multiple symbols are selected, they must be in the
same wall.
2. Click the Move by Points tool from the Basic palette and click Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Move by Points Settings dialog box opens. Select the desired settings and click OK.

Parameter

Description

Number of Duplicates

Specifies the number of copies of the original symbol(s) to create (must be at least one)

Original Object
Retain

Keeps the original symbol(s); the Alt (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) key also retains
the original while using the tool

572

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Parameter
Leave Selected

Description
Keeps the original symbol(s) selected for further action

To select additional symbols or to change the currently selected symbol to move, duplicate, or distribute, press
and hold the Alt key (Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking additional objects or click-dragging
the mouse around them to marquee select them; the 2D Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the
Alt or Cmd is being pressed.
3. Select either the Move or Distribute mode, depending on the desired outcome.
4. Click once to indicate the vector start point, and click again to indicate the vector end point.
Symbols are duplicated or moved within the wall, in the direction and distance specified. If the wall is not long
enough to accommodate the specified duplicates and spacing, the number of symbols and the distance between
them is adjusted automatically.

Moving Symbols in Walls with the Reference Point Mode

Reference Point mode can work two ways; the first click can either indicate the object to be moved or the reference
point from which the object will be offset.
To move selected symbols in a wall using a reference point:
1. Select the symbol(s) to move; if multiple symbols are selected, they must be in the same wall.
2. Click the Move by Points tool from the Basic palette.
To select additional symbols or to change the currently selected symbol to move, press and hold the Alt key
(Windows) or Cmd key (Macintosh) while shift-clicking additional objects or click-dragging the mouse around
them to marquee select them; the 2D Selection tool is activated in boomerang mode while the Alt or Cmd is
being pressed.
3. Select the Reference Point mode from the Tool bar.
4. Click to indicate either the reference point, or a point on the selected symbol.
The Enter Offset dialog box opens, displaying the distance between the clicked points. The fields available
depend on whether the wall is straight or round.

Enter Offset dialog box

for straight walls

Enter Offset dialog box

for round walls

5. For round walls, select whether to offset the symbol by Distance or by the Angle along the arc of the wall.

Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall |

573

6. Change the offset distance or angle.

7. Select whether the first click made was the reference point or a point on the symbol to be moved.
8. Click OK. The selected symbol is moved along the wall as specified.
9. The setting for how the first click is interpreted remains set until it is changed.

Editing Symbols in Walls

Once a symbol has been placed in a wall, Vectorworks allows some special actions, each of which is performed within
the wall structure. Flip the symbol in the wall, reposition it, or completely replace it. Symbols can also be dragged
completely out of the wall.
To change how a symbol interacts with a wall:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Object Info.
The Object Info palette opens.
2. Select the desired symbol or symbols with the 2D Selection or 3D Selection tool.
The Object Info palette displays the symbols information. If several symbols are selected, only the common
information can be changed.
3. Change the symbols settings as necessary.

Parameter

Description

Insert

Changes the insertion point location in relation to the symbol position

Break

Changes the wall break style where the symbol is inserted

Height

Changes the height of the symbol in the wall

Flip

Click to flip through a series of four rotations until the desired orientation is reached

Set Position

Activates the Move by Points tool in Reference Point mode; see Moving Symbols in Walls with the
Reference Point Mode on page 572

574

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Parameter

Description

Replace

Opens the Choose a Symbol dialog box to allow selection of a replacement symbol; see Replacing
Existing Symbols on page 199

Adding a 3D Wall Hole Component to a Symbol Definition

By adding a 3D wall hole component to a symbol definition, the symbol has the ability to cut holes of any shape in a
wall. The geometry drawn to define the shape of the 3D hole can consist of any solid shape or shapes. If a wall hole
component is included in a symbol definition, any existing 3D loci in the 3D component of the symbol are ignored.
To add a 3D wall hole component to a symbol definition:
1. Select a black symbol instance from the drawing. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the symbol,
and select Edit 3D Wall Hole Component from the context menu to enter wall hole component editing mode.
It is also possible to select the symbol to edit from the Resource Browser, and select Edit from the Resources
menu, and then select 3D Wall Hole Component from the Edit Symbol dialog box. However, editing the symbol
instance from the drawing allows you to see the drawing context when adding the wall hole component.
A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Exit Wall Hole
Component command becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Exit Wall Hole Component button is
visible in the top right corner of the drawing window.
2. Any solid shape(s) can be drawn to define the hole shape. The geometry must intersect the wall.
Select the 2D Polygon tool or Polyline tool from the Basic palette and trace the symbol outline to define the hole
shape. Select Model > Extrude to create a 3D wall hole shape. Alternatively, create 3D wall hole geometry directly
using 3D modeling tools. The wall hole geometry has a red pen style; this can be changed from the Attributes
palette if desired.
Other drawing objects display, and can be snapped to, while in the editing mode (the Vectorworks display
preference Show other objects while in editing modes must be enabled). The symbol being edited is displayed
with its pen style attributes, to distinguish it from the rest of drawing.
3. Click Exit Wall Hole Component to return to the design layer.
Since the wall hole component was added to the symbol definition, all instances of the symbol will cut holes in
walls according to the geometry drawn.

Inserting and Editing Symbols Within a Wall |

Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click

(Macintosh) and select Edit 3D Wall
Hole Component from the context
menu to enter wall hole component
editing mode

In the editing mode, draw the

geometry to create the 3D wall
hole, and extrude it to create the
wall hole shape

575

The 3D geometry creates the hole

of the desired shape in the wall

Applying Renderworks Textures to Wall Hole Components

Special texture parts for wall hole components can be applied from the Object Info palette (Renderworks required). See
Applying Textures to an Object on page 761. While editing the wall hole component, the Assign Part list on the
Render tab of the Object Info palette lists three options for the different textures that can be applied to wall hole faces:
Holes, Wall Left, and Wall Right.

Texture Part

Result

Holes

Applies the texture specified for the walls Holes part to the wall faces created by the cutting
object

Wall Left

Applies the texture specified for the walls Left part to the wall faces created by the cutting object

Wall Right

Applies the texture specified for the walls Right part to the wall faces created by the cutting
object

Each wall hole component can only have one texture part defined. Therefore, up to three different cutting objects
would be necessary to apply three different texture parts to the wall hole faces.

576

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Creating Columns
The Vectorworks column object places a basic, non-symmetrical architectural column in the drawing. Additional
column capabilities are available in Vectorworks Architect (see Creating Columns and Pilasters in Architect on
page 80 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide).
To create a basic column:
1. Click the Column tool from the Walls tool set.
The Column tool on the Building Shell tool set creates a basic column for Vectorworks Landmark, Spotlight, and
Machine Design (Design Series required).
2. Click to place the column in the drawing, and click again to set the columns rotation. If this is the first time a
column is placed in the drawing, the column object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to
subsequently created columns; they can be changed later by accessing them from the Object Info palette.
3. Specify the column properties.
To create a circular or square shaft, capital, or base, enter the same value for the width and depth.

Parameter

Description

Use Center Marks

Select this option to size the cross at the column insertion point and enter the Center
Mark Size

Arch Height

Enter the architectural column height, including base and capital (if any)

Shaft Type

Select to draw the column with an oval or rectangular shaft type

Shaft Width

Enter the shaft width

Shaft Depth

Enter the shaft depth

Shaft Corner Radius

For rectangular shaft type, enter the corner radius of the shaft

Shaft Taper

Select whether to draw the column with a classic or straight taper, or no taper

Taper Width

For a straight or classic taper, enter the taper width

Taper Depth

For a straight or classic taper, enter the taper depth

Use Capital

Select whether to add a capital to the column

Capital Type

Select to draw the column with an oval, oval mushroom, rectangular, or rectangular
mushroom capital

Capital Width

Enter the capital width

Capital Depth

Enter the capital depth

Capital Height

Enter the capital height

Capital Corner Radius

For rectangular capital type, enter the corner radius of the capital

Use Base

Select whether to add a base to the column

Base Type

Select an oval or rectangular base type

Base Width

Enter the base width

Base Depth

Enter the base depth

Creating Simple Stairs |

Parameter

577

Description

Base Height

Enter the base height

Base Corner Radius

For rectangular base type, enter the base corner radius

Base Divisions

Enter the number of divisions for the base

Get Finishes/Classes

Click to open the Get Finishes/Classes dialog box to select the style class to use for
rendering the 3D shaft, capital, and base of the column (see Using Style Classes on
page 182 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide)

Shaft Finish

Displays the style class to use for rendering the 3D shaft (selected in the Get Finishes/
Classes dialog box)

Capital Finish

If Use Capital is selected, displays the style class to use for rendering the 3D capital
(selected in the Get Finishes/Classes dialog box)

Base Finish

If Use Base is selected, displays the style class to use for rendering the 3D base (selected
in the Get Finishes/Classes dialog box)

4. Click OK.
A column with the specified parameters is placed on the drawing. The object parameters can be modified in the
Object Info palette.

Creating Simple Stairs

A simple stair object is available to add a basic stair representation to the drawing. Design Series products contain two
additional stair tools when the design requires complex, detailed stairs. See Inserting Stairs on page 138 in the
Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
To insert a simple stair:
1. Click the Simple Stair tool from the Walls tool set.
2. Click to place the simple stair in the drawing, and click again to set the stairs rotation. If this is the first time a
stair is placed in the drawing, the stair object properties dialog box opens. These parameters apply to
subsequently created stairs.
The stair parameters can be edited from the Object Info palette.

Parameter

Description

Style

Select the stair style: standard, indented, open riser, or masonry

Width

Specifies the width of the staircase

Flr-Flr Height

Specifies the height of the staircase from floor to floor

Max Riser

Indicates the horizontal maximum thickness of the riser

Tread Depth/Height

Sets the tread depth (front to back) and the tread height

Nosing Depth

Specifies the nosing depth

Config

Select the stair configuration: straight, straight with a landing, left and right landings,
and left and right double-back stairs with landings (even and irregular)

578

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Parameter

Description

Landing Tread

Indicates how many steps occur before the landing (does not apply to even double
back stairs)

Separation

For double back style stairs, sets the separation distance between the flights

Offset 1/2

For stairs with landings, indicates the distance to offset the landing from the stairs on
each side of the landing

Curved Landing

Creates curved landings; the radius matches the stair width

Stringer Width/Offset

Sets the stringer width (thickness) on each side of the stair, and specifies the distance
between the outside of the stair tread to the outside of the stringers

Draw Lower Stair Break

Hides a portion of the stair with a stair break, so that the lower portion of the stair can
be displayed in 2D

Show Data

Select to display the number of risers and riser height along with the path-of-travel
arrow; an Up or Down arrow must be selected in Arrows for stair data to be displayed

Draw Top Tread

Specify whether the stair should include a tread at the same level as the upper floor it
serves

Create 3D

Creates a 3D version of the stair to display in views other than Top/Plan

Left/Right Rail

Adds handrails to the left and right of the staircase

Rail Height/Width

Sets the height and width for the railing(s)

Arrows

Select whether to display the path-of-travel arrow, and in which direction

Step/Rail/Stringer Finish

Select the style Class to assign to the steps, railing(s), and stringers, or select None; see
Using Style Classes on page 182 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide

Creating Roof Faces

There are two ways to create a roof for a structure:
The Roof Face command converts any closed 2D object into a roof face object.
The Create Roof command creates a roof by selecting the object(s) that the roof will be based upon (including
walls, polygons and polylines). See Creating Roof Objects on page 582.

Creating Roof Faces |

579

Use the Roof Face command to create hybrid (2D/3D) roof structures from simple 2D objects. This is an easy way to
create a slab or flat roof, by converting any closed 2D object into a roof face object.
For example, use this command to create a uniquely shaped roof, such as a gable roof over a round structure. The roof
can be created in the same design layer as the wall structure, or in a different layer. Create a viewport to view the walls
and roof together.
While this command can create a hip or gable roof, it is easier to create these types of roofs with the Create Roof
command.
To create a roof face:
1. Draw the 2D object that is the basis for the roof.
Any enclosed 2D object can be used, such as enclosed arcs, polylines, rectangles, circles, and ovals.
2. Select the 2D object.
3. Select Model > AEC > Roof Face.
In the Design Series, the Roof Face command is located here: AEC > Roof Face (or Landmark > AEC > Roof
Face.)
The Create Roof Face dialog box opens. Specify the roof slope creation method, edge and hole miter options, and
roof parameters.

Parameter

Description

Roof Slope

Indicates the roof slope creation method and criteria

Angle

Creates a roof slope based on an angle; specify the Angle

Rise over Run

Creates a roof slope based on rise over run values; specify the Rise and Run. The rise is
the distance along the Y axis the roof rises above the Z height, and run is the distance
along the X axis for the roof to reach that height.

2nd Click Height

Creates a roof slope based on a mouse click position (this option only available in Top/
Plan view). Enter the Height for the second mouse click.

Edge Miter

Indicates the miter type for the roof edge

Vertical

Creates the roof edge perpendicular to the active layer plane

Horizontal

Creates the roof edge parallel to the active layer plane

580

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Parameter

Description

Double

Creates the roof edge with a horizontal and vertical miter; specify the Horizontal and
Vertical lengths

Square

Creates the lower edge of the roof face perpendicular to the roof surface, regardless of
the roof angle

Hole Miter

Specifies cut-out miter options

Vertical

Cut-out edges are perpendicular to the active layer plane

Square

Cut-out edges are perpendicular to the roof surface

Axis Z

Sets the roof height

Angle

For angled roof slopes, indicates the roof slope angle

Rise/Run

For rise over run roof slopes, specifies the rise and run values

Height

Indicates the height of the second mouse click when the roof slope is specified with that
option

Thickness

Specifies the roof thickness

Vertical/Horizontal

For double miters, specifies the horizontal and vertical miter lengths

4. Click OK.
5. Click-drag the mouse across the 2D object to draw a line defining the roof axis; click again to complete the line. A
black arrow displays on one side of the line, indicating which side of the object will be the high side of the roof.
6. Point the mouse to the side of the roof that will be highest, and then click again. The roof axis line displays
selection handles, and the arrow pointing to the high side of the roof turns blue, indicating that the roof face is
complete.

2D view

3D view

Reshaping Roof Faces

Once a roof face has been created, there are several ways to edit it:
Edit the roof face parameters (such as the angle or eave type) in the Object Info palette.
Change the roofs basic 2D object shape using the Edit Group command. (Be careful not to use the Ungroup
command, as this permanently changes the roof face back into the original 2D object.) Use the Exit Group
command to complete the change.
Move the roof face axis using the 2D Selection tool in Top/Plan view.

Creating Roof Faces |

581

Change the roof face angle using the 3D Reshape tool (best in Front or Back view).
The roof angle must be between 0 and 85 to be changed by the 3D Reshape tool.

Creating Cut-outs in a Roof Face

Use the Clip Surface command to add a cut-out to a roof face. A cut-out, for example, can be used to add a hole for a
chimney that overlaps two or more faces of the roof.
This procedure creates a cutout in a roof face created with the Roof Face command (see Creating Roof Faces on
page 578).

2D view

3D view

The edges of the cut-out are mitered according to the selections made in the Create Roof dialog box during the creation
of the roof face.
To add a cut-out to a roof face:
1. Select the roof face.
2. Create an object with the dimensions for the cut-out and place it where the cut-out will be located.
3. Select both objects.
4. Select Modify > Clip Surface.
This creates the cut-out in the roof face, leaving behind the object used to make the cut-out.
5. Select the object used to make the cut-out and delete it.

Dragging and Dropping Symbols in a Roof Face

To insert a 2D, 3D, or hybrid symbol in a roof face by dragging it from the Resource Browser:
1. Click the symbol in the Resource Browser and drag it to the desired location in the roof face.

582

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

The symbol cannot be rotated during insertion, since the 2D Symbol Insertion tool (or 3D Symbol Insertion
tool) is not automatically activated. When a symbol is dropped onto a roof face, Vectorworks inserts the symbol
into the object using the default flip value. (If this is not desirable, make the symbol active and it is inserted with
the appropriate insertion tool.)

2. If necessary, edit the symbol parameters in the Object Info palette.

Creating Roof Objects

Vectorworks offers two ways to create a roof for a structure:
The Create Roof command creates a roof by selecting the object(s) that the roof will be based upon (including
walls, polygons, polylines, and arcs).
The Roof Face command converts any closed 2D object into a roof face object. See Creating Roof Faces on
page 578.
The Create Roof command creates a roof object with multiple faces based on specified parameters. A great variety of
roof types can be created by this method, and they can include roof elements such as gables and skylights. Once the
walls of a structure are complete, select the walls that the roof will be based upon, and specify the roof parameters.
Alternatively, select a polygon or polyline as the basis for the roof.

3D view

2D view

To create a roof object:

1. Select the walls, polygon, or polyline that the roof will be based upon.
Shift-click to select multiple walls. If the building has an attachment, such as a garage, that will have a different
roof structure, then select only the desired walls.
2. Select Model > AEC > Create Roof.
In the Design Series, the Create Roof command is located here: AEC > Create Roof (or Landmark > AEC > Create
Roof).
The Create Roof dialog box opens. Enter the desired criteria to create the roof object. The parameters are
illustrated in the roof diagram. Certain default parameters are suggested based on the selected roof parameters.

Creating Roof Objects |

Parameter

Description

Eave Profile

Select the roof edge appearance

583

Square: angled fascia, soffit edges

Vertical: vertical fascia, angled soffit edges
Horizontal: no fascia, horizontal soffit edges
Double: vertical fascia, horizontal soffit edges

Vertical

Specifies the vertical length for a double miter eave

Horizontal

Specifies the horizontal length for a double miter eave

Thickness

Specifies the roof thickness

Bearing Inset

Specifies how far the bearing wall cuts into the roof

Roof Pitch

Specifies the roof pitch as an angle or rise:run ratio; click Calculate for an automatic
calculation based on bearing height, eave height, and eave overhang

Bearing Height

Specifies the height of the rafter plate or top plate above the wall layer Z height where
the roof will be supported; click Calculate for an automatic calculation based on roof
pitch, eave height, and eave overhang

Eave Height

Specifies the height of the lowest portion of the roof; click Calculate for an automatic
calculation based on roof pitch, bearing height, and eave overhang

Eave Overhang

Specifies the distance that the roof extends beyond the bearing wall; click Calculate for
an automatic calculation based on roof pitch, bearing height, and eave height

Layer

Assigns the roof object to a layer. By default, the roof is created in the active design layer.
To create the roof in a different layer, select an existing layer from the list, or select New
Layer to create a new layer.

584

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Parameter

Description

Class

Assigns the roof object to a class. The standard roof class, Roof-Main, is available as an
option and if it is selected, it is created in the file if it did not already exist. Alternatively,
select New Class to create a new class.

Retain Original Objects

Retains the source object(s) that formed the basis of the roof

3. Click OK.
Vectorworks creates a hip roof over the selected object(s) using the criteria set in the Create Roof dialog box.

Editing Roof Objects

Once a roof object has been created, there are multiple ways to edit it:
Edit the roof object parameters (such as the thickness or eave type) in the Object Info palette.
Change roof edge shapes (such as hip or gable) using the 2D Selection or 3D Selection tool.
Reshape the roof object using the 2D Reshape or 3D Reshape tool in Top/Plan view.

Editing Basic Roof Object Parameters

Change the basic parameters that were set when the roof object was created using the Object Info palette.
To change roof object settings:
1. Select the roof.
2. From the Object Info palette, change basic parameters as necessary.

Parameter

Description

Bearing Inset

Specifies how far the bearing wall cuts into the roof

Thickness

Specifies the roof thickness (normally, this is the perpendicular thickness; when a roof
has different slopes, the vertical thickness can be specified)

Applies To

When a roof has different slopes, the vertical thickness can be specified to avoid
incorrect roof intersections. Select Vertical Thickness and enter the Thickness value

Gable Thickness

When gable walls exist, specifies the gable wall thickness

Eaves

Specify the eave type

Vertical

For Double Miter types, enter the vertical length of the eave

Create Gable End Walls

Select to create wall sections at gable ends

Changing the Roof Edge Shape

By default, Vectorworks creates a hip roof with eave edges all around. Specific roof edges can be changed to a gable or
Dutch hip shape.
To change the roof edge shape:
1. Select the roof with the 2D Selection tool.
Selection handles display for the roof.

Editing Roof Objects |

585

2. Click on the selection handle of the edge to be edited.

The Edit Roof Settings dialog box opens.
3. Change the roof parameters and select Entire Roof to apply the edits to all sections of the roof. If Entire Roof is
not selected, the edits apply to the edge of the roof that was clicked.

Parameter

Description

Roof Edge Shape

Select the basic shape of this roof edge: Eave, Gable, or Dutch Hip. By default,
Vectorworks creates a hip roof, which has an Eave edge on all sides.
When this setting is changed, the available parameters and roof diagram reflect the
selected roof edge shape.

Gable Overhang
(Dutch Hip only)
Gable Inset
(Dutch Hip only)
Pitch
(Eave and Dutch Hip only)

Specifies how the gable wall on top of the Dutch hip face will be cut; enter zero for a
flat gable wall, or enter the number of inches the gable wall will be inset from the
gable roof edge
Specifies how far the gable wall on top of the Dutch hip face will be from the edge of
the hip face
Specifies the roof pitch as an angle or rise:run ratio; click the calculator for an
automatic calculation based on bearing height, eave height, and eave overhang

Bearing Height

Specifies the height of the rafter plate or top plate above the wall layer Z height where
the roof will be supported; click the calculator for an automatic calculation based on
pitch, eave height, and eave overhang

Eave Height

Specifies the height of the bottom-most portion of the roof; click the calculator for an
automatic calculation based on pitch, bearing height, and eave overhang

Eave Overhang

Specifies the distance that the roof extends beyond the bearing wall, click the
calculator for an automatic calculation based on pitch, bearing height, and eave height

Entire Roof

Select this option to apply the edited roof parameters to all available roof sections

(Eave and Dutch Hip only)

4. Click OK to change the roof edge settings.

586

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Changing a Hip Roof to a Gable Roof

To change a hip roof into a gable roof:
1. Select the roof with the 2D Selection tool.
Selection handles display for the roof.
2. Click on the selection handle of the face to change into a gable wall.
The Edit Roof Settings dialog box opens.
3. Select the Gable option.
A diagram and parameters for a gable edge display.

4. Change the parameters as described in Changing the Roof Edge Shape on page 584, and click OK.
A triangular wall is placed when the gable roof is created.

Changing a Hip Roof to a Dutch Hip Roof

To change a hip roof into a Dutch hip roof:
1. Select the roof with the 2D Selection tool.
Selection handles display for the roof.
2. Click on the selection handle of the face to change into a Dutch hip face.
The Edit Roof Settings dialog box opens.
3. Select the Dutch Hip option.
A diagram and parameters for a Dutch hip edge display.

Editing Roof Objects |

587

4. Specify a Gable Inset value to create the Dutch hip face, and change other settings as described in Changing the
Roof Edge Shape on page 584.
5. Click OK.
6. Select Entire Roof to apply the edits to all appropriate sections of the roof.

Creating Cut-outs in a Roof Object

Cutting a hole in a roof object is easily accomplished by editing the roof object group and drawing the cut-out shape.
To create a cut-out in a roof object:
1. Select the roof object.
2. Select Modify > Edit Group.
3. In the Edit Group window, draw a 2D object (rectangle, circle, oval, polygon, polyline, or arc) over the roof.
4. Click Exit Group at the top right of the window.
5. The shape is cut out of the roof.

588

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Reshaping Roof Objects

A roof object can be reshaped in a 2D or 3D view with the 3D Reshape tool. The roof edge, roof ridge, and roof slope
can be changed.
In Top/Plan view, the 2D Reshape tool can be used for basic roof shape editing. However, only the 3D Reshape
tool, in any view, can edit the roof edge and roof ridge location.
Five modes are available when both the 3D Reshape tool and a roof object is selected.
Add Vertex

Working Plane Constrain

3D Reshape

Z-Constrain

Remove Vertex

Mode

Description

3D Reshape

Adjusts the position of a selected roof vertex, constrained horizontally or vertically in

combination with the Z-Constrain and Working Plane Constrain modes

Add Vertex

Adds a peak (vertex) to a roof

Remove Vertex

Deletes a roof peak (vertex)

Working Plane
Constrain

In 3D Reshape mode, reshapes the roof object horizontally, constrained along the X and/or Y
axes

Z-Constrain

In 3D Reshape mode, reshapes the roof object along the Z axis to change the height of a roof
ridge or eave

Reshaping the Roof Along the X and Y Axis

To reshape the roof horizontally:
1. Select the roof object.
2. Click the 3D Reshape tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Working Plane Constrain mode.
3. Position the cursor over a roof handle.

Editing Roof Objects |

589

When the cursor is over a handle, the standard arrow cursor changes into an unfilled, four-way arrow.
4. Click-drag the handle to change the roof handle location, or enter specific X and Y distance values in the Data
bar.

The roof edge, ridge, or eave handle location can be changed. The handle movement is constrained along the X or
Y axis (the active layer plane); the height of the roof element cannot be changed in this mode.
Change the slope of a roof face by moving the ridge handle. If the reshape results in a roof slope that approaches
or exceeds 90 degrees, you are prompted to create a gable wall if desired.

Rendered View

5. Click when the handle is at the desired location.

Reshaping the Roof Along the Z Axis

To change the height of a roof ridge or eave:
1. Select the roof object.
2. Click the 3D Reshape tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Z-Constrain mode.
3. Position the cursor over a roof ridge or eave handle.
When the cursor is over a handle, the standard arrow cursor changes into two-way hollow arrow.
4. Click-drag the handle to change the roof handle location, or enter the specific Z axis distance in the Data bar.

590

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

The roof ridge or eave handle location can be changed. The handle movement is constrained along the Z axis
(vertically); only the height of the roof element can be changed in this mode.
5. Click when the handle is at the desired location.

Adding a Roof Vertex

To add a vertex to a roof:
1. Select the roof for adding the vertex.
2. Click the 3D Reshape tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Add Vertex mode.
3. Position the cursor over one of the edge or eave handles.
The standard arrow cursor changes into a single-headed, filled arrow with shaded boxes on either side of the
shaft.
4. Click-drag the mouse to add a vertex to the roof edge or eave.
5. Click when the vertex is at the desired location.
The roof is automatically reshaped to accommodate the new vertex.

Deleting a Roof Vertex

To delete a vertex from a roof:
1. Select the roof with the vertex to be deleted.
2. Click the 3D Reshape tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and select Remove Vertex mode.
3. Position the cursor over the eave vertex to delete.
The standard arrow cursor changes into a single-headed, filled arrow with a hollow diamond in the shaft.

Editing Roof Objects |

591

4. Click the vertex.

The vertex is removed and the roof is reshaped to the remaining vertices.

Adding Roof Elements

Once a roof object has been created, roof elements, such as dormer windows and skylights, can be added.

Creating Dormer Windows

Vectorworks can create a wide variety of dormer windows in roofs. There are five styles to select from: trapezium,
gable, shed, hip, and bat; each gable type has unique parameters. The Edit Roof Element dialog box, used to create and
edit the dormers, changes according to the style of dormer chosen.
Dormer walls are always drawn in a clockwise direction for easy texture application.
To create a gable dormer window in a roof object:
1. Select View > Standard Views > Top/Plan.
2. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
3. Select a window symbol.
The window must be a symbol, not a plug-in object.
4. Select Make Active from the Resources menu. The 3D Symbol Insertion tool is automatically activated from the
3D Modeling tool set.
5. Click to place the symbol in the roof object.
The roof must be a roof object with a fill, and not simply a roof face.
The Edit Roof Element dialog box opens.

592

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Dormer styles

6. Click Edit Dormer.

7. Select the dormer style.
The parameters automatically change according to the selected dormer style, with values for placing the dormer
at the location specified with the mouse click.

Parameter

Dormer Style

Description

Center vertically

All

Places the center of the window symbol in the center of the available
vertical space in the front face of the dormer; the normal insertion
point is not used

Offset from top

All

Locates the top of the window symbol a set distance from the top of
the dormer face; the normal insertion point is not used

Height offset

All

Indicates the vertical distance from the top of the point of engagement
with the roof, or where the roof and the dormer meet, to the bearing
point, which is usually along the top of the bearing wall

Building line offset

All

Specifies the distance from the building outline to the plan center of
the window symbol

Offset from corner

All

Sets the distance from the corner of the roof to the center of the
dormer; the roof corner that the measurement is taken from is always
to the left of the dormer when facing it

Top width

Trapezium, Bat

Determines the width of the top roof and sets the front faces trapezoid
shape; the front face is always symmetrical when using this option

Right slope

Trapezium, Gable,
Hip

Determines the angle of the right edge of the front face; the front face
can be asymmetrical when using this option

Left slope

Trapezium, Gable,
Hip

Specifies the angle of the left edge of the front face. Along with the
Right Slope, this dimension determines the top width of the front
face. Right Slope must be selected for this option to be available.

Editing Roof Objects |

593

Parameter

Dormer Style

Description

Bottom width

Trapezium, Gable,
Bat

Sets the width of the bottom edge of the front face; works in
conjunction with either the Top Width or the Left and Right Slope
entries and is required

Slope

Trapezium, Shed,
Bat

Indicates the angle of the pitch of the top dormer roof as measured
from a horizontal line

Width

Gable, Shed, Hip

Horizontal distance of the front face of the dormer

Front Slope

Hip

Indicates the angle of the pitch of the front face of the dormer roof as
measured from a vertical line

Height

All

Specifies the elevation height of the front face of the dormer;

determines the plan depth of the dormer

Top width

Bat

Indicates the width of the top of the roof as measured along the front
face of the dormer

Bottom Height

Bat

Distance from the bottom of the dormer to the beginning of the

compound curves of the roof as measured along the front face of the
dormer

Depth

All

Sets the plan distance from the point of engagement with the roof to
the front face of the dormer; determines the elevation height of the
front face of the dormer

Overhang

Gable, Shed, Hip

Amount of roof extension past the dormers front roof face

Control Point

Bat

Point where the two curves of the roof meet. This option controls the
location of that point from the side edge of the dormer as measured
along the roof. The location of this point determines the depth of the
curves that make up the roofline.

8. Click OK.
The gable dormer with window is created and placed according to the parameters specified. A hole is
automatically created in the roof where the dormer walls exist.

Editing Dormer Windows

Once created, the dormer window parameters can be edited.
To edit a dormer window:
1. Select the dormer.
Selection handles display around the roof and at the location of each dormer.
2. Position the cursor over the selection handle for the dormer and click.
The Edit Roof Element dialog box opens.
3. Select Edit Dormer and change the desired parameters as described in Creating Dormer Windows on
page 591.
To remove the dormer completely, select Remove Object.
4. Click OK.
The drawing area displays the specified changes for the selected dormer.

594

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

Creating Skylights

A similar process to creating dormer windows is used to place a full skylight, complete with a window symbol, in the
roof.
A cut-out can also be created through this process, but it is easier to create a cut-out by following the procedures
described in Creating Cut-outs in a Roof Object on page 587.
A 3D-only window symbol is required for creating a skylight. An existing hybrid symbol can be converted to a
3D symbol by editing the symbol and deleting the 2D component. When creating skylight symbols, set the
insertion point of the symbol at the back and center of the symbol.
Insertion point

Top view

Left view

Front view

The insertion point of the symbol determines whether a skylight will be flush or surface-mounted.

Square miter flush-mounted

Square miter surface-mounted

Inserting a Skylight
To insert a skylight:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
2. Select a 3D window symbol to use in the skylight. Hybrid and 2D window symbols will not work for skylights,
though hybrid symbols can be used to create a cut-out.
3. Select Make Active from the Resources menu. The 3D Symbol Insertion tool is automatically activated from the
3D Modeling tool set.
4. Click to place the symbol in the desired location in the roof.
The roof must be a roof object, and not a roof face.

Editing Roof Objects |

The Edit Roof Element dialog box opens.
5. Click Edit Skylight.
The skylight parameters are displayed.

Parameter

Description

Offset from corner

Specifies the distance from the edge of the roof to the center of the skylight symbol

Offset from building line

Sets the distance from the edge of the building to the center of the skylight symbol

Do not insert symbol

Select to use create a cut-out in the roof without inserting the window symbol

Remove object

Deletes the skylight from the roof

Edit dormer

Accesses the dormer parameters instead of the skylight parameters

6. Click OK to create the skylight (or cut-out).

Editing Skylights
Skylights and cut-outs are edited and deleted in the same manner as dormers.
To edit a skylight:
1. Select the skylight.
A selection handle displays at the skylight location.
2. Position the cursor over the selection handle for the skylight and click.
The Edit Roof Element dialog box opens, with the skylight parameters displayed.
3. Edit the parameters as described in Inserting a Skylight on page 594.
To remove the skylight completely, select Remove object.
4. Click OK.

595

596

| Chapter 15: Creating Building Elements

The drawing area displays the specified changes for the selected skylight.

The skylight miter parameters can be changed from the Object Info palette.

Skylight Miter

Description

Vertical

Cuts the roof vertically at both the top and bottom of the skylight

Splayed

Cuts the roof horizontally at the top of the skylight, and vertically at the bottom

Square Cut

Cuts the roof perpendicular to the roof at both the top and bottom of the skylight

Importing and Exporting Files

16

Vectorworks has the ability to import and export to a variety of file formats. Your work may require you to import
drawings from colleagues that use previous versions of Vectorworks or other programs. You may also have to export
your drawings for those colleagues. Vectorworks import and export functionality provides the means to incorporate
Vectorworks files with other programs files, including other CAD programs, worksheet, and word processing
programs.

Importing Files
The Import command imports files from a number of different file formats. This command opens drawings produced
in other software programs in Vectorworks, where the drawing objects and data can then be manipulated. The original
file remains unchanged.
To import a file:
1. Select File > Import.
2. Select the import option to use.
3. Select a file from the Open dialog box.
4. Click Open.
Special considerations apply for DXF/DWG files. See DXF/DWG File Import on page 621.

Import Format

Description

DXF/DWG

DWG and DXF files are produced by other CAD programs (such as AutoCAD). To
avoid unexpected formatting problems with DXF/DWG, import into a blank document.
Vectorworks can import DWG/DXF files from version 2007/2008/2009 format or lower.
Multiple, single, or an entire folder of DXF/DWG files can be imported. The imported
files can create new Vectorworks files, create new symbols, or be imported into the
current file.
When a file is imported as a symbol, the active layers scale is used, and paper space
objects are ignored. The symbols name is automatically assigned based on the original
file name, without the .dxf or .dwg extension.
See DXF/DWG File Import on page 621 for more information.

Single DXF/DWG File

Imports a single DXF/DWG file at a time, instead of in a batch

EPSF

Encapsulated PostScript Files (EPSF) are produced by many graphics and

desktop-publishing programs. EPSFs are typically high-resolution files, but will only
display a preview image if one was selected when the file was created.

Image File

Image files, including GIF, JPG, TIF, BMP, and others, can be imported. See Importing
an Image File on page 598 for more information.

PICT

PICT files were first produced by MacDraw and other object-oriented drawing
programs. PICT is also the native format of the Macintosh clipboard. PICT files
imported into Vectorworks can be more than a single object, allowing image editing.
Images imported with this command automatically have PNG compression applied.

598

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Import Format

Description

PICT as Picture

PICT as Picture files are imported as a single graphic object. The following operations
cannot be performed on this type of import: Trim tool, Clip tool, and Shear tool. Picture
images retain picture comments when imported into Vectorworks.

Metafile

Graphics files in the Metafile format can be imported from virtually any program,
including AutoCAD and word processing programs. There are two versions of
Metafiles: standard (pre-Windows 95) and enhanced. Vectorworks supports the
enhanced version. Images imported with this command automatically have PNG
compression applied.

Metafile as Picture

Metafile as Picture files are imported as a single graphic object; the trim, clip, and shear
operations cannot be used on this type of import

Worksheet

Vectorworks can import a variety of worksheet formats, including text,

comma-delimited, CSV, DIF, and SLK. A worksheet must be open to receive the import.
(To import a Vectorworks worksheet into the current drawing, use the Resource
Browser.)

VectorScript

Imports a series of VectorScript commands into a Vectorworks file

Parasolid X_T (3D only)

Imports 3D Parasolid X_T objects, including NURBS curves, NURBS surfaces, and
solids; solids are imported as generic solids

IGES (3D only)

During IGES import, points are imported as a group of 3D loci, NURBS curves are
imported as a group of NURBS curves, NURBS surfaces are imported as a group of
NURBS surfaces, closed solids are imported as a group of imported solids, and open
solids are imported as a group of NURBS surfaces. If there is only one element in the
IGES file, it is imported as a single element rather than grouped. Imported solids cannot
be ungrouped or edited through the Edit Group command; they can be used in solid
operations.

SAT (3D only)

Imports ACIS/SAT 3D solids as NURBS-based Vectorworks solids

Importing an Image File

Images are compressed when they are imported into a Vectorworks file, to reduce the file size.
To import an image file:
1. Select File > Import > Import Image File, and then select the image file to import.
2. The Image Import Options dialog box opens. Specify the options for the imported image.
Information about the image file is displayed at the top. The compression method that produces the smallest file
size is selected by default. Select the method that will give the best balance between compression and detail
display. The file size for each type of compression is displayed to help with the selection.
If the selected option results in a file size larger than the uncompressed size, the image is imported
uncompressed.
If Vectorworks Design Series is installed, an option to reference the imported image displays on the dialog box.
See Referencing Imported Images on page 792 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide for details.

Exporting Files |

599

Compression Method

Description

JPEG

Provides a high amount of compression, resulting in the smallest Vectorworks file size.
However, fine detail may be obscured. JPEG compression is most suitable for photographic
images.

PNG

Provides a moderate amount of compression, while preserving image details; select Import
as Black and White to import as a 1-bit monochrome image in PNG format

3. Click OK to import the image. The Object Info palette displays the image information.
The Trim, Clip, and Shear tools cannot be used on an imported image.
Images imported into the file that are not already in JPEG format can be compressed by JPEG with the Compress
Images command. See Compressing Images on page 447.

Exporting Files
The Export command exports Vectorworks files into several different file formats, including previous versions of
Vectorworks. The exported files can then be imported into another software program. Vectorworks exports to a new
file, leaving the original file intact.
To export a file:
1. Select File > Export.
2. Select the export file format.
Specify the export options, along with the file name and destination.
3. Click Save.
Special considerations apply for exports to DXF/DWG format. See DXF/DWG File Export on page 610.

600

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Export Format

Description

DXF/DWG

DWG and DXF files can be read by other CAD programs (such as AutoCAD). In
addition, they can be printed by service bureaus and opened in rendering programs.
The Vectorworks translator exports DWG/DXF files for AutoCAD versions
2007/2008/2009, 2004/2005/2006, 2000/2000i/2002, 14/LT98/LT97, 13/ LT95, and 12. Use
the latest version possible for best results. See DXF/DWG File Export on page 610 for
more information.

Database

Saves all records of a particular format as a file that can be used in a database program,
such as FileMaker Pro and Microsoft Access. Vectorworks provides a variety of formats
to select from when exporting records as a database, including comma-delimited,
tab-delimited, merge, DIF, and SYLK.

EPix/Piranesi
(Renderworks required)

Creates an ePix (Extended Pixel) file; see EPix Export on page 816 for more
information

EPSF

EPSF (Encapsulated PostScript Format) files can be read by many graphics and
desktop-publishing programs. The Vectorworks translator exports EPSF files in
Illustrator 88 format. EPSFs contain all drawing elements except color bitmaps.
Vectorworks exports these files with high resolution and full accuracy. See Exporting
an EPSF (Encapsulated PostScript Format) File on page 601.

Image File

Exports the file as an image file in formats like JPG, Photoshop, BMP, and others. The
image can then be imported into other applications or used in web pages. See
Exporting an Image File on page 602.

Export PDF (Quartz

Only)

This command is available on the Macintosh when Quartz Imaging is enabled (see
Display Preferences on page 48). It exports the current file to a PDF document in the
specified location.
Design Series users on both Macintosh and Windows have additional PDF options. See
PDF Interoperability on page 754 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

Export PICT

This command is available on the Macintosh when Quartz Imaging is disabled (see
Display Preferences on page 48). It exports a vector image of the current file in the
specified location.

Metafile

Exports graphics files in Metafile format for inclusion in virtually any Windows
program, including AutoCAD and word processing programs. There are two versions
of Metafiles: standard (pre-Windows 95) and enhanced. Vectorworks supports the
enhanced version.

QuickTime VR Object
(Renderworks required)

Creates a QuickTime Virtual Reality object file; see QuickTime VR Object Export on
page 818 for more information

QuickTime VR Panorama
(Renderworks required)

Creates a QuickTime Virtual Reality panorama file; see QuickTime VR Panorama

Export on page 820 for more information

VectorScript

Writes out the current file as a series of VectorScript commands. These commands can
then be used as part of a VectorScript script or as a guide for learning.

Exporting Files |

601

Export Format

Description

Worksheet

Worksheet files can be read by spreadsheet programs, such as Microsoft Excel, as well
as by some word processing programs. Export all rows or only selected rows of a
worksheet. Because many of these programs have different format requirements,
Vectorworks provides a variety of formats to select from when exporting files as a
worksheet, including comma-delimited, tab-delimited, merge, DIF, and SYLK. See
Exporting Worksheets on page 682.

Parasolid X_T (3D only)

Exports 3D objects to the Parasolid X_T format (see Exporting in Parasolid X_T
Format on page 605)

IGES (3D only)

Exports 3D curves, surfaces, and solids to IGES format (see Exporting in IGES
Format on page 605)

SAT (3D only)

Creates an SAT file for exporting ACIS 3D solids. The Export Solids as Trimmed
Surfaces option exports a solid as several different ACIS bodies (for example, a cube
exports as six ACIS bodies). If this option is deselected, a solid is exported as a single
body.

Export Simple
VectorScript (3D only)

Creates an exported VectorScript designed to be easy to import into programs like

Strata Software products

Export Stereo
Lithography (3D only)

Exports all visible 3D surfaces and solids in the current layer into an STL-formatted file
(see Exporting in Stereo Lithography Format on page 606)

Vectorworks 12, 2008,

and 2009

Saves a copy of the file in a format that can be opened and manipulated in an older
version of Vectorworks

Exporting an EPSF (Encapsulated PostScript Format) File

The Export EPSF command exports a drawing to an .EPS file format.
To export an EPSF file:
1. Select File > Export > Export EPSF.
2. The Export as EPSF File dialog box opens. Type a file name, select a location to save the file, and then click Save.
3. The EPS Preview Options dialog box opens. Specify the preview options and byte order for the TIF preview
when saving the file, and then click OK.

602

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter

Description

Preview Options
No Preview

The file does not display a preview when opened or imported by an application that
supports the .eps file format

Monochrome Preview

Previews the file in monochrome

8-Bit Color Preview

Previews the file in 8-bit color

Byte Order
Macintosh

Saves the file in the Macintosh byte order

PC

Saves the file in the PC byte order

4. If any of the objects in the drawing are outside of the print area, a dialog box opens to ask if the print area should
be used as the bounds of the EPSF export. If the print area is used as the bounds of the EPSF export, any objects
outside of the print area are not included in the export.

Exporting an Image File

The Export Image File command exports a rendered drawing to a variety of file formats: BMP, JPG, PCT, PNG, PNT,
PSD, QTI, SGI, TGA, or TIF. Different portions of the image can be selected for export.
To export an image file:
1. Select File > Export > Export Image File.
The Export Image File dialog box opens. Select the export options, and then click Render or Wireframe to
display the exported image preview.

Exporting Files |

Parameter

603

Description

Export Area
All Visible Objects

Exports an image that includes all visible objects (objects do not have to be currently on
screen to be considered visible)

Current View

Exports an image that is exactly as it displays on the current screen

All Pages as Single

Image

Saves all pages in the print area as one image. By default, the image dimensions are set to
match the print area specifications in the Page Setup dialog box. The image dimensions
can be changed, but must remain proportional to the print area aspect ratio.

Each Page as
Separate Image

Saves each page in the print area as separate images. By default, the image dimensions are
set to match the page size specifications in the Page Setup dialog box. The image
dimensions can be changed, but must remain proportional to the page size aspect ratio.

Marquee

Exports an image within a user-created marquee. Select this option and then click Draw
Marquee to temporarily close the dialog box. Click and drag to specify the area for export;
the marquee dimensions are displayed on the Data bar. Click to set the export area and
return to the Export Image File dialog box. The Pixel Dimensions of the image are
automatically set to the marquee dimensions.

604

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter

Description

Dimensions
Lock Aspect Ratio

Select to maintain the image aspect ratio when specifying dimensions

Resolution

Specifies the printed image resolution in pixels over inches

Pixel Dimensions
Width/Height

Specifies the exported image dimensions; if Lock Aspect Ratio is selected, changes to one
dimension will update the other to maintain the aspect ratio

Print Size
Width/Height

Specifies the printed image dimensions in the selected Unit; if Lock Aspect Ratio is
selected, changes to one dimension will update the other to maintain the aspect ratio

Units

Select a unit to apply to the Print Size parameters

Preview

Displays a rendered or wireframe preview according to the current settings

Render

Updates the preview with a rendered view using the currently set rendering option

Wireframe

Updates the preview with a wireframe view

Memory Required/
Estimated File Size

Estimates the amount of memory required for the export and the approximate file size of
the exported file, based on the current settings

Update

Updates the estimated memory and file size requirements

Format
File Type

Select the file format for the exported image, and indicate specific compression settings, if
any

Compression

Specifies compression settings according to the selected File Type

Update visible out of

date viewports prior
to exporting

Automatically updates any visible, out-of-date viewports before exporting

Reset all plug-in

objects that require a
reset prior to
exporting

Automatically resets plug-in objects that require an update (such as data stamps) before
exporting

QuickTime offers great flexibility when specifying compression settings for the various file types. Consult
QuickTime documentation for information on these settings.
2. Click Save.
In the dialog box which opens, provide a name for the file; Vectorworks adds the file extension according to the
file format selected. If the Each Page as a Separate Image was selected for export, Vectorworks automatically
appends an incremental number to each file name.
3. Click Save.
A new file is created without changing the original drawing file. This new file can then be opened in other
applications or imported into another software program.

Exporting Files |

605

Exporting in Parasolid X_T Format

The Export Parasolid X_T (3D only) command exports 3D objects from the current layer to Parasolid *.x_t format.
Only 3D objects are exported. This is a convenient way of exchanging files with other applications that also use
Parasolid as their modeling kernel, even when the other applications Parasolid version is older.
To export a Parasolid X_T file:
1. Switch to the layer which contains the 3D objects for export. If only selected objects should be exported, select the
objects.
2. Select File > Export > Export Parasolid X_T (3D only).
The Export Options dialog box opens. Select whether to export only selected objects or all objects from the
current layer.

Parameter

Description

Export Selected Objects Only

Exports only selected 3D objects from the current layer; if no objects are
selected, all 3D objects from the current layer are exported

Export All Objects in Current Layer

Exports all 3D objects from the current layer

Parasolid Version

Specify the Parasolid version for export; if the exported file cannot be
opened, try exporting to a lower version of Parasolid

3. Click OK.
4. Specify the file name and destination.
5. Click Save.

Exporting in IGES Format

The Export IGES (3D only) command exports 3D curves, surfaces and solids from Vectorworks into IGES format
(version 5.3). Closed solids are exported as solids, while open solids are exported as a collection of surfaces.
Objects that are exported to an .igs file from Vectorworks include:

3D loci
CSG solids (add/subtract/intersect/section)
Groups
Shells
Symbols

3D polygons
Extrudes and multiple extrudes
NURBS curves and surfaces
Solids (sphere/cone/hemisphere)

Chamfers
Fillets
Parametric objects
Sweeps

606

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

To export an IGES file:

1. Select File > Export > Export IGES (3D only).
The Export Options dialog box opens.

2. Select Export Solid as Trimmed Surfaces to export a solid as several different bodies (for example, a cube
exports as six bodies); otherwise, a solid is exported as a single body.
3. Click OK.
4. Specify the file name and destination.
5. Click Save.

Export Item

Export Result

NURBS curve

IGES Entity Type 126

NURBS surface

IGES Entity Type 128

Trimmed NURBS surface

IGES Entity Type 144

Closed solid

IGES Entity Type 186

Exporting in Stereo Lithography Format

The Export Stereo Lithography (3D Only) command exports all visible 3D surfaces and solids in the current layer into
an STL-formatted file. Once exported, this file can be used for rapid prototyping purposes or imported into other CAD
packages.
To export a Stereo Lithography file:
1. Select File > Export > Export Stereo Lithography (3D Only).
The Export STL Options dialog box opens.

DXF and DWG File Formats |

607

2. Select ASCII or Binary for the file type. Using the slider control, adjust the coarseness of the polygonal
representation for the export quality.
3. Click OK.
4. Specify the file name and destination, and then click Save.

DXF and DWG File Formats

DXF and DWG are two common file formats used to exchange information between different CAD and drawing
programs. DXF is a semi-public standard promoted and controlled by Autodesk, Inc. DWG is a proprietary, closed
format used by Autodesk for its products. DXF and DWG files contain almost identical information, and both store all
of the same objects. Recent versions of AutoCAD have issues when reading some DXF files, such as losing links to
images, so DWG is usually a safer choice in that case. As of this writing, the most recent DXF/DWG version is version
2007/2008/2009. Vectorworks imports versions 2.5 through 2007/2008/2009, and exports versions 12 through 2007/2008/
2009.

Vectorworks 2010 Improvements

The following changes to the DXF/DWG translation procedure have been added:
For DXF/DWG master files that have external references (xrefs), new import options allow more control over
how the xrefs are handled. The xrefs can be bound into the same Vectorworks file as the master file, they can be
ignored, or they can be imported as separate referenced Vectorworks files (either as design layer viewports or as
layer links).
Dimension styles in the DXF/DWG file are now imported as custom dimension standards, which are applied to
the imported dimensions automatically.
Custom import options can now be saved as a set and recalled when needed.
Scaled blocks are now imported as symbols, instead of being imported as groups. If a block is used with multiple
scales, a different symbol will be created for each scale.
Imported dash styles are now named according to the Line types in the DXF/DWG file. Also, existing
Vectorworks dash styles are no longer deleted to make room for imported dash styles. If the total number of
existing and imported dash styles exceeds 128, the objects for which no dash style could be created are imported
with solid lines.

608

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

New options control whether AEC objects created with Autodesk Architectural Desktop (such as walls, doors,
and windows) are imported in 2D or 3D view, regardless of the view saved in the DXF/DWG file.
Tables can now be properly imported to Vectorworks as lines and text with their proper attributes, including line
style, color, and text size.
Saved views can now be exported.
By default, groups export as named blocks; a new option exports groups as anonymous blocks.
By default, sheet layer viewports export as paper space layouts; a new option exports sheet layer viewports as 2D
(flat) graphics in model space, each sheet to a separate file.

Information Lost in Translation

Importing from and exporting to DXF/DWG is not the same as saving or opening a Vectorworks file. It is a translation
from one way of doing things to another; consequently, information can get lost in the translation. Following are some
items that DXF/DWG handles differently. These can introduce unwanted effects in the translated file.

Item

Description

Units

Version 2000 DXF/DWG and later supports the concept of units, so the files unit settings
can be imported (if it includes units). Previous versions of DXF/DWG do not support
units, and some version 2000 and later files may be unitless. There is no way for
Vectorworks to tell whether these unitless drawings were made in meters, feet and inches,
or microns. Communicate with the person providing the file to determine this
information. Unitless DXF/DWG files do have five units settings (such as
Architectural and Engineering) which are used to guess the original units, but the
guess may need to be adjusted.

Line Weights

Vectorworks allows line weights and colors to be specified independently. AutoCAD has
recently gained the ability to do so, but most AutoCAD users still use colors to map to line
weights. Version 14 and earlier DXF/DWG files do not support true line weights at all. If
you choose to export with line weights mapped to colors, then original object colors will
be lost.

DXF and DWG File Formats |

609

Item

Description

Colors and Fills

Vectorworks is more graphically rich than DXF/DWG can currently support. In all cases,
Vectorworks chooses the closest possible translation given the limitations inherent in DXF/
DWG. The default version in the export dialog box will always give the best results
possible, assuming the recipients software can read all of the information.
DXF/DWG versions prior to 2004 have a fixed color palette (which changes slightly
depending on whether the background is black or white) and all objects have just one
solid color associated with them. Objects such as circles in DXF have no fill color (just a
line color). A few objects can have a fill color, but they have no separate line color.
DXF/DWG version 14 and above supports a solid hatch, which is a separate object that
can be associated with objects such as circles to make them look like they have a color fill.
These hatches cannot be the same color as the background color (such as a white rectangle
on a white background to mask objects underneath). Since these solid hatches can be
associative, Vectorworks can import them and set the associated objects fill color instead
of having two separate objects for frame and fill.
DXF/DWG version 2000 supports wipeout entities, which are essentially polygonal
images filled with the background color. Some AutoCAD users may not want to receive
files with wipeouts. DXF/DWG export includes an option to exclude solid fills (which
includes both wipeouts and solid hatches). Since wipeouts can only be polygons and are
not associative, if a white circle on a white background is exported and then re-imported
into Vectorworks, the result is an unfilled circle and a polygon with a white fill and no pen
inside the circle. The smoothness of the polygon (number of facets) depends on the 2D
conversion resolution preference when it was exported.
Objects with pattern fills, image fills, or gradients export as a plain solid color.

Layers and Classes

Each Vectorworks design layer is similar to a DXF/DWG model space. A Vectorworks

drawing can have many design layers visible at the same time, with different scales and
views for each design layer, but only one model space is allowed in a DXF/DWG file.
Therefore, Vectorworks has to merge the multiple design layers, and some information
can be lost. The drawing should generally look and print the same after the export, but
independent layer scales, object coordinates, and invisible objects can be lost.

Groups and Symbols

Vectorworks uses symbols, which are objects that can be inserted multiple times without
greatly increasing the file size, and which need only one edit to update all copies. It also
has groups, which are objects that are grouped together and act as one object. The DXF/
DWG equivalent of a Vectorworks symbol is called a block. The closest DXF/DWG
equivalent to a Vectorworks group is an anonymous block, which is like a symbol
without a name. Unlike anonymous blocks, named blocks can be edited easily in
AutoCAD, and new instances of the blocks can be inserted into the drawing. However,
named blocks re-import into Vectorworks as symbols, which may not be desirable.
Therefore, Vectorworks has an option to export groups as anonymous blocks, if named
blocks cause a problem. Upon import, if a named block is used with multiple scales in
AutoCAD, a different symbol will be created in Vectorworks for each scale.

610

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Item

Description

Attributes and Linked

Text

DXF/DWG does not have database records that correspond to Vectorworks record
formats. It does have objects called attribute definitions (attdefs) which, when placed in
blocks/symbols, behave somewhat like linked text in Vectorworks. The correspondence is
very loose and as a result translation of these objects is not always smooth. DXF/DWG
block attributes are created for things exporting as blocks (symbols, groups, plug-in
objects, or layer links) that have record formats attached. Because only DXF/DWG blocks
can have attributes attached, the record format information is not exported for other object
types, such as lines or circles.

Names

When exporting to DXF/DWG version 2000 and later, the characters in layer and block
names will not change. Accurate translation of lower case text, spaces and other Unicode
characters is supported (except for the following illegal characters, which are converted
during export: < > " `, / \ : ? * | = ). Export to previous versions converts all name
characters to uppercase; all spaces and special characters are converted to underscores.
DXF/DWG attribute tag names cannot have spaces in any version; any spaces found in
record field names are converted to an underscore.

Styled Multiline text

Multiline formatted text includes various sized fonts that are bold, underlined, or
italicized, and that wrap to the next line. This type of text is supported for DXF/DWG
versions 13 and up. For earlier versions, wrapped text is split into separate lines.

Layer Transfer Mode /

Transparency

DXF/DWG does not support layer transfer modes or transparency, so use only paint
transfer mode (100 percent opaque under Quartz and GDI+ imaging)

Dimensions

Vectorworks and AutoCAD handle dimensions, units, and dimension standards very
differently. Dimensions exported to DXF/DWG look exactly the same when opened in
AutoCAD, but they may change appearance slightly if edited. Vectorworks also creates
appropriate dimension styles for all dimension standards that are used in the file, so even
if the recipient modifies the dimensions or creates new ones, they should not look
significantly different. During import, the dimension styles from the DXF/DWG file will
be created as custom dimension standards in the Vectorworks file, to preserve the original
look.

DXF/DWG File Export

Consider the following points when exporting from Vectorworks to DXF/DWG.

Item

Export Notes

Linked Text

Linked text in symbols export as block attributes.

Symbols, Plug-ins,
Layer Links, and
Groups

Symbols, plug-ins, layer links, and groups export as blocks. Blocks for symbols, plug-ins,
and layer links are given a generic name such as Group-2 unless they were named in the
Data tab of the Object Info palette. By default, groups also are exported as named blocks,
but there is an option to export them as anonymous blocks.

Line Weights

By default, line weights are converted to the closest DXF line weight. If the color mapping
option is used, mapping information is entered during export and written to a .ctb file.

DXF/DWG File Export |

611

Item

Export Notes

Fills, Patterns,
Gradients, and
Hatches

Solid fills, patterns, image fills, and gradients export as DXF objects with associated solid
hatch or unassociative wipeout. Wipeouts are only available in version 2000 and later.
Hatches export as associative hatches to AutoCAD version 14 and higher, or as
anonymous blocks to AutoCAD version 13 and lower. There is an option to export all of
the fills, patterns, gradients, and hatches within a class or layer to a separate DXF layer.

Raster Images

Raster images export to the same folder that the drawing and any hatch pattern files are
exported to. They export as JPEG files, with an image object in the DXF/DWG file that
stores the name of the JPEG file and the insertion point. Images are only supported in
AutoCAD versions 14 and higher.

Solids and NURBS

Surfaces

Solids and NURBS surfaces typically export as ACIS objects. The following objects cannot
be exported as ACIS objects: meshes (which export as DXF meshes), 3D polygons (which
export as 3D polygons, or as triangles if filled), NURBS curves (which export as DXF
splines), and walls (which export as triangulated 3D polys in 3D views, and as lines and
arcs in 2D views).

612

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Item

Export Notes

Design Layers, Sheet

Layers, and
Viewports

Vectorworks design layers export as DXF model space entities. If only design layers (no
sheet layers) are exported, individual design layers scales and views are exported to
model space as one scale and view. There is an option to export all of the design layers
in a file as separate DXF/DWG files. Each design layer viewport (Design Series
required) is exported to a referenced DWG file; cropped viewports become clipped
referenced files, and nested viewports become nested referenced files. This preserves
the visibility overrides from the original viewport, because the visibility of the layers in
the referenced file can be controlled separately from the layers in the master file.
By default, Vectorworks sheet layers export as DXF paper space layouts, with normal
viewports exported directly, and section viewports exported as blocks. Annotations
become paper space objects on top of the viewports. AutoCAD requires all paper space
objects to be either above or below the viewports, but not both, so any objects or
annotations that appear below the viewports in Vectorworks will appear above the
viewports in AutoCAD. Therefore, avoid putting anything underneath viewports in
Vectorworks.
If sheet layers are exported, all design layers referenced from viewports on the sheet
layers are exported to model space in top view without scaling, and viewports are
created in paper space layouts to show the various views and scales. Sheets should
generally look and print as expected (though without rendering modes set due to some
AutoCAD bugs), but the single model space may have many overlapping objects and
may not be as usable. There is an option to export the selected sheet layers as separate
DXF/DWG files. In addition, there is an option to export sheet layer viewports as 2D
graphics to model space (each layer as a separate file).
Since AutoCAD has only one model space, and it does not have hybrid 2D/3D objects, it
is sometimes necessary for Vectorworks to export the design layers as one or more
blocks with special DXF layer names to control the block visibility. For example, a
design layer called Foundation might export as blocks named Foundation (2D) and
Foundation (3D), with associated DXF layers named _Foundation (2D) and
_Foundation (3D). The blocks will be inserted in model space and assigned to those
DXF layers. Viewports that should hide either the 2D or 3D objects will freeze or thaw
the appropriate DXF layer.
When you export sheet layers, Vectorworks optimizes the translation to preserve the
look of the sheets, at the cost of possibly adding some complexity and decreasing the
ease of editing items in model space. To minimize the complexity, export sheets with
unrelated design layers as separate files, or limit the drawing to one Vectorworks
design layer.

Preparing to Export
The following procedures are recommended to help ensure a satisfactory translation.
1. Export behaves differently based on whether design layers or sheet layers are selected for export.
If one or more sheets are selected for export, a paper space layout is exported for each sheet with the sheet
objects; any design layers visible in sheet layer viewports are exported to model space. (Sheets that do not
share design layers should usually be exported to separate files.) Other sheet layers and unreferenced design
layers are omitted from export.

DXF/DWG File Export |

613

If only design layers are selected for export, the design layers are exported to model space and all sheet layers
are omitted. If the design layers are exported to a single file, only the visible layers are exported; if the layers
are exported to separate files, all layers are exported.
2. AutoCAD does not have multiple model spaces. If the sheet layer being exported has multiple viewports at
different scales, the model space may have overlapping objects from the design layers, and the scale will be set to
1:1 instead of the expected design layer scale(s). To avoid this problem, set the scale the same for all design layers,
and make sure that no objects overlap. Then, adjust the viewport scales as desired.
3. Do not export design layers in perspective, as they will not be in perspective in the DXF/DWG file. Instead, create
a sheet layer with a viewport set to perspective view.
4. For DXF/DWG versions earlier than 14, object fills will not export. To better approximate the appearance of the
exported file for these versions, remove all fills in a copy of the file before export. This will help identify lines
under solid fills that need to be deleted or trimmed when the solid fill is removed.
DXF/DWG versions 14 and later support associative boundary hatches, or bhatches. Therefore, fills, solid fills,
and hatches can be exported as follows.

Vectorworks

DXF/DWG

Associative hatch definitions

bhatch definition; hatch pattern files (.pat) are exported

along with the DXF/DWG file

Hatches with multiple colors or with background fill

Multiple bhatch definitions

Filled polygons with three or four sides, with the fill

color different from the background color

Solid entities

Objects with a solid fill (color different from

background color) or hatch

Object with associated bhatch

Objects with solid fill (color same as background

color)

Wipeout entity (AC2000 and later)

No fill (AC14 and earlier)
Light gray bhatch (AC14)

Filled polylines with holes

Multiple objects and associated bhatch definition with

island detection

5. Set the class and layer visibility appropriately. If invisible Vectorworks layers are exported as DXF/DWG layers,
objects in invisible classes will not be exported, and vice versa. To preview what will be exported, set classes to
show/snap/modify others and layers to show others.
6. DXF/DWG does not support hybrid objects. If only design layers are being exported, set the view for each design
layer so the appropriate 2D or 3D components are exported. From Plan view, the 2D component of a hybrid
symbol is exported; from Top view or any 3D view, the 3D component is exported. To preserve the 3D object
coordinates, use Top view to export all 3D design layers (or use viewports to show other views, and export the
sheets containing those viewports).
7. Symbols, plug-in objects, and layer links export as named blocks in DXF/DWG. Groups can be exported as either
named blocks or anonymous blocks.
The name that these items receive depends on the view that is in effect upon export. As an example, the symbol
Widget would receive the following names, depending on the view:

614

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Symbol Type and View

Exported Block Name

Hybrid symbol in Plan view

Widget (2D)

Hybrid symbol in 3D view

Widget (3D)

Non-hybrid symbol

Widget

The assigned layer link depends on whether Project 2D was selected for the layer link.

Layer Link Option

Exported Block Name

Layer link in plan view with Project 2D

option selected

Layer-1 (2D)

All other layer links

Layer-1 (3D)

To check the item names, re-import an exported file into Vectorworks.

8. Check the drawing with both black and white backgrounds. If the Vectorworks file has a white background and
uses a dark (but not black) color to draw objects, then others who look at the exported file with a black
background may not be able to see the objects.
9. Set the 2D and 3D conversion resolutions (in the Vectorworks preferences) to a low value if file size is a concern.
Higher resolutions result in larger exported file sizes. Lower resolutions decrease file sizes, but can result in
blockiness, especially when exporting to earlier versions of DXF/DWG.

DXF/DWG Export Procedure

1. Select File > Export > Export DXF/DWG.
The DXF DWG Export Options dialog box opens.
2. Select the appropriate export options, and click OK to export the file.
The DXF/DWG export dialog box options are described in DXF/DWG Export Options on page 614. During
export, a progress bar displays, along with the number of objects processed.
3. It is frequently helpful to view the translated file in a third-party software program to ensure that the translation
process did not introduce unwanted effects. After export, leave the file open and import the exported file back
into Vectorworks or into another software package. Compare the two versions, noting any problems. For
example, the loss of object fills in earlier versions of DXF/DWG can cause unwanted lines to display. Correct
these problems in a copy of the Vectorworks file and export the file again.
Do not change the .dxf or .dwg file extension or other software packages will not be able to read the file. Do not
export as binary DXF unless certain that the recipient will be able to read this format.
AutoCAD users may report that circles and other objects look like blocky polygons. They can improve the
appearance of the drawing by zooming in and using either the regenall or regen command, or by increasing
the VIEWRES value.

DXF/DWG Export Options

The DXF DWG Export Options dialog box contains a variety of options to help retain the file integrity in the DXF/
DWG format.

DXF/DWG File Export |

615

616

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter

Description

File Format
Format

Choose from three exported file formats: DXF as plain text, DXF as a binary encoding, and
DWG.
One of the main differences between these formats is file size. Although individual files can
vary, an uncompressed text DXF file is generally larger than an uncompressed DWG file.
However, the file size can be significantly reduced by using a compression utility. A compressed
text DXF file is normally smaller than a compressed DWG file. Binary DXF file sizes generally
fall between the two for both compressed and uncompressed files.
In addition to file size, consider the formats that other applications can support. Before
exporting to binary DXF or to DWG, ensure that the receiving partys software can read those
formats. Since binary and text DXF both use the same .dxf extension, if the DXF file cannot be
opened, it may be may be mistakenly considered corrupted. When in doubt, export as text DXF,
which is universally supported.
Recent versions of AutoCAD have bugs when reading some DXF files, such as losing links to
images, so DWG is usually a safer choice in that situation.
DXB is a simpler file format used by some third-party applications that do not support the full
DXF or DWG file format. It is not the same as binary DXF; do not use .dxb as the extension for
binary DXF files. Vectorworks does not support DXB.

Version

For best results, export to the highest version supported by the recipients software, or the
default export version, whichever is lower. The latest versions of DXF/DWG have features more
similar to Vectorworks and may provide a better translation, but not all software packages can
read the latest versions. When in doubt, export as DXF and version 12, which has widespread
industry support.
Other options on the dialog box can change or become unavailable depending on the version
selected.

Class/Layer
Conversions
Export as
DXF Layers

This option is available if the Export option is set to Design Layers Only.
Since Vectorworks classes correspond most closely to DXF/DWG layers, normally, the Classes
option is recommended. There is no direct equivalent for Vectorworks layers in DXF/DWG. A
single Vectorworks design layer is similar toDXF model space.
This is most important for the import of groups and symbols. In Vectorworks, the objects in
groups and symbols can belong to different classes, but they must be on the same layer. In a
DXF/DWG file, the entities equivalent to Vectorworks symbols and groups (known as blocks)
can be on different DXF/DWG layers.
Layers normally do not export relative to the Z value shown in the Design Layers tab of the
Organization dialog box.

DXF/DWG File Export |

Parameter
Invisible
Classes Are

617

Description
While Vectorworks organizes drawings by class and by layer, the DXF/DWG file format only
has layers. The following description assumes that, as recommended, classes are selected for
export as layers. (If instead Vectorworks layers are selected for export as DXF/DWG layers,
equivalent options are presented for the layers.)
Select whether to export invisible classes. If Exported As Invisible DXF Layers is selected,
objects that are in invisible classes in the Vectorworks file are exported, and can be seen by
making the DXF/DWG layer visible. This is the recommended option. However, if invisible
classes contain private information or if the size of the exported file needs to be reduced, select
Not Exported to delete these.
If invisible classes are exported as DXF layers, objects on invisible Vectorworks layers are
not exported. To export these items, first make the layers visible, and then select the Export
command.

Export Layers
As Separate
Files

Select this option to export the selected sheet layers or design layers to separate DXF/DWG files
(named after the original layer); otherwise, the selected layers are exported to one file.
This option is unavailable if the Export option is set to Design Layers Only, and Export As DXF
Layers is set to Layers.
All design layers are exported, including those that are set to be invisible.

Layer Scale
Rescale
Layers To

When the Export option is set to Design Layers Only, paper space is not used; all items are
placed in model space. Model space must be at one scale; DXF/DWG files do not have different
layer scales. If the layers to be exported are at various scales, the option to rescale them to a
common scale before export becomes available. By default, the most frequently used layer scale
will be used.
Choosing the best scale for export is important. Select Rescale Layers To and click the common
scale to use from the displayed list.
Symbols on rescaled layers are exported as scaled blocks in the DXF/DWG file.
When sheets are selected for export, all design layers export to model space at effectively a 1:1
scale, and viewports take care of showing the objects at other scales.

618

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter

Description

Sheets to Include
Export

The options on this list change depending on the contents of the file being exported and on
which export Version is selected.
Select the items to export from the list. By default, the selected layers are exported to a single file
(to export multiple files instead, select Export Layers As Separate Files).
If Design Layers Only is selected, you can select either classes or layers to Export as DXF
Layers. If you export the design layers as DXF layers, you cannot select Export Layers As
Separate Files.
If one of the sheet options is selected, the selected sheet layers are exported as paper space
layouts; also, design layers used in viewports are exported to model space. While multiple
sheets can be exported to the same file, note that unrelated sheets usually should be exported
to different files. Select the sheets from the list below.
If one of the saved view options is selected, saved views are each exported as separate files.
Select the views from the list below.

Export
Viewports as
2D Graphics
in Model
Space

Select this option to export all 2D and 3D objects that display inside a viewport as simple 2D
(flat) graphics in model space. Each selected sheet is exported to a separate file. On re-import, all
exported graphics are imported into a design layer.
Viewports in Top/Plan view are exported without conversion to 2D lines.
Rendered viewports in any view other than Top/Plan view are exported as groups.
Non-rendered viewports in an orthogonal view (Top, Bottom, Front, Back, Left, and Right)
are set to hidden line rendering and then exported as groups.
Non-rendered viewports in an isometric view (including custom views) are converted to
lines before export.
Section viewports are exported as groups.
Viewport annotations are extracted from the viewport groups and exported as single entities.
All other sheet layer graphics (such as title blocks) are exported as single entities.

Sheets or
View Name

If Selected Sheets or Selected Saved Views is selected as the Export option, select the sheets or
saved views to export from the displayed list.

2D Fills and Files

Export 2D
Fills

Select this option to export solid fills as wipeouts (DXF/DWG versions 2000 and later) or solid
hatches (DXF/DWG version 14 and later). A Vectorworks hatch with multiple levels and colors
generates multiple hatch pattern definitions. See Preparing to Export on page 612 for more
information on the conversion.

Export
Hatches and
2D Fills into
Separate DXF
Layers

Select this option to export all of the fills, patterns, gradients, and hatches within a class (or
design layer, if layers are exported to DXF layers) to a separate DXF layer. The DXF layers are
named after the original class or layer that contains the object to which the fill, pattern, gradient,
or hatch is applied. For example, if the Vectorworks file has an object on the Hardscape layer
with a hatch applied to it, the export file will have a layer called Hardscape_Hatch.

DXF/DWG File Export |

Parameter

619

Description

Export Hatch
Pattern Files

When a drawing has hatches, select this option to create additional hatch pattern (.pat) files in a
specified folder. The hatch pattern files, and the DXF/DWG exported file and any support files,
such as .jpg images, are placed in this folder. AutoCAD requires the hatch pattern files to retain
the hatch associativity and to add hatches to additional objects with the same hatch pattern.
When Export Hatch Pattern Files is deselected, AutoCAD displays the hatch but cannot edit it.

Export
Images and
Image Files

Select this option to export image objects and image files. This option is only enabled for DXF/
DWG versions 2000 or higher.

Export Solids
as ACIS
Solids

Select this option to export most Vectorworks solids and NURBS surfaces as ACIS objects.
Deselect this option to export solids as polygonal faces (if the target software package cannot
read ACIS solids, for example).

3D

Walls, round walls, roof and floor slabs, filled 3D polygons, meshes, and NURBS curves cannot
be exported as ACIS solids.
Triangulate to
Preserve Fills

Some software packages, such as AutoCAD, are not capable of rendering exported 3D surfaces
that have more than three or four vertices per face. Select this option to break up such faces into
a set of triangles that can be properly rendered. The algorithm used works best on planar or
nearly planar surfaces, such as the top of an extruded circle.
Even if Export Solids as ACIS Solids is selected, this option may be used to handle 3D objects
that cannot be exported as ACIS solids.
When in doubt, select this option (this increases the exported file size and the time necessary to
export it, and may result in unwanted lines in some cases)

Symbols and
Groups
Decompose
3D Symbols
and Groups

Some software packages cannot handle exported groups and symbols. If a problem occurs,
select Decompose 3D Symbols and Groups to convert symbols and groups to ungrouped
objects. Do not select this option unless it is absolutely necessary.

Export
Groups as
Anonymous
Blocks

Normally, Vectorworks groups are exported as named blocks, which can be opened and edited
in other software packages. However, the named blocks are imported back into Vectorworks as
symbols. If this creates a problem, select Export Groups as Anonymous Blocks, which are
imported back into Vectorworks as groups.

Line Weights
Map Line
Weights to
Colors

The traditional method of specifying line weights in a DXF/DWG file is to use a unique line
color for each line weight. The thickness corresponding to each color is then specified at plotting
or printing time. Newer DXF/DWG versions support true line weights, but most AutoCAD
users are likely to be using colors nevertheless.
Because DXF/DWG version 2000 and later supports limited true line weights, by default the
Map Line Weights to Colors option is deselected and Vectorworks line weights are converted to
the closest possible weight value automatically. Line weights with a value of zero are not
exported.

620

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter

Description
VW Line Weight
(mm)

DXF Line
Weight (mm)

VW Line Weight
(mm)

DXF Line
Weight (mm)

Deleted

0.52 - 0.56

0.53

0.01 - 0.07

0.05

0.57 - 0.65

0.60

0.08 - 0.11

0.09

0.66 - 0.75

0.70

0.12 - 0.14

0.13

0.76 - 0.85

0.80

0.15 - 0.16

0.15

0.86 - 0.95

0.90

0.17 - 0.19

0.18

0.96 - 1.03

1.00

0.20 - 0.22

0.20

1.04 - 1.13

1.06

0.23 - 0.27

0.25

1.14 - 1.30

1.20

0.28 - 0.32

0.30

1.31 - 1.49

1.40

0.33 - 0.37

0.35

1.50 - 1.75

1.58

0.38 - 0.45

0.40

1.76 - 2.05

2.00

0.46 - 0.51

0.50

2.06 - 6.48

2.11

Select this option to convert line weights to colors. Then during the export process, a list of line
weights in the file displays. Specify the color to map to each of these line weights. To select a
different color for a selected line weight, click the color box and select a color from the displayed
options.
If Export Layers As Separate Files is also selected, the mapping dialog box does not
display; instead, Vectorworks automatically maps line weights to colors according to a
predefined standard.
For version 2000 and later, this option creates a .ctb file for each exported DXF/DWG file (named
after the original .vwx file) containing color mapping information. The exported DXF/DWG file
stores the name of the .ctb file in it. The AutoCAD user must put this in the support path, as
AutoCAD does not read the .ctb file when it is simply included in the same folder as the DXF/
DWG file.
To avoid having a color table file for each exported file, use a single .ctb file for each
unique set of mappings, and delete the others. When an exported file is opened in
AutoCAD, edit the page setup and choose an appropriate color table file.

DXF/DWG File Import |

Parameter

621

Description
For earlier DXF/DWG versions, converting line weights to colors is recommended, and Map
Line Weights to Colors should be selected. When re-importing the file, use the reverse process
to convert the colors back to line weights.

Items Which Cannot Export to DXF/DWG

Certain Vectorworks items have no equivalent in DXF/DWG and therefore cannot be exported. Other items could be
exported, but inadequate support in AutoCAD makes it inadvisable to do so. A few objects (such as worksheets) could
in theory be exported to something useful, but Vectorworks currently lacks support for doing so.
The following list includes items that do not export to DXF/DWG, for various reasons.

Textures
Lights
Image props
Individual layer scales
EPS or vector PICTs in some cases
Graying of layers and classes
Renderworks background images

Record format information attached to arbitrary objects

Design layers with perspective views
Oblique cavalier and oblique cabinet projections
Object names attached to arbitrary objects
Layer transfer modes other than Paint
Depending on the export options, either layers or classes

DXF/DWG File Import

Consider the following points when importing from DXF/DWG to Vectorworks.

Item

Import Notes

Line Weights

If no .ctb file is present and true line weights are present, then the line weights import
exactly. If no .ctb file is present and no true line weights are present, values will have to be
entered manually. The values in the dialog can be initialized by first importing a file that
does have an associated .ctb file. This creates a hidden record that stores the mapping
information. A template file could be created after doing such an import, to save the
values for future use.

622

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Item

Import Notes

Text

Text is sometimes unlinked from symbols when imported to preserve the original look.
Options are provided for preserving the links instead.
Some text styles are not supported; text is deleted from 3D symbols when imported.

Model Space Entities

Model space entities are imported as design layer objects.

Paper Space and

Viewports

Each paper space layout creates a VW sheet layer when imported. DXF viewports are
imported as VW viewports, with the same scale, view, and projection.

Points

Points are imported as symbols or as loci, depending on the file and the import options
chosen.

Multilines

Multilines are imported as grouped lines. An option is provided to import them as walls.

bhatches, Images, and

Wipeouts

bhatch definitions are imported as hatch definitions.

A single object associative bhatch with no islands is imported as an equivalent object
with a solid or hatch fill.
A multi-object, non-associative bhatch or associative bhatch is imported as an object
with zero line weight and solid or hatch fill.
A bhatch with islands is imported as one or more polylines with holes, with solid or
hatch fill.
Images referenced by the DXF/DWG file are imported as Vectorworks images.
A wipeout is imported as a polygon with a solid fill that is the same color as the
background.

AEC objects created

with AutoCADs
Architectural Desktop

AEC (architectural, engineering, and construction) objects such as walls, doors, and
windows are imported as grouped lines and polygons (2D conversion), or grouped
meshes (3D conversion)

Preparing to Import
Vectorworks imports versions 2.5 through 2007/2008/2009 of DWG and text and binary DXF. Before import, the
following steps are recommended to enhance the likelihood of a satisfactory translation:
1. Read Information Lost in Translation on page 608 for more information about the differences between DXF/
DWG and Vectorworks.
2. It is not necessary to explode the entire drawing in AutoCAD before importing. If a file is not importing correctly,
try exploding individual problem objects before import.
3. If possible, communicate with the file originator. Determine the intended units, page size, and scale of the file,
along with the intended color-to-line weight mapping, if any.

DXF/DWG Import Procedure

Multiple, single, or an entire folder of DXF/DWG files can be imported. The imported files can create new Vectorworks
files, create new symbols, or be imported into the current file. The results of the import process are summarized in a
log file.

DXF/DWG File Import |

623

When a master file is imported with the Import Single DXF/DWG File command, the external reference files (xrefs)
are automatically bound. Vectorworks displays an alert if any xrefs are missing, along with the names of the missing
files. (No alert appears when multiple files are imported.)
Verify that the best possible options were selected for import by checking the imported file. If the import was not
successful, try again with different options.

Importing DXF/DWG Files

When you have several DXF/DWG files to import, use the Import DXF/DWG command for maximum flexibility.
To import DXF/DWG files:
1. Create a blank file and set the drawing size, or open an empty template that already has the correct drawing size.
Import into an existing Vectorworks drawing is not recommended, because it can produce unexpected results.
For the same reason, if you import more than one file with the Import DXF/DWG command, ensure that the files
are very similar.
2. Select File > Import > Import DXF/DWG.
The DXF/DWG Import dialog box opens.

624

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter

Description

Source
One or More Files

Imports only one file or only certain files within a folder. Click Choose Files and
choose one or more DXF/DWG files to import. The number of files selected and
their location is displayed.

All ___ Files in Folder

Imports all files of the selected type (DXF only, DWG only, or DXF and DWG)
from a specified folder. Click Choose Folder and choose the source folder.

Include Subfolders

If All Files in Folder is selected, includes all files of the selected type in all
sub-folders.

Destination
Current File

Imports the selected file(s) into the current file. If several files are selected, a new
layer is created for each imported model space.

Symbols in Current File

Imports the selected file(s) into the current file. Each file creates a separate symbol.
This is convenient when importing part catalogs, for example. Paper space is not
imported.

New Files in Folder

Converts the selected file(s) into new, separate Vectorworks files in the selected
folder. Click Choose Folder to choose the location. This is the best option when
converting many files.

Use Document Template

If New Files in Folder is selected, select a template to use for each new file, or
select Blank Document. The template can be useful for specifying the page size to
use for model space objects (which can also affect dash scales and conversion of
polyline widths). It also allows specification of default color to line weight
mappings, and in some cases, units.

References
Bind External References

Imports the selected master DXF/DWG file and all its external references into the
current file

Ignore External References

Imports the selected master DXF/DWG file without its external references

Use Design Layer

Viewports

If New Files in Folder is selected, imports the selected master DXF/DWG file and
all its external references into separate Vectorworks documents; the external
documents are referenced from the master Vectorworks document using design
layer viewports

(Design Series required)

Use Layer Import

If New Files in Folder is selected, imports the selected master DXF/DWG file and
all its external references into separate Vectorworks documents; the external
documents are referenced from the master Vectorworks document using layer
importing

Architectural Objects
2D View

Imports AEC objects created with AutoCADs Architectural Desktop (such as

walls, doors, and windows) in 2D view; only 2D graphics are imported

3D View

Imports AEC objects in 3D view; only 3D graphics are imported

Import Options

DXF/DWG File Import |

Parameter
Use Settings

625

Description
Select a set of import options to apply to the imported files. If several files will be
imported, it is recommended that Units Setting In File be set to Determine
Automatically.
The Default options are those that ship with Vectorworks, and they cannot be
changed.
To set custom options, select Custom and then click Set Custom Options to
open the DXF DWG Import Options dialog box (see DXF/DWG Custom
Import Options on page 626).
To use custom import options that have been saved, select them from the list.

3. Click OK to import the file(s).

The progress of the import is displayed for each imported file during import. The final results of the import
process are shown in the DXF/DWG Import Results dialog box.

4. Click Details to open the results log file. The log text file, named DXF_DWF Import Log, is placed in the specified
destination folder if it exists, or in the Vectorworks application folder. New log information is appended to any
existing log file.

Importing a Single DXF/DWG File

To import a single DXF or DWG file:
1. Create a blank file and set the drawing size, or open an empty template that already has the correct drawing size.
Import into an existing Vectorworks drawing is not recommended, because it can produce unexpected results.
For example, the class attributes for existing objects in the drawing may be overwritten. Workgroup referencing
may give better results in these cases.
2. Select File > Import > Import Single DXF/DWG File.
The Import DXF/DWG Files dialog box opens. Select the file to import; the progress of the initial import is
displayed.
3. During the import, the DXF DWG Import Options dialog box opens.
Select appropriate import options as described in DXF/DWG Custom Import Options on page 626.
4. Click OK to finish importing the file. A progress bar displays, along with the number of objects processed and
free memory available.

626

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

5. Check the imported file.

DXF/DWG Custom Import Options

The DXF DWG Import Options dialog box provides all the necessary options to import a DXF/DWG file with the
maximum file integrity.
The first tab, Primary Settings, contains important basic settings. The Graphic Attributes and Objects tabs contain
settings for advanced users to customize the import process.
Options that do not apply to the current file import appear dimmed, and an explanation displays next to the option.
For example, if no paper space objects are contained in the DXF/DWG file to be imported, the Paper Space Units
options are dimmed, and the message No paper space objects were found displays.
To make custom imports faster and easier, save the sets of options that you use frequently.

Saving Custom Import Options

To save a set of custom import options for future use:
1. Select File > Import > Import DXF/DWG.
2. From the DXF/DWG Import dialog box, select Custom from the Use Settings list.
3. Click Set Custom Options to open the DXF DWG Import Options dialog box.
4. Set the options on the Primary Settings, Graphic Attributes, and Objects tabs as needed.
5. Click Save as, enter a name for the saved settings, and click OK.
6. The new set displays on the Use Settings list on the DXF/DWG Import dialog box, and can be selected when
needed.

Deleting Custom Import Options

To delete a saved set of custom import options:
1. Select File > Import > Import DXF/DWG.
2. From the DXF/DWG Import dialog box, select Custom from the Use Settings list.
3. Click Set Custom Options to open the DXF DWG Import Options dialog box.
4. Select the set to delete from the Use settings list, and click Delete.

Primary Settings Tab

The options on the Primary Settings tab establish the basic import options.

DXF/DWG File Import |

627

Parameter

Description

Model Space Units

Version 2000 and later DXF/DWG files support true units. When importing a file with true
units, Vectorworks determines and sets the units automatically. If the DXF or DWG file
does not contain true units information, Vectorworks tries to guess the units setting;
however, it may still require adjusting (see Setting Units Manually on page 629).

Units Setting In
File

Vectorworks tries to determine the imported files unit settings, and displays the
information to the right of Units Setting in File, along with the unit format (such as
Architectural), and the scaling factor that will be assumed (such as 1 DXF Units = 1).
To use the displayed unit settings in the Vectorworks file, select Determine
Automatically from the list, and also select Set Vectorworks Units to Match.
To use another unit type (such as Centimeters), select it from the list, and also select Set
Vectorworks Units to Match.
To use a custom unit type, or to change the defaulted scaling factor, select Custom from
the list, and then specify the units in the text boxes. Enter the unitless DXF/DWG
number in the first box, and a number with units in the second box. (For example, 15
DXF Units = 1 in the Vectorworks drawing.) The units displayed in the second box are
the same as the current Vectorworks document settings, but other units can be entered as
long as the appropriate units suffix is included, such as 3 cm. Also select Set
Vectorworks Units to Match.
To use the units currently set in the Vectorworks file, select Use Vectorworks Document
Units. Vectorworks assumes that 1 DXF unit = 1 current document unit when importing
objects.

628

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter
Set Vectorworks
Units to Match

Description
Changes the Vectorworks document units and units format to match the DXF/DWG file
being imported; the physical sizes of imported objects will not be affected. This option is
disabled when Use Vectorworks Document Units is selected from the Units Setting In File
list.

Paper Space Units

Select the paper space units for converting paper space objects. Version 2000 and later DXF/
DWG files can have multiple paper space layouts, with each layout having its own units
setting; if that is the case, select By Layout (this option is not available for earlier versions of
DXF/DWG).

Model Space

Once the units have been determined, specify the scale for Vectorworks to display the
imported file.
Choosing the model space scale is important. The scale affects the dash length scaling and
the conversion of polylines with widths (world-space line weights) to Vectorworks line
weights. If the scale or drawing size are set incorrectly, some polylines may seem to have
the wrong line weight and some dashes may be too long or too short.

Fit to Page

Vectorworks estimates a scale based on the bounds of all of the objects in model space; the
scale fits those objects on the page. Select this option to use the estimated value.

This Scale

To import at a different scale, set the scale manually. Click Scale to open the standard Layer
Scale dialog box, and select the desired scale. (All Layers and Scale Text do not apply to
DXF/DWG files.) Click OK to return to the Primary Settings tab, and the selected scale
displays.

Center After
Import

Select this option to center imported objects on the page in the Vectorworks document. The
origin is moved so that the most recent import has correct coordinates. In other words, if all
the imported objects are shifted to be centered on the page, then the user origin shifts by
the same amount. Only objects from the current import are moved though, so previously
imported objects do not get centered and thus are no longer at the same location relative to
the user origin.
Deselect this option to position imported objects according to either the user origin
currently set in the Vectorworks document, or the internal world origin (a constant),
depending on the Use World Origin Instead of User Origin setting. Deselecting Center
After Import keeps origins aligned for multiple file imports. Note that some imported
objects may display off of the page if Center After Import is not selected.

Use World Origin

Instead of User
Origin

If Center After Import is not selected, select this option to position imported objects in
Vectorworks according to the world origin (a constant value in all Vectorworks
documents).
Deselect this option to position imported objects according to the user origin currently set
in the Vectorworks document.

DXF/DWG File Import |

629

Parameter

Description

2D/3D Conversion

From the Convert Objects To list, specify whether objects should be imported as 3D, 2D, or
a mixture of 2D and 3D. Generally, select the 2D and 3D option, which converts objects that
appear to be 2D (planar objects parallel to or in the active layer plane) to Vectorworks 2D
objects. The remaining objects are imported as 3D.
To import 3D versions of Architectural Desktop (ADT) objects such as walls and doors,
select the 3D View setting for Architectural Objects on the DXF/DWG Import dialog box,
and select a 3D conversion option. To import both 2D and 3D versions of the objects, import
them twice from the DXF/DWG file: once with 3D View selected, and once with 2D View
selected.
Because Vectorworks does not have 3D text, selecting 2D and 3D can cause text in 3D
symbols to be deleted. In addition, objects parallel to the active layer plane that have a
thickness are imported as 3D even though the originator of the file may not have intended
for them to be 3D. If problems occur, import all objects as 2D by selecting All 2D. A
warning displays if selecting this option will distort any objects, such as 3D symbols with
3D rotation.
If the file contains only a 3D model, select the All 3D option. Otherwise, parts of a large
object composed of several entities could be converted to 2D.
Occasionally, none of the choices is appropriate for all the objects. In this case, select the
option that best converts most of the objects.

Sometimes DXF/DWG drawings are split up into pieces and saved as separate files, such as different areas of a large
city map. When multiple files like this are imported into one file, they need to have their coordinates aligned, and their
layer scale set the same. The recommended workflow is to import the first file with the default Fit to Page scale, and
with Center After Import turned on. For subsequent files, manually set the scale to the same scale defaulted for the
first file, and turn off the centering option.
The Primary Settings tab covers the basic requirements for importing a DXF/DWG file. If the results are not
satisfactory, explore the options on the Graphic Attributes and Objects tabs.

Setting Units Manually

If objects seem to be the wrong physical size after import, ensure that the units chosen are correct. (Model Space Scale
only affects the display, but Units Setting in File affects the actual measured size of the objects.) DXF/DWG files do
not always have the true units set, and sometimes have incorrect units set.
Vectorworks guesses the units based on the information available, and indicates what it found in the dynamic text at
the top of the pane. If the guess is wrong, set the units manually.
If you do not know the correct units, but you know the true length of one of the objects in the drawing, determine
the true units as follows.
Import the file and choose Custom units, setting the edit boxes to something like 1 DXF Units = 1". After import,
measure the size of the object that you know the true length of. Close the document and redo the import, but this
time set the units to Custom with these values in the edit boxes: (measured length) DXF Units = (true length). For
example, if the true length is 1", but the measured length is 2.54", enter 2.54 DXF Units = 1". (Do not include units
in the first box, and if in feet and inches mode, just use the total measured length in inches.)
If Vectorworks finds an exact match for that ratio, it will change the Custom choice to the correct units. (In the
example above, it changes it to Centimeters.) If the measurements and the ratio are not exact (for example, 2.539
instead of 2.54), manually adjust it to a standard ratio. Common ratios have values such as 1, 12, 2.54, and powers
of 10. Examples: 1/12, 12/10, 2.54/0.01, etc.

630

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

If you do not know any true lengths, but the document contains dimension objects that show lengths, follow the
steps just described with the following change: Select Convert Dimensions to Groups (see Objects Tab on
page 631), import, and use the value in the imported dimension object as the true length.

Normally Vectorworks leaves the document units setting unchanged after an import. If a DXF/DWG file is set to
meters, but the Vectorworks document is set to feet and inches, then a dimension object that shows 1 meter in the
original file will show as 3'3.37" in the imported file. If you want the imported drawing to be the same as the original,
select the Set Vectorworks Units to Match option. You can also import with the option to convert dimensions to
groups (see Objects Tab on page 631) if you want the document to stay in the current units, but you want the
dimensions to look the same as in the original.

Graphic Attributes Tab

The Graphic Attributes tab contains settings for advanced users to customize the import process.

Parameter

Description

Color and Line

Weights

Most DXF/DWG files do not use true line weights, although that is starting to change.
Color is traditionally used to indicate line weights. There are some standards that specify
mappings between colors and line weights, but those standards are often ignored.
Vectorworks automatically chooses the standard mappings when exporting, if the
document does not already have a hidden record left over from a previous export or
import that specifies the mappings. When importing, Vectorworks does not choose the
standard mappings, but rather defaults to a reasonable line weight for all colors, implicitly
alerting the user that they should determine the true mappings that are desired.
If desired, specify mappings by selecting Map Colors to Line Weights. Select the desired
color mapping during the import process; if necessary, communicate with the file
originator to determine the correct line weights.

DXF/DWG File Import |

Parameter

631

Description
The colored lines can be changed to black (or white if the background is black). Select Set
Colors to Black and White. Note that most DXF/DWG files are created with a black
background, and the colors may not show up well on a white background.
Version 2000 and later uses .ctb files to store color mapping information, but it also
supports line weights, so these options may or may not be needed.
If no .ctb file is detected during import, and true line weights are present, Map Colors to
Line Weights is deselected automatically, and the line weights import exactly.
If no .ctb file is detected, and true line weights are not present, Map Colors to Line
Weights is selected automatically. A dialog box displays to allow manual mapping (by
default, all colors are mapped to the same line weight, or to the last mapping used
during the current session).
If a .ctb file is detected, Map Colors to Line Weights is selected automatically, and
Vectorworks reads the file to determine how colors should map to line weights. A dialog
box displays to allow manual mapping (values are pre-set by the mapping file; duplicate
mappings are indicated by italics).

Dash Patterns

In some files, dash lengths may import at an inappropriate scale. Change the dash length
scale by selecting Manually Scale All Dash Lengths by and entering a scale value. A
suggested scale value is displayed. The scaling does not affect line thickness. Vectorworks
converts any dash patterns that are extremely small to solid lines to avoid unacceptable
slowdowns during file display and printing.

Classes/Layers

DXF/DWG layers correspond more closely to classes in Vectorworks than they do to

Vectorworks layers. Normally, import DXF/DWG layers as Vectorworks classes.
There is no equivalent to Vectorworks layers in a DXF/DWG file. When DXF/DWG layers
are mapped to Vectorworks layers, a warning displays if some of the objects in symbols or
groups would leave their original layers and take on the layer of the symbol or group. For
simple files without blocks, or files with objects inside the block that are set to by block
attributes, importing layers as Vectorworks layers should pose no problems.
To group imported DXF layers in Vectorworks class and layer lists for easy identification,
select Add Prefix to Imported DXF Layers. Enter the custom prefix to use in the field to
the right of the check box. If Import DXF Layers As Classes is selected, the prefix and a
hyphen is added to the beginning of the class name when imported into Vectorworks.
Similarly, If Import DXF Layers As Layers is selected, the prefix and a hyphen is added to
the beginning of the layer name when imported into Vectorworks.
Rays and Xlines (or construction lines) are DXF/DWG objects that are similar to
Vectorworks guides. A ray starts at a point and goes off to infinity, while a construction
line is anchored at a point and goes off to infinity in both directions. Select Rays and
XLines use Guides Class to convert Rays and Construction Lines into lines in the Guides
class, which are of finite length.

Objects Tab
The Objects tab contains settings for advanced users to customize the import process. In particular, decisions about
preserving object visibility and record field links are available.

632

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Parameter

Description

Points

DXF/DWG Points act either like the locus in Vectorworks (a drawing aid that is not
printed), or like a symbol that is visible and can be printed. Select whether to import points
as Loci or as Symbols. The default behavior is to import as symbols if the point style has
specified a real world size (that is, it is zoom invariant and always prints the same), or as
loci if the point style is specified as a percentage of the pixel size of the drawing window
(that is, it varies with the zoom level). Select Use Guides Class to import points as
Symbols in the Vectorworks Guides Class; this allows them to be hidden. In Vectorworks,
use the Show/Hide Guides commands to toggle their display.

Block Attributes

Attributes in a DXF/DWG file are similar to linked text in Vectorworks. Select how to
handle attribute conversion into Vectorworks symbol linked text. Regardless of the
selection, record formats will be created based on the attributes found during import, and
imported blocks with attributes will have record formats attached.
Choose a Linked Text Handling method from the list. Depending on the file to be
imported, not all options are available.

Preserve Look and

Links

This option should be selected when available. The attributes will display as they did in
the DXF/DWG file, and they will be converted to symbol linked text.
If the file contains invisible attributes or attributes that override the attribute definitions,
this option is not available.

Preserve Look

This is the next best option. The attributes will look and print as they did in the DXF/DWG
file, but some symbol text may become unlinked, if necessary, to preserve the look. Symbol
record field updates are not reflected in unlinked text. With this option, an individual
symbol could have a mixture of linked and unlinked text.

DXF/DWG File Import |

Parameter

633

Description

Preserve Visible
Links

This option is available when the DXF/DWG file contains attributes marked as invisible.
This type of attribute is converted in to a record format attached to a symbol, but is not
converted to linked text. The look of the drawing should be preserved, but minor changes
to visibility are possible. The advantage of this method is that linked text is preserved for
all visible attributes.

Preserve All Links

The link between record fields and symbol text is preserved with this option. Any invisible
attributes will become visible. The look of the DXF/DWG file may not be preserved, but the
symbol text will not be unlinked.

Hide All

All attribute text is hidden upon import. The information is still attached to the object in
record format, but it is not visible.

Group Record
Fields

Each block attribute imports as a record format field. Select Group Record Fields to group
those fields into a single record format. Vectorworks groups sets of attributes into record
formats if they have the same set of field names. For example, if two blocks (symbols) have
attributes with field names of color and part number, both blocks are converted with
the same record format. If one of the blocks has color, part number, and price, while
the other only has two of those, then the blocks are converted with different record
formats. When grouped, the record format name is created from the names of the first few
fields in the record format.
Deselect Group Record Fields to create one record format per field, with no grouping.
Without grouping, the record format uses the same name as the record field.

MultiLines

Multilines (or mlines) are similar in some ways to walls in Vectorworks, in that they can
have breaks that are healed and can be connected to other multilines. There are several
significant differences between multilines and walls, but an option is provided to import
multilines as walls. Do not select this option unless all multilines in the DXF/DWG file are
intended to be walls.
When you import multilines as walls, the wall heights may need to be adjusted. To do
so, select Tools > Custom Selection, select all walls, and change their height in the
Object Info palette.

Dimensions

By default, the import process automatically creates custom dimension standards to match
the dimension styles in the DXF/DWG file. If a dimension was customized in the DXF/
DWG file after the style was applied, the converted dimensions may not match the
originals; select Convert Dimensions to Groups to convert the dimensions into groups
instead.

DXF/DWG Items Which Cannot Import to Vectorworks

Certain DXF/DWG items have no equivalent in Vectorworks and cannot be imported. A few other objects theoretically
could be imported, but Vectorworks does not currently support them.

634

| Chapter 16: Importing and Exporting Files

Named views
Gradients
Lights
rtext
SHX fonts

Textures
Cropping images
User coordinate systems (UCS)
Custom line styles and shape files
DXF groups (named selection sets, not the same as Vectorworks groups)
Certain objects from industry-specific variations of AutoCAD, if those objects do not have
proxy graphics saved in the file. AEC objects that were created with AutoCADs
Architectural Desktop can be imported as groups of 2D or 3D objects, depending on how
you import; for example, a door imported from a DWG file with a 3D view is converted to a
group of 3D mesh objects in Vectorworks.

17

Using Working Planes

The working plane is an important concept in Vectorworks for working in 3D. This section covers all aspects of the
working plane, including setting, manipulating, and saving the working plane position.

Understanding the Working Plane

Every Vectorworks layer has a 3D plane associated with it. When a layer is active, this 3D plane is called the active
layer plane. The active layer plane provides a constant visual and logical reference and is fixed in relation to the objects
in the layer. In an architectural sense, the active layer plane is like the floor of a building.
Every Vectorworks drawing also has a working plane. The location of Vectorworks working plane defaults to that of
the active layer plane, and it is not seen. However, when working and modeling in 3D, the orientation of the working
plane can be changed, and its positions saved. The working plane can be moved, aligned to different objects or
surfaces, and rotated, unlike the active layer plane, which remains constant at the internal drawing center.
Working in 3D requires the cursor to snap to a 3D location. When no other 3D snap is active (the cursor is not snapping
to 3D geometry), the cursor still needs to snap to a 3D location; this location is the 3D plane called the working plane.

Working plane

Active layer
plane

Every object created in Vectorworks is placed in relation to the active layer plane for that layer, whether it is placed
directly on that plane or placed above or below it. The working plane helps to easily create and position objects in 3D
space. It allows you to draw while in an isometric view and position objects exactly where they are needed. When
changing the location of the working plane, the active layer plane remains displayed, providing a constant frame of
reference while adjusting the working plane.

636

| Chapter 17: Using Working Planes

Above the working plane

On the working plane

Below the working plane

Above the active layer plane

For example, for a drawing of a complex machine, with numerous gears, cams, rollers, and other parts that intersect on
multiple planes, the working plane can be changed to different locations and angles in relation to the active layer
plane. Creating or locating objects according to the working plane allows highly accurate positioning of the objects in
3D space.

Cylinder created on working plane

Hybrid symbols can only be inserted on a working plane that is parallel to the active layer plane. When inserting
a hybrid symbol, if the working plane is not parallel to the active layer plane, the working plane is moved to, and
aligned with, the active layer plane.
In addition, some tools require a vector or plane. The 3D viewing tools can use the working plane to define their center
and/or axis of rotation, while the Mirror tool can mirror the selected 3D objects across the working plane. The location
of 3D tools in 3D space is taken from the point on the working plane directly behind the cursor, or from a snap point if
they are snapped to an object.

Appearance of the Planes

In any view other than Top/Plan, the active layer plane is represented in blue. When the working plane and the active
layer plane are located in the same position, only the active layer plane is shown. However, once the position of the
working plane changes, it is represented on the screen as a colored frame. The color of the active layer plane and
appearance of the working plane can be customized in the Vectorworks preferences; see Interactive Preferences on
page 54 for details.
The axis lines of the working plane are colored red for X, green for Y, and blue for Z; dashed axes represent the
negative axes. The Z axis and axis labels are optionally displayed by settings in the SmartCursor Settings dialog box;
see Grid Snapping on page 141. When grid snapping is enabled, the working plane displays with dots; when grid

Setting the Working Plane Location |

637

snapping is off, the dots do not display. The working plane displays slightly darker, and with a double line frame,
when it is viewed from below.
When the working plane and the active layer plane are coincident, the active layer plane displays with grid lines.
Otherwise, when the planes are not coincident, the grid lines do not display on the active layer plane.
Dashed gray lines represent the intersection of the ground and working planes. The active layer plane does not display
in a rendered view.
When the working plane is selected, it displays with colored grips around each axis, as well as a move grip, for
manipulating the plane. The reshape handles of any objects in the drawing are hidden, to prevent confusion.

Working plane with grid snapping

enabled

Working plane seen from

below

Active layer plane and working plane

coincident, and working plane selected; Z
axis display enabled

If the active layer plane grid lines are not visible, select Show Grid in the Set Grid dialog box (see Grid
Snapping on page 141).

Setting the Working Plane Location

The Set Working Plane tool sets the location and angle of the working plane. Set the working plane to any location in
3D space.
The Set Working Plane tool has two modes:
Three Point

Planar Face

Mode

Description

Three Point

Defines the working plane by three, 3D points, or according to the surface of a rendered object

Planar Face

Aligns the working plane to a planar face

Once the working plane location has been set, Custom Plane displays in the Planes list on the View bar. The location
can be saved; seeWorking Plane Commands on page 641.

638

| Chapter 17: Using Working Planes

Setting the Working Plane with Three Points

Two methods are available for defining the working plane location in Three Point mode. The first method allows the
position and angle of the working plane to be set by defining the origin and axes of the new working plane location.
The second method sets the position and angle of the working plane according to a rendered objects surface.

Setting the Working Plane

To set the working plane with three points:
1. In a 3D view, click the Set Working Plane tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Three Point from
the Tool bar.
2. Click to set the first point.
This becomes the origin of the working plane.
3. Click to set the second point.
This sets the working plane X axis.
4. Select the third point.
This sets the Y axis for the working plane. Once the third point is defined, the working plane location is set.
2nd click

3rd click
1st click

Setting the Working Plane to a Rendered Objects Surface

The working plane can be defined according to the surface of a rendered object.
To set the working plane to a rendered objects surface:
1. In a 3D view, select a rendering mode of Unshaded Polygon, Shaded Polygon, Shaded Polygon No Lines, or Final
Shaded Polygon.
2. Click the Set Working Plane tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Three Point from the Tool bar.
The cursor changes to a pointing hand when over the surface of a rendered object.
3. Click on the surface that defines the working plane location.
The working plane location is set to the selected surface.

Manipulating the Working Plane |

639

Click the rendered surface to use

for aligning the working plane

Setting the Working Plane to a Planar Face

Planar Face mode is particularly useful when aligning the working plane to the top of an object without sharp corners
(like a cylinder); instead of clicking in three places, only the planar face of the object needs to be selected.
To set the working plane to a planar face:
1. In a 3D view, click the Set Working Plane tool from the 3D Modeling tool set, and then select Planar Face from
the Tool bar.
2. As the cursor moves over the underlying geometry, a preview of the working plane displays. Click to set the
working plane location. The click location becomes the origin of the working plane.
The working plane is aligned to the selected face and remains selected for manipulation.

Manipulating the Working Plane

Working plane operations can be performed either by using the grips on the selected plane or by menu commands.

Working Plane Grips

Manipulate the working plane by rotating about any of the three axes (X, Y, and Z) or moving the working plane
origin.
To manipulate the working plane directly:
1. Click the 3D Selection tool from the Basic palette.
2. In a 3D view, select the working plane by clicking on it.

640

| Chapter 17: Using Working Planes

The working plane must be selected for the grips to be visible. Any other object reshape handles are temporarily
hidden, to avoid confusion.

3. The working plane displays with grips.

Each axis has two grips for rotation about the other two axes. Red grips rotate about the X axis, green grips
rotate about the Y axis, and blue grips rotate about the Z axis. Moving the cursor over an axis displays a
preview showing the rotation direction. The blue diamond grip at the working plane origin moves the working
plane.

Action

Description

Rotate the working plane

Click on one of the axis grips. The rotate cursor displays. Move the cursor to
rotate the plane about the selected axis, and click to set.

Move the working plane

Click on the center grip. The move cursor displays. Move the cursor to move
the plane, and click to set.

4. Once the working plane has been positioned, press the Esc key, or click off of the working plane. The position can
be saved with working plane commands or in the Working Planes palette.
Use the grips in combination with SmartCursor cues for accurate manipulation in relation to other objects.

Alignment indicators show that the

direction of working plane movement is
planar, in this case in the Z and X
directions, as indicated by the blue and
red planar shading

Y axis is perpendicular to the active

layer plane, and the working plane is
located above the active layer plane,
as indicated by the dashed gray lines

Smart point with extension line

Manipulating the Working Plane |

641

Working Plane Commands

The working plane commands can select and manipulate the working plane. Some commands have equivalents in the
Working Planes palette or when editing the working plane directly.
To access the working plane commands:
Select Modify > Working Plane.
The same commands are available from the context menu of the working plane.

Command

Description

Select Working Plane

Selects the working plane (alternatively, click on the plane with the 3D Selection
tool or select Edit > Select Working Plane)

Look at Working Plane

Changes the view to be perpendicular to the working plane; similar to the Top
view under the View menu, in that you are looking straight at the working plane.
This command is also available from the View menu and the Working Planes
palette.

Save Working Plane

Opens the Assign Name dialog box. Enter a name to save the working plane
position. This command is also available by clicking Add from the Working Planes
palette. Once a working plane position has been saved, it can be accessed through
the Working Planes palette and the Planes list on the View bar.

Next Working Plane

Cycles through the next ten unsaved palette positions

Previous Working Plane

Cycles through the last ten unsaved palette positions

Set Working Plane at Next

Click

Sets the working plane to the next clicked planar face, similar to the Planar Face
mode of the Set Working Plane tool (see Setting the Working Plane to a Planar
Face on page 639)

Align Working Plane X Axis

with Layer Plane

Rotates the working plane coordinates about the Z axis until the X axis is parallel to
the active layer plane and the Y axis is pointing up. The working plane origin is
unchanged.

Align Working Plane with

Layer Plane

Aligns all working plane axes to the corresponding active layer plane axes. The
working plane origin is unchanged.

Align Working Plane with

Current View

Aligns the working plane Z axis toward the viewer; the X axis is aligned
horizontally and the Y axis vertically, on the screen. The working plane origin is
unchanged.

Rotate About X Left 90

Rotates the working plane to the left about its X axis by 90 degrees

Rotate About X Right 90

Rotates the working plane to the right about its X axis by 90 degrees

Rotate About Y Left 90

Rotates the working plane to the left about its Y axis by 90 degrees

Rotate About Y Right 90

Rotates the working plane to the right about its Y axis by 90 degrees

Rotate About Z Left 90

Rotates the working plane to the left about its Z axis by 90 degrees

Rotate About Z Right 90

Rotates the working plane to the right about its Z axis by 90 degrees

Flip X

Flips the working plane about its X axis

Flip Y

Flips the working plane about its Y axis

Flip Z

Flips the working plane about its Z axis

642

| Chapter 17: Using Working Planes

When using the rotate commands, left indicates counterclockwise when viewing the working plane origin from the
positive X axis.
A selected working plane can also be moved with the Modify > Move > Move 3D command and can be rotated with
the Modify > Rotate > Rotate 3D command.

The Working Planes Palette

The Working Planes palette, as well as the Planes list on the View bar, display working plane positions that have been
set or saved while working on a drawing. The Planes list allows you to switch among different saved working plane
positions. The palette allows you to switch among working plane positions (saved and unsaved), name and save
working plane positions, and select the working plane display mode. Combine these features with the working plane
commands, the Set Working Plane tool, and the Align Plane tool to accurately control the placement and alignment of
objects in 3D space.
Some Working Planes palette functions have equivalent commands on the Modify > Working Plane menu.
To open the working planes palette:
Select Window > Palettes > Working Planes.
The Working Planes palette opens.

Accessing Existing Working Plane Positions

Initially, when the working plane position has not yet been changed, the only position saved in the Working Planes
palette is that of the active layer plane location, and only the active layer plane is available from the Planes list in the
View bar. Once the position of the working plane has been changed, there are three ways to access existing working
plane positions.

Accessing Working Plane Positions from the View Bar

The Planes list on the View bar displays and switches among working plane positions. See The View Bar on page 18.
To access working plane positions from the View bar:
While in a view other than Top/Plan, select a working plane position from the Planes list.

The current working plane position, if it has not yet been saved, displays as Custom Plane. The name of the
currently selected working plane position displays in bold.

The Working Planes Palette |

643

The selected working plane position displays.

Accessing Working Plane Positions from the Current Drawing Session

To access unsaved working plane positions:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Working Planes.
The Working Planes palette opens.
2. Click the left and right arrow buttons to cycle through the last ten unsaved positions from the current drawing
session. These positions are not permanently saved with the drawing.
Alternatively, select the Next Working Plane and Previous Working Plane commands from the Modify >
Working Plane menu.
Once it has been saved, a working plane position can no longer be accessed with the left and right arrows.

Saving and Accessing Working Plane Positions

The working plane position can be permanently saved with the drawing and accessed later from the Working Planes
palette. Once named, the plane position is no longer included in the list of the working planes accessed by the left and
right arrows on the Working Planes palette.
To permanently save a working plane position:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Working Planes.
The Working Planes palette opens.
2. Select the working plane position to save.
The left and right arrows cycle the drawing area through the most recent working plane positions.
3. Click Add. (Alternatively, select Modify > Working Plane > Save Working Plane.)
The Assign Name dialog box opens.
4. Enter a name for the working plane position.
5. Click OK. Saved working plane positions are displayed in alphabetical order in the palette. To access a saved
working plane position, double-click its name in the Working Planes palette or select it from the Planes list on the
View bar.

Deleting and Renaming Working Plane Positions

With the exception of the active layer plane position, any named working plane position in the drawing can be deleted
or renamed. The active layer plane position is the default, common to all drawings, and it cannot be deleted or
renamed. Planes are listed in alphabetical order under the active layer plane.

644

| Chapter 17: Using Working Planes

To delete a working plane position:

1. Select Window > Palettes > Working Planes.
The Working Planes palette opens.
2. Select the desired working plane from the list.
3. Click Delete. The working plane is removed from the list.
To rename a working plane position:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Working Planes.
The Working Planes palette opens.
2. Select the desired working plane from the list.
3. Click Rename.
The Assign Name dialog box opens.
4. Enter a new, unique name for the working plane.
5. Click OK. The working plane is renamed.

Working Plane View and Modes

The three buttons at the bottom of the working planes palette control how the working plane is viewed and how it
interacts with certain tools and commands.

Button

Description

Look At Working Plane

Changes the view to be perpendicular to the working plane; similar

to the Top view under the View menu in that you are looking
straight at the working plane

Active Layer Plane Mode

Sets the active layer plane as the reference for tools such as the
Flyover tool, Walkthrough tool, and other viewing tools; used with
the Flyover tools rotation center mode

Working Plane Mode

Sets the working plane as the reference for tools such as the Flyover
tool, Walkthrough tool, and other viewing tools; used with the
Flyover tools rotation center mode

Aligning Objects to the Working Plane

When the working plane has been set to the desired location, it can be used to position 3D objects. One way to align
objects precisely in 3D space is to align them to the working plane.

Setting Objects to the Working Plane with Three Points

To align an object to the working plane with three points:
1. In a 3D view, set the working plane location as desired.

Aligning Objects to the Working Plane |

645

2. Select the object to align to the working plane.

3. Click the Align Plane tool from the 3D Modeling tool set.
4. Click a location on the object to align with the origin of the working plane.
5. Click a second point on the object to define the X axis.
The line between the first and second points defines the X axis position.
6. Click a third point on the object to define the Y axis.
The line between the second and third points defines the Y axis position.
The object aligns itself to the working plane as defined by these points. If the surface was mistakenly aligned to
the wrong side of the working plane, use the Mirror tool to flip the object to the opposite side of the working
plane.
Third click

Second click
First click
Object aligned to working plane

Setting a Rendered Objects Surface to the Working Plane

A rendered object can be aligned to the working plane.
To align a rendered object to the working plane:
1. Select a 3D view and a rendering mode for the drawing.
The drawing projection must be other than 2D Plan, with a rendering mode of Unshaded Polygon, Shaded
Polygon, Shaded Polygon No Lines, or Final Shaded Polygon.
2. Click the Align Plane tool from the 3D Modeling tool set.
The cursor changes to a pointing hand when over the surface of a rendered object.
3. Click on the surface to align to the working plane.

Click the rendered surface to align

to the working plane

646

| Chapter 17: Using Working Planes

The objects selected surface is aligned to the working plane.

Worksheets

18

Vectorworks worksheet functionality complements its drawing functionality, making it a complete package for your
work process. From the information present in the file, worksheets can be created to track data, create cost and
material lists, perform calculations, and more. Information in worksheets can be created and edited without leaving
the Vectorworks file; this eliminates the need for a separate program and reduces the number of files per project.
Worksheets in Vectorworks include both database and spreadsheet functionality. Data can be obtained from the
drawing, and then calculations can be performed on that data.
Worksheets can be imported and exported, which allows data to be shared between worksheets, files, and other
spreadsheet programs. A worksheet can also be added to a drawing and printed.

Creating Worksheets
For complex drawings, it is best to create separate worksheets for each task rather than one large worksheet.
Worksheets can be linked to share data, formulas, and calculations.
Worksheets can be created in several ways:
Use the Create Report command to select worksheet data from the information associated with the objects in the
drawing. See Creating Reports on page 647.
Use the Resource Browser to create a blank worksheet, and then add the desired information to it. See Creating
a Blank Worksheet on page 650.
Import worksheets from other Vectorworks files or from other spreadsheet programs. See Importing
Worksheets on page 681.
Once created, a worksheet is saved with the file and is listed in the Resource Browser. It can also be accessed by
selecting Window > Worksheets.
If the same set of objects are typically used in your drawings, you can create a template file with a worksheet that
serves as a master price list listing all the objects and their costs. Then, to create materials lists and cost estimates for
a new design, simply import or reference the worksheet in the new drawing file.

Creating Reports
The Create Report command allows you to select data that is attached to objects in a drawing (such as manufacturer,
size, and price) and create a worksheet from it. The command can either create a new worksheet or append database
rows to an existing worksheet. For more information about how to attach data to objects, see Record Formats on
page 205.
To create a report from objects in a drawing:
1. Select Tools > Reports > Create Report.
The Create Report dialog box opens. Specify the report criteria. Items in the Worksheet Columns list are listed in
the order in which they will appear in the worksheet; to change the order, click in the # column and drag the item
to the desired position in the list.

648

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Parameter

Description

Title

Enter a worksheet title; if the report data is appended to an existing worksheet, this title is
added to a spreadsheet cell above the database rows that are appended

List all

Select whether to list all symbols in the drawing, or to list all drawing objects that have a
specific record attached to them

List objects with record

If you selected the option to list all objects with a specific record, select the record format
to use

Possible Columns

Lists the columns that can be selected for inclusion in the worksheet

Worksheet Columns

Lists the columns that are currently selected for inclusion in the worksheet; initially, all
possible columns are placed in the Worksheet Columns list

Add / Add All

To add a column to the worksheet, select it in the Possible Columns list and click Add;
click Add All to move all the columns to the Worksheet Columns list

Remove / Remove All

To remove an item from the worksheet, select it in the Worksheet Columns list and click
Remove; click Remove All to move all the columns to the Possible Columns list

Summarize items with

the same

Summarizes symbols or objects that contain identical fields, rather than creating a new
database sub-row for each; select the field to summarize

Options

Opens the Create Report Options dialog box

2. Click Options to specify additional report criteria.

The Create Report Options dialog box opens.

Creating Worksheets |

649

Parameter

Description

New worksheet

Select to create a new worksheet

Append to existing worksheet

Select to append the information to a worksheet, and then select the target
worksheet

Search in symbols

Select to search inside symbol instances for embedded objects or symbols and
include this information in the worksheet

Search in plug-in objects

Select to search inside plug-in object instances for embedded objects or symbols
and include this information in the worksheet

3. Click OK to return to the Create Report dialog box.

4. Click OK to create the worksheet.
The worksheet opens automatically. The top row of the worksheet contains a title for each column selected. Next
is a database header row (indicated by a diamond next to the row number) that contains sub-row totals for each
column. Beneath the header row are sub-rows for each object or symbol in the drawing that matches the report
criteria.

5. To add more data to the worksheet, repeat steps 1 through 4 and select the Append to existing worksheet
option.
6. Once all the data is added, edit the worksheet as needed. For example, add rows or columns, change the text
format, or add color. To hide the database header rows, toggle the Database Headers setting on the Worksheet
menu. For more information about editing the worksheet, see Using Worksheets on page 651.

650

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Creating a Blank Worksheet

Instead of using the Create Report command, you can create a blank worksheet and add data to it manually. This gives
you more control over the contents and format of the worksheet.
To create a blank worksheet:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
2. From the Resources menu, select New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
3. Select Worksheet.
The Create Worksheet dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Name

Enter a worksheet name. To rename the worksheet later on, select the worksheet in the
Resource Browser, and click Rename from the Resources menu.

Rows / Columns

Enter the number of rows and columns for the worksheet; the number of rows and columns
can be modified later

4. Click OK.
A new worksheet window opens.

5. At this point, all rows contain spreadsheet cells, and they are all undefined. Define the contents of each row and
cell as needed:
To add simple text, numbers, or formulas to the worksheet, see Entering Data in Spreadsheet Cells on
page 665.

Using Worksheets |

651

To list data that is associated with objects in the drawing, change a spreadsheet row into a database row, and
specify which objects to include in the list. A sub-row displays for each object that matches the criteria
defined in the database header row. Then specify which information to display in the columns for each row;
these can be fields from the objects data record, as well as text, numbers, or formulas. See Entering Data in
Database Rows on page 670.

Using Worksheets
Worksheets can obtain data from the drawing based on specified criteria, and then list the data and allow calculations
to be performed on the data.
Worksheet name

Current zoom level

Current cell address

Formula bar
Worksheet menu
Spreadsheet row
Database header row
Database sub-rows

Increase the
column width to
view this number

Worksheets can have two types of rows: spreadsheet and database. The cells in a spreadsheet row contain constants
(text or numbers) or formulas. Database rows consist of a header row and sub-rows, and they show data that is
associated with specific drawing objects. The database header row is marked with a diamond shape next to the row
number. Set selection criteria for this row, and a sub-row is created for each object that meets the criteria. In this
example, the database header row 3 is set to list each object in the drawing that has an appliance record attached to
it. The sub-rows 3.1 through 3.5 represent the five appliance objects in the drawing.
Rows are numbered sequentially starting with 1, and columns are labeled alphabetically starting with A. Database
sub-rows are numbered with the database header rows number, followed by a decimal and sequential numbers
(header row 3 has sub-rows 3.1, 3.2, 3.3, and so on). The cells row number and column letter indicate the spreadsheet
cell address (database sub-rows display a blank address).
When worksheets exist in an open file, the Window > Worksheets command becomes available. All the worksheets
present in the indicated file are listed. Worksheets with a check mark are currently open. To open a worksheet, select it
from this menu, or select the worksheet from the Resource Browser and then select Open from the Resources menu.

652

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Selecting a worksheet from the Window menu

Selecting a worksheet from the Resources menu

A worksheet opens in a separate window, which can be resized, moved, and closed. Worksheets contain a separate
menu and context menus (see Worksheet Commands on page 656).
Because an open worksheet is in a separate window, it is not printed with the drawing. To include a worksheet as part
of a drawing, select the worksheet in the Resource Browser and click Worksheet on Drawing from the Resources
menu. When the worksheet is open, the worksheet on the drawing displays as an X. When the worksheet is closed,
the updated worksheet displays on the drawing. Double-click the worksheet from the drawing to open it. See
Worksheets as Graphic Objects on page 683.
Use the Format Cells command to format individual rows, columns, and even cells of the worksheet as needed (see
Formatting Worksheet Cells on page 660). The format is retained when the worksheet is included on the drawing.
Alternatively, use the Attributes palette to modify the fill, pen, and line thickness attributes for the entire worksheet
object.

Moving Around in Worksheets

The following table describes the keys used to move around in the worksheet.

Keys

Description

Arrow (Up, Down, Right, Left)

Moves by one cell in the direction indicated

Tab

Moves right by one cell

Enter

Moves down by one cell

Using Worksheets |
Keys

Description

Shift+Tab

Moves left by one cell

Shift+Enter

Moves up by one cell

653

If more than one cell is selected, movement is restricted to the selected cells only.

Selecting and Editing Worksheet Cells

The contents of cells can be edited, and the rows and columns can be resized, moved, cut, copied, and pasted.

Selecting Cells
When a single cell is selected, the cell border is highlighted. When multiple cells are selected, the border of the entire
selection is highlighted, and the selected cells have a blue fill.

Selection

Action

A single cell

Click on the cell

A range of cells

Click-drag across a range of cells to select them, or click in one corner and
Shift-click in the opposite corner

An entire column or row

Click the column letter or row number; click-drag across the column letters
or row numbers to select multiple rows or columns

Non-contiguous cells, rows, or

columns

Press and hold the Ctrl (Windows) or Command (Macintosh) key and then
click on each cell, row, or column to select

The entire worksheet

Click the empty box directly above the row number boxes

654

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Editing Cell Contents

When a cell is selected, the display of the Formula bar indicates whether the contents of the cell can be edited.

Formula Bar Display

The cell address displays, and the red

X and green check mark are active

No cell address displays; the current

cell value is not editable

No cell address displays; the current

cell value is editable
(Design Series required)

Explanation
The cell is in a spreadsheet row or database header row. Type directly in
the Formula bar to enter text, numbers, or a formula. To accept the edits
and change the cell contents, click the green check mark. To cancel the
edits, click the red X.
In database sub-rows, the results of calculations cannot be edited. In
addition, object attribute information, such as the class the object belongs
to, cannot be edited in the worksheet.

In database sub-rows, if Vectorworks Design Series is installed,

information that comes from the objects data record can be edited in the
Formula bar, and the objects record is updated automatically. For example,
the price data for a sub-row object could be updated.
To accept the edits and change both the worksheet and record, press Enter
(Windows) or Return (Macintosh).
In database sub-rows, if Vectorworks Design Series is installed, some fields
that come from the objects data record can be edited, but they only allow
certain pre-defined values. For example, the sill style for a window
sub-row object could be changed in the Formula bar.
Select the new value from the list to change both the worksheet and record.

No cell address displays; a list of the

values that are available for the
current cell displays
(Design Series required)

Neither a cell address nor a cell value

displays

In database sub-rows, if Vectorworks Architect or Landmark is not

installed, information that comes from the objects data record cannot be
edited in the worksheet. To edit a value that displays in a sub-row, select
the item that is associated with that row in the drawing; then use the Data
tab of the Object Info palette to edit the object data as needed.

Resizing Rows and Columns

To adjust column width or row height, drag the divider bar between the column letters or row numbers. If you select
multiple rows or columns before you drag the bar, all rows or columns are adjusted to the same size. Alternatively,
select the Column Width command from the Worksheet menu (see Column Width on page 657). Adjust the row
height with the Row Height command from the Worksheet menu (see Row Height on page 657).
Text that is longer than the width of a cell floats over empty adjacent cells. Numbers that exceed the cell width
are displayed with # characters. Alternatively, text can be set to wrap (see Formatting Worksheet Cells on
page 660).

Using Worksheets |

655

Cutting, Copying, and Pasting Cell Contents

The standard shortcut keys for Cut and Paste can be used for worksheet editing. The same value or formula can be
copied to a range of cells.
To copy cell contents to a cell or range of cells:
1. Select the cell with the information to repeat, and then press Ctrl+C (Windows) or Command+C (Macintosh) to
copy the cell.
2. Select the destination cell(s) for the information, and then press Ctrl+V (Windows) or Command+V (Macintosh)
to paste. The formula or value is repeated in each of the selected cells.

Adding Rows and Columns

Use the Insert command on the worksheet menu to insert rows and columns (see Worksheet Commands on
page 656). An empty row is added above the current row, or an empty column is added to the left of the current
column. Another option is to hover the cursor at the bottom right corner of the worksheet to activate a special resize
cursor; drag as needed to add rows and columns to the bottom and right side of the worksheet.

Hover the cursor over the bottom right corner of the worksheet
to obtain the resize cursor; drag to add columns and/or rows

Moving Rows and Columns

Use the drag and drop method to move contiguous rows and columns or to move a copy of contiguous rows and
columns.
To move a copy of rows or columns:
1. Click the column letter or row number to select a column or row (click-drag across the letters or numbers to
select multiple columns or rows).

656

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

2. Press and hold Ctrl (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) and move the cursor to the edge of the selected rows or
columns. When the cursor changes shape to indicate that moving a copy is permitted, drag the selection to the
desired location in the worksheet.
To move rows or columns:
1. Click the column letter or row number to select a column or row (click-drag across the letters or numbers to
select multiple columns or rows).
2. Move the cursor to the edge of the selected rows or columns. When the cursor changes shape to indicate that
moving the rows or columns is permitted, drag the selection to the desired location in the worksheet.

Worksheet Commands
Various command menus are available in the worksheet window, as well as sorting functions. To open the main
worksheet menu, click the disclosure arrow just below the Formula bar. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click
(Macintosh) a specific worksheet row or cell to open a context menu. To sort the sub-rows associated with a database
header row, apply sort functions to the columns as needed.
Current cell

Cancel

Accept entry

Descending
sort icon

Current zoom level

Formula bar

Summarize
icon

Ascending
sort icon

Worksheet menu

Worksheet row context menu

Worksheet cell context menu

Worksheet Menu
The main worksheet menu commands are defined in the following table.

Worksheet Command
Recalculate

Description
Recalculates all formulas in all worksheets, whether open or closed. This function can
also be accessed from the context menu of the worksheet image (on the drawing):
right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the worksheet, and select
Recalculate.

Using Worksheets |
Worksheet Command

657

Description

Paste Criteria

Displays the Criteria dialog box; select search criteria to insert in a formula

Paste Function

Displays the Select Function dialog box; select a function to be inserted in the formula
(see Entering Formulas in Worksheet Cells on page 666)

Database Headers

Toggles between displaying and hiding all worksheet database header rows

Format Cells

Opens the Format Cells dialog box, for setting the format and appearance of selected
cells (see Formatting Worksheet Cells on page 660)

Column Width

Displays the Column Width dialog box. Set the width value of selected cells in the
specified units. Click Standard Width to use the default width. The width of multiple
selected columns can be adjusted at one time.

Row Height

Opens the Row Height dialog box; set the row height to automatically fit the selected
cell contents, or set a specific row height in the specified units. The height of multiple
selected rows can be adjusted at one time.

Preferences

Displays the Worksheet Preferences dialog box. Header and Footer text fields and the
Margin settings apply to printed worksheets only. Select Show Grid to display the
worksheet gridlines. Select Show Tabs to print worksheet column and row headers.
Select Auto-recalc to recalculate all worksheet arithmetic functions when cells are
edited. Click Font to specify the worksheet default font and size.

Zoom

Increases or decreases the zoom percentage by preset levels from 50% to 300%; the
current zoom level displays in the worksheet title bar. Select a zoom level from the
worksheet menu, or roll the mouse wheel while holding Ctrl (Windows) or Option
(Macintosh) to increase or decrease the zoom level by increments of 10% (regardless of
the number of lines you assigned the mouse to scroll in the mouse setup).
This feature will not work properly if standard scrolling is disabled in the mouse
setup. For example, if the mouses scrolling size is set to none, mouse zooming in
Vectorworks is disabled. (The specific settings required for this feature depend on
the type of mouse being used.)

Clear Contents

Deletes the contents of the selected cells

Insert

Adds rows or columns to the worksheet. The number inserted depends on how many
rows or columns in the worksheet are highlighted at the time the command is selected.
Select Insert > Rows to add rows above the selected rows. Select Insert > Columns to
add columns to the left of the selected columns.
Use caution when inserting rows or columns. Depending on the type of cell references
used in formulas, inserting rows or columns could change the values returned by a
formula.

Delete

Deletes rows or columns from the worksheet. Select one or more rows or columns and
select Delete > Rows or Delete > Columns.
Use caution when deleting a row or column. Deleting cells that are part of a formula
may change the values returned by the formula. Select Edit > Undo to undo the action.

Printer Setup

Displays the Printer Setup dialog box. This is the same as the standard Printer Setup
dialog box; however, it only affects the printer information for the worksheet.

658

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Worksheet Command
Print

Description
Displays the Print dialog box, to print the current worksheet; this is the only way to
print a worksheet from Vectorworks unless the worksheet is included as a part of the
drawing

Worksheet Cell Context Menu

To access the commands available for a specific worksheet cell, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the cell.

Menu Item

Description

Cut

Removes the contents of selected cells, temporarily storing the contents in the clipboard

Copy

Copies the contents of selected cells to the clipboard, where they are temporarily stored;
the original contents remain in the worksheet

Paste

Places cell contents stored in the clipboard into the current cell or range of cells

Format Cells

Opens the Format Cells dialog box, for setting the format and appearance of selected
cells (see Formatting Worksheet Cells on page 660)

Insert

Adds rows or columns to the worksheet. The number inserted depends on how many
rows or columns in the worksheet are highlighted at the time the command is selected.
Select Insert > Rows to add rows above the selected rows. Select Insert > Columns to
add columns to the left of the selected columns.
Use caution when inserting rows or columns. Depending on the type of cell references
used in formulas, inserting rows or columns could change the values returned by a
formula.

Delete

Deletes rows or columns from the worksheet. Select one or more rows or columns and
select Delete > Rows or Delete > Columns.
Use caution when deleting a row or column. Deleting cells that are part of a formula
may change the values returned by the formula. Select Edit > Undo to undo the action.

Clear Contents

Deletes the contents of the selected cells

Pick Value from List

(Design Series required)

If the cell is in a database sub-row, and the column lists a field that only allows certain
pre-defined values, use this option to edit the objects data.
For example, you might want to change the sill style for several window objects from the
window schedule. Select the Sill cells for the objects to be changed, and right-click
(Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh). Select a different sill type from the list of options to
change both the worksheet and the objects data records.

Worksheet Row Context Menu

To access the commands available for a specific worksheet spreadsheet or database header row, click and hold down
the mouse button while on the row number. These commands do not apply to database sub-rows.

Using Worksheets |

659

Menu Item

Description

Spreadsheet

Converts a database header row into a row of spreadsheet cells. This deletes all
sub-rows and the information contained within them. Any formulas that were defined
in the columns of the header row remain intact. This command has no effect on
spreadsheet cells.

Database

Converts a row of spreadsheet cells into a database header row and opens the Criteria
dialog box. This command has no effect on database rows.

Set Criteria

Opens the Criteria dialog box for setting the criteria that is used to generate the database
sub-rows. Available only when a database header row is clicked.

Edit Criteria

Opens the Criteria dialog box for editing the criteria that is used to generate the
database sub-rows. Available only when a database header row is clicked.

Select Data Items

Selects all objects on the drawing that meet the criteria for the database row. Available
only when a database header row is clicked.

Database Sub-Row Context Menu

While on a database sub-row, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) and select the Select Item command
from the context menu. Use this command to select an individual database object in the drawing; the view changes to
display the selected object (see Importing Worksheets on page 681).

Database Row Sort and Summary Functions

The group of sub-rows associated with a header row can be sorted and summarized in different ways. These functions
can be set independently for each database header row in a worksheet.
To sort or summarize a group of database sub-rows:
1. If the database header rows are not displayed, select Database Headers from the main worksheet menu.
2. Select the header row of the group of sub-rows to sort or summarize; the header row has a diamond next to its
number.
The three icons above the column header cells become available.

Icon Item

Description

Descending Sort

Sorts the database sub-rows in descending order, according to the contents of this column

Ascending Sort

Sorts the database sub-rows in ascending order, according to the contents of this column

Summarize

Summarizes the database sub-rows according to the contents of this column. Sub-rows that
have identical items in this column are grouped together in a single row.
If a column contains data from a numeric field (such as height or width), the summarized
column contains a sum of the values for all objects that are grouped on the row.

660

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

3. Click and drag an icon to the column header cell to be used for the sort or summary. A new icon displays next to
the column heading letter. For an ascending or descending sort, a number in the icon indicates the sort
precedence for that column.
4. Apply additional sort or summary icons as needed. In each group of sub-rows, up to three columns can have
either an Ascending or Descending Sort icon, and up to three columns can have a Summarize icon. The
Summarize icon can be used on a column by itself, or in conjunction with one of the sort icons.
5. To remove a sort or summary, click and drag the icon away from the column header cell.

Formatting Worksheet Cells

The appearance of worksheet cells can be set by a variety of formatting options.
Formatting applied to a database header row applies to all of the associated database sub-rows.
To format worksheet cells:
1. Select the cell(s) to format.
2. From the Worksheet menu, select Format Cells.
The Format Cells dialog box opens.
The Number tab sets the number format for the selected cells (see Creating Record Formats on page 205).

Parameter

Description

General

Specifies the default general format

Decimal

Uses decimal numbers; enter a value for the number of decimal places, and if desired, select to
use commas as separators

Scientific

Uses scientific numbers; enter a value for the number of decimal places

Using Worksheets |

661

Parameter

Description

Fractional

Uses fractional numbers; enter the rounding value for fractions

Dimension

Uses dimension numbers

Dimension Area

Uses the dimension area format (precision and units) as specified for this document; also
displays the area units after the number

Dimension
Volume

Uses the dimension volume format (precision and units) as specified for this document; also
displays the volume units after the number

Angle

Determines the accuracy of angles and the measurement system used; the measurement system
can be degrees/minutes/seconds, or decimal numbers up to eight decimal places

Date

Uses date formats; select the desired format from the list

Boolean

Select to use a data value of either True or False

Text

Select to enter a string of characters; the cell contents are treated as text, even if a number is in the
string

Leader

Displays the specified leader text before the cell value (except for Boolean and Text formats)

Trailer

Displays the specified trailer text after the cell value (except for Boolean and Text formats)

3. Click the Alignment tab to specify text alignment options.

Parameter

Description

Alignment

Sets the alignment of text in relation to the cell border

Horizontal

Specifies horizontal text alignment; select General to align text strings on the left and
numbers on the right

662

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Parameter
Vertical
Text Orientation

Description
Specifies vertical text alignment
Sets the text orientation

Vertical Text

Orients text vertically

Horizontal Text

Orients text horizontally

Wrap Text

Select to wrap text that exceeds the cell width (automatically adjusting row height); deselect
to allow text that is longer than the cell width to float over empty adjacent cells. If adjacent
cells contain content, unwrapped text may appear truncated. Numbers that exceed the cell
width are displayed with # characters.
A cell holds a maximum of 255 characters; if more space is required, put the overflow
text in additional cells below the first cell, to give the content a wrapped appearance.

Merge Cells

Merges a range of selected spreadsheet cells into one cell; cell and border formatting and text
wrapping are applied to the cell group rather than to the individual cells. The cell contents
and format of only the upper left cell in the group apply to the merged cells. Data and
formatting in the other cells will be lost during the merge.
To split merged cells, select the merged cell group and then deselect Merge Cells.

4. Click the Font tab to specify the font, font size, style, and color of text in selected cells. See Formatting Text on
page 227.

5. Click the Border tab to set cell border formatting options.

Select the Line Attributes, and then use the Presets or Preview buttons to add or remove border elements.

Using Worksheets |

Parameter

663

Description

Line Attributes
Style

Sets the line style and thickness for the border element

Color

Sets the line color for the border element

Presets
None

Removes all border formatting

Outline

Adds or removes a border only on the outside edges (top, bottom, left, and right) of the cell
selection

Inside

Adds or removes a border only on the inside (horizontal and vertical) edges of the cell selection

Preview
Top

Adds or removes a border at the top of the cell selection

Horizontal

When more than one cell is selected, adds or removes a horizontal border between cells

Bottom

Adds or removes a border at the bottom of the cell selection

Left

Adds or removes a border on the left edge of the cell selection

Vertical

When more than one cell is selected, adds or removes a vertical border between cells

Right

Adds or removes a border on the right edge of the cell selection

6. Click the Patterns tab to specify fill options for the selected cell(s).

664

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Parameter

Description

Style

Select None to remove current cell fill options or to specify no fill; select Solid or Pattern to
apply a solid fill color or pattern to the selected cell(s)

Color/Pattern

If Style is set to Solid, select the fill Color; if Style is set to Pattern, select the Pattern and the
foreground and background colors

7. Click OK to set the formatting for the selected cell(s). The worksheet formatting also applies to worksheets
placed on a drawing.

Formatted worksheet in
the worksheet window

Formatted worksheet
placed on the drawing

Entering Data in Spreadsheet Cells |

665

Entering Data in Spreadsheet Cells

Two types of information can be entered into the spreadsheet cells of a worksheet: constant values (including text or
numbers) and formulas. In addition, a cell can reference another cell in the same worksheet or in another worksheet.
Text helps to identify the purpose of a worksheet and labels the columns in a worksheet. Use formulas to perform
calculations based on drawing data. A formula can be a simple mathematical equation, or it can include one or more
built-in functions. Vectorworks provides mathematical functions (for example, a square root function), as well as
functions that pull information from drawing objects (for example, a function that returns the volume of selected
objects). See Worksheet Functions on page 674 for a list of the functions available.
Database record fields that are attached to objects in the drawing (such as Model Number or Price) cannot be
used in a spreadsheet cell. To include this type of data in the worksheet, see Entering Data in Database Rows
on page 670.
To define a spreadsheet row:
1. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the number of the row to change.
2. From the worksheet row menu, select Spreadsheet.

3. The cells in the row are empty until you define the contents. Select a cell, and then enter the desired information
in the worksheet Formula bar located at the top of the worksheet.
To enter text or numbers, see Entering Constant Values in Worksheet Cells on page 665.
To enter a formula, see Entering Formulas in Worksheet Cells on page 666.
To reference other cells in this cell, see Referencing Other Worksheet Cells on page 669.

Entering Constant Values in Worksheet Cells

Constant values consist of numbers, spaces, non-numeric characters, or any combination of these. Constant values are
not part of a formula or the result of a formula.
The formula phrase =1, or any number following an equal sign, is also considered a constant value.
Select the cell, and then enter the text or numbers needed; your entries automatically display in the worksheet Formula
bar. When you click the green check mark on the Formula bar, the value displays in the cell.
Keep in mind the following:
Most constant values are treated as text and default to the General format. However, some combinations of
numeric and non-numeric characters are interpreted as a particular number format. For example, an entry of 07/
19/2010 automatically changes the format to the month/day/year date format. (See Formatting Worksheet Cells
on page 660.)

666

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Text is left-aligned unless the cell is formatted differently on the Alignment tab in the Format Cells dialog box
(select Format Cells from the Worksheet menu).
Numbers entered in cells default to the General format. To change them to another format (for example,
dimension or fractional), select Format Cells from the Worksheet menu, and select the new format on the
Number tab in the Format Cells dialog box.

Entering Formulas in Worksheet Cells

Use formulas to analyze and perform operations on drawing data. Formulas always begin with an equal sign (=) and
consist of a combination of functions, cell references, or operators that combine values to produce a new value.
Formulas must be entered with a specific syntax. If the formula is not entered correctly, the formula entry itself
displays in the cell, instead of the result of the formula. Two common mistakes in syntax include forgetting to use pairs
of parentheses, and omitting required commas when no argument is present. Formula syntax is described in the
following table.

General
Syntax

Symbol

Explanation

Example

Equal sign =

Begins each formula; also

indicates a value for a variable

=CriteriaVolume(t=wall)

Parentheses ( )

Encloses a function argument;

also used in arithmetic equations

=acos(0.6)

Square brackets [ ]

Encloses a record destination

=R IN ['myformat']

Period .

Separates a record identifier and

a field identifier

=Furniture.Type

Colon :

Separates path name levels in cell

references

=MyWorksheet:A1

Comma or semicolon

Separates multiple values in a

function argument; use a
semicolon when commas are
used as decimal separators by the
operating system

=sum(A2,E3)

Single quote '

Encloses a string constant

=Appliances.'Model #'

Dollar sign $

Designates an absolute reference

=A4*$B$1

Double period ..

Designates a range of cells

=sum(A10..A12)

Plus sign +

Addition

=A6+A8

Hyphen -

Subtraction

=A6-A8

Asterisk *

Multiplication

=A6*.06

Forward slash /

Division

=B3/12

Caret or double asterisk

Exponentiation

=13^2

, or ;

Arithmetic
Operators

=A6+(A6*.07)

^ or **

=sum(A2;E3)

Entering Data in Spreadsheet Cells |

Comparison
Operators

Symbol

Explanation

Example

Equal sign =

Equal

=if((L='L2'),Area,0)

Less than and greater than

signs (or Option+ = on
Macintosh)

Not equal

=if((S<>'Dryer'),B9,0)

Less than sign <

Less than

=if((C7<100),100,C7)

Less than and equal signs

(or Option+ < on
Macintosh)

Less than or equal to

=if((E2<=G2),0.05,G2)

Greater than sign >

Greater than

=if((C7>100),100,C7)

Greater than and equal

signs (or Option+ > on
Macintosh)

Greater than or equal to

=if((E2>=G2),0.05,G2)

667

(used with
IF function)

<> or

<= or

>= or
To force Vectorworks to treat a number as text, enclose the number in single quotation marks, as in '40'; or format
the cell as Text on the Number tab of the Format Cells dialog box.
Formulas follow standard algebraic rules of hierarchy. In the following example, the value in cell C28 is first
multiplied by 12, and then 4.5 is subtracted from that value. The result is then divided by 12.
=((C28*12)-4.5)/12
Vectorworks has several built-in functions that can be used in formulas, including mathematical functions and
functions that pull information from objects in the drawing. To use one or more worksheet functions in a formula,
either enter the function manually, or use the Paste Function and Paste Criteria commands to select a function and
selection criteria (if required) from dialog boxes. See Worksheet Functions on page 674 for more information about
how to use functions.
If there is a logic problem with a formula, an error code displays in the cell.

Error Code

Explanation

#NAME?

The field name in a database header row definition does not exist in the file; see Retrieving
Record Information in a Worksheet on page 674

#VALUE!

The argument is the wrong type of data for the formula; for example, a cell referenced in a
mathematical formula contains text

#CVAL?

A cyclical reference cannot be resolved

?Result?

The result value type is unrecognized

#OPCODE?

Internal error

668

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Error Code

Explanation

#DIV 0!

Division by zero error encountered

#FAC?

Unrecognized entry

#OBJ!

The worksheet name in an external reference does not exist, or the record name does not exist

#CSTATUS?

Functions are nested too deeply (more than ten levels deep)

To manually enter a formula:

1. Select the cell.
2. Enter an equal sign (=), and then enter the formula. The entries automatically display in the worksheet Formula
bar. A formula can consist of functions, operators, cell references, and constant values.
3. When the formula is complete, click the green check mark to validate the entry. To cancel an entry, click the red X.
4. The formula executes as soon as the cell entry has been validated (Auto-recalc must be selected in the worksheet
preferences; see Preferences on page 657).
To enter a formula with the Paste Function and Paste Criteria commands:
1. Select the cell.
2. Enter an equal sign (=). The entry automatically displays in the worksheet Formula bar.
3. Select Paste Function from the Worksheet menu.
The Select Function dialog box opens.

4. Select a function from the list and click OK.

The formula is placed in the worksheet Formula bar and the cursor is placed between the parentheses, awaiting
an argument.
5. Do one of the following:

Entering Data in Spreadsheet Cells |

669

If the function requires numbers or text, enter the argument between the parentheses and proceed to step 8.
If the function requires selection criteria, select Paste Criteria from the Worksheet menu.
6. If an object is selected when the Paste Criteria command is selected, the Paste Attributes dialog box opens.
Otherwise, proceed to step 7.

Do one of the following:

To use attributes of the selected object as the only selection criteria, select the attributes and click OK. Proceed
to step 8.
To specify other criteria, or to use attributes of other objects in the drawing, click the Custom button.
7. The Criteria dialog box opens. Set each of the three fields to the desired selection criteria. Click More Choices to
specify additional criteria. Click Fewer Choices to remove added criteria. Click OK to add the criteria to the
function argument.

Click a button to browse

for criteria options

8. When the formula is complete, click the green check mark to validate the entry. To cancel the entry, click the red
X.
9. The formula executes as soon as the cell entry has been validated (Auto-recalc must be selected in the worksheet
preferences; see Preferences on page 657).

Referencing Other Worksheet Cells

A formula can reference the contents of one or more other cells. The cells can be referenced within the current
worksheet (internal references), or from another worksheet (external references) within the same drawing.
External references must include the full path name to the other worksheet. The following table shows the syntax for
entering an external reference into a formula.

670

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Syntax

Example

worksheet name:cell address

=MyWorksheet:A1

worksheet name:range of addresses

=SUM(MyWorksheet:A1..A12)

If the name of the worksheet contains spaces, the name must be enclosed with single quotes as in the following
example: ='Appliance Schedule':A1
To update an external reference, select Recalculate from the Worksheet menu.

Relative and Absolute Cell References

Cell references in a worksheet can be either relative and absolute. When the formula that contains the reference is
moved, an absolute reference always refers to the original cell address, while a relative reference changes depending
on the location of the cell that contains the reference.
Use the dollar sign ($) character to indicate an absolute reference. The $ character locks the part of the cell reference it
precedes, as described in the following table.

Combination

Description

$A1

Locks the specified column reference but leaves the row reference relative; the same column is
always referred to, but the row changes if the formula is placed in a different row

$A$1

Locks both the specified column and row references; regardless of where the formula is copied, it
always refers to the original cell

A$1

Locks the specified row reference but leaves the column reference relative; the same row is
always referred to, but the column changes if the formula is placed in a different column

In the following example worksheet, the formula =AVERAGE(B1..B3) is in cell B4. If the formula were copied to cell E9,
the formula would automatically be changed to =AVERAGE(E6..E8). Because the references are relative, both the
column and row would change relative to the cell where the formula is placedalways indicating the three cells
directly above the formula.

Entering Data in Database Rows

Database rows display data fields associated with the objects in a drawing. The database header row is identified by a
diamond shape next to the row number. When you create the database row, set the criteria to determine which objects

Entering Data in Database Rows |

671

will be listed in the related sub-rows. For example, you might set a header row to list all symbols in the drawing. A
sub-row would then be generated for each symbol in the drawing. (If no object meets the header row criteria, no
sub-rows are created.)
Many criteria combinations can be specified, such as class, object type, record information, or line weight. For
example, create a list of all the rooms in a resort, or list only the green wing-backed chairs from all the two-room suites
that are scattered throughout the resort.
In each column in the database header row, specify which information about the objects to display. A column can list a
specific attribute of each sub-row object, such as its class or layer. A column can also list a data field contained in a
record attached to each object. Or, a column can contain a constant or a formula, just as a spreadsheet cell can.
In the following example, database header row 2 has its criteria set to list all the objects in the drawing that have the
appliance record attached to them. Columns A through D list the contents of the data fields in the appliance record:
the appliance type, manufacturer, model number, and price. Column E contains a formula, which uses the value in
column D to calculate the price of the appliance with sales tax. Column F lists which layer of the drawing contains the
object.

Spreadsheet cells
Database header row
Database sub-rows

To create a database row:

1. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the number of the row to change.

2. From the worksheet row menu, select Database.

The Criteria dialog box opens.

672

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

3. Specify the selection criteria for which objects to display in the sub-rows. The number of objects that meet the
criteria displays. To specify additional criteria, click More Choices.
4. Click OK to enable database functionality for the row. Beneath the header row, sub-rows are created for each
drawing object that meets the criteria specified. The columns are empty until you define which data from the
objects to display.

5. Specify the information to be shown in each column of the row:

To list attributes of each object (such as layer or class), see Retrieving Object Attributes in a Worksheet on
page 673.
To list record data associated with each object (such as color or price), see Retrieving Record Information in
a Worksheet on page 674.
To show the results of a formula for each object, see Entering Formulas in Worksheet Cells on page 666.
6. Each sub-row cell displays the information requested. Each cell in the header row displays the total number of
objects found, or, if the column returns numerical data, the header cell displays the sum for all sub-rows.
Information found in each column can be sorted using the ascending, descending, and summarize buttons; see
Database Row Sort and Summary Functions on page 659.

Undefining a Database Row

To undefine a database row:
1. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the number of the database header row to change.
2. Select Spreadsheet.
Undefining a database row removes the database row criteria and all sub-rows. Any formulas that were defined
in the columns of the header row remain intact.

Entering Data in Database Rows |

673

Selecting Database Objects

You can use the database rows in a worksheet to select the object(s) in the drawing that are related to that row.
To select database objects:
1. Either all database objects or a single database object can be selected.
To select all database objects that meet the database row criteria, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click
(Macintosh) the row number of the database header row to open the context menu.
To select an individual database object, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the row number of the
row that contains the object to open the context menu.
2. From the context menu, select either Select Data Items or Select Item.
All database objects that are represented by the header row, or the individual row object, are selected. If an
individual object was selected with Select Item, the drawing view changes to display the selected object.

Retrieving Object Attributes in a Worksheet

A drawing object can have several attributes, such as the layer it is on, the type of object it is, the symbol name (if it is a
symbol), and whether it is currently selected. You can display this information in the database rows of a worksheet.
To retrieve object information in the database rows:
1. Click the cell in the database header row where the formula will be entered.
2. Enter an equal sign (=), and then enter the criteria to display. For example, enter =C to display the name of the
class to which each object belongs. The entries display in the worksheet Formula bar.

Code

Criteria Name

Code

Criteria Name

ALL

Every object

Object name

AR

Arrowhead

PB

Pen background

ASZ

Marker size

PF

Pen Foreground

Class name

PON

Plug-in object name

FB

Fill background

PP

Pen pattern/Line style

FF

Fill foreground

Object record

FOT

Font

Symbol name

FP

Fill pattern

SEL

Selected status

FSZ

Font size

SST

Sketch style

GFI

Gradient fill

ST

Object sub-type

HFI

Hatch fill

Object type

IFI

Image fill

TX

Texture

Layer name

Visibility

LW

Line weight

WST

Wall style

3. Click the green check mark to validate the entry.

674

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Retrieving Record Information in a Worksheet

Database records are created in the Record Formats dialog box. These records are then assigned to objects through the
Data tab of the Object Info palette. See Viewing and Editing Object Records on page 210 for more information. This
information can be displayed in the database rows of a worksheet.
To retrieve record information in a database row:
1. Click the cell in the database header row where the formula will be entered.
2. Enter an equal sign (=), and then enter the record information to display. The entries display in the worksheet
Formula bar. The syntax for retrieving record information is:

Syntax

Example

=record name.field name

=Furniture.Type

A period (.) must separate the two names or the formula will not be executed.
If the name of the record format or field name contains spaces, the name must be enclosed with single quotes as
in the following example: =Appliance Record.Model Number
3. Click the green check mark to validate the entry.
The database information attached to each object displays in the sub-rows.

Worksheet Functions
Worksheet functions take an argument, perform an action, and return a value or values. There are two basic types of
functions: those that use the value(s) you enter, and those that use information from objects in the drawing. The
arguments required by the two function types are different.
Number or text arguments: Functions that begin with a lower case letter typically require a number value or a
cell address as the argument. For example, the acos function returns the arccosine of the value that is specified in
the function argument. The argument you enter can be a mathematical expression (such as 3/5), an address of a
cell that contains a number (such as A12), or an actual number. The argument for all trigonometry functions must
be in radians.
Criteria arguments: Functions that begin with a capital letter must be applied to one or more specific objects in
the drawing. In a cell in a database header row, a function is automatically applied to the object listed in each
sub-row, so no criteria argument is required.
However, in a spreadsheet cell, you must enter criteria to select the objects the function applies to. For example,
the Width function returns the width of an object. To specify which object to obtain the width of, either use the
Paste Criteria command on the Worksheet menu, or enter the criteria manually. See Search Criteria on
page 127 in the VectorScript Language Guide for details about how to specify criteria such as the object type,
class, or visibility.
The following table lists all of the worksheet functions available in Vectorworks, as well as what kind of argument the
function takes.

Worksheet Functions |

675

Function (argument)

Description

Example

Related Functions

acos(number)

The arccosine of a number. The

arccosine is the angle whose
cosine is number. The returned
angle is given in radians in the
range 0 to pi.

=acos(3/5)

cos

(returns the angle for which the

cosine value is 3/5)

Number is the cosine of the

angle, and must be from -1 to 1.
Angle(criteria)

The sum of all angles that meet

the specified criteria, in
degrees.
Use this function to return the
angles of lines and walls
(measured from horizontal),
the span angles of arcs, and the
slope angles of slabs.

Area(criteria)

The total area of 2D objects that

meet the specified criteria,
based on the Length units in
the Units dialog box.

=Angle(t=arc)
(returns the combined sweep
angles of all arc objects in the
drawing)

=Area(t=rect)
(returns the combined area of all
rectangle objects in the drawing)

CriteriaArea,
Perim

Use the CriteriaArea

function to obtain the area
based on the Area units in
the Units dialog box.
asin(number)

The arcsine of a number. The

arcsine is the angle whose sine
is number. The returned angle
is given in radians in the range
-pi/2 to pi/2. To express the
arcsine in degrees, use the
rad2deg function (or multiply
the result by 180/pi).

=asin(A3)

sin

(returns the angle for which the

sine value is given in cell A3)

Number is the sine of the angle

and must be from -1 to 1.
atan(number)

The arctangent of a number.

The arctangent is the angle
whose tangent is number. The
returned angle is given in
radians in the range -pi/2 to pi/
2. To express the arctangent in
degrees, use the rad2deg
function (or multiply the result
by 180/pi).
Number is the tangent of the
angle in question.

=atan(4/3)
(returns the angle for which the
tangent value is 4/3)

tan

676

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Function (argument)

Description

Example

Related Functions

average(number1,
number2...)

The average (mean) of the

arguments

=average(85,70,95)

max, min, sum

BotBound(criteria)

The minimum y coordinate

(bottom boundary) of the
objects that meet the specified
criteria

=BotBound(t=locus)

concat(text1, text2,
text3)

Joins several text strings into

one text string

=concat(B3,', ',B4)

cos(number)

The cosine of a given angle.

=cos(deg2rad(23))

Number is the angle in radians

for which the cosine is
calculated.

(converts a 23-degree angle to its

radian equivalent, and returns
the cosine of the angle)

The number of objects that

meet the specified criteria

=Count(S='door')

The total area of 2D objects that

meet the specified criteria,
based on the Area units in the
Units dialog box

=CriteriaArea(t=rect)

The total surface area of all

objects that meet the specified
criteria, based on the Area units
in the Units dialog box

=CriteriaSurfaceArea
(st=sphere)

The total volume of all objects

that meet the specified criteria,
based on the Area units in the
Units dialog box

=CriteriaVolume
(t=xtrd)

Converts a number from

degrees to radians.

=deg2rad(47)

Count(criteria)

CriteriaArea(criteria)

CriteriaSurfaceArea
(criteria)

CriteriaVolume(criteria)

deg2rad(number)

Number is the value in degrees

to be converted to radians.

(returns the average of the three

numbers)

(returns the y coordinate of the

locus that has the lowest y
coordinate value in the drawing)

LeftBound,
RightBound,
TopBound

(returns the contents of cells B3

and B4 as a single string,
separated by a comma and a
space)
acos

(returns the total number of

symbol objects in the drawing
that are named door)
Area, Perim

(returns the combined area of all

rectangle objects in the drawing)
SurfaceArea

(returns the total surface area of

all sphere objects in the drawing)

(returns the total volume of all

extrude objects in the drawing)

(converts the 47-degree angle

measurement to its radian
equivalent)

Volume

Worksheet Functions |

677

Function (argument)

Description

Example

Related Functions

exp(number)

e raised to the power of

number. The constant e equals
2.71828182845904, the base of
the natural logarithm.

=exp(2)

ln

(returns the numeric value of e

raised to the power of 2)

Number is the exponent

applied to the base e.
Height(criteria)

if (logical_test,
value_if_true,
value_if_false)

The combined delta y (height)

of objects that meet the
specified criteria

=height(sel=true)

Use value_if_true if logical_test

is true, value_is_false if
logical_test is false.

=if((C7>100),100,C7)

Use this function to conduct

conditional tests on values and
formulas and to branch based
on the results of that test. The
outcome of the test determines
the value returned by the If
function. The logical_test can
be any value or expression that
can be evaluated to true or
false. Up to seven If statements
can be nested as value_if_true,
value_if_false arguments.
Boolean statements within an if
statement must be in
parentheses. Text within an if
statement should be enclosed
within quotation marks.
int(number)

Removes any fractional part of

a number.
Number is the real number to
be changed to an integer.

IsFlipped(criteria)

LeftBound(criteria)

Width

(returns the combined delta y

value of the selected objects)

when commas are used as

decimal separators by the
operating system, use
semicolons instead:
=if((C7>100);100;C7)
(if the value in cell C7 is greater
than 100, the value in this cell is
100; otherwise, the value in this
cell is the same as the value in
cell C7)

=int(B9)

round

(returns the value in cell B9

without its fractional
component)

The total number of flipped

objects that meet the specified
criteria

=IsFlipped(t=rect)

The left side minimum x

coordinate (left boundary) of
the objects that meet the
specified criteria

=LeftBound(t=locus)

(returns the total number of

rectangles in the drawing that
are flipped)

(returns the x coordinate of the

leftmost locus in the drawing)

BotBound,
RightBound,
TopBound

678

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Function (argument)

Description

Example

Length(criteria)

The length of lines or walls that

meet the specified criteria

=Length(t=line)

The natural logarithm (base e).

=ln(12)

Number is the positive real

number for which the
logarithm is calculated.

(returns the natural logarithm of

12)

The base 10 logarithm.

=log(2)

Number is the positive real

number for which the
logarithm is calculated.

(returns the base 10 logarithm of

2)

The largest number in the list of

arguments.

=max(C5,C7,C9)

ln(number)

log(number)

max(number1,
number2,...)

Number is 1 14 numbers for

which the maximum value is to
be found.
min(number1,
number2,...)

The smallest number in the list

of arguments.
Number is 1 14 numbers for
which the minimum value is to
be found.

ObjectType(criteria)

The numeric object type ID of

objects that meet the specified
criteria
See Object Types on
page 137 in the
VectorScript Language
Guide for a list of object
type IDs.

Perim(criteria)

rad2deg(number)

RightBound(criteria)

(returns the total length of all

line objects in the drawing)

=min(C5,C7,C9)

ln

min

max

(returns the smallest of the

numbers that are in cells C5, C7,
and C9)
=ObjectType(sel=true)
(returns the object type value of
the selected object; for example,
the object type value for a light is
81)

=Perim(sel=true)

Converts a number from

radians to degrees.

=rad2deg(0.5235987)

The right side maximum x

coordinate (right boundary) of
the objects that meet the
specified criteria

exp

(returns the largest of the

numbers that are in cells C5, C7,
and C9)

The combined perimeter of

objects that meet the specified
criteria

Number is the value in radians

to be converted to degrees.

Related Functions

(returns the total perimeter of all

selected objects)

(converts the radian angle

measurement to its degree
equivalent)
=RightBound(sel=true)
(returns the x coordinate of the
rightmost point on the selected
objects)

BotBound,
TopBound,
LeftBound

Worksheet Functions |
Function (argument)

Description

Example

RoofArea_Heated
(criteria)

The heated area of the roof

(inside the wall line) along the
slope, combined for all objects
that meet the specified criteria

=RoofArea_Heated
(ST=ROOFFACE)

The heated area of the roof

(inside the wall line) projected
to the active layer plane,
combined for all objects that
meet the specified criteria

=RoofArea_Heatedproj
(T=ROOF)

The total area of the roof along

the slope

=RoofArea_Total
(ST=ROOFFACE)

RoofArea_HeatedProj
(criteria)

RoofArea_Total(criteria)

Related Functions

(returns the combined heated

roof area of all roof and roof face
objects in the drawing)

(returns the combined heated

roof area of all roof objects in the
drawing, as projected to the
active layer plane)

(returns the combined total roof

area of all roof and roof face
objects in the drawing)
RoofArea_TotalProj
(criteria)

round(number)

sin(number)

SlabThickness(criteria)

sqrt(number)

sum(number1,
number2,...)

The total area of the roof,

projected to the active layer
plane

=RoofArea_Totalproj
(T=ROOF)

Rounds the specified number

to the nearest whole number

=round(D11)

The sine of a given angle.

=sin(deg2rad(32))

Number is the angle in radians

for which the sine is calculated.

(converts a 32-degree angle to its

radian equivalent, and returns
the sine of the angle)

The combined thickness of slab

objects (floors and roof faces)
that meet the specified criteria

=SlabThickness(T=SLAB)

A positive square root.

=sqrt(D27)

Number is the number for

which the square root is
calculated.

(returns the square root of the

number in cell D27)

The sum of all numbers in the

list of arguments.

=sum(A2,A10..A12)

Number is 1 14 numbers for

which the sum is calculated.

(returns the combined total roof

area of all roof objects in the
drawing, as projected to the
active layer plane)
int

(returns the value in cell D11

rounded to the nearest whole
number)
asin

(returns the combined thickness

of all slab objects in the drawing)

(returns the sum of the numbers

contained in cells A2, A10, A11,
and A12)

679

Average

680

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Function (argument)

Description

Example

Related Functions

SurfaceArea(criteria)

The total surface area of all

objects that meet the criteria,
based on the Length units in
the Units dialog box

=SurfaceArea(st=sphere)

CriteriaSurface
Area

(returns the total surface area of

all sphere objects in the drawing)

Use the
CriteriaSurfaceArea
function to obtain the area
based on the Area units in
the Units dialog box.
tan(number)

TopBound(criteria)

value(text)

Volume(criteria)

The tangent of the given angle.

=tan(deg2rad(32))

Number is the angle in radians

for which the tangent is
calculated.

(converts a 32-degree angle to its

radian equivalent, and returns
the tangent of the angle)

The maximum y coordinate

(top boundary) of the objects
that meet the specified criteria

=TopBound(sel=true)

Converts a text string that

represents a number to a
number

=value('2e3')

The total volume of all objects

that meet the criteria, based on
the Length units in the Units
dialog box.

=Volume(t=xtrd)

(returns the y coordinate of the

topmost point on the selected
objects)

atan

BotBound,
LeftBound,
RightBound

(returns the numeric value of 2

times 10 raised to the power of 3)
CriteriaVolume

(returns the total volume of all

extrude objects in the drawing)

Use the CriteriaVolume

function to obtain the
volume based on the
Volume units in the Units
dialog box.
WallArea_Gross
(criteria)

The combined 2D gross surface

area of one wall face for walls
that meet the specified criteria

=WallArea_Gross(t=wall)

WallArea_Net(criteria)

The combined 2D gross surface

area of one wall face, without
door and window areas, for
walls that meet the specified
criteria

=WallArea_Net(sel=true)

WallArea_Net

(returns the combined surface

area of one wall face for all walls
in the drawing)

(returns the surface area of one

wall face for the selected wall
object, minus door and window
areas)

WallArea_Gross

Importing Worksheets |
Function (argument)

Description

Example

WallAverageHeight
(criteria)

The average height of a wall,

including wall peaks and
different starting and ending
heights

=WallAverageHeight
(sel=true)

The name of a wall style

=WallStyleName
(sel=true)

WallStyleName(criteria)

681

Related Functions

(returns the average height of the

selected wall object)

(returns the wall style of the

selected wall object)
WallThickness(criteria)

Width(criteria)

XCenter(criteria)

YCenter(criteria)

ZCenter(criteria)

The combined thickness of wall

objects that meet the specified
criteria

=WallThickness
(sel=true)

The combined delta x (width)

of objects that meet the
specified criteria

=Width(sel=true)

The x coordinate of the center

point of an object that meets the
specified criteria

=XCenter(sel=true)

The y coordinate of the center

point of an object that meets the
specified criteria

=YCenter(sel=true)

The z coordinate of the center

point of an object that meets the
specified criteria

=ZCenter(sel=true)

(returns the thickness of the

selected wall object)
Height

(returns the delta x value of the

selected object)
YCenter, ZCenter

(returns the x coordinate value of

the center of the selected object)
XCenter, ZCenter

(returns the y coordinate value

of the center of the selected
object)
XCenter, YCenter

(returns the z coordinate value of

the center of the selected object)

Importing Worksheets
Data from a wide variety of worksheet formats can be imported into a file, including worksheet data from other
programs and worksheets from other Vectorworks files.

Importing Worksheet Data from Another Program

To import a worksheet into the current file, both the worksheet and its original file must be open. In addition, a blank
worksheet must exist in the active drawing as a destination for the imported worksheet.
The worksheet formats that can be imported include comma delimited, tab delimited, merge, DIF, and SYLK. During
import, the spreadsheet data is imported, but the formulas (logic) are not.
To import a worksheet into Vectorworks:
1. From the Resource Browser, open the Resources menu.
2. Select New Resource > Worksheet.

682

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

The Create Worksheet dialog box opens.

3. Specify the same number of rows and columns that are present in the worksheet to be imported.
4. Select File > Import > Import Worksheet.
5. Select the worksheet file to be imported. The worksheet must be in one of the formats available on the Files of
type list.
6. Click Open. The worksheet is imported into the open worksheet in Vectorworks.

Importing Worksheets from Another Vectorworks file

To import a Vectorworks worksheet from another Vectorworks file:
1. From the Resource Browser, locate the file containing the worksheet using the Find command in the Resources
menu, or from a Favorites file. See Accessing Existing Resources on page 180 for more information.
2. Select the worksheet to import, and click Import. (Alternatively, drag the worksheet resource into the desired
Vectorworks file to insert it as a drawing object; see Worksheets as Graphic Objects on page 683.)
The selected worksheet is imported into the current file.

Importing a Table from Microsoft Word

The following procedure is an example of how to import a table from Microsoft Word into a Vectorworks worksheet.
To import a Word table into a worksheet:
1. In Word, select the entire table to be imported.
2. In versions of Word prior to 2007, select Table > Convert > Table to Text. In Windows 2007 and later, select Table
Tools > Layout > Convert to Text.
The Convert Table to Text dialog box opens.
3. In the dialog box, click Tabs for the separation identifier.
4. Click OK.
5. Save the table.
If the file consists of only the table, select File > Save As. In the Save As dialog box that opens, select Text Only
from the Save as type list, and click OK.
If the table is part of a larger file, copy the table to the Clipboard. Select File > New, and paste the table text into
the new document. Save the file as a text file.
6. Return to Vectorworks and import the table as described in Importing Worksheet Data from Another Program
on page 681.

Exporting Worksheets
Vectorworks worksheet files can be exported and read by spreadsheet programs, such as Excel, as well as by some
word processing programs. Because many of these programs have different format requirements, Vectorworks
provides a selection of formats when the worksheet is exported. These include comma delimited, tab delimited,
merge, DIF, and SYLK. Using the tab delimited format, for example, creates a file that can be opened as a table in
Microsoft Word.

Worksheets as Graphic Objects |

683

To export a worksheet from Vectorworks:

1. Select File > Export > Export Worksheet.
2. The Export Worksheet dialog box opens.

Select the format for the export, and whether to export all rows or only the selected rows. Click OK and specify
the name and location of the exported worksheet.
3. Click Save. The specified worksheet rows are exported to the desired location in the set format.

Worksheets as Graphic Objects

A worksheet can be included in a drawing as a graphic object. As with any graphic object, the worksheet can be moved
to any location on the drawing. However, it cannot be resized or edited as an object. To edit the contents of the
worksheet, open it from the Resource Browser, or from the drawing itself.
To include a worksheet as an object on a drawing:
1. From the Resource Browser, select the desired worksheet.
The worksheet must be a part of the current drawing. If the worksheet is part of another drawing, first import it
into the current drawing. Select the worksheet from the Resource Browser and then select Import from the
Resources menu. (See Importing Worksheets from Another Vectorworks file on page 682.)
2. Select Worksheet On Drawing from the Resources menu.
The worksheet is now included in the drawing as a graphic object. It can be moved like any other graphic object
and placed where desired. If the worksheet is currently open, the contents of the worksheet in the drawing are
replaced with an X.
Alternatively, double-click the worksheet in the Resource Browser to place it in the drawing file, or select the
worksheet in the Resource Browser and drag it to the desired location in the drawing file. Both methods
automatically select Worksheet on Drawing and place the worksheet as a graphic object. If you use the drag and
drop method, the top left corner of the worksheet is placed at the point where the mouse is released in the
drawing file.
To edit a worksheet included as a drawing object:
1. From the Resource Browser, select the desired worksheet.
2. Select Open from the Resources menu.
Alternatively, double-click the worksheet object in the drawing.
3. The worksheet is opened and available for editing. The contents of the worksheet in the drawing are replaced
with an X. Close the worksheet to display the worksheet contents in the drawing.

684

| Chapter 18: Worksheets

Using Scripts

19

Vectorworks provides several options for customizing the product environment to suit a wide range of individual
design needs. One of the most important options is VectorScript, a lightweight Pascal-like programming language. Use
VectorScript to do anything from creating simple tools that assist with the most tedious drafting tasks to developing
sophisticated solutions that address the most demanding design needs.
While VectorScript provides a rich set of development tools for creating scripts from scratch, there are also several
Vectorworks commands which allow scripts to be created without direct knowledge of the VectorScript language. The
Custom Selection, Custom Tool/Attribute, and Custom Modification commands provide the ability to create useful
scripts directly. (The Custom Modification command requires the Design Series; see Creating Custom Modification
Scripts on page 23 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.)
See the VectorScript Language Guide for an introduction to the VectorScript language. The VectorScript Language
Guide is available as part of the help system, and also as a PDF file in the help system.
In addition, the VectorScript Function Reference is a comprehensive command reference available online. It is located
in VWHelp/VectorScript Reference/VSFunctionReference.html

Creating Custom Selection Scripts

Custom selection scripts allow objects in the current file to be selected or deselected according to user-specified
criteria. The wide array of options in the command allows for very specific filtering and selection according to the
defined selection requirements.
The layer options must be set to Show/Snap/Modify Others to select objects on another layer.
To create a custom selection script:
1. Select Tools > Custom Selection.
The Custom Selection dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Select

Selects the objects matching the specified criteria without affecting the existing selection
status of other objects

Select Only

Deselects all objects prior to performing the selection operation

Deselect

Deselects any objects matching the specified criteria without affecting the selection status
of other objects in the file

686

| Chapter 19: Using Scripts

Parameter

Description

Execute Immediately

Performs the specified selection operation immediately upon exiting the Custom Selection
dialog box; the operation criteria is not saved for future use

Create Script

Saves the criteria and command options as a VectorScript that can be reused as needed

2. Click Criteria to specify the selection criteria for the operation.

The Criteria dialog box opens.
Criteria type

Adds more selection criteria

Criteria comparison option

Criteria selection parameter

Reduces selection criteria

3. Choose the desired criteria options. The number of objects in the file that meet the criteria displays.
Specify additional options by clicking More Choices. To remove the most recently added option, click Fewer
Choices.
Specify whether to also include objects that are part of symbols, plug-in objects, or viewports.
4. Click OK.
If the Execute Immediately option was chosen, the selection operation is now performed. If the Create Script
option was chosen, when prompted, name the VectorScript containing the selection operation commands. The
script then displays in a script palette, and can be double-clicked to perform the selection operation.

Creating Custom Tool/Attribute Scripts

Custom tool/attribute scripts record the current attribute and file settings in a script format for later use. These custom
settings can be combined with the active tool to allow a specific set of attributes, such as line style or pen color, to be
reactivated for use with the tool. For example, a dashed line style and red pen foreground color can be saved with the
line tool in a script for drawing red dashed lines.
To create a custom tool/attribute script:
1. Select Tools > Custom Tool/Attribute.
The Custom Tools dialog box opens.

Creating Custom Tool/Attribute Scripts |

687

2. Select which attributes should be saved in the script.

The saved attributes are used when the script is executed and can be modified or reset as desired.

Parameter

Description

All

Checked box: All attributes in the group are selected; click to deselect all attributes in
the group to be saved to the script.
Empty box: No attributes in the group are selected; click to select all attributes in the
group to be saved to the script.
Box displays
(Windows) or
(Macintosh): One or more attributes in the group
are not selected; click to select all attributes in the group to be saved to the script.

Fill Attributes

Saves fill foreground and background colors and styles

Pen Attributes

Saves pen foreground and background colors and styles

Line Attributes

Saves line weight (thickness) and style and the presence and size of markers

Text Attributes

Saves text attributes including font, size, style, spacing, and justification (alignment)

Other Attributes

Saves other attributes such as classes, layers, symbols, tools, and SmartCursor settings
(snapping parameter settings, as well as which snapping tools are active on the Snapping
palette)

3. Click OK.
4. When prompted, name the VectorScript containing the saved settings.
The script displays in a script palette, and can be double-clicked to execute.

688

| Chapter 19: Using Scripts

Creating VectorScripts
Vectorworks allows the creation of scripts which are saved as resources. The scripts, known as VectorScripts, can be
used to store custom-written scripts for performing tasks within the file. VectorScripts, like other scripts created using
Vectorworks automated script creation tools, are stored in script palettes contained within the file.
To create a VectorScript:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. From the Resources menu, select New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
3. Select VectorScript.
If no script palette exists, enter a name for a new script palette when prompted, and click OK.
If multiple script palettes exist, but are not currently active, the Select Script Palette dialog box opens. Select the
palette to add the script to and click Add.
4. Enter a name for the new VectorScript and click OK.
5. The VectorScript Editor opens to begin a script editing session.
For information on creating scripts, see the VectorScript Language Guide, available in the help system, and the
VectorScript Function Reference, which is a comprehensive command reference available online. It is located in
VWHelp/VectorScript Reference/VSFunctionReference.html
6. Click OK to save the script in the active script palette.

Running VectorScripts
VectorScripts can be run in a variety of ways.

Running VectorScripts from the Resource Browser

To run a VectorScript from the Resource Browser:
1. From the Resource Browser, select the palette containing the VectorScript to run.
2. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh), and select Enter from the context menu to display the available
VectorScripts in the palette.
3. Select the VectorScript to run. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh), and select Run from the context
menu. (Alternatively, double-click the VectorScript resource to run it or drag the VectorScript resource into the
drawing area.)

Running VectorScripts from the Script Palette

To run a VectorScript from a script palette:
1. Select Window > Script Palettes and select the VectorScript palette containing the desired VectorScript.
To open the script palette from the Resource Browser, select the VectorScript palette containing the desired
VectorScript. Right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the palette, and select Open from the context
menu
2. Double-click the VectorScript to run it.

Managing VectorScripts |

689

Running VectorScripts as Files

Some scripts may exist as text files only, if they were created outside Vectorworks in a separate text editor program.
These scripts are not stored in the script palette as a resource.
1. Select the Tools > Scripts > Run VectorScript.
The Choose VectorScript File dialog box opens.
2. Select the desired script and click Open to run the script.

Managing VectorScripts
VectorScripts, like any other Vectorworks resource, can be edited, moved, copied, renamed, or deleted. VectorScripts
also have the added ability of being encrypted to prevent editing.
For information on the VectorScript Editor, see The VectorScript Editor on page 107 in the VectorScript Language
Guide. The VectorScript Language Guide is available as part of the help system, and also as a PDF file in the help
system.

Editing VectorScripts
To edit a VectorScript:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. Select the script, and then select Edit from the Resources menu.
The VectorScript Editor dialog box opens.

3. When a script editing session is complete, click OK to save changes, or click Cancel to discard script changes.
Alternatively, VectorScripts can be edited directly from the script palette by Option-double-clicking the script
name in the palette (Alt-double-click on Windows). The VectorScript Editor opens and the script can be edited.

690

| Chapter 19: Using Scripts

Renaming VectorScripts
To rename a VectorScript:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. Select the script to be edited, and then select Rename from the Resources menu.
The Assign Name dialog box opens.
3. Enter the new script name.
4. Click OK.

Duplicating VectorScripts
To duplicate a VectorScript:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. Select the script to be duplicated, and then select Duplicate from the Resources menu.
The Assign Name dialog box opens.
3. Enter the name for the duplicated script, and then click OK.
The duplicate script is created in the same palette as the original script.

Deleting VectorScripts
To delete a VectorScript:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. Select the script to be deleted, and select Delete from the Resources menu.
3. When prompted, click OK to delete the script.

Importing VectorScripts
To import a script from another Vectorworks file:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. Locate the file containing the script. Select the script to be imported, and then select Import from the Resources
menu. (Alternatively, drag the VectorScript resource into the desired Vectorworks file.)
The script is imported into the active script palette. If no palette is active, select the destination for the imported
script, when prompted.

Encrypting VectorScripts
A script can be encrypted and locked to prevent editing.

Managing Script Palettes |

691

To encrypt a VectorScript:
1. Select Tools > Scripts > Encrypt VectorScript.
The Choose VectorScript File dialog box opens.
2. Locate and select the script text file to encrypt.
3. Click Open.
The Save Encrypted VectorScript Code Document dialog box opens.
4. Enter a new name for the script, and then select the location for saving the file.
5. Click Save.
The script is saved in an encrypted format.

Managing Script Palettes

Use the Resource Browser to manage script palettes as well as individual scripts.

Opening a Script Palette

To open a script palette:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. Select the script palette to be opened, and then select Open from the Resources menu.
The script palette opens.

Moving a Script to a New Palette

To move a script to a new palette using the Resource Browser:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. Select the script palette containing the desired script, and then select Open from the Resources menu.
The source script palette opens in the drawing.
3. Select the script palette where the script will be moved, and then select Open from the Resources menu.
The destination script palette opens in the drawing.
4. Click on the script to move, and then press Command+X (Macintosh) or Ctrl+X (Windows). The script is
removed from the palette and placed into the clipboard.
5. Click on the destination script palette, and then press Command+V (Macintosh) or Ctrl+V (Windows). The script
is placed into the selected script palette.
Each script palette can also be opened from the Window menu.

692

| Chapter 19: Using Scripts

Importing a Script Palette

To import a script palette from another Vectorworks file:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser.
The Resource Browser opens.
2. Locate the script palette to be imported.
For information on using the Resource Browser to locate resources in other Vectorworks files, see Using the
Resource Browser on page 175.
3. Select the script palette to be imported, and then select Import from the Resources menu. (Alternatively, drag the
script palette resource into the desired Vectorworks file.)
The palette and any scripts it contains are imported into the active Vectorworks file.

Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

20

Vectorworks provides several ways to present a completed drawing. Guide your customer through an animated
walkthrough of your design by creating a QuickTime movie. Present many croppable views of the drawing on a single
layer with viewports. Finally, the layer link feature creates linked views of the design layers in the drawing.

Animating Drawings with QuickTime

With QuickTime, animations can be created from a 3D Vectorworks drawing. QuickTime is a separate program
available with Vectorworks. It includes Movie Player, for viewing several different file types.
QuickTime must be installed to view or create QuickTime movies. It is available with the Vectorworks
installation.

Animating Drawings
Two types of animations can be created in VectorworksOrbit Point and Move Along Path. The Orbit Point animator
rotates by a specified number of degrees around a 3D object or selected point in the drawing. The Move Along Path
animator moves through the 3D drawing, following a specified path.
In Perspective view, only the portion of the model within the perspective frame (see Perspective on page 452) is
visible in the animation.

Creating Orbit Point Animations

The Orbit Point animator creates an animation that moves in a circular path around a specific 3D object or point.

694

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

To create an orbit point animation:

1. Set up the drawing view.
Select the desired views from the View menuStandard Views, Projection, Rendering, and Perspective. In
addition, use the Zoom tool to set the drawing magnification level. Ensure that only the layers and classes that
should display in the animation are visible.
2. To specify an object or objects as the center of rotation, select the object or group of objects.
3. Select Model > Create Animation.
The Create Animation dialog box opens.

4. Set the Camera to Orbit Point.

5. Click Animation Options.
The Simple Orbit Options dialog box opens.

Animating Drawings with QuickTime |

695

Parameter

Description

Active layer
plane

Specifies the center of the active layer plane (0X, 0Y, 0Z) as the center of rotation for the
animation

Working plane

Specifies the center of the working plane (0I, 0J, 0K) as the center of rotation for the animation

Selection

Specifies the center of the selected object(s) as the center of rotation for the animation

Rotation angle

Specifies the amount of rotation (in degrees) for the animation; for example, to complete an
orbit around the selected center of animation, enter 360

6. Click OK to return to the Create Animation dialog box.

The QuickTime frames per second (fps) value is displayed. Vectorworks uses default compression settings for
QuickTime; these settings produce a good-quality animation without an excessive file size. However, the
parameters can be modified by clicking on the QuickTime Options button.
QuickTime is a complex program which offers great flexibility in selecting settings. Consult the online
QuickTime Player help (available from the QuickTime Help menu) for more information about QuickTime
parameters and compression settings.
7. Specify the remaining parameter settings in the Create Animation dialog box.

Parameter

Description

Duration (Sec)

Sets the total length of time of the animation

Time Scale

Specifies the animation rate; a value between 0.1 and 0.99 creates a slow motion effect, while a
value between 1.01 and 10.00 speeds up the animation. Leave the default value of 1.00 for a
normal time scale.

8. Click Preview to check the animation before saving it. Depending on the rendering setting, the preview may be
shown in wireframe.
To preview only a selected portion of the animation, press Command (Macintosh) or Ctrl (Windows) when
clicking Preview. The Preview Duration dialog box opens.

696

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Specify the animation starting and ending time (in seconds) and click Preview.
To stop showing a preview, simultaneously press Command + Period (Macintosh) or Esc (Windows).
9. When satisfied with the preview, click Save Movie to save the animation.
The Save As dialog box opens.
10. Enter the name for the QuickTime Movie file and specify its location. Click Save. The progress of movie creation
is displayed.
To see the completed animation, see Viewing QuickTime Animations on page 701.

Creating Move Along Path Animations

The Move Along Path type of animation moves through a 3D drawing along a specified path. For example, create a
walk-through presentation of a house.

To create an animation moving along a specified path:

1. Set up the drawing view.
Select the desired views from the View menuStandard Views, Rendering, and Perspective.
The drawing Projection must be set to Perspective.
2. Save a view for each point along the path to use for creating the animation.
Use the Walkthrough and/or Flyover tools to change views. To save a view, select View > Save View. In the Save
View dialog box that opens, enter the View Name, ensure that Save Factors is selected, and then click OK (see
Creating Saved Views on page 121).
3. Select Model > Create Animation.

Animating Drawings with QuickTime |

The Create Animation dialog box opens.
4. Set the Camera to Move Along Path.

5. Click Animation Options.

The Select Animation dialog box opens.

6. Click New.
The New Animation Name dialog box opens.

Enter a name for this animation and then click Create to return to the Select Animation dialog box.
7. Select the name of the new animation and click Edit.
The Edit Path Animation dialog box opens.

697

698

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

The Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons under the graph change the magnification level of the animation graph.
A new path animation uses the default length from the setting in the main QuickTime options dialog box. To
specify a different animation length, double-click the arrow to the far right of the timeline.
Double-click the arrow to access the
Set Animation Length dialog box

8. From the list of views on the left, drag the starting view name to the animation graph.
Vectorworks automatically places the first view at the graphs origin0 seconds, 0 drawing units/second.
9. Select the next view to use and drag it to the animation graph.
A bar with a bead is added to the graph. Drag the bar and bead to change the animation settings (time elapsed
between view changes and velocity of camera movement).
The distance between bars is the time in seconds that it takes to move from one view to the next.
Move the bead up and down to determine the slope of the line between bars. This slope indicates the velocity of
the movement between views (the number of drawing units/second that the camera moves). In general, the slope
should form a steady curve. An uneven curve will cause a choppy camera movement, speeding up and slowing
down in a jolting manner. The slope cannot dip below the X axisthis would create a negative velocity.

Animating Drawings with QuickTime |

699

bar
bead

10. To set a specific camera target, double-click on a bead.

The Set View Direction dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Look towards

Specifies what direction the view should look toward

Current view

Sets the view to the current beads saved view

Working plane origin

Sets the view to the working plane origin

Center of currently
selected object

Sets the view to the X, Y, Z center of the currently selected object(s) bounding box

Center of following
named object

Sets the view to look at the center of a named 3D object. Click Select a different named
object to open the Look At Named Object dialog box. Select the object to set the view
toward (named objects in walls or layer links cannot be selected).

Following point

Sets the view to the specified X, Y, Z coordinates

11. Click OK to exit the Set View Direction dialog box.

12. Continue selecting views and dragging them onto the animation graph until the desired views have been
included within the time allotment. To view a wireframe version of the animation, click Preview.

700

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

To add a pause to the animation, drag the same view twice into the animation graph so that the views are next to
each other in sequence. The line between the views should be flat (no upward or downward slope). This creates a
velocity of zero and, therefore, a pause in the animation.
Setting the view to different specified X, Y, Z coordinates for each of these frames, makes the camera appear to
stop its forward motion and pan from one direction to another.

To create a pause, place the same view twice in the animation graph.
Ensure that there is no slope between the repeated views.

13. Click Done to return to the Create Animation dialog box.

The QuickTime frames per second (fps) value is displayed. Vectorworks uses default Compression Settings for
QuickTime; these settings produce a good-quality animation without an excessive file size. However, the
parameters can be modified by clicking on the QuickTime Options button.
QuickTime is a complex program which offers great flexibility in selecting settings. Consult the online
QuickTime Player help (available from the QuickTime Help menu) for more information about QuickTime
parameters and compression settings.
14. Specify the remaining parameter settings in the Create Animation dialog box.

Parameter

Description

Duration (Sec)

Sets the total length of time of the animation

Time Scale

Specifies the animation rate; a value between 0.1 and 0.99 creates a slow motion effect, while
a value between 1.01 and 10.00 speeds up the animation. Leave the default value of 1.00 for a
normal time scale.

15. Click Preview to check the animation before saving it. Depending on the rendering setting, the preview may be
shown in wireframe. Specify the animation starting and ending time (in seconds) and click Preview.
To preview only a selected portion of the animation, press Command (Macintosh) or Ctrl (Windows) when
clicking Preview. The Preview Duration dialog box opens.

Animating Drawings with QuickTime |

701

To stop showing a preview, simultaneously press Command + Period (Macintosh) or Esc (Windows).
16. When satisfied with the preview, click Save Movie to save the animation.
The Save As dialog box opens.
17. Enter the name for the QuickTime movie file and specify its location. Click Save. The movie creation progress
displays.
To see the completed animation, see Viewing QuickTime Animations on page 701.

Adding Text or Title Screens to Animations

Unless text is specifically converted into a 3D object (using the TrueType to Polyline command), Vectorworks and
QuickTime view text as 2D. This means text in a drawing exported as a QuickTime movie remains motionless, not
moving with the other 3D objects. This principle is also true for any graphic images placed in the drawing.
Vectorworks can be used to create an animated title screen as a separate QuickTime movie, using an Orbit Point
animation to move the 2D text. (The Move Along Path animator requires 3D perspective projection.) Then, within the
QuickTime program, link the two files together to create one movie.
When creating a title screen animation, ensure that the title movie uses the same QuickTime frame rate setting as
the linked animation movie.

Viewing QuickTime Animations

Macintosh-generated or Windows-generated movies can be viewed on either platform.
To view existing movies:
1. Double-click the file name or QuickTime Movie icon for the desired movie. Alternatively, open the QuickTime
application and select the file from the Open menu.
2. Click the Play button to play the movie.

Play Button

Pause Button

702

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports

Vectorworks viewport objects allow the creation of views from several directions, complete with details,
annotations, dimensions, and title blocks. Viewports can show other parts of the active document, or even portions of
other documents.
Viewports can display entire as well as cropped views of a drawing, with specified layer and class visibility settings,
projection, render mode, and orientation parameters. If the drawing changes, the viewports can be easily updated to
reflect the changes.
In both Vectorworks Fundamentals and Vectorworks Design Series, you can create one or more viewports on a sheet
layer, and each viewport can show one or more design layers from this document. Additionally, Vectorworks Design
Series allows you to create one or more viewports on a design layer, and the design layers shown in the viewports can
be either from this document, or referenced from another document. For details about design layer viewports, see
Presenting Drawings with Design Layer Viewports on page 710 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
A sheet layer can contain many viewports. Sheet layers retain their own print settings, including print area, resolution,
and printer setup parameters. For more information on sheet layers, see Managing Layers on page 100.

Creating a Sheet Layer Viewport from a Design Layer

A sheet layer viewport can be created from an active design layer.
To create a viewport from a design layer:
1. Select View > Create Viewport.
2. The Create Viewport dialog box opens. The viewport parameters are initially set to be the same as those of the
design layer that is currently active, but they can be changed here. After the viewport has been created,
additional parameters become available; see Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports on page 706.
For the Design Series, the Create Viewport dialog box has additional functionality for creating design layer
viewports; see Creating a Design Layer Viewport that Displays an Internal Design Layer on page 711 in the
Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

703

Parameter

Description

Viewport Name

Specifies the viewport name; this name must be unique in the document

Drawing Title

Specifies a descriptive title for the sheet layer viewport. This name displays as the drawing
title for any annotation objects (drawing labels, section markers, and sheet borders) that are
added to the viewport.

Sheet Layer

Select the sheet layer where the viewport will be created, or select New Sheet Layer to
create a sheet layer. If there are no sheet layers present and a new one is not created now,
you will be prompted to create a sheet layer after clicking OK.

Layers

Specifies which design layers will be visible in the viewport

Display Planar
Objects

Select to display 2D planar objects associated with the layer plane, when the viewports
view is other than Top/Plan

Project Screen
Objects

Select to display 2D objects associated with the screen plane, when the viewports view is
other than Top/Plan

Classes

Specifies which classes will be visible in the viewport

Scale

Specifies the viewport scale relative to the page; select a scale or choose Custom and enter
the scale value in Custom Scale

Custom Scale

When a custom scale is selected, enter the scale value

704

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Parameter

Description

View

Specifies the orientation of the design layers displayed in the viewport; select a cardinal
view or choose Custom and then click Set View to specify the view

Set View

Rendering

When a custom view is selected, click Set View to open the 3D Rotation dialog box for the
entry of custom view parameters (see Rotating Precisely on page 457 for more
information)
Specifies the render mode for the viewport. The following modes enable the Render
Settings button to specify rendering parameters:

Render Settings

Sketch (Design Series required)

OpenGL
Custom Renderworks (Renderworks required)
Custom Radiosity (Renderworks required)
Artistic Renderworks (Renderworks required)
Hidden Line
Dashed Hidden Line
Final Shaded Polygon

Certain render modes require parameters to be set; click this button to specify them. See the
following:

Hidden Line Render settings: Line Render Options on page 481

OpenGL and Final Shaded Polygon settings: Rendering with Vectorworks on page 477
Artistic Renderworks settings: Artistic Renderworks Options on page 802
Custom Renderworks settings: Custom Renderworks Options on page 791
Rendering with radiosity: Radiosity on page 794

RW Background
(Renderworks
required)

Select a Renderworks background from either the default resources or the current files
resources to use as a background for the viewport; see Vectorworks Fundamentals and
Renderworks Default Resources on page 173

Projection

Select the projection type for the viewport (see Projection on page 451)

Perspective Type

For Perspective projection, select the type of perspective, or choose Custom and specify the
perspective distance

Perspective Dist

For custom perspectives, enter the perspective distance

3. Click OK.
4. If a sheet layer does not already exist in the file, the New Sheet Layer dialog box opens automatically to create
one. Click OK.
The viewport is created on the designated sheet layer, and the sheet layer becomes active.

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

705

Creating a Sheet Layer Viewport by Cropping

To create a detail viewport either from a design layer or from an existing uncropped viewport on a sheet layer:
1. Make active the existing design layer or sheet layer that will display in the viewport.
2. Create a 2D object (such as a rectangle, circle, oval, polyline, polygon etc.). The 2D object must define an area; for
example, a 2D line cannot be used. Crop objects are automatically placed in the screen plane (see Planar Modes
of 2D Objects on page 219). Position the 2D object on the design layer or existing uncropped viewport to delimit
the area to be included in the new viewport. The fill of a viewport cropping object is always None; however, the
pen style can be set from the Attributes palette.

3. If the cropped viewport is being created from a design layer, select the 2D object. If the cropped viewport is being
created from a sheet layer, select both the 2D object and the uncropped viewport.
4. Select View > Create Viewport.
5. An alert dialog box asks whether the object should be used as the viewports crop. Select Yes (or Yes Always to
always use a selected 2D object as a crop object when creating viewports).
6. The Create Viewport dialog box opens. Enter a viewport name and drawing title, and select the sheet layer to
place it on. The remaining viewport parameters are initially set to be the same as the design layer properties (for
design layers) or selected viewport (for sheet layers). Change the parameters as needed (see Creating a Sheet
Layer Viewport from a Design Layer on page 702).
7. Click OK.
The viewport, cropped by the selected 2D object, is created on the specified sheet layer.

706

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

To hide the crop object, edit the viewports crop (see Cropping Sheet Layer Viewports on page 714) and set the
objects Pen Style to None. Alternatively, change the class of the crop object to invisible.

Cropped viewport

Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports

Sheet Layer Viewport Parameters
Once it has been created, edit the sheet layer viewport in the Object Info palette, or select Properties from the
viewports context menu to open the Properties dialog box.
Viewports have a fill and pen style of None.

Parameter

Description

Rotation

Sets the viewport rotation; if the viewport was created from a rotated plan view
(Design Series required), this parameter can be used to reset the viewport to the world
coordinate system

Crop

Indicates whether the selected viewport has been cropped (see Cropping Sheet Layer
Viewports on page 714)

Update

Click to update the viewport to reflect any changes that have occurred since the
viewport was created or last updated (see Status of a Sheet Layer Viewport on
page 709)

Drawing Title

Specifies a descriptive title for the sheet layer viewport. This name displays as the
drawing title for any annotation objects (drawing labels and sheet borders) that are
added to the viewport.
If Use Automatic Drawing Coordination is selected in document preferences (Design
Series required), a change to this field for the viewport automatically changes the field
for the viewports drawing label, and vice versa.

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

707

Parameter

Description

Layers

Specifies which design layers are visible in the viewport and allows changes to some
of the layer properties in the viewport; see Changing the Layer Properties of Sheet
Layer Viewports on page 716

Display Planar Objects

Select to display 2D planar objects associated with the layer plane, when the
viewports view is other than Top/Plan

Project Screen Objects

Select to display 2D objects associated with the screen plane, when the viewports view
is other than Top/Plan

Classes

Specifies which classes are visible in the viewport and allows changes to some of the
class properties in the viewport, including changes to the properties for crop and
annotation objects. Class visibilities can be overridden for a selected viewport; see
Changing the Class Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports on page 719.

Scale

Specifies the viewport scale relative to the page; select a scale, or choose Custom and
enter a Custom Scale value

Custom Scale
View

When a custom Scale is selected, enter the scale value

Specifies the orientation of the design layers displayed in the viewport; select a
cardinal view or choose Custom and then click Set View to specify the view
The standard view of a selected viewport can be changed with the numeric
keypad shortcut keys (see Using Standard Views on page 449).

Set View

When a custom view is selected, click Set View to open the 3D Rotation dialog box for
the entry of custom view parameters (see Rotating Precisely on page 457 for more
information)

Background/Foreground
Render

Specifies the render mode(s) for the viewport. Select a background mode and specify
the render settings, if any. For a composite effect, also select an optional foreground
mode and specify any settings (Wireframe, Sketch, Hidden Line, or Dashed Hidden
Line are the only render modes available for foreground rendering).

Background / Foreground
Render Settings

Certain render modes require parameters to be set; click the appropriate Render
Settings button to specify them. See the following:
OpenGL and Final Shaded Polygon settings: Rendering with Vectorworks on
page 477
Custom Renderworks settings (Renderworks required): Custom Renderworks
Options on page 791
Custom Radiosity (Renderworks required): Radiosity on page 794
Artistic Renderworks settings (Renderworks required): Artistic Renderworks
Options on page 802
Hidden Line Render settings: Line Render Options on page 481

RW Background
(Renderworks required)

Select a Renderworks background from either the default resources or the current files
resources to use as a background for the viewport; see Vectorworks Fundamentals
and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173

Projection

Select the projection type for the viewport (see Projection on page 451)

708

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Parameter

Description

Perspective Type

For Perspective projection, select the type of perspective, or choose Custom and
specify the perspective distance

Perspective Dist

For custom perspectives, enter the perspective distance

Lighting Options

Click to change the ambient light parameters described in Setting Lighting Options
on page 466.
By default, a viewports ambient light is set according to the ambient light settings of
the first visible design layer in the viewport. If there are no visible layers, the ambient
light is set to on, with a color of white and a brightness of 35% (similar to the default
ambient lighting for a design layer).

Advanced Properties

Opens the Advanced Viewport Properties dialog box; see Advanced Sheet Layer
Viewport Properties on page 708

Advanced Sheet Layer Viewport Properties

To access additional viewport parameters, click Advanced Properties from the Object Info palette or Properties dialog
box of a selected viewport.
The Advanced Viewport Properties dialog box opens. These settings affect the viewport display only; they do not
change the original design layer(s).

Parameter

Description

Line Weight Scale

Enter a value larger than 1.0 to increase the viewport line weights, or a value below 1.0 (but
larger than 0) to decrease the line weights

Marker Scale

Enter a value larger than 1.0 to increase the viewport marker size, or a value below 1.0 (but
larger than 0) to decrease the marker size

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

709

Parameter

Description

Dashed Line Scale

Enter a value larger than 1.0 to increase the length and spacing of viewport dash segments,
or a value below 1.0 (but larger than 0) to decrease the length and spacing of dashed line
segments

Hatch Line Scale

Enter a value larger than 1.0 to increase the spacing between viewport hatch lines, or a
value below 1.0 (but larger than 0) to decrease the spacing between hatch lines

Text Scale

Enter a value larger than 1.0 to increase the text size in viewports, or a value below 1.0 (but
larger than 0) to decrease the text size; only associated viewport text is affected

Show Wall
Components

Displays or hides wall components in Top/Plan view, regardless of the document

preferences wall component display setting (see Display Preferences on page 59)

Render Gray Layers

Transparent

Design layers with a visibility set to Gray are rendered as transparent, similar to the
transparent effect achieved with the Unified View command in the Design Series (see
Unified Layer View on page 747 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide)

Black and white only

Changes all colors in the viewport to black or white; this is useful for displaying two
viewport copies on the same sheet layer, with one in color and the other in black and white.
However, if the document preferences display setting is black and white, viewports will
also display as black and white.

Adjust Flipped Text

Re-orients rotated and flipped text in the viewport so that it is always readable (regardless
of the Vectorworks flipped text preference; see Display Preferences on page 48)

Preview

Displays the viewport with a preview of the advanced settings

Status of a Sheet Layer Viewport

The status of a sheet layer viewport is indicated visually.

Viewport Status

Description

Normal

A normal, up-to-date viewport displays with orange highlighting when selected

Out of date

When the objects in a viewport have changed since the viewport was created or last
updated, the viewport becomes out of date. An out-of-date viewport displays with a red
and white outline.

710

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Viewport Status

Description

Empty

A viewport displays as a red X when the associated design layer contains no objects or the
objects are hidden, or when the associated design layer is set to invisible

Modifying Sheet Layer Viewports

There are several ways to modify sheet layer viewports; their appearance can be completely different from the original
design layers, for presentation purposes.

Modify the settings for the viewport in the Object Info palette.
Modify the viewport with various 2D and 3D tools and commands.
Crop the viewport.
Edit the design layer(s) that display in the viewport.
Add annotations and dimensions to the viewport.
Change the properties of the viewports layers and classes.

Moving and Editing Sheet Layer Viewports

A sheet layer viewport can be edited like most 2D objects. For information on 2D tools and commands, see Editing 2D
Objects on page 301. 3D tools cannot be used on sheet layers. However, a 3D object can be copied from a design layer
and pasted on a sheet layer. A design layer viewport (Design Series required) cannot be pasted on a sheet layer.
Use the Cut, Copy, and Paste commands to copy or paste a viewport on its original sheet layer or another sheet
layer. Use the 2D Selection tool to drag a viewport to a new position (or edit the X- and Y-axis positions in the
Object Info palette). Press the Delete key to delete a selected viewport.

Use the Move and Rotate commands and the Rotate and Mirror tools to move, rotate, or mirror a viewport. The
viewport can be split by the Split tool (in Split by Line mode), and clipped with the Clip tool.

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

711

Use the Scale Objects command to scale a viewport. Any crop objects in the viewport are also scaled, as are
annotations and dimensions. Viewport text, however, is not scaled unless Scale Text is selected in the Scale
Objects dialog box.
Use the Modify > Lock and Modify > Unlock commands to lock and unlock viewports.
Use the Eyedropper tool to transfer attributes from one viewport to another; see Transferring Attributes on
page 278.
Use 2D drawing tools on sheet layers to create borders, title blocks, and so on.

Editing a Design Layer Displayed in a Sheet Layer Viewport

To edit a design layer that is displayed in a sheet layer viewport:
1. Select the viewport.
2. Select Modify > Edit Viewport.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a viewport, and select Edit from the context
menu.
The Edit Viewport dialog box opens.

712

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Parameter

Description

Annotations

Creates or edits viewport annotations and dimensions (see Creating Annotations for
Sheet Layer Viewports on page 715)

Crop

Creates or edits a cropped viewport (see Cropping Sheet Layer Viewports on page 714),
and optionally displays the viewport outside of the crop area when in Edit Crop mode

Display Viewport
Outside Crop

Displays the viewport outside of the crop with wireframe rendering; objects outside of
the crop can be snapped to when creating or editing a crop shape

Gray Outside Crop

Displays the area outside of the crop in gray

Design Layer
Display using
Viewport Attributes

Navigates to the selected design layer to edit objects contained in the viewport
Changes the files view parameters and layer and class visibilities to match those of the
viewport.
If the Navigate Back to Viewport option is also selected, the files layer and class
visibilities return to their original status when you return to the viewport; otherwise, the
files attributes remain the same as the viewports.
This option is only available when the Design Layer edit mode is selected.

Add Reference
Crop Object

When a viewport has been cropped, this option displays the crop on the design layer so
that edits can be made to the design layer while knowing the position of the crop object.
This option is only available when the Design Layer edit mode is selected.

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

Parameter
Navigate Back to
Viewport

713

Description
Temporarily adds a Return to Viewport button to the design layer that returns you to the
viewport when the edit to the design layer is complete (similar to an Edit Group
operation).
This option is only available when the Design Layer edit mode is selected.
To exit to the design layer instead of exiting to the viewport from design layer editing
mode, press Shift + Esc. Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) in
the drawing area, and select Exit Viewport from the context menu.

Display Viewport
Cache

If the viewport is currently in a render mode other than Wireframe, select Display
Viewport Cache to display a cache image of the rendered viewport during editing;
deselect to display a Wireframe view of the viewport.
This option is only available when the Annotations or Crop edit mode is selected.

Keep the Edit View on

Exit

When you return to the viewport after an edit, this setting maintains any view changes
(zoom and view location) made during edits to the viewport annotation or the crop
object. Deselect this option to return to the original viewport view settings after editing.
This option is only available when the Annotations or Crop edit mode is selected.

Double Click

Sets the future behavior when a viewport is double-clicked, eliminating the display of
this dialog box if desired. If the Edits the Design Layer option is selected, a double-click
activates the design layer of the double-clicked object. If the object does not belong to a
design layer, the Edit Viewport dialog box opens to select a design layer to edit.
If Displays this Dialog is not selected, you can still open the dialog box: select
Modify > Edit Viewport, or right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) the
viewport and select Edit from the context menu.

3. Click Design Layer and select the design layer to edit from the list. Select Display using Viewport Attributes to
view the design layer with the viewport attributes (orientation, projection, render mode, and layer and class
visibilities). A rendered viewport displays the original design layer with the viewports render mode; however,
the design layers render mode options for that mode are used. If the original design layer has different Z heights
and Display using Viewport Attributes is selected, the layer options are set to Active Only.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a viewport and select Edit Design Layer from
the context menu to activate the design layer of the right-clicked object (if the right-clicked object does not belong
to a design layer, the Edit Viewport dialog box opens).
Select Add Reference Crop Object to view the crop object on the design layer during editing. However, because
the crop object is added to the design layer, it could become visible in other viewports that reference that area of
the design layer.
Select Navigate Back to Viewport to easily return to the viewport when you are finished with the design layer
edits. A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Return to
Viewport button is visible in the top right corner of the drawing window.
To exit to the design layer instead of exiting to the viewport while in design layer editing mode, press Shift + Esc.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) in the drawing area, and select Exit Viewport from
the context menu.
4. Click OK to make the selected design layer the active layer.

714

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Cropping Sheet Layer Viewports

A viewport can be cropped on its sheet layer, to display only a portion of the viewport.
To crop a viewport:
1. Select the viewport.
2. Select Modify > Edit Viewport. The Edit Viewport dialog box opens (see Editing a Design Layer Displayed in a
Sheet Layer Viewport on page 711 for a description of the dialog box parameters).
3. Click Crop.
Choose whether to display the viewport outside of the crop area. Select Display Viewport Outside Crop to view
the rest of the viewport; select Gray Outside Crop to view the area outside of the crop in gray. When displaying
the viewport outside of the crop area, objects can be snapped to, facilitating drawing and editing the crop.
To view other sheet layer objects while in Edit Crop mode, select Show other objects while in editing modes on
the Display tab of the Vectorworks preferences (see Display Preferences on page 48).
4. Click OK to enter Edit Crop mode.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a viewport and select Edit Crop from the
context menu.
A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Exit Viewport
Crop command becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Exit Viewport Crop button is visible in the
top right corner of the drawing window.
5. Create a 2D object (such as a rectangle, circle, oval, polyline, or polygon). The 2D object must define an area; for
example, a 2D line cannot be used. Position the 2D object to delimit the new viewport display area. The fill of a
viewport cropping object is always None; however, the pen style can be set from the Attributes palette while in
Edit Crop mode. Set the pen style to None to make the crop object invisible. Move and resize the 2D object as
needed.
Use the Flyover tool to adjust the view as necessary (see Flyover on page 452).
The bounding box of the crop object is also the perspective clip rectangle, if the viewport is in Perspective
projection. Reshaping the crop object changes the perspective clip rectangle as well.

6. Click Exit Viewport Crop to return to the sheet layer.

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

715

7. The cropped viewport displays In the Object Info palette, the crop status change to Yes.
8. To change, replace, or delete the crop object, select the viewport and then select Modify > Edit Viewport to
re-enter Edit Crop mode. Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) and select Edit from the
context menu.
Visibility changes made from the Classes tab of the Organization dialog box (Tools > Organization) do not affect
the visibility of the crop object. To change the class visibility of a crop object, click Classes from the viewport
Object Info palette, and make the changes in the Viewport Class Properties dialog box (see Changing the Class
Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports on page 719).

Creating Annotations for Sheet Layer Viewports

Use the Edit Annotation mode to add annotations and dimensions in viewports, and to edit those annotations and
dimensions later on.
To add annotations, including dimensions, to a viewport:
1. With the viewports sheet layer active, select the viewport by clicking on it with the 2D Selection tool.
2. Select Modify > Edit Viewport. The Edit Viewport dialog box opens (see Cropping Sheet Layer Viewports on
page 714 for a description of the dialog box parameters).
3. Click Annotations and then click OK to enter Edit Annotation mode.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a viewport and select Edit Annotations from
the context menu.
A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Exit Viewport
command becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Exit Viewport Annotation button is visible in the
top right corner of the drawing window.
4. Use the various dimension tools from the Dims/Notes tool set to add dimensions to the viewport (see
Dimensioning on page 485). The dimension tools snap to the objects in the viewport as if you were
dimensioning the design layer. When the viewport is in Top/Plan view, associative dimensions can be applied to
2D objectsincluding wallson the design layer. The dimensions are automatically updated if the design layer
object changes.
To view other objects on the sheet layer while in Edit Annotation mode, select Show other objects while in
editing modes on the Display tab of the Vectorworks preferences (see Display Preferences on page 48).
Text, callouts, and other annotations, as well as 2D objects, can be added to the viewport. The Design Series
contains additional annotation objects.
The stacking order of selected annotations can be changed with the Modify > Send commands. To add graphical
annotations to a viewport rendered with Hidden Line, use the 2D Polygon tool Polygon from Boundary modes
(see 2D Polygon Tool on page 264).
Annotations are in viewport scale, not sheet layer scale.

716

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

5. Click Exit Viewport Annotation to exit Edit Annotation mode and return to the sheet layer.
6. To change, replace, or delete the viewport annotations, select the viewport and then select Modify > Edit
Viewport to re-enter Edit Annotation mode.
Visibility changes made from the Classes tab of the Organization dialog box (Tools > Organization) do not affect
the visibility of the crop object. To change the class visibility of a crop object, click Classes from the viewport
Object Info palette, and make the changes in the Viewport Class Properties dialog box (see Changing the Class
Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports on page 719).

Changing the Layer Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports

The viewports layer visibility, opacity, stacking order, and colors can be changed from the sheet layer. Other
viewports, as well as the design layer properties, are not affected. The viewport attributes can be tailored as desired for
presentation; several copies of the same viewport can appear completely different.
To change the viewport layer properties:
1. Select the viewport.
2. From the Object Info palette, click Layers.
The Viewport Layer Properties dialog box opens.

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

717

Click here and drag up or

down to change the layer
stacking order in the
viewport

Click the visible, invisible, or

gray column to set the layer
visibility in the viewport

After editing the colors

in the layer properties,
click here to apply the
override to the viewport

Indicates whether the layer

definition has overrides in
this viewport

Parameter

Description

Layer list

Lists the viewport layers and their visibility, edited status, layer color use status, and
stacking order. Click the triangle in the heading of an active column to toggle between
ascending and descending sort order based on that column parameter.

Visibility

Click in a layer visibility column to change the layer visibility for this viewport.
Column 1: Visible (displays objects in this layer)
Column 2: Invisible (hides objects in this layer)
Column 3: Gray (displays objects in this layer as dimmed)

(Source)

Column 4 indicates whether the layer definition is the same as the source layer, or
the layer definition has overrides in this viewport. When a layer is edited with the
Edit button, the override icon displays automatically. Click the Revert button to
revert to the original settings.
The layer definition is from the
viewports source layer

(Layer Colors)

# (Stacking Order)

Layer overrides exist

in this viewport

Click to apply the viewport layer colors set in the Edit Viewport Design Layers dialog
box (click Edit to set the colors, as described in the next step), overriding the design
layer colors. This setting is independent of the Use layer colors document preference.
Displays the layer stacking order; drag a layer within the # column to change its
stacking order. This column displays only when the viewport is in Top/Plan view.

718

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Parameter

Description

Edit

Opens the Edit Viewport Design Layers dialog box, to override the properties of the
selected layer

Revert

Returns the settings in the Edit Viewport Design Layers dialog box to their default
values and removes the override icon in the Source column

Stacking Override

Indicates whether the layer stacking order in the viewport is different from the design
layer stacking order. Click Revert Stacking Order to return to the original design
layer stacking order.

Use embedded design

layer viewport settings for

Layer overrides: If the sheet layer viewport contains a design layer viewport for
which layer overrides have been set, this option uses the design layer viewport
overrides, ignoring any layer overrides that may be set here for the sheet layer
viewport.

(Design Series required)

Layer visibilities: If the sheet layer viewport contains a non-referenced design

layer viewport for which layer visibilities have been set, this option uses the design
layer viewport visibilities, ignoring any layer visibilities that may be set here for the
sheet layer viewport.
Referenced design layer viewports are not affected by this setting.
Preview

Click to preview the layer property settings in the selected viewport

3. To override the layer properties (for viewport display), select one or more viewport layers and click Edit.
Alternatively, double-click on a viewport layer to edit it.
The Edit Viewport Design Layers dialog box opens.

Displays when the Vectorworks

preference for Quartz imaging
(Macintosh) or GDI+ imaging
(Windows) is enabled

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

719

4. The same parameters apply when you create a design layer (see Setting Design Layer Properties on page 103);
for viewport layers, only the stacking order, transfer mode or opacity, and colors can be edited. These edits apply
to the current viewport only, though they can be transferred to other viewports with the Eyedropper tool.
The viewport layer colors can be controlled separately from the design layer colors, for flexible presentation
output. Click Colors to override the fill and pen colors for the selected viewport layer. To see the effects of the
color override, Use Layer Colors must be selected in the Viewport Layer Properties dialog box for the selected
viewport. This is similar to the way that Use Layer Colors must be selected in Document Properties to see the
layer color settings for a design layer, as described in Setting the Design Layer Color on page 109.
5. Click OK to return to the Viewport Layer Properties dialog box.
Click Preview to evaluate the results of the property changes.
6. Click OK to return to the sheet layer.

Changing the Class Properties of Sheet Layer Viewports

The class visibilities and attributes of a selected viewport can be changed from the sheet layer. This does not change
the class properties or the class visibility for the original design layers or for other viewports. The viewport attributes
can be tailored as desired for presentation; several copies of the same viewport can appear completely different.

To override viewport class properties:

1. Select the viewport.
2. From the Object Info palette, click Classes.
The Viewport Class Properties dialog box opens. Change class visibilities and/or make class attribute overrides
for the selected viewport.

720

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Click the visible, invisible, or

gray column to set the class
visibility in the viewport

Indicates whether the

class definition is specific
to this viewport

Parameter

Description

Class list

Lists the viewport classes and their visibility and edited status; click in a class
visibility column to change the class visibility for this viewport. Click the triangle in
an active column to toggle between ascending and descending sort order based on
that column parameter.

Visibility

Click in a class visibility column to change the class visibility for this viewport.
Column 1: Visible (displays objects in this class)
Column 2: Invisible (hides objects in this class)
Column 3: Gray (displays objects in this class as dimmed)

(Source)

Column 4 indicates whether the class definition is the same as the source class, or the
class definition has overrides specific to this viewport. When a class is edited with the
Edit button, the viewport-specific icon displays automatically. Click the Revert button
to revert to the original settings.
The class definition is
from the source class

Edit

The class definition is

specific to this viewport

Opens the Edit Class(es) dialog box, to make overrides to the selected class that only
apply to the current viewport (see Setting Class Properties on page 115)

Presenting Drawings with Sheet Layer Viewports |

721

Parameter

Description

Import

Opens the Import Attributes dialog box, to import the class attribute settings from the
file. The attributes can be imported for the classes selected in the Viewport Class
Properties dialog box, from corresponding classes, or from a specified class in the file.

Click OK to import the class attributes into the selected viewport. (The Eyedropper
tool can also transfer class override attributes between viewports.)
Revert

Sets the selected class back to its original document attributes, undoing any class
overrides; also removes the override icon in the Source column

Use embedded design

layer viewport settings for

Class overrides: If the sheet layer viewport contains a design layer viewport for
which class overrides have been set, this option uses the design layer viewport
overrides, ignoring any class overrides that may be set here for the sheet layer
viewport.

(Design Series required)

Class visibilities: If the sheet layer viewport contains a non-referenced design layer
viewport for which class visibilities have been set, this option uses the design layer
viewport visibilities, ignoring any class visibilities that may be set here for the sheet
layer viewport
Referenced design layer viewports are not affected by this setting.
Preview

Click to preview the class visibility and attribute settings in the selected viewport

3. Click OK to apply the class visibility and attribute changes to the selected viewport.

Updating Sheet Layer Viewports

Changes that affect the appearance of a viewport are automatically updated for a wireframe viewport. However, if
changes occur that require the viewport to be rendered again, the viewport will be displayed as an out-of-date
viewport with a red and white striped border (see Status of a Sheet Layer Viewport on page 709).
If a sheet layer with an out-of-date viewport is printed, a message prompts you to either print the viewport as an
out-of-date viewport or update the viewport(s) on the sheet layer before printing.

722

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Updating Selected Viewports

To update selected viewports:
1. Select the viewport(s).
2. On the Object Info palette, click Update. Alternatively, select View > Update Selected Viewports.
3. The selected viewports are updated.

Updating All Viewports

To update all the viewports in the file:
1. Select View > Update All Viewports.
2. All viewports on all sheet layers are updated.
An update to multiple rendered viewports may require a significant amount of time. In particular, rendering
with radiosity should be performed as a last step in the presentation process.

Cutting Sections
Vectorworks cutting section tools define a section line through a 3D model, placing the cut section on a new layer and
leaving the original model intact.
The Cut 2D Section command creates a cross-section, or 2D contour, on the cutting plane. The contour is created by
the intersection of the model with an infinite plane passing though the section line. Only the elements that actually
intersect the section line are shown.
The Cut 3D Section command creates a section with all the 3D geometry that remains on the indicated side of the
infinite plane passing through the section line. The elements that intersect the section line, as well as the 3D geometry
that exists beyond the line, are shown.
Place a 2D section, along with a bold line, on top of a 3D section, to show the cutting plane with the section
behind it.

Cutting 3D Sections
The Cut 3D Section command cuts a 3D section, or slice, through a 3D model while leaving the model intact. The slice
is placed on a new design layer.
To cut a 3D section from a 3D model:
1. Select the 3D model to section.
2. Select Model > Cut 3D Section.
The cursor changes to cross-hairs.
3. Click to set the start of the section. Draw a line across the object to define the section, and then click to set the end
of the section.
When cutting a section while the drawing is in a Plan projection, the cutting plane (and the cut edge of the object)
is perpendicular to the active layer plane.
When cutting a section while in a 3D projection, the cutting plane is perpendicular to the working plane.
4. Click on one side of the line to indicate the portion of the model to keep.

Layer Linking |

723

Vectorworks automatically creates a new design layer and places the cut 3D section on it. The original layer
remains intact. The new 3D section behaves like any other Vectorworks 3D object.

Select the object(s) and select Model > Cut 3D

Section; set the section line and click on either
side of it to specify the section to keep

The 3D section (rotated and rendered)

is created on a new design layer; the
original object(s) are left intact

Dimensions and text are 2D objects; therefore, they do not rotate with the cut 3D section.

Cutting 2D Sections
The Cut 2D Section command cuts a 2D section, or a slice, from a 3D model without affecting the model. The slice is
then placed on a new design layer. For example, to show the profile or a 2D cutaway section of an object in a
mechanical 3D drawing, use this command to create the cutaway section in 2D quickly and easily, without affecting
the original object.
To cut a 2D section from a 3D model:
1. Select the 3D model to section.
2. Select Model > Cut 2D Section.
The cursor changes to cross-hairs.
3. Click to set the start of the section. Draw a line across the object to define the section, and then click to set the end
of the section.
When cutting a section while the drawing is in a Plan projection, the cutting plane (and the cut edge of the object)
is perpendicular to the active layer plane.
When cutting a section while in a 3D projection, the cutting plane is perpendicular to the working plane.
4. Click on one side of the line to indicate the portion of the model to keep.
Vectorworks automatically creates a new design layer and places the cut 2D section on it. The original layer
remains intact.

Layer Linking
Creating Layer Links
Layers created in Vectorworks are independent of each other. Each design layer has its own scale, view, and render
status. In Vectorworks Fundamentals, however, a layer link can be created that combines the geometry of several

724

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

design layers, including referenced layers, onto a single design layer. The linked objects on this design layer display in
the same view and scale, and share the same render status. This can then be used to give an accurate depiction of how
objects in each layer work together. For example, the various floors of a building can be drawn on separate layers and
then linked together into a new layer to form an entire building.
In Vectorworks Fundamentals, consider using viewports instead of layer links, as they provide a better and
easier way to present drawings.
In the Vectorworks Design Series, layer links are being superseded by design layer viewports. For backward
compatibility, the Create Layer Link command can still be added to a Design Series workspace, and existing
layer links can still be viewed and edited. For information on design layer viewports, see Presenting Drawings
with Design Layer Viewports on page 710 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.
The layer link is created on a new design layer that contains links to the existing design layers of the drawing. 3D
objects on selected layers are automatically linked; 2D planar or screen objects can be displayed in the layer link. Once
the layer link is created, updates to the design layers are automatically reflected on the linked layer when a screen
redraw occurs. However, this updating occurs only in one direction; any new objects or details added to the linked
layer will not appear in any other layers. Linked objects cannot be edited on the linked layer; they must be edited on
their source layer.
To create a layer link:
1. Create a new layer, and then make it the active layer.
This layer shows objects on all linked layers and any changes made to them.
2. Select View > Create Layer Link.
The Create Layer Link dialog box opens; the layer being linked to (the currently active layer) is not listed.

Parameter

Description

Layers list

Lists the existing design layers; sheet layers and the active design layer are not
displayed. Referenced layers display in italics.

Display Planar Objects

Select to display 2D planar objects associated with the layer plane, when the layer link
is in a view other than Top/Plan

Layer Linking |

725

Parameter

Description

Project Screen Objects

Select to display 2D objects associated with the screen plane, when the layer link is in
a view other than Top/Plan

3. Select the design layers to be linked from the list of existing layers.
4. Click OK.
Linked layers are locked objects. To unlock a linked layer, select Modify > Unlock. Double-click on an item in the layer
link to return to its source layer and edit it.
To project 2D planar or screen objects after a layer link has been created, select and then unlock the layer link
object. Select the options in the Object Info palette.

Cropping Layer Links

Layer link objects can be cropped in a similar manner to viewports (see Cropping Sheet Layer Viewports on
page 714), although the area outside of the crop cannot be displayed as it can for a sheet layer or design viewport.
When cropped, only a portion of the layer link displays; increase the scale of the layer to create a detailed view. Layer
links with workgroup-referenced layers can also be cropped.
To crop a layer link:
1. Select an existing layer link.
2. Unlock the layer link by selecting Modify > Unlock.
3. Click Edit Crop from the Object Info palette to enter the Layer Link Crop mode.
Alternatively, right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on a layer link and select Edit Crop from the
context menu.
A colored border around the drawing window indicates that you are in an editing mode. The Exit Layer Link
command becomes available from the Modify menu, and the Exit Layer Link Crop button displays in the top
right corner of the drawing window.
4. Create a 2D object (such as a rectangle, rounded rectangle, arc, circle, oval, polyline, or polygon). The 2D object
must define an area; a 2D line, for example, cannot be used. Position the 2D object to delimit the new crop display
area. The fill of a cropping object is always None; however, the pen style can be set from the Attributes palette
while in Edit Crop mode. Set the pen style to None (or the crop object class to invisible) to make the crop object
invisible. Move and resize the 2D object as needed.
To view other objects while in Edit Crop mode, select Show other objects while in editing modes on the Display
tab of the Vectorworks preferences (see Display Preferences on page 48).
Use the Flyover tool to adjust the view as necessary (see Flyover on page 452).

726

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

5. Click Exit Layer Link Crop, or select Modify > Exit Layer Link to return to the drawing.
The cropped layer link is displayed. In the Object Info palette, the crop status has changed to Yes.
By increasing the scale of the layer with the layer link, and making other layers visible, a floor plan can be
displayed (original design layer) along with a detailed view of the floor plan (zoomed in, cropped layer link).

6. To change, replace, or delete the layer link crop, select the cropped layer link and then select Edit Crop from the
Object Info palette to re-enter crop mode. Click Exit Layer Link Crop, or select Modify > Exit Layer Link to
return to the drawing.
The entire layer link is displayed if a viewport of a cropped layer link is created.

Converting Layer Links

In the Vectorworks Design Series, layer links are being superseded by design layer viewports. Because Vectorworks
Fundamentals users cannot create design layer viewports, and Design Series users cannot create layer links, it
occasionally may be necessary to convert a layer link into a viewport, or to convert a design layer viewport into a layer
link.
To convert a layer link into a design layer viewport, first unlock the layer link. Then, right-click (Windows) or
Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the layer link, and select Convert to Viewport from the context menu.

Layer Linking |

727

To convert a design layer viewport into a layer link, select the viewport and then select Modify > Decompose.
The Object Info palette changes to indicate that the object is now a group. Select Modify > Ungroup to create a
layer link.

Aligning Layer Views

The Align Layer Views command provides a one-step method to change all design layers in the drawing file so that
they have identical Standard View and Projection modes. Vectorworks matches all design layers, regardless of
visibility, to the active layers Standard View and Projection modes.
To align design layer views:
1. Select View, and then set the Standard Views and Projection modes for the active layer.
2. Select View > Align Layer Views.
Vectorworks changes the Standard Views and Projection modes for all of the design layers in the drawing file.

Active layer

728

| Chapter 20: Presenting Vectorworks Drawings

Creating and Mapping Textures

21

Renderworks Commands and Tools

When Renderworks is installed, additional rendering commands, light source parameters, options, and two tools are
present in the workspace. The Rendering commands, tools and options are integrated throughout the program in the
following locations:

Item

Description

Render Bitmap tool

Renders a selected area with a specified rendering mode, creating a bitmap

object

RenderWorks Camera tool

Creates a camera view based on specific parameters

Attribute Mapping tool

Adds the ability to move, rotate, and resize a texture on a 3D object surface

VBvisual Plant tool

Places high-quality 3D plants in the drawing

Object Info palette

Maps textures onto object surfaces using the options on the Render tab, and
allows textures to be created and/or edited

Visualization palette

Accesses lights and cameras for quick editing, selection, and management

Resource Browser

Creates new textures and background resources, imports resources, and

edits textures and backgrounds; drag a texture to an object to apply it

Rendering modes

Fast Renderworks, Fast Renderworks with Shadows, Fast Radiosity, Final

Quality Renderworks, Final Quality Radiosity, Custom Renderworks,
Custom Radiosity, and Artistic Renderworks

Batch Rendering

Sets up batch rendering options and executes batch rendering

Additional light sources and

parameters

Adds area lights, line lights, and custom lights, and adds accurate lighting
parameters to point, directional and spot lights

Edit Class(es) dialog box

Specifies texture information for classes

Edit Layers dialog box

Specifies the background resource to apply to a layer

Purge Unused Objects command

Purges unused textures from a drawing file

Create Image Prop command

Creates image props from image files

Convert to Area Light command

Creates an area light

Convert to Line Light command

Creates a linear light

Set Renderworks Background

command (Design Series required)

Specifies the Renderworks background resource to apply to the layer

Export EPix/Piranesi

Creates an EPix (epx) file

Export High Dynamic Range Image

(HDRI)

Creates an OpenEXR file

Export QT VR Object

Creates a QuickTime Virtual Reality Object file

Export QT VR Panorama

Creates a QuickTime Virtual Reality Panorama file

730

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Textures and Shaders

In Renderworks, textures are applied to objects to make them appear more realistic. Textures are composed of
components called shaders. There are four shader types: color, reflectivity, transparency, and bump; each shader
makes an independent contribution to the overall texture appearance. When creating or editing textures, the shader
components are combined or excluded to achieve the desired texture effect.
In addition to using textures, realistic models can be enhanced with the use of backgrounds, weather effects, and the
use of image files as props.
Four shaders contribute to a texture definition. Combining and adjusting these components causes a texture to appear
as an image, colored, bumpy, shiny, and/or transparent. The following table defines the shader types:

Shader

Function

Color

Defines surface color; this can be a plain, uniform color, or a complex pattern like wood or marble

Reflectivity

Defines amount of light reflected by surface; it is dependent on surface texture properties and any
light sources

Transparency

Defines surface transparency or opacity

Bump

Defines surface irregularities which give the texture a bumpy appearance

Shaders are divided into three categories: image-based shaders, wrapped shaders, and solid shaders.

Image-based Shaders
Image-based shaders are created from an image file imported into Vectorworks. These shaders are then mapped to the
surface of an object.

Wrapped Shaders
Wrapped shaders are 2D patterns projected onto a 3D object surface. These shaders are noted with an asterisk after the
shader name.

Solid Shaders
Solid shaders are 3D patterns applied to a 3D object surface. When a shape is changed or portions of the object cut
away, the algorithm recalculates and portrays the object appropriately.
The following example shows the difference between a solid and a wrapped shader. In the solid shader, 3D spheres are
used to make the polka dots; the shape of the dots remain circular even though portions of the object have been cut
away. The wrapped polka shader uses 2D circles to make the polka dots; the shader reacts to the surface of the object,
and the dots appear distorted where the object has been cut away.

Creating Textures |

Wrapped shader

731

Solid shader

Creating Textures
Textures are created and displayed in the Resource Browser and are saved with the file (default resources are
automatically imported into the file at the point of use, and display in the Resource Browser); see Vectorworks
Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173 and Using the Resource Browser on page 175.
Textures are created by defining the shaders that make up the texture.
A library of texture resources is also provided in [Vectorworks]\Libraries\Textures.
Apply textures to an object from the Resource Browser or from the Render tab of the Object Info palette. See Applying
and Mapping Textures on page 758 for more information.

Creating a New Texture

To create a texture resource:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser to open the Resource Browser.
2. From the Resources list, select New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
3. Select Renderworks Texture.
The Edit Texture dialog box opens. Specify the shader parameters. Shader types and properties are described in
Renderworks Shader Definitions on page 839.

732

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Parameter

Description

Name

Specifies the name of the texture resource

Shaders

Wrapped shaders are marked with an asterisk (*); the Edit Mapping properties (see
Applying and Mapping Textures on page 758) affect these types of shaders.

Color

Select a color shader from the list, or choose Object Attribute to apply the objects fill color
attribute. Image-based shaders require the selection of an image file (see Creating
Image-based Shaders on page 734). After selecting the shader, click Edit to edit the
shader properties.

Reflectivity

Select a reflectivity shader from the list (or select None to exclude this type of shader from
the texture). Image-based shaders require the selection of an image file (see Creating
Image-based Shaders on page 734). After selecting the shader, click Edit to edit the
shader properties.

Transparency

Select a transparency shader from the list (or select None to exclude this type of shader
from the texture). Image-based shaders require the selection of an image file (see
Creating Image-based Shaders on page 734). Mask-based transparency shaders create a
transparent mask from an image based on specified settings. After selecting the shader,
click Edit to edit the shader properties.

Bump

Select a bump shader from the list (or select None to exclude this type of shader from the
texture). Image-based shaders require the selection of an image file (see Creating
Image-based Shaders on page 734). After selecting the shader, click Edit to edit the
shader properties.

Size
Set By Image
Shadows

Sets the real-world size for each repetition of the texture

For image-based textures, opens the Set Image Size dialog box, to set the texture size
using the image (see Setting the Texture Size by Image on page 733)

Creating Textures |
Parameter

Description

Cast

Allows objects with this texture to cast shadows (for ray-traced shadows)

Receive

Allows objects with this texture to receive shadows (for ray-traced shadows)

Preview Options

733

The Preview window displays the effects of shader and size selections on a preview
object

Preview Controls

Adjusts the preview position and magnification. Click Pan and drag the preview to the
desired location. Click Zoom In or Zoom Out and then click and drag to create a
marquee; this zooms in or out on a particular section of the preview. Click Fit to fit the
preview to the window (according to Obj Size).

Obj Type

Select the type of preview object from the list; for procedural (non image-based) shaders,
the Flat object type is automatically used to create a preview for OpenGL rendering to
approximate the look of the solid shader

Obj Size

Specifies the preview object size

Shader Check
boxes

Select to preview the associated shader; deselect to exclude the shader component from
the texture preview

Radiosity Options

Opens the Radiosity Texture Options dialog box; specify if this texture should always
participate in radiosity calculations (receive only or receive and emit light) when
rendering with custom radiosity. (Allow Texture Override must also be selected in the
Radiosity Optimizations dialog box. See Setting Custom Radiosity Options on
page 796.) Object overrides supersede texture overrides.

Revert

Returns the texture parameters to the original settings, undoing any changes

4. Click OK to create a texture with the name and properties specified in the Edit Texture dialog box. The texture
displays in the Resource Browser and is saved with the file (the texture preview in the Resource Browser uses the
Flat preview object at twice the texture size for ease of identification).
If modeling a glass object (simple and accurate glass reflectivity shader) with a 3D polygon or other sheet-like 3D
object, duplicate and offset the 3D polygon by a small amount so that rays are traced through the glass with both
an entering and exiting surface.
When texturing a large ground area and using directional lights, smoother shadows are generated for the model
if the ground texture does not cast shadows.

Setting the Texture Size by Image

For image-based shaders, the real-world size of each texture repetition can be set based on a segment of the image.
To set the size of an image texture based on the image:
1. Select the image to use for the texture, as described in Creating Image-based Shaders on page 734.
2. In the Edit Texture dialog box, click Set By Image. If several image-based shaders are used, select the shader with
the desired image in the Choose Image dialog box.
The Set Image Size dialog box opens. Red handles flash briefly to indicate the location of the line segment.

734

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

3. Specify the image length to use for sizing the texture by dragging the line segment into position, and then
dragging the ends of the line segment. If necessary, use the mouse scroll wheel to zoom into and out of the image,
or click and hold the mouse wheel button to pan.
When the line is indicating the desired real-world length, specify the real-world size for the line segment in
Feature Size.
4. Click OK to exit the Set Image Size dialog box and update the Size value.

Creating Image-based Shaders

Image-based shaders are created from image files imported into Vectorworks. Like wrapped shaders, an image-based
shader is applied to the surface of an object. See Applying and Mapping Textures on page 758 for more information.
Different settings are then required depending on the type of shader to be used with the image.

Shader

Image Type

Color

Filtered Image
Image Color

Reflectivity

Image Reflectivity

Transparency

Image Transparency
Mask Transparency

Bump

Image Bump

Multiple image shaders can be combined to create a realistic texture. For example, import a brick image with mortar
joins, and then add an image bump to the brick. In addition, image-based shaders can be combined with non
image-based shader types for a variety of effects.
Most image-based textures are automatically compressed when imported into Vectorworks. Imported JPEG files
retain the original JPEG data; all other image files are compressed using lossless PNG format.
The Artistic Renderworks Color Wash style cannot be used with image-based textures.

Selecting the Image for Import

To import an image for use as an image-based shader:
1. Create a graphics file to be imported as a shader. In a graphics program, save the image in a format that
Vectorworks can import:

Creating Textures |
BMP
PSD

JPG
QTI

PCT
SGI

PNG
TIF

735

PNT
TGA

2. Create a new texture as described in Creating a New Texture on page 731. From any of the four shader
component lists, select one of the image shader types.
3. If a resource with an image is already present in the file, the Choose Image dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Import an Image File

Imports a new image; click OK and proceed to Step 4.

Reuse an Image from

Another Resource

Reuses a previously imported image; select the resource that contains the
image. Click OK and proceed to Step 5.

4. Select the desired image file in the Open (Windows) or Import QuickTime Image Document (Macintosh) dialog
box. Click Open.
5. The next dialog box that opens depends on the type of shader. Refer to the section that applies to the shader.

Shader

Section

Color

Importing Images for Color Shaders on page 735

Reflectivity

Importing Images for Reflectivity Shaders on page 738

Transparency

Importing Images for Transparency Shaders on page 740

Bump

Importing Images for Bump Shaders on page 744

Importing Images for Color Shaders

Color shaders can use images for image color and filtered image. The image color shader displays the image as-is. The
filtered image shader allows an image to be tinted with a specified color.

Filtered Image Color Shader

The process of selecting a filtered image color shader is illustrated by the following flow chart.

736

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Edit Texture
dialog box
Image already
imported in file

Color shader filtered image

No image previously
imported

Import new image

Choose Image
dialog box

Open File
dialog box

Reuse image

Filtered Image
dialog box

Image appears in
Preview window

To import a filtered image color shader:

1. Select and import the image as described in Selecting the Image for Import on page 734.
The Filtered Image dialog box opens.
2. Specify the image-based shader properties and click OK to import the image and preview the texture.

Parameter

Description

Image preview

Edits to the image are displayed in the image preview

Change Image

Selects a different image for import

Flip H/V

Flips the image horizontally or vertically

Rotate

Rotates the image 90 counter-clockwise

Invert

Produces a negative of the image

Creating Textures |
Parameter

Description

Tile Image

Repeats the image in the horizontal, vertical, or horizontal and vertical directions; deselect
for no tiling

Filter Color

Selects a color filter for the image; leave the default selection of Use Object Fill for no
change or click the color box to choose a filter color for the image

Softness

Drag the slider to the right to increase image blurring when rendered in Final Quality or
Custom Renderworks (with anti-aliasing on)

Color Image Shader

The process of selecting a color image shader is illustrated by the following flow chart.
Edit Texture
dialog box
Image already
imported in file

Color shader image color

No image previously
imported

Import new image

Choose Image
dialog box

Open File
dialog box

Reuse image

Image Color
dialog box

Image appears in
Preview window

To import a color image shader:

1. Select and import the image as described in Selecting the Image for Import on page 734.
The Image Color dialog box opens.
2. Specify the image-based shader properties and click OK to import the image and preview the texture.

737

738

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Parameter

Description

Image preview

Edits to the image are displayed in the image preview

Change Image

Selects a different image for import

Tile Image

Repeats the image in the horizontal, vertical, or horizontal and vertical directions; deselect
for no tiling

Softness

Drag the slider to the right to increase image blurring when rendered in Final Quality or
Custom Renderworks (with anti-aliasing on)

Flip H/V

Flips the image horizontally or vertically

Rotate

Rotates the image 90 counter-clockwise

Invert

Produces a negative of the image

Importing Images for Reflectivity Shaders

The process of selecting a reflectivity shader is illustrated by the following flow chart.

Creating Textures |
Edit Texture
dialog box
Image already
imported in file

Reflectivity
image-based shader

No image previously
imported

Import new image

Choose Image
dialog box

Open File
dialog box

Reuse image

Image Reflectivity
dialog box

Image appears in
Preview window

To import a reflectivity image-based shader:

1. Select and import the image as described in Selecting the Image for Import on page 734.
The Image Reflectivity dialog box opens.
2. Specify the image-based shader properties and click OK to import the image and preview the texture.

Parameter

Description

Image preview

Edits to the image are displayed in the image preview

Flip H/V

Flips the image horizontally or vertically

Rotate

Rotates the image 90 counter-clockwise

Invert

Produces a negative of the image

739

740

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Parameter

Description

Softness

Drag the slider to the right to increase image blurring when rendered in Final Quality or
Custom Renderworks (with anti-aliasing on)

Ambient

Drag the slider to the right to increase the effect of the ambient lighting on the texture
brightness

Diffuse

Drag the slider to the right to increase the effect of directional light on the texture

Specular

Drag the slider to the right to increase the effect of directional highlights on the texture

Mirror

Drag the slider to the right to increase the number of reflections on the texture

Roughness

Drag the slider to the right to increase the width of highlights on the texture

Change Image

Selects a different image for import

Importing Images for Transparency Shaders

Transparency shaders can be created from images or image masks.

Image Transparency
The process of selecting an image transparency shader is illustrated by the following flow chart.
Edit Texture
dialog box
Image already
imported in file

Image Transparency
shader

No image previously
imported

Import new image

Choose Image
dialog box

Open File
dialog box

Reuse image

Image Transparency
dialog box

Image appears in
Preview window

To import an image transparency shader:

1. Select and import the image as described in Selecting the Image for Import on page 734.
The Image Transparency dialog box opens.
2. Specify the image-based shader properties and click OK to import the image and preview the texture.

Creating Textures |

Parameter

Description

Image preview

Edits to the image are displayed in the image preview

Softness

Drag the slider to the right to increase image blurring when rendered in Final Quality or
Custom Renderworks (with anti-aliasing on)

Change Image

Selects a different image for import

Flip H/V

Flips the image horizontally or vertically

Rotate

Rotates the image 90 counter-clockwise

Invert

Produces a negative of the image

Mask Transparency
The process of selecting a mask transparency shader is illustrated by the following flow chart.
Edit Texture
dialog box
Image already
imported in file Mask Transparency
shader
Choose Image
dialog box

Import new image

No image previously
imported

Open File
dialog box

Reuse image

Create grayscale pixel

or alpha-channel
color mask

Create Mask
dialog box

Create transparent color mask

Create Transparent
Color Mask dialog box

Edit Mask Transparency

dialog box
Image appears in
Preview window

To create a mask transparency image-based shader:

1. Once the image has been selected and imported, specify the mask properties in the Create Mask dialog box.

741

742

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Parameter

Description

Grayscale Pixels

Creates a mask from the images pixel brightness values; brighter pixels are more opaque

Transparent Color

Creates a mask with a selected transparent color and mask parameters

Alpha Channel

Uses the alpha channel of a source image as the mask (image must contain valid alpha
channel information)

For Grayscale Pixel and Alpha Channel masks, click OK. Proceed to Step 3.
2. If Transparent Color was selected, the Create Transparent Color Mask dialog box opens. Select the mask
properties and click OK.
The source image must be more than eight-bit color to create a transparent color mask. Images with a
monochrome background are easiest to use when creating a mask transparency.

White pixels are

opaque
Black pixels are
transparent

Parameter

Description

Source Image

Displays the imported image. Select the transparent color by clicking a color in the image;
the resulting mask is displayed in the Transparent Color Mask preview. If necessary, use the
mouse scroll wheel to zoom into and out of the image, or click and hold the mouse wheel
button to pan.

Transparent Color

Displays the current transparent color. Instead of clicking on the source image to designate
the transparent color, the color can be selected by clicking the color box.

Creating Textures |

743

Parameter

Description

Transparent Color
Mask

Displays a preview of the mask based on the current transparent color selection and
settings

Color Matching
Tolerance

Adjusts the transparency tolerance; drag the slider to the right to increase the tolerance
level. This allows a wider range of pixels similar to the transparent color to be considered
transparent.

Mask Contrast

Adjusts the mask edge contrast; increase the contrast sharpness by dragging the slider to
the right. Soften the contrast by dragging the slider to the left.

3. The Edit Image Mask Shader dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Horizontal/Vertical
Repetitions

Specifies the number of repetitions of the mask shader in the horizontal and vertical
direction

Single

The mask shader does not repeat; it is only shown once (this is the typical setting, especially
for decals)

Infinite

The mask shader repeats infinitely in the horizontal and/or vertical direction

Custom

The mask shader repeats the specified number of times

Softness

Drag the slider to the right to increase image blurring when rendered in Final Quality or
Custom Renderworks (with anti-aliasing on)

Change Image

Selects a different image for import

Transparent Color
Mask

Edits the transparent color mask settings

Flip H/V

Flips the image horizontally or vertically

Rotate

Rotates the image 90 counter-clockwise

Invert

Produces a negative of the image; useful for swapping the opaque and transparent areas of
a grayscale mask

744

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

4. Specify the mask transparency parameters and click OK. The imported mask transparency is previewed in the
Edit Texture dialog box.

Importing Images for Bump Shaders

The process of selecting a bump shader is illustrated by the following flow chart.
Edit Texture
dialog box
Image already
imported in file

Bump image-based
shader

No image previously
imported

Import new image

Choose Image
dialog box

Open File
dialog box

Reuse image

Edit Image Bump

dialog box

Image appears in
Preview window

To import a bump image-based shader:

1. Select and import the image as described in Selecting the Image for Import on page 734.
The Edit Image Bump dialog box opens.
2. Specify the image-based shader properties and click OK to import the image and preview the texture.

Parameter

Description

Image preview

Edits to the image are displayed in the image preview

Change Image

Selects a different image for import

Editing Textures and Shaders |

745

Parameter

Description

Softness

Drag the slider to the right to increase image blurring when rendered in Final Quality or
Custom Renderworks (with anti-aliasing on)

Amplitude

Enter a value to adjust the apparent bump height; a higher value creates a bumpier
appearance (Range: 0 1)

Flip H/V

Flips the image horizontally or vertically

Rotate

Rotates the image 90 counter-clockwise

Invert

Produces a negative of the image; useful for reversing the high and low pixels for a bump
image

When using the monochromatic textures provided with Vectorworks, the Softness and Amplitude parameters
may require careful adjustment depending on the viewing distance from the model.

Editing Textures and Shaders

All textures, whether created by you, selected from default resources, or imported from the resources included with
Vectorworks, can be edited by changing the parameters of the shaders that make up the texture. This editing can be
done from the Object Info palette, with the changes to the texture reflected immediately in the selected object.
Alternatively, the texture can be edited from the Resource Browser.
A library of texture resources is provided in [Vectorworks]\Libraries\Textures.

Editing Textures and Shaders of Selected Objects

The textures and shaders of a selected object can be edited directly through the Texture menu on the Render tab of the
Object Info palette. The Texture menu allows the textures and shaders that make up the textures to be edited, with
changes displayed immediately in the drawing.

To avoid making unwanted permanent changes to a texture resource that is used by several objects, select
Duplicate (Texture Name) Resource and Edit and work on a copy of the texture resource instead of the original.
Changes made to a copy of the texture only apply to the current selection.

Editing the Texture Resource

To edit the texture resource of a selection:
1. Select the desired textured object(s).
2. On the Render tab of the Object Info palette, click the arrow next to the texture name to open the Texture menu.
3. Select Edit (Texture Name) Resource to edit the current texture, or select Duplicate (Texture Name) Resource
and Edit to make a copy of the resource for editing.
The Edit (Texture Name) dialog box opens, and a preview window is created around the selected object.

746

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

The parameters are the same as those used to create the texture; any changes are reflected directly in the
drawing.

Parameter

Description

Shaders

Select a different or additional shader, or edit the shader parameters, as

described in Creating Textures on page 731

Size

Sets the real-world size for each repetition of the texture

Set By Image

For image-based shaders, click to set the real-world size in relation to a

segment of the image (if several image-based shaders are used, select the
shader in the Choose Image dialog box first). In the Set Image Size dialog box,
specify the texture length to use for sizing by dragging the ends of the line
segment. Then, specify the real-world size for the line segment in Feature Size.
Click OK to exit the Set Image Size dialog box and update the Size value.
The size should reflect the file setup. For example, if the layer scale is 1/4 and
feet and inches are being used, the size should be in feet, not inches.

Shadows
Cast

Allows objects with this texture to cast shadows (for rendering modes that
display shadows)

Receive

Allows objects with this texture to receive shadows (for rendering modes that
display shadows)

Editing Textures and Shaders |

747

Parameter

Description

Radiosity Options

Opens the Radiosity Texture Options dialog box; specify if this texture should
always participate in radiosity calculations when rendering with custom
radiosity. If the texture should receive light but not emit it, select Receive
Light, or if the texture should both receive and emit light, select Receive Light
and then also Emit Light. A texture override must also be selected under
Allow Special Overrides in the Radiosity Optimizations dialog box. See
Setting Custom Radiosity Options on page 796. Object overrides supersede
texture overrides.

Preview Options
Render Mode

Select a rendering mode for the preview window; this does not change the
drawing rendering mode

Update When Values

Change

Select to render the preview with the selected Render Mode as parameters
change; if deselected, the drawing is not updated until the dialog box is closed

Render Selected Object

Only

Select to render only the selected object as parameters change; deselect to

render objects within the preview window as parameters change

(Texture Name) is Used by

Indicates the number of objects in the file with the current texture applied

Editing the Shader

If only the shader parameters require editing, they can be accessed quickly from the Texture menu rather than editing
the texture first.
To edit one of the shaders that makes up the texture of a selection:
1. Select the desired textured object(s).
2. On the Render tab of the Object Info palette, click the arrow next to the texture name to open the Texture menu.
3. Select Edit (Shader Name) Shader to directly edit one of the shaders that makes up the applied texture.
The Edit (Shader Name) Shader dialog box opens, and a preview window is created around the selected object.
The parameters are the same as those used to create the shader; any changes are reflected directly in the drawing.

748

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Parameter

Description

Shader Properties

See Shader Properties on page 843 for a comprehensive list of shaders and
shader properties.

Preview Options
Render Mode

Select a rendering mode for the preview window; this does not change the
drawing rendering mode

Update When Values Change

Select to render the preview with the selected Render Mode as parameters
change; if deselected, the drawing is not updated until the dialog box is
closed

Render Selected Object Only

Select to render only the selected object only as parameters change; deselect
to render objects within the preview window as parameters change

(Texture Name) is Used by

Indicates the number of objects in the file with the current texture applied

Editing Textures and Shaders Through the Resource Browser

A texture and its shader properties can be edited from the Resource Browser. The texture does not have to be applied
to any objects to be edited in this way; changes are displayed in a preview window rather than directly in the drawing.
To edit a texture resource, including its shaders, from the Resource Browser:
1. From the Resource Browser, select the texture to be changed, and then select Edit from the Resources menu.
The Edit Texture dialog box opens.

2. Click Edit to edit the shader. The dialog box that opens depends on the shader. Descriptions of all the possible
parameters are presented in alphabetical order in Shader Properties on page 843.
3. Edit the texture properties as described in Creating Textures on page 731. The texture can also be renamed.

Creating Image Prop Objects |

749

The changes are displayed in the preview window.

4. Click OK to exit the Edit Texture dialog box.

Creating Image Prop Objects

Renderworks allows the insertions of prop objects made from imported images, such as trees, people, signs, and
cars, to make a model look more realistic. An image prop must be in one of the formats listed in Selecting the Image
for Import on page 734. Most image-based textures are automatically compressed when imported into Vectorworks.
Imported JPEG files retain the original JPEG data; all other image files are compressed using lossless PNG format.
For proper display when rendered, an image prop should have a fill style other than None in the Attributes
palette.
An image imported for use as a prop is saved as a texture resource. A library of image prop resources is provided in
[Vectorworks]\Libraries\Image Props.
To add an image prop:
1. Select Model > Create Image Prop.
2. If a resource with an image is already present in the file, the Choose Prop Image dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Import an Image File

Imports a new image; click OK and proceed to Step 3.

Reuse an Image from Another

Resource

Reuses a previously imported image; select the resource that contains

the image. Click OK and proceed to Step 4.

3. Select the desired image file in the Open (Windows) or Import QuickTime Image Document (Macintosh) dialog
box. Click Open.
4. The Image Prop Options dialog box opens. Specify the parameters for the image prop.

750

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Parameter

Description

Name

Specify a name for the image prop (used for the texture and symbol name)

Dimensions

Specifies the image props height and width values

Lock Aspect Ratio

Maintains the images aspect ratio when selected; editing one dimension
automatically changes the other

Mask Options
No Mask

Specifies that no image masking is to be used for the imported image

Use Mask

Specifies that image masking is to be used; click Create Mask to specify the
mask image and properties as described in Mask Transparency on page 741.
When rendering with Custom Renderworks, set the Recursion Level
appropriately (see Custom Renderworks Options on page 791). If the
recursion level is set too low, transparent objects, including overlapping image
props, may appear opaque. In general, set the recursion level to twice the
number of overlapping objects; if there are two overlapping image props, for
example, set the recursion level to four.

Crossed Planes

Creates the illusion of object fullness by creating two image planes at a 90

degree angle to each other

Crossed planes
deselected

Crossed planes
selected

Adding 3D Plants |

751

Parameter

Description

Constant Reflectivity

Excludes the prop from the effects of light objects placed in the drawing; this is
useful for images that already contain shadowed areas

Create Plug-In Object

Creates a plug-in object out of the prop; this allows the prop to be resized and
automatically rotated

Auto Rotate to Viewer

Adjusts the plug-in object so that it is always rendered facing the viewer
In a radiosity rendering, auto-rotate is not possible because the model
geometry within a completed radiosity solution is fixed

Create Symbol

Creates a symbol from the image prop; the image prop name is automatically
assigned as the symbol name. Generating the image prop as a symbol allows
the image prop to be easily re-inserted in the drawing.

Select Auto Rotate to Viewer for crossed plane images, so that the crossed planes cannot be detected.
5. Click OK to create the image prop.
The image prop symbol parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette. In the Resource Browser, the image
prop is listed as a symbol/plug-in object, if selected at creation. In addition, a texture is created for use by the
image prop. Both the texture and, if created, the symbol/plug-in object, are assigned the name provided in the
Image Prop Options dialog box.

Adding 3D Plants
Many designs have a need for plants that render quickly and appear more realistic than image prop objects.
Renderworks includes several high-quality 3D plants from VBvisual, makers of 3D content for rendering packages.
These plants look authentic in all views and cast realistic shadows, without adding excessively to rendering times or
file size. Renderworks includes three free plants; more plants can be purchased to add to the library of 3D plants.

752

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

To place a 3D plant:
1. Click the VBvisual Plant tool from the Visualization tool set.
2. Select the plant to insert from the VBvisual Plant list on the Tool bar.
3. Click to insert the selected plant into the drawing.
When applicable, the low resolution, summer version of the plant is inserted by default. The plant includes a 3D
locus so it can be easily moved; in addition, the plant can be sent to the surface of a site model (see Sending
Objects to the Model Surface on page 215 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide). In plan view, a 2D
version of the plant displays.
The object properties can be edited from the Object Info palette. The options available depend on the selected plant
type.

Parameter

Description

Name

Select the plant species from the list of included or purchased plants, or click More
Plants to purchase additional plants

Height

Select the plant height from the list of available heights for the selected plant

Resolution

Certain plants include both a low- and high-resolution version. Selecting a high
resolution provides the best appearance, but takes longer to render.

Season

Select the season for the plant to display

More plants are available for purchase in Vectorworks format from VBvisual. Purchased plants must be placed in the
default content library folder named VBvisual Plant (see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default
Resources on page 173).

Creating Layer Backgrounds

With Renderworks, backgrounds can be added to create a more realistic drawing. Backgrounds, such as clouds, a color
or color gradient, or an imported image or panorama, are applied on a per-layer basis. In addition, special weather
effects can add to the layer the illusion of snow, fog, ground fog, or shafts of light in fog.

Creating Layer Backgrounds |

753

Renderworks backgrounds are resources that are created and displayed in the Resource Browser and are saved with
the file (default resources are automatically imported into the file at the point of use, and display in the Resource
Browser); see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173.

Creating a Background
To create a background:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser to open the Resource Browser.
2. From the Resources menu, select New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
3. Select Renderworks Background.
The Create Renderworks Background dialog box opens.

4. Enter the name of the new background and select the type of background to create. Click Options to set specific
background parameters.

Parameter

Description

None

Select this option when creating a weather effect without an additional background

Clouds

Specifies a sky background with a background color and clouds

Scale

Specifies the cloud scale (1 10); enter a larger value for larger cloud sizes

Background Color

Select a background color for the sky

Cloud Color

Select a cloud color

Detail

Specifies the level of cloud resolution; drag the slider to the right to specify a
greater level of detail (requires longer rendering times)

754

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Parameter

Description

One Color

Specifies a background with one color; click Options to select the color

Two Color

Specifies a background with two colors which blend to form a gradient; click
Options to select the colors

Top Color

Select the color for the start of the color gradient at the top of the page

Bottom Color

Select the color for the end of the color gradient at the bottom of the page

Image

Uses a specified image for the background (see Creating Image Backgrounds on
page 754)

Image Environment
(HDRI)

Uses a panoramic High Dynamic Range Image (HDRI) file for the background (see
Creating HDRI Backgrounds on page 755)

OpenGL render mode only displays One Color, Two Color, and Image backgrounds.
5. Click OK from the Create Renderworks Background dialog box to create the background resource.
The new background resource is listed in the Resource Browser. It is available in the Edit Design Layers dialog
box (see Applying Renderworks Backgrounds on page 778 for information).
A Renderworks background can be quickly edited by pressing Ctrl (Windows) or Option (Macintosh) and
double-clicking on the resource in the Resource Browser.

Creating Image Backgrounds

To be used for a background, an image must be in one of the formats listed in Selecting the Image for Import on
page 734.
To create an image background:
1. If an image background is specified, select a new image or an image from either the default resources or the
current files resources (see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173).
The Edit Image Background dialog box opens; specify the image height and width (centered on the page). An
image used as a background of this type, as opposed to the HDRI background, remains fixed to the page and
does not change according to the 3D view.
An image can also be reused from another image-based resource if one exists in the file. In the Choose Image
dialog box, select Reuse an Image from Another Resource and specify the resource. The Edit Image Background
dialog box opens to allow editing of image parameters (see Selecting the Image for Import on page 734 for
more information).

Creating Layer Backgrounds |

Parameter

Description

Width

Sets the width of the image in page units (inches or millimeters); width edits also
automatically change the height, to maintain the image aspect ratio

Height

Sets the height of the image in page units (inches or millimeters); height edits also
automatically change the width, to maintain the image aspect ratio

Change Image

Selects a different image for import

Flip H/V

Flips the image horizontally or vertically

Rotate

Rotates the image 90 counter-clockwise

Invert

Produces a negative of the image

755

2. Click OK to use the image in the background.

Creating HDRI Backgrounds

When an HDRI background is imported, it behaves as if an infinitely large, textured, sphere or cube was centered on
the model. The virtual sphere or cube is so large that view position changes do not affect its display. However, view
orientation changes do affect which part of the image is shown in the background; this provides a true 3D sense to the
model.
By default, an image environment background renders as both a background and a light source. However, it is
possible to use one HDRI background resource as an environment background, and another for environment lighting;
see Setting Lighting Options on page 466.

Purpose of HDRI Background Resource

Creation Method

Use an HDRI background resource as both

environment background and environment
lighting

Create an HDRI background resource and apply it to the layer. By

default, the Layer Lighting Options is set to use the lighting from
the current background.

Use an HDRI background as environment

background only

Create an HDRI background resource and apply it to the layer. In

the Layer Lighting Options dialog box, specify None for
Environment Lighting.

Use an HDRI background resource as

environment lighting only

Create an HDRI background resource, but do not apply it to the

layer. In the Layer Lighting Options dialog box, select From
Selected Background and specify the resource.

Use one HDRI background resource as an

environment background and a different
background resource for environment
lighting

Create the first HDRI background resource and apply it to the layer
(environment background). Create the second background resource
but do not apply it to the layer. Instead, in the Layer Lighting
Options dialog box, select From Selected Background and specify
the second resource (environment lighting).

HDRI backgrounds render best in Perspective projection. In Orthogonal projection, HDRI backgrounds are
suitable for lighting and reflections, but appear as a single background color because of the narrow field of view.
For maximum speed and quality, select Use Final Gather when rendering an HDRI background with Custom
Renderworks. One bounce of indirect lighting is generated with HDRI lighting.

756

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

If the HDRI background includes a sun in its image, and the drawing also contains directional lights, the light
directions may not match, creating multiple shadows.

To create an HDRI background:

1. Select the image file to use. Acceptable formats include .exr (Open EXR) and .hdr.
The Edit Image Environment (HDRI) Background dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Preview

Displays a preview of the selected image

Format

The appropriate map type format for the image is automatically determined, and
normally does not need to be changed. To choose a different map type format for the
image, select it from the list (Vertical Cross for a cross image, Panorama for a Mercator
projection, and Angular for a spherical image).

Rotation

Rotates the image clockwise about the Z axis, changing the light orientation and
visible portion of the image (range: -180 to 180 degrees)

Change Image

Imports a different image to use as the HDRI background

Brightness (%)

Specifies the brightness for environment lighting; enter a percentage or drag the slider
to change the brightness. A value over 100% can be entered.

Saturation (%)

Specifies the color saturation for environment lighting; enter a percentage or drag the
slider to change the saturation. A value over 100% can be entered.

Quality

Specifies the sampling value of the rendered image; higher-quality sampling results in
better image resolution, but longer rendering times. Select From Render Mode to use
the Sampling Quality specified in the render options (Custom Renderworks Options
or Custom Radiosity Options, see Custom Renderworks Options on page 791 or
Setting Custom Radiosity Options on page 796).

2. Click OK to use the image as an environment background resource.

Creating Weather Effects

To create a weather effect:
1. Select Window > Palettes > Resource Browser to open the Resource Browser.

Creating Layer Backgrounds |

757

2. From the Resources menu, select New Resource to display the New Resource menu.
3. Select Renderworks Background.
The Create Renderworks Background dialog box opens.

4. Enter the name of the new background and select the type of weather to create. Click Options to set specific
parameters.

Parameter

Description

Fog

Creates a simulation of fog over the layer

Color

Select the fog color

Distance

Specifies the distance to maximum fog density; use a lower distance to increase the
effect of the fog

Max. Density

Drag the slider to the right to increase the fog density

Ground Fog

Creates a simulation of ground fog over the layer

Color

Select the fog color

Height

Specifies the height of the ground fog

Distance

Specifies the distance to maximum fog density; use a lower distance to increase the
effect of the fog

Max. Density

Drag the slider to the right to increase the fog density

Snow

Creates the illusion of falling snow on the layer

Color

Select the snow color

Amount

Drag the slider to the right for larger and more numerous snowflakes

Max. Density

Drag the slider to the right to decrease the distance between snowflakes

Near Scale

Increases or decreases the size of closer snowflakes

Far Scale

Increases or decreases the size of farther snowflakes

Lit Fog

Creates volumetric lighting effects, such as a shaft or cone of scattered light in fog,
haze, or smoke. A light object must be inserted in the drawing, and Lit Fog must be
selected in the Object Info palette for the light source object

Color

Select the fog (haze) color

Max. Density

Specifies the fog density; enter a larger value to increase the density of the effect

Receive Shadows

Allows the effect to be blocked by solid objects, creating shadows; for example, when
blocking a shaft of light by a table, so that light does not display under the table
Use Shadows must also be selected in the rendering options.

758

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Parameter

Description

Type

Select a method for creating the fog from a list of computational methods

Quality

Select the quality of the lit fog effect; a higher quality effect requires more rendering
time

Density Variation

Allows the volumetric lighting effect to vary in density, which creates a realistic
smoky or hazy effect, but takes longer to render

Variation Level

Drag the slider to the right to increase the fog variation

Variation Contrast

Drag the slider to the right to increase the fog contrast

5. Click OK from the Create Renderworks Background dialog box to create the weather effect resource.
The new resource is listed as a Renderworks Background in the Resource Browser. It is available in the Layers
dialog box (see Applying Renderworks Backgrounds on page 778 for more information).
Backgrounds and weather effects can be used together.
Textures and backgrounds that are not used in the drawing file should be purged to reduce file size. See
Purging Items from a File on page 419.

Applying and Mapping Textures

Once a texture resource has been created, it can be applied to the surface of an object. A texture can be applied to a
selected object or to objects assigned to a class.
Mapping specifies how a texture is applied to an object; different objects require different mapping types. By adjusting
texture mapping, various visual effects can be achieved.
2D objects cannot have a texture applied. Objects which cannot be textured display as a Non-textureable
Object on the Render tab of the Object Info palette.
When applying a texture to a selected, textureable object, mapping parameters can be assigned to the texture through
the Object Info palette. The result of these parameter changes is visible immediately in the drawing, as the selected
object is re-rendered.The Attribute Mapping tool also affects how the texture displays on the object and is a direct way
of editing the texture mapping.
Decals are special textures that are applied over other textures. They are created from imported images or existing
texture resources.
Finally, a Renderworks background can be applied to add impact and realism to the design.

Texture Projection and Orientation

Map Types
A sphere, cylinder, plane, perimeter, or roof mapping type is used to control how a texture is projected onto different
types of objects. To further adjust mapping, Renderworks uses a visual control, or texture space, to represent the
projected texture. This texture space can be modified by changing its rotation, horizontal and vertical offset, or scale.
The texture space orientation can also be adjusted.

Applying and Mapping Textures |

759

Object

First repetition
of the texture
Texture space

The map type is selected from the Object Info palette; see Applying Textures to an Object on page 761.

Map Type

Description

Sphere

Projects each vertex of the object to the surface of a sphere

Cylinder

Projects each vertex of the object to the surface of a cylinder

Sphere and Cylinder maps have seams which are more apparent when using wrapped and image-based shaders

Plane

Projects each 3D vertex of an object onto a plane which determines the texture space (u, v)
for that vertex

760

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Map Type

Description

Perimeter

Available for extrudes, tapered extrudes, extrude along path objects, sweeps, and CSG
solids, this option wraps the texture around the perimeter of the objects

Roof

Only available for roof objects, this option wraps the texture across the perimeter of the
roof object

The available map types vary based on the object type being mapped.

Object Type

Map Types Available

Columns

Plane, Sphere, Cylinder

Extrudes

Plane, Sphere, Cylinder, Perimeter

Meshes

Plane, Sphere, Cylinder

Roofs

Roof

Slabs (Floors)

Plane, Sphere, Cylinder

Solid Primitives (Sphere, Hemisphere, Cone)

Plane, Sphere, Cylinder

CSG solids, Extrude Along Path, and Tapered Extrude

Plane, Sphere, Cylinder, Perimeter

Sweeps

Plane, Sphere, Cylinder, Perimeter

Walls

Plane, Sphere, Cylinder

Textures and Drawing Direction

Textures are applied to 3D polygons and walls based on the direction the object was drawn. For 3D polygons, the
texture is applied parallel to the first segment.

Applying and Mapping Textures |

Original 3D Polygon

First segment drawn

horizontally

761

First segment drawn

at an angle

Wall Texture Orientation

The starting point and direction the wall is drawn affects how a texture is applied. Textures are applied to a walls left
side, right side, and center (and, optionally, to its top, bottom, holes, and start and end cap). The center of a wall is
always the same, but the left and right sides change based on drawing direction. When drawing a wall in a clockwise
direction, the left side is the exterior side; however, drawing the wall in a counterclockwise direction makes the left
side the interior side.
A texture applied to the center of the wall is visible at the ends of the wall.
Left (exterior)
Right

Left
(exterior)

Right

Right

Left
(interior)
Right

Left (interior)
In Top/Plan view, arrows indicate the current wall direction

If the texture(s) is incorrectly applied to a wall, with the wall selected, click Reverse Sides on the Shape tab of the
Object Info palette. This flips the direction of the wall, switching the texture(s) to the opposite side(s).

Applying Textures to an Object

To apply a texture to one or more objects:
1. Create or import a texture resource as described in Creating Textures on page 731.
2. Select the object(s) to texture. If more than one object is selected, the texture resource applies to all objects in the
selection. Additional mapping parameters are available for multiple selected objects so the texture renders
seamlessly.
3. Click the Render tab on the Object Info palette.
4. If the object has parts, specify the Overall texture to apply to the parts, or select an individual part and apply a
texture. The selected texture applies to the entire object if it does not contain parts.

762

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Select the desired Texture from either the default resources or the current files resources (see Vectorworks
Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173), and then set the texture parameters, which
apply only to the selected object(s).
The texture parameters and mapping can be edited in the Render tab of the Object Info palette.

Parameter

Description

Part

Some objects can have different textures (including decals) applied to different parts.
For extrudes, sweeps, floors, and roof faces, apply textures to the top, bottom, and
sides.
For walls and round walls, apply textures to the left, right, top, bottom, start cap, end
cap, and holes. Left and right wall texture parts can only be applied to wall holes when
editing the wall hole component; see Adding a 3D Wall Hole Component to a Symbol
Definition on page 574.
For roof objects, apply textures to the top, bottom, sides, and dormer walls, and if the
Design Series is installed, fascia, attic, and soffit. The Part option is not available for
objects without distinct parts.
The texture or decal applied to each part displays in parentheses next to the part. To apply
a texture to Overall or to a part, select it and then select a texture to apply from the texture
list.
Overall indicates that the same texture applies to all of the parts of the object. Parts which
have been assigned a texture different from Overall display above the divider, and parts
with the same texture as Overall display below the divider.

The Overall texture is Glass Clear, and the sides of the object are
inheriting the Overall texture. The top and bottom of the object
have unique textures different from the Overall texture.

Overall no longer displays when all parts use distinct textures.

The additional parts do not display when setting class textures (see Applying
Textures to Symbols, Walls, and Roofs on page 773). A walls start cap, if set to
obtain its texture by class, uses the class texture assigned to the wall center.
Revert to Overall

If a part was assigned a texture but it should inherit its texture from Overall instead, select
the part and click Revert to Overall. The part moves back below the divider, and (from
Overall) displays as its texture name. Any decals applied to the part are removed.

Add Decal

Adds a decal texture to the selected part; see Creating Decal Textures on page 767

Texture list

Select the texture to apply from either the default resources or the current files resources

Texture menu

Thumbnail view

Click the arrow next to the texture list to open the Texture menu. The texture resource or
shader used to create the resource can be edited from here as described in Editing
Textures and Shaders of Selected Objects on page 745. Before editing, the resource can be
copied to preserve the original resource parameters.
Displays a thumbnail view of the selected texture

Applying and Mapping Textures |

763

Parameter

Description

Map Type

Select how the texture is applied to the 3D object; see Map Types on page 758

Reset to Default
Mapping

Removes any changes made by the Attribute Mapping tool or in the Object Info palette,
restoring the texture to its original location, scale, and rotation.

Scale

Determines the texture size when projected onto the object. For example, entering a scale
factor of two doubles the size of the texture projection.
Either enter a scale value or use the slider to change the scale.

Offset H

Sets start location of the texture horizontally

Offset V

Sets start location of the texture vertically

Rotation

Sets the angle of texture rotation. Either enter a rotation value from 0 to 360 degrees or use
the slider to change the rotation angle.

Repeat Horizontally

Repeats the texture in a horizontal direction

Repeat Vertically

Repeats the texture in a vertical direction

Flip Horizontally

Flips the texture horizontally, along the vertical axis

Flip Vertically

Flips the texture vertically, along the horizontal axis

764

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Parameter

Description

Radius

For sphere and cylinder map types, sets the texture radius; the default radius is the same
as the 3D object radius. Increasing this value reduces the size of the texture on the object.

Auto-Align Planar
Mapping

For the planar mapping type, applies a texture perpendicularly to each face of a polygonal
object, making texture mapping much simpler for the object. Only the textures rotation,
offset, and scale can be changed; mapping is handled automatically. This type of mapping
is useful for imported 3ds (Design Series required) or DXF/DWG content. When using
decals, this option should be turned off; for wall sculpting, this option should be turned
on. The Attribute Mapping tool cannot be used to adjust mapping parameters when this
option is enabled. Align Selected Mappings cannot be enabled when this option is
enabled.

Follow Longest Edge

Aligns the textures U axis with the long edge of a face, for simpler mapping when
Auto-Align Planar Mapping is selected. When deselected, the texture aligns horizontally
in object space.

Use World Z For

Origin

Sets the textures Z origin to be relative to the world Z origin, rather than to object space.
This allows seamless texture application across multiple layers for all mapping types.
Multiple objects with this parameter enabled render seamlessly along the Z axis.

Align Selected
Mappings

Aligns the texture mapping of multiple selected objects, giving them the appearance of a
shared texture. Multiple objects with this parameter enabled use the mapping parameters
of the first selected object, and the texture appears seamless across all selected objects. The
shared mapping depends on the objects currently selected and can change with a different
selection of objects. This parameter is available for planar, cylindrical, and spherical
mapping only. It is not available for perimeter mapping or when Auto-Align Planar
Mapping is enabled.

Update

Updates the drawing display

Override Radiosity

Specifies that the selected object should be always participate in radiosity calculations
(receive only or receive and emit) when rendering with custom radiosity. (An Obj Info
override must also be selected under Allow Special Overrides in the Radiosity
Optimizations dialog box. See Setting Custom Radiosity Options on page 796.) Object
overrides supersede texture overrides.

Emit Light

When override settings are enabled, the object will receive and emit light when rendering
with custom radiosity (Receive Light is always also selected)

Receive Light

When override settings are enabled, the object will receive light when rendering with
custom radiosity

The texture can also be applied to objects from the Resource Browser. Click the texture and drag it to the desired
object, or select the desired object(s), and double-click on the texture to apply. Alternatively, select the object(s),
right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) on the texture, and select Apply from the context menu.
However, when a texture is applied in this way, mapping options cannot be accessed directly. Click on the
Render tab of the Object Info palette to edit the texture mapping.
5. The texture is applied to the selected object(s).

Applying and Mapping Textures |

765

Direct Texture Mapping

The Attribute Mapping tool edits texture mapping parameters directly in the drawing window. This tool applies to
textures created with wrapped color shaders or mask transparency shaders. The texture mapping type must be other
than Perimeter for this tool, and Auto-Align Planar Mapping must be disabled (edit textures with these types of
mapping through the Object Info palette).
This tool also modifies decal textures; see Editing Decal Textures on page 770.
When working in Top/Plan view, the Attribute Mapping tool edits image and gradient fills. See Editing Hatch,
Gradient, and Image Fills on page 295.
To edit texture mapping directly in the drawing window:
1. Select a textured, 3D object.
2. Click the Attribute Mapping tool from the Visualization tool set.
Alternatively, select the Attribute Mapping tool first, and then click on the object.
Depending on the textured object and texture type, the mapping type, and the results desired, up to six modes
are available.
3D Mapping

3D Unconstrained

Original Repeat

2D Mapping

Select Part

3D Constrained

Non-Repeating

Mode

Description

2D Mapping

Manipulates the texture in a 2D space

3D Mapping

Manipulates the texture in a 3D space

3D Constrained

Adjusts the 3D mapping only within the current plane

3D Unconstrained

Adjusts the 3D texture mapping without restriction, which permits tilting of the
texture out of the current plane for a skewed effect

Non-Repeating

For repeating textures, displays a single repetition of the texture for easier texture
editing

Original Repeat

For repeating textures, restores the repeating pattern of the texture

Select Part Mode

For textured objects with more than one textureable part, such as walls and roofs,
allows a different part of the object to be selected for texture editing; allows decals to
be selected for mapping adjustments

3. For objects with parts, which may have different textures applied to different portions of the object, select the
part to edit from the Part list. To edit decals, see Editing Decal Textures on page 770.
4. An editing frame is placed over the first repetition of the texture in 2D Mapping mode. In 3D Mapping mode,
the texture plane axis is represented by a colored frame, with the texture origin positioned at the origin of the
axes. The Object Info palette only displays the parameters that can be edited while the Attribute Mapping tool is
active.

766

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

The editing frame provides object snaps in both 2D and 3D for precise texture placement. When editing the
texture mapping, use the editing frame handles to adjust the mapping, or use the data bar to enter precise values
(see Using the 2D Data Bar on page 220).
For cylindrical or spherical map types, the editing frame may be projected some distance from the object,
showing the curvature defined by the map type and radius.

Editing frame
2D mapping

3D mapping - constrained

3D mapping - unconstrained

For easier direct mapping of a repeating texture, click Non-Repeating mode to see a single repetition of the
texture. After editing the texture mapping, click Original Repeat mode to return to the original pattern and see
the effect.

Action

Description

To move the texture

2D mapping: Click inside the editing frame and drag the texture to the
desired location on the object surface
3D mapping: Click the center diamond-shaped handle at the origin, and
drag the texture to the desired location on the object surface. The texture
space moves with the image, allowing you to snap the image to a snap
point on the object.

To resize the texture (2D

Mapping only)

Click on a corner handle of the editing frame (the resize cursor displays), and
drag to set the editing object to a new scale. To resize the texture evenly
about its center, press the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command key (Macintosh)
while resizing. Click to set.

To rotate the texture

2D Mapping: Click on a side handle of the editing frame (the rotate cursor
displays) and drag the handle to the new rotation angle. Click to set. Press
the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command key (Macintosh) while rotating to
rotate about the texture center.
3D Mapping: Click on one of the handles along the axis to rotate about.
The rotate cursor displays, and a dashed preview indicates the rotation
space. In constrained mode, rotation is restricted to the current texture
plane. In unconstrained mode, rotation about any axis is possible. Move
the cursor to rotate the texture, and click to set it.

Applying and Mapping Textures |

Action

Description

To set the texture to a face (3D

Mapping only, planar map type
only)

Click the hand cursor to set the texture mapping to the surface of the
indicated face. The texture space is positioned tangent to the surface at the
click point, with the origin of the texture space at the click point.

767

5. To edit the mapping of another part of a textured object, select the next part to edit from the Part list and repeat
the process.

Creating Decal Textures

Decals allow multiple textures to be applied to a single object or part of an object, over a base texture that is already
applied to the object. The decal can originate from an imported image file or a texture resource present in the file.
Decals can be used to simulate signs on a textured wall, or layered textures for portraying wainscoting on a wall or
patterns on fabric.

Decals must be rendered in a Renderworks mode. The Cartoon and Color Wash Artistic Renderworks modes
cannot display decals.
To create a decal texture:
1. Select a textured, 3D object. A decal can only be applied to an object with an underlying texture; the map type of
the texture determines the decal map type.
The underlying texture must have planar, spherical, or cylindrical mapping for the decal to be edited with the
Attribute Mapping tool. Textures with any type of mapping can be edited with the Object Info palette.
2. If the object has textureable parts, select the part where the decal will be placed from the Part list on the Render
tab of the Object Info palette.
3. Click Add Decal.
The Add Decal dialog box opens.

768

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Parameter

Description

Import an Image File

Imports a new image; select the desired image file in the Open (Windows) or Import
QuickTime Image Document (Macintosh) dialog box. Click Open.

Reuse an Existing Image

Reuses a previously imported image; select the resource that contains the image

Select a Texture

Applies the texture over the objects base texture; no further settings are required

4. If the decal consists of an imported or reused image, the Decal Options dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Name

Provide a name for the decal texture

Size

Sets the real-world size for each repetition of the texture; by default, decal textures
show only one repetition horizontally and vertically

Mask Options

Indicates the type of masking for the image decal

Rectangular Mask

Creates a rectangular mask around the decal; no further settings are required

Image Mask

Masks the decal image per pixel using an image mask to determine which areas of the
image are transparent or opaque

Choose Image

Opens the Choose Decal Mask Image dialog box, for selecting the image mask

Applying and Mapping Textures |

769

5. If creating a rectangular mask decal, proceed to step 9. Otherwise, if creating an image mask, click Choose
Image.
The Choose Decal Mask Image dialog box opens; select the image mask to use. A new image can be imported for
masking, or an existing image resource from the current file can be selected (including the current image).

6. Click OK.
The Create Mask dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Grayscale Pixels

Creates a mask from the images pixel brightness values; brighter pixels are more opaque

Transparent Color

Creates a mask with a selected transparent color and mask parameters

Alpha Channel

Uses the alpha channel of a source image as the mask (image must contain valid alpha
channel information)

For Grayscale Pixel and Alpha Channel masks, click OK. Proceed to Step 9.
7. If Transparent Color was selected, the Create Transparent Color Mask dialog box opens. Select the mask
properties and click OK.
The source image must be more than eight-bit color to create a transparent color mask. Images with a
monochrome background are easiest to use when creating a mask transparency.

770

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Black pixels are

transparent
White pixels are
opaque

Parameter

Description

Source Image

Displays the imported image. Select the transparent color by clicking a color in the image;
the resulting mask is displayed in the Transparent Color Mask preview. If necessary, use the
mouse scroll wheel to zoom into and out of the image, or click and hold the mouse wheel
button to pan.

Transparent Color

Displays the current transparent color. Instead of clicking on the source image to designate
the transparent color, the color can be selected by clicking the color box.

Transparent Color
Mask

Displays a preview of the mask based on the current transparent color selection and
settings

Color Matching
Tolerance

Adjusts the transparency tolerance; drag the slider to the right to increase the tolerance
level. This allows a wider range of pixels similar to the transparent color to be considered
transparent.

Mask Contrast

Adjusts the mask edge contrast; increase the contrast sharpness by dragging the slider to
the right. Soften the contrast by dragging the slider to the left.

8. Click OK to return to the Decal Options dialog box.

9. Click OK to create the decal texture and apply it to the selected object.
The decal is placed on the object; adjust its position, scale, and rotation with the Attribute Mapping tool or
Object Info palette as described in Editing Decal Textures on page 770. By default, decal textures only repeat
once horizontally and vertically, with matte reflectivity and no bump or other material options. This can be
modified by editing the texture from the Resource Browser.

Editing Decal Textures

Similar to other textures, decal textures can be edited from the Object Info palette, and, depending on map type,
positioned and adjusted with the Attribute Mapping tool. Because decals are texture resources, the texture definition
can be edited from the Resource Browser.
Multiple decals can be applied to one object; the decals are applied in a stacking order, which can be changed to adjust
the overall effect of the textures.

Applying and Mapping Textures |

771

Multilayered textures and mapping parameters can be transferred between objects with the Eyedropper tool fill
attributes (Texture). See Transferring Attributes on page 278.
Decals must be rendered in a Renderworks mode. The Cartoon and Color Wash Artistic Renderworks modes
cannot display decals.

Direct Decal Texture Mapping

Decals can be moved, scaled, and rotated with the Attribute Mapping tool. Decal mapping is performed on one decal
at a time, separately from the base texture mapping described in Direct Texture Mapping on page 765.
The map type of the underlying texture determines the decal map type. The underlying texture must have
planar, spherical, or cylindrical mapping for the decal to be edited with the Attribute Mapping tool. For
perimeter or auto-align planar mapping, you are prompted to change to planar mapping to use the Attribute
Mapping tool.
To adjust the mapping of the decal texture with the Attribute Mapping tool:
1. Select a textured, 3D object with one or more decals.
2. Click the Attribute Mapping tool from the Visualization tool set.
Alternatively, select the Attribute Mapping tool and then click on the object with applied decal(s).
3. Select the decal to adjust from the Part list on the Tool bar. The Part list shows the textures mapped to the object,
including the base texture.

4. An editing frame is placed over the decal texture.

Scaling the decal

Rotating the decal

Use the editing frame to set the texture position and to rotate or resize the texture.

Action

Description

To move the decal

Click inside of the editing frame and drag the texture to the desired location on
the base texture

To resize the decal

Click on a corner handle of the editing frame; the resize cursor displays. Drag to
set the editing object to a new scale. To resize the texture evenly about its center,
press the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command key (Macintosh) while resizing.
Click to set.

To rotate the decal

Click on a side handle of the editing frame (the rotate cursor displays) and drag
the handle to the new rotation angle. Click to set. To rotate about the texture
center, press the Ctrl key (Windows) or Command key (Macintosh) while
rotating.

772

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Editing the Decal Texture Parameters

When decal has been applied to an objects overall part or to its parts, its parameters can be adjusted once the decal
part has been selected from the Part list on the Object Info palette Render tab. Fewer parameters are available for decal
textures than for the base texture, because the base texture determines the mapping type for the object.
Multiple decals applied to an object add to the Part list and also add buttons that allow the decal stacking order to
change.

Parameter

Description

Part

Some objects can have different textures (including decals) applied to different parts;
Overall indicates that the same texture applies to all different parts of the object.
The texture or decal applied to each part displays in parentheses next to the part. To
apply a decal to Overall or to a part, select it and then select Add Decal.
For more information, see Applying Textures to an Object on page 761.

Remove Decal

Removes the decal from the currently selected Part; clicking Revert to Overall also
removes all decals along with the base texture

Add Decal

Adds a decal to the currently selected Part

Move Up/Down

Decals are stacked in order as they are applied. When more than one decal has been
applied to a selected Part, click to move the selected decal up or down in the stacking
order.

Texture

Select the texture to apply from either the default resources or the current files
resources

Thumbnail view

Displays a thumbnail view of the selected decal

Reset to Default
Mapping

Removes any changes made by the Attribute Mapping tool or in the Object Info
palette, restoring the decal to its original location, scale, and rotation

Scale

Determines the texture size when projected onto the object. For example, entering a
scale factor of two doubles the size of the texture projection.
Either enter a scale value or use the slider to change the scale.

Offset H/V

Sets the start location of the texture horizontally and vertically

Rotation

Sets the angle of texture rotation. Either enter a rotation value from 0 to 360 degrees or
use the slider to change the rotation angle.

Update

Updates the drawing display

Editing the Decal Texture Definition

Decals, like other textures, are saved as resources and can be edited from the Object Info palette or the Resource
Browser. Decals are masked image-based textures with transparency, but shaders can be added and shader parameters
can be changed. For example, you may wish to apply a bump shader (based on the color image shader) to letters in a
sign to give them a 3D appearance. By default, the reflectivity of a decal is matte, but this can also be changed. Adjust
masking parameters and add vertical and/or horizontal repetitions of the texture if the default single repetition needs
to be changed.
See Editing Textures and Shaders of Selected Objects on page 745 and Editing Textures and Shaders Through the
Resource Browser on page 748 for information on editing the decal texture and its shaders.

Applying Textures to Symbols, Walls, and Roofs |

773

Applying Textures to Symbols, Walls, and Roofs

While textures can be applied to individual parts of many objects, as described in Applying Textures to an Object on
page 761, applying textures to an objects class or classes may be more efficient. Texture resources can be assigned to a
class, which in turn can be applied to objects during creation.
Walls and roof objects have their own class texture assignment tabs for the main textureable parts of these objects.
(Additional parts can be textured individually from the Object Info palette, but not by class; see Applying Textures to
an Object on page 761.)
Roof faces, extrudes, sweeps, and floors contain additional textureable parts, but the Edit Class(es) dialog box
does not make this distinction. Textures are applied by class like any other 3D object; see Applying Object
Textures by Class on page 773. Apply textures to the individual parts of these objects with the Object Info
palette and not by class; see Applying Textures to an Object on page 761.
Textures cannot be assigned to individual symbols directly through the Object Info palette. Textures must be applied
to the separate components of the symbol. This can be done using the Edit Symbol command or by assigning textures
to the classes that make up the symbol; complex objects can contain more than one class. Texture changes affect all
instances of that symbol.

Applying Object Textures by Class

Object textures can be set by class.
To apply a texture by class:
1. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box.
2. Select the Details view option, and then select the Classes tab.
3. Select an existing class or create a new class (see Creating Classes on page 113).
4. With the class selected, click Edit to open the Edit Class(es) dialog box.
5. The texture properties of the class are set by the tabs on the right. Click the Other tab.

774

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Displays when Quartz (Macintosh)

or GDI+ (Windows) imaging
Vectorworks preference is enabled

6. Select the desired Texture from either the default resources or the current files resources (see Vectorworks
Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173). Select Use Textures At Creation to apply the
texture to objects as they are created.
7. Click OK to exit the Edit Class(es) dialog box.
The class displays on the Classes tab of the Organization dialog box.
8. If the object has not yet been drawn, click the blank area to the left of the Class Name to make the class active.
If the object already exists, apply the class to it.
9. Click OK to exit the Organization dialog box.
10. Create the desired object(s). Objects are created with the specified texture for that class.

Applying Textures to Symbols

Textures can be applied to the components that make up the symbol, or to the classes used by the symbol components.

Applying Textures to Symbol Components

To apply texture(s) to the symbol components:
1. Select the symbol to edit.
2. Select Modify > Edit Symbol.

Applying Textures to Symbols, Walls, and Roofs |

775

The Edit Symbol window opens; see Editing Symbol Definitions on page 199 for more information on the Edit
Symbol window.
3. Select the first component that requires a texture.
4. Click the Render tab on the Object Info palette.
5. Select the desired Texture from either the default resources or the current files resources (see Vectorworks
Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173), and then edit the mapping parameters as
described in Applying and Mapping Textures on page 758.
6. Repeat for each component of the symbol.
7. Select Modify > Exit Symbol once all changes have been applied.
The new settings are applied to all instances of the symbol.

Applying Textures to Symbol Component Classes

To apply textures to the symbol component classes:
1. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box.
2. From the Classes tab, select one of the symbol classes to edit.
3. Click Edit to open the Edit Class(es) dialog box.
4. From the Other tab, select the desired Texture from either the default resources or the current files resources (see
Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173). Select Use Textures At
Creation to apply the texture at creation.
5. Click OK to return to the Organization dialog box.
6. Repeat steps 2 5 until all classes have an assigned texture.
7. Click OK to exit the Organization dialog box. The new settings are applied.
Some symbols in the Design Series use style classes; see Using Style Classes on page 182 in the Vectorworks
Design Series Users Guide for more information.

Applying Wall Textures

Walls can be assigned a texture individually with the Object Info palette, or, more efficiently, through an assigned
class.
To apply a texture to a wall(s) by class:
1. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box.
2. Select the Details view option, and then select the Classes tab.

776

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

3. Create a class for wall objects (see Creating Classes on page 113).
4. With the new class selected, click Edit to open the Edit Class(es) dialog box.
5. Click the Walls tab.

Displays when Quartz (Macintosh)

or GDI+ (Windows) imaging
Vectorworks preference is enabled

6. Select the desired Right, Center, and Left wall surface texture from either the default resources or the current
files resources (see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173). Select Use
Textures At Creation to apply the texture at wall creation. See Texture Projection and Orientation on page 758
to understand how textures are applied to wall faces.
7. Click OK to exit the Edit Class(es) dialog box.
The new walls class displays on the Classes tab of the Organization dialog box.
8. Click the blank area to the left of the Class Name to make the new class active.
9. Click OK to exit the Organization dialog box.
10. Create the wall(s); see Creating Walls on page 541.
The walls are created with the specified texture for that class. Existing wall(s) can be assigned the texture through
the Object Info palette. Select the part of the wall to texture from the Part list and then Class Texture from the
texture list on the Render tab.

Applying Roof Textures

Textures can be added to roof objects, dormers, and gable ends, either through the Render tab Object Info palette, or
through an assigned class.

Applying Textures to Symbols, Walls, and Roofs |

777

Use the Roof map type to map textures to roofs. Renderworks automatically rotates a texture for each individual roof
face in a Vectorworks roof object.
To apply a texture to a roof object by class:
1. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box.
2. Select the Details view option, and then select the Classes tab.
3. Create a new class for roof objects (see Creating Classes on page 113).
4. With the new class selected, click Edit to open the Edit Class(es) dialog box.
5. Click the Roofs tab.

Displays when Quartz (Macintosh)

or GDI+ (Windows) imaging
Vectorworks preference is enabled

6. Assign a Top Texture, and if being used, a Dormer Texture from either the default resources or the current files
resources (see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173). Select Use
Textures At Creation to apply the texture at creation.
7. Click OK to exit the Edit Class(es) dialog box. The class displays on the Classes tab of the Organization dialog
box.
8. Click the blank area to the left of the Class Name to make the new class active.
9. Click OK to exit the Organization dialog box.
10. Create a roof with the AEC > Create Roof command (see Creating Roof Objects on page 582).
The roof is created with the specified texture for that class. Existing roofs can be assigned the texture through the
Object Info palette. Select the part of the roof to texture from the Part list and then Class Texture from the texture
list on the Render tab.

778

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

Applying Renderworks Backgrounds

Renderworks backgrounds, which include clouds, colors, images, and HDRI files, as well as weather effects like snow,
fog, and volumetric lighting are resources saved with the file. They are applied to design layers on a per-layer basis.
Backgrounds can also be applied to viewports by selecting the RW Background from the Object Info palette of a
selected viewport.
A Renderworks background can be quickly applied to the current design layer by double-clicking on the
resource in the Resource Browser or by dragging it from the Resource Browser and dropping it into the current
design layer.
The Lit Fog weather effect requires a light source in the drawing with Lit Fog selected in the Object Info palette.
To apply a Renderworks background to the layer properties:
1. Create the background with the desired parameters (see Creating Layer Backgrounds on page 752 for
information on creating Renderworks backgrounds).
2. Select Tools > Organization to open the Organization dialog box.
3. From the Design Layers tab, select the design layer to receive the background.
4. Click Edit to open the Edit Design Layers dialog box.

Displays when Quartz (Macintosh)

or GDI+ (Windows) imaging
Vectorworks preference is enabled

5. Select the Renderworks Background for the layer from either the default resources or the current files resources
(see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173).
6. Click OK to exit the Edit Design Layers dialog box.
7. Click OK to exit the Organization dialog box.
When the drawing is rendered in a Renderworks mode, the background displays. OpenGL can display One
Color, Two Color, and Image backgrounds.

Applying Renderworks Backgrounds |

No weather effects

779

Snow weather effect

Lit fog weather effect

Ground fog weather effect

Fog weather effect

HDRI background

Applying a Renderworks Background in the Design Series

To apply a Renderworks background to the current layer:
1. Create the background with the desired parameters (see Creating Layer Backgrounds on page 752 for
information on creating Renderworks backgrounds).
2. Select View > Set Renderworks Background (Design Series required).
The Set Renderworks background dialog box opens.

3. Select the Renderworks background for the current layer from either the default resources or the current files
resources (see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources on page 173).
4. Click OK.
When the drawing is rendered in a Renderworks mode, the background displays. OpenGL can display One
Color, Two Color, and Image backgrounds.
When in unified view mode (Design Series required), the background selected here displays for all layers,
overriding any background selected for individual layers in the layer properties. To retain the layer background
upon exiting unified view, select Restore Original Views when exiting Unified View mode in the Unified View
Options dialog box. See Unified Layer View on page 747 in the Vectorworks Design Series Users Guide.

780

| Chapter 21: Creating and Mapping Textures

22

Rendering with Renderworks

The foundation Vectorworks program provides a quick, simple rendering solution using OpenGL (see Rendering
with Vectorworks on page 477). OpenGL is good for fast, interactive rendering and medium-quality render previews,
but it cannot create reflections. For final-quality output, use Renderworks; it provides additional light sources, and it
can cast shadows, create reflections, add indirect lighting effects (final gather rendering and radiosity), and produce
much better rendering results through intensive lighting calculations. Renderworks includes the Visualization palette
for easily accessing all lights and cameras in the file. Another benefit of using Renderworks is that an image can be
rendered in any mode from a specified portion of the drawing.

OpenGL rendering performs vertex

by vertex lighting calculations

Renderworks rendering performs

pixel by pixel lighting calculations

Advanced Renderworks Lighting

Default lighting is added by Vectorworks for the basic visibility of rendered objects. For a more realistic rendering, one
or more light sources can be added to the drawing. The addition of a light source automatically hides the default
lighting scheme, so that the scene is not overly bright.
The brightness and color of objects in shadow are affected by the layers ambient light setting.

Scene rendered with light sources as well as ambient light

Renderworks provides three light types: directional, point, and spot. With Renderworks, additional parameters are
provided for these light types, and additional light source types are included.

782

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Renderworks rendering modes must be used for the Renderworks lighting options.

For information on the Vectorworks lighting types and parameters, see Adding Light on page 466.

Light Type

Description

Product

Directional

Projects light with parallel rays

Vectorworks and Renderworks

Point

Radiates light in all directions

Vectorworks and Renderworks

Spot

Projects light in a specific direction

Vectorworks and Renderworks

Line

Emits light from a line

Renderworks only

Area

Emits light from the surfaces of objects

Renderworks only

Custom

Emits light based on a defined complex spatial distribution

Renderworks only

Inserting an Area or Linear Light

An area or linear light can be created from an existing object or line. Unlike the other light source types, which are
emitted from a specific, concentrated source, area and linear lights emanate from an extended object. This is useful for
creating diffused light sources with softer lighting, such as fluorescent lights, neon lights, windows, and skylights.
The color of area lights can be filtered by a texture, texture color, or the fill color of the original geometry. This feature
can be used to create a wide variety of lighting effects, including skylights and stained glass windows.
The addition of multiple diffused light sources can add significantly to rendering time. For efficiency, replace a
small area or line light with a point, spot, or directional light. In addition, since area lights can be slow to render,
it may be better to use an HDRI background with final gather rendering to supply the background (sky) lighting.
To create an area or linear light from an existing object or objects:
1. If creating an area light, select the object to convert to a light source; area light geometry should enclose a surface
(a line or open polyline cannot be used, for example). Select a 2D line, closed 2D surface, or NURBS curve if
creating a linear light.
Select more than one object to create several line or area lights at the same time.
Curved surfaces used for an area light require more rendering time than planar surfaces.
2. Select Modify > Convert > Convert to Area Light or Modify > Convert > Convert to Line Light.
The Light Preferences dialog box opens; indicate the area or line light parameters. Specify light intensity by
loading a distribution file or by manually entering a Get Brightness From value.

Advanced Renderworks Lighting |

783

Parameter

Description

On/Off

Shows or hides the light produced by the light source

Color

Specifies a color associated with the light source; click the color box to select the color.
This parameter is not available if a Color Temperature is specified.

Cast Shadows

Creates shadows

Dimmer

Dims the light source brightness (intensity); enter a percentage or drag the slider bar.
Only the brightness of the light source is affected; the color temperature is not changed.

Use Emitter

An area or line lights actual brightness and color temperature must be specified, so this
setting is not optional

Get Brightness From

Specifies the luminous quantity of the area or line light as a manually entered value or
from a loaded distribution file

User Input

Manually specifies the luminous quantity of an area light as an accurate number; the
units of a line light are always Lumens

Distribution File

Sets intensity distribution data with a standard file specified in Area Light Specs or
Line Light Specs. The brightness value is obtained using the integral of the raw
emission data provided with the file.

784

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Parameter

Description

Color Temperature

Specifies the light color temperature in Kelvin. This refers to an ideal black body
emitter, glowing red hot or white hot. A lower temperature generates an orange
color; the hotter the temperature, the closer to white the color of the light is (see
Correlated Color Temperature on page 836 for typical light source color temperature
ranges).
Specifying this parameter is optional. If not specified, the default temperature is 0,
meaning that the final emission color for the light is entirely controlled by the selection
in Color.
When the temperature is specified, Color cannot be changed. The final emission color is
set by the Color Temperature.
Color temperature settings can be white-balanced on a per-layer basis; see Setting
Lighting Options on page 466.

Area or Line Light

Specs

Sets specific area or line light options and loads a distribution file

3. Click Area Light Specs or Line Light Specs to set additional parameters or load a distribution file.
The Area Light Data or Line Light Data dialog box opens.

Parameter

Description

Dist Falloff

Select the distance falloff function (rate of intensity change while moving along the beam
away from the light source)

Quality

Specifies the sampling quality of the light; select From Render Mode to use the setting
specified in Sampling Quality in the rendering options

Color Filtering (area

light only)

Filters the color of the light emanating from the area light object by the fill color or texture
of its original geometry

Render Geometry

Renders the light object geometry; deselect to hide the original geometry when rendering

Advanced Renderworks Lighting |

785

Parameter

Description

Use Distribution File

Specifies whether to use the attached emission profile data file for the light intensity
information

Distribution File

Displays the distribution file name when a valid distribution file has been selected, or
None if a valid distribution file has not been designated (click Load Distribution to
specify a file)

Load Distribution

Loads light emission profile data from a standard file. The brightness value is obtained
using the integral of the raw emission data provided with the file. The file must be a text
file with industry standard intensity distribution data in CIE, IESNA, CIBSE, or
EULUMADAT format (.ies, .cib, .cie, and .ldt).

4. Click OK to return to the Light Preferences dialog box.

5. Click OK. The object or line is converted into a light. If more than one object was selected for conversion, the
converted objects are grouped. The different directions of the light being emitted by an area light are indicated
by arrows drawn on every surface.

Deselect Show Direction in the Object Info palette of a selected area light to hide the light direction indicators.
The light must be rendered with a Renderworks rendering mode. When an area light is on and rendered, it has
constant reflectivity and does not receive shadows; when it is off, it displays as a normal object.

Editing an Area or Linear Light

The light parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette; see Light Source Properties on page 473.
An area light can be textured to create a variety of effects. From the Render tab of the Object Info palette, select a
texture from either the default resources or the current files resources (see Vectorworks Fundamentals and
Renderworks Default Resources on page 173). The color of the emitted light can be filtered by the texture color(s) or
by the color of the original geometry, when Color Filtering is selected in the Object Info palette.
The area or linear light original geometry can be edited.
To edit the original light geometry:
1. Select the area or line light and then select Modify > Edit Light.
The Edit Group window opens, and the original 3D object or a NURBS representation of a 2D object is displayed.
2. The object geometry can be edited with the 2D Reshape or 3D Reshape tool. In addition, the fill color of the
original object can be changed to modify the color filtering properties of an area light.
3. Click Exit Light at the top right of the drawing window to return to the drawing.

786

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Inserting a Custom Light

A custom light sources emission distribution can be defined by a standard intensity distribution profile for accurate
physical lighting.
To create a custom light:
1. Select the Light tool from the Visualization tool set, and then select Custom Light from the Tool bar.
2. Specify the custom light parameters by selecting Light Preferences from the Tool bar.
The Custom Light Data dialog box opens. Click Load Distribution and specify the location of the custom light
distribution file, and then specify any additional custom light parameters.

Parameter

Description

Light Rotation Angle

Specifies the rotation angle of the light source around an axis connecting the light location
to the light target; this angle defines the reference plane for the intensity distribution curve

Distribution File

Displays the distribution file name when a valid distribution file has been selected, or
None if a valid distribution file has not been designated (click Load Distribution to
specify a file)

Load Distribution

Loads light emission profile data from a standard file. The brightness value is obtained
using the integral of the raw emission data provided with the file. The file must be a text
file with industry standard intensity distribution data in CIE, IESNA, CIBSE, or
EULUMADAT format (.ies, .cib, .cie, and .ldt).

Dist Falloff

Select the distance falloff function (rate of intensity change while moving along the beam
away from the light source)

Direction

Specifies the lights direction by either specifying the light angle or vector

Advanced Renderworks Lighting |

Parameter

787

Description

Angle

Sets the lights angle by pan and tilt. The pan angle is based on an angle of 0 degrees at the
positive Y axis, and is positive in a counter-clockwise direction; the tilt angle is equal to 0 at
the horizontal plane, positive when pointing below the plane, and negative when pointing
above the plane.

Vector

Indicates the direction of the light by specifying the coordinates of its X, Y, and Z delta
vectors

3. Click OK.
The Light Preferences - Custom Light dialog box opens. Specify additional custom light parameters. Emitter
parameters are specified by the distribution file, and cannot be changed.

Parameter

Description

On/Off

Shows or hides the light produced by the light source

Color

Specifies a color associated with the light source; click the color box to select the color. This
parameter is not available if a Color Temperature is specified.

Cast Shadows

Creates shadows

Dimmer

Dims the light source brightness (intensity); enter a percentage or drag the slider bar. Only
the brightness of the light source is affected; the color temperature is not changed.

Use Emitter

A custom lights actual brightness and color temperature must be specified, so this setting is
not optional

Get Brightness From

Specifies the luminous quantity of the area or line light as a manually entered value or from
a loaded distribution file

User Input

Manually specifies the brightness in Lux or Lumens

788

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Parameter
Distribution File

Color Temperature

Description
Sets intensity distribution data with a standard file specified in Custom Light Specs. The
brightness value is obtained using the integral of the raw emission data provided with the
file.
Specifies the light color temperature in Kelvin. This refers to an ideal black body emitter,
glowing red hot or white hot. A lower temperature generates an orange color; the hotter
the temperature, the closer to white the color of the light is (see Correlated Color
Temperature on page 836 for typical light source color temperature ranges).
Specifying this parameter is optional. If not specified, the default temperature is 0, meaning
that the final emission color for the light is entirely controlled by the selection in Color.
When the temperature is specified, Color cannot be changed. The final emission color is set
by the Color Temperature.
Color temperature settings can be white-balanced on a per-layer basis; see Setting
Lighting Options on page 466.

Custom Light Specs

Specifies additional custom light options and loads a distribution file

4. Click OK to return to the drawing.

5. Click in the drawing to insert the custom light.

The custom light object is represented by a pair of perpendicular arrow-head vectors and two perpendicular
circles. The black vector points to the target location; its axis line (the light axis) connects the light source location
to the target. The red vector starts at the light source location, pointing to a reference point on the equator of
the polar intensity distribution. Also known as the zero angle line, it represents the origin for measuring the
intensity on the light curve.
The two vectors form the black circle, and the red circle is perpendicular to it. The black circle represents the
original plane where the light curves are located. The red circle constrains the movement of the zero angle line.
After a custom light has been placed, the light parameters can be edited in the Object Info palette; see Light Source
Properties on page 473.

Renderworks Features for OpenGL

If Renderworks is installed, the OpenGL render mode has additional features that help you to preview and adjust a
scene before it is rendered with Renderworks.
Turn on the Draw Edges feature to outline objects more clearly in the rendered drawing; these edges are similar
to those in the Hidden Line render mode. (See OpenGL Render Options on page 480 for details.)

Preparing to Render |

789

Turn on the interactive Use Shadows feature to see how the shadows fall with different types of lighting. The
shadows render much faster than they do with Renderworks, which makes it easier to adjust the lights quickly.
(See OpenGL Render Options on page 480 for details.)
OpenGL can display three types of Renderworks backgrounds: One Color, Two Color, and Image. It cannot
display Cloud and HDRI backgrounds. (See Creating Layer Backgrounds on page 752 for details.)

Preparing to Render
Once the drawing is complete or near completion, any textures have been applied, and the desired lighting has been
added, consider the following before rendering.

Adding 3D Polygons
Though not necessary, adding 3D polygons can provide receptors to catch and reflect light and shadows, increasing
the ability to represent real-world lighting situations. For example, a large, horizontal 3D polygon can be placed below
a 3D drawing to represent the ground or a floor. Placing several 3D polygons at various angles and locations in a
drawing can provide reflective and transparent receptors for more natural-looking results.

Adjusting the View

Select one of Vectorworks standard views (see Using Standard Views on page 449), and use the Flyover,
Walkthrough, Translate View, or Rotate View tools to orient the drawing. Though the view can be adjusted after the
drawing is rendered, it is faster to set the view while in wireframe mode.

Rendering the Entire Drawing

Renderworks Rendering Modes
Renderworks offers several rendering modes, including custom rendering options, radiosity, and an artistic rendering
option.
To render a drawing, select View > Rendering and the desired rendering mode. The rendering speed depends on the
rendering option selected and the number and complexity of objects in the file.
To cancel a rendering before it is complete, press the Esc key.
The View bar displays the Render Modes for quick access to the rendering commands. The View bar options
display the Render Mode - Short (displaying a shortened version) or the Render Mode - Long (displaying the
current render mode options and the current render mode). The Current Render Mode Options button opens
the settings dialog box for the current render mode, if applicable.

Current Render Mode Options

Render Modes list

Save files in wireframe mode rather than in a rendered mode, so that files draw more quickly when opened.
Rendered viewports are saved in a rendered state when Save viewport cache is selected in the Display tab of
document preferences.

790

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Rendering Mode

Description

Fast Renderworks

Renders without shadows, anti-aliasing, or ray tracing; low

detail level

Fast Renderworks with Shadows

Renders with shadow-mapped shadows, but no anti-aliasing

or ray tracing; low detail level

Final Quality Renderworks

Renders with reflections, refractions, ray-traced shadows,

anti-aliasing, transparency, and a high level of detail

Custom Renderworks

Renders with parameters set by the user (see Custom

Renderworks Options on page 791)

Rendering the Entire Drawing |

791

Rendering Mode

Description

Fast Radiosity

Renders with fast Renderworks parameters and includes basic

radiosity settings, maximized for quick rendering

Final Quality Radiosity

Renders with final quality Renderworks parameters and

includes radiosity and final gather rendering, maximized for
quality

Complex drawings should be rendered with custom radiosity

instead, to reduce rendering time while preserving quality.
Custom Radiosity

Renders with custom Renderworks settings and radiosity

parameters (see Custom Renderworks Options on page 791
and Setting Custom Radiosity Options on page 796)

Artistic Renderworks

Renders with multiple sketch styles for a hand-drawn look

Custom Renderworks Options

Custom render settings provide greater control over fine-quality rendering. These settings are used exclusively by the
Custom Renderworks rendering mode. Custom geometry settings override the 3D conversion res setting on the 3D
tab in Vectorworks preferences. These settings apply only to the current drawing and remain in effect in the current
drawing until the settings are changed. In addition, the settings are saved when creating templates (see Using
Drawing Tablets on page 95).

792

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Custom Renderworks includes final gather rendering, which offers superior indirect lighting calculations for a better,
more detailed, end result. Scenes which are too complex to render with radiosity can still take advantage of indirect
lighting effects by rendering them with Custom Renderworks and final gather rendering. The use of HDRI
backgrounds and final gather rendering can completely avoid the need for radiosity.
To set Custom Renderworks rendering options:
1. Select View > Rendering > Custom Renderworks Options.
The Custom Renderworks Options dialog box opens. Select a category from the list on the left to see the
associated parameters on the right.

Parameter

Description

Texturing
Use Textures
Use Transparency
Blur Quality

Applies the textures assigned to objects; deselect for faster rendering

Select to render transparent textures and shadows where applicable; deselect for
faster rendering without transparency
For simple glass and mirror reflectivity shaders, sets the quality of the blurred
image; higher quality produces a better image, but requires more time to render

Geometry
Curve Detail

Select Low, Medium, High, or Very High faceting and shadow resolution. Low
produces an image with less detail and a faster rendering speed. Very High
produces an accurate image but requires more time to render.

Lighting
Use Shadows

Select to render shadows, and select the type of shadow to create

Rendering the Entire Drawing |

Parameter

793

Description

Ray Traced Shadows

Select to create sharp-edged shadows. Ray tracing determines if each pixel is in

shadow. Rendering times are longer due to this pixel-by-pixel sampling, but
sharply defined shadows are created. The Cast and Receive Shadows option in
the Edit Texture dialog box only works for ray traced shadows.

Transparent Shadows

When creating ray traced shadows, transparent shadows are an option; select to
show the texture and color of the shadowing object in the shadow

Shadow Mapped Shadows

Select to create soft-edged shadows. Shadow mapping determines whether a

pixel is in shadow by comparing the pixel position to a shadow map. Shadow
maps are saved and require buffer memory (for example, a point light requires six
shadow maps). Lower Map Detail levels produce softer shadows, render faster,
and require less memory. Higher Map Detail levels require more memory and
produce sharper shadow edges.

Sampling Quality

Select the level of detail for area, line light, and environment (HDRI background)
geometry; higher detail provides better resolution, with texture detail and softer
shadows, but requires more time to render

Lighting Options

Click Layer Lighting Options (from a design layer) or Viewport Lighting

Options (from a viewport) to quickly access the associated lighting options dialog
box. See Setting Lighting Options on page 466 for more information.

Final Gather
Use Final Gather

Produces single-bounce indirect lighting effects

Detail Size

Controls the terminating resolution for light and shadow detail. Setting the size
lower captures more indirect lighting details, resulting in a higher-quality image
that also takes longer to render.

Accuracy

Affects the resolution of indirect lighting effects. Enter a value, or drag the slider
to the right to increase the quality and smoothness, but also the render time.

Calculate Rough Specular

Highlights

For reflectivity shaders, increases the number of traced specular rays, resulting in
a more accurate specular highlight. The Roughness setting for reflectivity shaders
(see Importing Images for Reflectivity Shaders on page 738) affects this
parameter.

Rendering
Use Anti-Aliasing

Select for smoother edges on objects and textures; deselect for faster rendering
with rougher edges

Use Ray Tracing

Creates more realistic-looking reflective objects; rendering speeds will be affected,

but improved quality will result.

Max Refractions

Increase the refraction level for drawings with transparent objects, including
overlapping image props, so that they do not appear opaque. In general, set the
refraction level to that of the number of overlapping objects; if there are four
overlapping image props, for example, set the recursion level to four.

Max Reflections

Enter the number of levels of reflection among objects; a higher value slows
rendering, but yields a more realistic image, especially for glass or mirrored
objects

794

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Parameter

Description

Auto-Adjust Exposure

Automatically adjusts the rendered image exposure for overly illuminated scenes
(this is particularly useful for light types with intensity options specified)

Brightness

Adjusts the exposure brightness, if the automatic adjustment does not produce
the desired result; enter a value or drag the slider to the right to increase the
brightness (above 100%) or to the left to decrease the brightness (below 100%)

When testing a rendering, set the detail to low and turn textures off. Lower rendering quality is offset by faster
rendering times.
2. Click OK to set the Custom Render options.

Radiosity
Although they are effective and relatively efficient, the ray-tracing calculations used in Renderworks rendering modes
cannot produce the full range of lighting effects seen in the real world. The most realistic, yet intensive, rendering
effects require radiosity. By adding the indirect lighting and soft lighting effects of radiosity, a rendering can seem
highly realistic.
Radiosity is a rendering technique that models light energy transfer between drawing geometry and materials.
Radiosity treats each section of drawing geometry as both an absorber and emitter of light. Light energy starts from
the light sources present in the drawing; the surfaces that the light illuminates then re-emit the light energy, with
changes to the light quality producing softer shadows, color bleeding between differently colored surfaces (because
a colored surface re-emits colored light), and softer, diffused lighting. The light energy bounces around until it stops
producing an effect.

The radiosity rendering method generates large mesh structures to resolve lighting details in the image. The
parameters necessary to create a drawing with radiosity, combined, are called a radiosity solution. It is possible for
the radiosity solution to require too much detail or such high amounts of mesh data that the rendering cannot take
place over a reasonable time period. By balancing the need for sufficient detail in important parts of the image with the
exclusion of excess data that is not as necessary, a good radiosity solution can be produced. In addition, the use of final
gather rendering with radiosity can improve quality and shorten render times. Renderworks provides the tools
necessary to create the radiosity solution properly, for a high-quality rendering in the shortest possible amount of
time.
Radiosity can be highly effective for matte drawings. It cannot produce indirect lighting effects for specular
reflections, or for light distorted by glass.
Radiosity is available with three Renderworks commands. For a quicker, lower-quality radiosity solution, select
View > Rendering > Fast Radiosity. For a high-quality, but slower, radiosity solution, select View > Rendering > Final
Quality Radiosity. Finally, for complex drawings, Custom Radiosity rendering allows the radiosity solution to be
controlled by setting up and testing the radiosity solution manually.

Rendering the Entire Drawing |

795

Radiosity Workflow
It can take some time to come up with an effective radiosity solution for a drawing. In addition, the rendering process
itself can require significant amounts of time. Therefore, certain steps are recommended in order to achieve the best
radiosity rendering.
1. The drawing should be as close to completion as possible. Modifications to the drawing geometry, materials, or
lighting will cause the radiosity solution to be deleted, requiring the solution to be regenerated at the next render.
Radiosity solutions for design layers are not saved with the file. For viewports, individual radiosity solutions for
each render mode that supports radiosity are stored with the file, if the Save viewport cache option is selected on
the Display tab of document preferences.
2. For a preliminary view of the radiosity solution, select View > Rendering > Fast Radiosity. If the drawing is not
too complex, then select View > Rendering > Final Quality Radiosity. The automatic radiosity solution and final
gather rendering clean-up provided may be exactly what is required for the final presentation of a drawing.
A rendering made with final quality radiosity may take a considerable amount of time. For a complex model,
optimizing the radiosity settings first and then rendering with custom radiosity is recommended.
3. For a custom radiosity solution, first specify the custom Renderworks parameters by selecting View >
Rendering > Custom Radiosity Options, and make custom settings for the categories in the Custom Radiosity
Options dialog box (see Custom Renderworks Options on page 791). Selecting Use Final Gather is
recommended, for clean-up of triangular artifacts and light and shadow leaks, and for the indirect lighting of
objects which are excluded from the radiosity solution. Like radiosity, final gather rendering creates indirect
lighting effects, but from a single light bounce rather than the multiple light energy transfers of radiosity. A
combination of coarse radiosity and fine final gather rendering settings can produce efficient, high-quality
rendering effects.
4. With a specific setting, objects and textures can override the radiosity parameters, so that they always participate
in a custom radiosity rendering (this allows radiosity settings to be set to exclude many other objects, without
eliminating these specific textures and/or objects, saving unnecessary calculation time). For maximum efficiency,
exclude all but the largest or most important objects from the radiosity rendering, and set the final gather
rendering to handle the indirect lighting effects of the remaining objects.
Textures and objects can specifically only receive light, or both receive and emit light. Specify these overrides
before attempting the radiosity rendering. For these types of textures, click Radiosity Options in the Edit Texture
dialog box, and then select Override Radiosity Settings. To allow certain objects to override the radiosity
settings, select Override Radiosity on the Render pane in the Object Info palette. An object can override its
texture settings; if a texture does not have an override, but the object does, the override applies.
5. To optimize the radiosity solution, select View > Rendering > Custom Radiosity Options, and then click the
Radiosity Options category in the Custom Radiosity Options dialog box. These parameters are described in
Setting Custom Radiosity Options on page 796.
Click Optimizations to limit the radiosity bounds, if possible; for example, if only one area of a large model is
illuminated, the rest of the model can be excluded from the radiosity calculations.
Select Allow Special Overrides to include specially marked textures and objects regardless of the radiosity
settings.
Click Show Color-Coded Preview in the Radiosity Options category of the Custom Radiosity Options dialog
box, to preview the drawing while setting the sliders to their optimal positions. Insignificant geometry
should be optimized out of the solution, until the preview displays that the final results will have the desired
detail sizes.

796

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

6. Test the radiosity solution by setting a Time Limit and Energy percentage, and then press Start. During solution
generation, a rendered preview of only the indirect lighting is shown in the drawing window, and solution
statistics are displayed. Press the Esc key to further refine the solution, and then press Resume to continue it.
Once the preview displays an acceptable solution, press Accept.
7. Render the customized radiosity solution for final presentation by selecting View > Rendering > Custom
Radiosity.
To stop the generation of a radiosity rendering, press the Esc key, or Command-period (Macintosh), Ctrl-period
(Windows), and a dialog box opens, asking whether to continue, delete, or accept the current solution.
A radiosity solution is view-independent. The view can be changed, or the Flyover, Pan, and Zoom tools used,
for example, and the current solution is used to re-render the drawing. However, changes to the drawing
geometry, textures, fill colors, materials, or lighting cause the solution to be deleted.

Setting Custom Radiosity Options

Setting the radiosity options for custom radiosity rendering provides a high level of control over the radiosity solution.
The radiosity solution can be tested, stopped, changed, and resumed in order to determine the best parameters for
rendering in a reasonable amount of time.
To set custom radiosity options:
1. Select View > Rendering > Custom Radiosity Options.
2. The Custom Radiosity Options dialog box opens. Select a category from the list on the left to see the associated
parameters on the right.
The Texturing, Geometry, Lighting, Final Gather, and Rendering categories contain parameters described in
Custom Renderworks Options on page 791. The parameters set in these categories are identical to the custom
Renderworks settings, but apply to the custom radiosity rendering.
3. Click the Radiosity Options category to specify the custom radiosity settings.

Rendering the Entire Drawing |

797

Parameter

Description

Obj Inclusion

Controls the number of objects participating in the radiosity solution; objects below this
size receive light energy, but do not emit it. Drag the slider to the right to increase the
number of objects included. For maximum efficiency, set the size high enough to
include only the largest and most significant objects, and enable final gather rendering
to handle the smaller objects.

Init Detail

Controls the size of the emitting surfaces and the starting size of the receiving surfaces;
drag the slider to the right to decrease the triangle (mesh) size

Accuracy

Controls the tendency for the mesh to approach the terminating resolution for light and
shadow details; increasing this parameter affects the resolution of indirect shadows. In
addition, it affects the accuracy of the light transport from surface to surface. Drag the
slider to the right to increase the accuracy percentage.

Energy

Sets the amount of indirect light energy for the radiosity solution; when this level is
attained, the solution is complete. Drag the slider to the right to further refine an
existing solution.

Time Limit

Specifies a time limit in hours and minutes for terminating the radiosity solution. The
solution terminates when either the time limit is reached or the desired Energy limit has
been achieved (whichever comes first).

Optimizations

Specifies further control over which surfaces participate in the radiosity solution

Ambient Options

Specifies the ambient lighting setting; ambient lighting can have a significant effect on a
radiosity rendering

Show Color-Coded
Preview

Provides a visual indication of the detail sizes and optimizations applied to the current
scene, to quickly be able to eliminate insignificant geometry from the solution. The
preview is color-coded to denote object inclusion, bounding volume limit, and initial
detail values.
Red: Obj Inclusion (shows objects receiving but not emitting light)
Yellow: Init Detail
Black: Objects that are not included in the radiosity solution and are neither emitting
nor receiving light, because they are outside the bounding volume (specified in
Optimizations), or have overrides applied to them
Grayscale: Objects that are both receiving and emitting light energy are shown in a
grayscale relative to their size

4. To control the ambient light options, click Ambient Options.

The Ambient Options dialog box opens. Normally, ambient lighting should be turned off for a radiosity
rendering, to avoid overlighting.

798

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Parameter

Description

Use Layer/Viewport
Ambient Settings

Uses the ambient lighting setting specified in the Layer Lighting Options dialog box
(View > Lighting > Set Layer Lighting Options) or in the Viewport Lighting Options
dialog box (click Lighting Options from the Object Info palette Shape tab of a selected
viewport)

Create Ambient from

Remaining Energy

Converges the solution to the percentage specified in Energy and then applies the
remaining light energy to all the objects as ambient light energy (can cause a scene to
become overly bright if a significant amount of light energy remains)

Dont Use Ambient Light

Turns off ambient lighting for the radiosity rendering, which is recommended when
emphasizing indirect lighting effects

5. To control which surfaces participate in the radiosity solution, click Optimizations. Before the solution is
generated, visibility information is gathered to exclude insignificant objects from the solution, either because
they are not visible, or they are not participating in the indirect lighting scheme. If textures and/or objects have
radiosity overrides, enable the overrides.

Rendering the Entire Drawing |

Parameter

Description

Optimize for Static View

Enables optimization options for rendering a static view with radiosity (deselect if
planning to change views or create a movie from the rendering)

Include Visible
Surfaces Only
Limit Radiosity Bounds

799

Only visible surfaces participate in receiving and emitting indirect light; use overrides
to include specific non-visible objects in the rendering
Limits the radiosity solution to a 3D bounding volume (for example, the rest of a
building may not need to participate in the rendering, when only one room is of
interest)

Derive from Static

View

Automatically determines the radiosity bounds using visibility data of objects in the
current view gathered for static view optimization; includes objects behind the viewer

Manually

Specifies manual coordinates for the bounding volume. The bounding volume is
previewed with dotted lines; objects outside the bounding volume are shown in black.
Specify the minimum and maximum X, Y, and Z coordinates to determine the bounding
volume.

800

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Parameter

Description

Allow Special Overrides

Allows specific objects to participate in emitting or receiving indirect lighting during

radiosity processing

Special Overrides

Sets the participation of objects with radiosity overrides set in the Object Info palette
and textures with overrides set in the Edit Texture dialog box

Obj Info and Texture

Enables the override options in both the Edit Texture dialog box and the Render tab of
the Object Info palette to allow objects and textures with overrides to emit or receive
indirect lighting during radiosity processing, regardless of the custom radiosity
parameters

Texture Only

Enables the Override Radiosity Settings option in the Edit Texture dialog box to allow
objects with that texture applied to emit or receive indirect lighting during radiosity
processing, regardless of the custom radiosity parameters

Obj Info Only

Enables the Override Radiosity option on the Render tab of the Object Info palette to
allow specific objects to emit or receive indirect lighting during radiosity processing,
regardless of the custom radiosity parameters

Other Items

Sets the emit/receive properties of objects and textures without overrides

Emitting surfaces are processed from brightest to darkest

May Emit and

Receive

Allows objects and textures without overrides to possibly receive and re-emit light
energy, depending on the radiosity settings

May Only Receive

Allows objects and textures without overrides to possibly receive light energy,
depending on the radiosity settings, but not re-emit it

May Neither Emit

Nor Receive

Allows objects without overrides to neither emit nor receive light energy, excluding
them from participating in the radiosity solution. These objects and textures are
rendered only by direct lighting.

Update Preview

Updates the color-coded preview (Show Color-Coded Preview must be selected in the
Radiosity Options category of the Custom Radiosity Options dialog box)

6. Click the Radiosity Solution category to generate the solution.

The radiosity settings are used for a rendering with radiosity when View > Rendering > Custom Radiosity is
selected. However, the radiosity solution can be generated from the Custom Radiosity Options dialog box first, if
desired, in order to refine a solution until it is acceptable. By using the color-coded preview and the Solution Info
controls (Start/Resume, Accept, Delete, and the Esc key), the radiosity solution can be refined until the best
quality is achieved in the shortest amount of time.

Rendering the Entire Drawing |

Parameter

Description

Solution Info

Displays statistics gathered from the current solution, while a solution is being generated
and once it is complete

801

Energy: displays the solutions indirect light energy value; when this value reaches the
Energy setting, the current solution has been produced.
Emitting: shows the number of triangles emitting light energy
Receiving: shows the number of triangles receiving light energy
Time Used: displays the elapsed solution time
Time Remaining (Est.): displays an estimate of the remaining time until the Energy level
has been reached and the solution is complete
Median Obj Size: displays the median size of objects in the model, and sets the halfway
position for the Obj. Inclusion, Init Detail, and Small Detail parameter sliders
Start/Resume

Begins generating the radiosity solution, or proceeds with a paused solution if the Energy
percentage has not been achieved.
To pause the generation of a radiosity solution, press the Esc key, or Command-period
(Macintosh), Ctrl-period (Windows).

Accept

When a solution exists, but the specified Energy value has not been reached, pressing
Accept changes the Energy slider to the current solutions energy value

Delete

Deletes a solution; press Start to restart the solution from the beginning

Once a solution has been completed, the radiosity parameters cannot be changed. Click Delete if changes are
desired, and then generate the solution again by pressing Start.

802

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Artistic Renderworks Options

When selecting the Artistic Renderworks mode, a variety of styles and options are available to create a hand-drawn or
artistic look for a 3D drawing. These settings apply only to the current drawing and remain in effect in the current
drawing until the settings are changed. In addition, the settings are saved when creating templates (see Creating
Templates on page 89).
Artistic Renderworks does not produce sketch rendering of 2D objects.
To set Artistic Renderworks options:
1. Select View > Rendering > Artistic Renderworks Options.
2. The Artistic Renderworks Options dialog box opens. A preview scene is shown in order to evaluate the effects of
the different options.

3. Select the Style from the list, and then click Options to set specific style parameters. The preview image displays
the resulting effect.
Certain Artistic Renderworks styles use hidden line rendering. These styles may require longer rendering times
for drawings with many facets (polygons). A style that does not use hidden line rendering is recommended for
extremely complex drawings.
Many of the Artistic Renderworks styles allow the layers Renderworks background to show through, if one has
been defined and applied (see Applying Renderworks Backgrounds on page 778).

Rendering the Entire Drawing |

803

Artistic Renderworks
Option

Description

Uses Hidden
Line Rendering

Shows
Background

Cartoon

Traces a border around edges of objects and combines

simplified shading with drawn edges

yes

no

yes

no

no

yes

Line Color

Specify the outline color by clicking the color box

Line Width

Specifies the outline thickness

Color Wash

Traces a border around the object edges, fades out color,

and can provide a mottled appearance

Line Color

Specify the outline color by clicking the color box

Line Width

Specifies the outline thickness

Mottling

Adds lighter/darker areas, for a mottled appearance

Wash

Fades colors for a washed-out appearance

Contour

Uses directional lines to represent the image shapes

Line Length

Indicates the contour line length

Line Density

Indicates the contour line density; higher density better

defines the image shapes, while lower density allows
more of the background to show through

Line Color

If Use Object Colors is deselected, specify the contour line

color by clicking the color box

Use Object Colors

Draws contour lines using the image colors for each area
of the image; deselect to use a single color

804

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Artistic Renderworks
Option

Description

Uses Hidden
Line Rendering

Shows
Background

Tapered Lines

Simulates a hand drawing of the image, with lines that

taper

yes

yes

no

yes

Line Color

Specify the outline color by clicking the color box

Line Width

Specifies the outline thickness

Wobbliness

Indicates the amount of deviation from the intended

outline

Curliness

Increasing the slider adds waviness to the intended

outline

Tapering

Varies the outline thickness by tapering

Hatch

Shades the image with hatch lines, all with the same angle

Line Color

If Use Object Colors is deselected, specify the hatch line

color by clicking the color box

Line Width

Indicates the hatch line thickness

Wobbliness

Indicates the amount of deviation from a straight hatch

line

Line Length

Specifies the hatch line length

Line Density

Sets the number of hatch lines; higher density better

defines the image shapes, while lower density allows
more of the background to show through

Use Object Colors

Draws hatch lines using the image colors for each area of
the image; deselect to use a single color

Rendering the Entire Drawing |

805

Artistic Renderworks
Option

Description

Uses Hidden
Line Rendering

Shows
Background

Ink Print

Draws the image with a solid color and outlines the image
with the background color

yes

yes

yes

yes

no

yes

Ink Color

Specifies the solid color

Gap Width

Indicates the outline thickness

Lines and Shadow

Traces a border around the edges of objects and displays

shadows

Line Color

Indicate the outline color by clicking the color box

Line Width

Specifies the outline thickness

Shadow Color

Indicate the color of any shadows by clicking the color box

Mosaic

Displays the image as mosaic tiles

Gap Color

Specifies the color for the spaces between the tiles

Gap Width

Sets the gap width between the tiles

Tile Size

Indicates the size of the tiled sections

Tile Shape

Sets the tiles irregular appearance

Gap Transparency

Specifies the transparency of the gap between the tiles;

allows more or less of the background to show through

806

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Artistic Renderworks
Option

Description

Uses Hidden
Line Rendering

Shows
Background

Oil Painting

Provides the appearance of an oil painting

no

yes

yes

yes

Mark Size

Specifies the brush stroke size

Mark Count

Indicates the brush stroke number; more brush strokes

better define the image shapes, while lower density allows
more of the background to show through

Mark Blend

Sets how well the brush strokes blend together

Overlapping Lines

Simulates a hand-drawn pencil or marker drawing with

multiple strokes of well-defined line(s)

Line Color

Indicate the line color by clicking the color box

Line Width

Specifies the thickness of the line(s)

Line Count

Sets the number of lines drawn to define the drawing

outline

Wobbliness

Indicates the amount of deviation from the intended

outline

Curliness

Increasing the slider adds waviness to the intended

outline

Rendering a Selected Area |

807

Artistic Renderworks
Option

Description

Uses Hidden
Line Rendering

Shows
Background

Soft Lines

Simulates a hand-drawn pencil drawing with soft,

smudged pencil line(s)

yes

yes

no

no

Line Color

Indicate the line color by clicking the color box

Line Width

Specifies the line thickness

Blurriness

Increase the slider for a softer line

Coverage

Specifies the amount of transparent areas (pencil skips) in

the line

Scale

Specifies the size of transparent areas in the line

Stipple

Represents the drawing with irregular dots or short

strokes of color

Dot Color

If Use Object Colors is deselected, specify the color for the

stipple dots by clicking the color box

Dot Count

Specifies the number of stipple dots to use

Use Object Colors

Draws stippling using the image colors for each area of

the image; deselect to use a single color

4. Click OK to set the Artistic Renderworks options.

Rendering a Selected Area

The Render Bitmap tool creates a rendered bitmap image of a selected area and places it on top of the drawing.
Manipulate this image similar to imported images.
Use this tool to preview a section of a drawing, or create a layout of several rendered views. It is also possible to render
the entire drawing, creating an image that can be sent to a printer for preview or final quality output, or exported into
a different image file format and saved.
The Render Bitmap tool renders the image with the specified resolution and rendering mode. The bitmap created by
the tool draws using the options selected on the Display tab in the document preferences (see Setting Document
Preferences on page 58). Choose Full Resolution, Reduced Resolution or Bounding Box. The bounding box option
displays as a gray rectangle bitmap image. Using this option saves re-drawing time when using the Pan tool or scroll
bars.

808

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

The image created by the Render Bitmap tool is compressed by either the JPEG or PNG compression method, to
reduce file size. The compression used depends on the Default compression selected on the Edit tab of Vectorworks
preferences (see Edit Preferences on page 47).
To render a specified area:
1. Select the Render Bitmap tool from the Visualization tool set.
2. Click the Render Bitmap Preferences Tool bar button.
The Render Bitmap Settings dialog box opens. Specify the rendering mode and any options.

Parameter

Description

Render Mode

Select the rendering mode for the image; if the mode has additional
settings, click Options to make any changes (changes are also made to
the design layer settings)

Resolution (DPI)

Specify the resolution for the bitmap in dots per inch, relative to the
page; lower resolution values reduce file size

3. Click OK.
4. Click and drag to create a marquee box around the desired area.
The area is rendered and a bitmap image of the rendered area is placed on top of the original area.
5. Move the new image to the desired location.

After rendering, the rendered bitmap image can be cut from Vectorworks and pasted into any image editing
program for further manipulation.

Batch Rendering |

809

Batch Rendering
Batch rendering allows several images to be rendered while the computer is unattended. Each batch job retains its own
view, rendering mode, resolution, and export settings.

Creating Batch Rendering Jobs

The batch rendering job specifies the job name, rendering mode and options, and image dimensions and format, for
the current drawing file.
To create a batch rendering job:
1. Establish the desired file view and level of magnification.
The Export Image File settings determine the specific dimensions of the exported area and the visibility of objects
(see Exporting an Image File on page 602).
2. Select View > Rendering > Create Batch Render Job.
The Create Batch Render Job dialog box opens. Specify the rendering job parameters and click OK.

Parameter

Description

Name

Specifies the rendering job name for creating the batch

Render Mode

Select the rendering mode from the list

Options

For OpenGL and Custom Renderworks rendering modes, the default

file settings are in effect; to change the settings, click Options. These
changes apply to the current job only.
For more information on OpenGL settings, see Rendering with
Vectorworks on page 477. For Custom Renderworks settings, see
Custom Renderworks Options on page 791.

Set Export Image File Options

Opens the Export Image File dialog box for specifying the rendered
image file settings, including export area and format

The Marquee export area option in the Export Image File dialog box is not available for batch rendering jobs.
3. Create additional batch rendering jobs as required.
Batch jobs can be renamed, edited, or deleted from the Start Batch Render dialog box.

810

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Starting the Rendering Job Batch

Once rendering jobs have been created, specify their order and the rendered file location.
To specify the rendering job batch:
1. When it is time to begin the batch rendering process, select View > Rendering > Start Batch Render.
The Start Batch Render dialog box opens. Select the jobs to be rendered and specify the file location for the
resulting rendered images.

Parameter

Description

Available Jobs

Lists the current batch render jobs in order of job creation; the jobs are displayed with the
image file extension to be generated according to the job settings

Chosen Jobs

Lists the currently selected render jobs in order of execution; the most recently added job is
placed at the end of the list

Choose All

Moves all Available Jobs to the Chosen Jobs list

>> button

Moves the selected job from the Available Jobs list to the end of the Chosen Jobs list

<< button

Moves the selected job from the Chosen Jobs list to the end of the Available Jobs list

Duplicate

Copies the selected available job and adds it to the end of the Available Jobs list; specify a
new name for the job in the Assign Name dialog box

Edit

Opens the Edit Batch Render Job dialog box, for changing the parameters of the selected job

Delete

Removes the selected job from the list of available render jobs (no undo)

Managing Lights and Cameras |

811

Parameter

Description

Browse (Windows)/
Choose (Macintosh)

Specifies the Parent Folder location, where all batch rendering resulting files will be located.
By default, this is the application folder. The result sub-folder name is also displayed (this
sub-folder is named according to the current date and time).

2. Click Start to begin the batch rendering.

The Batch Render Progress dialog box displays the status of the batch rendering. Press the Esc key to cancel the
current job and proceed with the remaining batch jobs. Press Cancel to cancel all batch rendering jobs.
3. As each job is rendered, the resulting file is placed in the Results Folder.

Managing Lights and Cameras

The Visualization palette provides fast and easy access to all lights and cameras in a Vectorworks file. Lights and
cameras can be selected, edited, duplicated, created, and deleted. The palette also controls lighting overrides for
selected sheet layer viewport(s), without modifying the lighting on the design layer or in another viewport.
Tasks that can be performed from the Visualization palette include:

Quickly locating any light in the file;

Editing of any light or lights in the file, even lights that are inside a container object or on a different layer;
Creating lighting overrides for sheet layer viewports;
Managing light and camera objects, including creating, editing, deleting, duplicating, and sorting;
Quickly switching to a cameras established view.

To use the Visualization palette:

1. Select Windows > Palettes > Visualization.
The Visualization palette opens. The Visualization palette can remain open while working in the drawing.
2. The Visualization palette contains two tabs: the Lights tab accesses lights, and the Cameras tab accesses cameras.
The lights and cameras can be sorted by clicking in the header of any column.
The Lights tab functions in two different modes depending on whether you are on a design layer or sheet layer.
On a design layer, the palette lists either all the lights in the file, or just the lights that affect the current view.
When on a sheet layer, the palette lists either all the lights in the file, or just the lights of selected viewports; edits
to the selected viewport(s) affect the viewport lighting, creating an override, but this does not affect the
associated design layer lighting.
Depending on what action is being performed, different options are available in both the Visualization palette
and the Visualization palette menu. To open the Visualization palette menu, click on the small triangle at the top
right of the palette, or right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh) in the palette to open a context menu.

812

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Design layer Visualization palette options

Sheet layer Visualization palette options

Visualization palette camera options

Parameter

Description

Lights tab

The Lights tab accesses the parameters of sheet layer viewports or all lights in the file

Current Scene

Displays only the lights which affect the current view (lights from the current layer
and in visible classes)

Selected Viewport(s)

Displays only the lights which affect the currently selected sheet layer viewport(s); in
this mode, lights can be edited to override the lighting of the selected viewports only.
(Other Visualization palette light management commands are not available.) Select
Revert Override to return the viewport to its original lighting.

All

Lists all the lights in the file

On

Click to toggle the light on or off; a check mark indicates that the light is on
(Cast Shadows)

Click to toggle the ability of the lights to cast shadows on or off; a red x indicates
that shadows are off

(Override State)

For lights in selected viewport(s), indicates whether the light has an override.
Uses design layer definition
: the light parameters are the same in both the
design layer and the viewport(s).
Uses viewport override definition
: the light parameters have been edited for
the selected viewport(s), creating a viewport lighting override.

Name

Displays the name of the light (as shown on the Data tab of the Object Info palette)

Managing Lights and Cameras |

Parameter

Description

Type

Indicates the type of light:

Directional
(Light Parent)

, Point

, Spot

, Custom

, Area

813

, or Line

Indicates whether the light is within a container object; if blank, the light is not part of
another object.
Group

: indicates that the light is contained within a group.

Symbol
: indicates that the light is contained within a symbol; each instance is
listed in the palette. Edits made directly from the Visualization palette, such as
turning lights on and off, affect all symbol instances. (Selecting Edit from the
Visualization palette menu, however, edits the symbol instance properties.)
Plug-in Object
: indicates that the light is contained in a plug-in object, such as
a lighting device (Spotlight required)
Layer Link

: indicates that the light is contained within a layer link

Class/Layer

Displays the lights class and layer

Menu commands

The Visualization palette menu commands manage and select light objects

New

Opens the Create Light dialog box, to create a directional, point, spot, or custom light
on the current design layer; see Adding Light Sources on page 469

Edit

Opens the Properties dialog box, to edit the parameters of the currently selected
light(s); when more than one light is selected, only common properties can be edited

Revert Override

Restores the original light parameters for the viewport(s), when the lights in selected
sheet layer viewport(s) have been edited

Duplicate

Copies the currently selected light(s), placing the copy or copies on the same layer and
in the same class as the original(s). Lights in symbols or plug-in objects cannot be
duplicated.

Delete

Deletes the currently selected light(s). Lights in symbols or plug-in objects cannot be
deleted.

Select On Document

Selects the current light(s), and automatically centers the view on the light, or its
container (alternatively, double-click on a light in the Visualization palette, if the light
is in the active class or layer.) The light properties can then be edited in the Object Info
palette or by clicking Edit from the Visualization palette menu. The selection and
editing of multiple lights at once is supported.
If the light is not in the active class or layer, use the Force Select command
instead.
The Vectorworks Display preference must be set to show lights.

Force Select

If the light is in a different class or layer, activates the layer or class, and automatically
centers the view on the light, or its container group or symbol. The light properties
can then be edited in the Object Info palette or by clicking Edit from the Visualization
palette menu. Multiple lights cannot be selected by this method.

Cameras tab

The Cameras tab accesses the parameters of the camera objects in the drawing

Name

Displays the name of the camera (as shown on the Data tab of the Object Info palette)

814

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Parameter

Description

Class/Layer

Displays the cameras class and layer

Menu commands

The Visualization palette menu commands manage and select camera objects

New

Activates the RenderWorks Camera tool; click to place a camera object

Edit

Opens the Properties dialog box, to edit the parameters of the currently selected
camera(s)

Duplicate

Copies the currently selected camera(s), placing the copy or copies on the same layer
and in the same class as the original(s)

Delete

Deletes the currently selected camera(s)

Activate

Selects the current camera, and automatically changes the view to that of the camera
(alternatively, double-click on a camera in the Visualization palette)

Exporting a Rendered Drawing

All files rendered with Renderworks can be exported. It is possible to export all or part of a drawing depending on the
selected export format.
The image is re-rendered automatically before export.

Exporting the Rendered Image

The Export Image File command exports a rendered drawing to a variety of image file formats. This command is
described in detail in Exporting an Image File on page 602.

High Dynamic Range Image (HDRI) Export

When Renderworks is installed, the HDRI option is added to the list of export file choices. This command creates an
OpenEXR file. This is a good choice for export when touching-up the image in an imaging program; the exported
image is lossless and will not have quantization artifacts when color or exposure is further adjusted after export.
To export a file in HDRI format:
1. Select the Renderworks rendering mode to use for the export, and render the image.
2. Select File > Export > Export High Dynamic Range Image (HDRI).
The Export Image File dialog box opens. Specify the dimensions and resolution for the exported image.

Exporting a Rendered Drawing |

Parameter

815

Description

Export Area
All Visible Objects

Exports an image that includes all visible objects (objects do not have to be
currently on screen to be considered visible)

Current View

Exports an image that is exactly as it displays on the current screen

All Pages as Single Image

Not applicable for HDRI export

Each Page as Separate Image

Not applicable for HDRI export

Marquee

Exports the portion of the image specified with a marquee box. Select this
option and then click Draw Marquee to temporarily close the dialog box. Click,
and then drag to specify the area for export; the marquee dimensions are
displayed on the Data bar. Click to set the export area and return to the Export
Image File dialog box. The Pixel Dimensions of the image are automatically set
to the marquee dimensions.

Dimensions
Lock Aspect Ratio

Select to maintain the image aspect ratio when specifying dimensions

816

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Parameter

Description

Resolution

Specifies the printed image resolution in pixels per inch

Pixel Dimensions
Width/Height

Specifies the exported image dimensions; if Lock Aspect Ratio is selected,

changes to one dimension will update the other to maintain the aspect ratio

Print Size
Width/Height

Specifies the printed image dimensions in the selected Unit; if Lock Aspect
Ratio is selected, changes to one dimension will update the other to maintain
the aspect ratio

Units

Select a unit to apply to the Print Size parameters

Preview

Displays a rendered or wireframe preview according to the current settings

Render

Updates the preview with a rendered view using the currently set rendering
option

Wireframe

Updates the preview with a wireframe view

Memory Required/Estimated
File Size

Not applicable for HDRI export

Update

Not applicable for HDRI export

Format
File Type

Not applicable for HDRI export (always OpenEXR format)

Compression

Not applicable for HDRI export

Update visible out of date

viewports prior to exporting

Automatically updates any visible, out-of-date viewports before exporting

Reset all plug-in objects that

require a reset prior to exporting

Automatically resets plug-in objects that require an update (such as data

stamps) before exporting

3. Click Save.
The Export OpenEXR File dialog box opens. Enter the name and location for saving the HDRI format file. Click
Save to export the file. The file is created and saved in the location specified.

EPix Export
When Renderworks is installed, the EPix/Piranesi option is added to the list of export file choices. This command
creates an ePix (Extended Pixel) file for use in the Piranesi software program.
To export as file type EPix:
1. Select File > Export > Export EPix/Piranesi.
The Export EPix/Piranesi dialog box opens. Specify the dimensions and resolution for the exported image.

Exporting a Rendered Drawing |

Parameter

817

Description

Export Area
All Visible Objects

Exports an image that includes all visible objects (objects do not have to be
currently on screen to be considered visible)

Current View

Exports an image that is exactly as it displays on the current screen

All Pages as Single Image

Not applicable for EPix/Piranesi export

Each Page as Separate Image

Not applicable for EPix/Piranesi export

Marquee

Exports the portion of the image specified with a marquee box. Select this
option and then click Draw Marquee to temporarily close the dialog box.
Click, and then drag to specify the area for export; the marquee dimensions
are displayed on the Data bar. Click to set the export area and return to the
Export Image File dialog box.The Pixel Dimensions of the image are
automatically set to the marquee dimensions.

Dimensions
Lock Aspect Ratio

Select to maintain the image aspect ratio when specifying dimensions

818

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Parameter

Description

Resolution

Specifies the printed image resolution in pixels per inch

Pixel Dimensions
Width/Height

Specifies the exported image dimensions; if Lock Aspect Ratio is selected,

changes to one dimension will update the other to maintain the aspect ratio

Print Size
Width/Height

Specifies the printed image dimensions in the selected Unit; if Lock Aspect
Ratio is selected, changes to one dimension will update the other to
maintain the aspect ratio

Units

Select a unit to apply to the Print Size parameters

Preview

Displays a rendered or wireframe preview according to the current settings

Render

Updates the preview with a rendered view using the currently set rendering
option

Wireframe

Updates the preview with a wireframe view

Memory Required/Estimated
File Size

Not applicable for EPix/Piranesi export

Update

Not applicable for EPix/Piranesi export

Format
File Type

Not applicable for EPix/Piranesi export; the file type is automatically set
to .epx

Compression

Not applicable for EPix/Piranesi export

Update visible out of date

viewports prior to exporting

Automatically updates any visible, out-of-date viewports before exporting

Reset all plug-in objects that

require a reset prior to exporting

Automatically resets plug-in objects that require an update (such as data

stamps) before exporting

2. Click Save.
The Export Epix File dialog box opens. Enter the name and location for saving the .epx file. Click Save to export
the file. The .epx file is created and saved in the location specified.

QuickTime VR Object Export

When Renderworks is installed, the QuickTime Virtual Reality object option is added to the list of export file choices.
This command creates a QuickTime VR object file of the selected object, which can then be opened in QuickTime. The
current rendering mode is used to create the movie. The size of the Vectorworks window determines the size of the
final movie window. The current selection determines the zoom and center for the movie, set so that the selected object
is entirely visible and centered.
To obtain more control over the zoom and view center, create an invisible 3D object with no fill or line style.
Select the object before exporting the movie.
QuickTime is a separate program available with Vectorworks. It includes Movie Player, for viewing several different
file types.

Exporting a Rendered Drawing |

QuickTime must be installed to view or create QuickTime movies. It is available on the Vectorworks DVD.
To export an object as a QuickTime VR object:
1. Render the drawing with a Renderworks rendering mode.
2. Select the object to export.
Due to a limitation of the LightWorks library, Renderworks backgrounds cannot be exported.
3. Select File > Export > Export QuickTime VR Object.
The QTVR Object Options dialog box opens.
4. Select the number of frames and spin options for creating the VR object file, and then click OK.

Parameter

Description

Frames

Specify how many frames to create in the file; more frames take longer, but increase the
quality of the exported file. Total Frames displays how many frames will be created based
on the horizontal and vertical frames specified.

Horizontal

Specifies the number of horizontal frames to create

Vertical

Specifies the number of vertical frames to create

Spin

Specify the angular sweep desired, relative to the front view of the object

Left

Indicates the left pan angle (0 to 180 degrees)

Right

Indicates the right pan angle (0 to 180 degrees)

Above

Indicates the angle above the horizon (0 to 90 degrees)

Below

Indicates the angle below the horizon (0 to 90 degrees)

819

820

| Chapter 22: Rendering with Renderworks

Parameter

Description

Fix Lights

Specifies whether lights are fixed to the model or camera as the camera rotates

To Model

Fixes the lights to the model; the camera appears to rotate around the model and the lights
remain stationary

To Camera

Fixes the lights around the camera; the model appears to rotate

5. Specify the .mov file name and location, and click Save to generate the QuickTime movie. For information on
playing the QuickTime movie, see Viewing QuickTime Animations on page 701.

QuickTime VR Panorama Export

When Renderworks is installed, the QuickTime Virtual Reality Panorama option is added to the list of export file
choices. This command creates a QuickTime VR panorama file of the drawing, which can then be opened in
QuickTime. The current rendering mode is used to create the movie.
QuickTime is a separate program available with Vectorworks. It includes Movie Player, for viewing several different
file types.
QuickTime must be installed to view or create QuickTime movies. It is available on the Vectorworks DVD.
To export a drawing as a QuickTime panorama:
1. Render the drawing in Perspective projection with a Renderworks rendering mode. The size of the perspective
window affects the size of the panorama window; adjust the size of the perspective window by dragging the
corner handles.
Due to a limitation of the LightWorks library, Renderworks backgrounds cannot be exported.
2. Select File > Export > Export QuickTime VR Panorama.
The QTVR Panorama Options dialog box opens.

3. In the Tilt Above/Below Horizon field, specify the movie view tilt angle from the current view (a value of zero
places the view at the horizon); then click OK.
4. Specify the .mov file name and location, and click Save to generate the QuickTime movie. For information on
playing the QuickTime movie, see Viewing QuickTime Animations on page 701.

Using the Workspace Editor

The Fundamentals workspace is installed with Vectorworks Fundamentals in [Vectorworks]\Workspaces. If

Renderworks is installed, all of the user interface elements are added to the Fundamentals workspace. Each Design
Series product is installed with a unique, industry-specific workspace. Any changes made to the default workspaces
are saved in the User Data and Preferences folder, to maintain the integrity of both the default and custom workspaces
(see User Folders Preferences on page 56).
After a custom workspace has been created, user-specified changes to palette position and settings are remembered
across Vectorworks sessions, but do not create a new version of the workspace. To revert the palette position and
settings back to the settings established when the custom workspace was created (in the User Data and Preferences
folder), click Reset Saved Settings from the Session tab of Vectorworks preferences (see Session Preferences on
page 50).
To create a custom Vectorworks workspace, you can edit the current workspace, edit a copy of the current workspace,
or create a new workspace. Create multiple workspaces for different drawing needs, or customize a single workspace
to your personal preferences.
Workspace customization options include:
Add menus, tool palettes, tool sets, tools, and commands
Remove unused menus, tool palettes, tool sets, tools, and commands
Rearrange the order and the position of menus, tool sets, tools, and commands
Add, modify, delete and print the keyboard shortcuts for tools and commands
Configure the context menus
Establish palette positions and settings to be used in the workspace
Vectorworks also provides the ability to create customized plug-in tools, commands, and objects. See Using
VectorScript Plug-ins on page 85 in the VectorScript Language Guide. The VectorScript Language Guide is available
as part of the help system, and also as a PDF file in the help system.

Creating or Editing a Workspace

To create or edit a workspace:
1. Select Tools > Workspaces > Workspace Editor, or select Customize from a tool palettes utility menu.
The Workspace Editor Options dialog box opens.

2. Select the workspace to edit.

Option

Description

Edit the current workspace

Changes the currently active workspace

Edit a copy of the current workspace

Creates an exact duplicate of the current workspace; this is the

recommended option

822

| Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor

Option

Description

Create a new workspace

Creates a new workspace where all tools and commands must be arranged
(from scratch)

3. Enter a workspace name if this is either a new workspace or a copy of the current workspace.
4. Click OK.
The Workspace Editor dialog box opens.
Click-drag the top or bottom edge (Windows) or the lower right-hand corner (Macintosh) of the Workspace
Editor dialog box to resize it. This is useful for displaying long lists of tools and commands while customizing
workspaces.

5. Modify the menus, context menus, tools, keyboard shortcuts, and palette positions and settings as described in
the following sections:
Modifying Menus and Commands on page 823
Modifying Context Menus on page 825
Modifying Tool Palettes and Tool Sets on page 826
Modifying Snapping and Mode Shortcuts on page 829
Modifying Palette Positions and Settings on page 830
Some shortcuts are reserved by Vectorworks or by the Windows or Macintosh operating system. The Workspace
Editor does not prevent such shortcuts from being assigned to a palette or a tool. If this occurs, the Windows or
Macintosh shortcut typically overrides the Vectorworks-assigned shortcut.

Creating or Editing a Workspace |

823

If a duplicate item is added to a menu, a palette, or a tool set, the item displays in both locations. Highlight the
undesired occurrence of the tool or command and press the Delete key to remove it.
6. If desired, click Export Workspace to Text File to export a text file list of all menu items, tools, and keyboard
shortcuts contained in the current workspace; when prompted, specify the file name and the location for the file
and click OK. The text file also lists keys reserved by Vectorworks or the operating system, shortcuts that cannot
be user modified, and shortcuts that can be modified from within the Workspace Editor.

Modifying Menus and Commands

Modify menus and assign keyboard shortcuts to commands, as needed.
To add, modify, or delete a menu or a command:
1. Access the Workspace Editor dialog box as described in Creating or Editing a Workspace on page 821.
Click the Menus tab. The left side of the dialog box displays all available commands, grouped by category. The
right side of the dialog box displays the menus and commands currently assigned to the workspace. To easily
identify what changed in this release, the Recent Changes folder lists the new and revised menus and commands
for the current and prior version of Vectorworks; it also lists those menus and commands that are now
considered obsolete (legacy). Modify the menus and commands as described in the following table.
Click the triangle (Mac)
or plus (+) sign
(Windows) to display
current commands
under the menu item

All available commands,

listed alphabetically
All new, revised, or
obsolete menus and
commands in the current
and prior version of
Vectorworks

Menus and commands

in the current
workspace
Context menus and
commands in the
current workspace

All available commands,

listed by category
Click the triangle (Mac) or
plus (+) sign (Windows)
to display the available
commands in the
category

Option

Description

Add a new menu or submenu

Click-drag the New Menu command from the Commands list to the desired
position in the Menus list; type the new menu name in place of New Menu

Add a command to a menu

Click the plus sign (Windows) or triangle (Macintosh) to expand the list of
commands; click-drag the command from the Commands list to the desired
position in the Menus list

Add a separator

Click-drag the Separator command (Windows) or separator line (Macintosh)

from the Commands list to the desired position in the Menus list; a separator line
displays

824

| Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor

Option

Description

Move an item

Click-drag the item in the Menus list to the desired position

Delete an item

Select the item from the Menus list and press the Delete key, or drag the item
outside of the Menus list display area (Windows); deleting an item will delete its
stacked items unless they are moved from beneath that item first

Change a menu name

Select the menu from the Menus list and type the desired name; commands
cannot be renamed

The Document Windows, Font, Tool Palettes, and Workspaces menu items are populated at run time. Therefore,
they can only be placed as the last item in a list of sub-menu items.
2. If desired, assign the combination of keys to use as a shortcut to access a menu command.
Macintosh
1. Select the command
2. Select a shortcut key combination
3. Press the desired key

Windows
1. Select the command
2. Select a shortcut key combination
3. Click the screen and press the desired key

Creating or Editing a Workspace |

Shortcut Key Combination

825

Description

Macintosh
Use Cmd + key

Assigns the combination of the Command key and another key to access this
menu command

Use Cmd + Option + key

Assigns the combination of the Command key, Option key, and another key to
access this menu command

Use Cmd + Shift + key

Assigns the combination of the Command key, Shift key, and another key to
access this menu command

Use Cmd + Option + Shift + key

Assigns the combination of the Command key, Option key, Shift key, and
another key to access this menu command

Windows
Use Ctrl + key

Assigns the combination of the Ctrl key and another key to access this menu
command

Use Ctrl + Alt + key

Assigns the combination of the Ctrl key, Alt key, and another key to access this
menu command

Use Ctrl + Shift + key

Assigns the combination of the Ctrl key, Shift key, and another key to access
this menu command

Use Ctrl + Alt + Shift + key

Assigns the combination of the Ctrl key, Alt key, Shift key, and another key to
access this menu command

If a keyboard shortcut is already in use, the option to reassign the shortcut to the current menu command is
presented. If the shortcut is reassigned, the original command no longer has a shortcut.
3. If necessary, modify or delete a keyboard shortcut.

Option

Description

Modify a keyboard shortcut

Select the shortcut from the Menus list; select a new shortcut key combination
and/or enter a different key for the shortcut (if that key is reserved by
Vectorworks or is already in use, a message displays)

Delete a keyboard shortcut

Select the shortcut key from the Menus list and press Delete or Backspace

4. Click OK to close the Workspace Editor dialog box.

Modifying Context Menus

Modify document context menus and object context menus in the same manner as described in Modifying Menus
and Commands on page 823. These menus display when you click on an object or on the drawing area with a
right-click (Windows) or Ctrl-click (Macintosh). The object context menus contain context-sensitive commands that
pertain to the item that is currently selected in the drawing area.

826

| Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor

Modifying Tool Palettes and Tool Sets

Modify tool palettes and tool sets, and assign keyboard shortcuts to tools, as needed. Tools can only be added to tool
sets, not to tool palettes.
To provide more drawing space, stack the tools that have similar functionality.
To add, modify, or delete a tool palette or a tool set:
1. Access the Workspace Editor dialog box as described in Creating or Editing a Workspace on page 821.
2. Click the Tools tab. The left side of the dialog box displays all available tools, grouped by category. The right side
of the dialog box displays the tool palettes, the tool sets, and the tools that are currently assigned to the
workspace. To easily identify what changed in this release, the Recent Changes folder lists the new and revised
tools for the current and prior version of Vectorworks; it also lists those tools that are now considered obsolete
(legacy). Modify the tool palettes and the tool sets as described in the following table.
For the Basic palette, the edit tools and the tools for 2D and 3D object creation are listed in the View/Draw tool
set.

Creating or Editing a Workspace |

827

The tool palettes, tool

sets, and tools in the
current workspace

All available tools,

listed alphabetically
All new, revised, or
obsolete tools in the
current and prior
version of Vectorworks
All available tools,
listed by category

Click a tool set label to

display a preview of the
current tools on the right
side of the dialog box

Click the plus (+) sign

(Windows) or the
triangle (Mac) to
display the available
tools in the category

Click the plus (+) sign

(Windows) or the triangle
(Mac) to display the
current tools or tool sets
under the item

Option

Description

Add a new tool palette

Click-drag the New Tool Palette command from the Create list to the Palettes list;
click the items text label and type the new palettes name in place of New Tool
Palette

Add a new tool set

Click-drag the New Tool Set command from the Create list to the Palettes list;
click the items text label and type the new tool sets name in place of New Tool Set

Change a tool set icon

To change the default icon for the tool set, select the tool set, click Set Tool Set
Icon, and use the dialog that opens to select a 22 x 22 PNG image file to use

Add a tool or a tool category

to a tool set

Click the plus sign (Windows) or triangle (Macintosh) to expand the list of tools;
click-drag the tool (or the entire group of tools) from the Tools list to the desired
position in the Palettes list

Move an item

Click-drag the item in the Palettes list to the desired position

Delete an item

Select the item in the Palettes list and press the Delete key, or (on Windows) drag
the item outside of the Palettes list display area.
If you delete an item that has other items stacked beneath it, all of the stacked
items are deleted along with the main item; to prevent this, move the stacked
items to another location first.

Change the name of a tool

palette or a tool set

Select the item from the Palettes list, click the items text label, and type the desired
name; tools cannot be renamed

3. If desired, assign or change the combination of keys to use as a shortcut to access a tool.

828

| Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor

Macintosh
1. Select the tool
2. Select a shortcut key combination
3. Press the desired key

Windows
1. Select the tool
2. Select a shortcut key combination
3. Click the screen and press the
desired key

Shortcut Key Combination

Description

Macintosh
Use key

Assigns this key to access this tool

Use Option + key

Assigns the combination of the Option key and another key to access this tool

Use Shift + key

Assigns the combination of the Shift key and another key to access this tool

Creating or Editing a Workspace |

Shortcut Key Combination
Use Option + Shift + key

829

Description
Assigns the combination of the Option key, Shift key, and another key to access this
tool

Windows
Use key

Assigns this key to access this tool

Use Alt key

Assigns the combination of the Alt key and another key to access this tool

Use Shift + key

Assigns the combination of the Shift key and another key to access this tool

Use Alt + Shift + key

Assigns the combination of the Alt key, Shift key, and another key to access this tool

If a keyboard shortcut is already in use, the option to reassign the shortcut to the current tool is provided. If the
shortcut is reassigned, the original tool no longer has a shortcut.
4. If necessary, modify or delete a keyboard shortcut.

Option

Description

Modify a keyboard shortcut

Select the shortcut from the Palettes list; select a new shortcut key combination
and/or enter a different key for the shortcut (if that key is reserved by Vectorworks
or is already in use, a message displays)

Delete a keyboard shortcut

Select the shortcut key from the Palettes list and press Delete or Backspace

5. Click OK to close the Workspace Editor dialog box.

Modifying Snapping and Mode Shortcuts

You can modify the keyboard shortcuts for switching between modes on the Tool bar, and for activating snapping
functionality.
To modify the shortcuts for modes and snapping:
1. Access the Workspace Editor dialog box as described in Creating or Editing a Workspace on page 821.
2. Click the Keys tab to display the keyboard shortcuts for the workspace currently in use. Assign or modify the
keyboard shortcuts, as needed.

Sets the keys that

switch between different
modes when a tool is
selected

Sets the keyboard

shortcuts for snapping
functionality

Sets the Snapping

palette keyboard
shortcuts

830

| Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor

3. Click OK to close the Workspace Editor dialog box.

Modifying Palette Positions and Settings

After making customizations in the Workspace Editor, return to the drawing file to move palettes to the desired
position, and to assign palette display and behavior settings.
To modify palette positions and settings:
1. Move palettes to the desired position, set palette size, and set whether palettes should be minimized, or docked
(Windows only); seePalette Layout Options on page 21 Minimizing Palettes on page 22, Docking Windows
Palettes on page 22.
2. For tool palettes, set the tool and tool set display and sort style, and the tool set placement option; see Tool
Palette Features on page 23.
3. For the Object Info palette, click the Shape, Data, or Render tab to set the active pane upon opening, and
manually position the separator in the Data pane, as desired.
4. For the Resource Browser, set the resource display style and group visibilities; see Viewing Resources on
page 176 and Hiding and Showing Resources on page 178.
5. For the Navigation palette (Design Series required), click the desired tab to set the active pane upon opening.
6. Once palettes are positioned and settings have been established, select Window > Palettes > Save Palette
Positions to save the changes.
7. For each customized workspace, repeat the procedures in the Workspace Editor dialog box (customize menus,
context menus, tools, keyboard shortcuts), and within the drawing file (establish palette positions and settings).

Updating Custom Workspaces and Plug-in Objects

When a Vectorworks upgrade is installed, the workspaces and plug-in objects in the Vectorworks root folder (where
the application is installed) are replaced.
Your custom workspaces and plug-ins (in your user folder) remain in place; see User Folders Preferences on page 56
for details about user folders. The first time the new version of Vectorworks is opened, it automatically converts the
custom workspaces to the new format and saves a copy of the original workspaces in a Legacy Workspaces folder (in
your user folder).
The Vectorworks installer and updater both make backup copies of all workspaces. The installer places backup copies
of workspaces in a folder entitled Original, within the [Vectorworks]\Workspaces folder. The updater places backup
copies of workspaces in a sequentially numbered folder entitled Backup, within the Workspaces folder. Each time the
updater is run, another Backup folder is created. After the backup, both the installer and the updater overwrite the
workspaces at the top level of the Workspaces folder.
For more information about where plug-in objects may be located, see How Plug-ins Work on page 86 in the
VectorScript Language Guide. The VectorScript Language Guide is available as part of the help system, and also as a
PDF file in the help system.

Migrating Custom Workspaces

Vectorworks can automatically convert a custom workspace that was created in a previous version of Vectorworks.
However, the custom workspace will not have any new or revised features from the latest release until it is migrated
with the Workspace Editor. For details about the editor, see Creating or Editing a Workspace on page 821.

Updating Custom Workspaces and Plug-in Objects |

831

To enable the new functionality in the custom workspace, add the new tools and commands, and replace the tools and
commands that have been updated.
Typically, you should also remove from the custom workspace the tools and commands that are no longer in the new
version of Vectorworks. Some items may still be available under the Legacy folder in the Workspace Editor, even
though they are no longer in the newer workspaces. If so, you can use them in the custom workspace; however, their
functionality is not guaranteed or supported. Only the items contained in the latest workspaces are documented in the
users guide and in the help system.
If the custom workspace is from a version earlier than Vectorworks 12, start with the workspace in the new
version of Vectorworks and add customizations to that workspace; do not migrate the older custom workspace.
To migrate a custom workspace to a new version of Vectorworks:
1. Review the list of workspace changes for this version in the Recent Changes folder of the Workspace Editor
dialog box. Decide which menus, commands, tools, and context menus need to be added, deleted, or updated in
the custom workspace.
2. Place the custom workspace file in your [User]/Workspaces folder for the new version of Vectorworks.
3. Open Vectorworks, which automatically converts the workspace and places the original file in a Legacy
Workspaces folder within your [User]/Workspaces folder.
4. Select Tools > Workspaces > <<custom workspace>> to access the custom workspace.
5. From the custom workspace, access the Workspace Editor.
The Workspace Editor Options dialog box displays. Select the option to edit a copy of the current workspace and
specify a new name for the workspace.
6. Modify the menus, context menus, tools, and keyboard shortcuts as described in:
Modifying Menus and Commands on page 823
Modifying Context Menus on page 825
Modifying Tool Palettes and Tool Sets on page 826
Modifying Snapping and Mode Shortcuts on page 829
7. Click OK to save the changes.
8. In the drawing area, modify the palette positions and settings, and select Window > Palettes > Save Palette
Positions to save the changes, as described in Modifying Palette Positions and Settings on page 830.

832

| Appendix A: Using the Workspace Editor

Standards and Resources

Vectorworks and Renderworks Libraries

The following libraries are provided as standard Vectorworks or Renderworks resources. A subset of these resources
is also available by default at the point of use (see Vectorworks Fundamentals and Renderworks Default Resources
on page 173). All libraries are considered universal, meaning that they are installed regardless of the drawing unit
selected during installation.

Library

Vectorworks

Renderworks

Hatches
Hatches_ANSI.vwx

Hatches_Cartographic.vwx

Hatches_Detail.vwx

Hatches_Miscellaneous.vwx

Hatches_Paving Patterns.vwx

Hatches_Plant.vwx

Hatches_Surface material.vwx

Image Fills
Image Fills_Exterior Finishes.vwx

Image Fills_Flooring Forbo-Artoleum.vwx

Image Fills_Flooring Forbo-Effect.vwx

Image Fills_Flooring Forbo-Eternal.vwx

Image Fills_Flooring Forbo-Marmoleum.vwx

Image Fills_Flooring Forbo-Smaragd.vwx

Image Fills_Interior Finishes.vwx

Image Fills_LightWork Design Ltd.vwx

Image Fills_Metals Plastics Glass.vwx

Image Fills_Nature.vwx

Image Fills_StoneAndBrick.vwx

Image Fills_Wood-Arcitex.vwx

Image Props
Props Hi-Res.vwx

Props Lo-Res.vwx

Objects-Building Architecture & Interior

Architect Sampler.vwx

Equip-Office Equipment.vwx

834

| Appendix B: Standards and Resources

Library

Vectorworks

Furniture-Office.vwx

Furniture-Office Cubicle.vwx

Furniture-Residential.vwx

Renderworks

Objects-Building Services
Electrical-Accurate Lamps-Imp.vwx

Electrical-Accurate Lamps-Metric.vwx

HVAC 1 Line.vwx

Process Equipt.vwx

Process Piping.vwx

Process Valves.vwx

Objects-Landscape & Site

Site-Planning.vwx

Plant Images
Enviro Graphic Photorealistic/Envirographic AU
Plants.vwx

Ozbreed Photorealistic/OzBreed AU Plants.vwx

Objects-Miscellaneous & Entourage

EE Engineering.vwx

EE Logic.vwx

EE PC Board.vwx

EE Schematics.vwx

Machine Design Sampler.vwx

Map Symbols.vwx

Objects-Third Party Promotional

www.caddetails.com (150 files)

Textures
Textures_Exterior Finishes.vwx

Textures_Flooring Forbo-Artoleum.vwx

Textures_Flooring Forbo-Effect.vwx

Textures_Flooring Forbo-Eternal.vwx

Textures_Flooring Forbo-Marmoleum.vwx

Textures_Flooring Forbo-Smaragd.vwx

Textures_Interior Finishes.vwx

Vectorworks Circle/Arc Conventions |

Library

Vectorworks

835

Renderworks

Textures_LightWork Design Ltd.vwx

Textures_Metals Plastics Glass.vwx

Textures_Nature.vwx

Textures_StoneAndBrick.vwx

Textures_Wood-Arcitex.vwx

Textures_Wood.vwx

Vectorworks Circle/Arc Conventions

Due East is 0. Positive degrees run counter-clockwise and negative degrees run clockwise.

Survey Bearings
The acute angle between the Meridian and a line measured from North to South, toward East and West gives a reading
of less than 90.
90

Coordinates
N " W add to
90 to get
positive angle

Coordinates
N " E subtract
from 90 to get
positive angle

Coordinates E " N
add to 0 to get
positive angle

Coordinates W " N
subtract from 180 to
get positive angle
180

Coordinates W " S
subtract from -180 to
get negative angle

Coordinates E " S
subtract from 0 to get
positive angle

Coordinates Coordinates
S " W add to -90 S " E subtract from
to get negative -90 to get negative
angle angle

-90

Architectural Scale
The following table provides the architectural scale conversion.

836

| Appendix B: Standards and Resources

1" = 1' Fraction of inch
equaling 1 foot

12 x 1/1 = 12 Inches/ foot multiplied by

inverted fraction

1 : 12 Number to be typed into

Paper Scale

1/2" = 1'

12 x 2/1 = 24

1 : 24

1/4" = 1'

12 x 4/1 = 48

1 : 48

3/4"= 1'

12 x 4/3 = 16

1 : 16

1/8" = 1'

12 x 8/1 = 96

1 : 96

3/8" = 1'

12 x 8/3 = 32

1 : 32

5/8" = 1'

12 x 8/5 = 19.2

1 : 19.2

7/8" = 1'

12 x 8/7 =13.714...

1 : 13.7142857

1/16" = 1'

12 x 16/1 = 192

1 : 192

3/16" = 1'

12 x 16/3 = 64

1 : 64

5/16" = 1'

12 x 16/5 = 38.4

1 : 38.4

7/16" = 1'

12 x 16/7 = 27.428...

1 : 27.4285714

9/16" = 1'

12 x 16/9 = 21.333...

1 : 21.3333333

11/16" = 1'

12 x 16/11 = 17.454...

1 : 17.4545454

13/16" = 1'

12 x 16/13 = 14.769...

1 : 14.7692307

15/16" = 1'

12 x 16/15 = 12.8

1 : 12.8

1/32" = 1'

12 x 32/1 = 384

1 : 384

3/32" = 1'

12 x 32/3 = 128

1 : 128

5/32" = 1'

12 x 32/5 = 76.8

1 : 76.8

7/32" = 1'

12 x 32/7 = 54.857

1 :54.8571428

1/64" = 1'

12 x 64/1 = 768

1 : 768

3/64" = 1'

12 x 64/3 = 256

1 : 256

Correlated Color Temperature

Color temperature is a simplified way to indicate the hue of a light source in degrees Kelvin (K). Lower color
temperatures suggest more of a yellow-reddish color, while higher color temperatures tend to be more blue.
The following chart can be used to approximate various light sources in a rendered scene.

Approximate Degrees K

Light Source Example

1500 - 1800

Candlelight

2800 - 3200

Indoor household tungsten light bulb

5000 - 5500

Sunny day at noon

6500 - 7000

Overcast sky

9000 - 12000

Blue sky

Correlated Color Temperature |

837

838

| Appendix B: Standards and Resources

Renderworks Shader Definitions

Renderworks textures are composed of four shaders: color, reflectivity, transparency, and bump. This appendix
describes each shader type and provides a description of the fields obtained when editing shaders.

Shader Types
Color Shaders
Shader

Description

Object Attribute

Applies the objects fill color attribute

Filtered Image

Selects an imported image to be tinted with color and applied as a texture

Image Color

Selects an imported image to apply as a color texture

Blue Marble

Provides a blue marble appearance with the specified size and level of detail

Chrome Color

Creates simple chrome-like reflections, with the selected color and color ratio

Clouds

Provides a cloudy appearance, with the specified cloud and background color, as well
as size and level of detail

Cubes

Creates a 3D lattice of cubes with alternating colors

Granite

Provides a granite-like pattern with mineral grains of various sizes and Granite Types:
Sierra: small grain size variation with universal mineral distribution
Bianco: higher grain size variation with universal mineral distribution
Diamond: combination of large, coarse grains and lesser amounts of fine-grained
minerals
Azalea: fine-grained granite with lesser amounts of large-grained minerals
Auburn: very large grains with lesser amounts of uniformly distributed small grains

Marble

Creates a veined marble appearance of the specified color, size, and level of detail

Paving

Creates the appearance of paved slabs with mortar joints (for a rough tile or stone
paving texture)

Plain Color

Specifies a plain, uniform color

Simple Wood

Creates a simple wood pattern with concentric rings of light and dark wood

Solid Polka

Creates a 3D lattice of spheres to form a polka-dot pattern

Turbulent

Mixes black with a specified color to create a random pattern

Checker Color

Provides a checker-board pattern of alternately colored squares

Diagonal

Creates a diagonal stripe pattern of specific colors and sizes

Grid Color

Creates a grid pattern of the specified colors

Horizontal Stripe

Creates a horizontal stripe pattern of specific colors and sizes

Polka

Specifies a grid of circles to form a polka-dot pattern

840

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions

Shader

Description

Vertical Stripe

Creates a vertical stripe pattern of specific colors and sizes

Birch, Cherry, Maple,

Oak, Pine, and Wood

Provides a realistic wood appearance with pre-set parameters specific to the wood type

Birch Floor, Cherry Floor,

Maple Floor, Oak Floor,
Pine Floor, Wood Floor

Creates wooden flooring with a variety of patterns and parameters specific to the wood
type and Replication Type:

Brick

Creates a simple brick pattern, with bricks of a specified, uniform color

Brick Bonds

Creates bricks with a specified bonding pattern and appearance according to Bond
Types:

Floorboards: simple floorboards

Parquet: floorboards arranged in a geometric pattern (parquetry)
Herringbone: floorboards arranged in a herringbone pattern
Ladder: floorboards arranged in a ladder pattern

Stretcher: standard alternating pattern

Common: bricks in every fifth row are stacked crosswise against the other
Flemish: alternating rows of normal and crosswise bricks
English: bricks in every second row are stacked crosswise against the other
Stack: bricks are stacked directly on top of each other
Rowlock: alternating rows of normal and crosswise bricks, with the larger side of
crosswise bricks visible

Roof Tiles

Creates a tiled pattern of specific shapes, sizes, and colors, simulating roof tiles as seen
from the ground

Textured Brick

Creates a realistic textured brick pattern with very specific parameters

Draft Angle Evaluation

Evaluates surfaces for mold design by coloring problem areas

Geometric Curvature

Applies colors to denote curvature coefficients

Surface Evaluation

Shows surface curvature by placing the object in a striped cylinder

Reflectivity Shaders
Shader

Description

Image Reflectivity

Specifies an imported image to be used as the reflectivity shader (white is

more reflective; black is less reflective)

Chrome Reflectivity

Creates a chrome-like effect for shiny or highly polished surfaces

Constant

Creates reflectance with a constant color, unaffected by lights in the

drawing

Glass, Accurate

Simulates glass surface finishes with reflection and transmission

properties

Glass, Simple

Approximates glass surface finishes with reflection and refraction

properties

Matte

Provides a dull matte appearance for surfaces like fabric and brick

Shader Types |

841

Shader

Description

Metal, Accurate

Simulates metallic surface finishes with secondary mirrored views

(includes refraction and absorption)

Metal, _________
(Aluminum through Tungsten)

Sets accurate metal reflectivity parameters automatically to simulate the

specific type of metal selected

Metal, Simple

Simulates a shiny, metallic appearance with reflectance coefficients;

suitable for metals like steel and brass

Mirror

Creates a mirror-like reflectance with secondary mirrored views

Multilayer Paint

Uses a base color, metallic layer and lacquer layer with specific properties
for each, to simulate multi-layer paint surfaces

Phong

Approximates shiny or highly polished materials like ceramic or glass

Plastic

Simulates glossy materials such as plastic or varnished surfaces

Translucency

Simulates a non-reflective translucent surface lighted from behind

Translucent Plastic

Creates glossy reflectance with translucency, for shiny or highly polished

translucent materials

Anisotropic, Brushed

Approximates a surface with parallel ridges, such as brushed metal

Anisotropic, Turned

Creates a surface with small concentric ridges

Anisotropic, Woven

Simulates woven material with a sheen, such as satin

Transparency Shaders
Shader

Description

Image Mask

Selects an imported image to apply as a transparency texture

Rectangular Mask

Selects an imported image with a rectangular mask to apply as a

transparency texture

Color Filter

Specifies a color to be applied as a transparency

Eroded

Creates the illusion of an eroded or worn surface

Plain Transparency

Provides plain, uniform transparency of a specified amount

Checker Transparency

Creates a checker-board pattern with squares of alternating transparency

values

Grid Transparency

Creates a grid with opaque lines and transparent holes

Image Projector

Selects an imported image to apply as a transparency texture, as when

gobo textures are used in Spotlight

Square

Provides a square region of transparency

842

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions

Bump Shaders
Shader

Description

From Color

Obtains the bump shader properties, such as height and location, based
on the color shader information

Image Bump

Specifies an imported image to be used as the source of the bump map

displacement

Birch, Cherry, Maple, Oak, Pine, Wood,

Simple Wood 1

Provides a realistic wood surface, with pre-set parameters specific to the

wood type

Cast

Creates an irregular, metal-like rough surface, with specified

displacements and indentations

Clouds 1
Cubes

Creates a cloud-patterned surface

Creates a 3D lattice of cubes with alternating heights

Granite 1

Provides a granite-like surface with mineral grains of various sizes

Leather, Solid

Simulates the surface texture of leather

Marble

Creates a veined marble surface

Paving

Creates a paved surface, with rough tile or stone surfaces and mortar
joints

Rough, Solid

Provides a rough, undulating metal-like surface with specified surface

perturbations

Solid Polka 1

Creates a 3D lattice of spheres with alternating heights

Turbulent

Provides a random surface pattern

Birch Floor, Cherry Floor, Maple Floor,

Oak Floor, Pine Floor, Wood Floor 1

Creates a wooden flooring surface texture with a variety of patterns and

parameters specific to the wood type and Replication Type

Brick 1

Creates a simple brick pattern surface, with uniform bricks

Brick Bonds

Creates a brick pattern surface according to the specific Bond Type

Checker Color 1

Provides a checker-board pattern of alternate height squares

Diagonal 1

Creates a diagonal stripe pattern of specific surface heights

Dimple

Specifies a grid of spheres which protrude above the surface, creating a

regular dimpled appearance

Grid Color 1
Horizontal Stripe

Creates a grid surface pattern of the specified heights

1

Knurl

Creates a knurled indentation pattern

Leather, Wrapped
Polka

Creates a horizontal stripe surface pattern of specific heights

Roof Tiles

Simulates the surface texture of leather

Specifies a grid of circles to form a polka-dot surface pattern

Rough, Wrapped

Creates a tiled pattern of specific shapes, sizes, and heights, simulating

roof tiles
Creates a rough, uneven cast-like metal finish, with specific roughness

Shader Properties |
Shader
Textured Brick

843

Description
1

Creates a realistic brick surface pattern with very specific parameters

Tread Plate

Provides a regular tread-plate pattern with indentations that protrude

above the surface

Vertical Stripe 1

Creates a vertical stripe pattern of specific heights

These bump shaders have a color shader equivalent.

Shader Properties
The shader properties available during editing are presented in alphabetical order.

Color Shader Properties

Shader Property

Description

Alt Brick Color Max/Min

Select the colors for complex brick shaders with a non-uniform brick color;
each brick is textured by assigning it a variation of those colors. The Alt Brick
Color pattern alternates with the Brick Color pattern to form variety in the
rows

Amplitude

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of turbulence

Background Color

Select the color of the background for shaders that have a background

Bands

Specifies the number of divisions of color to display between the Min Cutoff
Color and the Max. Cutoff Color for the Geometric Curvature shader, or the
total number of bands around the cylinder for the Surface Evaluation Shader

Band Color

Select the color for the cylinder bands

Base Color

Underlying color which can be mixed with another color or have another color
superimposed

Brick Color

Select the color of bricks for shaders with uniform brick color

Brick Color <number>

Select the colors for complex brick shaders with a non-uniform brick color;
each brick has a base color randomly assigned based on the selections, and are
textured by assigning them a variation of that color

Brick Color Max/Min

Select the colors for complex brick shaders with a non-uniform brick color;
each brick is textured by assigning it a variation of those colors. The Brick Color
pattern alternates with the Alt Brick Color pattern to form variety in the rows.

Brick Depth

The brick depth completes the dimensions of the brick, along with width and
height, for complex brick shaders

Brick Width/Height

The brick size is specified by entering values for width and height

Cloud Color

Select the color of the clouds (usually a lighter color than the background color)

Color

Click to select the color

844

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions

Shader Property

Description

Color <number>
(granite)

Select the colors for the minerals of granite, numbered in order of decreasing
average grain size. Color 4 represents the smallest sized grains, which are
usually quartz; assign a darker color. Two of the colors can be set to the same
value to represent granite with fewer distinct mineral colors.

Color <number>
(roof tiles)

The color of each tile is selected randomly from the range specified by the tile
color parameters; for uniform tile color, select the same color for both
parameters

Color Noise

Drag the slider to the right to increase the intensity of random color variation
areas

Color Noise Scale

Specify the size of random color variation areas (a value of one means the areas
are comparable to the size of the largest grains)

Color Variation
(granite)

Drag the slider to the right to increase the color variations among grains,
fragments and base mineral color

Color Variation
(roof tiles)

Drag the slider to the right to increase the random color variations within each
tile

Color Variation Scale

Enter a color variation value to control how color variation will be distributed
across roof tiles or paving slabs; values below one create a speckled effect,
while values larger than one create patches of different colors (within the
specific color range)

Contrast

Measures the contrast of transitions between dense and sparse areas. Range: 0.0
1.0.

Coverage

Determines the ratio of the area covered by the bands to the area displaying the
base color; a value of zero displays only the base color, while a value of one
displays only the band color

Cracks

Specify the visibility of grain cracks at the borders between fragments; higher
values result in more visible cracks (Range: 0.0 1.0)

Curvature Type

Select the surface curvature type to display with false colors

Cylinder Axis

Specifies the location of the cylinder

Cylinder Radius

Specifies the size of the cylinder

Detail

Drag the slider to the right to increase the level of fine detail

Draft Angle

Specifies the angle (normally, 1) against which mold parts are designated as
pass, warning, and fail

Edge Color

Select the color for the edge of roof tiles; select a darker color to simulate the
effect of the tile edges in shadow

Edge Softness

Drag the slider to the right to increase the blurring at the edges of polka dot
spheres

Even Color

Select one of the alternating colors in a pattern or lattice

Fail Color

Marks areas for which the mold cannot be removed because the angle to pull it
out is incorrect; click to specify the color

Fragment Detail

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of granular deformation

Shader Properties |

845

Shader Property

Description

Fragment Size

Drag the slider to the right to decrease the number of mineral grains which are
fragmented

Fragment Softness

Drag the slider to the right to increase the density and roughness of granular
deformation

Fuzz

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of edge blurring

Gnarl

Drag the slider to the right to increase the random perturbation of tree rings,
allowing knots to form

Grain

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amplitude of marble crystal grain
(granularity) or intensity of wood grain

Graininess

Specifies the grainy nature of the paving

Grain Color

Select the color of wood grain, usually darker than base color to simulate the
appearance of wood

Grain Scale (marble or paving)

Scale values above one make the marble crystals or paving flecks larger; values
less than one make the pattern smaller

Grain Scale (wood)

Enter the grain size in relation to the ring size; this applies to random grain
flecks, as well as ring fuzz grain (Range: 0.1 2.0)

Grid Color

Select the color of the grid lines for the grid shader

Grid Size

Enter the width and height of the grid lines

Groove Color

Select the color of the groove between floorboard sections

Groove Width

Specify the width of the groove between floorboard sections

Height

Height of the shader pattern

Max Cutoff

Indicates the maximum curvature value to be displayed with the specified

color

Max Cutoff Color

Select the color to use for maximum curvature display

Min Angle

Controls the cylinder length by specifying the minimal value of the normal
component along the cylinder axis in order for banding to be applied

Min Cutoff

Indicates the minimum curvature value to be displayed with the specified color

Min Cutoff Color

Select the color to use for minimum curvature display

Mix

Drag the slider to the right to increase the ratio of base color to reflection colors

Mortar Center Color

Specifies the color at the center of the mortar

Mortar Color

Select the color of the mortar for brick shaders

Mortar Color Variation

Drag the slider to the right to increase the color differences across the mortar

Mortar Color Variation Scale

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of color variation

Mortar Edge Color

Specifies the color at the edges of the mortar

Mortar Irregularity

Drag the slider to the right to make the mortar joints less straight

846

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions

Shader Property

Description

Mortar Size

Size of mortar between bricks (uniform between rows and columns of bricks, or
between paving tiles or slabs)

Noise

Drag the slider to the right to increase the uneven appearance of tree rings

Odd Color

Select one of the alternating colors in a pattern or lattice

Offset

Enter the joint offset amount between neighboring rows of wood floor sections
(Floorboard and Ladder replication types only)

Overhang Color

Marks areas for which the mold cannot be removed because the angle to pull it
out is incorrect; click to specify the color

Pass Color

Marks areas for which the mold can be easily removed; click to specify the
color

Pattern Scale

Enter the overall scaling factor for the wood pattern, determined by the radius
difference of two adjacent rings (0.01 indicates that there are 100 rings per
scaled unit length)

Plank Length/Width

Enter the length and width of floorboard sections

Plank Variation

Drag the slider to the right to increase the variation of brightness between
floorboard planks

Radius

Values between zero and one define the radius of the polka dot spheres

Ring Color

Select the color to represent the darker-colored rings in the wood

Ring Fuzz Grain

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amplitude of perturbations at the
edges of the tree rings

Ring Fuzz In/Out

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of blurring at the interior
and exterior boundaries of the ring color and wood color

Ring Width

Enter the width of the tree rings relative to the trees trunk (0 indicates no rings,
while 1 indicates that the ring color is to be used for the entire trunk)

Rough Amplitude

Drag the slider to the right to increase the magnitude of roughness

Rough Scale

Drag the slider to the right to increase the smoothness around each brick

Scale

Scale values above one make the pattern larger; values less than one make the
pattern smaller

Separation

Enter the distance between the centers of adjacent spheres

Shape Variation

Drag the slider to the right for more irregular paving shapes

Shape Smoothness

Drag the slider to the right for smoother paving shapes

Slab Size

Specifies the average size of the paving slabs or tiles

Spot Color

Select the color of the spheres for the polka dot shaders

Stripe Color

Select the color of the stripe for striped patterns

Strips

Number of rectangular floor planks arranged side by side to form the floor
pattern

Tile Length/Width

Enter the tile top length and width

Shader Properties |

847

Shader Property

Description

Tile Thickness

Specify how thick the tile is and, therefore, how much of the tile edge is visible

Tolerance Angle

Specifies the tolerance angle for mold design calculations

Vein Color

Select the color of marbled veins

Vein Contrast

Drag the slider to the right to increase the contrast between the vein color and
base color

Warning Color

Marks areas for which the mold can be removed, but with difficulty; click to
specify the color

Width

Enter the width of the shader pattern

Wood Color

Select the color to represent the lighter-colored parts of the wood

Reflectivity Shader Properties

Shader Property

Description

Absorption Red/Green/Blue

Drag the slider to the right to increase the absorption coefficients for red, blue,
and green, respectively; default values correspond to silver

Ambient

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of ambient light reflected (the
ambient light is set with the Set Ambient Light command)

Base Ambient

Specifies the ambient factor for the base layer

Base Diffuse

Specifies the diffuse factor for the base layer

Bias

The surface of the shader is represented by two sets of threads perpendicular to

each other; the bias specifies the relative contribution of the two directions of
threads. For even contribution from each direction, such as for cotton, use 0.5. A
satin weave normally has a bias around 0.66. (Range: 0.0 1.0)

Blur Factor

For simple glass and mirror reflectivity shaders, drag the slider to the right to
increase the blurriness of the reflections. When rendering with Custom
Renderworks or Custom Radiosity, set the Blur Quality in the texturing
options.

Chrome

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of chrome light reflected

Cylinder Distance

Drag the slider to the right to increase the distance between cylinders or
scratches on the surface; cylinder distance varies from even, isotropic light
reflection to maximum anisotropy (uneven reflection)

Diffuse

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of diffuse (directional) light
reflected

Floor Height

Drag the slider to the right to increase the floor height across cylinders or
surface scratches; floor height varies from no floor (more anisotropic with
uneven light reflection) to a completely flat, isotropic surface with even
reflection

Lacquer Mirror

Drag the slider to the right to increase the mirror factor for the lacquer

848

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions

Shader Property

Description

Lacquer Roughness

Drag the slider to the right to increase the lacquer roughness (sharpness of
specular reflection highlights)

Lacquer Refraction

Drag the slider to the right to increase the refraction index of the lacquer

Lacquer Specular

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of specular highlights
reflected for the lacquer

Lacquer Transmission

Drag the slider to the right to increase the transmission factor for the lacquer;
this filters the underlying color

Metallic Amplitude

Drag the slider to the right to increase the bumpiness of the metallic layer
(similar to rough or cast amplitude bump shaders)

Metallic Detail

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of detail to use to represent
the metallic bumps

Metallic Flakes

Select the type of metal to use for the bumps or flakes

Metallic Layer Factor

Drag the slider to the right to specify the amount that the metallic layer
contributes to the overall shader appearance

Metallic Roughness

Drag the slider to the right to increase the reflection roughness of the metal
bumps

Metallic Scale

Specifies the size of the metal bumps

Metallic Sharpness

Drag the slider to the right to increase the sharpness of the metal flakes

Mirror

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of light reflected in the
mirror direction

Refraction

Drag the slider to the right to increase the refraction index for all wavelengths
of light (the default refractive index corresponds to glass)

Refraction Red/Green/Blue

Enter the refraction indices for red, blue, and green, respectively; default values
correspond to silver

Roughness

Drag the slider to the right to decrease the sharpness of the specular reflection
highlights

Specular

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of specular highlights
reflected

Specular Color

Select the color of specular highlights

Specular Exponent

Enter an exponent value to control the sharpness of the specular reflection

highlights; higher exponent values (near ten) make the reflection appear
sharper

Translucency

Drag the slider to the right to increase the degree of translucency (brightness of
back-facing surfaces)

Transmission

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of light reflected from the
transmission direction

Width/Height

Sets the horizontal and vertical frequency of the circular pattern of grooves

Shader Properties |

849

Transparency Shader Properties

Shader Property

Description

Color

Select a color to apply as a transparency

Opacity

Drag the slider to the right to decrease the level of transparency

Fuzz

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of edge blurring

Grid Size

Specify the width and height of the grid lines

Height

Enter the height of the grid pattern

Horiz Fuzz

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of horizontal edge blurring

Horiz Min/Max

Specifies the left and right edges of the square, respectively, relative to the
shaders origin

Horizontal/Vertical Repetitions

Indicates how to display the transparency image: a single image, infinite

repetitions, or a set number of repetitions in each direction

Inside Opacity

Drag the slider to the right to decrease the level of transparency inside the
rectangle; normally, this setting will be the opposite of the Outside Opacity
setting

Outside Opacity

Drag the slider to the right to decrease the level of transparency outside the
rectangle; normally, this setting will be the opposite of the Inside Opacity
setting

Scale

Scale values above one make the pattern larger; values less than one make the
pattern smaller

Transparency

Drag the slider to the right to increase the level of transparency

Vert Fuzz

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of vertical edge blurring

Vert Min/Max

Specifies the bottom and top edges of the square, respectively, relative to the
shaders origin

Width

Enter the width of the grid pattern

Bump Shader Properties

Shader Property

Description

Amplitude

Drag the slider to the right, or enter a value if an edit field is available, to
increase the relative differences in height of the indentations

Blend

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amount of blend at the edges of the
pattern

Brick Amplitude

Specifies the height of the bricks above or below the surface

Cast Amplitude

Drag the slider to the right, or enter a value if an edit field is available, to
increase the amplitude of the surface displacements (bumps) which form the
irregular casting pattern

Cell Amplitude

Drag the slider to the right to increase the height of each cell in the pattern

850

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions

Shader Property

Description

Center Blend

Drag the slider to the right to increase the size of the blend between the dimple
sphere and the surface

Center Depth

Enter the distance beneath the surface of dimple sphere centers; this value
should be less than the Radius value

Cloud Amplitude

Specifies the height of the cloud regions above or below the surface

Cubes Amplitude

Specifies the difference in height between the cubes

Curve Amplitude

Drag the slider to the right to increase the number of curves in the edges of the
cells in the pattern

Curve Detail

Drag the slider to the right to increase the level of fine detail in the grooves
between the cells, providing a more creased appearance

Curve Frequency

Drag the slider to the right to increase the wiggly nature of the edges of the cells

Dent Amplitude

Drag the slider to the right, or enter a value if an edit field is available, to
increase the amplitude of the indentations which form the irregular casting
pattern

Dent Scale

Scale values above one make the indentations appear larger

Dent Threshold

Drag the slider to the right to increase the relative contributions made by the
surface displacements and indentations

Detail

Drag the slider to the right to increase the level of fine detail

Fold Amplitude

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amplitude of the large-scale folds or
wrinkles in the surface

Fold Detail

Drag the slider to the right to increase the level of fine detail for the large-scale
wrinkles in the surface

Fold Frequency

Drag the slider to the right to increase the number of large-scale wrinkles in the
surface

Graininess

Drag the slider to the right to increase the graininess of the paving

Grain Scale

Drag the slider to the right for larger grains

Grain Size

Scale values above one increase the size of the grains

Height

Sets the height of the fragments

Height Variation

Drag the slider to the right to increase the variation in height across the surface

Height Variation Scale

Drag the slider to the right to increase the size of the height variations

Height Noise

Drag the slider to the right to increase the variation in grain heights, making
some grains taller than others

Height Noise Scale

Scale values above one increase the size of the grain height variations; values
less than one decrease the size

Irregularity

Drag the slider to the right to increase the irregularity of each cell that makes up
the pattern, or to the left to make the cells more square

Mortar Center Height

Specifies the height of the mortar joint centers above the surface

Frequently Asked Questions about Radiosity |

851

Shader Property

Description

Mortar Edge Height

Specifies the height of the mortar edges above the surface

Mortar Height Variation

Drag the slider to the right to increase the variation in height across the surface

Mortar Height Variation Scale

Drag the slider to the right to increase the size of the height variations

Mortar Irregularity

Drag the slider to the right to make the mortar joints less straight

Mortar Size

Specifies the size of the mortar joints between the paving slabs or tiles

Shape Smoothness

Drag the slider to the right for smoother paving shapes

Shape Variation

Drag the slider to the right to increase the irregularity of the paving shapes

Slab Size

Specifies the average size of the paving slabs or tiles

Radius

Values between zero and one define the radius of the dimple spheres

Radius
(tread plate)

Enter the fractional radius of cylinders and spheres that make up the tread plate
pattern; a lower value creates long, thin patterns (Range: 0.0 1.0)

Ring Amplitude

Specifies the height of the rings above or below the surface

Ring Height

Specifies the height of the wood rings above or below the surface

Rough Amplitude

Drag the slider to the right to increase the amplitude of the bumps in the surface

Rough Detail

Drag the slider to the right to increase the level of fine detail for the bumps in the
surface

Rough Frequency

Drag the slider to the right to increase the number of bumps in the surface

Scale

Scale values above one make the pattern larger; values less than one make the
pattern smaller

Separation

Enter the distance between the centers of adjacent dimple spheres

Sharpness

Drag the slider to the right to increase the abruptness of the transition between
the peaks and troughs of the displacements

Smooth Min / Max

Drag the slider to the right to change the smoothness of the cell edges

Spot Amplitude

Specifies the height of the spots above or below the surface

Stripe Amplitude

Sets the height of the stripes above or below the surface

Vein Amplitude

Specifies the apparent height of the bumps

Wood Height

Specifies the height of the wood above or below the surface

Frequently Asked Questions about Radiosity

Radiosity rendering is very different from other rendering modes, and requires a different workflow process to
achieve a successful result.

Q: What is radiosity?
A: Radiosity is one way for a computer to simulate the indirect lighting that occurs when lit surfaces transfer their
energy to other surfaces. To calculate this lighting, all the surfaces in the model are converted into triangles and the
brightest triangles are visited in turn. Light from each triangle is re-emitted to its neighbors, until some amount of
energy has been accounted for, and then the radiosity solution is considered to be finished.

852

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions

Q: When should I use radiosity render modes?

A: You should use radiosity render modes when:
The usual direct lighting and ambient light does not capture the lighting subtlety, contrasts, or color tones
satisfactorily.
One bounce of light is not enough, in a Custom Renderworks rendering with final gather rendering enabled.
There is a large contrast between the darkest and brightest parts of the model, or there are large color contrasts
among the lit areas in the model.
You are rendering interiors, where the light energy would eventually be dispersed to many surfaces.
You are rendering exteriors, and you want to see washes of light from overhangs, patios, sidewalks, etc.

Q: When should I not use radiosity render modes?

A: You should not use radiosity render modes when:
You can quickly produce satisfactory lighting by combining existing Vectorworks light objects, or easily fake
the indirect lighting with fill lights.
You can use area lights or a dome of directional lights to provide satisfactory soft lighting effects.
There is not significant contrast between the brightest and darkest areas of the model, or there is not much color
contrast between the lit surfaces in the model.
Almost all of the light energy that falls on the model's surfaces will be lost into space and not hit neighboring
surfaces when re-emitted.
A satisfactory rendering can be achieved with Custom Renderworks including final gather rendering options.
The geometry is so complex that an effective radiosity solution would take too long.

Q: How do radiosity and ambient light relate?

A: Ambient light is a catch-all phrase for the remaining light that is bouncing around in the model. Radiosity can be
thought of as a way to correctly calculate and localize the ambient light. As more energy is accounted for in the
radiosity solution, the (un-localized) ambient energy decreases until all the light energy has been localized. Radiosity
can be used as a fast way to produce a more accurate ambient term, and apply some of the brightest light to specific
regions of the model. Note that any ambient lighting set by the Set Layer Lighting Options command should be
turned off for a radiosity rendering (set the ambient lighting control options by clicking Ambient Options from the
Radiosity Options category of the Custom Radiosity Options dialog box).

Q: Why is radiosity memory- and processor-intensive?

A: Radiosity uses a lot of memory because all of the model's geometry must be duplicated and converted into triangles
of a certain size, and assigned energy values. The more detailed geometry in a model, the more memory the radiosity
processing will use and the more time will be required to re-emit light energy from each triangle to its neighbors. Also,
the higher the render mode's detail settings, the more triangles are produced, resulting in larger memory requirements
and more time to re-emit the light energy onto each triangles neighbors. Doubling the number of surfaces in a model
actually quadruples the time required for radiosity processing.

Q: What is the difference between radiosity and final gather rendering?

A: Both rendering processes create indirect lighting effects. However, final gather rendering is not affected by the
model geometry, in that it does not duplicate the geometry and convert it into triangles with assigned energy values.
Final gather rendering uses one bounce of light to create indirect lighting effects, while the light energy in a radiosity
rendering is emitted and re-emitted until the solution is complete. Radiosity avoids some problems relating to noisy or
speckled foregrounds in renderings, while final gather rendering avoids the triangulation artifacts seen in some
radiosity images. Final gather rendering takes advantage of multi-threaded processors, while radiosity does not. For
very complex models, final gather rendering enabled in Custom Renderworks may provide a satisfactory rendering
which would take too long to realistically achieve with radiosity alone.

Frequently Asked Questions about Radiosity |

853

The benefits of both types of indirect lighting effects can be achieved by combining them. For the most important
(bright) objects in the model, use radiosity, and exclude the remaining objects from the solution. Final gather rendering
can finish the indirect lighting effects.

Q: How can I modify my model to render faster with radiosity?

A: You can modify your model in these ways to help radiosity render faster:
1. Use the highest-level geometry you can to model your objects. It is much better to model an object as an extrude,
sweep, boolean solid, or a NURBS surface than as a mesh. The worst way to model for a radiosity rendering is to
create a detailed object as a set of small, individual 3D polygons.
2. Eliminate 3D details that are not going to be significant to the rendered image or the indirect lighting. For
example, if you model a staircase's individual bolts and threaded screws, each of these will be contributing
unnecessarily to the memory and time required for the radiosity solution. The Median Obj Size shown in the
Custom Radiosity Options dialog box will have an unusually small value when the model consists of mostly tiny
geometry.
3. Enable final gather rendering effects to handle the details excluded from the radiosity solution (select Use Final
Gather in the Custom Radiosity Options dialog box).
4. Limit the size of large ground areas and landscape surfaces to the minimum size needed for the rendered image.
Depending on the render mode's detail settings, the large surface area can produce millions of triangles that do
not significantly light up the building because their energy is emitted mostly into space.
5. If geometry must be visible in the rendered image but will not contribute significantly to the indirect lighting,
consider applying per-texture or per-object radiosity overrides to them to help the radiosity processor ignore
them.

Q: How do I control how much light is re-emitted from an object?

A: The reflectivity shader controls how much light is re-emitted from a surface. To control this amount, apply a texture
that uses a reflectivity shader, and adjust the reflectivity shader's Diffuse Factor. The default reflectivity shader when
one is not assigned is Matte, whose Diffuse Factor is set to 100% by default.
In addition, use radiosity overrides. Turn off or turn on radiosity for specific objects or textures by using the
override check boxes shown in the Edit Texture dialog box and the Object Info palette's Render tab. For example, to
render a large ground area on the active layer plane with direct lighting but not include it in radiosity processing for
efficiency, you can set the Radiosity Override check boxes to not emit and not receive. This effectively removes the
active layer plane from radiosity processing. If a patch of grass needs to re-emit onto the side of a building, split the
ground area into a large one that does not emit or receive and a skirt around the building that does emit and receive.
Through the Radiosity Optimizations dialog box, model parameters can be set so that only certain objects re-emit
indirect light, and all other objects either just receive indirect light or do not participate at all in the radiosity
processing. One combination that can be produced is one where only the light on a floor is re-emitted onto the rest of
the room, which becomes one bounce as in final gather rendering.

Q: How do I efficiently render exteriors with radiosity?

A: You can efficiently render exteriors with radiosity by:
1. Using Custom Radiosity render mode, select the Include Visible Surfaces Only check box in the Radiosity
Optimizations dialog box. This means that only the visible building facade will be involved with radiosity
processing. The objects and surfaces that are behind the facade will not be included in the radiosity processing.
2. Set large ground areas and tree image props to not emit or receive, using either Edit Texture or Object Info palette
radiosity overrides.

854

| Appendix C: Renderworks Shader Definitions

3. Set the Obj Inclusion slider in the Custom Radiosity Options dialog box such that only the largest lit surfaces
will emit (gray), and the smaller details like window mullions and door knobs will only receive (red).
4. If any surfaces are not visible that do produce significant indirect lighting (like flat roof surfaces that aren't
visible in the current view), they can be forced to participate despite not being visible by setting either an Edit
Texture or Object Info palette radiosity override to emit and receive.
5. Enable final gather rendering effects to handle the details excluded from the radiosity solution (select Use Final
Gather in the Custom Radiosity Options dialog box).
6. In the Custom Radiosity Options dialog box, deselect the Create Ambient from Remaining Energy check box.
This makes it possible to stop the radiosity processor sooner without having additional ambient lighting that
makes the model overly bright or overly saturated with color.

Index
Numerics
2D Data bar 220
2D Locus tool 271
2D objects
display in 3D 219
edit in 3D 301
2D Plan command 451
2D Polygon tool 264
2D Reshape tool 306
2D Selection tool 36
2D Symbol Insertion tool 193
3D Data bar 337
3D Locus tool 350
3D perspective, simulating 320
3D Polygon tool 340
3D Power Pack 357
3D Reshape tool 403, 558, 588
3D Selection tool 39
3D Symbol Insertion tool 197

A
Activate Class command 41, 119
Activate Layer command 41, 110
Activate Object Info Palette command 302
Active layer plane 635
Active Layer Scale command 63, 105
Add Solids command 407
Add Surface command 331
Alert dialog boxes, turning on and off 51
Align Layer Views command 727
Align Plane tool 645
Align to Grid command 436
Align/Distribute 3D command 406
Align/Distribute command (2D) 315
Always Display Active Document 176
Ambient lighting
for layers 466
for sheet layer viewports 708
Analysis tool 381
Angle of rotation, custom 440
Angle tool 529
Angles

constraining 163
dimensioning 501
measuring 511
setting measurement units for 66
snapping 144
Angular Dimension tool 501
Animations
adding text to 701
compression settings for 695, 700
creating along a path 696
creating using an orbit point 693
editing 697
pausing 700
previewing 695, 700
saving 696, 701
viewing 701
Annotations
adding sheet borders 511
adding to viewports 715
creating drawing labels 523
creating reference markers 526
creating revision clouds 520
Anti-aliasing
Custom Renderworks option 793
OpenGL option 481
Vectorworks preference 50
Arc into Segments command 334
Arc Length Dimension tool 504
Arc Smoothing command 428
Arc tool 244
Architectural scale, conversion chart 835
Arcs
concentric constraints for 169
conventions for 835
converting to angular dimension 505
creating with Arc tool 244
creating with Quarter Arc tool 249
dimensioning 499
dimensioning length of 504
dividing into segments 334
tangent constraints for 170
Area lights 782
Arithmetic expressions, in edit fields 28
Arrays of objects 422, 567
Arrow key shortcuts 29, 48
Artistic Renderworks command 791

856

| Index

Artistic Renderworks Options command 802

Associative and non-associative hatches 281
Associative dimensioning 60, 490
Attach Record command 213
Attribute Mapping tool 295, 765
Attributes
associative hatch fills 295
changing defaults with Eyedropper 280
fill 274
gradient fills 287, 297
hatches 281
image fills 292, 298
line style 276
markers 277
opacity 276
pen 275
setting defaults for a class 116
setting defaults for new objects 75
setting for symbols 216
setting with a script 686
transferring 278
using hatches as 281
Attributes palette 273
Auto join walls preference 48, 549
Automatic drawing coordination 60
Autosave preferences 9, 54
Autoscroll feature 32

B
Back command 449
Background color preference 49
Backgrounds
applying 778
creating 752
default resources for 173
purging unused 419
using HDRI as 754
using images as 754
Backup file preferences 10, 54
Basic palette 21, 23
Batch Convert command 11
Batch rendering 809
Bzier Spline Smoothing command 428
Bitmaps
compressing 447
tracing 448

Boomerang mode
while mirroring objects 441, 442
while moving/duplicating/distributing objects 414,
415
while moving/duplicating/distributing symbols in
walls 572
while offsetting objects 314
while rotating objects 437, 438
Boomerang mode, for pausing tools 26
Border, of drawing
See Sheet borders
Bottom command 449
Break Line tool 244
Break line, properties of 244
Bump shaders
definition of 730
importing images for 744
properties of 849
types of 842

C
Cabinet
default resources for handles 173
Caching
vector information 49
viewport and radiosity images 59, 789, 795
Callout tool 236
Camera view 460
Canceling operation with Esc key 26
Capitalization command 228
Center Mark tool 500
Centering objects 315, 406
Centroids
creating sweeps with 355
engineering properties of 333
Chamfer Edge tool 393
Chamfer tool 327
Change All Fields command 215
Change One Field command 214
Change Symbol Attrs command 216
Channel tool 531
Check for Updates command xii
Check Spelling command 231
Circle tool 260
Circles

Index |
concentric constraints for 169
conventions for 835
creating 260
creating tangent to three lines 261
dimensioning 499
marking center of 500
tangent constraints for 170
Class Options command 120
Classes
applying textures with 773
creating 113
description of 2, 112
Dimension class preference 60
duplicating 119
editing 115
importing from standards or other files 100
overriding viewport properties of 719
purging unused 420
saving custom 100
setting active class 41, 48, 118
setting attributes when creating 118
setting display/snap/edit options 120
setting visibility of 125
shortcut for switching 48
using standards for 114
using workgroup referencing for 128
Clear command (Edit menu) 418
Clear command (Worksheet option) 657
Click-drag vs. click-click drawing 27, 47
Clip Surface command 332
Clip tool 317
Close All command (Window menu) 8
Close command (File menu) 8
Clouds
in Renderworks backgrounds 753
indicating revisions with 520
Collision control, for chain dimensions 492, 494
Color shaders
definition of 730
importing images for 735
properties of 843
types of 839
Colors
activating palette 82
applying 273
black and white display preference 59
black background preference 49

creating chart in active layer 84

custom palettes 83
customizing interface elements 75
default resources for color palettes 173
deleting palettes 83
displaying and sorting on color palette 79
importing from another file 84
palette manager 81
pen 275
purging 83
selecting from a color palette 80
selecting from operating system 80
setting defaults for a file 78
setting defaults for design layer 60, 109
temperature 836
Column tool (all products but Vectorworks
Architect) 576
Column Width command 657
Combine into Surface command 331
Components
applying between double lines 242, 269
creating in walls 550
deleting from walls 553
hiding at lower layer scales 59
Compose command 434
Compress Images command 447
Cone tool 345
Connect/Combine tool 429
Constrained Linear Dimension tool 494
Constraint tools
angle 163
coincident 169
colinear 168
concentric 169
distance 165
editing constraints 170
horizontal distance 164
horizontal-vertical 166
parallel 167
perpendicular 167
radius 163
tangent 170
vertical distance 164
Context menus
customizing 825
description of 41
Contours, creating 392

857

858

| Index

Conventions used in this guide xxii

Convert Copy to Lines command 443
Convert Copy to Polygons command 444
Convert to 3D Polys command 444
Convert to Area Light command 782
Convert to Generic Solids command 402
Convert to Group command 202
Convert to Line Dimension command 505
Convert to Line Light command 782
Convert to Lines command 443
Convert to Mesh command 410
Convert to NURBS command 350
Convert to Polygons command 444
Convert to Viewport command 726
Converting Vectorworks files
batch of files 11
single file 14
Copies
duplicating along path 426
of Object Info data 302
using Copy command 416
using Duplicate Array command 422, 567
using Duplicate command 421
Copy command (Edit menu) 416
Create Animation command 694, 696
Create Batch Render Job command 809
Create Color Chart command 84
Create Contours tool 392
Create Drape Surface command 370
Create Fillet Surface command 371
Create Helix-Spiral command 391
Create Image Prop command 749
Create Interpolated Surface command 361
Create Layer Link command 724
Create Planar Caps command 376
Create Polys from Walls command 556
Create Report command 647
Create Roof command 582
Create Surface from Curves command 369
Create Symbol command 189
Create Viewport command (Fundamentals) 702, 705
Create Walls from Polygon command 553
Cubic Spline Smoothing command 428

Cues, SmartCursor
See SmartCursor cues
Cursor, full screen 55
Curves
See NURBS objects
Custom Radiosity command 795
Custom Radiosity Options command 796
Custom Renderworks Options command 792
Custom Selection command 685
Custom Tool/Attribute command 686
Cut 2D Section command 723
Cut 3D Section command 722
Cut command (Edit menu option) 416
Cutouts
in roofs 587
in solids 399
Cylinder tool 341

D
Dash styles
applying 276
default resources for 173
defaults for file 85
exporting to previous Vectorworks versions 87
purging unused 420
setting defaults for a class 117
Dash Styles command 85
Dashed Hidden Line command 479
Data bar
floating 222
general description of 17
in 2D 220
in 3D 337
Database command 659
Database Headers command 657
Database rows
adding to worksheet 671
removing from a worksheet 672
Datum (temporary origin point) 146
Decals
creating 767
editing 770
Decompose command 435, 727
Default resources
creating custom files 174

Index |
creating resource libraries 186
list of 173
preference for displaying 51
Degrees
conventions for 835
measuring 511
setting as document angle units 66
Delete All Guides command 68
Delete command (Worksheet option) 657
Delta Z value 106
Deselecting objects 33
Design layers
See Layers, design
Detach Record command 213
Dictionaries for spell checking
adding and editing 234
languages available 231
Digitizing tablets 95
Dimensional constraints
See Parametric constraints
Dimensions
adding to sheet layer viewports 715
angular 501, 504
associative 60, 490
automatically associating with objects 60, 491
baseline 496
chained 495
collision control for text in 492, 494
constrained 494
converting objects into 505
default class for 60, 112
dual 497
editing 505
managing custom standards 485
of selected objects 497
ordinate (from a fixed point) 496
properties of 508
radial 498
setting a default standard for 60
setting thickness of slash 60
setting units for 64
unconstrained baseline 493
unconstrained chained 492
unconstrained linear 491
Direction of NURBS curve, showing 359
Directional lights 469
Distance

constraining horizontally 164

constraining regardless of angle 165
constraining vertically 164
dimensioning 491
measuring without recording 510
snapping to 150
Distributing objects 315, 406
Docking palettes 22, 51
Document Preferences command 58
Dormer windows 591
Double Line Polygon tool 268
Double Line tool 241
Double lines
creating 241
creating polygons with 268
defining components between (lines) 242
defining components between (polygons) 269
Downloading Vectorworks updates 52
DPI
See Resolution
Drafting aids 334
Draped surfaces 370
Drawing area 18
Drawing borders
See Sheet borders
Drawing Label tool 523
Dual dimensions 497
Duplicate Along Path command 426
Duplicate Array command 422, 567
Duplicate command 421
Duplicate Symbol in Wall tool 565
Dutch hip roofs 586
DXB files 616
DXF/DWG
description of 607
exporting 610
importing 621
information lost in translation 608

E
Edges
chamfering 360, 393
filleting 360, 395
hiding and showing 310
OpenGL option for 481

859

860

| Index

selecting 358
snapping to 148
Edit 2D Component command (symbols) 200
Edit 3D Component command (symbols) 200
Edit 3D Wall Hole Component command (symbols) 200,
574
Edit Annotations command 715
Edit Constraints command 171
Edit Criteria command 659
Edit Crop command 714
Edit Design Layer command 713
Edit Group command 445
Edit Marker List command 75
Edit Polyline command 311
Edit Symbol command 200
Edit Viewport command 711, 714
Encrypt VectorScript command 691
Engineering Properties command 333
Exit Layer Link command 726
Exit Symbol command 202
Exit Viewport command 713
Export command 599
Export DXF/DWG command 614
Export EPix/Piranesi command 600, 816
Export EPSF File command 601
Export High Dynamic Range Image (HDRI)
command 814
Export IGES command 606
Export Image File command 602
Export Parasolid X_T (3D only) command 605
Export QuickTime VR Object command 819
Export QuickTime VR Panorama command 820
Export Stereo Lithography command 606
Export Worksheet command 601, 683
Exporting files
database formats 600
DXF/DWG format 600, 610
EPix/Piranesi format 600, 816
EPSF format 600, 601
HDRI format 814
IGES format 601, 605
image formats 600, 602
Metafile formats 600
older Vectorworks formats 601

Parasolid X_T format 601, 605

PDF format 600
PICT format 600
QuickTime formats 600, 818
SAT format 601
Stereo Lithography format 601, 606
VectorScript commands 601
worksheet formats 601, 682
Extend NURBS command 389
Extension lines for snapping 147
Extract tool 379
Extrude Along Path command 352
Extrude command 351
Extruded Polygon tool 340
Extruded Rectangle tool 339
Extrudes, reshaping 403
Eyedropper tool 278, 550

F
Faces of solids, selecting 358
Fast Radiosity command 791
Fast Renderworks command 790
Fast Renderworks with Shadows command 790
Favorites, in Resource Browser 181, 186
Feedback segment (SmartCursor cue) 152, 159
Files
appending extensions to names of 51
closing 8
converting 10
creating a new file on startup 51
exporting 599
importing 597
linking 128
list of recently used 4
new 4
opening existing 4
printing 92
recovering corrupted data 103
reducing size of 48, 59, 402, 419, 447
saving 8
saving as a resource library 186
saving as a template 89
saving automatically 9, 54
saving in a rendered mode 789
VectorScript 688
Fill

Index |
applying to objects 274
editing associative hatches 295
editing gradients 297
editing image fills 298
setting defaults for a class 116
using gradients as 287
using hatches as 281
using images as 292
Fillet Edge tool 395
Fillet tool 326
Fillets
creating between objects 326
creating between surfaces 371
editing edges of 360
joining double lines with 321
reshaping edges with 395
Filtered image color shader 735
Final gather
options 793
with Custom Renderworks 792
with radiosity 795
Final Quality Radiosity command 791
Final Quality Renderworks command 790
Final Shaded Polygon command 479
Find Resource command 183
Find-Replace Text command 234
Fit to Objects command 464
Fit to Page Area command 465
Fixed Point Resize tool 318
Flip Horizontal command 439
Flip Vertical command 439
Floating data bar 222
Floor command 541
Flyover tool 452
Fog (Renderworks background) 757
Font command 228
Fonts
list of recently used 229
mapping missing 5, 50
setting defaults for new text 224
setting for worksheets 662
Force Select command 41
Format Cells command 657, 660
Format Text command 227
Formulas, worksheet 666

Freehand tool 255

Front command 449
Functions, worksheet 674

G
Gable roofs 586
GDI+ imaging (Windows) 49, 50
Geometric constraints
See Parametric constraints
Gradians, setting as document angle units 66
Gradient colors, in a Renderworks background 754
Gradient fills
applying 289
creating 287
default resources for 173
editing 297
purging unused 419
setting defaults for a class 117
Gray layers and classes 120, 126
Grayscale, simulating for prints and PDFs 59
Grid
activating grid snapping 141
aligning to 436
changing color of 72
printing 142
settings for 141
shortcut for moving objects on 48
showing in drawing area 142
Ground fog (Renderworks background) 757
Ground plane 71
Group command 445
Groups
creating 445
editing 446
returning to top level of nested 446
scaling 318
showing other objects while editing 49
ungrouping 445
Guide objects 68

H
Handles
customizing display of 35, 70
description of 34
preference for number of 47

861

862

| Index

Hatch command 285

Hatches
applying associative 285
applying non-associative 285
associative 281
default resources for 173
defining pattern for 281
editing associative hatch fills 295
editing definitions 287
example of creating 284
in libraries 833
non-associative 281
purging unused 419
setting defaults for a class 116
HDRI backgrounds 754
Heads-up display 222
Helixes 391
Help
screen tips 26
system xxiii
Hemisphere tool 344
Hidden Line command 478
Hide Guides command 68, 69
Highlighting
customizing display of 70
description of 33
preferences for 55
Hip roofs 584
History of view changes 466
Holes in objects 317
Horizontal constraints
Constrain Horiz Distance tool 164
Constrain Horiz-Vertical tool 166
Hybrid objects
creating symbols from 190
description of 1
ungrouping 445

I
I-beam tool 532
Image fills
applying 293
compressing 447
creating 292
default resources for 173
editing 298

in libraries 833
setting defaults for a class 117
Images
as backgrounds 754
as bump shaders 744
as color shaders 735
as HDRI backgrounds 754
as props 749
as reflectivity shaders 738
as transparency shaders 740
compressing 48, 447
exporting drawings as 602
extracting 185
importing 598
purging unused 419
referencing 131
Import command 597
Import DXF/DWG command 623
Import Image File command 598
Import Single DXF/DWG command 625
Importing
classes, layers, and objects 100
colors 84
DXF/DWG files as symbols 624
images 598, 734
Microsoft Word table 682
resources 181
script palettes 692
symbols in folders 204
VectorScript 598, 690
Importing files
DXF/DWG format 597, 621
EPSF format 597
IGES format 598
Metafile format 598
Parasolid X_T format 598
PICT format 597
SAT format 598
worksheet formats 598, 681
Insert command 657
Installing Vectorworks xi
Interpolated NURBS surfaces 361
Intersect Solids command 408
Intersect Surface command 330
Invert Selection command 33
Invisible layers and classes 120, 126

Index |

J
Join command 320

K
Keyboard shortcuts
See Shortcuts
Keys, special functions of 25

L
Label, drawing 523
Languages, for spell-checking 231
Lasso selection mode
2D Selection tool 38
3D Selection tool 40
Layer links
converting to and from design layer viewports 14, 726
cropping 725
unlocking 725
Layer Options command 120
Layer plane, definition 219
Layers, design
aligning views for all layers 727
applying backgrounds to 778
changing for similar object creation 51
changing stacking order of 106
converting referenced layers into design layer
viewports 14
creating 101
creating backgrounds for 752
creating custom 100
description of 100
importing from standards or other files 100
linking 723
overriding viewport properties of 716
properties of 103
purging unused 420
setting active 41, 48, 109
setting color 109
setting display/snap/edit options 120
setting opacity 107
setting scale 62, 105
setting transfer mode 107
setting visibility of 125
shortcut for switching 48
using standards for 103
using workgroup referencing for 128, 130
Z and Delta Z values 106

Layers, sheet
creating 101
creating custom 100
description of 100
importing from standards or other files 100
properties of 111
saving separate views for 48
Left command 449
Left Isometric command 449
Left Rear Isometric command 449
Length, measuring 510
Libraries
complete list of 833
default resources 173
License agreement xii
Light tool 469
Lighting
adding area and linear lights 782
adding custom lights 786
adding directional, point, and spot lights 469
changing light source direction 476
displaying light objects 50
light source preferences 470
light source properties 473
loading light distribution files 785, 786
rendering with radiosity 794
setting ambient light options 466
setting sunlight options 468
turning light sources on and off 470
using for weather effects 757
Line into Segments command 335
Line lights 782
Line Render Options command 481
Line style
applying 276
default dash styles for file 85
default line thickness 87
setting defaults for a class 117
Line Thickness command 87
Line tool 240
Lines
converting objects to 443
converting to dimensions 505
creating a circle tangent to three 261
creating break lines 243
creating colinear 168
creating double 241, 268

863

864

| Index

creating horizontal or vertical 166

creating parallel 167
creating perpendicular 167
creating single 240
creating tangent 170
dividing into segments 335
Link Text to Record command 211
Linking
design layers 723
files with workgroup referencing 128
symbol text to a record 211
List Symbols command 216
Lit Fog (Renderworks background) 757
Locate in Resource Browser command 184
Loci
displaying loci objects 50
effects when aligning or distributing objects 316
extracting from 3D objects 379
in 2D 271
in 3D 350
marking centroids of objects with 334
Locking
Data bar values when snapping 158
objects 435
Loft Surface tool 363
Logging program time 51, 57
Lower Left Isometric command 449
Lower Left Rear Isometric command 449
Lower Right Isometric command 449
Lower Right Rear Isometric command 449

M
Magnification
See Zooming
Make Guide command 68
Mapping textures
with Attribute Mapping tool 765
with the Object Info palette 761
Margins, of text blocks 225
Marker types
applying 277
by class 117
defaults 75
editing 76
Mask transparency shader 741
Measuring

angles 501
arc lengths 504
distances 510
objects 485
objects in 3D with NURBS curves 347
Menu bar 17
Meshes
converting objects to 410
smoothing when rendering 60
Message bar 18
Minimizing and maximizing palettes 22
Mirror tool 441
Missing fonts, mapping 5, 50
Mouse
activating flyover with mouse wheel 454
drawing with 27
panning with mouse wheel 29
scrolling with mouse wheel 32, 48
zooming with mouse wheel 30, 48
Move 3D command 412
Move by Points tool 413, 571, 573
Move command 412, 570
Move Page tool 29
Move Polygon Handles mode (2D Reshape tool) 307
Movies
See Animations
Moving objects, shortcut for 48
Multiple Extrude command 352

N
Narrow Perspective command 452
Nested groups 445
Network protection xii
New command 4
New features
in Renderworks xxi
in Vectorworks xiii
Next View (on View bar) 19, 466
No Smoothing command 428
None class 112
Normal of NURBS surface, showing 359
Normal Perspective command 452
Normal Scale command 64
Nudging

Index |
shortcut for 48
symbols in walls 569
NURBS Arc tool 349
NURBS Circle tool 348
NURBS Curve tool 347
NURBS objects
analyzing 381
combining two objects 433
composing multiple objects 434
connecting to a boundary object 431, 434
creating contours 392
creating curves 347
creating drape surfaces 370
creating fillet surfaces between 371
creating helixes or spirals 391
creating interpolated surfaces 361
creating planar caps 376
creating protrusions and cutouts in 399
creating shells from surfaces 398
creating surfaces by revolving profiles 376
creating surfaces from curves 369
creating tapered extrudes from 354
decomposing 435
editing fillets/chamfers/shells 360
editing surface properties of 378
extending 389
extracting curves from solid edges 379
extracting surfaces from solid faces 379
projecting and adding surfaces 388
projecting and splitting surfaces 386
projecting and trimming surfaces 387
rebuilding 384
reversing curve direction 360
showing curve direction 359
showing surface normals 359
splitting by line 325
splitting by point 324
stitching and trimming surfaces 399
NURBS surfaces
reshaping 404
sectioning 409
U and V direction 378

O
Object attributes, default 75
Object Info palette
activating 302
assigning textures (Render tab) 302, 745

865

copying and pasting data 302

editing properties (Shape tab) 303
editing record information (Data tab) 305
object position locator 251
Objects, editing
adding (Add Solids command) 407
aligning in 2D 315
aligning in 3D 406
aligning to grid 436
aligning to the working plane 644
applying attributes to 273
applying textures to 761
applying transparency 276
centering in 2D 315
centering in 3D 406
chamfering (Chamfer Edge tool) 360, 393
chamfering (Chamfer tool) 327
changing stacking order 418
clipping (Clip Surface command) 332
clipping (Clip tool) 317
clipping (Intersect Surface command) 330
clipping (Subtract Solids command) 408
combining (Combine into Surface command) 331
combining (Compose command) 434
combining (Connect/Combine tool) 429
converting a copy to lines 443
converting a copy to polygons 444
converting from previous versions 8
converting to generic 402
converting to lines 443
converting to polygons 444
creating protrusions and cutouts in solids 399
creating shells from solids 360, 397
custom selection with a script 685
cutting/copying/pasting 119, 416
decomposing 435
deleting 418
deselecting 33
distributing in 2D 315
distributing in 3D 406
duplicating (Duplicate Along Path command) 426
duplicating (Duplicate Array command) 422
duplicating (Duplicate command) 421
duplicating (Move by Points tool) 413
entering and exiting objects 446
extracting surfaces from solid faces 379
extruding 351
filleting (Fillet Edge tool) 360, 395
filleting (Fillet tool) 326

866

| Index

grouping 445
intersection (Intersect Solids command) 408
joining (Join command) 320
joining (Wall Join tool) 555, 561
locking 435
mapping textures to 760
marking center of 500
measuring 485, 497
measuring distances between 510
mirroring 441
moving (2D Selection tool) 36
moving (Move 3D command) 412
moving (Move by Points tool) 413
moving (Move command) 411
nudging 48
offsetting duplicates of 312
preventing resizing of 164, 165
preventing rotation of 166
reshaping (2D Reshape tool) 306, 310
reshaping (3D Reshape tool) 403
reshaping (Freehand tool) 256
resizing 36, 318
rotating 436
scaling 318, 410
sectioning solids 409
selecting 33, 357
setting default attributes 75
shearing 320
smoothing 428
spacing in 2D 315
spacing in 3D 406
splitting 322
stitching and trimming surfaces 399
transferring attributes 278
trimming 316
ungrouping 445
unlocking 435
with Object Info palette 301
Oblique Cabinet command 451
Oblique Cavalier command 451
Offset tool 312
Offsetting
duplicated objects 48, 312
from a datum point 148
from a smart edge 149
symbols in walls 195
Opacity
design layer 107
interface elements 75

objects 276
OpenGL command 478
OpenGL render options 480
Operators, in Object Info palette 28
Orbit point animations 693
Ordinate dimensions 496
Organization command 97, 102
Origin
disabling dragging of 70
moving with Set Origin Button 70
setting for drawing area 69
setting for sheet layer 112
switching between 70
using temporary datum point 146
Orthogonal command 451
Oval tool 263
Ovals
creating by box 263
creating by width and height 263
marking center of 500
Overrides
for class properties in sheet layer viewports 719
for layer properties in sheet layer viewports 716

P
Page Setup command 90
Palettes
Attributes 75, 273
Basic 21
color 78
docking 22, 51
minimizing/maximizing 22
modifying with Workspace Editor 826
Object Info 301
resetting saved positions 21, 52
resizing 17
Resource Browser 175
saving positions of 21, 830
Snapping 139
specifying margins for 21, 52
tool palette features 23
Tool Sets 21
VectorScript 691
Working Planes 642
Pan tool 28
Panning, shortcut for 48

Index |
Parallel objects
creating with Constrain Parallel tool 167
creating with Offset tool 312
Parametric constraints
deleting 170
description of 162
dimensional constraints 163
editing 170
geometric constraints 166
hiding 49, 162
Parasolid modeling kernel
converting old files to 13, 15
Paste as Picture command 417
Paste command 417
Paste Criteria command 657, 669
Paste Function command 657, 668
Paste in Place command 417
Paths
creating text along 230
duplicating objects along 426
editing 446
Patterns
applying to objects 274
defaults for file 88
setting defaults for a class 116
Pausing the current tool 26
PDF files, referencing 131
Peaks
adding to walls 559
removing from roofs 590
removing from walls 560
Pen style
applying to objects 275
setting defaults for a class 117
Perpendicular constraints 167
Perspective command (Projection menu option) 451
Perspective commands (View menu) 452
Perspective, and Shear tool 320
Pillar command 555
Pillars, joining to walls 555
Planar 2D objects 219
Plane
See Working plane, Active Layer plane
Planes list 642
Plants, adding (VBvisual Plant tool) 751

Plug-in objects
creating with VectorScript 188
inserting from a tool set 188
placing and editing 188
Point lights 469
Polygonal selection mode
2D Selection tool 38
3D Selection tool 40
Polygons
changing vertices of 308
combining 429
converting to 444
creating from walls 556
creating roofs from 582
creating walls from 553
creating with 2D Polygon tool 264
creating with 3D Polygon tool 340
extruded 340
hiding and showing edges of 310
moving handles of 307
regular (equal-sided) 270
smoothing corners of 428
using double lines 268
Polyline tool 253
Polylines
changing vertices of 308
combining 429
converting text to 229
creating from walls 556
creating roofs from 582
creating spirals 258
creating with Freehand tool 255
creating with Polyline tool 253
editing 311
hiding and showing edges of 310
moving handles of 307
smoothing corners of 428
Postscript, printing with 93
Power Pack, 3D 357
Preferences, document
Dimensions tab 60
Display tab 59
Resolution tab 61
Preferences, Vectorworks
3D tab 52
Autosave tab 53
Display tab 48
Edit tab 47

867

868

| Index

Interactive tab 54
resetting 58
Session tab 50
User Folders tab 56
Previewing
animations 695, 700
file image 6
hatches 286
textures 733
thumbnail icons (Macintosh Quick Look) 7
Previous Selection command 41
Previous view (on View bar) 19, 466
Print command 92
Printing
description of print area 90
displaying print area (Fit to Page Area) 465
drawings 92
grid 142
printer setup for drawings 91
printer setup for worksheets 657
resolution (document preference) 62
resolution (Edit Sheet Layers dialog) 112
resolution (Print dialog option) 93
scaling 91
showing page boundaries 91
worksheets 658
Profiles of objects, editing 446
Project tool 385
Projection commands 451
Properties command 42
Properties, engineering 333
Props, using images as 749
Protractor tool 511
Protrusion/Cutout tool 399
Purge command 419

Q
Quarter Arc tool 249
Quartz imaging (Macintosh) 49, 50
Quick Look (Macintosh)
file preview 6
file thumbnail 7
QuickTime animations 693
QuickTime files 818, 820
QuickTime VR Object command 600

QuickTime VR Panorama command 600

Quit command 15

R
Radial Dimension tool 498
Radians, setting as document angle units 66
Radiosity
description of 794
frequently asked questions 851
pausing a solution 801
setting custom options 796
starting a solution 794
stopping a solution 796
workflow 795
Radius
constraining 163
dimensioning 499
editing in 2D objects 306
editing in 3D objects 403
of fillets 327
Rails
lofting surfaces with 363
revolving profiles along 376
Rasterizing print output 94
Ray tracing (Custom Renderworks option) 793
Rebuild NURBS command 384
Recalculate command 656
Record formats
attaching 207
attaching to symbols 213
changing all field values for a symbol 215
changing one field for a symbol 214
creating 205
detaching from symbols 213
editing 209
editing for objects 305
linking text within a symbol to 211
purging unused 419
retrieving data for worksheets 674
viewing details of 305
Rectangle tool 249
Rectangles
creating 249
extruding 339
marking center of 500
Rectangular selection mode
2D Selection tool 38

Index |
3D Selection tool 39
Rectangular Tubing tool 534
Redo command 411
Reference grid
definition of 67
settings for 141
Reference Marker tool 526
Reference point (2D locus) 271
Referencing
See Workgroup references
Reflectivity shaders
definition of 730
importing images for 738
properties of 847
types of 840
Refreshing the drawing view 29
Regular Polygon tool 270
Remove Wall Breaks tool 561
Renaming
VectorScript 690
working plane position 643
Render Bitmap tool 48, 807
Render Modes (on View bar) 478, 789
Rendering with Vectorworks
canceling a render process 478
line render options 481
OpenGL options 480
smoothing mesh objects 60
Renderworks
advanced lighting 781
applying and mapping textures 302, 758
applying Renderworks backgrounds 778
artistic options 802
batch rendering 809
canceling a batch render 811
canceling a render process 789
creating image props 749
creating layer backgrounds 752
creating textures and shaders 731
custom options 791
editing textures and shaders 745
exporting rendered drawings 814
preparing to render 789
purging unused backgrounds 419
radiosity 794
rendering a selected area 807
rendering modes 789

setting a camera view 460

smoothing mesh objects 60
summary of commands and tools 729
Renderworks Camera tool 460
Reports, creating 647
Resetting
saved settings 52
Vectorworks preferences 58
Reshaping
2D objects (2D Reshape tool) 306
2D objects (Freehand tool) 256
extrudes and solid primitives 403
NURBS surfaces 404
preference for number of handles 47
roof objects 588
walls 558
Resizing
objects 318, 403
objects interactively 37
Resolution
for export 62
for printing (document preference) 62
for printing (Edit Sheet Layers dialog) 112
for printing (Print dialog box) 93
of 2D object display 48
of 3D object display 53
of bitmaps 62
of printed patterns 94
of rotated text 61
Resource Browser
context menu 42, 180, 185
description of 175
favorites 181, 186
hiding and showing resource types 178
menu commands 185
opening 176
viewing thumbnail images 177
Resource Browser command 176
Resources
browsing documents for 180
creating 179
creating and using gradients 287
creating and using hatches 282
creating and using image fills 292
creating libraries of 186
creating record formats 205
creating symbol folders 202
creating symbols 189

869

870

| Index

creating worksheets from 650

custom 174
default 173
editing referenced 136
editing symbols 200
finding 183
finding from drawing 184
identifying duplicate 174
importing or referencing from another file 181
importing symbols 204
inserting symbols 193
linking to favorite files 181, 186
list of object libraries 833
moving symbols 203
organizing the display of 175
preference for displaying default content 51
purging unused 419
using workgroup referencing for 128, 134
VectorScript palettes 691
VectorScripts 688
Revert to Saved command 10
Revision Cloud tool 520
Revolve with Rail command 376
Ribs, creating 389
Right command 449
Right Isometric command 449
Right Rear Isometric command 449
Roof Face command 579
Roof faces
creating 578
creating cut-outs in 581
dragging and dropping symbols into 581
reshaping 580
Roofs
adding dormer windows to 591
adding skylights to 594
adding vertices to 590
applying textures by class 776
applying textures by mapping 760
applying textures to 762, 776
changing to a Dutch hip shape 586
changing to a gable shape 586
creating 582
creating cut-outs in 587
editing 584
removing 3D peaks from 590
reshaping 588
Rotate 3D command 440

Rotate 3D View command 457

Rotate Left 90 Degrees command 439
Rotate Right 90 Degrees command 439
Rotate tool 436
Rotate View tool 456
Rotated Rectangle tool 250
Rotating
2D and 3D objects 436
3D views 456
controlling display during 53
preventing rotation of objects 166
symbols 195, 198
unrotating 3D objects 440
with 2D Selection tool 37, 436
working plane 639
Round Tubing tool 535
Round Wall tool 548
Rounded Rectangle tool 252, 253
Rounding, settings for 65
Row Height command 657
Rulers
description of 18
showing and hiding 49
Run VectorScript command 689

S
Save a Copy As command 9
Save As command 9
Save As Template command 89
Save command 9
Save Palette Positions command 21, 178, 830
Save View command 121
Saved Views palette 124
Saving
animations 696, 701
autosave preferences 54
files 8
files automatically 9
palette positions 21
reverting to last saved version 10
tool attributes as a script 686
working plane location 643
Scale
architectural conversion chart 835
importing 628

Index |
in printer setup 91
interactive, disable 37
interactive, multiple objects 37
interactive, single object 37
normal 64
of callouts 240
of design layers 62, 105
Scale Objects command 318, 410
Screen plane, definition 219
Screen tips 26
Script palettes 691
Scripts
See VectorScript
Scrolling
automatically 32
showing and hiding scroll bars 49
with mouse wheel 32, 48
with scroll bars 32
Section Solids command 409
Sections, cutting 722
Select All command 40
Select Data Items command 659
Select Guides command 69
Select Item command 659
Selecting
2D objects 36
3D objects 39
all visible objects 40
drawing objects with custom selection scripts 685
edges and faces 357
guides 69
highlighting and handles 33, 70
highlighting preferences 55
modifier keys for 33
previously selected objects 41
text 227
Selection box
definition 155
settings for 55
Send Backward command 418
Send Forward command 418
Send to Back command 418
Send to Front command 418
Serial number xi, 52
Set 3D View command 459
Set Criteria command 659

Set Lighting Options command 466

Set Origin command 69
Set Perspective command 452
Set Print Area command 91
Set Renderworks Background command 779
Set Size command 224
Set Sun Position command 468
Set Working Plane tool 637
Shaded Polygon command 479
Shaded Polygon No Lines command 479
Shaders
definition of 730
editing 745
editing from Resource Browser 748
editing selected 747
image-based 730, 734
solid 730
wrapped 730
Shadows
area/line light option 783
Artistic Renderworks option 805
custom light option 787
Custom Renderworks options 792
Fast Renderworks 790
light source option for 470, 473
OpenGL option for 481
Shear tool 320
Sheet Border tool 511
Sheet borders
adding a custom title block (Fundamentals) 518
adding a title block 517
placing 511
properties of 513
Sheet layers
See Layers, sheet
Shell Solid tool 397
Shortcuts
assigning keys to modes 829
assigning keys to tool palettes 826
assigning to commands 823
assigning to modes 829
assigning to snapping 829
assigning to tools 826
document and object context menus 825
exporting to a text file 823
for arrow keys 48
for selecting modes on Tool bar 18

871

872

| Index

Show Guides command 69

Show or Hide Constraints command 162
Simple Stair tool 577
Sketch styles, purging unused 419
Skylights
adding area lights for 782
creating 594
Smart Edge tool 148
Smart points snapping 146
Smart Points tool 146
SmartCursor cues
list of 159
using with parametric constraint tools 162
SmartCursor Settings command 139
Snap box
definition of 155
settings for 55
Snap grid
aligning to 436
definition of 67
settings for 141
Snap loupe 158
Snap to Angle tool 145
Snap to Distance tool 150
Snap to Grid tool 141
Snap to Intersection tool 151
Snap to Object tool 142
Snap to Tangent tool 152
Snap to Working Plane tool 152
Snapping
acquisition hints 155
controlling 153
customizing display of 70
example 152
in congested drawing 158
locking values with Data bar 158
overview of 152
setting parameters 139
SmartCursor cues 159
to angles 144
to distance 150
to intersection 151
to locus 271
to object 120, 142
to plan rotation angle 145
to tangent 151

to working plane 152

types of snap points 153
using the snap loupe 158
vector locks 157
with audible cues 51
with extension lines 147
with smart edge 148
with smart points 146
Snapping palette 139
Snow (Renderworks background) 757
Solid primitives, reshaping 403
Sound cues, turning on and off 51
SpaceNavigator mouse 458
Spacing objects 315, 406
Spell checking text 231
Sphere tool 343
Spiral tool 258
Spirals
in 2D (Spiral tool) 258
in 3D (Create Helix-Spiral command) 391
Split tool 322
Spot lights 469
Spreadsheet command 659
Spreadsheet rows, adding to worksheets 665
Square Tubing tool 536
Stacking order
of design layers 106
of objects 418
Stairs, creating (Simple Stair tool) 577
Standard Views command 449
Standards
for classes and layers 100
for dimensions 60, 485
Start Batch Render command 810
Stitch and Trim Surfaces command 399
Structural shapes
default resources for 174
Subtract Solids command 408
Sunlight lighting options 468
Surfaces
See NURBS objects
Survey bearings 835
Sweep command 355
Symbols
activating with pick up mode 196

Index |
advantages of using 187
applying texture to 773
attaching records to 207, 213
black, blue, and red 187
changing all fields of 215
changing attributes of 216
changing one field value 214
converting to a group 202
creating 189
creating a list of 216
creating a new folder for 202
creating holes in 3D walls 574
detaching records from 213
dragging and dropping 193, 581
editing 198
editing definition of 199
editing in walls 573
editing record values 211
editing wall insertion options 201
importing 204
importing folders of 204
inserting 193
inserting in 2D 193
inserting in 3D 197
inserting in walls (dragging and dropping) 568
inserting in walls (Duplicate Array command) 567
inserting in walls (Duplicate Symbol in Wall tool) 565
insertion options 191
making global edits 212
moving in walls (2D Selection tool) 569
moving in walls (Move by Points tool) 570, 573
moving in walls (Move command) 570
moving in walls (nudging) 569
moving into folders 203
overview of 187
properties of 198
purging unused 420
purging unused folders 420
removing from wall 197
replacing 199
rotating 198
showing other objects while editing 49
types of 187

T
Tablet command 95
Tabs, in text 226
Tangent constraints 170

Tape Measure tool 510

Tapered extrudes 354
Tee tool 538
Templates
changing the default 90
creating new documents from 4
saving documents as 89
Text
checking spelling of 231
converting to polylines 229
creating along a path 230
creating as a block 225
creating as a single line 224
creating rotated 225
editing 227
finding and replacing 234
formatting 227
formatting, in dimensions 508
in animations 701
in custom dimensions 487
in sheet layer viewports 715
in worksheets 661
linking to record formats 211
position, in dimensions 507
preferences for 49
reversing 229
selecting 227
setting defaults for 224
tabs in 226
wrapping 225, 226
wrapping, in worksheets 662
Text Along Path command 230
Text tool 224
Textures
applying by class 773
applying to an object 761
applying to object parts 762
applying to symbols 774
applying with Attribute Mapping tool 765
creating 731
decals 767
default resources for 174
definition of 730
editing from Object Info palette 745
editing from Resource Browser 748
orientation of 761
previewing 733
purging unused 420

873

874

| Index

Title bar 17
Title blocks
adding to a sheet border 517
customizing for Fundamentals 518
default resources for 174
Tool bar, keyboard shortcuts for 18
Tool Sets palette 21, 23
Tools
changing display of 23
creating custom scripts for 686
modifying with Workspace Editor 826
pausing 26
pop-out tools 23
resetting saved mode settings 52
selecting tool sets 24
viewing multiple tool sets 24
Top command 449
Top Level command 446
Top/Plan command 449
Trace Bitmap command 448
Transfer mode, design layer 107
Translate View tool 455
Transparency
design layer 107
objects 276
Transparency shaders
definition of 730
editing 747
importing images for 740
properties of 849
types of 841
Trim command 316
Trim tool 316
TrueType to Polyline command 229

U
Unconstrained Linear Dimension tool 491
Undo command 411
Undo, preferences for 51
Ungroup command 445, 727
Units
customizing for a drawing 67
for line thicknesses 88
in dimensions 498
in imported DXF/DWG files 627
setting options for a drawing 64

using for measurements 510

Units command 64
Unlock command 69, 435, 725
Unrotate 3D Objects command 440
Unshaded Polygon command 479
Update All Viewports command 722
Update Plug-in Objects command 8
Update Selected Viewports command 722
Updating Vectorworks xii, 52

V
VBvisual plant
adding 751
default resources for 3D plants 174
VBvisual Plant tool 752
Vector locks 157
VectorCaching preference 49
VectorScript
creating custom selection scripts 685
creating custom tool/attribute scripts 686
creating scripts from scratch 688
deleting scripts 690
description of 685
duplicating scripts 690
editing scripts 689
encrypting scripts 691
exporting 600
importing script palettes 204, 692
importing scripts 598, 690
moving scripts to new palettes 691
opening scripts 691
renaming scripts 690
running scripts 688
stopping scripts on warnings 51
VectorScript Plug-in Editor command 188
Vectorworks
converting previous version files 10
exiting 15
exporting previous version files 601
installing xi
resetting saved settings 52
serial number for xi, 52
updating xii, 52
Vectorworks Preferences command 47
Vertical constraints
Constrain Horiz-Vertical tool 166

Index |
Constrain Vertical Distance tool 164
Vertices
adding to a polygon or polyline 309
adding to a roof 590
adding to a wall 559
changing to control points 308
moving on 2D objects 311
moving on a NURBS surface 404
reducing in NURBS 384
removing 309
selecting 404
shearing with 320
View bar 18
setting active class with 119
setting active layer with 110
Viewports, sheet layer
adding annotations and dimensions to 715
advanced properties of 708
ambient lighting options for 708
annotating objects with filled polygons 267
caching rendering and radiosity images 59, 789, 795
creating from a design layer 702
creating with a crop object 705
cropping existing 714
editing an associated design layer 711
moving and editing 710
overriding class properties 719
overriding layer properties 716
properties of 706
showing other objects while editing 49
status display 709
transferring attributes between 278
updating 721
Views
aligning for all design layers 727
changing with Fit to Objects command 464
changing with Rotate 3D View command 457
changing with Rotate View tool 456
changing with Set 3D View command 459
changing with Translate View tool 455
changing with Walkthrough tool 454
deleting saved 121
description of 2
editing saved 123, 124
opening saved 124
panning 28
preference for centering automatically 50
refreshing with Pan tool 29
saving 121

875

setting with Renderworks Camera tool 460

switching to next and previous 466
using standard 449
Visibility of classes and design layers, setting 125
Visualization palette command 811
Volumetric Properties command 403

W
Walkthrough tool 454
Wall Join tool 561
Wall styles, purging unused 420
Wall tool 542
Walls
adding 3D peaks to 559, 590
applying textures by class 775
applying textures with basic mapping 762
attributes by class 545
automatically joining 48, 549
changing elevation of 559
changing length of 558
changing round wall radius 561
changing texture orientation on 761
creating 541
creating components for 550
creating from a polygon 553
creating polygons from 556
creating polylines from 556
creating roofs from 582
default resources for hatches 174
default resources for textures 174
deleting components from 553
direction of 549
editing components in 552
editing properties of 557
editing symbols in 573
editing symbols to create 3D holes 574
hiding components at lower scales 59
inserting 2D symbols into 37, 39, 193
inserting symbols in (dragging and dropping) 568
inserting symbols in (Duplicate Array command) 567
inserting symbols in (Duplicate Symbol in Wall
tool) 565
joining 320, 561
joining to pillars 555
moving symbols in (2D Selection tool) 569
moving symbols in (Move by Points tool) 570, 573
moving symbols in (Move command) 570
moving symbols in (nudging) 569

876

| Index

preferences for 543

removing 3D peaks from 560
removing breaks from 561
reshaping 558
round 548
straight 542
trimming 316
Weather effects 756
Wheel-mouse
panning with 29
scrolling with 32, 48
zooming with 30, 48
Wide flange tool 540
Wide Perspective command 452
Windows, dormer 591
Wireframe 452, 789
Wireframe command 478
Workgroup folders (Vectorworks preference) 58
Workgroup references
correcting broken links 134
creating and editing (layer import) 130
deleting 137
description of 128
editing referenced resources 136
opening referenced files 137
priorities of multiple files 132
setting referencing options 129
updating from master files 133
using resources from master files 134, 181
Working plane
aligning objects to 644
appearance of 636
changing appearance of 72
deleting position 643
description of 635
manipulating 639
mirroring objects across 442
renaming position 643
rotating 639
saving position 643
setting location of 637
showing axis labels 142
showing Z axis 142
switching to previous positions 642
view and modes 644
Working Planes palette 642
Worksheets

adding rows or columns to 655, 657

creating a blank worksheet 650
creating with Create Report command 647
cutting, copying, and pasting cell contents 655
deleting rows or columns from 657
displaying database item 659
editing cell contents 654
entering data in database rows 670
entering data in spreadsheet cells 665
error codes 667
exporting data from 682
formatting cells of 660
formula syntax for 666
functions of 674
importing data into 681
keys for moving around in 652
list of commands for 656
merging cells 662
moving a copy of rows and columns 655
moving rows and columns 655
opening existing 651
placing on drawing 652, 683
preferences for 657
printing 658
recalculating 656
resizing rows and columns 654
retrieving record information in a row 674
selecting cells in 653
selecting objects using database rows 673
sorting columns in 659
summarizing identical items in 659
using cell references in formulas 669
zooming 657
Worksheets command 651
Workspace editor
context menus 825
menu and command shortcuts 823
overview of 821
palette and tool shortcuts 826
snapping and mode shortcuts 829
Workspace Editor command 821
Workspaces
creating and editing 821
duplicating 821
exporting to text file 823
features of 15
migrating custom 830

Index |

Z
Z and delta Z values for design layer 106
Zoom command 657
Zoom tool 31
Zooming
interactive 32
marquee 31
preference for line thickness 49
with Fit to Objects command 464
with Fit to Page Area command 465
with the mouse wheel 30, 48
with the View bar 20, 30
with the Zoom tool 31

877

878

| Index